Salesforce Release Notes

Drive customer success with Agentforce 2.0

Salesforce, Spring ’25

Last updated: January 14, 2025

© Copyright 2000–2025 Salesforce, Inc. All rights reserved. Salesforce is a registered trademark of Salesforce, Inc., as are other

names and marks. Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
CONTENTS

Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

How to Use the Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Get Ready for the Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Monthly Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Release Note Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
How and When Do Features Become Available? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Salesforce Overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Release Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Commerce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Data Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Einstein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Experience Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Field Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Hyperforce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Industries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Marketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
MuleSoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Omnistudio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Revenue Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Salesforce CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Salesforce Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Salesforce for Slack Integrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Security, Identity, and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Work.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Other Salesforce Products and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Legal Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
SALESFORCE SPRING ’25 RELEASE NOTES

The Spring ’25 release helps you increase productivity with new innovations, including Agentforce 2.0, where humans with agents drive
customer success together.

IN THIS SECTION:
How to Use the Release Notes
Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features. We include setup information, tips to help
you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success.
Get Ready for the Release
Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for
what’s coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often.
Release Notes for Features Released Monthly
For some products, Salesforce releases features and enhancements more frequently than three times per year. Find out what’s new
and read more about these features, as often as monthly, in the seasonal release notes.
Release Note Changes
Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.
How and When Do Features Become Available?
Some features in Spring ’25 affect all users immediately after the release goes live. Consider communicating these changes to your
users beforehand so that they’re prepared. Other features require direct action by an administrator before users can benefit from
the new functionality.
Supported Browsers
Supported browsers for Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
Salesforce Overall
Learn about new features and enhancements that affect your Salesforce experience overall.
Release Updates
Salesforce periodically provides release updates that improve the performance, logic, security, and usability of our products. The
Release Updates page provides a list of updates that can be necessary for your organization to enable. Some release updates affect
existing customizations.
Analytics
Analytics enhancements include new and updated features for Lightning reports and dashboards, Data Cloud reports and dashboards,
CRM Analytics, Intelligent apps, and Tableau.
Commerce
Get your store up and running faster with simplified product import and configuration, store branding, and translation features.
Boost conversions and elevate the shopping experience with engaging store pages, flexible search options, and an improved checkout
flow. Keep customers coming back with easy-to-configure promotions and coupons, customizable messages, and the new Orders
Dashboard that helps you analyze and adapt to customer trends.
Customization
Sort by multiple columns, easily manage roles and permission sets, and work more efficiently thanks to enhancements to list views
and related lists. Manage included permission sets in permission set groups via summaries.

1
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes

Data Cloud
Ingest, harmonize, unify, and analyze streaming and batch data with Data Cloud. Then use that data to unlock meaningful and
intelligent experiences across Customer 360 applications and beyond.
Development
Whether you’re using Lightning components, Visualforce, Apex, or Salesforce APIs with your favorite programming language, these
enhancements help you develop amazing applications, integrations, and packages for resale to other organizations.
Einstein
Supercharge your workforce efficiency with predictive and generative AI.
Experience Cloud
Enhanced LWR sites are now generally available. Create enhanced LWR sites and CMS workspaces, or upgrade existing sites to the
enhanced framework. You can also customize your site URLs to remove the /s at the end. In security updates, use trusted sites while
the content security provider is in strict mode, switch to single domain certificates for Salesforce CDN, and enjoy improvements to
the identity experience. Upgrade your Aura record components to the LWR framework to see improved performance and style, and
provide a seamless experience between apps by linking files from your LWR site to Salesforce.
Field Service
See what’s new in Field Service to help your team deliver on performance and customer service.
Hyperforce
Hyperforce is now available in more regions, including Israel and Osaka, Japan, expanding global data residency options. Hyperforce
Assistant’s instructions for automated pre-upgrade checks are clearer. Access to Hyperforce outbound IP addresses has been made
more convenient. Hyperforce Premium products offer new capabilities. Out of Region Disaster Recovery provides additional data
protection and business continuity. The Scale Test feature allows for high-traffic scenario simulations in sandbox environments. The
Swiss Operating Zone offers a new avenue to address Swiss data residency requirements.
Industries
Salesforce introduces a range of enhancements to streamline operations and improve productivity across industries. Einstein
Generative AI simplifies daily tasks across various sectors, including clean energy program suggestions in Energy and Utilities Cloud
and benefit applicant household overviews in Public Sector Solutions. Asset Management helps streamline inventory processes and
orchestrate real-time actions on assets. Automotive Cloud simplifies vehicle appraisals and loan negotiations, while Consumer Goods
Cloud enhances field operations with advanced geofencing and VS Code-based app customization. Financial Services Cloud brings
significant enhancements to business relationship plans, portfolio management, and wealth management, and Global Promotions
Management introduces coupon codes and milestone-based promotions. Health Cloud improves financial management, scheduling,
provider searches, and request processing, and Life Sciences Cloud streamlines pharmacy benefits verification and enrollments in
financial assistance programs. Manufacturing Cloud enhances run-rate business with revenue management features, while Net Zero
Cloud aligns disclosures and compliance workflows with CSRD guidelines. Salesforce for Education drives student engagement with
Agentforce. We also bring exciting changes in Insurance, Media Cloud, Nonprofit Cloud, Communications Cloud, and other
industry-specific features.
Marketing
Salesforce offers three marketing products: Account Engagement (formerly known as Pardot), Engagement (formerly known as
Marketing Cloud), and Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced editions.
MuleSoft
Use the MuleSoft Anypoint Platform suite of products to connect and integrate apps, systems, and data across your enterprise.
Streamline operations by building and automating processes with clicks instead of code. You can design, develop, govern, and share
APIs and integration apps and host them in the cloud or on-premises.

2
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes

Mobile
User Opt-In Biometric Login is now generally available in Mobile Publisher. Customize your Experience Cloud app's security alerts
with new fields and use newly supported download methods. There are also upgrades to the Salesforce mobile app and Briefcase
Builder.
Omnistudio
Use Omnistudio with the Salesforce Lightning Design System 2 (SLDS 2) template for a refreshed user interface. OmniAnalytics is
now enabled for guest users on Experience Cloud by default. Access customers' saved session information to create context-driven
communications on your sites. In addition to improving usability, we made a few translation, accessibility, security, and deployment
updates.
Revenue Cloud
Quickly create products by using Deep Clone. Speed up product discovery through faceted search and partial indexing. Improve
Salesforce Pricing by using tools for accurate discounts, troubleshooting, pricing recipes, and optimal strategies. Save and reuse
configurations. Use streamlined rules and dynamic configurations to design bundles faster. Support large, complex deals through
robust quoting, ordering, contracting, and approvals. Manage usage-based products through usage modeling, rate management,
and consumption tracking. Integrate Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts to streamline reviews, configure file formats, enhance
workflows, and extract data from images by using multimodal processing. With Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator, streamline order
processing, automate tasks, track fulfillment changes, and manage ramp deal orders. Customize and optimize billing by using flexible
invoice schedules, PDF generation, error reduction, multi-currency support, and automated journal entries.
Sales
Boost your sales teams’ results with new features across Sales Cloud. Help your account teams collaborate, strategize, and succeed
with more efficiency and accountability with enhancements to Account Plans. Manually upload video recordings to Einstein
Conversation Insights to get key insights and action items for meetings from external sources. Forecast your consumption-based
business. Customize the mobile app with Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience. And plan quotas that reflect ramp-up time
and seasonal sales patterns in Quota Planning.
Salesforce CMS
Classify CMS content with content taxonomy, then tag content to create dynamic collections. Clone content and save it to a shared
workspace. Deliver content from any CMS workspace to any public or restricted channel, and remove more types of channels from
enhanced CMS workspaces.
Salesforce Flow
Compose intelligent workflows with Flow Builder and Flow Orchestration. Build approval orchestrations with automated approvals.
Integrate across any system with Flow Integration.
Salesforce for Slack Integrations
Use Slack and Salesforce together to connect with customers, track progress, collaborate seamlessly, and deliver team success from
anywhere.
Security, Identity, and Privacy
Log in to Salesforce with your email address with the Log In with Email button on login.salesforce.com. Deliver convenient login
experiences with headless user discovery. Use an external client apps to configure Salesforce as a SAML single sign-on identity
provider. Use external auth identity providers to centralize your OAuth configurations for outbound callouts under named credentials.
Define more HTTP status codes to refresh access tokens. Monitor details of Transaction Security Policy triggering events, and keep
tabs on key certificate information. Monitor transactional database tenant secrets. To adopt the latest content security policy directives
via a new release update, update your trusted URLs. A release update ends redirections for legacy host names in production and
demo orgs, and another .
Service
Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click of a Button (Generally Available). Monitor Real-time Conversations Between Agentforce
Service Agents and Customers. Integrate Knowledge with Data Cloud.

3
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How to Use the Release Notes

Work.com
Prepare your business, employees, and facilities. Respond to major events, such as the current COVID-19 crisis, with the apps and
services in Work.com.
Other Salesforce Products and Services
Get the latest information on these new features.
Legal Documentation
We made seasonal updates to Salesforce Legal Documents.

How to Use the Release Notes

Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features. We include setup information, tips to help you
get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success.
• Your browser’s settings determine the language that you see. To change the language, scroll to the bottom, click Change Language,
and select a language.
• The release notes include details about new and modified features. For information on known issues, visit Salesforce Known Issues.
• Use the table of contents search and filters to zero in on the news that matters the most.

We want to know what works for you and what doesn’t.

• Trailblazer Community—Post your feedback in the Release Readiness Trailblazers group. To help us track and respond to your
feedback, use a hashtag that indicates the release, such as #Spring25Feedback.
• Feedback forms—As you’re working with our documentation in Salesforce Help, release notes, or developer guides, look for the
feedback buttons and vote up or down. Add comments if you have them.
• X— Contact us at @askSalesforce.

Note: Until the new release is available to you, links from release notes to Salesforce Help, implementation guides, developer
guides, and other documentation don’t work. And sometimes the links point to material from the previous release.
Some of our documentation has preview versions available several weeks before the release. To access a preview version on
Salesforce Developers, select Preview from the Documentation Version dropdown list.

4
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Get Ready for the Release

Get Ready for the Release

Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what’s
coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often.

Spring ’25 Highlights for Admins

Check out this video for a preview of key features for admins in Spring ’25. This video goes live the week of January 6, 2025.

Watch a video

Release Readiness Essentials

• Release Readiness Trailblazers. Access resources and experts for all things release readiness.
• Trust Status Maintenances. See sandbox and other release dates and times. To see your maintenance dates, click Instances and
your instance.
• Sandbox Refresh Calculator. Plan if and when to refresh your sandboxes.
• Sandbox Preview Video. Learn how to navigate the sandbox preview process.
• Sandbox Preview Instructions. Get early access to new features in your sandbox.
• Certification Release Maintenance Schedule. Keep your certification updated in Trailhead.
• Prepare for Salesforce Releases. Use Trailhead to create your release strategy.

Release Notes for Features Released Monthly

For some products, Salesforce releases features and enhancements more frequently than three times per year. Find out what’s new and
read more about these features, as often as monthly, in the seasonal release notes.
As you explore this content, keep these considerations in mind.
• Monthly release notes aren’t the same as release notes for delayed features. Sometimes, a feature released seasonally is subject to
a slight delay. When that happens, the timing is explained in the “When” section of that feature’s release note.
• New monthly release notes aren’t the same as changes to previously published release notes. Sometimes, we need to update
previously published release notes for the current seasonal or monthly release. When we make those updates, we list the specific
change in the “Release Notes Changes” topic.
• Sometimes, monthly releases coincide with seasonal releases. When that happens, we identify related release notes by the first full
month of the seasonal release. These features are available when Salesforce rolls out the release to your instance.

Example: Spring releases begin rolling out to customer instances in mid-January. Release notes for features released in January
or February are linked to from the corresponding topic.

IN THIS SECTION:
January ’25 Release
Learn about features released in January ’25. Features included in the January ’25 monthly release become available when Spring
’25 rolls out to your instance.

5
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes January ’25 Release

January ’25 Release

Learn about features released in January ’25. Features included in the January ’25 monthly release become available when Spring ’25
rolls out to your instance.
• Einstein Features
• Einstein Platform

Release Note Changes

Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.

IN THIS SECTION:
January 14, 2025
January 13, 2025
December 31, 2024

January 14, 2025

IN THIS SECTION:
Service Updates

Service Updates
Ingest Third-Party Bot Conversation History into the Service Console by Using an API
Updated the release note to reflect that this feature is not part of the initial Spring ’25 release and may be included at a later date.
Mass Delete User Information to Comply with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) Guidelines by Using an API
Updated the release note to reflect that this feature is not part of the initial Spring ’25 release and may be included at a later date.

January 13, 2025

IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Overall Updates
Analytics Updates
Customization Updates
Hyperforce Updates
Industries Updates
Revenue Updates
Sales Updates
Security, Identity, and Privacy Updates
Service Updates

6
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes January 13, 2025

Salesforce Overall Updates

Lightning Adoption Apps Are Being Retired
Clarified that the retirement date applies to orgs on Spring ’25 and later.
Added January 13, 2025.
Say Hello to Agent for Setup, Your Sidekick for Admin Tasks on page 230
Updated the release note to reflect that this feature is not part of the initial Spring '25 release and may be included at a later date.
Added January 13, 2025.
Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record Pages on page 237
Updated the release note to reflect that this feature is not part of the initial Spring '25 release and may be included at a later date.
Added January 13, 2025.

Analytics Updates
Push Data from Government Cloud with Output Connectors on page 115
Added release note detailing the supported output connectors.

Customization Updates
Removed: Let Sales Reps Research Accounts More Easily
This feature isn’t ready, so we’re removing it for now. We’ll let you know when it’s back up.
Sort List Views by Multiple Columns (Generally Available)
Clarified that until the sort list views by multiple columns feature is generally available for an org, a user can still enable the beta
version of the feature.
Added January 13, 2025.

Hyperforce Updates
Swiss Operating Zone
Updated the When statement.

Industries Updates
Improve Readability and Clarity of Financial Account Party Record Names
Added a release note about the change in the auto-generated prefix for the financial account party record name.

Revenue Updates
Connect REST APIs
Added release notes to announce the new resources and updated request and response bodies available with Product Catalog
Management.
New Connect REST API Resources
Added a release note to announce the new Invoice Estimated Tax Calculation (POST) resource available with Billing.

7
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes December 31, 2024

Sales Updates
Removed: Enhance Your Sales Strategy by Researching Accounts
This feature isn’t ready, so we’re removing it for now. We’ll let you know when it’s back up.
Allowlist the Required Domain for Salesforce Inbox
Added a release note about allowlisting a required domain for email integration with Salesforce Inbox.

Security, Identity, and Privacy Updates

Unlock Full Database Encryption in Hyperforce (Generally Available)
This feature isn’t quite ready for broad use, so we’re removing it for now. We’ll let you know once it’s back up.
Apply Database Encryption to Sandboxes (Beta)
This feature isn’t quite ready, so we’re removing it for now. We’ll let you know once it’s back up.
Update Your Trusted URLs for the Latest CSP Directives (Release Update)
Removed a statement that the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations list is only available in Lightning Experience.
Diagnose Failed Redirections Faster on page 612
Removed a statement that the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations list is only available in Lightning Experience.
Log In with Your Email Address on page 593
Updated the release note to reflect that this feature is not part of the initial Spring '25 release and may be included at a later date.

Service Updates
Delete Salesforce Provisioned AWS Resources Automatically When You Delete a Contact Center on page 650
Added link to Knowledge Article.
Updated: Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click of a Button (Generally Available)
Clarified the supported editions in the Where section of the release note.
Turn On Lightning Article Editor and Article Personalization for Knowledge (Release Update)
Removed this release note because the features were automatically enabled in the previous release.
Added Stay Updated on Bring Your Own Channel Terminology on page 645
Added this release note to acknowledge terminology updates.

December 31, 2024

Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes
Published preview release notes.

How and When Do Features Become Available?

Some features in Spring ’25 affect all users immediately after the release goes live. Consider communicating these changes to your users
beforehand so that they’re prepared. Other features require direct action by an administrator before users can benefit from the new
functionality.

Supported Browsers
Supported browsers for Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.

8
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Supported Browsers and Devices for
Lightning Experience

Supported Browsers and Devices for

Salesforce Classic

Supported Browsers for CRM Analytics

Salesforce Overall
Learn about new features and enhancements that affect your Salesforce experience overall.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
General Enhancements

Add the New Setup Domain

Prepare for Upcoming Restrictions on

Salesforce Cookie Use

Monitor Your Usage of Sales and Service

Cloud Agents with Digital Wallet

Cloudfront Is Replacing Akamai as the

Lightning CDN Partner

Allow the Required Domain for Maps

and Location Services

Redirect to a Newly Created Record

Track Salesforce Platform Login License

Overages in Your Org

Lightning Adoption Apps Are Being

Retired

Enjoy Salesforce’s Refreshed Visual Style

with Themes for SLDS 2 (Beta)

Enable LWC Stacked Modals (Release

Update)

Verify Your Return Email Address for

Sender Verification (Release Update)

9
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Explore Salesforce Products In-Depth
with Product Detail Pages in the Your
Account App

Choose Contact Details when

Requesting a Call from Your Salesforce
Account Executive

Get Personalized Suggestions in Setup

Einstein Search

Customize Explicit Filters in Search

Manager

Advanced Lookup Search Has an

Updated UI

Salesforce Foundations

Build Engaging Web Pages and Forms

with Salesforce Foundations

Unlock AI Agents with Salesforce

Foundations

Other Changes in Salesforce

Foundations

Lightning Console

Benefit from Better Lightning Console

Performance with Deferred Inactive
Workspace Page Loading

Salesforce Data Pipelines

Get More Representative Sample Data

in Recipes from Local Salesforce
Connections

Preview Random Samples from Datasets

in Recipes

Improved Data Preview in Recipes

Secure Salesforce External Connections

with OAuth 2.0

Monitor Dataflow and Recipe Deletions

in the Audit Trail

10
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Run Sequential Recipes Faster in
Encrypted Orgs

Give Users Read-Only Access to Recipes

(Generally Available)

Push Data from Government Cloud with

Output Connectors

Improve Salesforce External Connector

Sync Performance with Incremental
Syncs (Beta)

Load Data Incrementally (Beta)

Salesforce Scheduler

Book and Pay Easily with Payment

Integration

Salesforce Archive

Save on Storage and Boost Performance

with Salesforce Archive (Generally
Available)

Analytics
Analytics enhancements include new and updated features for Lightning reports and dashboards, Data Cloud reports and dashboards,
CRM Analytics, Intelligent apps, and Tableau.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Unified Analytics Experiences

Add Assets to Collections in Bulk

Run More CRM Analytics Dashboard

Subscriptions Per Hour in Slack

Reports and Dashboards

Delivered Idea: Do More with Custom

Report Types (Generally Available)

Keep Charts Consistent with Reordered

Report Data

11
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Choose Which Dashboard Widgets to
Refresh (Beta)

Designate One Email Address to Send

Report Subscription Notifications (Beta)

Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

Define Filters on Aggregate Values in

Data Cloud Reports

Highlight Min and Max Aggregates for

Date Fields (Generally Available)

Create a Semantic Data Model Report

with a Single Click (Beta)

Default Behavior When Creating a

Semantic Data Model Report Has
Changed (Beta)

Analyze Logical View and Semantic

Union Metrics in Data Cloud Reports
(Beta)

Categorize Semantic Model Records

with Bucket Columns (Beta)

Assess Semantic Data Model Records

with Advanced Formulas (Beta)

CRM Analytics

Analytics Experience and Visualizations

See More Color Contrast in Donut and

Stacked Bar Charts

Use Version Control When Saving

Dashboard Component Changes

Unify Your Data Across Dashboards

Enhance Your Dashboards with

Customizable Tooltip Colors

Data Integration

Get More Representative Sample Data in

Recipes from Local Salesforce Connections

Preview Random Samples from Datasets in

Recipes

12
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Improved Data Preview in Recipes

Secure Salesforce External Connections with

OAuth 2.0

Monitor Dataflow and Recipe Deletions in

the Audit Trail

Run Sequential Recipes Faster in Encrypted

Orgs

Control Access to Data Based on a User’s

Assigned Territories (Generally Available)

Give Users Read-Only Access to Recipes

(Generally Available)

Push Data from Government Cloud with

Output Connectors

Improve Salesforce External Connector Sync

Performance with Incremental Syncs (Beta)

Load Data Incrementally (Beta)

Tableau

Marketing Cloud Intelligence

Accessibility Enhancements in Analytics

Commerce
Get your store up and running faster with simplified product import and configuration, store branding, and translation features. Boost
conversions and elevate the shopping experience with engaging store pages, flexible search options, and an improved checkout flow.
Keep customers coming back with easy-to-configure promotions and coupons, customizable messages, and the new Orders Dashboard
that helps you analyze and adapt to customer trends.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Commerce Store Pages

Edit Product Details with Fewer Clicks

Enhance the Shopping Experience with the

Redesigned Address Page

13
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Provide Complete Order Details on the
Order Confirmation Page

Translate Your Store in Minutes

Experience Improved D2C Store

Performance

Create and Manage Product Attributes from

Your Store Settings

Commerce Components

Brand Your Store Faster with the Enhanced

Website Design Workspace

Do More with the New Banner Component

Build Multilevel Navigation Menus with the

Mega Menu Component for D2C Stores

Add Color Variations to the Product Detail

Page

Commerce Cart, Checkout, and Shipping

Collect a Shipping Phone Number During

Checkout

Address Fields Autocomplete on All Store

Pages

Improve the User Experience for Shipping

to Multiple Addresses

Jump to the Top or Bottom of the Cart Items

List with One Click

Improve the Shopping Experience with

Enhanced Cart and Checkout Performance

Commerce Promotions

Create a Promotion Based on Specific

Product Variations

Create Coupons Using a Guided Workflow

Commerce Search

Offer Shoppers Relevant Search Suggestions

Boost Product Discovery with the Enhanced

Variation Display

14
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Additional Commerce Features

Sell and Manage Digital Subscriptions in B2B

and D2C Stores (Generally Available)

Analyze Order Trends on the Commerce

Orders Dashboard

Get Notified When a Customer Abandons a

Shopping Cart

Send a Customized Welcome Email to New

Users

Streamline Product Imports in the Enhanced

Workspace

Add Variations During Product Creation

Connect Your Custom Domain to Your Store

from the Commerce App

Customize and Extend Commerce Messages

Using Flow

Share Knowledge Articles with Your

Customers

Omnichannel Inventory

Import Inventory in Bulk

Salesforce Order Management

Cancel, Return, and Route Orders

Containing Product Bundles

Cancel Orders in Bulk

Salesforce Payments

Elevate Your Customers’ Shopping

Experience with the Enhanced Pay Now
Store

Capture or Refund Payments in the

Payments Workspace

View Where a Payment Originates from

in the Payments Workspace

15
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Customization
Sort by multiple columns, easily manage roles and permission sets, and work more efficiently thanks to enhancements to list views and
related lists. Manage included permission sets in permission set groups via summaries.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
List Views

Get Improved Performance with the

Enhanced Role List View

Manage Permissions Sets with the

Enhanced List View

View and Filter on More Fields in the

Enhanced User List View

Get Better Performance for List Views

Delivered Idea: Sort List Views by

Multiple Columns (Generally Available)

Delivered Idea: Organize Your Data with

Multi-Column Sorting for Related Lists

Enforce View Roles and Role Hierarchy

Permission When Editing Public List
View Visibility (Release Update)

Simplify Related List Component

Configuration

Edit List Filters Option Is No Longer

Available

Permissions

Delivered Idea: Manage Included

Permission Sets in Permission Set
Groups via Summaries

Delivered Idea: Allow Users to View All

Fields for a Specified Object

The View All and Modify All Object

Permissions Have New Names

Remove User and Custom Permissions

in Permission Set Summaries

Fields

Use Keyboard Shortcuts to Select

Calendar Dates in Salesforce Classic

16
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Capture More Data with the Increased
Limit of Custom Fields for Activities

Troubleshoot a Deployment That

Contains a Custom Field Type
Conversion

Globalization

Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release

Update)

Present Your Custom Functionality in

New English Language Variations

Review Updated Label Translations

Salesforce Connect

Access Data Without Limits with

Salesforce Connect

See Snowflake Views with the Salesforce

Connect SQL Adapter

Sharing

Manage Public Groups More Easily with

Improvements to the Access Summary

Get Notified When Your Sharing Rule

Targets External Users

Enable Secure Roles Behavior and

Update Sharing Group References in
Sandboxes (Release Update)

General Setup

Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record

Pages

Better Understand Your Custom

Metadata Type Usage

Data Cloud
Ingest, harmonize, unify, and analyze streaming and batch data with Data Cloud. Then use that data to unlock meaningful and intelligent
experiences across Customer 360 applications and beyond.

17
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Data Cloud Features Released by Month

Cross Cloud Updates for Data Cloud

Connect Data

Allow Access to All Salesforce CRM

Fields with One Permission

Act on Data

Create Data Cloud Enrichments with

Companion Org Data

Copy Field Enrichments with Multiple

CRM Orgs Sync More Quickly

Display Insights from External Data in

Your CRM Enrichments

Enhance Vehicle Records with Related

List Enrichments

Export Enrichments to a Data Cloud

Sandbox

Development
Whether you’re using Lightning components, Visualforce, Apex, or Salesforce APIs with your favorite programming language, these
enhancements help you develop amazing applications, integrations, and packages for resale to other organizations.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Lightning Components

LWC API Version 63.0

Wire Adapters Have Improved Type

Checking

Update JavaScript Selectors to Remove Extra

Whitespace

Custom Components Must Specify an

API Version

Internal DOM Structure Is Changing for

Base Lightning Components

18
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Lightning Web Security Applies Stricter
Restrictions on iframes

Find Lightning Components Security

Documentation in One Place

API Distortion Changes in Lightning

Web Security

Develop Lightning Web Components

Faster in a Real-Time Preview of Your
Lightning App (Generally Available)

Base Lightning Components Support

for SLDS 2 (Beta)

Resolve Errors Related to Accessing

Referenced Lightning Components

Lightning Design System

Introducing Salesforce Lightning Design

System (SLDS) 2 (Beta)

Validate Your SLDS and SLDS 2 Code

and Get Improvement
Recommendations

Lightning Design System Component

Blueprints Updates

Apex

Delivered Idea: Compress and Extract

Zip Files in Apex (Generally Available)

Delivered Idea: Evaluate Dynamic

Formulas in Apex (Generally Available)

Scale Your Concurrent Long-Running

Apex Requests Limit Based on Number
of Org Licenses

Pause and Resume Scheduled Jobs by

Using Apex

Enforce Reparenting Restrictions for

Master-Detail Relationships in Apex

JSON Serialization for Exception Types

Has Changed

19
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Accept Header Default Value for Apex
Callouts Has Changed

API

Service Protection Changes for

Metadata API Read and Retrieve
Endpoints

Update API Requests to Use Your My

Domain Login URL (Release Update)

Other Improvements to Generating an

OpenAPI Document for sObjects REST
API (Beta)

Service Protection Changes for

Metadata API Read and Retrieve
Endpoints

Get Notified About Bulk API V2 Query

Jobs with Platform Events (Beta)

Salesforce Platform API Versions 21.0

Through 30.0 Retirement (Release
Update)

Development Environments

Data Mask

Use Einstein to Generate Data Mask Custom

Libraries

Set Your Configurations to Automatically

Run Each Time You Refresh a Sandbox

Platform Development Tools

Salesforce CLI

Keep Up with the Latest Salesforce CLI

Enhancements

Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio

Code

Code Builder

Agentforce for Developers

Scalability

20
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Book Sandbox Slots for Peak Load Testing
with Scale Test

Identify Slow Reports, View Decrypted URLs,

and Access Scale Center Deep Links

Optimize Code with ApexGuru

Remove Shift_JIS to Windows-31J

Character Mapping

Salesforce Functions

Salesforce Functions Is Being Retired

AppExchange Partners

AppExchange Developer
Documentation Has Been Updated

Change Data Capture

Receive Change Event Notifications for

More Objects

Platform Events

Discover the Grace Allocation for Daily

Delivered Events for Salesforce Orgs
with an Add-On License

Standard-Volume Platform Events Are

Being Retired

Event Bus

Package and Distribute Event Relays

Einstein
Supercharge your workforce efficiency with predictive and generative AI.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Einstein Features

Einstein Platform

Agentforce

21
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Einstein Copilot for Salesforce is Now
Agentforce

Chat with Agentforce in Your Preferred

Language (Beta)

Build, Test, and Troubleshoot Agents More

Easily with Agent Versions

Say Hello to Agent for Setup, Your Sidekick

for Admin Tasks

New and Changed Standard Agent Topics

and Actions

Einstein Bots

Create Agentforce Service Agents Easily

from Your Einstein Bots (Beta)

Improve Bot Conversations with

Disambiguation (Generally Available)

Control Intent Recognition Enhancements

for Enhanced Bots (Generally Available)

Use Salesforce Records in Bot Conversations

(Generally Available)

Set Bot Variables to Custom Values in Bot

Builder

Einstein Bots Are Available in More Regions

Transition to Generative Knowledge

Answers and Data Cloud

Get More Customer Responses to Static

Option Messaging Components

Control Session Timeout for Bot

Conversations (Beta)

End Messaging for In-App and Web

Conversations Thoughtfully

New Connect REST API Resources for

Einstein Bots (Beta)

Input Recommender (Beta) Is Being Retired

Legacy Chat is Being Retired

Other Changes

22
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record
Pages

Track Generated Content Quality and

Feedback in Flow Builder

Try Out New Recipes for the LLM Open

Connector

Experience Cloud
Enhanced LWR sites are now generally available. Create enhanced LWR sites and CMS workspaces, or upgrade existing sites to the
enhanced framework. You can also customize your site URLs to remove the /s at the end. In security updates, use trusted sites while the
content security provider is in strict mode, switch to single domain certificates for Salesforce CDN, and enjoy improvements to the identity
experience. Upgrade your Aura record components to the LWR framework to see improved performance and style, and provide a
seamless experience between apps by linking files from your LWR site to Salesforce.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Aura and LWR Sites

Upgrade to Enhanced LWR Sites

(Generally Available) (Release Update)

Update the URL of Your LWR Site

Improve LWR Site Performance with

Experience Delivery (Beta)

Work More Efficiently in Experience

Builder with Usability Updates

Components in Experience Builder

Enable a Modernized Record Experience

in Aura Sites (Release Update)

Help Your Site Visitors View Records

More Easily with the New Record List
Component (Beta)

Give Experience Cloud App Users the

Ability to Log In with One Tap

Developer Productivity

Link Files from Your LWR Site to

Salesforce is Generally Available

23
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Develop Lightning Web Components
Faster in a Real-Time Preview of Your
LWR Site (Beta)

Mobile for Experience Cloud

Improve Your Experience Cloud App

with the Latest Features from Mobile
Publisher

Security and Sharing

Use Trusted Sites and Disable Lightning

Locker When CSP Is in Strict Mode

Salesforce No Longer Supports Shared

Domain Certificates for the Salesforce
CDN

Increase the Security of Your Site with

When Managing External Users

Strengthen Your Customer Identity

Implementation with New Features and
Security Updates

Field Service
See what’s new in Field Service to help your team deliver on performance and customer service.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Field Service Einstein

Boost Productivity and Resource

Utilization by Easily Filling Schedule
Gaps with Agentforce

Listen Safely to Pre-Work Briefs with a

Tap of a Button

Get Solutions Easily from Agentforce by

Including Images (not immediately
available)

Work Smarter by Using Siri to

Communicate with Agentforce

24
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Field Service Setup Home

Accelerate Time to Value with Field

Service Setup (Beta)

Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization

Increase Coverage with 24-Hour Availability

for All Service Resources

Enhance Scheduling Flexibility by Assigning

Service Appointments to Individuals or
Crews

Reduce Labor Costs and Increase Resource

Productivity with Consecutive Appointment
Scheduling

Gain Visibility into the Scheduling

History of Service Appointments (not
immediately available)

Renamed Field Service Agent

Permission Set Name and Agent
Persona

Quickly Identify and Manage Empty

Appointment Bundles (not immediately
available)

Field Service Asset Management

View and Manage Asset Components in

Real Time with the Asset Service
Lifecycle Management Add-On

Foresee Future Fixes with the

Connected Assets Add-On

Migrate from Maintenance Plan

Frequency Fields to Maintenance Work
Rules (Release Update)

Field Service Operations

Monitor Field Service Operations with

New Dashboards (Beta)

Customer Engagement

25
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Promote Your Brand During Visual
Remote Assistant Sessions

Find Available Slots More Efficiently

When Booking Appointments with
Appointment Assistant

Mobile

Field Service Mobile App Device

Deprecations

Data Capture

Simplify Mobile Forms with Data Capture

Flow (Generally Available)

Empower Mobile Workers with Data Capture

Forms (Generally Available)

Build Dynamic Forms with Discovery

Framework Data Capture Flow (Generally
Available)

Improve Mobile Worker Productivity with

Discovery Framework Data Capture Forms
(Generally Available)

Gather All the Answers with the Assessment

Variable for Discovery Framework Data
Capture

Automatically Unlock a Suite of

Advanced Features with Lightning Data
Service

Address Asset Issues Proactively with

Asset Service Predictions (Generally
Available)

Manage Service Records Automatically

On the Go

Get Notified When Mobile Workers

Arrive at the Office or Pass by a Work
Facility

Update Field Service Records Quickly

and Easily

Minimize Work Disruptions with

Seamless Updates

26
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Update Service Appointment's En Route
Status On the Go

Spotlight on Field Service Content

Improve Your Scheduling and

Optimization Proficiency with
Revamped Salesforce Help Content

Hyperforce
Hyperforce is now available in more regions, including Israel and Osaka, Japan, expanding global data residency options. Hyperforce
Assistant’s instructions for automated pre-upgrade checks are clearer. Access to Hyperforce outbound IP addresses has been made more
convenient. Hyperforce Premium products offer new capabilities. Out of Region Disaster Recovery provides additional data protection
and business continuity. The Scale Test feature allows for high-traffic scenario simulations in sandbox environments. The Swiss Operating
Zone offers a new avenue to address Swiss data residency requirements.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Access Salesforce in More Regions with
Hyperforce

Improved Instructions in Hyperforce

Assistant

Access Hyperforce Outbound IP Lists

Salesforce Out Of Region Disaster

Recovery

Scale Test

Swiss Operating Zone

Industries
Salesforce introduces a range of enhancements to streamline operations and improve productivity across industries. Einstein Generative
AI simplifies daily tasks across various sectors, including clean energy program suggestions in Energy and Utilities Cloud and benefit
applicant household overviews in Public Sector Solutions. Asset Management helps streamline inventory processes and orchestrate
real-time actions on assets. Automotive Cloud simplifies vehicle appraisals and loan negotiations, while Consumer Goods Cloud enhances
field operations with advanced geofencing and VS Code-based app customization. Financial Services Cloud brings significant enhancements
to business relationship plans, portfolio management, and wealth management, and Global Promotions Management introduces coupon
codes and milestone-based promotions. Health Cloud improves financial management, scheduling, provider searches, and request
processing, and Life Sciences Cloud streamlines pharmacy benefits verification and enrollments in financial assistance programs.
Manufacturing Cloud enhances run-rate business with revenue management features, while Net Zero Cloud aligns disclosures and

27
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

compliance workflows with CSRD guidelines. Salesforce for Education drives student engagement with Agentforce. We also bring exciting
changes in Insurance, Media Cloud, Nonprofit Cloud, Communications Cloud, and other industry-specific features.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Asset Management

Asset Service Lifecycle Management

Work Order Estimation

Service Appointment Booking

Inventory Count

Inventory Replenishment

Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization

Enhancements

Connected Assets

Represent Asset Events by Using a

Predefined Context Definition

Accelerate Actionable Event Orchestration

Implementation with Templates

Streamline Asset Registration Based on

Telematics Events

Schedule Asset Service Appointments Based

on Telematics Events

Automotive Cloud

Trade-In Appraisal Management (Generally Available)

Quickly Initiate Appraisals for Customers and

Prospects

Easily Capture Granular Vehicle Details for

Appraisal

Enhance Valuation Accuracy with Vehicle

Customization Details

Integrate External Sources for Better Vehicle

Valuation

Efficiently Adjust and Approve the Final

Appraisal Value

View Appraisals Related to a Vehicle in a

Single List

28
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Connected Vehicle Enhancements

Create Actionable Event Orchestrations

Faster

Automatically Register Vehicles and Assets

Based on Telematics Events

Automatically Schedule Vehicle Service

Appointments Based On Telematics Events

Vehicle and Asset Lending Enhancements

Find a Different Vehicle for Your Vehicle

Loan or Lease Application

Update the Application Payment Structure

to Generate Better Offers

Easily Track Proposals During Various Stages

of Decisioning

Easily Visualize Vehicle Inventory Search

Results with a Card-Based View

Sync Financial Account Data by Using

Prebuilt Data Streams

Keep Your Financial Data Updated with

Prebuilt Service Processes

Communications Cloud

Enterprise Sales Management

Tailor Quotes with Automatic Member Field

Mapping

Streamline Pricing with Bulk Price

Adjustments in Enterprise Sales
Management

Simplify Pricing with Predefined Adjustment

Codes

Increase Asset-to-Quote Limit in Enterprise

Sales Management Asset Viewer

Improve Performance with Level-Based Item

Retrieval in Enterprise Sales Management
Configuration Cart

29
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Simplify Discount Management with
Advanced Search and Flexible Bundle
Selection

Enhance Global Reach with Multilingual

Support in Enterprise Sales Management

Optimize Bundle Management with

Accurate Product and Attribute Sequencing

Keep Your Catalog and Cart Fresh

Communications Cloud Agent Console

Streamline Customer Support for Service

Issues

Einstein for Communications

Easily Enable Einstein for Communications

from Setup

Track Service Level Objectives and Identify Potential Upsell Opportunities

Use Data Cloud to Proactively Track Service

Level Objectives

Analyze Service Level Objectives and Identify

Opportunities for Upsell

Communications Cloud Sales

Create Quotes for New and Existing

Customers with the Onboard Customer
Flow

Easily Add Multiple Locations to Quotes and

Orders

Browse Product Catalogs and Assign

Products to Locations

Manage Your MultiSite Customer Assets

New Objects in Communications Cloud

Asset Service Lifecycle Management

Consumer Goods Cloud

Retail Execution

Streamline Delivery Execution and Efficiently

Complete Tours

30
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Ensure Visit Integrity with Geofencing and
Time Tracking

Boost Brand Visibilty by Adding Your

Company Logo on Consumer Goods Cloud
Offline Mobile App

Share Visits Is Retired

Usability Improvements for Desktop Orders

Other Improvements in Retail Execution

New and Changed Objects for Retail

Execution

Plan for Windows Server Based

Modeler’s Retirement

Trade Promotion Management

Reduce Time and Effort by Copying Manual

Inputs for Tactics

Retrieve and Audit Account Plan Manual

Inputs

Manage TPM Permission Sets Efficiently

Preview Your Processing Service

New and Changed Objects for Trade

Promotion Management

New and Changed Metadata Types

Energy and Utilities Cloud

Einstein Generative AI for Energy and

Utilities Cloud Enhancements

Improve Case Management with Easy

Access to Case Details

Financial Services Cloud

Business Relationship Plan

Closely Monitor Business Relationship

Planning with Objective Tracking Metrics

Effectively Implement Objectives with

Action Plans

31
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Efficiently Create Measures for Account Plan
Objectives By Using a Guided Flow

Data Cloud for Financial Services Cloud

Keep Client Financial Goals on Track with

Contextual Alerts and Actions

Portfolio Management

Quickly Compare Actual and Target

Allocations

Digital Lending—India

Increase the Efficiency of Your Loan

Approval Workflow

Service Process Automation

Accelerate Retail Banking Service Process

Setup with Prebuilt Templates

Accelerate Wealth Banking Service Process

Setup with Prebuilt Templates

Wealth Management

Boost Productivity with Financial Services

Cloud Embedded AI for Agents

Improve Readability and Clarity of

Financial Account Party Record Names

Discovery Framework

Get Started Faster with Guided Setups

Configure Business Relationship Plans with

Ease by Using Guided Setup

New and Changed Financial Services

Cloud Object Fields

Health Cloud

Disease Surveillance

Enhance Public Health Monitoring

Financial Assistance Program

Enhancements

Home Health Enhancements

32
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Streamline Home Healthcare with
Integrated Quoting and Budgeting
Capabilities

Expedite Your Home Health Setup

Intelligent Appointment Management Enhancements

Verify Prerequisites for Appointments

Optimize Resource Use with Capacity-Based

Scheduling

Schedule Ongoing Care with Recurring

Appointments

Give Patients the Ability to Book Assets

Simplify Scheduling with Enhanced

Appointment Guidance

Pharmacy Benefits Verification

Enhancements

Provider Network Management Enhancements

Streamline Roster File Submission with

Provider Portal Enhancements

Automate Field Mapping with Einstein

Provider Search Enhancements

Automate Patient Services with an AI Agent

Site Management (Pilot)

Utilization Management Enhancements

Make Coverage Requirements Easily

Accessible for Providers

Ensure Submission of Required

Documentation for Prior Authorization
Requests

Author FHIR-Aligned Questionnaires Using

the Enhanced Discovery Framework
Designer

Capture Metrics for Coverage Requirement

Discovery, Documentation Templates and
Rules, and Prior Authorization Requests

33
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Expedite Your Health Cloud Setup

New and Changed Objects in Health

Cloud

Insurance

Insurance

Policy Management

Products

Pricing

Quoting

Rules

New Connect REST APIs in Insurance

New Invocable Actions in Insurance

Insurance (Managed Package)

Transform Insurance Offerings with

Multi-Root Policy Services

Ensure Precision in Pending Payment

Calculations

New Services in Insurance

Life Sciences Cloud

Financial Assistance Program Enhancements

Manage Appeals for Financial Assistance

Program

View the Appeals History of a Rejected

Application

Participant Management Enhancements

Access Recruitment Features on Mobile or

Tablet Devices

Configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter

Automatically with a Toggle

Merge Prescreening and Registration

Omniscripts for a Unified Flow

34
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Refine Search Results by Using Range-Based
Filtering Options

Pharmacy Benefits Verification Enhancements

Boost Representative's Productivity with

Electronic Verification

Site Management (Pilot)

Identify Investigators and Sites for Clinical

Trials by Using Enhanced Search Capabilities
(Pilot)

Create and Deploy Site Feasibility

Assessments (Pilot)

Assign Scores to the Investigators and Sites

for Effective and Faster Site Selection (Pilot)

Accelerate the Site Feasibility Assessment

Process (Pilot)

Tag the Sites and Investigators for Future

Site Selection Efforts (Pilot)

Accelerate Your Site Management

Configurations with a Guided Setup (Pilot)

New and Changed Objects in Life

Sciences Cloud

Loyalty Management

Gamify Member Engagement with

Milestone-Based Promotions

Report Liability Accurately by Tracing

Negative Points Usage

Effectively Track Promotional Points by

Using Currency Subtype

Gather Richer Customer Insights with

the Enhanced Data Kit

Global Promotions Management

Empower Customers and Sales Reps to

Select Promotions by Using Coupons

Accurately Search for Products Using

Enhanced Search Options

35
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Exclude Ineligible Products and Categories
Efficiently

Simplify the Evaluation of In-Store

Promotions

Easily List Accounts Eligible for Promotions

with Campaigns

Easily Select All Eligible Products for a

Promotion Rule

Automate Promotion Data Sync with

Prebuilt Data Streams

Decide How Customers' Data Cloud

Segment is Verified

New and Changed Objects in Loyalty

Management

Manufacturing Cloud

Revenue Management Features for Sales Agreements

Identify Perfect Products for Sales

Agreements from Expansive Catalogs

Drive Sales by Tailoring Product

Configurations to Customer Preferences

Maximize Your Margins with Rules-Driven

Pricing in Sales Agreements

Easily Compare Committed and Fulfilled

Sales of Products with Attributes in Sales
Agreements

Check Product Specifications for Sales

Agreements Without Switching Pages

Renew Sales Agreements with Same

Products and Attributes

Sales Agreements Foundations Enhancements

Calculate Sales Agreement Actuals by Using

Data Processing Engine

Maximize Sales Agreement Profitability with

Cost Visibility

Recalculate Actuals for Future Schedules

36
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Add Multiple Instances of the Same Product
to a Sales Agreement

Easily View the Unallocated Quantity for a

Product

Streamline Your Inventory Counting

Processes

Minimize Stockouts with Automated

Inventory Replenishment

Media Cloud

Advertising Sales Management

Boost Efficiency in Your Advertising Sales

Workflow

Target Granular Audience Segments By

Using Salesforce Data Cloud

Net Zero Cloud

Author Disclosure Reports in Google

Docs

Perform Materiality Assessments and

Score Impacts and Risks and
Opportunities for CSRD Compliance

Streamline CSRD Reporting with

Simplified Setup and Enhanced Features

Find XBRL Tagging Providers to Comply

with CSRD Requirements

Allocate Scorecard Emissions Based on

Spent Amount

New and Changed Objects in Net Zero

Cloud

Public Sector Solutions

Help Caseworkers Quickly Learn About

a Household with Einstein

Enhance Job Applications for Talent

Recruitment Management

Easily Create Personalized Care Plans

for Employees

37
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Quickly Migrate Dynamic Assessments
with Metadata API

Updated Metadata API Type in Public

Sector Solutions

New and Changed Objects in Public

Sector Solutions

Referral Marketing

Enhance Your Promotion’s Reach with

WhatsApp Messages

Choose How to Verify Advocates' Data

Cloud Segments

Sync Referral Marketing Data with

Prebuilt Data Streams

Get Predictions on Contacts' Likelihood

to Refer

New and Changed Objects in Referral

Marketing

Salesforce for Education

Autonomously Answer and Support

Prospective Students

Gain Meaningful Insights with the

Philanthropic Research Agent

Consolidate Information in Student

Records with the Student Management
App

Get More from the Intelligent Degree

Planner and the Learner Progress View

Streamline Advancement-Specific Data

Processing

Drive Comprehensive Prospect Research

Activities

Unlock Deeper Insights with

Generational Categories

Gain Holistic Student Insights and

Visualize Learner Progress

38
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Get a Unified View of Student Data with
Learner Profile

Schedule Appointments Efficiently with

a New Lightning Web Component

Capture Student Sentiment with Icon

Responses in Pulse Checks

Score Applications with Rubrics

Streamline Admissions Reviews with

Stage Management

New and Changed Objects in Education

Cloud

New and Changed Data Model Objects

in Education Cloud

Salesforce for Nonprofits

Nonprofit Cloud

Salesforce for Nonprofits Managed Packages

foundationConnect is Being Retired

Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management

Visualforce-Based Document
Generation Omniscripts Are Being
Retired

Document Generation 1.0 is Being

Retired

Enhance Document Generation with Document Generation 2.0

Migrate and Sync Custom Fonts

Industries Common Features

AI Accelerator and Scoring Framework

Improve Prediction Accuracy by Optimizing

Training and Scoring Data

Action Launcher

Reduce the Cognitive Load of Contact

Center Agents with Recommended Actions

Action Plans

39
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Automate Status Update for Action Plans

Business Rules Engine

Monitor the Usage of Business Rules Engine

Components

Simplify Calculations By Using Transient

Attributes

Easily Activate Expression Set Templates in

a Single Step

Efficiently Configure Context-Based

Expression Sets

Simplify Datetime Retrieval with the New

Date/Time Data Type

Monitor CSV Upload Progress for Decision

Tables

Collections

Manage Collection Activities Efficiently with

Collections Console App

Save Time and Effort with a Preconfigured

Action Launcher Deployment

Create Promise to Pay Agreements Quickly

Offer Additional Payment Options with

Salesforce Pay Now

Automatically Update Payments Received

in Collection Plans and Payment Schedules

Notify Customers of Payment Status

Automatically

Automate Case Creation and Closure for

Collection Plans

Determine Collection Plan Segments with

Business Rules Engine

Create a Prioritized List of Collection Plans

with Actionable Segmentation

Maximize Collections with Request Direct

Debit Action

Import Collections Data with CSV File Import

40
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Streamline Record Creation for Collection
Plan and Related Objects with Composite
Graph API

Create Effective Collection Campaigns with

Collections Data Kit

Get Collections Up and Running with Ease

New and Changed Objects

Compliant Data Sharing

Deactivate Users and Retain Compliant Data

Sharing Participant Records

Context Service

Optimize Performance by Using Reference

Definitions

Simplify Data Population for Nodes and

Attributes

Conveniently Store Temporary Changes to

Attributes

Efficiently Manage Context Instances by

Using Context Actions in Flows

Increase Database Efficiency with

Polymorphic Fields

Effortlessly Sync Extended Context

Definitions

Easily Generate Tags for Attributes

Easily Clone a Context Mapping

Conveniently Map Context Definitions to

Data Model Objects

New Object in Context Service

Cross-Object Field History (Beta)

Track Changes Across Related Objects with

Cross-Object Field History (Beta)

Data Processing Engine

Automate Your Field Mapping with Einstein

41
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Perform Bulk Transformations with Data
Cloud

Ensure Data Integrity for the Writeback of

Transformed Data

Troubleshoot Composite Writeback or CSV

File Ingestion

Changed Object in Data Processing Engine

Discovery Framework

Save Discovery Framework Assessments as

Drafts to Complete Later

Einstein Autofill (Beta)

Boost Efficiency and Customer Satisfaction

with Einstein Autofill (Beta)

Fundraising

Scale Your Fundraising Efforts by

Autogenerating Outreach Source Codes

Understand Donor Impact by Using Soft

Credit Rollups

Automatically Receive Fundraising Rollup

Calculation Updates

Delivered Idea: Customize Summary

Displays

Enhance Donor Segmentation

Delivered Idea: Improve Donor Relations

and Track the Impact of Gifts

Create and Manage Pledges in Bulk

Customize Sources and Destinations for RFM

Scoring

Streamline Advancement-Specific Data

Processing

Drive Comprehensive Prospect Research

Activities

Gain Insight Through Generational Cohorts

and Graduation Status

42
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
New and Changed Objects and Fields for
Fundraising

Grantmaking

Delivered Idea: Save Time by Bulk-Assigning

Grant Application Reviews

Streamline Grantmaking Processes with

Stage Management

Enter Multiple Grant Funding Results in

Experience Cloud

Delivered Idea: Share Funding

Disbursements

Changed Objects for Grantmaking

Group Membership and Households

Receive Change Event Notifications for More

Objects

Easily Find Contacts for Party Relationship

Groups

Industries Configure, Price, Quote (CPQ)

Detect and Resolve Duplicate Offers During

Hierarchical Catalog Compilation

Configuring and Pricing Bundles for

Anonymous User

Support for Offer Specification

Ensure Seamless Promotion Management

Across Digital Commerce and Standard CPQ

Process Large Promotion Bundles

Seamlessly in Standard Digital Commerce

Automate Cache Cleanup with Lifecycle

Management

Simplify MACD (Move, Add, Change, Delete)

Journeys with Guided Transform Multiplay

Integrate Salesforce Pricing with Standard

Digital Commerce APIs

Sync Product and Promotion Launch Dates

Across Time Zones

43
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Integration Solutions with MuleSoft

Save and Reuse Connection Settings When

You Enable MuleSoft Integrations

Integration Solutions with MuleSoft Video

Omnistudio Document Generation

Process More Batch Server-Side Document

Generation Requests with Increased Limits

Document Generation 1.0 is Being Retired

Enhance Document Generation with

Document Generation 2.0

Enrich Server-Side Document Generation

with Dynamic Images

Outcome Management

Create Multiple Indicator Results

Program and Case Management

Delivered Idea: Create Custom Care Plan

Goals

Delivered Idea: Clone Care Plan Templates

Improve Accuracy and Compliance with

Stage Management

Set a Default Status for Program Enrollments

Updated Objects for Program and Case

Management

Record Rollup Definitions

Aggregate Tasks and Events with Record

Rollup Definitions

Delete Record Rollup Definitions

Provide More Meaningful Names and

Descriptions to Your Record Rollup
Definitions

Stage Management

Manage Parent and Child Stage Transitions

Declaratively

44
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Clone and Customize Stage Definitions

Define Key Checkpoints with Milestones

Automate Step Definition Execution

Marketing
Salesforce offers three marketing products: Account Engagement (formerly known as Pardot), Engagement (formerly known as Marketing
Cloud), and Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced editions.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Marketing Cloud

Reach More People with WhatsApp

Save Time with New AI Capabilities for

Campaigns and Content

Create Campaigns with Agentforce

Campaign Designer (Beta)

Personalize Emails Consistently with

Reusable Personalization Settings and
Expressions

Reach the Right Customers with

Enhanced Audience Tools

Connect Experiences on External Sites

Extend Your Marketing with Enhanced

Messaging Tools

Get More Flexibility and Visibility with

Campaigns and Flows

Create and Manage Content More

Efficiently

Get Started Faster with Setup

Enhancements

User Interface Updates in Marketing

Cloud

Marketing Cloud Account Engagement

45
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Get Helpful Resources for Enabling
Marketing Cloud

Automate Account Engagement Data

Stream Creation in Data Cloud

Expedite Content Creation by Copying

Assets to CMS via API

Streamline Content Creation by Copying

Additional Asset Types to CMS

Get More Visibility into Email Send

Issues

Generate Account Engagement Content

in More Languages

Prepare for End of Support for Enhanced

Email Experience

Marketing Cloud Engagement

Personalization

Einstein Personalization Is Now Called

Personalization

Explore the Enhanced Web

Personalization Manager

Define Custom Objectives for

Recommendations

Use Scheduling Rules for Decisions

Test the Effectiveness of Personalized

Experiences

Use Only Authenticated Endpoints

When Accessing Data Cloud

View Recommender Training Status and

Refresh History

Track and Evaluate Visitor Engagement

Through Attribution

Visualize the Customer Journey with the

Attribution Dashboard

Personalize Business Processes and

Screens with Flow

46
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Mobile
User Opt-In Biometric Login is now generally available in Mobile Publisher. Customize your Experience Cloud app's security alerts with
new fields and use newly supported download methods. There are also upgrades to the Salesforce mobile app and Briefcase Builder.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Salesforce Mobile App

Everything That’s New in the Salesforce Mobile App

Malware Detection Security Policy for

Android is Being Retired

Send Attachments in Messaging on the

Salesforce Mobile App

Mobile Publisher

Download Files Your Way in Mobile

Publisher for Experience Cloud

Remove Unwanted /s Elements in Older

Experience Cloud LWR Site URLs

Set Up Opt-In Biometric Login for Fast

and Secure Experience Cloud App
Logins (Generally Available)

Customize Mobile Publisher Android

App Permission Requests to Post
Notifications

Customize the Style of Your Experience

Cloud App's Security Alerts

General Mobile Updates

Assign Briefcases to Users by Profile

Do More with Seller-Focused Mobile

Experience

Validate Mobile Lightning Web

Components with ESLint Rules

Reduce Mobile Performance Issues with

the Salesforce Extensions Pack

Accept On-Site Payments with

Tap-to-Pay

47
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Omnistudio
Use Omnistudio with the Salesforce Lightning Design System 2 (SLDS 2) template for a refreshed user interface. OmniAnalytics is now
enabled for guest users on Experience Cloud by default. Access customers' saved session information to create context-driven
communications on your sites. In addition to improving usability, we made a few translation, accessibility, security, and deployment
updates.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Explore Omnistudio's Refreshed Visual
Style with SLDS 2

Integrate Guest User Data on Experience

Cloud with OmniAnalytics

Use Omniscript Saved Sessions in Emails

and Email Templates

Save Costs and Time with Built-In

Translations for Omniscripts and
Flexcards

Seamlessly Enable Omnistudio

Metadata in Scratch Orgs by Updating
the Org Shape File

Upgrade to a Secure Node.js Version for

OmniOut

Securely Deploy Omnistudio

Components by Using the Latest
Versions of Build Tool and Node.js

Accessibility Enhancements in
Omnistudio

Other Improvements in Omnistudio

Deprecation and End of Support for

AngularJS-Based Omniscripts

Omnistudio Minor Releases

Revenue Cloud
Quickly create products by using Deep Clone. Speed up product discovery through faceted search and partial indexing. Improve Salesforce
Pricing by using tools for accurate discounts, troubleshooting, pricing recipes, and optimal strategies. Save and reuse configurations.
Use streamlined rules and dynamic configurations to design bundles faster. Support large, complex deals through robust quoting,
ordering, contracting, and approvals. Manage usage-based products through usage modeling, rate management, and consumption
tracking. Integrate Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts to streamline reviews, configure file formats, enhance workflows, and extract
data from images by using multimodal processing. With Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator, streamline order processing, automate tasks,

48
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

track fulfillment changes, and manage ramp deal orders. Customize and optimize billing by using flexible invoice schedules, PDF
generation, error reduction, multi-currency support, and automated journal entries.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Product Catalog Management

Accelerate Product Creation with Deep

Clone

Define Decimal Values for Product

Quantity

Update Product Index Quickly with

Partial Index Rebuilds

Enhance Product Discovery with Faceted

Search

Changed Objects in Product Catalog

Management

Connect REST APIs

New and Updated Connect REST API

Resources

Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies

Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies

Salesforce Pricing

Add Context Tags Automatically to Your

Pricing Elements

Apply Discounts Accurately by Using the

Discount Distribution Service Element

Determine the Right Price for a Product

by Combining Multiple Outputs

Troubleshoot Pricing Errors with the

Pricing Operations Console

Streamline Line Item Tagging

Delete Pricing Recipes

Enhance Flexibility with New Data Types

in Assignment Element

Simplify Line Item Mapping

New and Changed Objects in Salesforce

Pricing

49
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Product Configurator

Create Quotes and Orders Faster by

Saving and Reusing Configurations

Create Precise Configurations with

Decimal Quantity Support

Design Product Configurations Faster

With Product Classes and Flexible Rules

View More Products at Once with

Compact Mode in Product Configurator

Find Products in a Large Bundle Easily

Show More Details About Your Products

with Customized Product Cards

Set Up Complex Product Validation

Rules Easily by Using Advanced
Configurator

Configure Complex Products Accurately

with Constraint Models

New Configurator Flow Component

Fields

Transaction Management

Amend Evergreen Subscriptions on Any

Date

Create Precise Quotes and Orders with

Decimal Quantity Support

Negotiate Tiered Volume Adjustments

and Prices by Using Contract Pricing

Unlock More Flexibility with Line Item

Level Pricing Contracts

Specify Pricing Agreement Type

Contracts for Quotes and Orders

Track Pricing Agreement Contracts

Easily

Organize Quote and Order Line Items

into Groups with Ease

50
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Enhance Transparency with Custom
Fields on Usage-Based Products

Enable Usage Selling on Experience

Cloud Sites

Receive Email Notifications for Approval

Submissions

Manage Advanced Approvals Through

Email

Create Quotes and Orders Fast with

More Responsive Pages

Create Complex Quotes and Orders

New and Changed Objects in

Transaction Management

Usage Management (Generally Available)

Usage Modeling

Define Sellable Products and Usage

Resources

Define Units of Measure to Quantify Usage

Resources

Track and Rate Usage Consumption with

Product Usage Grants

Define Refresh Policies for Usage Resources

Manage Unused Usage Grants Effectively

Define Usage Aggregation Methods and

Periods

Manage Grants for Sellable Products

Rate Management

Optimize Usage Costs with Predefined

Negotiable Rating Elements

Manage the Lifecycle of Rate Card Entries

Effectively

New and Changed Objects in Rate

Management

Consumption Management

51
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Enhance Reporting with On-Demand
Summary Generation

Calculate Rates for Usage Summaries on

Demand

Streamline Billing with Enhanced Liable

Summary Generation

Wallet Management

Manage Wallets for Usage Resources

New Objects in Usage Management

Salesforce Contracts

Use a Guided Setup to Easily Integrate

Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts

Enhance Privacy with a Discreet External

Review Process

Specify Attachment Format During

Document Check-In

Manage Custom Fonts for Consistent

Document Branding

Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

Prioritize Orders for Processing

Optimize Fulfillment Efficiency with

Staged Assetization

Manage Dependencies Across Related

Fulfillment Plans

Define Rules to Assign Manual Tasks

Track Your Fulfillment Step Changes

Configure Future Dated Steps

Decompose Orders with Decimal

Quantities

Fulfill Ramp Deal Orders

New and Changed Objects in Dynamic

Revenue Orchestrator

Billing

52
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Manage Bulk Invoicing Efficiently with
the New Invoice Scheduler Features

Suspend and Resume Billing for

Accounts and Billing Schedule Groups

Preview Upcoming Invoices to Get

Billing Estimates

Update Billing Parameters Any Time

During the Customer Lifecycle

Generate Invoices on Demand for

Accounts and Orders

Create Invoices from Internal or External

Data

Streamline Invoice Due Dates with

End-of-Month Payment Terms

Accurately Bill Amended or Canceled

Evergreen Subscriptions

Align Billing Subscriptions with Early

Renewal

Make Billing for Rampable Products

More Efficient

Simplify Financial Accounting by

Capturing Transaction Amounts in
Corporate Currency

New and Changed Objects for Billing

New Platform Events for Billing

Changed Metadata Types

Connect REST APIs

New Connect REST API Resources

Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies

Sales
Boost your sales teams’ results with new features across Sales Cloud. Help your account teams collaborate, strategize, and succeed with
more efficiency and accountability with enhancements to Account Plans. Manually upload video recordings to Einstein Conversation
Insights to get key insights and action items for meetings from external sources. Forecast your consumption-based business. Customize

53
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

the mobile app with Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience. And plan quotas that reflect ramp-up time and seasonal sales patterns
in Quota Planning.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Agentforce for Sales

Agentforce Sales Coach

Coach Sales Reps at Scale with Agentforce

Sales Coach

Enhance Agentforce Sales Coach Responses

with a Data Library

Scale Your Sales Funnel with Agentforce

SDR

Monitor Agentforce Sales Coach and

SDR Usage with Digital Wallet

Sales Cloud Go

View and Assign Permission Sets and

Monitor Usage in Sales Cloud Go

Sales Fundamentals

Accounts

Track Progress Toward Sales Account Plan

Objectives More Easily

Delivered Idea: Coordinate Your Sales

Team’s Activities with More Transparency

Discover Untapped Selling Opportunities

Activities

Take Advantage of the Increased Custom

Field Limit for Activities

Einstein Conversation Insights

Identify Coachable Moments from

Recorded Video Calls with Einstein
Conversation Insights

Use Generative AI in All Languages

Supported by Einstein Conversation
Insights

Use Call Explorer in Flows

Sales Engagement

54
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Find Your Next Customer with
Prospecting Center, a new Data Cloud
App

Change Einstein Activity Capture

Permissions for Sales Engagement Basic
Users (Release Update)

Salesforce Forecasting

Collaborative Forecasts Is Now Pipeline

Forecasting

Improve Pipeline Forecast Visibility with

Manager Judgments on Opportunity
Splits

Forecast Your Consumption-Based

Business

Pipeline Inspection

Get an Improved User Experience in

Pipeline Inspection List View

Close Date Predictions Has Been Retired

Sales Programs, Partner Tracks, and In-App Guidance

Sales Programs and Partner Tracks with Enablement

Empower Your Sales Leaders with

Enablement Analytics

Take Full Control of Your Enablement

Settings with One Switch

In-App Guidance

Deliver In-App Guidance Quickly with

Managed Packages

Sales Performance Management

Sales Planning

Plan Accurate Quotas That Account for

Ramp and Seasonality

Publish Quota Plans to Pipeline Forecasting

Design Sales Strategies with a More Intuitive

Experience

55
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Other Improvements Within Sales
Performance Management

Salesforce Maps

Simplify Activity Tracking and Reimburse for

Qualified Travel Distances

The Enhanced User Experience Is Now

Standard

New Permission Set for Communications

with Hyperforce

Email, Calendar, and Integrations

Einstein Activity Capture

Upgrade Your Service Account Connections

to Org-Level OAuth 2.0 Authentication

Outlook Integration

Maintain Access to the Outlook Integration

Gmail Integration

Use Agentforce with Your Gmail Integration

Increase Efficiency by Using the Gmail

Integration in the Chrome Side Panel

Salesforce Inbox

Allowlist the Required Domain for Salesforce

Inbox

Salesforce for Outlook Is Being Retired

in December 2027

Partner Relationship Management

Expand and Maintain Shared Business

with Trusted Partners

Sales Cloud Everywhere

Access Your Records Easily in

Everywhere

Sales Cloud on Mobile

Prepare for Meetings Without Opening

Your Laptop

56
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Customize Seller-Focused Mobile
Experience (Beta)

Other Changes in the Sales Cloud

Einstein Automated Contacts Is Being

Retired in February 2025

Salesforce CMS
Classify CMS content with content taxonomy, then tag content to create dynamic collections. Clone content and save it to a shared
workspace. Deliver content from any CMS workspace to any public or restricted channel, and remove more types of channels from
enhanced CMS workspaces.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Classify CMS Content with Content
Taxonomy

Streamline Content Management with

Automated Tag-Based Conditions

Save Time with Content Record Cloning

in Your Shared Enhanced CMS
Workspaces

Scale Content Delivery for High

Performance

Deliver Content from Any CMS

Workspace to Any Public or Restricted
Channel

Remove More Types of Channels from

Enhanced CMS Workspaces

Salesforce Flow
Compose intelligent workflows with Flow Builder and Flow Orchestration. Build approval orchestrations with automated approvals.
Integrate across any system with Flow Integration.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Flow Builder

57
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Flow Builder Updates

Screen Flow Updates

User Experience Updates

Get Help Building Flows Faster and More

Accurately with Einstein (Generally
Available)

Generate a Detailed Description of a Flow

with Einstein

Get Help Creating Flow Formulas with

Einstein (Generally Available)

Join Collections with the Transform Element

Send Emails with Attachments in Flow

Builder

Retrieve More Information from Data Cloud

by Using Newly Supported Data Types

Launch an Active Autolaunched Flow as a

Subflow Within a Prompt Flow

Enhance Flow Performance by Controlling

the Number of Records Retrieved with Get
Records

Flow for Marketing Cloud

Automate Your Responses to Common

Customer Actions with More Automation
Events

Pick a Winning Path, Test Subsets of your

Audience, and More in the Path Experiment
Element

Define Your Own Flow Trigger by Using

Real-Time Data from Data Cloud

Personalize Your Flows with Access to Data

Cloud Data in More Elements

View Metrics in Flow Builder with Embedded

Analytics

Preview and Test WhatsApp Messages

Debug Automation Event-Triggered Flows

58
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Flow Debugging

Debug Flows at a Glance with the Improved

Debugging Experience

Flow Runtime

Flow and Process Run-Time Changes

Flow Management

Copy Data Cloud-Triggered Flows from

Sandbox to Production

Monitor All Failed and Paused Flow

Interviews from the Automation Lightning
app

Flow Extensions

Design Component Errors for a Better

Experience

Flow and Process Release Updates

Enable Secure Redirection for Flows (Release

Update)

Enforce Permission Requirements Defined

on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs
(Release Update)

Enforce Rollbacks for Apex Action

Exceptions in REST API (Release Update)

Enhance Flexibility and Reusability in

Prompt Flows (Release Update)

Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record

Values in Process Builder (Release Update)

Restrict User Access to Run Flows (Release

Update)

Sort Apex Batch Action Results by Request

Order (Release Update)

Flow Orchestration

Customize Email Notifications for

Interactive Steps

View Improved Orchestration Run

Details

59
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Other Improvements

Flow Approval Processes

Assign Approval Steps to Groups or

Queues

Send Notifications to Approval Users

Reply to Emails to Approve or Reject

Approval Work Item

MuleSoft for Flow: Integration

Enhance Data Exchange with

Third-Party Connectors

Manage External System Integrations

in the Connections Tab

Trigger Flows from External Systems

Map Flow Fields to Fields in Third-Party

Systems

MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce

Security, Identity, and Privacy

Log in to Salesforce with your email address with the Log In with Email button on login.salesforce.com. Deliver convenient login
experiences with headless user discovery. Use an external client apps to configure Salesforce as a SAML single sign-on identity provider.
Use external auth identity providers to centralize your OAuth configurations for outbound callouts under named credentials. Define
more HTTP status codes to refresh access tokens. Monitor details of Transaction Security Policy triggering events, and keep tabs on key
certificate information. Monitor transactional database tenant secrets. To adopt the latest content security policy directives via a new
release update, update your trusted URLs. A release update ends redirections for legacy host names in production and demo orgs, and
another .

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Domains

Update References to Legacy Host

Names (Release Update)

Disable Redirections for Legacy Host

Names

60
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Trailhead Playgrounds Use Salesforce
Edge Network

Identity and Access Management

Log In with Your Email Address

Delivered Idea: Brand the Welcome

Email for Internal Users

Use Multi-Factor Authentication for

Password Reset

Password Reset Link Stays Valid After

Multiple Clicks

Control Access to the setPassword() API

More Easily

Give Headless App Users More Ways to

Log In

Troubleshoot Errors with the Headless

Registration Apex Handler

Issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-Based

Access Tokens in Hybrid OAuth Flows

Manage Sessions Associated with JSON

Web Token (JWT)-Based Access Tokens

Additional Session Is Established When

a User Logs In to the UI

GET Requests with Access Tokens in the

URL Query String Are Blocked for the
Single Access Endpoint

Enjoy Usability Improvements for Token

Exchange Setup

Integrate Single Sign-On Service

Providers with the External Client Apps
Framework

Triple DES Encryption Is No Longer

Supported for SAML Single Sign-On

Verify SAML Integrations (Release

Update)

Migrate to a Multiple-Configuration
SAML Framework (Release Update)

61
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Enable Embedded Login

Named Credentials

Simplify OAuth Configurations with

External Auth Identity Providers

Refresh Access Tokens for Named

Credentials with More HTTP Status
Codes

Privacy Center

Process the User Object with Privacy

Policies

Bypass Triggers and Validation Rules

While Processing Records

Salesforce Shield

Event Monitoring

Query Low-Latency Event Data with Event

Log Objects (Generally Available)

Correlate Logs with a Custom Request

Identifier

Access All Event Monitoring Data with One

Permission Set

Monitor Content Security Policy (CSP)

Violations

Dig into Details About Blocked Redirections

Shield Platform Encryption

Bring Your Own Data Encryption Keys for

Search Indexes

Encrypt Data Cloud Search Indexes

Used Named Principal Authentication with

Cache-Only Keys

Security Center

Monitor Certificates Across Your

Salesforce Landscape

62
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Track your Transactional Database
Encryption status with the Existing
Encryption Policies metric

Discover More Ways to Optimize

Security Center

Streamline Navigation with New Icons

Policy Center

Manage Privacy and Security Policies in

Policy Center

Other Changes

Update Your Trusted URLs for the Latest

CSP Directives (Release Update)

Diagnose Failed Redirections Faster

Locate the Source of Content Security

Policy (CSP) Violations and Blocked
Redirections

Secure Cross-Cloud Integrations Across

Asia with Private Connect

Service
Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click of a Button (Generally Available). Monitor Real-time Conversations Between Agentforce
Service Agents and Customers. Integrate Knowledge with Data Cloud.

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Agentforce for Service Cloud

Agentforce Service Agent

Monitor Real-time Conversations Between

Agentforce Service Agents and Customers
(Release Update)

Flag Supervisors to Help with Agentforce

Service Agent Conversations

Agentforce Service Agent is Now ASA

Messaging in Digital Wallet

63
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Enhance User Search Experience by Using
Context-Driven Conversations with
Agentforce Service Agent

Chat with Agentforce Service Agent in

Japanese (Beta)

Agentforce Service Planner

Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click

of a Button (Generally Available)

Einstein for Service

Einstein Conversation Mining

Gain Insights from Customer Conversations

in More Languages

Mine Insights from Voice Conversations

Einstein Reply Recommendations

Customize Service Replies for Email in

Prompt Builder

Einstein Work Summaries

Enjoy Rich Text and Additional Supported

Languages in Conversation Catch-Up

Get a Quick Overview of a Case and Ongoing

Developments with Case Summaries (Beta)

Employee Service

Simplify Information Access, Service

Requests, and Networking with Alumni
Portal

Experience Improved Clarity with the

Renamed Employee Hub and HR Service
Workspace Features

Equip Service Representatives with

Historical Context by Rapidly Deploying
a Preconfigured Timeline

Efficiently Create Employee Records by

Using CSV File Import

Showcase Actions and Simplify

Navigation with Navigation Tiles

64
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Ascertain that Important Information
Reaches Employees with CMS Collection

Streamline Employee Life Events with

Employee Enablement Program

Conveniently Comment on Cases By

Using the Case Management Bot

Improve Accountability with Enhanced

Approval Capabilities

Improve Employee Service by Managing

Feedback with Feedback Management

Manage Workday Employee Data by

Using Prebuilt MuleSoft Integrations

Changed Object in Employee Service

Service Data Kit

Add More Service Data to Data Cloud

for Greater Insights

Service Insights

Reduce Costs and Improve Operations

with Service Insights

Channels

Email

Enjoy Improved Flexibility When Refining

Automated Emails

Omni-Channel Flow for Email-to-Case Is

Now Invoked Synchronously

Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email

Threading Behavior (Release Update)

Transition to the Lightning Editor for Email

Composers in Email-to-Case (Generally
Available) (Release Update)

Messaging

Customize the Style of Text Message

Bubbles in Messaging for In-App and Web

Warn End Users Before Automatically

Inactivating Their Messaging Session

65
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Messaging on the Mobile App to Include
Attachments

Blur Potentially Harmful Content Sent to

Service Reps in Attachments

Help Customers Contact You During a

Service Downtime in Messaging for In-App
and Web

More Customers Can End a Messaging

Session in Messaging for In-App and Web

Notify End Users When a Salesforce Org

Migration Happens in Messaging for In-App
and Web

Expand the Scope of Messaging for In-App

and Web Engagement with Supported File
Types

Start a Messaging Session from a Contact,

Account, or Lead Record

Conversation Catch-up for Messaging to

Include Rich Text and Additional Supported
Languages

Collect Date Information from End Users in

Secure Forms

The Enhanced Messaging Component Gets

a Style Update

Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with

Einstein Article Recommendations for
Messaging (Pilot)

Customize the Size of Your Customer-Facing

Chat Window

Use a Custom Font on Your Messaging

Window

Insert Messaging Components in Service

Rep Text Boxes and Send Messages on Their
Behalf Using Lightning Console Methods

Improvements to Existing Lightning Console

APIs

66
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Remove All Messaging Components from
a Web Page by Using an API

Ingest Third-Party Bot Conversation History

into the Service Console by Using an API

Mass Delete User Information to Comply

with General Data Protection Regulation
(GDPR) Guidelines by Using an API

Optimize Business Processes Based on the

Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time Messages
(Pilot)

Get Added Support for Reply Messages in

LINE

Save Time with Automated Outbound

Messages for LINE

Streamline User Interactions with

Auto-Populated Language Data

Use Rich Link Format in Enhanced LINE Links

Bring Your Own Channel

Voice

Route Work Items Through a Single System

with Unified Routing for Voice (Pilot)

Use Omni-Channel Routing with Automatic

Queue and User Sync During Disaster
Recovery

Manage Call Actions from Your Headset

Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with

Einstein Article Recommendations (Pilot)

Customize Softphone Options to Support

Call Handling Compliance

Use Desk Phones Without Another Audio

Device

Delete Salesforce Provisioned AWS

Resources Automatically When You Delete
a Contact Center

Leverage Customized Usernames for

Contact Centers

67
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Use External ID for Provisioning Role for
Additional Security

Get the Latest Enhancements for Your

Amazon Connect Contact Center

Optimize Business Processes Based on the

Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time
Conversations (Pilot)

Updated Format of Usage Details Field in

Amazon Connect Usage and Amazon Lex
Reports

Conversation Catch-Up Offers Additional

Supported Languages

Manage Capacity via Status-Based Capacity

for Voice (Beta)

Display Voice Call Audio Statistics in Real

Time Using the Service Cloud Voice Toolkit
API

Dissociate Voice Call Recordings from Voice

Calls

Focus on Primary Tasks by Using Voice in an

App with Standard Navigation (Beta)

Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All

Intelligence Signal Types (Release Update)

Knowledge

Create Advanced Approval Processes

for Knowledge Articles

Revise Knowledge Articles for Grammar

and Readability with Einstein
Knowledge Edits (Generally Available)

Leverage Data Cloud Connectors to

Ingest Knowledge Articles

Sync Knowledge with Data Cloud

Unify Knowledge with MindTouch

Connector

Get More Done in the Lightning Article

Editor

68
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Open Ingested Article Links from
Third-Party Sources in Salesforce

Sync Options Enhanced for Your

Knowledge Base

Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration

Tool (Release Update)

Alert Agents to Knowledge Articles with

Einstein Knowledge Creation Async
Notification

Entitlements and Milestones

Boost Rep Productivity and Reporting

Accuracy by Automating Milestone
Completion with Flows

Optimize Data Analysis, Reporting, and

Decision Making with the Case
Milestones Report Type

Self-Service

Resolve User Search Queries Faster by

Using Context-Driven Conversations
with Agentforce Service Agent

Routing

Reassign Work Items from Service

Channels

Manage Your Workforce More Efficiently

with Agentforce

Perform Actions from More Flow Types

Increase Rep Productivity with

Omni-Channel Sidebar

Other Enhancements for Routing Work

to Agentforce Service Agents

Eligible Salesforce Orgs Automatically

Upgraded to Enhanced Omni-Channel

Route Voice Calls with Other Channels

by Using Omni-Channel (Pilot)

Use Status-Based Capacity with Voice

(Beta)

69
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Supported Browsers

Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Feedback Management

Improve Data Gathering with Partial

Survey Responses

Customize NPS Question Labels for

Better Relevance

Access Customer Feedback Directly from

the Messaging Sessions Page

Customer Experience Intelligence

Unify Customer Data for a Holistic

Profile

Extract Product Insights from Customer

Interactions

Enhance Data Quality by Restricting the

Length of Key Phrases

Improve Customer Experience with

Email Insights

Optimize Engagement Efficiency by

Analyzing Interactions Across Products

Boost Productivity by Creating Multiple

Cases Simultaneously

Get a Comprehensive Summary of

Customer Engagement, Experience, and
Data

Service Adoption

Discover More Service Capabilities with

My Service Journey (Generally Available)

Supported Browsers
Supported browsers for Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.

IN THIS SECTION:
Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience
Lightning Experience is available in multiple editions. Specific browsers and devices are supported, and there are limitations and
considerations for third-party browser extensions and JavaScript libraries. We recommend using the Salesforce mobile app on mobile
devices.

70
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience

Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic

Salesforce Classic doesn't support mobile browsers, so we recommend using the Salesforce mobile app when working on mobile
devices.
Supported Browsers for CRM Analytics
Supported browsers for CRM Analytics include those supported for Lightning Experience.

Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience

Lightning Experience is available in multiple editions. Specific browsers and devices are supported, and there are limitations and
considerations for third-party browser extensions and JavaScript libraries. We recommend using the Salesforce mobile app on mobile
devices.
For the latest information on supported browsers and devices for Lightning Experience, see Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning
Experience

Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic

Salesforce Classic doesn't support mobile browsers, so we recommend using the Salesforce mobile app when working on mobile devices.
For the latest information on supported browsers and devices for Salesforce Classic, see Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce
Classic.

Supported Browsers for CRM Analytics

Supported browsers for CRM Analytics include those supported for Lightning Experience.

Salesforce Overall
Learn about new features and enhancements that affect your Salesforce experience overall.

IN THIS SECTION:
General Enhancements
Spring ’25 gives you more reasons to love Lightning Experience.
Einstein Search
Customize your search results in the Search Manager to show the results that users want. Find data easily with enhanced Advanced
Lookup.
Salesforce Foundations
Take advantage of a limited set of capabilities to try out autonomous AI Agents. Generate more leads with custom pages and forms.
Save time on campaign and store management with new layouts and preconfigured options.
Lightning Console
Gain improved performance with fewer extra page loads.
Salesforce Data Pipelines
Get a better view of a recipe’s outcome with new features for building sample data and examining content in recipe previews.
Monitor dataflow and recipe deletions in the Audit Trail.

71
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Enhancements

Salesforce Scheduler
Add support for payments to Salesforce Scheduler.
Salesforce Archive
Get to know Salesforce Archive.

General Enhancements
Spring ’25 gives you more reasons to love Lightning Experience.

IN THIS SECTION:
Add the New Setup Domain
Ensure that Setup pages in Lightning Experience load content correctly when browsers block third-party cookies. If your users have
general access to the internet, no action is required. If your company controls users’ or servers’ access to the internet through firewalls
or allowlists, your IT department must add *.salesforce-setup.com to the company’s list of allowed domains. Salesforce
Setup pages are now hosted on that domain.
Prepare for Upcoming Restrictions on Salesforce Cookie Use
To support users that block third-party cookies, test custom functionality and code that uses a Salesforce session cookie. To test,
enable the My Domain setting, “Require first-party use of Salesforce cookies.” Salesforce plans to enforce that setting in a future
release.
Monitor Your Usage of Sales and Service Cloud Agents with Digital Wallet
Monitor more of your Agentforce usage for Sales and Service Cloud with Digital Wallet, an account management tool for
consumption-based features. Now, on the Digital Wallet homepage, the Conversations consumption card summarizes your org’s
combined usage of Agentforce Sales Coach and Agentforce SDR (Sales Development Rep) along with ASA Messaging (formerly
Agentforce Service Agent - Inbound). Additionally, Digital Wallet’s Consumption Insights page offers a breakdown of your combined
Agentforce usage by time period to help you detect trends over time.
Cloudfront Is Replacing Akamai as the Lightning CDN Partner
All new and existing orgs automatically migrate from the content delivery network (CDN) partner Akamai to the partner Cloudfront.
If your company's firewall only lets through specific domains, add *.static.lightning.force.com to the allowlist.
Allow the Required Domain for Maps and Location Services
Maps and location services use Google Maps to display maps on standard address fields, enable creation of Visualforce maps, and
help users enter new addresses with autocomplete. To use these features, add *.forceusercontent.com to the allowlists
for your network, firewalls, and proxies. Previously, that domain was erroneously included in the list of domains used only in orgs
without enhanced domains.
Redirect to a Newly Created Record
When you create a new record by using a quick action, you can now quickly redirect to the newly created record by clicking default
or custom toast messages. Previously, on desktop, you could only click the default toast message to be redirected to the newly
created record.
Track Salesforce Platform Login License Overages in Your Org
You can keep track of Salesforce Platform Login users who exceed the number of custom objects that they’re allowed on the System
Overview page. Click the number next to Salesforce Platform Login Users Over Custom Object Limit to download a CSV file of the
user names and the custom objects that they created.

72
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Enhancements

Lightning Adoption Apps Are Being Retired

Lightning Adoption apps, including Lightning Experience Transition Assistant, Lightning Experience Configuration Converter, and
Lightning Experience Readiness Check, are scheduled for retirement on January 10, 2025. After the retirement date, you can no
longer use Lightning Adoption apps in orgs on Spring ’25 and later.
Enjoy Salesforce’s Refreshed Visual Style with Themes for SLDS 2 (Beta)
Create custom themes that represent your brand with all the benefits of Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS 2), or select the
new built-in SLDS 2 theme, Salesforce Cosmos. To find the perfect fit, you can easily switch between SLDS and SLDS 2 themes. In-app
guidance and visual cues ensure that you always know which SLDS version you’re working in. Previously, the enhanced Lightning
user interface setting in User Interface Settings controlled enablement of SLDS 2.
Enable LWC Stacked Modals (Release Update)
As part of the Salesforce internal migration from Aura to LWC, more modals in Lightning Experience now render using LWC. This
update provides improved performance, especially when working with a large number of fields on a record create or edit modal.
You can now also use Dynamic Forms in a modal that's opened from a Create from Lookup field on most LWC-enabled record pages.
When you enable this update, you can expect minor changes to modal behavior. This update was first available in Summer ’24.
Verify Your Return Email Address for Sender Verification (Release Update)
After Spring ’25, to comply with increased email security standards, you’re required to verify the Email Address in My Email Settings.
Explore Salesforce Products In-Depth with Product Detail Pages in the Your Account App
Get more details about Salesforce products so that you can make more informed purchase decisions in the Your Account app.
Choose Contact Details when Requesting a Call from Your Salesforce Account Executive
Now when you request a call from your Salesforce Account Executive regarding a Salesforce product, you can confirm your contact
information, choose the contact method, and add details about your request. Get ready for a more productive conversation about
the products you’re exploring.
Get Personalized Suggestions in Setup
Get relevant suggestions just for you, right where you work in Setup. Suggested for You makes personalized recommendations
based on the products you have and how you and others in your company work.

Add the New Setup Domain

Ensure that Setup pages in Lightning Experience load content correctly when browsers block third-party cookies. If your users have
general access to the internet, no action is required. If your company controls users’ or servers’ access to the internet through firewalls
or allowlists, your IT department must add *.salesforce-setup.com to the company’s list of allowed domains. Salesforce Setup
pages are now hosted on that domain.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.
When: We're using a staggered rollout to move the Setup pages to the *.salesforce-setup.com domain. The rollout began
in Spring ’24 and continues through Spring ’25. The change is first enabled in sandboxes and nonproduction orgs and then in production
orgs.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: New Setup Domain Rollout FAQ
Knowledge Article: Understand How Google's Privacy Sandbox Initiative Impacts Salesforce
Salesforce Help: Test the Impact of Blocked Salesforce Session Cookies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

73
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Enhancements

Prepare for Upcoming Restrictions on Salesforce Cookie Use

To support users that block third-party cookies, test custom functionality and code that uses a Salesforce session cookie. To test, enable
the My Domain setting, “Require first-party use of Salesforce cookies.” Salesforce plans to enforce that setting in a future release.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Group, Essentials, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Test the Impact of Blocked Salesforce Session Cookies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: Visualforce Limitations in Salesforce Classic When Third-Party Cookies are Blocked

Monitor Your Usage of Sales and Service Cloud Agents with Digital Wallet
Monitor more of your Agentforce usage for Sales and Service Cloud with Digital Wallet, an account management tool for
consumption-based features. Now, on the Digital Wallet homepage, the Conversations consumption card summarizes your org’s
combined usage of Agentforce Sales Coach and Agentforce SDR (Sales Development Rep) along with ASA Messaging (formerly Agentforce
Service Agent - Inbound). Additionally, Digital Wallet’s Consumption Insights page offers a breakdown of your combined Agentforce
usage by time period to help you detect trends over time.
Where: Digital Wallet is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. SDR is available in Lightning Experience
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Setup for agents is available on the desktop site. Sales Coach is available in Lightning
Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. ASA Messaging is part of Service Cloud Usage Billing and is available in
Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
Who: Digital Wallet is available to users with the View Consumption user permission or Your Account access. SDR is available with the
Agentforce SDR add-on. Sales Coach is available to users with the Agentforce Sales Coach add-on. Service Cloud Usage Billing is available
to users with the Conversation add-on.
How: To get started with Digital Wallet, see Access Digital Wallet. To get started with Agentforce SDR, see Set Up Agentforce SDR. To
get started with Agentforce Sales Coach, see Setting Up Agentforce Sales Coach.

74
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Enhancements

Cloudfront Is Replacing Akamai as the Lightning CDN Partner

All new and existing orgs automatically migrate from the content delivery network (CDN) partner Akamai to the partner Cloudfront. If
your company's firewall only lets through specific domains, add *.static.lightning.force.com to the allowlist.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.

Allow the Required Domain for Maps and Location Services

Maps and location services use Google Maps to display maps on standard address fields, enable creation of Visualforce maps, and help
users enter new addresses with autocomplete. To use these features, add *.forceusercontent.com to the allowlists for your
network, firewalls, and proxies. Previously, that domain was erroneously included in the list of domains used only in orgs without enhanced
domains.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the mobile app in
Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Provide Maps and Location Services (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Allow the Required Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Redirect to a Newly Created Record

When you create a new record by using a quick action, you can now quickly redirect to the newly created record by clicking default or
custom toast messages. Previously, on desktop, you could only click the default toast message to be redirected to the newly created
record.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Mobile in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.

75
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Enhancements

Track Salesforce Platform Login License Overages in Your Org

You can keep track of Salesforce Platform Login users who exceed the number of custom objects that they’re allowed on the System
Overview page. Click the number next to Salesforce Platform Login Users Over Custom Object Limit to download a CSV file of the user
names and the custom objects that they created.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Platform Login License Details (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Lightning Adoption Apps Are Being Retired

Lightning Adoption apps, including Lightning Experience Transition Assistant, Lightning Experience Configuration Converter, and
Lightning Experience Readiness Check, are scheduled for retirement on January 10, 2025. After the retirement date, you can no longer
use Lightning Adoption apps in orgs on Spring ’25 and later.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Retirement of Lightning Adoption Apps

Enjoy Salesforce’s Refreshed Visual Style with Themes for SLDS 2 (Beta)
Create custom themes that represent your brand with all the benefits of Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS 2), or select the new
built-in SLDS 2 theme, Salesforce Cosmos. To find the perfect fit, you can easily switch between SLDS and SLDS 2 themes. In-app guidance
and visual cues ensure that you always know which SLDS version you’re working in. Previously, the enhanced Lightning user interface
setting in User Interface Settings controlled enablement of SLDS 2.
Where:

Note: SLDS 2 themes is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.
SLDS 2 is enabled in new and existing Starter and Pro Suite orgs by default. It’s enabled in new Sales orgs across all editions and in select
new Service orgs. For more information about when SLDS 2 becomes available in your new and existing orgs, see Salesforce Cosmos
Theme Availability in Salesforce Help.
Not all Salesforce apps support SLDS 2. If an app or area of Salesforce doesn’t support SLDS 2, it’s displayed with SLDS styling even when
SLDS 2 is activated. For example, areas such as CRMA, Setup, and some builders still use SLDS styling.
How: From Setup, search for and select Themes and Branding. To create a custom SLDS 2 theme, click New Theme, then configure
and activate the theme. To use the built-in SLDS 2 theme, from the Salesforce Cosmos theme dropdown list, select Activate. When you
activate an SLDS 2 theme, you also enable SLDS 2 for your org.
To switch to SLDS, activate a theme without a badge next to the theme name. To create an SLDS theme, from the New Theme dropdown
list, select New SLDS 1 Theme, then configure and activate the theme. When you activate an SLDS theme, you enable SLDS for your
org.

76
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Enhancements

Some themes and branding features are unavailable in SLDS 2 due to accessibility implications, such as background color and background
image. Existing built-in and custom themes built on SLDS aren’t migrated to SLDS 2. To recreate an existing SLDS custom theme with
SLDS 2, from the Themes and Branding page, click New Theme and manually rebuild the theme.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Brand Your Org in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SLDS: Salesforce Lightning Design System

Enable LWC Stacked Modals (Release Update)

As part of the Salesforce internal migration from Aura to LWC, more modals in Lightning Experience now render using LWC. This update
provides improved performance, especially when working with a large number of fields on a record create or edit modal. You can now
also use Dynamic Forms in a modal that's opened from a Create from Lookup field on most LWC-enabled record pages. When you
enable this update, you can expect minor changes to modal behavior. This update was first available in Summer ’24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring '25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and then click the maintenance tab.
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
Enable LWC Stacked Modals, follow the testing and activation steps.

Note: When working with actions, using Dynamic Forms via a Create from Lookup field is supported only for standard actions.
Other types of actions, such as default actions and custom quick actions, continue to use information from the page layout.
Post-save navigation has changed for modals that are launched by a quick action. For LWC quick actions that open a stacked modal for
record creation, you’re returned to the record page after record save. For non-stacked LWC quick actions and Aura quick actions, you
are redirected to the newly created record page after record save.
If you use custom quick actions, consider these guidelines.
• Aura quick actions—Modals launched by Aura quick actions redirect you to the newly created record page after record save. If
you used force:createRecord, consider using LWC quick actions instead. Use the lightning/navigation module
to configure post-save navigation to return you back to the original record page that launched the quick action.
• LWC quick actions—When using the lightning/navigation module, the newer modal overlays and stacks on the previous
modal by default. To automatically close the previous modal when navigating, set replace to true. When replace is true,
post-save navigation redirects you to the newly created record.
This table shows post-save navigation behavior with the release update enabled as compared to its previous behavior.

77
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Enhancements

Enable LWC Stacked Modal LWC Stacked Modal Example

Release Update Release Update Not
Enabled
Create from Lookup Returns back Returns back On a contact page, click the Edit
action. On the Account Name
field, click New Account. A
stacked modal for new account
creation is displayed.

Standard Quick Action Returns back Returns back On an account page, click the
New Case action. A stacked
modal for new case creation is
displayed.

LWC Quick Action (stacked) Returns back Returns back Add an LWC quick action to a
contact page. The quick action
launches a modal, which
contains a button that launches
another modal using
lightning/navigation.

LWC Quick Action (not stacked) Redirects to newly created Redirects to newly created Add an LWC quick action to a
record page record page contact page. The quick action
launches a modal.

Aura Quick Action (not stacked) Redirects to newly created Returns back Add an Aura (Lightning
record page Component) quick action to a
contact page. The quick action
creates a case using a
lightning:recordEditForm
base component.

Note: Modals that are launched by Aura quick actions are not stacked. For example, if you launch a modal using an Aura quick
action, and then launch another modal using force:createRecord, the previous modal is closed automatically and the
newer modal is not stacked.
force:createRecord launches an LWC-based modal if you pass in an LWC-enabled object. For example, if you call
force:createRecord from an Aura quick action, the modal that's displayed follows post-save navigation behavior of an
LWC quick action (not stacked).

Verify Your Return Email Address for Sender Verification (Release Update)
After Spring ’25, to comply with increased email security standards, you’re required to verify the Email Address in My Email Settings.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions except Database.com.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring '25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: A verified email address is used to send emails from your account. This update allows increased accountability and security for
email deliverability.

78
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Search

How: To comply with increased email security standards, emails fail to send from the return email address in My Email Settings until the
address is verified. Instruct all users to visit their My Email Settings. Users can manually verify their email addresses by selecting Resend
Verification Email and clicking the link in the email. If the resend option is unavailable, the return address is already verified. Users
receive a verification email once per release until Spring ’25. The email includes the verification link.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Edit Your Email Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release Updates

Explore Salesforce Products In-Depth with Product Detail Pages in the Your Account
App
Get more details about Salesforce products so that you can make more informed purchase decisions in the Your Account app.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Pro Suite, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Who: To use the Your Account app, the Manage Billing or the Your Account App Admin User permission set is required.
How: Select the product name in the Product Catalog. Get more information about a Salesforce product and take a deep dive on its
included capabilities. If you have more than one contract, select which one you want to add it to before adding it to your cart. If it’s a
product you own, you can add quantity here.

Choose Contact Details when Requesting a Call from Your Salesforce Account Executive
Now when you request a call from your Salesforce Account Executive regarding a Salesforce product, you can confirm your contact
information, choose the contact method, and add details about your request. Get ready for a more productive conversation about the
products you’re exploring.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Pro Suite, Enterprise, Professional, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Who: To use the Your Account app, the Manage Billing or the Your Account App Admin User permission set is required.
Why: Add yourself or a teammate as the point of contact when requesting a call from your Salesforce Account Executive.
How: Select the Talk to Sales or Request an Upgrade button in the Your Account app. Confirm your contact information, select your
preferred contact method, and add any details about your interest or questions. The Sales team then reaches out to you.

Get Personalized Suggestions in Setup

Get relevant suggestions just for you, right where you work in Setup. Suggested for You makes personalized recommendations based
on the products you have and how you and others in your company work.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions except Essentials.
Why: When you see a suggested action you’d like to take, click the action button. Use the copy button to save the content for later. You
can manage suggestion preferences in Adoption Assistance in Setup. You can also dismiss an individual suggestion if you don’t want
to see it again.

Einstein Search
Customize your search results in the Search Manager to show the results that users want. Find data easily with enhanced Advanced
Lookup.
Rights of ALBERT EINSTEIN are used with permission of The Hebrew University of Jerusalem. Represented exclusively by Greenlight.

79
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Foundations

IN THIS SECTION:
Customize Explicit Filters in Search Manager
Tailor the explicit search filters to address specific objects and profiles. For example, customize the search filters that appear for the
Contacts object specifically for the Contract Manager profile.
Advanced Lookup Search Has an Updated UI
For easier viewing, the Advanced Lookup window now lists possible matches under the search bar, not in a dropdown. To change
the sorting parameter for search results, click the column titles. If you don’t find the proper result, create a record from the Lookup
input field, not from the Advanced Lookup window.

Customize Explicit Filters in Search Manager

Tailor the explicit search filters to address specific objects and profiles. For example, customize the search filters that appear for the
Contacts object specifically for the Contract Manager profile.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions
When: This feature is available in December 2024.

Advanced Lookup Search Has an Updated UI

For easier viewing, the Advanced Lookup window now lists possible matches under the search bar, not in a dropdown. To change the
sorting parameter for search results, click the column titles. If you don’t find the proper result, create a record from the Lookup input
field, not from the Advanced Lookup window.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions except Database.com.
When: This functionality is available on a rolling basis starting in Spring ‘25.

Salesforce Foundations
Take advantage of a limited set of capabilities to try out autonomous AI Agents. Generate more leads with custom pages and forms.
Save time on campaign and store management with new layouts and preconfigured options.

IN THIS SECTION:
Build Engaging Web Pages and Forms with Salesforce Foundations
Enhance your lead generation strategy with custom web pages and forms. Easily monitor key KPIs with default reports and dashboards.
And, thanks to a signup form campaign flow, automate lead creation and marketing consent data updates after customers complete
your opt-in form.
Unlock AI Agents with Salesforce Foundations
Say hello to autonomous AI agents. Now enabling Foundations unlocks Agentforce and gives you a set of agent conversations to
get started.
Other Changes in Salesforce Foundations
Learn about other marketing and commerce changes we made in Spring ’25.

80
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Foundations

Build Engaging Web Pages and Forms with Salesforce Foundations

Enhance your lead generation strategy with custom web pages and forms. Easily monitor key KPIs with default reports and dashboards.
And, thanks to a signup form campaign flow, automate lead creation and marketing consent data updates after customers complete
your opt-in form.
Where: This change applies to supported editions for Salesforce Foundations.
Who: To create landing pages and forms, you need the Marketing Manager and Starter Marketing app permission sets. You also need
the Modify All Data user permission and a CMS workspace contributor role of Content Manager or Content Admin.
How: To use this feature, in Setup, go to Salesforce Foundations. If you added Salesforce Foundations before Spring ’25, turn on Digital
Experiences on this page. If you added Foundations after Spring ’25, turn on all required marketing settings on this page. Then, set up
landing pages and forms.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Foundations Setup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Landing Pages and Forms (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Unlock AI Agents with Salesforce Foundations

Say hello to autonomous AI agents. Now enabling Foundations unlocks Agentforce and gives you a set of agent conversations to get
started.
Where: This feature is available in supported editions for Foundations.
How: To use AI agents, in Setup, go to Salesforce Foundations. If you added Foundations before Spring ’25, add the product with Your
Account. If you added Foundations after Spring ’25, add all the required products with Your Account. Then refer to the relevant Salesforce
Help to set up your agents.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Foundations Allocations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Sales Cloud Agents (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Service Agent (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce: Salesforce Foundations FAQ

Other Changes in Salesforce Foundations

Learn about other marketing and commerce changes we made in Spring ’25.
Where: These changes apply to supported editions for Foundations.
How: These changes are available.
• With our revised campaign record page layout, you can more easily manage flows that automate different parts of your campaign.
From the campaign record, view up to 5 flow elements in the same order they appear in Flow Builder. You can edit message or
time-based wait elements without opening Flow Builder.
• Save time on segment creation for marketing campaigns with preconfigured filters. From the campaign record, click Select Segment
and then select Use Quick Filters.
• Preview which customers are in a segment before you send out a marketing campaign. To preview a segment, publish it from the
campaign record, and then click Preview. Segments are automatically published again when you activate the campaign.

81
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Console

• The refreshed Pay Now experience provides a redesigned landing page for store home, easier navigation, and improved access to
your content with revamped workspaces.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Promote My Business (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Marketing Segments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Start Selling Online (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Commerce Enhancements for Starter and Pro Suite

Lightning Console
Gain improved performance with fewer extra page loads.

IN THIS SECTION:
Benefit from Better Lightning Console Performance with Deferred Inactive Workspace Page Loading
Lightning Console now defers the loading of inactive workspace pages by default, which minimizes extra page loads and improves
performance. An inactive workspace page doesn’t load until the user navigates to that page. Regardless of whether the Defer loading
inactive console workspace pages setting is enabled or disabled, content in pinned regions is always considered active and loads
immediately. Previously, if a workspace page opened via a navigation rule, then the page immediately began loading even if the
user remained on a different workspace page.

Benefit from Better Lightning Console Performance with Deferred Inactive Workspace
Page Loading
Lightning Console now defers the loading of inactive workspace pages by default, which minimizes extra page loads and improves
performance. An inactive workspace page doesn’t load until the user navigates to that page. Regardless of whether the Defer loading
inactive console workspace pages setting is enabled or disabled, content in pinned regions is always considered active and loads
immediately. Previously, if a workspace page opened via a navigation rule, then the page immediately began loading even if the user
remained on a different workspace page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning console apps in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions. Lightning console apps are available for an extra cost to users with Salesforce Platform user licenses for certain products. Some
restrictions apply. For pricing details, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: This setting is on by default. To turn off this setting, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Console Settings, and select
Console Workspace Page Loading Preference. Then turn off Defer loading inactive console workspace pages.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Defer Loading Inactive Lightning Console Workspace Pages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Data Pipelines

Get a better view of a recipe’s outcome with new features for building sample data and examining content in recipe previews. Monitor
dataflow and recipe deletions in the Audit Trail.

82
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Data Pipelines

IN THIS SECTION:
Get More Representative Sample Data in Recipes from Local Salesforce Connections
When adding local Salesforce data to a recipe, you can now filter the rows added to the preview or get samples that include one
row for each value in a column. These new sample modes help you better assess whether a recipe achieves the desired outcome
by selecting more relevant preview data.
Preview Random Samples from Datasets in Recipes
When adding a dataset to a recipe, get random sample rows to help you better assess whether the recipe is achieving the desired
outcome. Random sampling increases the likelihood that preview data remains available through your recipe transformations.
Improved Data Preview in Recipes
You can now sort on any column and search the preview data. Freeze columns and highlight rows. Hover over a cell to see the full
value. You can also copy API names and cell values.
Secure Salesforce External Connections with OAuth 2.0
Use OAuth 2.0 to create a secure connection to an external Salesforce org that’s adding your data to CRM Analytics.
Monitor Dataflow and Recipe Deletions in the Audit Trail
You can now view who deleted a dataflow or recipe and when in the Salesforce setup audit trail. For example, you can follow up to
find out why a dataflow or recipe was deleted.
Run Sequential Recipes Faster in Encrypted Orgs
Reduce processing time when your data strategy involves multiple recipes by using staged data instead of datasets. An initial recipe
outputs results as staged data, and then the subsequent recipes use the staged data in input nodes. For example, rather than merge
account and opportunity data in several region-specific forecasting recipes, merge in an initial recipe that outputs the results as
staged data. Then use the staged data in the other recipes. Previously, you could use staged data only with unencrypted orgs.
Give Users Read-Only Access to Recipes (Generally Available)
Let coworkers understand dataset content with the Recipes View Only permission. With this permission, when users visit Data
Manager, they see only the Recipes option. They can then open recipes and view their content but can’t edit, run, or delete them.
Push Data from Government Cloud with Output Connectors
You can now use the Amazon S3, Salesforce, and Snowflake output connectors to push data from Salesforce Government Cloud
customer orgs. When using these connectors, data in transit is encrypted using FIPS 140 validated cryptography, in accordance with
US federal requirements.
Improve Salesforce External Connector Sync Performance with Incremental Syncs (Beta)
Improve your data sync times when using the Salesforce External connector by loading object data incrementally. An incremental
sync extracts only the latest changes to external Salesforce data.
Load Data Incrementally (Beta)
Improve upload time when using the Analytics External Data API by loading CSV files incrementally. In addition to appending data,
you can now incrementally upsert and delete data.

Get More Representative Sample Data in Recipes from Local Salesforce Connections
When adding local Salesforce data to a recipe, you can now filter the rows added to the preview or get samples that include one row
for each value in a column. These new sample modes help you better assess whether a recipe achieves the desired outcome by selecting
more relevant preview data.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

83
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Data Pipelines

How: Add a dataset to a recipe. In the input node, from Sampling Mode, select Filtered rows to preview rows based on filters or All
Column Values to include at least one row for each value in a column in the preview.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Preview Sampling (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Preview Random Samples from Datasets in Recipes

When adding a dataset to a recipe, get random sample rows to help you better assess whether the recipe is achieving the desired
outcome. Random sampling increases the likelihood that preview data remains available through your recipe transformations.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: Add a dataset to a recipe. In the input node, from Sampling Mode, select Random Sampling.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Preview Sampling (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improved Data Preview in Recipes

You can now sort on any column and search the preview data. Freeze columns and highlight rows. Hover over a cell to see the full value.
You can also copy API names and cell values.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In a recipe node, from the column menu, select a sort option or freeze the column. To highlight a row, click it and scroll left and
right to review the column values for that row. Use the new search box to find values in the preview data.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Recipe with Data Prep (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

84
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Data Pipelines

Secure Salesforce External Connections with OAuth 2.0

Use OAuth 2.0 to create a secure connection to an external Salesforce org that’s adding your data to CRM Analytics.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: When you create the Salesforce external connector, enter OAuth as the authentication type. Enter the client ID and client secret
for the OAuth connection.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce External Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Connected Apps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Monitor Dataflow and Recipe Deletions in the Audit Trail

You can now view who deleted a dataflow or recipe and when in the Salesforce setup audit trail. For example, you can follow up to find
out why a dataflow or recipe was deleted.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter View Setup Audit Trail and select it.

85
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Data Pipelines

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Setup Changes with Setup Audit Trail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Delete a Recipe (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Run Sequential Recipes Faster in Encrypted Orgs

Reduce processing time when your data strategy involves multiple recipes by using staged data instead of datasets. An initial recipe
outputs results as staged data, and then the subsequent recipes use the staged data in input nodes. For example, rather than merge
account and opportunity data in several region-specific forecasting recipes, merge in an initial recipe that outputs the results as staged
data. Then use the staged data in the other recipes. Previously, you could use staged data only with unencrypted orgs.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and select Settings. Select Allow recipes to create staged data.
In the recipe editor, build your first recipe for the sequence of recipes, add an output node, and write it to staged data.

Build your second recipe, and select the staged data from your first recipe when adding the input data.

86
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Data Pipelines

Continue to build and save your recipe as usual. The staged data is used as an input source when the recipe sequence runs.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Running Sequential Recipes with Staged Data Output (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Give Users Read-Only Access to Recipes (Generally Available)

Let coworkers understand dataset content with the Recipes View Only permission. With this permission, when users visit Data Manager,
they see only the Recipes option. They can then open recipes and view their content but can’t edit, run, or delete them.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and select Permission Sets. Select or create a permission set. Click
System Permissions, and select Recipes View Only.
When users visit Data Manager and click a recipe name, they can view the recipe’s details in the recipe editor.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Learn About Data Pipelines User Permissions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Data Manager (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: View or Edit a Recipe (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Push Data from Government Cloud with Output Connectors

You can now use the Amazon S3, Salesforce, and Snowflake output connectors to push data from Salesforce Government Cloud customer
orgs. When using these connectors, data in transit is encrypted using FIPS 140 validated cryptography, in accordance with US federal
requirements.

87
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Scheduler

Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Amazon S3 Output Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Output Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Snowflake Output Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve Salesforce External Connector Sync Performance with Incremental Syncs

(Beta)
Improve your data sync times when using the Salesforce External connector by loading object data incrementally. An incremental sync
extracts only the latest changes to external Salesforce data.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Incremental syncs for the Salesforce External connector are a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms
at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product
Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer’s sole discretion.
How: In Data Manager, open a Salesforce external connection from the Connection tab and select the object that you want to sync. For
the Edit Connection Mode, select Incremental Sync (Beta).

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce External Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Incremental Sync for Salesforce Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Load Data Incrementally (Beta)

Improve upload time when using the Analytics External Data API by loading CSV files incrementally. In addition to appending data, you
can now incrementally upsert and delete data.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Incremental uploads in the external data API is a pilot or beta service that’s subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements
- Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer’s sole discretion.
How: When using the Analytics External Data API to load data, set the mode to incremental.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Update the Data with Staged Data Output (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Scheduler
Add support for payments to Salesforce Scheduler.

88
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Archive

IN THIS SECTION:
Book and Pay Easily with Payment Integration
Streamline appointment bookings with the ability to pay for service appointments. Set prices for appointments by configuring rate
cards for combinations of work types and service territories. For outbound appointments, your customer support representatives
can generate and send payment links to customers. For inbound appointments, your customers can pay for their appointments
while booking them. Also, automatically send emails to customers to pay for their bookings by using new email templates for
payments.

Book and Pay Easily with Payment Integration

Streamline appointment bookings with the ability to pay for service appointments. Set prices for appointments by configuring rate cards
for combinations of work types and service territories. For outbound appointments, your customer support representatives can generate
and send payment links to customers. For inbound appointments, your customers can pay for their appointments while booking them.
Also, automatically send emails to customers to pay for their bookings by using new email templates for payments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Salesforce Scheduler enabled.
Why: Use this feature when your customers must pay to book an appointment. For example, use this feature when a patient schedules
a doctor’s appointment or the customer of a bank makes an appointment to notarize a document.
How: To turn on Payments, go to the Salesforce Scheduler Settings page in Setup.

Salesforce Archive
Get to know Salesforce Archive.

IN THIS SECTION:
Save on Storage and Boost Performance with Salesforce Archive (Generally Available)
Optimize for speed and efficiency as your business data grows. Archive expired or unused records in an external, low-cost data store.
Visualize the records in your data store directly from your Salesforce org. Automate data cleanup with recurring archive jobs. Salesforce
Archive is your native solution to unchecked data bloat, a time and cost saver for your data-dominant business.

Save on Storage and Boost Performance with Salesforce Archive (Generally Available)
Optimize for speed and efficiency as your business data grows. Archive expired or unused records in an external, low-cost data store.
Visualize the records in your data store directly from your Salesforce org. Automate data cleanup with recurring archive jobs. Salesforce
Archive is your native solution to unchecked data bloat, a time and cost saver for your data-dominant business.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Salesforce Archive is available to customers on most Salesforce instances. The remaining unsupported instances are:
• South Korea: kor* instances
• Indonesia: idn* instances
• Brazil: bra* instances
• Middle East: are* instances
To find out your org instance, go to Company Information in Setup, or contact your account executive.
Why: Excess data stored in your org can bog down processing times, inflate storage costs, and degrade information accuracy. But for
records that you occasionally need or that you’re required to maintain for regulatory compliance, hard deletion isn’t the answer. That’s
why we built a native archive solution to enhance your Salesforce implementation.

89
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Release Updates

Benefits and use cases:

• Boost Salesforce query and reporting performance.
• Improve user productivity with shorter processing times.
• Reduce storage footprint and costs.
• Avoid record redundancies and inconsistencies.
• Preserve historical data for future reference and trend analysis.
• Ensure compliance with data retention regulations.
How: Salesforce Archive is purchased as an add-on license. For pricing information, contact your account executive.
To archive Salesforce records, create and execute Archive policies. You decide when and how often Archive policies run, which objects
they scan, and which records and files they act on. You can also view and manage job sessions for Archive policies. To view archived
data directly from the Salesforce UI, set up your data store with Salesforce Connect.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Store Data Externally with Salesforce Archive (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Access External Data with the Salesforce Connect Adaptor for Salesforce Archive (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)

Release Updates
Salesforce periodically provides release updates that improve the performance, logic, security, and usability of our products. The Release
Updates page provides a list of updates that can be necessary for your organization to enable. Some release updates affect existing
customizations.
Every time a release update is created, it gets scheduled to be enforced in a future release. We announce each update and its schedule
here as soon as that schedule is known, but occasionally, updates are postponed or canceled. If that happens, we let you know in the
section that describes that specific release update.
Often, release updates provide a Test Run option so you can enable an update and examine any changes to your org, including changes
to customizations, before that update’s Complete Steps By date. You can view attachments in the Salesforce mobile app, but you can’t
edit them.
To view release updates, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and select Release Updates.

Enforced with This Release

These updates are scheduled to be enforced this release.
Change Einstein Activity Capture Permissions for Sales Engagement Basic Users (Release Update)
In Spring ’25, the Sales Engagement Basic User permission set no longer includes access to Einstein Activity Capture. Assign the
Standard Einstein Activity Capture permission set to users who currently have access to Einstein Activity Capture through the Sales
Engagement Basic User permission set or a clone.
Enable LWC Stacked Modals (Release Update)
As part of the Salesforce internal migration from Aura to LWC, more modals in Lightning Experience now render using LWC. This
update provides improved performance, especially when working with a large number of fields on a record create or edit modal.
You can now also use Dynamic Forms in a modal that's opened from a Create from Lookup field on most LWC-enabled record pages.
When you enable this update, you can expect minor changes to modal behavior. This update was first available in Summer ’24.

90
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Release Updates

Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release Update)

With this update, the International Components for Unicode (ICU) locale formats replace Oracle’s Java Development Kit (JDK) locale
formats in Salesforce. Locales control the formats for dates, times, currencies, addresses, names, and numeric values. ICU sets the
international standard for these formats. The ICU locale formats provide a consistent experience across the platform and improve
integration with ICU-compliant applications across the globe. This update was first made available in Winter ’20 and is enforced in
Spring ’25.
Enforce View Roles and Role Hierarchy Permission When Editing Public List View Visibility (Release Update)
With this update, only users with the View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission can see or select from your organization’s list of roles
when they edit public list view visibility. This update was first available in Spring ’24. If your organization doesn’t use roles, this update
has no impact.
Enhance Flexibility and Reusability in Prompt Flows (Release Update)
This update removes the ability to specify a flex prompt template type from a template-triggered prompt flow. Instead, create
template-triggered prompt flows that use manual inputs because the flows aren’t limited to a single prompt template type. You
must update existing flows that reference flex prompt template types to use manual inputs. This update is available starting in Winter
’25.
Review and Update Settings to Capture Leads from LinkedIn (Release Update)
If you’re syncing leads from LinkedIn Lead Forms to Salesforce, you must manually disconnect your LinkedIn account, reconfigure
the feature by enabling a new setting, then reconnect your account. Otherwise, LinkedIn leads will stop syncing when LinkedIn
retires their legacy Ads Lead Sync APIs on December 16, 2024. This update is available starting in Winter ‘25.
Sort Apex Batch Action Results by Request Order (Release Update)
This update enables Apex batch action results to be returned in the order the requests are received. Currently, error-prone requests
are prioritized at the top of the result list, while successful ones are positioned at the bottom.
Update API Requests to Use Your MyDomain Login URL (Release Update)
If you're using an instance-specific URL for API traffic, you must replace it with your My Domain URL. Salesforce is decommissioning
the service that supports hard-coded references to an instance name in API application traffic routing.
Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All Intelligence Signal Types (Release Update)
This release update adds a new intelligenceSignals flow input parameter that contains detected conversation intelligence signals.
Use this Apex-defined input parameter for your Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched flows linked to a Conversation
Intelligence rule. This update first made available in Summer ’24.
Verify Your Return Email Address for Sender Verification (Release Update)
After Spring ’25, to comply with increased email security standards, you’re required to verify the Email Address in My Email Settings.

Scheduled to Be Enforced in Summer ’25

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Summer ’25. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
Enable a Modernized Record Experience in Aura Sites (Release Update)
Starting in Winter ’25, you can upgrade record components in your Experience Cloud Aura sites and see improved accessibility and
stylistic changes. Upgraded Create Record Form, Record Banner, and Record Detail components run on Lightning Web Component
technology, which improves accessibility and performance. In Summer ’25, the upgrade is enforced for all orgs. We strongly
recommend that you test all customized record components before the update.
Enable Secure Roles Behavior and Update Sharing Group References in Sandboxes (Release Update)
To prevent unintended access for external site users if you enable digital experiences, Salesforce is securing access to records in
sandbox orgs. The default sharing group available for roles and subordinates before you enable digital experiences is now displayed
as Roles and Internal Subordinates instead of Roles and Subordinates. To prepare for this change, update code and customizations

91
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Release Updates

that reference the old group name. Although Salesforce dynamically converts outdated references during a transition period, you
must update all code and customizations to prevent errors.
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder (Release Update)
This update fixes a bug with the evaluation criteria in processes that have multiple criteria and a record update. This release update
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with
a value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool (Release Update)
To access Classic Knowledge, run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool. To prepare for the retirement of the Classic Knowledge
data model, upgrade to Lightning Knowledge. The upgrade offers enhanced article editing, improved search, and AI-driven features
like Einstein Article Recommendations, Einstein Search for Knowledge, and Agentforce Service Agents. After you migrate, you can
still use Classic Knowledge with limitations.
Salesforce Platform API Versions 21.0 Through 30.0 Retirement (Release Update)
The retirement of versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API was first scheduled for Summer ’23. The retirement is
now postponed to Summer ’25. You can continue to use these API versions but they’re not supported and won’t be available starting
in Summer ’25. Applications consuming them are then disrupted. Requests fail with an error message indicating that the endpoint
is deactivated. Upgrade all applications that use a legacy API version to a current version before this breaking change occurs.
Update Your Trusted URLs for the Latest CSP Directives (Release Update)
To help protect your org from cross-site scripting (XSS) and other code-injection attacks, Salesforce updated the delivered content
security policy (CSP) directives for Lightning pages. This change can prevent externally hosted fonts and images from loading. It can
also prevent external websites from loading within an iframe on your Lightning pages. To adopt these required directives, review
the impact and update your trusted URLs. This release update is available starting in Spring ’25 and is enforced in Summer ’25.
Verify SAML Integrations (Release Update)
Salesforce is upgrading its SAML framework as part of regular ongoing maintenance. This maintenance update improves Salesforce’s
security posture, and as a result, improves your security posture. This update can impact integrations that use SAML, including single
sign-on (SSO) and single logout. This update is visible starting in Winter ’25 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’25, but we
postponed the enforcement date to Summer ’25. To avoid potential service interruptions, test your SAML integrations as soon as
Summer ’25 sandboxes become available.

Scheduled to Be Enforced in Winter ’26

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’26. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs (Release Update)
This update enables permission requirements to be enforced for built-in Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It also
guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the current component context. Currently, Apex actions rely on the previous
component context. This behavior leads to failed flow interviews when the flow includes an Apex action that contains a built-in
Apex class with permission requirements as input. This release update was first available in Summer ’24 and was scheduled to be
enforced in Spring ’25, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ’26.
Migrate from Maintenance Plan Frequency Fields to Maintenance Work Rules (Release Update)
The Frequency and Frequency Type fields on the Maintenance Plan are being retired. To prepare for this retirement and take advantage
of updated features, migrate your Frequency and Frequency Type data to maintenance work rules. This update was first available
in Summer ’22 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ‘22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ‘26.
Restrict User Access to Run Flows (Release Update)
This update was first made available in Winter ’24 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’25, but we postponed the enforcement
to Winter ’26. With this update enabled, Salesforce restricts a user’s ability to run a flow. A user must be granted the correct profile
or permission set to run the flow. When enabled, this release update deprecates the FlowSites org permission, which gave all users

92
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Release Updates

in the org access to run any flow. With this update, flows run more securely because only users who are granted correct profiles or
permission sets can run flows. Salesforce postponed the enforcement to allow additional time for admins to test and prepare for
the change. There is no impact to admins who already enabled the update. We appreciate your adoption of this change.

Scheduled to Be Enforced in Spring ’26

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’26. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
Migrate to a Multiple-Configuration SAML Framework (Release Update)
If you see this release update, your Salesforce instance is using our original single-configuration SAML framework, which supports
single sign-on (SSO) with only one external identity provider. With this release update, we’re removing support for the
single-configuration SAML framework and supporting only the multiple-configuration SAML framework. To preserve your existing
configuration, follow the steps to apply this update. If you don’t, your SSO configuration stops working when this update is enforced
for production instances in Spring ’26.
Upgrade to Enhanced LWR Sites (Generally Available) (Release Update)
Upgrade existing LWR sites to enhanced LWR sites to take advantage of the latest features, including partial deployment, enhanced
CMS workspaces and channels, expression-based visibility, and more. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes
since the last release, and is available as an update starting in Spring ’25.
Update References to Legacy Host Names (Release Update)
Prevent disruption for your customers and end users when the temporary redirection of legacy (non-enhanced) Salesforce host
names ends in orgs created in June 2022 or earlier. With this release update, legacy host name redirections end in production and
demo orgs. Those redirections already ended in all other orgs in Winter ’25. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.

Recommended But Not Enforced

Salesforce strongly recommends enabling these updates, but won’t enforce them. This list can include newly recommended updates
or previously announced updates that will no longer be enforced.
Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior (Release Update)
To improve the quality of service, supervisors can now monitor live messaging sessions between this type of AI agent and your
customers. Specifically, they can monitor enhanced Messaging sessions, such as Messaging for In-App and Web and WhatsApp,
from within Omni Supervisor. To notify supervisors which conversations need human support, add the Raise Flag action to the AI
agent. Supervisors can lower the flag and transfer conversations to human representatives.
Monitor Real-time Conversations Between Agentforce Service Agents and Customers (Release Update)
To improve the quality of service, supervisors can now monitor live messaging sessions between this type of AI agent and your
customers. Specifically, they can monitor enhanced Messaging sessions, such as Messaging for In-App and Web and WhatsApp,
from within Omni Supervisor. To notify supervisors which conversations need human support, add the Raise Flag action to the AI
agent. Supervisors can lower the flag and transfer conversations to human representatives.
Transition to the Lightning Editor for Email Composers in Email-to-Case (Generally Available) (Release Update)
To improve the quality of service, supervisors can now monitor live messaging sessions between this type of AI agent and your
customers. Specifically, they can monitor enhanced Messaging sessions, such as Messaging for In-App and Web and WhatsApp,
from within Omni Supervisor. To notify supervisors which conversations need human support, add the Raise Flag action to the AI
agent. Supervisors can lower the flag and transfer conversations to human representatives.

93
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Analytics

Analytics
Analytics enhancements include new and updated features for Lightning reports and dashboards, Data Cloud reports and dashboards,
CRM Analytics, Intelligent apps, and Tableau.

IN THIS SECTION:
Unified Analytics Experiences
Add assets to collections more efficiently in batches. Schedule more CRM Analytics dashboard subscriptions per hour in Slack.
Lightning Reports and Dashboards
Create effective report types with ease in the enhanced custom report type builder. Sort report charts automatically when you
change report grouping order.
Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards
Filter a Data Cloud report by aggregate values. Review the earliest and latest values on date fields. Say hello to logical views and
semantic unions in Data Cloud reports (beta).
CRM Analytics
Construct datasets with confidence with recipe preview enhancements. Unify data sources in dashboards with Data Cloud One
integration.
Tableau
Use Tableau to analyze, explore, and make decisions on your data with just a few clicks. Create engaging visualizations and embed
them in your Lightning pages to use them in your workflows. Tableau has enterprise analytics platform solutions for deep data
exploration.
Marketing Cloud Intelligence
Connect, harmonize, visualize, and act on your marketing data to optimize performance within campaigns, discover insights in real
time, and then act on them.
Accessibility Enhancements in Analytics
Learn about small but important changes that make analytics more accessible.

Unified Analytics Experiences

Add assets to collections more efficiently in batches. Schedule more CRM Analytics dashboard subscriptions per hour in Slack.

IN THIS SECTION:
Add Assets to Collections in Bulk
Say goodbye to adding assets to collections one at a time. You can now add items to collections in batches. You can also add multiple
items to multiple collections with one action.
Run More CRM Analytics Dashboard Subscriptions Per Hour in Slack
With the new upper limit of 500 subscriptions per hour per org, you have more opportunity to view and share the latest data in Slack
on the schedule you want. Previously, the limit was 100 per hour per org.

Add Assets to Collections in Bulk

Say goodbye to adding assets to collections one at a time. You can now add items to collections in batches. You can also add multiple
items to multiple collections with one action.

94
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Unified Analytics Experiences

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions. The change also applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic, which is available in Developer Edition
and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: On the Analytics tab or in Analytics Studio, click either Browse or Favorites. Select the items you want to add. From the Bulk
Actions dropdown menu, select Add to Collections.

Select one or more collections to add your items to.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Analytics Bulk Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Run More CRM Analytics Dashboard Subscriptions Per Hour in Slack

With the new upper limit of 500 subscriptions per hour per org, you have more opportunity to view and share the latest data in Slack
on the schedule you want. Previously, the limit was 100 per hour per org.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions and to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer Edition and for an
extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. The CRM Analytics for Slack app is available for use where approved by a
workspace admin and installed in Slack.

95
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Reports and Dashboards

Who: Users must have the Connect Salesforce with Slack system permission in Salesforce, and they must connect their CRM Analytics
for Slack app in their Slack workspace to their Salesforce account.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Subscribe to CRM Analytics Dashboards in Slack (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: CRM Analytics Limits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Lightning Reports and Dashboards

Create effective report types with ease in the enhanced custom report type builder. Sort report charts automatically when you change
report grouping order.

IN THIS SECTION:
Delivered Idea: Do More with Custom Report Types (Generally Available)
Find your report types more easily, and create personalized list views of your custom report types using the improved Custom Report
Type page in Setup. Edit report details and modify object relationships on the summary page, which now has a more compact layout.
The redesigned report type layout editor provides more flexibility when managing custom fields and sections. And you can add up
to 1,000 fields in the report type layout using lookup fields. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Keep Charts Consistent with Reordered Report Data
When you sort by a field, the report chart updates to match the new order so that it’s consistent with the data table. For example,
if you sort regions by descending order of sales, the chart reorders the regions accordingly, making it easier to interpret your data.
Choose Which Dashboard Widgets to Refresh (Beta)
Refresh only the dashboard widgets that you need rather than the entire dashboard. For example, a support team member can
refresh only the Open Tickets widget to see the most up-to-date list of unresolved issues, without refreshing other widgets on the
dashboard.
Designate One Email Address to Send Report Subscription Notifications (Beta)
Create consistent email communications and reduce the risk of spoofing by using an organization-wide email address to send report
subscriptions. Previously, emails were sent with the address of the user who created the report subscription.

Do More with Custom Report Types (Generally Available)

Find your report types more easily, and create personalized list views of your custom report types using the improved Custom Report
Type page in Setup. Edit report details and modify object relationships on the summary page, which now has a more compact layout.
The redesigned report type layout editor provides more flexibility when managing custom fields and sections. And you can add up to
1,000 fields in the report type layout using lookup fields. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: In Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Reports and select Reports and Dashboards Settings. Select Enhanced Custom
Report Type Setup Page. Then, in the Quick Find box, search for and select Report Types.
On the redesigned summary page of your custom report type, click Edit Layout.

96
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Reports and Dashboards

Drag fields from the Fields panel (1) to the appropriate section on the right. You can search for fields, move them, view their details, and
customize their display names (2). To find lookup fields and add them to the report type, click Lookup Fields (3).

97
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Reports and Dashboards

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Custom Report Types (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Keep Charts Consistent with Reordered Report Data

When you sort by a field, the report chart updates to match the new order so that it’s consistent with the data table. For example, if you
sort regions by descending order of sales, the chart reorders the regions accordingly, making it easier to interpret your data.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: On the widget, click the Chart Properties icon , and select Sort Report Charts.

Choose Which Dashboard Widgets to Refresh (Beta)

Refresh only the dashboard widgets that you need rather than the entire dashboard. For example, a support team member can refresh
only the Open Tickets widget to see the most up-to-date list of unresolved issues, without refreshing other widgets on the dashboard.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.

98
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

Note: Widget Refresh is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer’s sole discretion.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Reports, and select Reports and Dashboards Settings. Select Let users refresh
individual widgets for dashboards (Beta).
In the dashboard, click the widget’s refresh icon to view its latest data.

Designate One Email Address to Send Report Subscription Notifications (Beta)

Create consistent email communications and reduce the risk of spoofing by using an organization-wide email address to send report
subscriptions. Previously, emails were sent with the address of the user who created the report subscription.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.

Note: Organization-Wide Email Addresses for Report Subscriptions is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services
Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the
Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer’s sole discretion.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Reports, and then select Reports and Dashboards Settings. Select Enable Org
Wide Email Address for Report Subscription (Beta), and then select the email address to use from the dropdown.

Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

Filter a Data Cloud report by aggregate values. Review the earliest and latest values on date fields. Say hello to logical views and semantic
unions in Data Cloud reports (beta).

IN THIS SECTION:
Define Filters on Aggregate Values in Data Cloud Reports
Fine-tune the results in a Data Cloud report with filters on the sum, average, highest, or lowest values of a numeric column. You can
apply these filters in reports on data model objects (DMO), calculated insights, or semantic data models. If you define more than
one filter, the AND logic is applied. For example, in a Sales Order DMO report, add a summary filter on the sum of sales to review just
the high-value orders.
Highlight Min and Max Aggregates for Date Fields (Generally Available)
Surface the earliest and latest values of a date, datetime, or row-level formula field with these data types in a data model object
(DMO) or semantic data model report. You can also review the min and max aggregates for each report grouping. For example, in
a Sales Order DMO report that’s grouped by fiscal quarter, include the min and max aggregates for the Created Date field to identify
sales cycle trends. Or, quickly find the latest payment due date across all orders with the max value of the formula field that calculates
due dates based on the Created Date field.
Create a Semantic Data Model Report with a Single Click (Beta)
Analyze and build a standard report on a semantic data model directly in the flow of work. You can now create these reports from
the semantic model’s list view page. Previously, you could create the report only from the Reports tab.
Default Behavior When Creating a Semantic Data Model Report Has Changed (Beta)
When you create a semantic data model report, its count of rows and detail rows are disabled by default. To view report data, add
at least one grouping column.

99
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

Analyze Logical View and Semantic Union Metrics in Data Cloud Reports (Beta)
Get a comprehensive analysis of records in a semantic data model by including its logical views and semantic unions in a Data Cloud
report. When you create a semantic model report, the Report Builder maintains the logical views that connect the data objects and
the relationship joins between them. It also preserves the view’s semantic unions so that you can unify shared columns across
different data objects, treat them as a single logical entity, and report on dimensions more efficiently. You can quickly define filters
on logical view fields, apply conditional formatting, visualize the data in charts, and embed them in dashboards.
Categorize Semantic Model Records with Bucket Columns (Beta)
Organize data in a semantic data model into groups without the hassle of creating a formula or custom field. Instead, in the report,
create a bucket column to define multiple categories or ranges for the same measure or dimension. For example, get a better
understanding of your customers from the Individuals semantic model by bucketing customer spending amounts into Low, Medium,
and High ranges. You can bucket Data Cloud reports on numeric, picklist, and text data types. Sort, filter, or group the report based
on the bucket column.
Assess Semantic Data Model Records with Advanced Formulas (Beta)
Compare grouped data in a semantic data model report more efficiently with summary formula columns. To analyze each record
in the report, apply row-level formulas. With these advanced formula types, you can easily evaluate percentages, ratios, and aggregate
values. For example, in a Sales Order semantic model report, add a summary formula to determine the monthly average sales amount
by product category.

Define Filters on Aggregate Values in Data Cloud Reports

Fine-tune the results in a Data Cloud report with filters on the sum, average, highest, or lowest values of a numeric column. You can
apply these filters in reports on data model objects (DMO), calculated insights, or semantic data models. If you define more than one
filter, the AND logic is applied. For example, in a Sales Order DMO report, add a summary filter on the sum of sales to review just the
high-value orders.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: On a summary report with detail rows disabled, in the Fields panel, click . In the Edit Filter window, define the summary filter
and click Apply.

100
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

Highlight Min and Max Aggregates for Date Fields (Generally Available)
Surface the earliest and latest values of a date, datetime, or row-level formula field with these data types in a data model object (DMO)
or semantic data model report. You can also review the min and max aggregates for each report grouping. For example, in a Sales Order
DMO report that’s grouped by fiscal quarter, include the min and max aggregates for the Created Date field to identify sales cycle trends.
Or, quickly find the latest payment due date across all orders with the max value of the formula field that calculates due dates based on
the Created Date field.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: To add the aggregates, select the column in the Fields pane. Select the aggregates, and click Apply.

Alternatively, in Report Builder, click next to a field name, select Summarize, and select the aggregates.

101
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

You can view the date field’s earliest and latest values for each group in the subtotal row and for the entire report in the report header.

Create a Semantic Data Model Report with a Single Click (Beta)

Analyze and build a standard report on a semantic data model directly in the flow of work. You can now create these reports from the
semantic model’s list view page. Previously, you could create the report only from the Reports tab.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Semantic Data Model is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com, and the
Non-GA Credit Consumption terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this beta service consumes Customer Data Cloud Credits
and is at the Customer's sole discretion. At the conclusion of the open beta period, use of portions of the Semantic Data Model
may be subject to additional purchase and/or additional credit consumption.
How: On the Semantic Layer tab, select Create Report from a semantic model’s Actions menu.

102
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

Default Behavior When Creating a Semantic Data Model Report Has Changed (Beta)
When you create a semantic data model report, its count of rows and detail rows are disabled by default. To view report data, add at
least one grouping column.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Semantic Data Model is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com, and the
Non-GA Credit Consumption terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this beta service consumes Customer Data Cloud Credits
and is at the Customer's sole discretion. At the conclusion of the open beta period, use of portions of the Semantic Data Model
may be subject to additional purchase and/or additional credit consumption.

Analyze Logical View and Semantic Union Metrics in Data Cloud Reports (Beta)
Get a comprehensive analysis of records in a semantic data model by including its logical views and semantic unions in a Data Cloud
report. When you create a semantic model report, the Report Builder maintains the logical views that connect the data objects and the
relationship joins between them. It also preserves the view’s semantic unions so that you can unify shared columns across different data
objects, treat them as a single logical entity, and report on dimensions more efficiently. You can quickly define filters on logical view
fields, apply conditional formatting, visualize the data in charts, and embed them in dashboards.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Semantic Data Model is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com, and the
Non-GA Credit Consumption terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this beta service consumes Customer Data Cloud Credits
and is at the Customer's sole discretion. At the conclusion of the open beta period, use of portions of the Semantic Data Model
may be subject to additional purchase and/or additional credit consumption.
Why: For example, let’s say you want to discover insights about your customers’ engagement with your campaigns. In a report on the
Customer Engagement semantic model, include logical view fields that join customer data across multiple channels, such as email open
rates, web browsing patterns, and SMS clicks.

103
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

How: To add a field as a report column, in edit mode, double-click it in the Fields pane. To add a field as a grouping, select it from the
Add group dropdown.

Categorize Semantic Model Records with Bucket Columns (Beta)

Organize data in a semantic data model into groups without the hassle of creating a formula or custom field. Instead, in the report, create
a bucket column to define multiple categories or ranges for the same measure or dimension. For example, get a better understanding
of your customers from the Individuals semantic model by bucketing customer spending amounts into Low, Medium, and High ranges.
You can bucket Data Cloud reports on numeric, picklist, and text data types. Sort, filter, or group the report based on the bucket column.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Semantic Data Model is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com, and the
Non-GA Credit Consumption terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this beta service consumes Customer Data Cloud Credits
and is at the Customer's sole discretion. At the conclusion of the open beta period, use of portions of the Semantic Data Model
may be subject to additional purchase and/or additional credit consumption.
How: In edit mode, from the Columns section, click and select Add Bucket Column.

Assess Semantic Data Model Records with Advanced Formulas (Beta)

Compare grouped data in a semantic data model report more efficiently with summary formula columns. To analyze each record in the
report, apply row-level formulas. With these advanced formula types, you can easily evaluate percentages, ratios, and aggregate values.
For example, in a Sales Order semantic model report, add a summary formula to determine the monthly average sales amount by product
category.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Semantic Data Model is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com, and the
Non-GA Credit Consumption terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this beta service consumes Customer Data Cloud Credits
and is at the Customer's sole discretion. At the conclusion of the open beta period, use of portions of the Semantic Data Model
may be subject to additional purchase and/or additional credit consumption.

104
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

How: In edit mode, from the Columns section, click and select Add Summary Formula or Add Row-Level Formula.

CRM Analytics
Construct datasets with confidence with recipe preview enhancements. Unify data sources in dashboards with Data Cloud One integration.

IN THIS SECTION:
Analytics Experience and Visualizations
Build dashboards with all your connected Data Cloud sources through Data Cloud One integration. Manage changes to dashboard
components with version control.
Data Integration
Get a better view of a recipe’s outcome with new features for building sample data and examining content in recipe previews.
Monitor dataflow and recipe deletions in the Audit Trail. Control access to data based on a user’s assigned territories (now generally
available).

Analytics Experience and Visualizations

Build dashboards with all your connected Data Cloud sources through Data Cloud One integration. Manage changes to dashboard
components with version control.

IN THIS SECTION:
See More Color Contrast in Donut and Stacked Bar Charts
Get better legibility and understanding of data with enriched color contrast for donut and stacked bar charts. It’s now easier to
distinguish between adjacent chart segments or between chart segments and the dashboard background. You don’t see enhanced
color contrast if the chart has more than five segments.
Use Version Control When Saving Dashboard Component Changes
Track changes in your dashboard components with version control to view and restore past versions. Previously, you had to take
manual steps to restore previous configurations.
Unify Your Data Across Dashboards
Your dashboards can now have a single source of truth across every connected Data Cloud server. The connected Data Cloud One
companion org and shared data spaces enable access to unified data as if it were a local Data Cloud.
Enhance Your Dashboards with Customizable Tooltip Colors
You can now customize a tooltip’s background, label, and value to match your company themes, highlight data, and improve
accessibility.

See More Color Contrast in Donut and Stacked Bar Charts

Get better legibility and understanding of data with enriched color contrast for donut and stacked bar charts. It’s now easier to distinguish
between adjacent chart segments or between chart segments and the dashboard background. You don’t see enhanced color contrast
if the chart has more than five segments.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and then select Settings. Select Enable high contrast chart widgets.

105
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Color Contrast (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Version Control When Saving Dashboard Component Changes

Track changes in your dashboard components with version control to view and restore past versions. Previously, you had to take manual
steps to restore previous configurations.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: After you make changes to a dashboard component, save it and describe the update in the Version History field.

106
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

To view a component’s current and past versions, click Preview. Click and select Version History. To restore another version,
select the version that you want and click Save.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Restore a Previous Version of a Component (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Unify Your Data Across Dashboards

Your dashboards can now have a single source of truth across every connected Data Cloud server. The connected Data Cloud One
companion org and shared data spaces enable access to unified data as if it were a local Data Cloud.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In the Dashboard Designer, click Create Query. To select a Data Cloud data source and data space, click Salesforce Data Cloud.

107
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

SEE ALSO:
Revolutionize Multi-Org Architecture with Data Cloud One

Enhance Your Dashboards with Customizable Tooltip Colors

You can now customize a tooltip’s background, label, and value to match your company themes, highlight data, and improve accessibility.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

How: In the dashboard designer, click . On the Theme tab, select colors for the background (1), label (2), and value (3) in the Tooltip
Style section.

108
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Widget Properties with Themes(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Data Integration
Get a better view of a recipe’s outcome with new features for building sample data and examining content in recipe previews. Monitor
dataflow and recipe deletions in the Audit Trail. Control access to data based on a user’s assigned territories (now generally available).

109
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

IN THIS SECTION:
Get More Representative Sample Data in Recipes from Local Salesforce Connections
When adding local Salesforce data to a recipe, you can now filter the rows added to the preview or get samples that include one
row for each value in a column. These new sample modes help you better assess whether a recipe achieves the desired outcome
by selecting more relevant preview data.
Preview Random Samples from Datasets in Recipes
When adding a dataset to a recipe, get random sample rows to help you better assess whether the recipe is achieving the desired
outcome. Random sampling increases the likelihood that preview data remains available through your recipe transformations.
Improved Data Preview in Recipes
You can now sort on any column and search the preview data. Freeze columns and highlight rows. Hover over a cell to see the full
value. You can also copy API names and cell values.
Secure Salesforce External Connections with OAuth 2.0
Use OAuth 2.0 to create a secure connection to an external Salesforce org that’s adding your data to CRM Analytics.
Monitor Dataflow and Recipe Deletions in the Audit Trail
You can now view who deleted a dataflow or recipe and when in the Salesforce setup audit trail. For example, you can follow up to
find out why a dataflow or recipe was deleted.
Run Sequential Recipes Faster in Encrypted Orgs
Reduce processing time when your data strategy involves multiple recipes by using staged data instead of datasets. An initial recipe
outputs results as staged data, and then the subsequent recipes use the staged data in input nodes. For example, rather than merge
account and opportunity data in several region-specific forecasting recipes, merge in an initial recipe that outputs the results as
staged data. Then use the staged data in the other recipes. Previously, you could use staged data only with unencrypted orgs.
Control Access to Data Based on a User’s Assigned Territories (Generally Available)
Allow users to see data in dashboards and insights only for the territories they’re assigned to in Territory Management 2.0. Reference
the territory hierarchy from your dataset security predicates. Previously, you could only reference user data.
Give Users Read-Only Access to Recipes (Generally Available)
Let coworkers understand dataset content with the Recipes View Only permission. With this permission, when users visit Data
Manager, they see only the Recipes option. They can then open recipes and view their content but can’t edit, run, or delete them.
Push Data from Government Cloud with Output Connectors
You can now use the Amazon S3, Salesforce, and Snowflake output connectors to push data from Salesforce Government Cloud
customer orgs. When using these connectors, data in transit is encrypted using FIPS 140 validated cryptography, in accordance with
US federal requirements.
Improve Salesforce External Connector Sync Performance with Incremental Syncs (Beta)
Improve your data sync times when using the Salesforce External connector by loading object data incrementally. An incremental
sync extracts only the latest changes to external Salesforce data.
Load Data Incrementally (Beta)
Improve upload time when using the Analytics External Data API by loading CSV files incrementally. In addition to appending data,
you can now incrementally upsert and delete data.

Get More Representative Sample Data in Recipes from Local Salesforce Connections
When adding local Salesforce data to a recipe, you can now filter the rows added to the preview or get samples that include one row
for each value in a column. These new sample modes help you better assess whether a recipe achieves the desired outcome by selecting
more relevant preview data.

110
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: Add a dataset to a recipe. In the input node, from Sampling Mode, select Filtered rows to preview rows based on filters or All
Column Values to include at least one row for each value in a column in the preview.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Preview Sampling (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Preview Random Samples from Datasets in Recipes

When adding a dataset to a recipe, get random sample rows to help you better assess whether the recipe is achieving the desired
outcome. Random sampling increases the likelihood that preview data remains available through your recipe transformations.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: Add a dataset to a recipe. In the input node, from Sampling Mode, select Random Sampling.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Preview Sampling (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improved Data Preview in Recipes

You can now sort on any column and search the preview data. Freeze columns and highlight rows. Hover over a cell to see the full value.
You can also copy API names and cell values.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In a recipe node, from the column menu, select a sort option or freeze the column. To highlight a row, click it and scroll left and
right to review the column values for that row. Use the new search box to find values in the preview data.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Recipe with Data Prep (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

111
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

Secure Salesforce External Connections with OAuth 2.0

Use OAuth 2.0 to create a secure connection to an external Salesforce org that’s adding your data to CRM Analytics.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: When you create the Salesforce external connector, enter OAuth as the authentication type. Enter the client ID and client secret
for the OAuth connection.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce External Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Connected Apps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Monitor Dataflow and Recipe Deletions in the Audit Trail

You can now view who deleted a dataflow or recipe and when in the Salesforce setup audit trail. For example, you can follow up to find
out why a dataflow or recipe was deleted.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter View Setup Audit Trail and select it.

112
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Setup Changes with Setup Audit Trail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Delete a Recipe (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Run Sequential Recipes Faster in Encrypted Orgs

Reduce processing time when your data strategy involves multiple recipes by using staged data instead of datasets. An initial recipe
outputs results as staged data, and then the subsequent recipes use the staged data in input nodes. For example, rather than merge
account and opportunity data in several region-specific forecasting recipes, merge in an initial recipe that outputs the results as staged
data. Then use the staged data in the other recipes. Previously, you could use staged data only with unencrypted orgs.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and select Settings. Select Allow recipes to create staged data.
In the recipe editor, build your first recipe for the sequence of recipes, add an output node, and write it to staged data.

Build your second recipe, and select the staged data from your first recipe when adding the input data.

113
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

Continue to build and save your recipe as usual. The staged data is used as an input source when the recipe sequence runs.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Running Sequential Recipes with Staged Data Output (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Control Access to Data Based on a User’s Assigned Territories (Generally Available)

Allow users to see data in dashboards and insights only for the territories they’re assigned to in Territory Management 2.0. Reference
the territory hierarchy from your dataset security predicates. Previously, you could only reference user data.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In the recipe or dataflow that defines the dataset, add a flattened territory hierarchy (multivalued dimension) for each row. For
example:

Then, include this security predicate filter in the output node:

‘Territory2.TerritoryIDs’ in [“$UserTerritory2Ids”]:

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sales Territories (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Add Row-Level Security with a Security Predicate (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Row-Level Security Example based on Territory Hierarchy (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Give Users Read-Only Access to Recipes (Generally Available)

Let coworkers understand dataset content with the Recipes View Only permission. With this permission, when users visit Data Manager,
they see only the Recipes option. They can then open recipes and view their content but can’t edit, run, or delete them.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and select Permission Sets. Select or create a permission set. Click
System Permissions, and select Recipes View Only.

114
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes CRM Analytics

When users visit Data Manager and click a recipe name, they can view the recipe’s details in the recipe editor.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Learn about CRM Analytics Permission Set Licenses and User Permissions (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Help: Data Manager (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: View or Edit a Recipe (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Push Data from Government Cloud with Output Connectors

You can now use the Amazon S3, Salesforce, and Snowflake output connectors to push data from Salesforce Government Cloud customer
orgs. When using these connectors, data in transit is encrypted using FIPS 140 validated cryptography, in accordance with US federal
requirements.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Amazon S3 Output Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Output Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Snowflake Output Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve Salesforce External Connector Sync Performance with Incremental Syncs (Beta)
Improve your data sync times when using the Salesforce External connector by loading object data incrementally. An incremental sync
extracts only the latest changes to external Salesforce data.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Incremental syncs for the Salesforce External connector are a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms
at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product
Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer’s sole discretion.
How: In Data Manager, open a Salesforce external connection from the Connection tab and select the object that you want to sync. For
the Edit Connection Mode, select Incremental Sync (Beta).

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce External Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Incremental Sync for Salesforce Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

115
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Tableau

Load Data Incrementally (Beta)

Improve upload time when using the Analytics External Data API by loading CSV files incrementally. In addition to appending data, you
can now incrementally upsert and delete data.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

Note: Incremental uploads in the external data API is a pilot or beta service that’s subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements
- Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer’s sole discretion.
How: When using the Analytics External Data API to load data, set the mode to incremental.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Update the Data with Staged Data Output (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Tableau
Use Tableau to analyze, explore, and make decisions on your data with just a few clicks. Create engaging visualizations and embed them
in your Lightning pages to use them in your workflows. Tableau has enterprise analytics platform solutions for deep data exploration.
• Tableau Cloud is a secure, fully hosted, cloud-based, self-service platform. Use it to prepare your data, author, analyze, collaborate,
publish, and share. See Tableau Cloud Release Notes for the latest updates.
• Tableau Desktop is a data visualization tool. Use the intuitive, drag-and-drop interface to discover hidden insights and make
impactful business decisions. See Tableau Desktop and Web Authoring Release Notes for the latest updates.
• Tableau Prep is a data preparation tool. Use it to clean, shape, and combine data for analysis in Tableau. See Tableau Prep Release
Notes for the latest updates.
• Tableau Server is a secure, on-premises solution for deploying Tableau in your own environment. Use it to prepare your data,
author, analyze, collaborate, publish, and share. See Tableau Server Release Notes for the latest updates.
To learn more about Tableau products, go to Tableau Help.

Marketing Cloud Intelligence

Connect, harmonize, visualize, and act on your marketing data to optimize performance within campaigns, discover insights in real time,
and then act on them.
• Marketing Cloud Release Notes
• Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines Release Notes
• Marketing Cloud Intelligence Help Map

Accessibility Enhancements in Analytics

Learn about small but important changes that make analytics more accessible.
Where: Lightning Report and Dashboard changes apply to Lightning Experience in Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. CRM Analytics changes apply to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM
Analytics is available in Developer Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: Check out details about these changes.

116
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Commerce

• Contrast, keyboard navigation, focus order, and assistive text are enhanced for the Home and Browse tabs, Watchlist, and Notifications
panel.
• Action completion and screen change announcements are added.
• Descriptive assistive text enhancements are added for Collections.

Commerce
Get your store up and running faster with simplified product import and configuration, store branding, and translation features. Boost
conversions and elevate the shopping experience with engaging store pages, flexible search options, and an improved checkout flow.
Keep customers coming back with easy-to-configure promotions and coupons, customizable messages, and the new Orders Dashboard
that helps you analyze and adapt to customer trends.

IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce
Use the improved workflow to import products in bulk for your store. Delight customers with store pages that load fast and smart
search that predicts shopper queries. Translate the text on your store in minutes. Improve conversion rates with enhanced cart and
checkout performance. Easily connect a custom domain to your store.
Omnichannel Inventory
Add inventory and update existing records in bulk using a CSV or JSON file.
Salesforce Order Management
Service more orders more efficiently using bulk cancellations and letting customers cancel or return orders containing bundles.
Salesforce Payments
Process captures and refunds, and view where a payment originates from in the Payments Workspace. Consent to auto-published
updates for your Pay Now store. Easily add products to your payment links when using Pay Now with Commerce.

Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Use the improved workflow to import products in bulk for your store. Delight customers with store pages that load fast and smart search
that predicts shopper queries. Translate the text on your store in minutes. Improve conversion rates with enhanced cart and checkout
performance. Easily connect a custom domain to your store.

IN THIS SECTION:
Commerce Store Pages
Easily edit product details on the new Edit Product page. The updated address form includes auto-complete suggestions. Reassure
customers with a clear and detailed order confirmation page. Swiftly translate your store into another language using automated
tools. Enable server-side rendering to load D2C site pages faster.
Commerce Components
Show customers color swatches for your products right on the Product List. Make your store easier to navigate with multilevel menus.
Use the new header components to quickly brand your store.
Commerce Cart, Checkout, and Shipping
Collect a shipping phone number during checkout. Address fields now autocomplete and suggest addresses for shoppers on every
store page. Customers can more easily ship to multiple addresses. Continuous scrolling for cart items has improved accessibility.

117
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Commerce Promotions
Create targeted promotions using specific product attributes like size, color, or weight. Select attributes by applying rules to discounts
or qualifiers. Create coupons for discounts using the guided workflow.
Commerce Search
Enable predictive search suggestions in any search bar component. Display the most relevant product for a search term on the
Product List page.
Additional Commerce Features
Save time and stress by importing your products using the streamlined import interface. Make your customers feel valued by sending
them a customized welcome email. Open up potential sales by offering subscription-based products in your store. Refine merchandising
strategies by tracking order trends in the new Orders Dashboard.

Commerce Store Pages

Easily edit product details on the new Edit Product page. The updated address form includes auto-complete suggestions. Reassure
customers with a clear and detailed order confirmation page. Swiftly translate your store into another language using automated tools.
Enable server-side rendering to load D2C site pages faster.

IN THIS SECTION:
Edit Product Details with Fewer Clicks
Edit product details directly from an intuitive Edit Product page. Click a product to open the page. You can update the product name,
code, family, description, SKU, and pricing details.
Enhance the Shopping Experience with the Redesigned Address Page
The updated address form has a more modern design and includes a navigation menu. Auto-complete lets users fill in addresses
by entering the first few characters. You can also add a field to capture phone numbers.
Provide Complete Order Details on the Order Confirmation Page
Give your shoppers instant reassurance with a detailed order confirmation page, which now includes the order number, item details,
price breakdown, payment method, and shipping address. Shoppers can verify their order details immediately after purchase.
Authenticated users can always access this page, and guest users can access it until the guest cart expiration duration configured
in store settings.
Translate Your Store in Minutes
Reduce the time it takes to set up a store in a non-English language from hours to minutes with the new automated translation
feature. With just a few clicks, you can translate your store‘s text elements into Dutch, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Spanish, or
Portuguese.
Experience Improved D2C Store Performance
Get faster page load times, enhanced security, and improved search engine optimization when you create a new D2C store. D2C
store pages created after the Spring ’25 release are hosted on Experience Delivery, which uses server-side rendering to accelerate
performance of site components and key pages.
Create and Manage Product Attributes from Your Store Settings
Streamline product variation management by creating and editing attributes directly from your store’s product settings. Use the
new Product Attribute tab to update attributes or add options.

Edit Product Details with Fewer Clicks

Edit product details directly from an intuitive Edit Product page. Click a product to open the page. You can update the product name,
code, family, description, SKU, and pricing details.

118
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add a Product to a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance the Shopping Experience with the Redesigned Address Page

The updated address form has a more modern design and includes a navigation menu. Auto-complete lets users fill in addresses by
entering the first few characters. You can also add a field to capture phone numbers.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In your store, go to Website Design > Experience Builder. Open the Address Form page.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: LWR Store Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Provide Complete Order Details on the Order Confirmation Page

Give your shoppers instant reassurance with a detailed order confirmation page, which now includes the order number, item details,
price breakdown, payment method, and shipping address. Shoppers can verify their order details immediately after purchase. Authenticated
users can always access this page, and guest users can access it until the guest cart expiration duration configured in store settings.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

119
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Translate Your Store in Minutes

Reduce the time it takes to set up a store in a non-English language from hours to minutes with the new automated translation feature.
With just a few clicks, you can translate your store‘s text elements into Dutch, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Spanish, or Portuguese.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Go to Experience Builder > Settings > Languages, select a language, and click Export Content to download the XLF file. From
your email, open the translation tool and translate the XLF file. Import the translated file back into your store to automatically update
the language.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Localize Store Labels (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Experience Improved D2C Store Performance

Get faster page load times, enhanced security, and improved search engine optimization when you create a new D2C store. D2C store
pages created after the Spring ’25 release are hosted on Experience Delivery, which uses server-side rendering to accelerate performance
of site components and key pages.
Where: This change applies to D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Runtime Developer Guide: Server-Side Rendering (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Create and Manage Product Attributes from Your Store Settings

Streamline product variation management by creating and editing attributes directly from your store’s product settings. Use the new
Product Attribute tab to update attributes or add options.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In your store, go to Settings > Product and click Product Attribute.

120
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Attributes for Product Variations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Commerce Components
Show customers color swatches for your products right on the Product List. Make your store easier to navigate with multilevel menus.
Use the new header components to quickly brand your store.

IN THIS SECTION:
Brand Your Store Faster with the Enhanced Website Design Workspace
No more going back and forth between your Commerce app and Experience Builder while setting up your store. You can now add
branding, edit image and text components, and get real-time previews in the Website Design workspace. Other updates to the
workspace include component edits highlighted in the preview, improved preview options, and undo and redo icons to easily
reverse modifications.
Do More with the New Banner Component
Use the enhanced banner component to upload banner images to your product categories. The Banner component, which replaces
the Category Banner component, provides more control and flexibility to add images.
Build Multilevel Navigation Menus with the Mega Menu Component for D2C Stores
Help your site visitors find their way directly to the page that they’re looking for. The Mega Menu component shows multiple
navigation levels in one glance on your desktop and mobile sites. On sites created in Spring ’25 and later, the Mega Menu component
is included in the header by default.
Add Color Variations to the Product Detail Page
Help customers make more informed decisions by showing color variations on the product detail page. You can display the color
variations using a dropdown, pills, or swatches. For swatches, you can use color hex codes. Pills support any attribute and can display
text.

121
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Brand Your Store Faster with the Enhanced Website Design Workspace
No more going back and forth between your Commerce app and Experience Builder while setting up your store. You can now add
branding, edit image and text components, and get real-time previews in the Website Design workspace. Other updates to the workspace
include component edits highlighted in the preview, improved preview options, and undo and redo icons to easily reverse modifications.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Check out the new header layout options that are designed to minimize development effort.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Design a Store in the Commerce Website Design Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Do More with the New Banner Component

Use the enhanced banner component to upload banner images to your product categories. The Banner component, which replaces
the Category Banner component, provides more control and flexibility to add images.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Experience Builder, drag the Banner component to the Category page.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: LWR Store Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Add Media to Products and Categories (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Build Multilevel Navigation Menus with the Mega Menu Component for D2C Stores
Help your site visitors find their way directly to the page that they’re looking for. The Mega Menu component shows multiple navigation
levels in one glance on your desktop and mobile sites. On sites created in Spring ’25 and later, the Mega Menu component is included
in the header by default.
Where: This change applies to D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Find the Mega Menu component in the new Site Headers section of the component palette, and drag it to the canvas. A mega
menu listing can show up to three navigation levels.

122
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: LWR Store Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Add Color Variations to the Product Detail Page

Help customers make more informed decisions by showing color variations on the product detail page. You can display the color
variations using a dropdown, pills, or swatches. For swatches, you can use color hex codes. Pills support any attribute and can display
text.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In your store’s Settings, select Product. Use the guided setup to add color variations and attributes. In the Experience Builder
product variations component, configure how the color variations are displayed.

123
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Product Variations and Attributes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Commerce Cart, Checkout, and Shipping

Collect a shipping phone number during checkout. Address fields now autocomplete and suggest addresses for shoppers on every store
page. Customers can more easily ship to multiple addresses. Continuous scrolling for cart items has improved accessibility.

IN THIS SECTION:
Collect a Shipping Phone Number During Checkout
Add a field to collect a shipping phone number during checkout in case you need to contact the customer regarding their order.
Previously, you could collect only a billing phone number.

124
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Address Fields Autocomplete on All Store Pages

When a customer enters their address information on any page in your store, suggested matches are shown and the address fields
autocomplete. Address autocomplete is now enabled for B2B stores, Custom Checkout, Pay Now, and address forms on the My
Profile page. For D2C stores, address autocomplete was previously enabled only for shipping and billing address forms using Managed
Checkout.
Improve the User Experience for Shipping to Multiple Addresses
During checkout, customers see a more detailed list of cart items for each shipment, a cart summary with active loading states, and
improved visual queues for managing addresses and navigation. When a customer updates their information, the changes are now
saved incrementally, reducing the risk of losing their progress if they leave checkout. If you have an existing store, add the updated
Split Shipment Layout component to take advantage of the new features. Stores created in the Spring ‘25 release and later already
have the new component.
Jump to the Top or Bottom of the Cart Items List with One Click
Customers can now easily navigate to the top or bottom of large lists of cart items with “Skip to” buttons when your store uses the
Scroll option for cart item pagination. These buttons also improve usability for customers using screen readers or other accessibility
devices.
Improve the Shopping Experience with Enhanced Cart and Checkout Performance
Cart and checkout pages now load faster and are more responsive in LWR stores with the Cart Calculate API enabled. Customers
can add, edit, and delete cart items and coupons faster, providing a smoother checkout experience. Cart APIs can also handle cart
changes during checkout.

Collect a Shipping Phone Number During Checkout

Add a field to collect a shipping phone number during checkout in case you need to contact the customer regarding their order.
Previously, you could collect only a billing phone number.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce stores that use Custom Checkout in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
How: From Website Design, open Experience Builder and go to the Checkout page. Customize the Shipping Address component.

125
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Collect Shipping Information During Checkout (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Address Fields Autocomplete on All Store Pages

When a customer enters their address information on any page in your store, suggested matches are shown and the address fields
autocomplete. Address autocomplete is now enabled for B2B stores, Custom Checkout, Pay Now, and address forms on the My Profile
page. For D2C stores, address autocomplete was previously enabled only for shipping and billing address forms using Managed Checkout.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

126
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Address Autocomplete for B2B and D2C Stores (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Improve the User Experience for Shipping to Multiple Addresses

During checkout, customers see a more detailed list of cart items for each shipment, a cart summary with active loading states, and
improved visual queues for managing addresses and navigation. When a customer updates their information, the changes are now
saved incrementally, reducing the risk of losing their progress if they leave checkout. If you have an existing store, add the updated Split
Shipment Layout component to take advantage of the new features. Stores created in the Spring ‘25 release and later already have the
new component.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce and Salesforce Payments in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions. Shipping to multiple addresses isn’t available for stores using Managed Checkout.
How: First, enable split shipping in Commerce. If you have an existing store, in Experience Builder, go to the Split Shipment page and
add the new Split Shipment Layout component. The new layout provides a more detailed view of cart items (1), a cart summary (2),
improved visual queues (3), and clear navigation (4).

127
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Shipping to Multiple Addresses for Custom Checkout (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Collect Split Shipping Information During Checkout (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Jump to the Top or Bottom of the Cart Items List with One Click
Customers can now easily navigate to the top or bottom of large lists of cart items with “Skip to” buttons when your store uses the Scroll
option for cart item pagination. These buttons also improve usability for customers using screen readers or other accessibility devices.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Design the Cart Page in a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve the Shopping Experience with Enhanced Cart and Checkout Performance
Cart and checkout pages now load faster and are more responsive in LWR stores with the Cart Calculate API enabled. Customers can
add, edit, and delete cart items and coupons faster, providing a smoother checkout experience. Cart APIs can also handle cart changes
during checkout.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce Developer Guide: Enable and Disable the Cart Calculate API for a Webstore (can be outdated or
unavailable during release preview)
B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce Developer Guide: Simplified Cart Cleanup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

128
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Commerce Promotions
Create targeted promotions using specific product attributes like size, color, or weight. Select attributes by applying rules to discounts
or qualifiers. Create coupons for discounts using the guided workflow.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create a Promotion Based on Specific Product Variations
Offer targeted promotions based on specific attributes, such as size, color, or weight. Whether you choose a parent product or a
category as your discount or qualifier type, you can easily apply rules and conditions using attributes. For instance, when drafting a
discount or qualifier, you might choose whether it applies to a parent product or a category. If you select a parent product, you could
then apply a rule to choose an attribute like "Color" and set the value to "Red" to specify that the discount applies only to red items
within that product line.
Create Coupons Using a Guided Workflow
Use the guided workflow to set up custom coupon codes for any promotion that you want to offer. Now you don’t need to go to
the Promotion Record page to set up coupons in your store. Within the guided workflow, you can set start and end times for your
coupons, specify redemption limits per buyer, and set an overall limit on the total number of uses, all in one easy process.

Create a Promotion Based on Specific Product Variations

Offer targeted promotions based on specific attributes, such as size, color, or weight. Whether you choose a parent product or a category
as your discount or qualifier type, you can easily apply rules and conditions using attributes. For instance, when drafting a discount or
qualifier, you might choose whether it applies to a parent product or a category. If you select a parent product, you could then apply a
rule to choose an attribute like "Color" and set the value to "Red" to specify that the discount applies only to red items within that product
line.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Promotion Using the Guided Workflow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Promotions Using the Guided Workflow with Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Create Coupons Using a Guided Workflow

Use the guided workflow to set up custom coupon codes for any promotion that you want to offer. Now you don’t need to go to the
Promotion Record page to set up coupons in your store. Within the guided workflow, you can set start and end times for your coupons,
specify redemption limits per buyer, and set an overall limit on the total number of uses, all in one easy process.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In the guided workflow, click Add to customize the coupon section.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Promotion Using the Guided Workflow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Promotions Using the Guided Workflow with Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

129
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Commerce Search
Enable predictive search suggestions in any search bar component. Display the most relevant product for a search term on the Product
List page.

IN THIS SECTION:
Offer Shoppers Relevant Search Suggestions
Show shoppers search results based on data from your catalog. Predictive search suggestions uses terms from the Product Name,
SKU, Category Name, and Product Code fields to generate suggestions. For instance, if a shopper starts entering “blu” in the search
bar, the suggestions are limited to the products in your store. To improve the search experience, you can opt to turn on Commerce
Einstein. Commerce Einstein uses search activity from shoppers to learn the best search terms over time.
Boost Product Discovery with the Enhanced Variation Display
Help shoppers find what they want by providing the most relevant product based on their search term. Show only the best-matched
product, just the parent product, or the parent product with all its variations. Enriched search results include interactive color swatches
or summarized text to showcase product variations. For example, you can configure the page to group product variations by color
and size or show a color swatch to represent other variations. When you click the product, the detail page shows the different
variations.

Offer Shoppers Relevant Search Suggestions

Show shoppers search results based on data from your catalog. Predictive search suggestions uses terms from the Product Name, SKU,
Category Name, and Product Code fields to generate suggestions. For instance, if a shopper starts entering “blu” in the search bar, the
suggestions are limited to the products in your store. To improve the search experience, you can opt to turn on Commerce Einstein.
Commerce Einstein uses search activity from shoppers to learn the best search terms over time.
Where: This change applies to D2C and B2B Commerce in Lightning Experience.
How: Perform a full update of the search index. Then, in any search component, select Enable Search Suggestions.

130
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Commerce Administrator Considerations for Product Searchability (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Commerce Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Commerce Search Index Update Methods (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Update the Commerce Search Index (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Boost Product Discovery with the Enhanced Variation Display

Help shoppers find what they want by providing the most relevant product based on their search term. Show only the best-matched
product, just the parent product, or the parent product with all its variations. Enriched search results include interactive color swatches
or summarized text to showcase product variations. For example, you can configure the page to group product variations by color and
size or show a color swatch to represent other variations. When you click the product, the detail page shows the different variations.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From your store Settings, go to Search > Results Display Settings. Under Product Variation Display Settings, select a variation
display.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get to Know Product Variation Grouping (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Additional Commerce Features

Save time and stress by importing your products using the streamlined import interface. Make your customers feel valued by sending
them a customized welcome email. Open up potential sales by offering subscription-based products in your store. Refine merchandising
strategies by tracking order trends in the new Orders Dashboard.

131
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

IN THIS SECTION:
Sell and Manage Digital Subscriptions in B2B and D2C Stores (Generally Available)
Create, manage, and sell digital subscription products through an integration with Salesforce Revenue Cloud. Bill and collect payment
from customers on a defined schedule, and manage subscription pricing policies. Customers can view or cancel their active
subscriptions and update payment methods from their account. Commerce Subscriptions requires updating your pricing engine to
use Salesforce Pricing. Commerce Subscriptions isn’t included with the Commerce license. To purchase it, contact your account
representative.
Analyze Order Trends on the Commerce Orders Dashboard
Get insights into order volume, fulfillment efficiency, returns, and refunds using the Orders dashboard. Analyze trends in cancellations,
appeasements, and product returns to make informed decisions that streamline operations, reduce costs, and improve customer
satisfaction.
Get Notified When a Customer Abandons a Shopping Cart
Use the Abandoned Cart event in an automation event-triggered flow to initiate an action, such as sending the customer an email
or creating a support case. You can also subscribe to the WebCartAbandonedEvent platform event to get notified when a customer
abandons a shopping cart.
Send a Customized Welcome Email to New Users
Welcome newly registered users with a customized email instead of the default plain text message. Add branding, rich text, and
tailored content. In the Messaging workspace, enable Welcome Email. You can customize the email template and modify the
welcome email flow.
Streamline Product Imports in the Enhanced Workspace
Import products in the enhanced Products workspace using the provided CSV file template, or create your own CSV file and map
its fields to corresponding Salesforce fields. Make future imports quicker by saving the field mappings. Preview and validate data,
track the import progress, and get notifications upon completion.
Add Variations During Product Creation
Add and manage product variations while creating or editing a product.
Connect Your Custom Domain to Your Store from the Commerce App
Enhance your B2B or D2C store by setting up a content delivery network (CDN) and linking your third-party domain to your store
with just a few clicks. You no longer need to navigate through multiple steps. Instead, connect your store to your domain from your
Commerce app directly. After you enter your domain address, you’re guided on the path to connect your store. Plus, if you don’t yet
own a domain, you can purchase one from the list of example registrars.
Customize and Extend Commerce Messages Using Flow
Commerce Messaging is now integrated with Flow. Use Flow Builder to add more elements and actions to the default message
flows, such as sending the customer an SMS message or creating a support case.
Share Knowledge Articles with Your Customers
Use Salesforce Knowledge to embed knowledge articles directly in your store. Knowledge articles can answer your customers'
frequently asked questions and explain common procedures. You can create FAQ pages and embed knowledge in support widgets.
Knowledge articles help answer customer questions, provide a better shopping experience, and decrease the burden on support.

Sell and Manage Digital Subscriptions in B2B and D2C Stores (Generally Available)
Create, manage, and sell digital subscription products through an integration with Salesforce Revenue Cloud. Bill and collect payment
from customers on a defined schedule, and manage subscription pricing policies. Customers can view or cancel their active subscriptions
and update payment methods from their account. Commerce Subscriptions requires updating your pricing engine to use Salesforce
Pricing. Commerce Subscriptions isn’t included with the Commerce license. To purchase it, contact your account representative.

132
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce and Revenue Cloud in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions
where Salesforce Pricing is enabled. Commerce Subscriptions requires Salesforce Payments.
How: From your store’s Pricing settings, enable Salesforce Pricing and Subscriptions. Enabling these features applies to every store in
your Commerce org.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sell Subscription Products in a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Analyze Order Trends on the Commerce Orders Dashboard

Get insights into order volume, fulfillment efficiency, returns, and refunds using the Orders dashboard. Analyze trends in cancellations,
appeasements, and product returns to make informed decisions that streamline operations, reduce costs, and improve customer
satisfaction.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In your store, go to Insights > Orders. Select a time period (1). View the count and value of orders and returns (2), and stay on
top of fulfillment status, cancellations, returns, and refunds (3). Get reports on product returns (4) and discounts offered as appeasements
(5).

133
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Interpreting Commerce Analytics Dashboards (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

134
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Get Notified When a Customer Abandons a Shopping Cart

Use the Abandoned Cart event in an automation event-triggered flow to initiate an action, such as sending the customer an email or
creating a support case. You can also subscribe to the WebCartAbandonedEvent platform event to get notified when a customer
abandons a shopping cart.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: When you create an automation event-triggered flow, select Abandoned Cart from the Event Library. Configure the event, add
elements and actions, and save the flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Automate Your Responses to Common Customer Actions with Out-of-the-Box Automation Event-Triggered
Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Platform Events Developer Guide: WebCartAbandonedEvent (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Send a Customized Welcome Email to New Users

Welcome newly registered users with a customized email instead of the default plain text message. Add branding, rich text, and tailored
content. In the Messaging workspace, enable Welcome Email. You can customize the email template and modify the welcome email
flow.

135
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automate Customer Notifications in the Commerce Messaging Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Streamline Product Imports in the Enhanced Workspace

Import products in the enhanced Products workspace using the provided CSV file template, or create your own CSV file and map its
fields to corresponding Salesforce fields. Make future imports quicker by saving the field mappings. Preview and validate data, track the
import progress, and get notifications upon completion.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From your store, go to Merchandising > Products > Import. Use the template to add and update products, or upload your CSV
file.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Import Data Globally (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: CSV File Format for Importing Commerce Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Add Variations During Product Creation

Add and manage product variations while creating or editing a product.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: When adding or updating a product, select This product has variations. Add attributes, such as size and color, and choose how
to display the information.

136
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add a Product to a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Product Variations and Attributes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Connect Your Custom Domain to Your Store from the Commerce App
Enhance your B2B or D2C store by setting up a content delivery network (CDN) and linking your third-party domain to your store with
just a few clicks. You no longer need to navigate through multiple steps. Instead, connect your store to your domain from your Commerce
app directly. After you enter your domain address, you’re guided on the path to connect your store. Plus, if you don’t yet own a domain,
you can purchase one from the list of example registrars.
Where: This change applies to Starter, B2B Commerce, and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From your store, under Settings, click Domains, and enter your domain address.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure a Custom Domain and CDN (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Customize and Extend Commerce Messages Using Flow

Commerce Messaging is now integrated with Flow. Use Flow Builder to add more elements and actions to the default message flows,
such as sending the customer an SMS message or creating a support case.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

How: In the navigation sidebar, select Settings | Messaging. To modify the message flow, click and select Edit Flow.

137
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Omnichannel Inventory

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automate Customer Notifications in the Commerce Messaging Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Share Knowledge Articles with Your Customers

Use Salesforce Knowledge to embed knowledge articles directly in your store. Knowledge articles can answer your customers' frequently
asked questions and explain common procedures. You can create FAQ pages and embed knowledge in support widgets. Knowledge
articles help answer customer questions, provide a better shopping experience, and decrease the burden on support.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Knowledge Base with Salesforce Knowledge (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Omnichannel Inventory
Add inventory and update existing records in bulk using a CSV or JSON file.

IN THIS SECTION:
Import Inventory in Bulk
Add inventory and update existing records in bulk using the Omnichannel Inventory app instead of APIs or adding records individually.
Use the provided sample CSV file to prepare your inventory. You can then import the information using either a CSV or JSON file.

Import Inventory in Bulk

Add inventory and update existing records in bulk using the Omnichannel Inventory app instead of APIs or adding records individually.
Use the provided sample CSV file to prepare your inventory. You can then import the information using either a CSV or JSON file.
How: In the Omnichannel Inventory app, go to the Inventory Lookup tab. Click Import, upload your CSV or JSON file, and click Import.

138
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Order Management

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Omnichannel Inventory App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Order Management

Service more orders more efficiently using bulk cancellations and letting customers cancel or return orders containing bundles.

IN THIS SECTION:
Cancel, Return, and Route Orders Containing Product Bundles
Let customers cancel or return orders that contain bundles. You can also use Salesforce Routing to route and fulfill orders that contain
bundles.
Cancel Orders in Bulk
Efficiently cancel large orders using bulk cancellation.

Cancel, Return, and Route Orders Containing Product Bundles

Let customers cancel or return orders that contain bundles. You can also use Salesforce Routing to route and fulfill orders that contain
bundles.
Where: This change applies to Order Management for B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Unlimited, Developer, and Enterprise
editions with the Order Management Growth license.

139
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Payments

How: Download the Distributed Order Management package for your org. If you've previously downloaded the package, download it
again for the most up-to-date version. Then modify your Return, RMA, and Cancellation flows.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Bundles (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Cancel Orders in Bulk

Efficiently cancel large orders using bulk cancellation.
Where: This change applies to Order Management in Unlimited, Developer, and Enterprise editions.
How: Use the Cancel All APIs to set up bulk cancellation.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Cancel All Preview (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Cancel All Submit (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Payments
Process captures and refunds, and view where a payment originates from in the Payments Workspace. Consent to auto-published
updates for your Pay Now store. Easily add products to your payment links when using Pay Now with Commerce.

IN THIS SECTION:
Elevate Your Customers’ Shopping Experience with the Enhanced Pay Now Store
Include products with the amount in the payment link to let your customers know exactly what they’re paying for. If you have a B2B
or D2C store that uses Pay Now, you can monitor key performance metrics on the Insights dashboard to make more-informed
business decisions. Upgrade from custom to managed checkout with a one-way switch to deliver a native checkout experience to
your customers.
Capture or Refund Payments in the Payments Workspace
Manage transactions in one place. You no longer have to go to the dashboard of the payment gateway, such as Stripe, to capture
or refund payments. The status of the payment determines which action is available. Capture is available only if the status is Authorized.
Refund is available only if the status is Captured or Succeeded.
View Where a Payment Originates from in the Payments Workspace
Track payment sources to integrate Salesforce products with Payments. Each payment now shows the Salesforce application and
the related object linked to the payment being made. Use the source information to integrate Payments into different Salesforce
products.

Elevate Your Customers’ Shopping Experience with the Enhanced Pay Now Store
Include products with the amount in the payment link to let your customers know exactly what they’re paying for. If you have a B2B or
D2C store that uses Pay Now, you can monitor key performance metrics on the Insights dashboard to make more-informed business
decisions. Upgrade from custom to managed checkout with a one-way switch to deliver a native checkout experience to your customers.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Payments in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: On the Pay Now store home page, add products from Recommended Actions (1), view the Insights dashboard (2).

140
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Payments

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set up Pay Now with the Commerce Setup Assistant (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Checkout for a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Capture or Refund Payments in the Payments Workspace

Manage transactions in one place. You no longer have to go to the dashboard of the payment gateway, such as Stripe, to capture or
refund payments. The status of the payment determines which action is available. Capture is available only if the status is Authorized.
Refund is available only if the status is Captured or Succeeded.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Payments in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In the Payments workspace, click the payment intent’s dropdown menu, and select the action that you want to take. Here’s a
refund action.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Payment Activity in the Payments Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

View Where a Payment Originates from in the Payments Workspace

Track payment sources to integrate Salesforce products with Payments. Each payment now shows the Salesforce application and the
related object linked to the payment being made. Use the source information to integrate Payments into different Salesforce products.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Payments in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

141
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Customization

How: Select a payment in the Payments Workspace. On the Details tab, click the payment initiation source link to view the record. You
can also filter the list by the application or object field to search for source information.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Payments Monitoring (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Customization
Sort by multiple columns, easily manage roles and permission sets, and work more efficiently thanks to enhancements to list views and
related lists. Manage included permission sets in permission set groups via summaries.

IN THIS SECTION:
List Views
List views for custom and standard objects render faster with Lightning Web Components (LWC). Sorting list views by multiple
columns is generally available, and you can also sort related lists by multiple columns. The release update to block users with only
the Manage Public List Views permission from seeing roles and role hierarchies when they edit public list views is enforced. Manage
roles and permission sets more easily using enhanced list views.
Permissions
Updates to the permission set summary view simplify user access management. Assign new View All Fields object-level permissions
to users who require widespread access. The View All and Modify All object permissions have new names.
Fields
The Salesforce Classic datepicker for the Date and DateTime fields now supports keyboard shortcuts. Custom fields limit for activities
is increased from 100 to 300 for Salesforce orgs with fewer than 400 million activities.
Globalization
ICU locale formats keep your data consistent across regions. Deliver a more tailored global experience with expanded English
language variations as platform-only languages.
Salesforce Connect
Increased limits for some Salesforce Connect adapters help you access external data with confidence. The Salesforce Connect SQL
adapter now supports Snowflake views.

142
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes List Views

Sharing
In the public group access summary, improvements make it easier to see related sharing rules, list views, and queues. Get notified
when your sharing rule exposes data to external users. Review the release update on securing roles in sandboxes.
General Setup
Make the power of AI work for you by adding agent quick actions to your record pages. Get a better snapshot of your custom
metadata type usage with enhancements to the System Overview page.

List Views
List views for custom and standard objects render faster with Lightning Web Components (LWC). Sorting list views by multiple columns
is generally available, and you can also sort related lists by multiple columns. The release update to block users with only the Manage
Public List Views permission from seeing roles and role hierarchies when they edit public list views is enforced. Manage roles and
permission sets more easily using enhanced list views.

IN THIS SECTION:
Get Improved Performance with the Enhanced Role List View
With a new user experience, you can view, sort, and filter user roles in a list format and edit roles inline. This enhancement makes it
easier to manage role-based access control so that users see the data that they need.
Manage Permissions Sets with the Enhanced List View
This revamped user experience provides streamlined navigation, improved filtering options, search capabilities, and a more intuitive
layout. This enhancement makes it easier to manage and navigate through permission sets. Key improvements include advanced
filtering options, a more organized layout, and quicker access to critical actions.
View and Filter on More Fields in the Enhanced User List View
You can now work with user list views more effectively with new added fields. Add the Delegated Approver, End of Day, Is Partner,
Start of Day, User Verified Email, User Verified Mobile Number and Password Expiration Date fields to your user list views. Then sort,
filter, search, and edit your user records using these fields
Get Better Performance for List Views
To improve performance and meet the latest accessibility standards, list views for custom and standard objects now render with
Lightning Web Components (LWC) instead of Aura. LWC, Salesforce’s newest framework, delivers your data faster and makes the
latest features available for your list views. List views for custom and standard objects rendered with LWC have some differences,
but overall, how your users work in list views hasn’t changed. Previously, list views rendered with LWC only in a sandbox.
Delivered Idea: Sort List Views by Multiple Columns (Generally Available)
To see your data in a more intuitive way and to make your list views more actionable, you can now sort list views on object home
pages by up to five columns. Select the columns to sort by and whether to sort each column in ascending or descending order. To
return to sorting by a single column, click a column header that isn’t included in your multiple column sort. Sorting by multiple
columns affects only your user preferences, and you can’t save your multi-column sorting configuration as a default. We delivered
this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Delivered Idea: Organize Your Data with Multi-Column Sorting for Related Lists
To organize and understand your data better, sort related lists by up to five columns. Quickly identify patterns and trends so that
you can make informed decisions. Previously, you could sort a related list by only a single column. We delivered this feature thanks
to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Enforce View Roles and Role Hierarchy Permission When Editing Public List View Visibility (Release Update)
With this update, only users with the View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission can see or select from your org’s list of roles when
they edit public list view visibility. This update was first available in Spring ’24. If you don’t use roles, this update has no impact.

143
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes List Views

Simplify Related List Component Configuration

When you configure a Dynamic Related List–Single component or a Related List–Single component, you now see the API names
of the available related lists. Previously, you saw only the names of the related lists, which was confusing if multiple objects had the
same name or similar names. Every API name is unique, so the additional information makes it easier to identify and select the related
list that you want.
Edit List Filters Option Is No Longer Available
The Edit List Filters option in List Views Control is removed from all list views. To edit your list view filters, click the Filters icon.
Previously, the Edit List Filters option was unavailable only for list views rendered with Lightning Web Components (LWC).

Get Improved Performance with the Enhanced Role List View

With a new user experience, you can view, sort, and filter user roles in a list format and edit roles inline. This enhancement makes it easier
to manage role-based access control so that users see the data that they need.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select User Management Settings. Enable Enhanced Role List
View. To view the enhanced page, go to the Roles Setup page.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Roles in the Enhanced Role List View (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Manage Permissions Sets with the Enhanced List View

This revamped user experience provides streamlined navigation, improved filtering options, search capabilities, and a more intuitive
layout. This enhancement makes it easier to manage and navigate through permission sets. Key improvements include advanced filtering
options, a more organized layout, and quicker access to critical actions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select User Management Settings. Enable Enhanced Permission
Set List View. To view the enhanced page, go to the Permissions Sets Setup page.

144
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes List Views

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Permission Sets in the Enhanced Permission Set List View (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

View and Filter on More Fields in the Enhanced User List View
You can now work with user list views more effectively with new added fields. Add the Delegated Approver, End of Day, Is Partner, Start
of Day, User Verified Email, User Verified Mobile Number and Password Expiration Date fields to your user list views. Then sort, filter,
search, and edit your user records using these fields
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select User Management Settings. Enable Enhanced User List
View. To view the enhanced page, from Setup, go to the Users page. To change and reorder the columns displayed in a list view, select
Select Fields to Display.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Users in the Enhanced User List View (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get Better Performance for List Views

To improve performance and meet the latest accessibility standards, list views for custom and standard objects now render with Lightning
Web Components (LWC) instead of Aura. LWC, Salesforce’s newest framework, delivers your data faster and makes the latest features
available for your list views. List views for custom and standard objects rendered with LWC have some differences, but overall, how your
users work in list views hasn’t changed. Previously, list views rendered with LWC only in a sandbox.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions, except Starter and Pro Suite.
When: This update is available on a rolling basis starting in Spring ’25.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: List Views Rendered with Lightning Web Components (LWC)

145
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes List Views

Sort List Views by Multiple Columns (Generally Available)

To see your data in a more intuitive way and to make your list views more actionable, you can now sort list views on object home pages
by up to five columns. Select the columns to sort by and whether to sort each column in ascending or descending order. To return to
sorting by a single column, click a column header that isn’t included in your multiple column sort. Sorting by multiple columns affects
only your user preferences, and you can’t save your multi-column sorting configuration as a default. We delivered this feature thanks to
your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions, except Starter and Pro Suite.
When: Sort list views by multiple columns is generally available on a rolling basis starting in Spring ’25.
How: To sort a list view by multiple columns, from a list view, click , and then select the columns to include in the sort. Click Apply.

For example, create a Cases list view that’s sorted by Contact Name, then by Priority, and then by Date/Time Opened. Or you can create
an Opportunities list view sorted by Close Date and then by Amount.

Your list sort configuration is saved until you modify or clear it. To return to the default sort order, click , and then select Reset Column
Sorting.
If you don’t see the option to sort list views by multiple columns yet, you can still enable the beta version of the feature. From Setup, in
the Quick Find box, enter User Interface and select it. Then select Enable sort by multiple columns (Beta). After you opt in
to use the beta feature, list views for all supported custom and standard objects are rendered with Lightning Web Components (LWC)
instead of with Aura.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sort List Views (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

146
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes List Views

Organize Your Data with Multi-Column Sorting for Related Lists

To organize and understand your data better, sort related lists by up to five columns. Quickly identify patterns and trends so that you
can make informed decisions. Previously, you could sort a related list by only a single column. We delivered this feature thanks to your
ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions except Starter and Pro Suite.
How: To sort by multiple columns, from a related list, click View All, and then click . Select the columns to include in the sort, and
then click Apply.

For example, let’s say that you have an Opportunities related list on the Account page. Sort the Opportunities related list by Stage and
then by Amount.

Your list sort configuration is saved until you modify or clear it. To return to the default sort order, click , and then select Reset Column
Sorting.
Sort by multiple columns affects only your user preferences. You can’t save your multi-column sorting configuration as a default.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Work with Related Lists in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enforce View Roles and Role Hierarchy Permission When Editing Public List View
Visibility (Release Update)
With this update, only users with the View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission can see or select from your org’s list of roles when they
edit public list view visibility. This update was first available in Spring ’24. If you don’t use roles, this update has no impact.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

147
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Permissions

When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: This security update blocks users with only the Manage Public List Views permission from seeing roles and role hierarchies when
they edit public list views.
How: To edit public list views, a user needs the Manage Public List Views permission. After you enable this update, also grant a user the
View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission so that they can make list views visible to roles. Alternatively, have a user who already has the
View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission grant access to list views. A user with only the Manage Public List Views permission can still
make a list view visible to Public Groups or set a list view to fully public or private.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Enforce
View Roles and Role Hierarchy Permission When Editing Public List View Visibility, follow the testing and activation steps.

Simplify Related List Component Configuration

When you configure a Dynamic Related List–Single component or a Related List–Single component, you now see the API names of the
available related lists. Previously, you saw only the names of the related lists, which was confusing if multiple objects had the same name
or similar names. Every API name is unique, so the additional information makes it easier to identify and select the related list that you
want.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions
How: In Lightning App Builder, add a Dynamic Related List–Single component or a Related List–Single component to a page. Click the
new component, and then click the Related List dropdown menu. Under each available related list, the API name is listed.

Edit List Filters Option Is No Longer Available

The Edit List Filters option in List Views Control is removed from all list views. To edit your list view filters, click the Filters icon. Previously,
the Edit List Filters option was unavailable only for list views rendered with Lightning Web Components (LWC).
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.

Permissions
Updates to the permission set summary view simplify user access management. Assign new View All Fields object-level permissions to
users who require widespread access. The View All and Modify All object permissions have new names.

148
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Permissions

IN THIS SECTION:
Delivered Idea: Manage Included Permission Sets in Permission Set Groups via Summaries
Update access more efficiently by specifying which permission set groups include a permission set directly from the permission set’s
summary. Previously, to manage included permission sets, you were required to navigate to each permission set group’s page. We
delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Delivered Idea: Allow Users to View All Fields for a Specified Object
It’s easier to manage permissions for users who require broad data access. Assign the object-level View All Fields permission, which
grants assignees access to all fields and field data for a specific object. This permission is available for all standard and custom objects
that support field permissions. Users are automatically granted access for any new fields created for the object. We delivered this
feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
The View All and Modify All Object Permissions Have New Names
To better represent the access granted by these object permissions, the View All object permission is now named View All Records,
and the Modify All object permission is now named Modify All Records.
Remove User and Custom Permissions in Permission Set Summaries
Save time and clicks by removing user and custom permissions from a permission set's summary view. Previously, you only saw
which permissions were enabled and weren’t able to make any edits. This change introduces editability to the summary view, with
additional enhancements planned for future releases.

Manage Included Permission Sets in Permission Set Groups via Summaries

Update access more efficiently by specifying which permission set groups include a permission set directly from the permission set’s
summary. Previously, to manage included permission sets, you were required to navigate to each permission set group’s page. We
delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Contact Manager, Group, Essentials,
Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Database.com editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select Permission Sets. Select a permission set, and
then click View Summary. In the Related Permission Set Groups tab, click Add or Remove.

149
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Permissions

SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Add Permission Set to Permission Set Group from Permission Set
IdeaExchange: Add Permission Set Groups to Manage Assignments
Salesforce Help: View Permissions Enabled in a Permission Set or Permission Set Group (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Add Permission Sets to a Permission Set Group (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Allow Users to View All Fields for a Specified Object

It’s easier to manage permissions for users who require broad data access. Assign the object-level View All Fields permission, which
grants assignees access to all fields and field data for a specific object. This permission is available for all standard and custom objects
that support field permissions. Users are automatically granted access for any new fields created for the object. We delivered this feature
thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: We recommend that you manage permissions in permission sets, not profiles. In Setup, select a permission set. On the Object
Settings page for a specific object, enable the View All Fields permission, and then save.

150
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Permissions

SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Permission Sets - Read/Edit All Fields Permission
Salesforce Help: “View All” and “Modify All” Permissions Overview (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Object Permissions in Permission Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

The View All and Modify All Object Permissions Have New Names
To better represent the access granted by these object permissions, the View All object permission is now named View All Records, and
the Modify All object permission is now named Modify All Records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: You see these updated permission names in your profiles and permission sets automatically. No action is required.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Object Permissions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: “View All” and “Modify All” Permissions Overview (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

151
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Permissions

Remove User and Custom Permissions in Permission Set Summaries

Save time and clicks by removing user and custom permissions from a permission set's summary view. Previously, you only saw which
permissions were enabled and weren’t able to make any edits. This change introduces editability to the summary view, with additional
enhancements planned for future releases.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Contact Manager, Group, Essentials,
Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Database.com editions.
How: In Setup, select a permission set, and then click View Summary. In the User Permissions or Custom Permissions tabs, select
permissions, and then click Remove.

For object and field permissions, you continue to make edits on the permission set’s Object Settings page. To add any permission types
to a permission set, you still make edits from the relevant settings pages.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Permissions Enabled in a Permission Set or Permission Set Group (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable User Permissions in Permission Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Custom Permissions in Permission Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

152
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Fields

Fields
The Salesforce Classic datepicker for the Date and DateTime fields now supports keyboard shortcuts. Custom fields limit for activities is
increased from 100 to 300 for Salesforce orgs with fewer than 400 million activities.

IN THIS SECTION:
Use Keyboard Shortcuts to Select Calendar Dates in Salesforce Classic
The datepicker in Salesforce Classic has improved accessibility options, including keyboard navigation. You can use the datepicker
keyboard shortcuts on pages opened in Salesforce Classic and on Visualforce pages where <apex:inputField> is associated
with a Date or DateTime field.
Capture More Data with the Increased Limit of Custom Fields for Activities
If your Salesforce org has fewer than 400 million activities, you can now capture more information about your sales process than
ever before with 300 custom fields. The previous limit was 100. Track more data and create more powerful reports, with no complex
workarounds required. You can also implement more features and integrations.
Troubleshoot a Deployment That Contains a Custom Field Type Conversion
You can get an error when you use the metadata deploy() method or run a package upgrade and either of these deployments
contains the conversion of a custom field from one data type to another. The error occurs if a deployment changes the data type of
one or more custom fields and the objects that contain the affected custom fields contain a large amount of data. The limit is 85
million custom field type conversions.

Use Keyboard Shortcuts to Select Calendar Dates in Salesforce Classic

The datepicker in Salesforce Classic has improved accessibility options, including keyboard navigation. You can use the datepicker
keyboard shortcuts on pages opened in Salesforce Classic and on Visualforce pages where <apex:inputField> is associated with
a Date or DateTime field.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: Use these keyboard shortcuts.

Action Keyboard Shortcut

Open the datepicker. Tab to the date input field. Tab again to focus the datepicker.

Cycle focus through the calendar, the Today button, the Previous Month Tab
button ( ), the Month dropdown, the Next Month button ( ), and
the Year dropdown.

Select a day. Tab to the calendar. Then use the arrow keys to navigate
between days. To select the day in focus, press Enter, and then
close the datepicker.

Select a month. Tab to the Month dropdown. To navigate between months,

use the Up and Down arrow keys. To select the month, press
Enter. Alternatively, tab to the Previous Month button ( )
or the Next Month button ( ) button. To cycle through
months, press Enter. To select the month, tab to another part
of the datepicker.

153
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Globalization

Action Keyboard Shortcut

Select a year. Tab to the Year dropdown. To navigate between years, use
the Up and Down arrow keys. To select a year, press Enter.

Select today’s date. Tab to the Today button, and then press Enter.

Close the datepicker without selecting a date. Esc

Close the datepicker after selecting a date. Enter

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Keyboard Shortcuts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Capture More Data with the Increased Limit of Custom Fields for Activities
If your Salesforce org has fewer than 400 million activities, you can now capture more information about your sales process than ever
before with 300 custom fields. The previous limit was 100. Track more data and create more powerful reports, with no complex workarounds
required. You can also implement more features and integrations.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Custom Fields Allowed Per Object (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Troubleshoot a Deployment That Contains a Custom Field Type Conversion

You can get an error when you use the metadata deploy() method or run a package upgrade and either of these deployments
contains the conversion of a custom field from one data type to another. The error occurs if a deployment changes the data type of one
or more custom fields and the objects that contain the affected custom fields contain a large amount of data. The limit is 85 million
custom field type conversions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the mobile app in
all editions.
How: In a deployment, if you're converting a custom field from text to picklist, the deployment could fail with this error.
The deployment failed because we couldn’t change the data type of one or more custom
fields. To resolve this error, see this knowledge article.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations When Changing a Custom Field Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Related Knowledge Article (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Globalization
ICU locale formats keep your data consistent across regions. Deliver a more tailored global experience with expanded English language
variations as platform-only languages.

154
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Globalization

IN THIS SECTION:
Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release Update)
With this update, the International Components for Unicode (ICU) locale formats replace Oracle’s Java Development Kit (JDK) locale
formats in Salesforce. Locales control the format for dates, times, currencies, addresses, names, and numeric values. ICU sets the
international standard for these formats. The ICU locale formats provide a consistent experience across the platform and improve
integration with ICU-compliant applications across the globe. This update was first made available in Winter ’20 and is enforced in
Spring ’25.
Present Your Custom Functionality in New English Language Variations
To help your global users use Salesforce in their language, use German (Liechtenstein), Spanish (Andorra), Svenska (Finland), and
the 30 new English language variations to localize your apps, custom labels, custom objects, and field names. These platform-only
languages are available everywhere that you can select a language in the application. However, all standard Salesforce labels default
to English. Use Translation Workbench to customize the translations for these languages.
Review Updated Label Translations
To improve accuracy and your users’ experience, we updated the translations for some standard object, tab, and field names for
these languages: Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Czech, Danish, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian,
Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Russian, Slovenian, Spanish, Spanish (Mexico), Swedish, Thai, and Ukrainian.

Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release Update)

With this update, the International Components for Unicode (ICU) locale formats replace Oracle’s Java Development Kit (JDK) locale
formats in Salesforce. Locales control the format for dates, times, currencies, addresses, names, and numeric values. ICU sets the
international standard for these formats. The ICU locale formats provide a consistent experience across the platform and improve
integration with ICU-compliant applications across the globe. This update was first made available in Winter ’20 and is enforced in Spring
’25.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions,
except Database.com.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and then click the maintenance tab.
Salesforce orgs created in Winter ’20 or later have ICU locale formats enabled by default. You can defer the enforcement until Summer
’25 through the UI. Salesforce emails admins 30 to 60 days before the ICU enablement for their orgs. After the ICU locale formats are
enabled, Salesforce also notifies admins of that event.
How: To enable this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To
Enable ICU Locale Formats, follow the testing and activation steps.
The English (Canada) locale (en_CA) requires separate activation. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and
select User Interface. Then select Enable ICU formats for en_CA, and save your changes.
To defer the enforcement of the ICU locale formats until Summer ’25, in Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and
select User Interface. Then deselect Enable ICU locale formats as part of the scheduled rollout and save your changes. This option
is visible only if your org uses the JDK locale formats.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable the ICU Locale Formats

155
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Connect

Present Your Custom Functionality in New English Language Variations

To help your global users use Salesforce in their language, use German (Liechtenstein), Spanish (Andorra), Svenska (Finland), and the 30
new English language variations to localize your apps, custom labels, custom objects, and field names. These platform-only languages
are available everywhere that you can select a language in the application. However, all standard Salesforce labels default to English.
Use Translation Workbench to customize the translations for these languages.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in all editions, except
Database.com.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Salesforce Locale Name Changes in Spring ’25
Salesforce Help: Supported Languages
Salesforce Help: Manage Your Translations

Review Updated Label Translations

To improve accuracy and your users’ experience, we updated the translations for some standard object, tab, and field names for these
languages: Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Czech, Danish, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian, Japanese,
Korean, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Russian, Slovenian, Spanish, Spanish (Mexico), Swedish, Thai, and Ukrainian.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
How: To review the changes, see Review Spring ’25 Updated Label Translations and download the attached list of changes. If you want
to use a different translation for tab and field labels, you can change the name.

Salesforce Connect
Increased limits for some Salesforce Connect adapters help you access external data with confidence. The Salesforce Connect SQL adapter
now supports Snowflake views.

IN THIS SECTION:
Access Data Without Limits with Salesforce Connect
Access data outside of your Salesforce org without worrying about how many new rows your adapter creates or retrieves each hour.
Limits for new rows are removed for the OData 4.01 adapter, GraphQL adapter, and the SQL adapters for Amazon Athena and
Snowflake. Previously, these Salesforce Connect adapters could retrieve or create up to 100,000 new rows per hour. This feature
doesn’t impact callout limits.
See Snowflake Views with the Salesforce Connect SQL Adapter
Now you can directly access Snowflake query results as views in your Salesforce org with the Salesforce Connect SQL adapter.
Previously, to access Snowflake views, you first created a dynamic table in Snowflake using the view.

Access Data Without Limits with Salesforce Connect

Access data outside of your Salesforce org without worrying about how many new rows your adapter creates or retrieves each hour.
Limits for new rows are removed for the OData 4.01 adapter, GraphQL adapter, and the SQL adapters for Amazon Athena and Snowflake.
Previously, these Salesforce Connect adapters could retrieve or create up to 100,000 new rows per hour. This feature doesn’t impact
callout limits.

156
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sharing

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions hosted on Hyperforce.
When: This functionality is available to orgs hosted on Hyperforce on a rolling basis starting in Spring ’25.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: General Limits for Salesforce Connect (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

See Snowflake Views with the Salesforce Connect SQL Adapter

Now you can directly access Snowflake query results as views in your Salesforce org with the Salesforce Connect SQL adapter. Previously,
to access Snowflake views, you first created a dynamic table in Snowflake using the view.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Validate and Sync External Data Source Configured for Snowflake (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Sharing
In the public group access summary, improvements make it easier to see related sharing rules, list views, and queues. Get notified when
your sharing rule exposes data to external users. Review the release update on securing roles in sandboxes.

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Public Groups More Easily with Improvements to the Access Summary
For a specific public group, view the sharing rules and list views for all objects where the public group is used to grant access.
Previously, you were required to select a specific object. You can also view all the queues that are part of a specific public group.
Get Notified When Your Sharing Rule Targets External Users
To better protect your data, you now get an alert when your sharing rule opens up record access to external users. This pop-up
message appears when you save a sharing rule after selecting the Portal Roles, Portal Roles and Subordinates, or Roles, Internal and
Portal Subordinates sharing rule category.
Enable Secure Roles Behavior and Update Sharing Group References in Sandboxes (Release Update)
To prevent unintended access for external site users if you enable digital experiences, Salesforce is securing access to records in
sandbox orgs. The default sharing group available for roles and subordinates before you enable digital experiences is now displayed
as Roles and Internal Subordinates instead of Roles and Subordinates. To prepare for this change, update code and customizations
that reference the old group name. Although Salesforce dynamically converts outdated references during a transition period, you
must update all code and customizations to prevent errors.

Manage Public Groups More Easily with Improvements to the Access Summary
For a specific public group, view the sharing rules and list views for all objects where the public group is used to grant access. Previously,
you were required to select a specific object. You can also view all the queues that are part of a specific public group.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.

157
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sharing

How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Public Groups, and then select Public Groups. Select a public group, and then
click View Summary. Click the Object Name dropdown and then select All Objects in the owner-based sharing rules, criteria-based
sharing rules, and list views tabs.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View the Public Group Access Summary (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get Notified When Your Sharing Rule Targets External Users

To better protect your data, you now get an alert when your sharing rule opens up record access to external users. This pop-up message
appears when you save a sharing rule after selecting the Portal Roles, Portal Roles and Subordinates, or Roles, Internal and Portal
Subordinates sharing rule category.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, then select Sharing Settings. Create a sharing rule and specify
the users who get access to the data. For Share with, select the Portal Roles, Portal Roles and Subordinates, and Roles, Internal
and Portal Subordinates sharing rule category. After you click Save, a pop-up message informs you that your data will be shared to
external users. To continue, click OK.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sharing Rule Considerations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enable Secure Roles Behavior and Update Sharing Group References in Sandboxes
(Release Update)
To prevent unintended access for external site users if you enable digital experiences, Salesforce is securing access to records in sandbox
orgs. The default sharing group available for roles and subordinates before you enable digital experiences is now displayed as Roles and
Internal Subordinates instead of Roles and Subordinates. To prepare for this change, update code and customizations that reference the
old group name. Although Salesforce dynamically converts outdated references during a transition period, you must update all code
and customizations to prevent errors.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
This release update is intended for sandbox orgs. Salesforce plans to provide a separate release update for these changes for production
orgs in Summer ’25 and enforce it in Winter ’26.
Why: Previously, when you enabled digital experiences, records shared with Roles and Subordinates were made available automatically
to external site users. To secure access so that records were only available to internal users, it was necessary to use the Convert External
User Access wizard and make manual updates. With this update, access to those records is limited to internal users by default.
How: Use this release update to test these changes in a sandbox and identify necessary fixes for when this change is later enabled in
production via a separate release update.

158
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Setup

Take caution if you enable this release update by using the test run in a production org. If your code and customizations still reference
the Roles and Subordinates value, your users can experience issues.

SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Knowledge Article: Prepare for Changes to “Role and Subordinates” Group (roleAndSubordinates)

General Setup
Make the power of AI work for you by adding agent quick actions to your record pages. Get a better snapshot of your custom metadata
type usage with enhancements to the System Overview page.

IN THIS SECTION:
Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record Pages
Harness the power of AI with agent quick actions. Create the actions in Setup and add them to record pages, helping users to quickly
see how AI can assist in their daily tasks.
Better Understand Your Custom Metadata Type Usage
The System Overview page now shows you custom metadata type usage in two categories instead of one. The Your Custom Metadata
Types category shows the number of custom metadata types that originate from anywhere other than a certified managed package.
The Total Custom Metadata Types category shows the total number of custom metadata types, including those that were installed
from a certified managed package.

Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record Pages

Harness the power of AI with agent quick actions. Create the actions in Setup and add them to record pages, helping users to quickly
see how AI can assist in their daily tasks.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record Pages

Better Understand Your Custom Metadata Type Usage

The System Overview page now shows you custom metadata type usage in two categories instead of one. The Your Custom Metadata
Types category shows the number of custom metadata types that originate from anywhere other than a certified managed package.
The Total Custom Metadata Types category shows the total number of custom metadata types, including those that were installed from
a certified managed package.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the mobile app in
all editions, except Personal Edition.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter System Overview, and then select System Overview.

159
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: System Overview: Schema (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Custom Metadata Allocations and Usage Calculations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Data Cloud
Ingest, harmonize, unify, and analyze streaming and batch data with Data Cloud. Then use that data to unlock meaningful and intelligent
experiences across Customer 360 applications and beyond.

IN THIS SECTION:
Data Cloud Features Released by Month
Data Cloud features and changes are released as often as monthly, so check back again soon for the latest solutions. Changes included
in the Spring ’25 release are generally listed under February.
Cross Cloud Updates for Data Cloud
Our latest round of cross cloud features for Data Cloud.
Connect Data
Bring data into Data Cloud by either ingesting data or connecting metadata using data federation.

160
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Data Cloud Features Released by Month

Act on Data
Share your data with external data sources, create data actions, build flows, or enrich your Salesforce org with Data Cloud data.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Cloud Release Notes Changes

Data Cloud Features Released by Month

Data Cloud features and changes are released as often as monthly, so check back again soon for the latest solutions. Changes included
in the Spring ’25 release are generally listed under February.

KEY JOB AREA Release Note

February ’25

Cross Cloud Cross Cloud Updates for Data Cloud

Connect Data Allow Access to All Salesforce CRM Fields with One Permission

Act on Data Create Data Cloud Enrichments with Companion Org Data

Act on Data Copy Field Enrichments with Multiple CRM Orgs Sync More Quickly

Act on Data Display Insights from External Data in Your CRM Enrichments

Act on Data Enhance Vehicle Records with Related List Enrichments

Act on Data Export Enrichments to a Data Cloud Sandbox

Cross Cloud Updates for Data Cloud

Our latest round of cross cloud features for Data Cloud.
New and Changed Features
• Data Cloud and Analytics:
– CRM Analytics: Unify Your Data Across Dashboards
– Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

• Data Cloud and Loyalty Management: Gather Richer Customer Insights with the Enhanced Data Kit
• Data Cloud and Global Promotions Management: Automate Promotion Data Sync with Prebuilt Data Streams
• Data Cloud and Communications Cloud:
– Use Data Cloud to Proactively Track Service Level Objectives
– Analyze Service Level Objectives and Identify Opportunities for Upsell

• Data Cloud and Marketing Cloud (Growth and Advanced):

– Get Started Faster with Setup Enhancements
– Reach the Right Customers with Enhanced Audience Tools

• Data Cloud and Referral Marketing: Sync Referral Marketing Data with Prebuilt Data Streams
• Data Cloud and Education Cloud:

161
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Connect Data

– Gain Holistic Student Insights and Visualize Learner Progress

– New and Changed Data Model Objects in Education Cloud

• Platform Encryption for Data Cloud: Encrypt Data Cloud Search Indexes

Connect Data
Bring data into Data Cloud by either ingesting data or connecting metadata using data federation.

IN THIS SECTION:
Allow Access to All Salesforce CRM Fields with One Permission
Set up access to Data Cloud fields faster by enabling the View All Fields (Global) user permission. This permission allows access to
view all fields and field data, including for fields created later on. Previously, to grant this widespread access, you enabled field
permissions for each object individually. You can assign the View All Fields (Global) user permission only to the Platform Integration
User for access to fields in Data Cloud. This permission is displayed in permission sets without a related license, but you can’t assign
it to users other than the Platform Integration User.

Allow Access to All Salesforce CRM Fields with One Permission

Set up access to Data Cloud fields faster by enabling the View All Fields (Global) user permission. This permission allows access to view
all fields and field data, including for fields created later on. Previously, to grant this widespread access, you enabled field permissions
for each object individually. You can assign the View All Fields (Global) user permission only to the Platform Integration User for access
to fields in Data Cloud. This permission is displayed in permission sets without a related license, but you can’t assign it to users other
than the Platform Integration User.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This change is being rolled out in February 2025.
How: To enable the View All Fields (Global) user permission, go to the Permission Sets Setup page. Select the Data Cloud Salesforce
Connector permission set, and then enable this permission on the System Permissions page.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Object and Field Permissions for Salesforce CRM in Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Act on Data
Share your data with external data sources, create data actions, build flows, or enrich your Salesforce org with Data Cloud data.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Data Cloud Enrichments with Companion Org Data
Use Data Cloud One to enrich your Sales, Service, and Commerce clouds and other orgs with data from anywhere in your Data Cloud
ecosystem. When creating your companion org, share the data spaces that you want the enrichments to query data from. Then,
create your copy field or related list enrichments using data from any companion org.
Copy Field Enrichments with Multiple CRM Orgs Sync More Quickly
In a Data Cloud ecosystem with multiple CRM orgs, copy field enrichments sync more quickly and exclude fewer records. Because
copy field enrichments can now use a CRM org’s key qualifier, the enrichment query selects only the records that are relevant to the
enrichment’s org.

162
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Act on Data

Display Insights from External Data in Your CRM Enrichments

Enrich your CRM org with insights created from Snowflake, Amazon Redshift, and other bring-your-own-lake data streams. Create
an accelerated data stream from a supported data source. An accelerated data stream temporarily stores the external data as a data
lake object, allowing enrichments to query the data. Then map the data stream to a data model object and create your enrichment.
Enhance Vehicle Records with Related List Enrichments
In Automotive Cloud, create related list enrichments on vehicles to display information such as location history, engine performance,
or drivers behaviors. Use this information to provide individualized service, such as vehicle maintenance reminders, or to price a
driver’s insurance risk. Identify related records with the vehicle identification number or other unique ID, rather than a unified
individual.
Export Enrichments to a Data Cloud Sandbox
Build, test, and collaborate on your enrichments by copying them to a Data Cloud sandbox. You can then re-create the enrichment
in your CRM org. You can’t deploy enrichments from a sandbox to a CRM org.

Create Data Cloud Enrichments with Companion Org Data

Use Data Cloud One to enrich your Sales, Service, and Commerce clouds and other orgs with data from anywhere in your Data Cloud
ecosystem. When creating your companion org, share the data spaces that you want the enrichments to query data from. Then, create
your copy field or related list enrichments using data from any companion org.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This change is being rolled out in February 2025.

Copy Field Enrichments with Multiple CRM Orgs Sync More Quickly
In a Data Cloud ecosystem with multiple CRM orgs, copy field enrichments sync more quickly and exclude fewer records. Because copy
field enrichments can now use a CRM org’s key qualifier, the enrichment query selects only the records that are relevant to the enrichment’s
org.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This change is being rolled out in February 2025.

Display Insights from External Data in Your CRM Enrichments

Enrich your CRM org with insights created from Snowflake, Amazon Redshift, and other bring-your-own-lake data streams. Create an
accelerated data stream from a supported data source. An accelerated data stream temporarily stores the external data as a data lake
object, allowing enrichments to query the data. Then map the data stream to a data model object and create your enrichment.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This change is being rolled out in February 2025.

Enhance Vehicle Records with Related List Enrichments

In Automotive Cloud, create related list enrichments on vehicles to display information such as location history, engine performance, or
drivers behaviors. Use this information to provide individualized service, such as vehicle maintenance reminders, or to price a driver’s
insurance risk. Identify related records with the vehicle identification number or other unique ID, rather than a unified individual.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This change is being rolled out in February 2025.

163
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Development

Export Enrichments to a Data Cloud Sandbox

Build, test, and collaborate on your enrichments by copying them to a Data Cloud sandbox. You can then re-create the enrichment in
your CRM org. You can’t deploy enrichments from a sandbox to a CRM org.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This change is being rolled out in February 2025.

Development
Whether you’re using Lightning components, Visualforce, Apex, or Salesforce APIs with your favorite programming language, these
enhancements help you develop amazing applications, integrations, and packages for resale to other organizations.

IN THIS SECTION:
Lightning Components
LWC API version 63.0 improves type validation for wire adapters. More base Lightning components have been adapted to support
native shadow DOM. iframe elements must follow new Lightning Web Security restrictions. Local Dev is generally available for
Lightning apps.
Lightning Design System
The Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) and the SLDS 2 (Beta) include the resources to create user interfaces consistent with
Salesforce Lightning principles, design language, and best practices.
Apex
Compressing and extracting Zip files and evaluating dynamic formulas in Apex are now generally available. The concurrent
long-running Apex requests limit now depends on the type and number of org licenses. Pause and resume Apex scheduled jobs by
using new methods in the System class.
API
Get standard platform event for Bulk API V2 query jobs. Update instanced URLs in API calls to prevent service interruptions.
Development Environments
Development environments are full-featured Salesforce environments that you use to develop and test existing or new features and
custom applications. They include Developer Edition orgs, sandboxes, and scratch orgs.
Platform Development Tools
Build applications collaboratively and deliver continuously with Salesforce Developer Experience (DX), the open and integrated
experience for custom app development on Salesforce.
Salesforce Functions
Salesforce Functions is no longer available for purchase or renewal. Learn about the retirement plan for Salesforce Functions.
AppExchange Partners
This release introduces improved guidance for navigating security reviews and publishing listings.
Change Data Capture
Receive change event notifications for more Salesforce objects.
Platform Events
View more information about event allocations in Setup. Prepare for the retirement of the legacy standard-volume platform events.
Event Bus
Package and distribute event relays.

164
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Components

New and Changed Items for Developers

Here is where you can find new and changed objects, calls, classes, components, commands, and more that help you customize
Salesforce features.

Lightning Components
LWC API version 63.0 improves type validation for wire adapters. More base Lightning components have been adapted to support native
shadow DOM. iframe elements must follow new Lightning Web Security restrictions. Local Dev is generally available for Lightning apps.

Note: Looking for new and changed Lightning web components, Aura components, and Aura component interfaces? See the
lists of new and changed items at the end of the Development section.

IN THIS SECTION:
LWC API Version 63.0
Update the API version for your components to use new features and improvements. Versioning your Lightning web components
ensures that your existing components aren’t affected when Salesforce ships new features, bug fixes, and performance improvements
that change existing behavior. Versioning also helps Salesforce deprecate legacy features.
Custom Components Must Specify an API Version
The apiVersion key is a required element for all custom components. Custom components that were previously saved without
an apiVersion key in the component .js-meta.xml configuration file have an apiVersion key added to the
configuration file automatically when the component is retrieved from Salesforce.
Internal DOM Structure Is Changing for Base Lightning Components
To enhance performance and comply with web components standards, Salesforce is preparing the base Lightning components to
adopt native shadow DOM. These updates change the internal DOM structure. Ensure that your tests don’t rely on the previous
internal structure of these components.
Lightning Web Security Applies Stricter Restrictions on iframes
Previously, LWS allowed access to content in iframe elements that have the same origin as the parent page. Now, all iframes that
have an explicit src attribute are subject to cross-origin restrictions regardless of whether their source is same-origin or cross-origin.
Find Lightning Components Security Documentation in One Place
We moved the documentation about building secure Aura components and Lightning web components (LWC) to the new Security
for Lightning Components developer guide. Previously, documentation for Lightning Web Security (LWS) and Lightning Locker was
divided between the Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide and the LWC Developer Guide, even though these security architectures
apply to both component frameworks. With this change, all documentation for Lightning components security is available in one
place, making it easier to find the information you need. Requests to the old documentation redirect to the equivalent page in the
new guide.
API Distortion Changes in Lightning Web Security
Lightning Web Security includes new security protections with additional distortions for web APIs. ESLint rules matching the distortions
are also available.
Develop Lightning Web Components Faster in a Real-Time Preview of Your Lightning App (Generally Available)
Local Dev is now generally available for Lightning apps. We made some changes since the beta release. By using Local Dev, you can
develop your Lightning web components in a real-time preview of your Lightning app without deploying code or manually refreshing
your browser. Local Dev is in beta for Lightning Web Runtime sites.

165
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Components

Base Lightning Components Support for SLDS 2 (Beta)

The base Lightning components support Salesforce Lightning Design System 2 (Beta), which enables advanced theming and branding
capabilities. To achieve these advanced capabilities, SLDS 2 (Beta) doesn't yet support some customization features of the
previous-generation SLDS architecture, such as component-specific styling hooks.
Resolve Errors Related to Accessing Referenced Lightning Components
Salesforce performs strict access checks when Aura components and Lightning web components (LWC) import or reference other
components or modules. If you receive a No {COMPONENT or MODULE} named {component or module name}
found error, check your imports before deploying to an org. If you’re an ISV partner, confirm that the Lightning components and
modules in your managed packages are exposed to subscribers.

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide
Lightning Components: New and Changed Items

LWC API Version 63.0

Update the API version for your components to use new features and improvements. Versioning your Lightning web components
ensures that your existing components aren’t affected when Salesforce ships new features, bug fixes, and performance improvements
that change existing behavior. Versioning also helps Salesforce deprecate legacy features.
Components that specify LWC API version 59.0 and later use the LWC framework version that corresponds to the specified API version
for that component. Components that specify LWC API version 58.0 and earlier continue to work based on LWC framework behavior in
Summer ’23 (API 58.0). You can change a component’s API version in its .js-meta.xml file.

Important: We recommend that you upgrade your component API version one version at a time. For example, from 58.0, upgrade
from 58.0 to 59.0, fix any errors or warnings you encounter, and then repeat until you get to the latest API version.
LWC API version 63.0 provides the following updates.

IN THIS SECTION:
Wire Adapters Have Improved Type Checking
In LWC API version 63.0 and later, TypeScript users get better type checking of @wire configuration and property values. Type
checking also resolves reactive props to the type used by the component. For example, a string starting with $ like
$reactiveProp.
Update JavaScript Selectors to Remove Extra Whitespace
Revise your JavaScript selectors to ignore whitespace (spaces, tabs, and so on). This change removes inconsistencies in the rendering
of extra whitespace.

SEE ALSO:
Custom Components Must Specify an API Version
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: API Versioning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: XML Configuration File Elements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

166
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Components

Wire Adapters Have Improved Type Checking

In LWC API version 63.0 and later, TypeScript users get better type checking of @wire configuration and property values. Type checking
also resolves reactive props to the type used by the component. For example, a string starting with $ like $reactiveProp.
Where: This change applies to custom Lightning web components in Lightning Experience, Experience Builder sites, and all versions
of the Salesforce mobile app. This change also applies to Lightning web components in open source.
How: Given @wire(adapter, config) prop, the types of config and prop must now match the type that’s used by
adapter.

Note: TypeScript’s experimentalDecorators is no longer supported. You must either specify

"experimentalDecorators": false or remove the option from your tsconfig.json file.
For more information, see GitHub LWC Repo: v8.0.0.

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Understand the Wire Service
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: TypeScript Type Definitions for LWC (Developer Preview)

Update JavaScript Selectors to Remove Extra Whitespace

Revise your JavaScript selectors to ignore whitespace (spaces, tabs, and so on). This change removes inconsistencies in the rendering
of extra whitespace.
Where: This change applies to custom Lightning web components in Lightning Experience, Experience Builder sites, and all versions
of the Salesforce mobile app. This change also applies to Lightning web components in open source.
Why: For example, given <div class=" slds-var-m-around_medium highlight yellow ">, the component
markup is rendered as <div class="slds-var-m-around_medium highlight yellow"> without extra whitespace.
Additionally, empty class and style attributes are no longer rendered. In this example, the component markup shows empty
class and style attributes.

<!-- myCmp.html -->

<div class="">Content here</div>
<div style=" ">Content here</div>

In LWC API version 63.0 and later, the example results in the removal of the empty class and style attributes.
<!-- DOM Rendering -->
<div>Content here</div>
<div>Content here</div>

How: Revise your JavaScript selectors to ignore whitespace.

document.querySelector(".slds-var-m-around_medium.highlight.yellow");

Queries that include whitespace for an exact string match no longer work.
/* Don’t do this */
document.querySelector('[class="highlight yellow"]');

167
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Components

Custom Components Must Specify an API Version

The apiVersion key is a required element for all custom components. Custom components that were previously saved without an
apiVersion key in the component .js-meta.xml configuration file have an apiVersion key added to the configuration
file automatically when the component is retrieved from Salesforce.
Where: This change applies to custom Lightning web components in Lightning Experience, Experience Builder sites, and all versions
of the Salesforce mobile app.
When: Beginning in this release, you must set the apiVersion key for custom components. This change applies to all custom
components, not just components using API 63.0 or later.
To assist with this transition, if a component was previously saved without an apiVersion key, the required element is added to a
component’s .js-meta.xml configuration file when the component is retrieved from Salesforce. Retrieval is most frequently done
using Salesforce development tools, such as the Salesforce CLI or VS Code add-ons, within your development environment. An
apiVersion key is added only to components that don’t already have one.
Why: Component-level API versioning became available for custom Lightning web components in Winter ’24. Previously it was possible
to save a component to Salesforce without setting an API version. Behind the scenes, the component was compiled with an internal
API version. This implicit versioning could cause ambiguity regarding the version of the LWC framework the component was executed
with. Adding an apiVersion key to the component’s configuration file makes it clear which version of the LWC framework a
component will use.
How: To view or change the added apiVersion key for your component, view it in the .js-meta.xml file for the component.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<LightningComponentBundle xmlns="http://soap.sforce.com/2006/04/metadata">
...
<apiVersion>63.0</apiVersion>
...
</LightningComponentBundle>

This change is a source-level alteration of the component’s configuration file. It’s saved when you deploy the component back to
Salesforce. If you manage your components with external version control, you’ll want to preserve the change there, too.

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: API Versioning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: XML Configuration File Elements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Internal DOM Structure Is Changing for Base Lightning Components

To enhance performance and comply with web components standards, Salesforce is preparing the base Lightning components to adopt
native shadow DOM. These updates change the internal DOM structure. Ensure that your tests don’t rely on the previous internal structure
of these components.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Builder sites, and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
Why: Since the Spring ’23 release, 79 components have been adapted to prepare for native shadow DOM.
In Spring ’25, these additional components have been adapted to prepare for native shadow DOM.
• lightning-carousel
• lightning-carousel-image
• lightning-click-to-dial
• lightning-datatable

168
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Components

• lightning-file-upload
• lightning-input-field
• lightning-output-field
• lightning-record-form
• lightning-record-edit-form
• lightning-record-view-form
• lightning-tree
These modules have been adapted to prepare for native shadow DOM.
• lightning/logger
• lightning/pageReferenceUtils
• lightning/platformShowToastEvent
Changes to some LWC base components also affect their Aura counterparts. The affected base components are:
• lightning:carouselImage
• lightning:clickToDial
• lightning:datatable
• lightning:fileUpload
• lightning:inputField
• lightning:outputField
• lightning:recordForm
• lightning:tree
Salesforce documented that the internal component structure is protected. Salesforce may at any time redesign the internals of our
components to improve performance, enhance functionality, and support accessibility. See Anti-Patterns for Styling Components.

Important: If your tests rely on this protected internal DOM structure, rewrite your tests as soon as possible.

How: To ensure that your tests are ready for the internal DOM structure changes, review your integration tests and Selenium-based
tests. Additionally, make sure that your component CSS follows best practices. For supported integration tests, use the UI Test Automation
Model (UTAM) and UTAM Page Objects, which stay up to date with changes in component structure. For supported Selenium-based
tests, see How to Automate Shadow DOM in Selenium WebDriver. For supported CSS styling, see Style Components with Lightning
Design System in the Lightning Web Components Developer Guide.

Lightning Web Security Applies Stricter Restrictions on iframes

Previously, LWS allowed access to content in iframe elements that have the same origin as the parent page. Now, all iframes that have
an explicit src attribute are subject to cross-origin restrictions regardless of whether their source is same-origin or cross-origin.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the mobile app in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions if LWS is enabled. The change also applies to LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience
if LWS is enabled.
How: For an example of how this new restriction works, consider a Lightning component that loads a static HTML file in an iframe
element. If the HTML file contains a script that relies on direct access to the window.parent or window.top properties, the
script fails. The failure occurs because the iframe is subject to cross-origin restrictions, which include blocking access to these properties.

169
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Components

Instead, to communicate between the host page and iframe content, use the window.postMessage() method from the
MessageEvent interface.

SEE ALSO:
Security for Lightning Components: Access to iframe Content in Lightning Web Security (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Find Lightning Components Security Documentation in One Place

We moved the documentation about building secure Aura components and Lightning web components (LWC) to the new Security for
Lightning Components developer guide. Previously, documentation for Lightning Web Security (LWS) and Lightning Locker was divided
between the Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide and the LWC Developer Guide, even though these security architectures apply
to both component frameworks. With this change, all documentation for Lightning components security is available in one place, making
it easier to find the information you need. Requests to the old documentation redirect to the equivalent page in the new guide.
How: The new Security for Lightning Components developer guide is available at
https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/lightning-components-security/guide (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview).

API Distortion Changes in Lightning Web Security

Lightning Web Security includes new security protections with additional distortions for web APIs. ESLint rules matching the distortions
are also available.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions, LWR-based Experience Cloud sites, and Lightning web components
in Aura sites when LWS is enabled.
How: These APIs have new distortions documented in the LWS Distortion Viewer (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview).
Corresponding ESLint rules are included in the ESLint package.
• AbstractRange.prototype.endContainer getter
• AbstractRange.prototype.startContainer getter
• Document.prototype.requestStorageAccess
• Element.prototype.setHTMLUnsafe
• HTMLIFrameElement.prototype.sandbox getter
• HTMLIFrameElement.prototype.sandbox setter
These distortions changed.
• HTMLIFrameElement.prototype.src setter
• Window.open
• Window: securitypolicyviolation event

Develop Lightning Web Components Faster in a Real-Time Preview of Your Lightning

App (Generally Available)
Local Dev is now generally available for Lightning apps. We made some changes since the beta release. By using Local Dev, you can
develop your Lightning web components in a real-time preview of your Lightning app without deploying code or manually refreshing
your browser. Local Dev is in beta for Lightning Web Runtime sites.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and to all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions.

170
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Components

How: To use this feature, first install Salesforce CLI. To turn on Local Dev for your org, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Local Dev
and then select Local Dev. To turn on Local Dev for all org users, select Enable Local Dev. Then, to install the Local Dev plug-in, run
the CLI command:
sf plugins install @salesforce/plugin-lightning-dev

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Preview Components with Local Dev
Salesforce Developers Blog: Develop LWC at Lightning Speed with the New Local Dev Experience

Base Lightning Components Support for SLDS 2 (Beta)

The base Lightning components support Salesforce Lightning Design System 2 (Beta), which enables advanced theming and branding
capabilities. To achieve these advanced capabilities, SLDS 2 (Beta) doesn't yet support some customization features of the
previous-generation SLDS architecture, such as component-specific styling hooks.
Where: This change applies to custom components in Lightning Experience and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.

Important: SLDS 2 is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified
Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is
at the Customer's sole discretion.
Why: This is an interim step in the development of our SLDS 2 (Beta) architecture. Visit Prepare Customizations for SLDS Architecture
Updates first to enable your components to migrate to SLDS 2 (Beta) in a future release.
How: When you switch an org to the SLDS 2 standard Salesforce Cosmos theme (Beta), base components used in your custom components
exhibit the new theme if they use the default styling.

Note: SLDS component-specific styling hooks can cause unexpected behavior in SLDS 2. Component styling hooks use the
--slds-c-* prefix and change styling for specific elements or properties of a component. If you use component styling hooks,
limit the components to SLDS themes until SLDS 2 and the Salesforce Cosmos theme become generally available.

SEE ALSO:
Introducing Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) 2 (Beta)
Lightning Design System: Best Practices
Enhanced Lightning User Interface

Resolve Errors Related to Accessing Referenced Lightning Components

Salesforce performs strict access checks when Aura components and Lightning web components (LWC) import or reference other
components or modules. If you receive a No {COMPONENT or MODULE} named {component or module name}
found error, check your imports before deploying to an org. If you’re an ISV partner, confirm that the Lightning components and
modules in your managed packages are exposed to subscribers.
Where: This change applies to custom Lightning Aura components, custom Lightning apps, and custom Lightning web components
in Lightning Experience, Experience Sites, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions.
How: If your Lightning component triggers a No {COMPONENT or MODULE} named {name of the component or
module name} found error, then your component doesn’t have access to the component or module specified in the error message.
• If the specified component or module is Salesforce-provided, then remove references to that component or module from your code.
Salesforce owns certain components that you can’t directly access.

171
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Design System

• If the referenced component or module is from a managed package, contact the package owner and follow their guidance.
If you’re an ISV partner, confirm that the Lightning components and modules in your managed packages are properly exposed to
subscribers. Review Component Access Control for Aura components and Add Components to Managed Packages for Lightning web
components.

Lightning Design System

The Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) and the SLDS 2 (Beta) include the resources to create user interfaces consistent with
Salesforce Lightning principles, design language, and best practices.

IN THIS SECTION:
Introducing Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) 2 (Beta)
Now available in Spring ’25, SLDS 2 is the latest design system for Salesforce products on the Lightning Platform. Use SLDS 2 to build
scalable and flexible user interfaces with themes that adapt to future changes, ensuring your code remains efficient and modern.
The new design of SLDS 2 is achieved through CSS updates and the implementation of styling hooks, without changing the markup
or structure of components. This approach allows for seamless UI changes while preserving the Lightning Experience.
Validate Your SLDS and SLDS 2 Code and Get Improvement Recommendations
Use SLDS Validator to scan your UI code, validate it against a set of Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) rules, and receive
recommendations to improve your SLDS and SLDS 2 code. SLDS Validator now provides SLDS and SLDS 2 linting support, validation
with recommended SLDS tokens, SLDS 2 styling hooks, and utility classes. These changes apply to SLDS Validator version 2.0 and
later.
Lightning Design System Component Blueprints Updates
Get more out of SLDS component blueprints and utilities with these enhancements and bug fixes.

Introducing Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) 2 (Beta)

Now available in Spring ’25, SLDS 2 is the latest design system for Salesforce products on the Lightning Platform. Use SLDS 2 to build
scalable and flexible user interfaces with themes that adapt to future changes, ensuring your code remains efficient and modern. The
new design of SLDS 2 is achieved through CSS updates and the implementation of styling hooks, without changing the markup or
structure of components. This approach allows for seamless UI changes while preserving the Lightning Experience.
Where:

Note: Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) 2 is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements
- Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
SLDS 2 is enabled in new and existing Starter and Pro Suite orgs by default. It’s enabled in new Sales orgs across all editions and select
new Service orgs. Starting in Spring ’25, SLDS 2 is available to new and existing orgs that opt in to Salesforce Cosmos. For information
about when you can opt in to SLDS 2 in a new or existing org, read Salesforce Cosmos Theme Availability in Salesforce Help.
How: If your components are built using SLDS development best practices, your existing org’s transition from SLDS to SLDS 2 is simple.
As a developer, transition your org to SLDS 2 using SLDS Validator to audit your code. SLDS Validator analyzes your code, validates it
against SLDS 2 guidelines, and identifies custom components that need updates. SLDS Validator also provides automated fixes and
suggests improvements to ensure compliance with SLDS 2 standards. To learn how to support your custom components in SLDS 2, use
Figma Kit: Components for Web | Lightning Design System v2 and Figma Kit: Style Guide - SLDS Web Components v2.
As an admin, use Themes and Branding to create a custom theme or use Salesforce Cosmos, a new SLDS 2 theme. To turn on the Cosmos
theme, follow the directions in Explore Salesforce's Refreshed Visual Style with Themes for SLDS 2 (Beta).

172
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Lightning Design System

SLDS 2 doesn’t yet support component-level styling hooks. If you use --slds-c-* styling hooks to customize the styling of your
components built from SLDS blueprints or base Lightning components, they might not work as expected when you use the Cosmos
theme.

SEE ALSO:
Enjoy Salesforce’s Refreshed Visual Style with Themes for SLDS 2 (Beta)
Figma Kit: Components for Web | Lightning Design System v2
Figma Kit: Style Guide—SLDS Web Components v2
SLDS: Salesforce Lightning Design System
SLDS: SLDS Development Best Practices
SLDS: SLDS Validator for VS Code

Validate Your SLDS and SLDS 2 Code and Get Improvement Recommendations
Use SLDS Validator to scan your UI code, validate it against a set of Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) rules, and receive
recommendations to improve your SLDS and SLDS 2 code. SLDS Validator now provides SLDS and SLDS 2 linting support, validation
with recommended SLDS tokens, SLDS 2 styling hooks, and utility classes. These changes apply to SLDS Validator version 2.0 and later.
Where: We release new versions of SLDS Validator on Visual Studio Marketplace throughout the year. To learn about recent updates,
read the changelog.
How: Install the SLDS Validator extension in Visual Studio Code.

SEE ALSO:
Visual Studio Code Marketplace: SLDS Validator

Lightning Design System Component Blueprints Updates

Get more out of SLDS component blueprints and utilities with these enhancements and bug fixes.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) and Lightning Experience.
When: These changes are in Spring ’25. We improve SLDS frequently. For the latest changes, see What’s New in Lightning Design System
documentation. That page lists the changes by the date that we completed the change. The changes are rolled up into the next major
Salesforce release.
Why: Improve your UI with these recent updates to SLDS component blueprints.
• We removed the slds-truncate class from the combobox and menu blueprints to address an issue with obscured text. The
label text of list items can now wrap in combobox and menu components.
• We also updated the modals blueprint in Winter '25 to display a white background for the close button (X), which improves
visibility for people with low vision. Specifically, we changed the close button color from white to gray by removing the

173
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Apex

slds-button_icon-inverse class. To display the modal close button correctly, don't use the
slds-button_icon-inverse class in your close button markup.

SEE ALSO:
Known Issue: Modal close button is not visible with the new white background
SLDS: Salesforce Lightning Design System
W3C: Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)

Apex
Compressing and extracting Zip files and evaluating dynamic formulas in Apex are now generally available. The concurrent long-running
Apex requests limit now depends on the type and number of org licenses. Pause and resume Apex scheduled jobs by using new methods
in the System class.
For more information on these enhancements, see the Apex Developer Guide and the Apex Reference Guide.

IN THIS SECTION:
Delivered Idea: Compress and Extract Zip Files in Apex (Generally Available)
Use the Compression namespace and take advantage of a native Apex Zip library to compress and extract files. Easily compress
files into a Zip file from blobs and directly decompress files stored in a Zip file to blobs. Optimize compression by specifying the
compression method and level. You can compress multiple attachments or documents as an Apex blob in a Zip archive. You can
also specify the data to extract from the Zip archive without uncompressing the entire Zip archive. We delivered this feature thanks
to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Delivered Idea: Evaluate Dynamic Formulas in Apex (Generally Available)
Dynamic formulas in Apex support SObjects and Apex objects as context objects. Use the class methods in the FormulaEval
namespace to build and evaluate dynamic formulas. This feature, now generally available, supports accessing polymorphic relationship
fields. You can also reference standard lookups and custom lookups in formula fields. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas
on IdeaExchange.
Scale Your Concurrent Long-Running Apex Requests Limit Based on Number of Org Licenses
The default limit for the number of synchronous concurrent transactions for long-running Apex requests now depends on the type
and number of licenses in your org. Scaled license-based limits can avoid service disruptions caused by the limit, increase system
stability with minimal risk to performance, and improve resource allocation. To ensure fair usage, the limit is capped at a maximum
of 50 Apex requests. The minimum number of long-running concurrent Apex requests remains at 10.
Pause and Resume Scheduled Jobs by Using Apex
With new methods in the System class, you can programmatically pause and resume Apex scheduled jobs. This feature complements
the ability to monitor scheduled jobs from the Setup UI, which was introduced in Summer ’24. To pause or resume a scheduled job,
you specify the job's name or cronTriggerId. Calling the pause and resume methods counts towards the DML statement limit.
Enforce Reparenting Restrictions for Master-Detail Relationships in Apex
In API version 63.0 and later, an attempt to reparent a child record in Apex throws a System.DmlException exception if the
option to allow reparenting isn’t selected in the master-detail definition. This behavior is versioned. In API 62.0 and earlier, reparenting
such child records could succeed and not result in an exception, depending on the sequence in which the fields were set.

174
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Apex

JSON Serialization for Exception Types Has Changed

In API version 63.0 and later, Apex doesn’t support JSON serialization of custom exception types and most built-in exceptions.
Attempting to serialize an exception type throws an error: Type unsupported in JSON: MyException. This behavior
is versioned. In API 62.0 and earlier, exception types could be serialized, but the serialization was incomplete and triggered unexpected
exception errors.
Accept Header Default Value for Apex Callouts Has Changed
If you don't set the Accept header in an HTTP request of an Apex callout, the default value for the Accept header is now */*.
Previously, it was text/html, image/gif, image/jpeg, *; q=.2, */*; q=.2.

SEE ALSO:
Apex: New and Changed Items

Compress and Extract Zip Files in Apex (Generally Available)

Use the Compression namespace and take advantage of a native Apex Zip library to compress and extract files. Easily compress
files into a Zip file from blobs and directly decompress files stored in a Zip file to blobs. Optimize compression by specifying the compression
method and level. You can compress multiple attachments or documents as an Apex blob in a Zip archive. You can also specify the data
to extract from the Zip archive without uncompressing the entire Zip archive. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on
IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to all editions.
How: To add zip entry details, such as an entry name, comment, and compression method, use the addEntry(String name,
Blob data), addEntry(compression.ZipEntry prototype), and setMethod(compression.Method
method) methods in the ZipWriter class. To generate a zipped archive and return the result as an Apex blob, use the
getArchive() method. This code sample compresses email attachments into a single file.

Compression.ZipWriter writer = new Compression.ZipWriter();

List<id> contentDocumentIds = new List<id>();

// Add IDs of documents to be compressed to contentDocumentIds

for ( ContentVersion cv : [SELECT PathOnClient, Versiondata

FROM ContentVersion
WHERE ContentDocumentId IN :contentDocumentIds])
{
writer.addEntry(cv.PathOnClient, cv.versiondata);
}

blob zipAttachment = writer.getArchive();

Messaging.EmailFileAttachment efa = new Messaging.EmailFileAttachment();

efa.setFileName('attachments.zip');
efa.setBody(zipAttachment);

List<Messaging.EmailFileAttachment> fileAttachments = new

List<Messaging.EmailFileAttachment>();
fileAttachments.add(efa);

175
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Apex

Messaging.SingleEmailMessage email = new Messaging.SingleEmailMessage();

// Set all the other email fields, such as addresses, subject, and body

email.setFileAttachments(fileAttachments);

Messaging.sendEmail(new Messaging.SingleEmailMessage[] { email });

Get zip entry details and extract the Zip file’s contents by using the getEntries(), getEntry(String name),
extract(ZipEntry entry), and other methods in the ZipReader class. This code sample extracts the translation from a
callout response.
HttpRequest request = new HttpRequest();
request.setEndpoint('callout:My_Named_Credential/translationService');
request.setMethod('POST');

// Set translation service request payload for input to translate

// The translation endpoint will return translations to the requested languages as JSON
in a Zip archive

HttpResponse response = new Http().send(request);

Blob translationZip = response.getBodyAsBlob();

Compression.ZipReader reader = new Compression.ZipReader(translationZip);

ZipEntry frTranslation = reader.getEntry('translations/fr.json');
Blob frTranslationData = reader.extractEntry(frTranslation);

SEE ALSO:
Apex Reference Guide: Compression Namespace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
IdeaExchange: Apex or API - Zip file creation in Salesforce

Evaluate Dynamic Formulas in Apex (Generally Available)

Dynamic formulas in Apex support SObjects and Apex objects as context objects. Use the class methods in the FormulaEval
namespace to build and evaluate dynamic formulas. This feature, now generally available, supports accessing polymorphic relationship
fields. You can also reference standard lookups and custom lookups in formula fields. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on
IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to all editions.
How: This example uses the build() and evaluate() methods to validate a formula instance, calculate the formula expression,
and return the result.
Account myAcc = new Account(Name='123');
FormulaEval.FormulaInstance ff = Formula.builder()
.withType(Schema.Account.class)
.withReturnType(FormulaEval.FormulaReturnType.STRING)
.withFormula('name & " (" & website & ")"')
.build();

//Use the list of field names returned by the getReferenced method to generate dynamic
soql

176
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Apex

String fieldNameList = String.join(ff.getReferencedFields(),',');

String queryStr = 'select ' + fieldNameList + ' from Account LIMIT 1'; //select
name, website from Account
Account s = Database.query(queryStr);
system.debug(ff.evaluate(s));

SEE ALSO:
Apex Reference Guide: FormulaEval Namespace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
IdeaExchange: Evaluate Dynamic Formula with Apex

Scale Your Concurrent Long-Running Apex Requests Limit Based on Number of Org
Licenses
The default limit for the number of synchronous concurrent transactions for long-running Apex requests now depends on the type and
number of licenses in your org. Scaled license-based limits can avoid service disruptions caused by the limit, increase system stability
with minimal risk to performance, and improve resource allocation. To ensure fair usage, the limit is capped at a maximum of 50 Apex
requests. The minimum number of long-running concurrent Apex requests remains at 10.
Where: The license types that count toward this limit include full Salesforce and Salesforce Platform user licenses, App Subscription user
licenses, Chatter Only users, Identity users, and Company Communities users.
How: For orgs with 1,000 to 5,000 licenses, the limit is calculated based on the ratio of 100 licenses to one concurrent long-running
Apex request. For example, if your org has 4,000 licenses, the concurrent long-running Apex requests limit is set at 40. If your org has
5,000 or more licenses, the concurrent long-running Apex requests limit is set at 50, which is the maximum capped limit. If your org has
1,000 or fewer licenses, the concurrent long-running Apex requests limit is set at 10 due to the minimum floor limit.

Pause and Resume Scheduled Jobs by Using Apex

With new methods in the System class, you can programmatically pause and resume Apex scheduled jobs. This feature complements
the ability to monitor scheduled jobs from the Setup UI, which was introduced in Summer ’24. To pause or resume a scheduled job, you
specify the job's name or cronTriggerId. Calling the pause and resume methods counts towards the DML statement limit.
Where: This change applies to all editions.
How: Use the new pauseJobByName(), pauseJobById(), resumeJobByName(), and resumeJobById() System
methods. This example code pauses all Apex scheduled jobs for a specific class.
// Scheduled class to be paused
Id apexClassIdToPause = '01p4u000000dVf7AAE';
List<AsyncApexJob> jobsToPause = [SELECT CronTriggerId FROM AsyncApexJob WHERE ApexClassId
= :apexClassIdToPause];
for(AsyncApexJob jobToPause : jobsToPause) {
System.pauseJobById(jobToPause.CronTriggerId);
}

Enforce Reparenting Restrictions for Master-Detail Relationships in Apex

In API version 63.0 and later, an attempt to reparent a child record in Apex throws a System.DmlException exception if the
option to allow reparenting isn’t selected in the master-detail definition. This behavior is versioned. In API 62.0 and earlier, reparenting
such child records could succeed and not result in an exception, depending on the sequence in which the fields were set.
Where: This change applies to all editions.

177
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes API

JSON Serialization for Exception Types Has Changed

In API version 63.0 and later, Apex doesn’t support JSON serialization of custom exception types and most built-in exceptions. Attempting
to serialize an exception type throws an error: Type unsupported in JSON: MyException. This behavior is versioned. In
API 62.0 and earlier, exception types could be serialized, but the serialization was incomplete and triggered unexpected exception errors.
Where: This change applies to all editions.
Why: This example includes JSON serialization that fails in API version 63.0 and later.
MyException e = new MyException();
String js = JSON.serialize(e);

Accept Header Default Value for Apex Callouts Has Changed

If you don't set the Accept header in an HTTP request of an Apex callout, the default value for the Accept header is now */*.
Previously, it was text/html, image/gif, image/jpeg, *; q=.2, */*; q=.2.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Apex Developer Guide: HTTP Classes
Apex Reference Guide: HttpRequest Class
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP/1.1): Semantics and Content: Accept

API
Get standard platform event for Bulk API V2 query jobs. Update instanced URLs in API calls to prevent service interruptions.

IN THIS SECTION:
Service Protection Changes for Metadata API Read and Retrieve Endpoints
To avoid putting the health of the service at risk, readMetadata() and retrieve() requests to the Metadata API may
return an error in new orgs created in Winter ‘25 and later. The API returns an error when the server receives more requests than it
can handle.
Update API Requests to Use Your My Domain Login URL (Release Update)
If you’re using an instance-specific URL for API traffic, you must replace it with your My Domain URL. Salesforce is decommissioning
the service that supports hard-coded references to an instance name in API application traffic routing.
Other Improvements to Generating an OpenAPI Document for sObjects REST API (Beta)
With the latest version of the OpenAPI Specification, you can generate an OpenAPI document. Also, return a list of updated sObjects,
use a shorter base URI, and more.
Service Protection Changes for Metadata API Read and Retrieve Endpoints
To avoid putting the health of the service at risk, readMetadata() and retrieve() requests to the Metadata API may
return an error in new orgs created in Winter ‘25 and later. The API returns an error when the server receives more requests than it
can handle.
Get Notified About Bulk API V2 Query Jobs with Platform Events (Beta)
Subscribe to the BulkApi2JobEvent platform event to get notified about the progress and completion of Bulk API V2 query jobs. By
subscribing to the platform event, you avoid polling the API or waiting for job completion before downloading results.

178
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes API

Salesforce Platform API Versions 21.0 Through 30.0 Retirement (Release Update)
The retirement of versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API was first scheduled for Summer ’23. The retirement is
now postponed to Summer ’25. You can continue to use these API versions but they’re not supported and won’t be available starting
in Summer ’25. Applications consuming them are then disrupted. Requests fail with an error message indicating that the endpoint
is deactivated. Upgrade all applications that use a legacy API version to a current version before this breaking change occurs.

Service Protection Changes for Metadata API Read and Retrieve Endpoints
To avoid putting the health of the service at risk, readMetadata() and retrieve() requests to the Metadata API may return
an error in new orgs created in Winter ‘25 and later. The API returns an error when the server receives more requests than it can handle.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.

Update API Requests to Use Your My Domain Login URL (Release Update)
If you’re using an instance-specific URL for API traffic, you must replace it with your My Domain URL. Salesforce is decommissioning the
service that supports hard-coded references to an instance name in API application traffic routing.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
When: This decommission occurs on April 1, 2025 for sandbox environments and June 14, 2025 for production environments.
How: For example, if your API traffic is pointing to the URL
https://na44.salesforce.com/services/Soap/class/AcmeDemoService, you must change it to
https://acme.my.salesforce.com/services/Soap/class/AcmeDemoService.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Update
API Requests to Use Your My Domain Login URL, follow the testing and activation steps.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Update API Calls to Use Your My Domain Login URL
Salesforce Help: Updating Hard-Coded References

Other Improvements to Generating an OpenAPI Document for sObjects REST API (Beta)
With the latest version of the OpenAPI Specification, you can generate an OpenAPI document. Also, return a list of updated sObjects,
use a shorter base URI, and more.
Where: This change affects API version 63.0 and later. This beta feature is available in all Salesforce editions, sandboxes, and scratch orgs
that have API Enabled.

Note: OpenAPI document generation for sObjectds REST API is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms
at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product
Terms Diretctory. Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Why: The sObjects REST API OpenAPI document generation feature (beta) now:
• Includes the /sobjects/{sObject}/updated, /sobjects/{sObject}/query, and
/sobjects/{sObject}/query/queryLocator resources
• Supports OAS version 3.1.0 only
• Supports all Salesforce editions that have API Enabled

179
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes API

• Uses a shorter base URI

• Removes 6-hour limit on requests in queue per org
• Uses a parameterized sObjects spec

Service Protection Changes for Metadata API Read and Retrieve Endpoints
To avoid putting the health of the service at risk, readMetadata() and retrieve() requests to the Metadata API may return
an error in new orgs created in Winter ‘25 and later. The API returns an error when the server receives more requests than it can handle.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.

Get Notified About Bulk API V2 Query Jobs with Platform Events (Beta)
Subscribe to the BulkApi2JobEvent platform event to get notified about the progress and completion of Bulk API V2 query jobs. By
subscribing to the platform event, you avoid polling the API or waiting for job completion before downloading results.
Where: This change affects API version 63.0 and later. This beta feature is available in all Salesforce editions, sandboxes, and scratch orgs
that have API Enabled.

Note: OpenAPI document generation for sObjectds REST API is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms
at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product
Terms Diretctory. Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and then select User Interface. On the User Interface page, select
Enable Salesforce Platform Bulk API 2.0 Query Partial Download and Job Completion Events (Beta). Then subscribe to
BulkApi2JobEvent using one of the subscription methods. See Subscribing to Platform Events in the Platform Events Developer Guide.

Salesforce Platform API Versions 21.0 Through 30.0 Retirement (Release Update)
The retirement of versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API was first scheduled for Summer ’23. The retirement is now
postponed to Summer ’25. You can continue to use these API versions but they’re not supported and won’t be available starting in
Summer ’25. Applications consuming them are then disrupted. Requests fail with an error message indicating that the endpoint is
deactivated. Upgrade all applications that use a legacy API version to a current version before this breaking change occurs.
Where: This change affects these API versions.
Bulk API
21.0, 22.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 26.0, 27.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0
SOAP API
21.0, 22.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 26.0, 27.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0
REST API
v21.0, v22.0, v23.0, v24.0, v25.0, v26.0, v27.0, v28.0, v29.0, v30.0

Note: This change affects all REST APIs that use URIs beneath /services/data/vXX.X/, including:
• Bulk API
• Connect REST API
• IoT REST API
• Lightning Platform REST API
• Metadata API

180
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Development Environments

• Place Order REST API

• Reports and Dashboards REST API
• Tableau CRM REST API
• Tooling API

This change applies to Professional (with API access enabled), Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. It affects all
API-enabled orgs, including sandboxes and scratch orgs.
How: Before the Summer ’25 release, modify or upgrade all applications to function with current API versions. Newer API versions offer
more capabilities and improved security and performance.
Identify requests made from older or unsupported API versions of SOAP API, REST API, and Bulk API by using the API Total Usage event.
You can enforce the retirement of these API versions ahead of Summer ‘25. In Setup, in Release Updates, find Salesforce Platform API
Versions 21.0 Through 30.0 Retirement, and then click Get Started. To reject calls to the API versions scheduled for retirement, click
Enable Test Run. To disable the enforcement, click Disable Test Run.

Development Environments
Development environments are full-featured Salesforce environments that you use to develop and test existing or new features and
custom applications. They include Developer Edition orgs, sandboxes, and scratch orgs.

IN THIS SECTION:
Data Mask
Let Einstein do the heavy lifting and create your custom libraries. Automatically run masking configurations each time you refresh
your sandbox.

Data Mask
Let Einstein do the heavy lifting and create your custom libraries. Automatically run masking configurations each time you refresh your
sandbox.

IN THIS SECTION:
Use Einstein to Generate Data Mask Custom Libraries
Ask Einstein to generate values for a custom Data Mask library in a sandbox. Describe the type of values that you want for masking
sensitive data, and let Einstein do the rest.
Set Your Configurations to Automatically Run Each Time You Refresh a Sandbox
With Run on Refresh, there’s no downtime between when new data enters your sandbox and when the next masking configuration
is scheduled to run.

Use Einstein to Generate Data Mask Custom Libraries

Ask Einstein to generate values for a custom Data Mask library in a sandbox. Describe the type of values that you want for masking
sensitive data, and let Einstein do the rest.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions where Data Mask is installed.

181
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Platform Development Tools

How: In Data Mask, from the Custom Libraries tab, create and save a new custom library. Then click Create with Einstein.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Custom Libraries

Set Your Configurations to Automatically Run Each Time You Refresh a Sandbox
With Run on Refresh, there’s no downtime between when new data enters your sandbox and when the next masking configuration is
scheduled to run.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions where Data Mask is installed.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Run a Data Mask Job

Platform Development Tools

Build applications collaboratively and deliver continuously with Salesforce Developer Experience (DX), the open and integrated experience
for custom app development on Salesforce.

IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce CLI
Use Salesforce CLI to create environments for development and testing, synchronize source code, run tests, and control your
application lifecycle.
Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code
The Salesforce Extension pack includes tools for developing on the Salesforce platform in the lightweight, extensible VS Code editor.
These tools provide features for working with development orgs (scratch orgs, sandboxes, and DE orgs), Apex, Lightning web
components, Aura components, and Visualforce.
Code Builder
Code Builder is a web-based integrated development environment that has all the power and flexibility of Visual Studio Code,
Salesforce Extensions for VS Code, and Salesforce CLI in your web browser.
Agentforce for Developers
Agentforce for Developers is an AI-powered developer tool that’s available as a Visual Studio Code extension in VS Code desktop
and Code Builder. Agentforce for Developers is built using CodeGen and xGen-Code, secure and custom AI models from
Salesforce. It's enabled by default in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Partner Developer, and Developer editions.
Scalability
Optimize and test your implementations. Troubleshoot errors, identify issues with application performance, and improve how you
scale.
Remove Shift_JIS to Windows-31J Character Mapping
The system property sun.nio.cs.map for Japanese character mapping from Shift_JIS to Windows-31J is no longer available.

182
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Platform Development Tools

Salesforce CLI
Use Salesforce CLI to create environments for development and testing, synchronize source code, run tests, and control your application
lifecycle.
We release new versions of Salesforce CLI weekly. Read the weekly release notes to learn about recent updates.

IN THIS SECTION:
Keep Up with the Latest Salesforce CLI Enhancements
Stay up to date with recent Salesforce CLI enhancements so that you can learn about better ways to work with your Salesforce DX
projects.

Keep Up with the Latest Salesforce CLI Enhancements

Stay up to date with recent Salesforce CLI enhancements so that you can learn about better ways to work with your Salesforce DX
projects.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce CLI version 2.53.6 and later.
How: Read the Salesforce CLI weekly release notes for detailed information about all the new and changed features and bug fixes in
recent releases. This topic provides just a taste of some of the features that we recently delivered.

Do More with Data

We made a number of improvements and additions to the commands in the data topic.
Tree Commands
You can now specify multiple --query flags to the data export tree command. As a result, you can now easily export
records from junction objects and their parents so that their many-to-many relationships are preserved when you specify the
generated CSV file to the data import tree command. An example of a junction object is AccountContactRelation.
Bulk Commands
• We added these new commands that work with large datasets.
– data export|resume bulk
– data import|resume bulk
– data update|resume bulk
Together with the existing data delete|upsert bulk, you can now use Salesforce CLI commands to run any of the
ingest operations of Bulk API 2.0.

• Get the results of a completed bulk import, update, upsert, or delete with the new data bulk results command. The
command works for jobs executed with a CLI command such as data import bulk or an external tool like Data Loader.
Query Commands
• Execute a SOSL search in your org from the command line with the new data search command.
• Write the CSV or JSON results of a SOQL query to a file with the new --output-file flag of data query.
We also improved the documentation in the Salesforce DX Developer Guide about working with data. Check it out!

Execute GraphQL and REST APIs Directly (Beta)

Use the new api request rest CLI command to make an authenticated HTTP request to your org by using the Salesforce REST
API. This example lists information about limits in the org with the alias my-org.

183
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Platform Development Tools

Note: This feature is a Beta Service. Customers may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms
(https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/).
sf api request rest 'services/data/v63.0/limits' --target-org my-org

Use the new api request graphql CLI command to execute a GraphQL statement. The command uses the GraphQL API to
query or modify Salesforce objects. This example executes a GraphQL query on the Account object in your default org by specifying the
query directly to the --body flag.
sf api request graphql --body "query accounts { uiapi { query { Account { edges { node {
Id \n Name { value } } } } } } }"

Install on Windows ARM64 Computers

You can now install Salesforce CLI on Windows ARM64 computers with our new sf-arm64.exe installer.

Get Detailed Coverage Information from Apex Tests

Get detailed coverage results about a previously run Apex test by specifying the new --detailed-coverage flag of the apex
get test command. Detailed coverage results are available for only human-readable results. For example:

sf apex get test --test-run-id <ID> --code-coverage --detailed-coverage

Open an Agent in Your Org’s Agent Builder

Open an agent in your org’s Agent Builder UI with the new open org agent command. Use the --name flag to specify its API
name. For example:
sf org open agent --name Coral_Cloud_Agent

To find the agent’s API name, go to Setup in your org and navigate to the agent’s details page.

Customize New Sandboxes with More Options

When you create a sandbox with the org create sandbox command, you can now configure the public group of Salesforce
users that can access the sandbox. Include either the activationUserGroupId or activationUserGroupName option
(but not both) in the sandbox definition file. In this example, the ExpertUsers Salesforce public user group can access the sandbox
after it’s created.
{
"sandboxName": "dev1",
"licenseType": "Developer",
"activationUserGroupName": "ExpertUsers"
}

We also made these improvements to sandbox creation and cloning.

• Specify the name of the Apex class that runs after each copy of the sandbox with the new apexClassName definition file option.
Previously, you could specify it only with an ID (apexClassId).
• Specify the ID of the sandbox that you want to clone with the new --source-id flag or sourceId definition file option.
Previously, you could specify it only with its name (--source-sandbox-name).

184
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Platform Development Tools

View the Stages of a Running Command

Get a behind-the-scenes look at what happens when you execute certain CLI commands with the new multi-stage output feature. For
example, when you execute org create scratch, you now see this output while the command is executing.
$ sf org create scratch --edition developer --alias my-scratch-org

────────────── Creating Scratch Org ──────────────

Prepare Request 37ms

Send Request 14.61s
Wait For Org - Skipped
Available 5ms
Authenticate 1.46s
Deploy Settings
Done

Request Id: 2SRWs000002aOttOAE

OrgId: 00DOv00000C6RbJ
Username: test-p4bh29a7jcvc@example.com
Alias: my-scratch-org
Elapsed Time: 16.21s

Other commands that display this multi-stage output include project deploy start and project deploy retrieve.
We also added two environment variables for you to control how this new output behaves in a continuous integration (CI) environment.
• SF_CI_UPDATE_FREQUENCY_MS
• SF_CI_HEARTBEAT_FREQUENCY_MS

Enjoy Better Table Output

Commands that display tabular output, such as org list limits, now display tables that are more visually appealing and easier
to read.
You can customize how the new table output looks like with these new environment variables.
• SF_NO_TABLE_STYLE
• SF_TABLE_OVERFLOW
• SF_TABLE_BORDER_STYLE

SEE ALSO:
GitHub: Salesforce CLI Release Notes
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Working with Data
Salesforce CLI Command Reference: data Commands
Salesforce CLI Setup Guide: Environment Variables
Salesforce CLI Download Page
Salesforce CLI Command Reference: api request Commands

185
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Platform Development Tools

Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code

The Salesforce Extension pack includes tools for developing on the Salesforce platform in the lightweight, extensible VS Code editor.
These tools provide features for working with development orgs (scratch orgs, sandboxes, and DE orgs), Apex, Lightning web components,
Aura components, and Visualforce.
We release new versions of the extensions weekly. Read the weekly release notes to learn about recent updates.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code

Code Builder
Code Builder is a web-based integrated development environment that has all the power and flexibility of Visual Studio Code, Salesforce
Extensions for VS Code, and Salesforce CLI in your web browser.
We release new versions of Code Builder, as needed.
See the off-cycle Code Builder release notes on GitHub.

SEE ALSO:
Code Builder Developer Guide

Agentforce for Developers

Agentforce for Developers is an AI-powered developer tool that’s available as a Visual Studio Code extension in VS Code desktop and
Code Builder. Agentforce for Developers is built using CodeGen and xGen-Code, secure and custom AI models from Salesforce. It's
enabled by default in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Partner Developer, and Developer editions.
Read the weekly release notes to learn about recent updates.

SEE ALSO:
Agentforce for Developers

Scalability
Optimize and test your implementations. Troubleshoot errors, identify issues with application performance, and improve how you scale.

IN THIS SECTION:
Book Sandbox Slots for Peak Load Testing with Scale Test
Book a slot on your sandbox instance calendar and test at production peak load by using Scale Test. Business metrics, use cases, and
flows now have more input options. Use Trial Accuracy Checker to create a sandbox trial run by using the same code from production.
The Test Execution page now includes a link to Scale Center on the Compare Tests tab.
Identify Slow Reports, View Decrypted URLs, and Access Scale Center Deep Links
The Report Insights feature shows you which reports were slow over the last week. Fully decrypted URLs appear in the Callout
summary of the Integrations analysis. Signature Customers see Scale Center deep linking in the Technical Health Score (THS) on the
CSS Portal.

186
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Functions

Optimize Code with ApexGuru

Antipattern detection features optimize Apex code and improve performance. View SOQL queries in loops, identify inefficient query
filters and operations, and get recommendations for reducing expensive string operations and debug statements.

Book Sandbox Slots for Peak Load Testing with Scale Test
Book a slot on your sandbox instance calendar and test at production peak load by using Scale Test. Business metrics, use cases, and
flows now have more input options. Use Trial Accuracy Checker to create a sandbox trial run by using the same code from production.
The Test Execution page now includes a link to Scale Center on the Compare Tests tab.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions. Scale Test is available for customers with a Full sandbox in all
Hyperforce regions, except Singapore. To get access, contact your customer success representative or account executive.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scale, and then click Scale Test.

Identify Slow Reports, View Decrypted URLs, and Access Scale Center Deep Links
The Report Insights feature shows you which reports were slow over the last week. Fully decrypted URLs appear in the Callout summary
of the Integrations analysis. Signature Customers see Scale Center deep linking in the Technical Health Score (THS) on the CSS Portal.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition. Scale Center isn’t supported in Government Cloud Plus. Scale
Center is generally available at no additional cost for all Unlimited Edition Full sandbox, Signature, and Scale Test customers. You can
enable Scale Center for five Standard (non-SysAdmin) users per org.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scale, and then click Scale Center.

Optimize Code with ApexGuru

Antipattern detection features optimize Apex code and improve performance. View SOQL queries in loops, identify inefficient query
filters and operations, and get recommendations for reducing expensive string operations and debug statements.
Where: These updates apply to Full sandbox and production environments with ApexGuru enabled. ApexGuru is generally available at
no additional cost for all Unlimited Edition Full Sandbox, Signature, and Scale Test customers.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scale, and then click Scale Center. Navigate to Scale Insights, and then click ApexGuru
Insights.

Remove Shift_JIS to Windows-31J Character Mapping

The system property sun.nio.cs.map for Japanese character mapping from Shift_JIS to Windows-31J is no longer available.
Where: This change applies to Java environments.
Why: The system property sun.nio.cs.map was originally added in JDK 1.4.1 to assist with application migration from the old
definition of Shift_JIS (equivalent to Microsoft Windows code page 932) to the set defined by IANA.
How: Stagger the removal of the sun.nio.cs.map system property from customer environments, beginning with sandboxes.

Salesforce Functions
Salesforce Functions is no longer available for purchase or renewal. Learn about the retirement plan for Salesforce Functions.

187
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes AppExchange Partners

IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Functions Is Being Retired
Salesforce Functions is no longer available for purchase or renewal. You can continue using your subscription through your existing
order term. To preserve the capabilities that Salesforce Functions provided to your org, deploy an alternative solution before your
existing order term ends.

Salesforce Functions Is Being Retired

Salesforce Functions is no longer available for purchase or renewal. You can continue using your subscription through your existing
order term. To preserve the capabilities that Salesforce Functions provided to your org, deploy an alternative solution before your existing
order term ends.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the Salesforce mobile
app in Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
For the end-of-life timeline and more information on migrating your functions, see Salesforce Functions Retirement on the Heroku Dev
Center.

SEE ALSO:
Developer Doc: Salesforce Functions Release Notes

AppExchange Partners
This release introduces improved guidance for navigating security reviews and publishing listings.

IN THIS SECTION:
AppExchange Developer Documentation Has Been Updated
The revamped security and publishing sections in the ISVforce Guide provide improved guidance for passing a security review and
managing your AppExchange listings.

AppExchange Developer Documentation Has Been Updated

The revamped security and publishing sections in the ISVforce Guide provide improved guidance for passing a security review and
managing your AppExchange listings.
Where: This change applies to the ISVforce Guide.
When: The updated documentation is available in early January 2025.

SEE ALSO:
ISVforce Guide: Manage Your Security Reviews
ISVforce Guide: Manage Your AppExchange Listings

Change Data Capture

Receive change event notifications for more Salesforce objects.

188
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Change Data Capture

IN THIS SECTION:
Receive Change Event Notifications for More Objects
With Change Data Capture, you can now receive notifications of record changes for more objects.

Receive Change Event Notifications for More Objects

With Change Data Capture, you can now receive notifications of record changes for more objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Select the objects that you want to get notifications for on the Change Data Capture page in Setup, or create a custom channel.
You can now receive change events for these objects.

Commerce
• CustomFieldDisplayValue

Industries
Net Zero Cloud
• AirTravelEnrgyUse
• AnnualEmssnInventory
• AntiCorruptionInitSum
• DisclsReportingPeriod
• DivrsEquityInclSum
• EconomicPerformanceSum
• EmpBenefitSummary
• EmployeeDemographicSum
• EmployeeDevelopmentSum
• FrgtHaulingEnrgyUse
• GeneratedWaste
• GovtFinancialAsstSum
• GroundTravelEnrgyUse
• HotelStayEnrgyUse
• OrgIncidentSummary
• RentalCarEnrgyUse
• Scope3CrbnFtprnt
• Scope3EmssnSrc
• Scope3PcmtItem
• Scope3PcmtSummary
• SocialContributionSum
• StnryAssetCrbnFtprnt
• StnryAssetCrbnFtprntItm
• StnryAssetEnrgyUse

189
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Platform Events

• StnryAssetEnvrSrc
• StnryAssetWaterActvty
• StnryAssetWaterFtprnt
• StnryAssetWtrFtprntItm
• TaxDisclosureSummary
• VehicleAssetCrbnFtprnt
• VehicleAssetEmssnSrc
• VehicleAssetEnrgyUse
• WasteFootprint
• WasteFootprintItem

Loyalty Management
• GameReward
• GameParticipant
• TransactionJournal

Salesforce Flow
• FlowOrchestration
• FlowOrchestrationVersion

Platform Events
View more information about event allocations in Setup. Prepare for the retirement of the legacy standard-volume platform events.

IN THIS SECTION:
Discover the Grace Allocation for Daily Delivered Events for Salesforce Orgs with an Add-On License
The Event Allocations section now displays the grace allocation for daily event delivery on the Platform Events page in Setup. Also,
to flag overages, usage is now marked in red. The grace allocation isn't new but you can now more easily discover it in Setup.
Salesforce reserves the right to adjust grace allocations at any time. The grace allocation for daily event delivery, which is higher than
the allocation that you get through the add-on, helps prevent disruption to your subscribers due to usage spikes. As long as the
daily event delivery usage is within the grace allocation, your subscribers aren’t stopped and continue to receive events.
Standard-Volume Platform Events Are Being Retired
Standard-volume platform events are legacy custom events and are scheduled for retirement in Summer ’25. As of Spring ’19 (API
version 45.0), you can define only high-volume platform events, and you can’t define standard-volume platform events. If you still
have legacy standard-volume events, replace them with high-volume platform events. After retirement, you can no longer publish
or subscribe to standard-volume platform events.

190
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Event Bus

Discover the Grace Allocation for Daily Delivered Events for Salesforce Orgs with an
Add-On License
The Event Allocations section now displays the grace allocation for daily event delivery on the Platform Events page in Setup. Also, to
flag overages, usage is now marked in red. The grace allocation isn't new but you can now more easily discover it in Setup. Salesforce
reserves the right to adjust grace allocations at any time. The grace allocation for daily event delivery, which is higher than the allocation
that you get through the add-on, helps prevent disruption to your subscribers due to usage spikes. As long as the daily event delivery
usage is within the grace allocation, your subscribers aren’t stopped and continue to receive events.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: Salesforce provides the grace allocation for orgs that have the add-on license for additional platform events or change events.
This image shows the Event Allocations table with the new Grace Allocation column.

SEE ALSO:
Platform Events Developer Guide: Platform Event Allocations

Standard-Volume Platform Events Are Being Retired

Standard-volume platform events are legacy custom events and are scheduled for retirement in Summer ’25. As of Spring ’19 (API version
45.0), you can define only high-volume platform events, and you can’t define standard-volume platform events. If you still have legacy
standard-volume events, replace them with high-volume platform events. After retirement, you can no longer publish or subscribe to
standard-volume platform events.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Migrate Standard-Volume Platform Events to High-Volume Platform Events Before Retirement

Event Bus
Package and distribute event relays.

IN THIS SECTION:
Package and Distribute Event Relays
Event relays are now available in second-generation managed packages, unlocked packages, and first-generation managed packages.
Previously, event relays were available only in unmanaged packages. To use an event relay from a managed package, customers
can install the managed package from AppExchange.

191
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Package and Distribute Event Relays

Event relays are now available in second-generation managed packages, unlocked packages, and first-generation managed packages.
Previously, event relays were available only in unmanaged packages. To use an event relay from a managed package, customers can
install the managed package from AppExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Build and Release Your App

New and Changed Items for Developers

Here is where you can find new and changed objects, calls, classes, components, commands, and more that help you customize Salesforce
features.

IN THIS SECTION:
Lightning Components: New and Changed Items
Build UI easily with these new and changed resources.
Apex: New and Changed Items
These classes, enums, and interfaces are new or have changes.
ConnectApi (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and Enums
Create custom experiences in Salesforce using Connect in Apex.
API: New and Changed Items
Access more data objects and metadata types in API version 63.0.

Lightning Components: New and Changed Items

Build UI easily with these new and changed resources.

IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed Lightning Web Components
Build UI easily with these new and changed components.
Changed Targets for Lightning Web Components
Use Lightning web components in builders such as Lightning App Builder, Experience Builder, Flow Builder, and more.
New and Changed Aura Components
Build UI easily with these new and changed components.

New and Changed Lightning Web Components

Build UI easily with these new and changed components.

Changed Lightning Web Components

These components have changed.

192
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

lightning-button-menu
This attribute has changed.
• variant—The bare variant no longer displays with a border.
This accessibility behavior is new.
• The button menu with the role="menu" attribute renders with aria-labelledby to reference the assistive text Show
menu.
• The button menu renders with the role="menu" attribute and aria-labelledby to reference the assistive text Show
menu.
lightning-combobox
These accessibility behaviors are new.
• For options that specify aria-checked="true", the aria-selected attribute specifies a value of true.
• When an option label is too long to fit in a single line, the label wraps and continues in a new line. If a long word in an option
label isn't fully visible, scroll horizontally on the dropdown list to reveal the whole word.
lightning-input
These attributes are new.
• date-aria-error-message—A space-separated list of element IDs that provide error messages for the date input when
type="datetime".
• time-aria-error-message—A space-separated list of element IDs that provide error messages for the time input when
type='datetime'.
This attribute has changed.
• max-length—When the maximum number of characters is reached, the role="alert" attribute is appended to an
error message, which is then announced by screen readers.
These accessibility behaviors are new for the color type.
• The input field renders with the aria-label attribute set to Enter Hexadecimal value, which is announced by
screen readers to present the purpose of the field.
• The color picker panel renders with role="application", which enables you to choose a value on the panel using arrow
keys.
• When the input field is marked required, the aria-required attribute is passed down with the true value.
This accessibility behavior is new for the date, datetime, and time types.
• If you provide a value for aria-error-message or aria-errormessage, the input field renders with
aria-errormessage. Use the standard aria-errormessage HTML attribute to identify the element that provides
an error message for the input field. The aria-error-message attribute maps to aria-errormessage.
lightning-input-field
The lookup field type is appended with the slds-has-selection class and renders the selected object with a border.
When you pass an empty string or a string with only spaces to field-name, the component isn't rendered. A warning is returned
in the web console instead.
lightning-input-rich-text
These accessibility behaviors are new.
• For toolbar buttons that open a dialog, such as the link button, the button renders with aria-haspopup="dialog".
Toolbar buttons that open a dialog no longer render with aria-pressed="false".

193
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

• For the overall toolbar, the disabled state now uses Disabled Text Formatting in the aria-label attribute, or
Text Formatting otherwise. Previously, the disabled state used disabled on the aria-label attribute and an
empty string when the toolbar is active.
• For the color button, the color picker panel renders with role="application", which enables you to choose a value on
the panel using arrow keys.
• The remove formatting button no longer uses the aria-pressed attribute.
• The aria-describedby attribute is now associated with the element that renders with role="textbox" instead of
the wrapping element. This change lets screen readers announce error messages during user input.
• aria-describedby is appended only when the component is in an invalid state.
lightning-record-picker
A selected record is appended with the slds-has-selection class and renders with a border.
lightning-rich-text-toolbar-button
This attribute is new.
• aria-haspopup—Specifies the value of the aria-haspopup attribute for the rendered toolbar button. Use this attribute
to indicate the type of popup that your custom button opens.
lightning-tree-grid
This accessibility behavior is new.
• If the first column is type url and you pass in the label type attribute, the row toggle button now renders the title
attribute and assistive text with the label value instead of the URL. For example, if Account Name is the label value, the
assistive text is Expand Account Name instead of Expand https://example.com.

SEE ALSO:
Component Library

Changed Targets for Lightning Web Components

Use Lightning web components in builders such as Lightning App Builder, Experience Builder, Flow Builder, and more.
These targets have changed.
lightning__FlowScreen
Handle errors in a flow screen using setCustomValidity(externalErrorMessage: string) and
reportValidity() in Flow Builder. See Design Component Errors for a Better Experience

New and Changed Aura Components

Build UI easily with these new and changed components.

Changed Aura Components

This component has changed.
lightning:combobox
These accessibility behaviors are new.
• For options that specify aria-checked="true", the aria-selected attribute specifies a value of true.
• When an option label is too long to fit in a single line, the label wraps and continues in a new line. If a long word in an option
label isn't fully visible, scroll horizontally on the dropdown list to reveal the whole word.

194
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

lightning:input
These attributes are new.
• dateAriaErrorMessage—A space-separated list of element IDs that provide error messages for the date input when
type="datetime".
• timeAriaErrorMessage—A space-separated list of element IDs that provide error messages for the time input when
type='datetime'.
This attribute has changed.
• maxLength—When the maximum number of characters is reached, the role="alert" attribute is appended to an error
message, which is then announced by screen readers.
These accessibility behaviors are new for the color type.
• The input field renders with the aria-label attribute set to Enter Hexadecimal value, which is announced by
screen readers to present the purpose of the field.
• The color picker panel renders with role="application", which enables you to choose a value on the panel using arrow
keys.
• When the input field is marked required, the aria-required attribute is passed down with the true value.
This accessibility behavior is new for the date, datetime, and time types.
• If you provide a value for ariaErrorMessage, the input field renders with aria-errormessage. The
ariaErrorMessage attribute maps to the standard aria-errormessage HTML attribute.
lightning:inputField
The lookup field type is appended with the slds-has-selection class and renders the selected object with a border.
When you pass an empty string or a string with only spaces to fieldName, the component isn't rendered. A warning is returned
in the web console instead.
lightning:treeGrid
This accessibility behavior is new.
• If the first column is type url and you pass in the label type attribute, the row toggle button now renders the title
attribute and assistive text with the label value instead of the URL. For example, if Account Name is the label value, the
assistive text is Expand Account Name instead of Expand https://example.com.

SEE ALSO:
Component Library
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide
Lightning Components: New and Changed Items

Apex: New and Changed Items

These classes, enums, and interfaces are new or have changes.
For more information on these enhancements, see the Apex Developer Guide and the Apex Reference Guide.

IN THIS SECTION:
ConnectApi Namespace
The ConnectApi namespace (Connect in Apex) has new or changed classes, methods, or enums.

195
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Messaging Namespace
The Messaging namespace has these new or changed classes.
QuickAction Namespace
The QuickActions namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
System Namespace
The System namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.

SEE ALSO:
Apex: New Features

ConnectApi Namespace
The ConnectApi namespace (Connect in Apex) has new or changed classes, methods, or enums.
Many Connect REST API resource actions are exposed as static methods on Apex classes in the ConnectApi namespace. These
methods use other ConnectApi classes to input and return information. The ConnectApi namespace is referred to as Connect
in Apex.
For the new and changed ConnectApi classes, methods, and enums, see ConnectAPI (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and
Enums.

Messaging Namespace
The Messaging namespace has these new or changed classes.

New or Changed Methods in Existing Classes

Learn if an unsubscription mechanism is defined
Use the new method getOneClickPost in the SingleEmailMessage class to retrieve the value set in the setOneClickPost
method.
Configure emails sent from Salesforce to contain unsubscribe functionality
Use the new method setOneClickPost in the SingleEmailMessage class to support unsubscribe functionality in emails sent
from Salesforce. This method adds a List-Unsubscribe-Post header to emails.
Capture comments in the List-Unsubscribe email header
Use the new method setUnsubscribeComment in the SingleEmailMessage class to provide context for unsubscribing from
email.
Configure HTTP addresses for unsubscribing recipients of email sent from Salesforce
Use the new method setUnsubscribeUrls in the SingleEmailMessage class to define the location of a mechanism to
unsubscribe email recipients.

QuickAction Namespace
The QuickActions namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.

196
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

New Classes
Store user utterances for use in agent quick actions
These are highlights of some methods in the new DescribeQuickActionParameter class. Use the getParameterName
and getParameterType methods to retrieve user utterances, for use only in agent quick actions.

New or Changed Methods in Existing Classes

System Namespace
The System namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.

New or Changed Methods in Existing Classes

Block client-side JavaScript from accessing a cookie
Use the new isHttpOnly parameter in the constructor Cookie(name, value, path, maxAge, isSecure,
SameSite, isHttpOnly) for the existing Cookie class. Return the value of this attribute with the new
Cookie.isHttpOnly() method.
Pause scheduled Apex jobs
Use the new System.pauseJobByName(JobName) and System.pauseJobByJobId(JobId) methods to pause
a scheduled Apex job by specifying the job's name or cronTriggerId.
Resume scheduled Apex jobs
Use the new System.resumeJobByName(JobName) and System.resumeJobByJobId(JobId) methods to
resume a scheduled Apex job by specifying the job's name or cronTriggerId.

ConnectApi (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and Enums

Create custom experiences in Salesforce using Connect in Apex.
Many Connect REST API resource actions are exposed as static methods on Apex classes in the ConnectApi namespace. These
methods use other ConnectApi classes to input and return information. The ConnectApi namespace is referred to as Connect
in Apex.

IN THIS SECTION:
ConnectApi Rate Limit Changes
To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per namespace, per hour ConnectApi rate limits, we’re migrating orgs to the per org, per
24-hour Salesforce Platform API rate limit. Orgs created in Summer ’24 and later are already using the Salesforce Platform API rate
limit. For migrated and new orgs, only method calls that require Chatter are subject to the per user, per namespace, per hour rate
limit.
New Connect in Apex Classes
These classes are new.
Changed Connect in Apex Input Classes
These input classes have changes.
Changed Connect in Apex Output Classes
These output classes have changes.

197
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Changed Connect in Apex Enums

These enums have changes.

SEE ALSO:
Connect REST API
Apex Reference Guide: ConnectApi Namespace
Connect REST API Developer Guide

ConnectApi Rate Limit Changes

To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per namespace, per hour ConnectApi rate limits, we’re migrating orgs to the per org, per 24-hour
Salesforce Platform API rate limit. Orgs created in Summer ’24 and later are already using the Salesforce Platform API rate limit. For
migrated and new orgs, only method calls that require Chatter are subject to the per user, per namespace, per hour rate limit.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions in
all API versions.
When: Org migrations to the Salesforce Platform API rate limit continue on a rolling basis. Migrations occur in the background without
notification.

New Connect in Apex Classes

These classes are new.

Commerce
These new methods are in the ConnectApi.CommerceCart class.
Perform a complete cart calculation with custom fields
• calculateCart(webstoreId, activeCartOrId, effectiveAccountId, calculateCartInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.CalculateCartInput
Calculate shipping costs for a cart
• evaluateShipping(webstoreId, activeCartOrId, effectiveAccountId,
cartEvaluateShippingInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.CartEvaluateShippingInput
Calculate taxes for a cart
• evaluateTaxes(webstoreId, activeCartOrId, effectiveAccountId, cartEvaluateTaxInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.CartEvaluateTaxInput

Salesforce CMS
These new methods are in the ConnectApi.ManagedContent class.
Get targets that a managed content space folder is shared with
• getMCSFolderShares(folderId)
New output class: ConnectApi.MCSFolderShareCollection

198
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Update targets that a managed content space folder is shared with

• patchMCSFolderShares(folderId, mcsFolderShareCollectionUpdateInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.MCSFolderShareCollectionUpdateInput
New output class: ConnectApi.MCSFolderShareCollection
Get targets that a managed content space folder can be shared with
• getMCSFolderShareTargets(folderId)
New output class: ConnectApi.MCSFolderShareTargetCollection
These new methods are in the ConnectApi.ManagedContentDelivery class.
Get a page of collection items for a channel
• getCollectionItemsForChannel(channelId, collectionKeyOrId, language, pageToken,
pageSize)
Get a page of collection items for an Experience Cloud site
• getCollectionItemsForSite(siteId, collectionKeyOrId, language, pageToken, pageSize)

Salesforce Flow
This new method is in the ConnectApi.Orchestration class.
Get details for an orchestration instance
• getOrchestrationInstance(instanceId)

Changed Connect in Apex Input Classes

These input classes have changes.

Commerce
ConnectApi.ProductSearchGroupingInput
This input class has these changed properties.
• groupingOption—This property now supports BestMatch, which groups search results by the best-match product of
the variation group.
• topProductType—This property is no longer available.

Named Credentials
ConnectApi.ExternalAuthIdentityProviderInput
This input class has these new properties.
• clientAuthentication—Client authentication method that describes how credentials are sent to the authorization
server.
• parameters—List of custom request parameters to customize and extend requests to the identity provider’s token endpoint.
• standardExternalIdentityProvider—Reference to a standard external auth identity provider.

199
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Salesforce CMS
ConnectApi.ManagedContentChannelCreateRepresentation
This input class has this new property.
• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentChannelUpdateRepresentation
This input class has this new property.
• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentVariantUpdateInput
This input class has this new property.
• apiName—API name of the managed content variant.

Changed Connect in Apex Output Classes

These output classes have changes.

Chatter
ConnectApi.EmailMessageCapability
This output class has this new property.
• automationType—Automation type of the email message.

Commerce
ConnectApi.CommerceProductSummary
This output class has this new property.
• productVariationInfo—Product variation attributes, metadata, and mappings of attribute combinations to variation
product IDs.
ConnectApi.ProductAttributeInfo
This output class has these new properties.
• options—List of product attribute value metadata.
• viewType—View type for product attributes.

Named Credentials
ConnectApi.ExternalAuthIdentityProvider
This output class has these new properties.
• clientAuthentication—Client authentication method that describes how credentials are sent to the authorization
server.
• parameters—List of custom request parameters to customize and extend requests to the identity provider’s token endpoint.
• standardExternalIdentityProvider—Reference to a standard external auth identity provider.

Salesforce CMS
ConnectApi.ManagedContentChannel
This output class has this new property.

200
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentCollectionItems
This output class has these new properties.
• currentPageUrl—URL to the current page.
• nextPageUrl—URL to the next page.
• previousPageUrl—URL to the previous page.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentDeliveryChannelRepresentation
This output class has this new property.
• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentSpace
This output class has this new property.
• fullyQualifiedName—Fully qualified name of the managed content space.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentVariant
This output class has this new property.
• apiName—API name of the managed content variant.

Salesforce Flow
ConnectApi.OrchestrationStageInstance
This output class has this new property.
• completionTime—The duration of the stage in seconds.
ConnectApi.OrchestrationStepInstance
This output class has these new properties.
• assignedTo—The ID of the user, group, or queue that’s assigned to a work item.
• assigneeType—The assignee type associated with a work item.
• comments—The string stored in an output variable with the API name of Comments from a flow called by a completed
orchestration step.
• completedBy—The ID of the user who completed the work item.
• completionTime—The duration of the step in seconds.
• description—The description associated with the orchestration step.

Changed Connect in Apex Enums

These enums have changes.
For information about these enums, see ConnectApi Enums in the Apex Reference Guide.
ConnectApi.CommerceSearchGroupingOption
This enum has this new value.
• BestMatch—Search results are grouped by the best-match product of the variation group.

API: New and Changed Items

Access more data objects and metadata types in API version 63.0.

201
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed Objects
Access more data through these new and changed standard objects.
New and Changed Standard Platform Events
Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new and changed standard platform events.
Bulk API 2.0
These calls are new, changed, or deprecated in API version 63.0.
Connect REST API
Integrate mobile apps, intranet sites, and third-party web applications with Salesforce using Connect REST API.
CRM Analytics REST API
Using the CRM Analytics REST API, bulk add items to your analytics collections and specify tooltip styles in your dashboards.
Invocable Actions
Invocable Actions represent the actions that can be accomplished on Salesforce with APIs.
Metadata API
Access more metadata through these new and changed metadata types.
SOAP API
These calls are new, changed, or deprecated in REST API version 63.0.
Tooling API New and Changed Objects
Access more metadata through these new and changed Tooling API objects.
User Interface API
Sort list views by multiple columns, and User Interface API supports more objects.

New and Changed Objects

Access more data through these new and changed standard objects.

Commerce
Store variation details for the product attribute item view
Use the new CustomFieldDisplayValue object.
Use a lookup for hierarchical bundle relationships
Use the new MainFulfillmentOrderLineItemId field on the existing FulfillmentOrderLineItem object.
Track the originating application and record for each payment
Use the new PaymentIntitiationSource object.
Determine the origin of the payment made from a payment link
Use the new PaymentIntitiationSource field on the existing PaymentLink object.
Get notified of Salesforce Payments platform events
Use the new PaymentInitiationSourceApplication, PaymentInitiationSourceChannel,
PaymentInitiationSourceId, PaymentInitiationSourceProcess, PaymentIntentGuid, and
PaymentLinkId fields on the existing PaymentGateway object.
Skip creating payment schedules and payment schedule items for subscription invoices
Use the new ShouldExcludePayment and PaymentExclusionReason fields on the Invoice object.

202
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Specify the tax engine type and ID of the tax provider account for subscriptions
Use the new Type and TaxPrvdAccountIndentifier fields on the existing TaxEngine object.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: Store a meta tag for a product category page
The RecordId field on the existing ObjectMetadataTag object is a polymorphic relationship field. It supports both Product2 and
ProductCategory objects.
View the delivery service provisioning region
Use the new ServiceRegion field on the existing DeliveryEstimationSetup object.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: Cart object fields are editable
Customize fields on these existing objects.
• CartDeliveryGroup
• CartItem
• CartItemPriceAdjustment
• CartTax
• CartValidationOutput
• WebCart
• WebCartAdjustmentBasis
• WebCartAdjustmentGroup

Customization
Enable the View All Fields object permission in a permission set
Use the new PermissionsViewAllFields field on the existing ObjectPermissions object.
Query more information about users
Use the new EndDay, HasUserVerifiedEmail, HasUserVerifiedPhone, PasswordExpirationDate, and
StartDay fields on the existing User object.

Development
Create custom libraries for masking data in Data Mask
Use the new DataMaskCustomValueLibrary object.

Event Monitoring
Analyze API operational logs using human-readable names on the EventLogFile event
Use the new CONNECTED_APP_NAME and USER_NAME fields on the API Total Usage event type.
Monitor content security policy (CSP) violations
Use the new CSP Violation event type.
Get details about blocked redirections
Use the new Blocked Redirect event type.
DEPRECATED: The Insecure External Assets event type is deprecated
Because HTTPS connections are required to load external assets, Insecure External Assets events no longer apply. In Spring ’25 and
later, the Insecure External Assets event type captures no data.
Surface event data stored in standard objects
Use Event Log Objects, now generally available.

203
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Experience Cloud
Create a content taxonomy or a hierarchy of terms that can be used to classify and organize content from Salesforce CMS
Use these new objects.
• ContentTaxonomy
• ContentTaxonomyTerm
• ContentTaxonomyRelatedTerm
• ContentTaxonomyTermRelatedTerm
Get information about the possible types of relationships between terms in a content taxonomy
Use the new ContentTaxonomyTermRelationshipType object.

Field Service
Identify and Manage Empty Appointment Bundles
Use the new DoesDeleteEmptyBundles and EmptyBundleStatus fields on the existing ApptBundleConfig object.
Build Data Capture Forms
Use the new DynamicDataCapture object.

Revenue
Get inventory levels for associated fulfillment order items and set the scaling method
Use the new AssociatedFoItemInventory and AssociatedQuanScaleMethod fields on the existing
FulfillmentLineRel object.

Sales
Indicate the position of a forecasting dimension and the forecast type of the forecasting group
Use the new DisplayPosition and ForecastingTypeId fields on the existing ForecastingGroup object.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: The SourceObject field on the ForecastingGroup object supports the Nillable
The SourceObject field on the ForecastingGroup object now supports the Nillable property.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: The BuyerAttributes field on the Contact object supports the restricted picklist
The BuyerAttributes field on the Contact object now supports the Restricted picklist property.
Calculate the progress that a sales team makes toward an account plan objective’s measurable goal
Use the new AccountPlanObjMeasCalcDef object.
Specify criteria for determining which records count toward completing an account plan objective’s measurable goal
Use the new AccountPlanObjMeasCalcCond object.
Associate a calculation definition with an account plan objective's measurable goal
Use the new AccountPlanObjMeasCalcDefId field on the existing AccountPlanObjectiveMeasure object.
Track the date and time that the current value of an account plan objective's measurable goal was last updated
Use the new CurrentValueTimestamp field on the existing AccountPlanObjectiveMeasure object.
Specify that an action plan is a sales action plan
Use the new supported value Sales in the existing ActionPlanType field on the ActionPlan and ActionPlanTemplate objects.
Indicate the object that an action plan item is for
Use the new ItemEntityType field on the ActionPlanItem object.

204
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Specify that an action plan template item is an event

Use the new supported value Event in the existing ItemEntityType field on the ActionPlanTemplateItem and
ActionPlanTemplateItemValue objects.
Specify that a value on an action plan template item is for an event field
Use the new supported Event values in the existing ItemEntityFieldName field on the ActionPlanTemplateItemValue
object.
Capture the details of the total contract value
Use the new FrcstCustmCatgRampRateSrc object.
Designate team members to administer specific territories
Use the new TerritoryAdminAssignment object to designate team members for administering territories and their descendants.
Specify whether these team members can create, update, and delete territories. Also let designated team members assign other
team members to descendant territories, and manage record assignments and rules.
View an instance of conversation data analyzed by AI, a group of analyzed insights aggregated into a topic, and an instance
of call data from an analyzed set of insights.
Use the new ConvAnalysisSummary, ConvAnalysisTopic, and ConvAnalysisTopicEntry objects.

Salesforce Flow
DEPRECATED: The Environments field on the FlowDefinitionView object is being deprecated.
Instead, use the SupportedEnvironments field on the FlowDefinition object.
Get information about which environments a flow can run in.
Use the SupportedEnvironments field, which is on the FlowDefinitionView object. Introduced in API version 63.0, this field
has been added to the Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform.
View the label of an orchestration instance
Use the new OrchestrationLabel field on the existing FlowOrchestrationInstance object.
View the description of an orchestration step
Use the new Description field on the existing FlowOrchestrationStepInstance object.
View the number of seconds that have passed since an assigned orchestration work item was created
Use the new ElapsedTimeSinceCreationInSec field on the existing FlowOrchestrationWorkItem object. This field has
a value when the work item status is Assigned. When the orchestration work item status is Completed, this field has a null
value.
View the number of seconds that have passed since an assigned orchestration work item was last assigned
Use the new ElapsedTimeSinceAsgntInSec field on the existing FlowOrchestrationWorkItem object. This field has a value
when the work item status is Assigned. When the orchestration work item status is Completed, this field has a null value.
Determine whether flow metrics are logged to Data Cloud
Use the new AreMetricsLoggedToDataCloud field on the existing FlowDefinitionView, FlowRecord, FlowRecordVersion,
and FlowVersionView objects.
Identity flows triggered by a change to a Data Cloud data graph
Use the new DataGraphDataChange value on the existing TriggerType field of the FlowDefinitionView object, the
existing Type field of the FlowRecord object, and the FlowType field of the FlowRecordVersion object.
View the error description of the recurring flow interview
Use the new ErrorDetail field on the existing FlowDefinitionView, FlowVersionView, FlowRecord, and FlowRecordVersion
objects.

205
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

View the running status of the recurring flow interview

Use the ProgressStatus field on the existing FlowRecordVersionOccurrence object. Introduced in API version 60.0, this field
has been added to the Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform.
Track the progress of a record submitted for approval
Use the ApprovalSubmission object.
View the details of an approval submission
Use the ApprovalSubmissionDetail object.
View details about an approval work item associated with an approval step in a running approval orchestration
Use the ApprovalWorkItem object.

Security and Identity

Identify redirections that use a malformed URL
Use the new MalformedUrl value on the existing ViolationType field on the BrowserPolicyViolation object.
Trigger Flows with Privacy Job Sessions
Use the PrivacyJobSession object with Flow or Apex triggers.
Create and List Data Encryption Keys
Use the new DataEncryptionKey object to list data encryption keys (DEKs) and create new ones.
Configure headless user discovery for headless login flows
Use the new IsUserDisambiguationAllowedUsernamePwd field on the existing NetworkAuthApiSettings object.
Configure headless user discovery for headless forgot password flows
Use the new IsUserDisambiguationAllowedForgotPwd field on the existing NetworkAuthApiSettings object.
Store metric details related to public key certificate information
Use the new TenantSecurityCertificate object,
Store metric details related to Transaction Security Policy triggering events.
Use the new TenantSecurityTrigTransactionSecurityPol object.

Service
Route work items through a single system with Unified Routing for Voice (Beta)
Use the new CapabilitiesSupportsUnifiedRouting field on the existing ConversationVendorInfo object
to support unified routing.

Note: Unified routing is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this
pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Support typing indicators and read and delivery receipts for inbound messages in Bring Your Own Channel
Use the new IsInboundReceiptsEnabled and IsTypingIndicatorDisabled fields on the existing
ConversationChannelDefinition object.
Store admin choices for event-driven Messaging functionality in Bring Your Own Channel
Use the new CustomMsgChannel object.

New and Changed Standard Platform Events

Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new and changed standard platform events.

206
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Salesforce Overall
Be notified when an order is created or updated
Subscribe to PlaceOrderCompletedEvent to receive a notification when orders are created or updated by invoking the Place Order
API or the Place Sales Transaction API.

Commerce
Be notified when a shopper abandons their shopping cart
Subscribe to WebCartAbandonedEvent to receive notifications related to abandoned carts.
Be notified when a first billing payment for a subscription product is in the recovery stage after a failed billing schedule
creation
Use the new supported value FirstBillingRecovery in the existing ProcessingStage field on the
FirstBillPaymentSetupEvent object.
Track when invoices without payments are generated from billing schedules for subscriptions
Subscribe to InvoiceProcPymtExclEvent to receive notifications when the first invoice without a payment schedule is generated for
a subscription.

Sales
Notify subscribers whenever an Einstein Insight rule is triggered
Use the new ConversationInsightEvent platform event. Introduced in API version 60.0, this object has been added to the Platform
Events Developer Guide.

Bulk API 2.0

These calls are new, changed, or deprecated in API version 63.0.

Changed Calls
Use a consistent URI and naming scheme across Bulk API 2.0 parallel query results and events
Bulk API 2.0 parallel query results and events now use the same URIs. Also, we renamed resultLink to resultURL and
resultChunks to resultPages in Bulk API 2.0 parallel query results to match Bulk API 2.0 events.

Connect REST API

Integrate mobile apps, intranet sites, and third-party web applications with Salesforce using Connect REST API.

IN THIS SECTION:
Connect REST API Rate Limit Changes
To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per application, per hour Connect REST API rate limits, we’re migrating orgs to the per org,
per 24-hour Salesforce Platform API rate limit. Orgs created in Summer ’24 and later are already using the Salesforce Platform API
rate limit. For migrated and new orgs, only requests that require Chatter are subject to the per user, per application, per hour rate
limit.
New and Changed Connect REST API Resources
These resources are new or have changes.
Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies
These request bodies have changes.

207
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies

These response bodies have changes.

SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and Enums
Connect REST API Developer Guide
Apex Reference Guide: ConnectApi Namespace

Connect REST API Rate Limit Changes

To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per application, per hour Connect REST API rate limits, we’re migrating orgs to the per org, per
24-hour Salesforce Platform API rate limit. Orgs created in Summer ’24 and later are already using the Salesforce Platform API rate limit.
For migrated and new orgs, only requests that require Chatter are subject to the per user, per application, per hour rate limit.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions in
all API versions.
When: Org migrations to the Salesforce Platform API rate limit continue on a rolling basis. Migrations occur in the background without
notification.

New and Changed Connect REST API Resources

These resources are new or have changes.

Commerce
Use asynchronous product import
The /commerce/management/webstores/webstoreId/product-import resource for synchronous product
imports has been removed in version 63.0. Use the asynchronous product import resource
/commerce/management/import/product/jobs instead.
Perform a complete cart calculation with custom fields
Make a POST request to the existing
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/carts/activeCartOrId/actions/calculate resource.
New request body: Cart Calculate Input
Calculate shipping costs for a cart
Make a POST request to the new
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/carts/activeCartOrId/actions/evaluate-shipping resource.
New request body: Cart Evaluate Shipping Input
Calculate taxes for a cart
Make a POST request to the new
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/carts/activeCartOrId/actions/evaluate-taxes resource.
New request body: Cart Evaluate Tax Input
Get search results with product variation information
Make a GET request to the existing /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/search/products resource.
New request parameter: includeProductVariationInfo

208
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Delete empty delivery groups

Make a GET request to the existing
/commerce/webstores/webStoreId/carts/cartStateOrId/delivery-groups/actions/arrange-items
resource.
New request parameter: deleteEmptyDeliveryGroups
Capture an authorized payment
Make a POST request to the new /payments/payment-intents/paymentIntentId/capture resource.
New request body: Capture Service Input
New response body: Capture Service Output
Refund a payment
Make a POST request to the new /payments/payment-intents/paymentIntentId/refund resource.
New request body: Refund Service Input
New response body: Refund Service Output
Upload and retrieve the status of a CSV inventory data file
Make a POST request to the existing /commerce/oci/availability-records/uploads resource. Previously, you
could upload only JSON files.
Make a GET request to the existing /commerce/oci/availability-records/uploads/uploadId resource.
Previously, you could only retrieve the status of a JSON inventory availability upload job.
Create an invoice for an account, order, or a list of billing schedules for subscriptions
Make a POST request to the existing /commerce/invoicing/invoices/collection/actions/generate
resource.
New request body: Invoice Input
New response body: Revenue Async Response
Create an invocie for a subscription order without a payment
Make a POST request to the existing /commerce/invoicing/invoices/collection/actions/generate
resource.
New request parameter: configurationOverrides
Cancel an active Commerce subscription
Make a POST request to the new
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/subscriptions/actions/initiate-cancellation resource.
New request body: Commerce Subscription Cancel Input
New response body: Commerce Subscription Cancel Output
Retrieve a list of Commerce subscriptions
Make a GET request to the new /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/subscriptions resource.
New response body: Commerce Subscription Collection
Update the saved payment method for a Commerce subscription
Make a PATCH request to the new
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/subscriptions/subscriptionId/saved-payment-methods
resource.
New request body: Commerce Subscription Saved Payment Method Input
New response body: Commerce Subscription Detail

209
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Retrieve a list of child products associated with a parent product

Make a GET request to the existing /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/products/productId/children
resource.
New request parameter: includeProductSellingModels
Get a list of products for a specific web store
Make a GET request to the existing /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/products resource.
New request parameters: includeAttributeSetInfo, includegroupByAttributeVariationInfo,
includeProductSellingModels, and includeQuantityRule
View details of a specific order summary
Make a POST request to the existing /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/order-summaries/actions/lookup
resource.
New request parameter: excludePayments

Content Taxonomy
Get terms for a content taxonomy
Make a GET request to the new /connect/content-taxonomy/terms resource.
Required request parameters: depth, taxonomyId
New response body: Content Taxonomy Term Collection
Search content taxonomy terms
Make a GET request to the new /connect/content-taxonomy/terms/search resource.
Required request parameters: queryText, taxonomyIds
New response body: Content Taxonomy Term Collection
Create a term within a content taxonomy
Make a POST request to the new /connect/content-taxonomy/taxonomyId/terms resource.
New request body: Content Taxonomy Term Input
New response body: Content Taxonomy Term
Get a term within a content taxonomy
Make a GET request to the new /connect/content-taxonomy/taxonomyId/terms/termId resource.
New response body: Content Taxonomy Term
Update a term within a content taxonomy
Make a PATCH request to the new /connect/content-taxonomy/taxonomyId/terms/termId resource.
New request body: Content Taxonomy Term Input
New response body: Content Taxonomy Term
Delete a term within a content taxonomy
Make a DELETE request to the new /connect/content-taxonomy/taxonomyId/terms/termId resource.
Required request parameter: deleteChildren

Custom Domain
Get the ID for the custom domain associated with a domain name
Make a GET request to the new /connect/custom-domain/domains/domainName/domainId resource.

210
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

New response body: Custom Domain ID

Get values for the canonical name (CNAME) record that’s used to verify ownership of a custom domain
Make a GET request to the new /connect/custom-domain/domains/domainName/expected-cname resource.
New response body: Custom Domain CNAME for Domain Verification
Get values for the canonical name (CNAME) record that’s required for custom domains that use the Salesforce CDN
Make a GET request to the new /connect/custom-domain/domains/sites/storeOrSiteId/custom-urls
resource.
New response body: Custom Domain CNAME for the Salesforce CDN
Get a list of custom URLs for a custom domain associated with a site or store
Make a GET request to the new /connect/custom-domain/domains/sites/storeOrSiteId/custom-urls
resource.
Existing response body: Custom Domain Custom URL Collection

Data Cloud
Create an activation target
Make a POST request to the /ssot/activation-targets resource. This resource is available starting in December 2024.
New request body: Activation Target Input
Updated response body: Activation Target Output
Update an activation target
Make a PATCH request to the /ssot/activation-targets/activationTargetId resource. This resource is available
starting in December 2024.
New request body: Activation Target Input
Updated response body: Activation Target Output
Create an activation
Make a POST request to the /ssot/activations resource. This resource is available starting in December 2024.
New request body: Activation Definition Input
Updated response body: Activation Output
Update an activation
Make a PUT request to the /ssot/activations/activationId resource. This resource is available starting in December
2024.
New request body: Activation Definition Input
Updated response body: Activation Output
Validate your data transform logic before you create the transform
Make a POST request to the new /ssot/data-transforms-validation resource. This resource is available starting in
December 2024.
Updated request body: Data Transform Input
New response body: Data Transform Validation Output
Get the run history of a data transform, such as the number of records processed and any errors that occurred
Make a GET request to the new /ssot/data-transforms/dataTransformNameOrId/run-history resource.
This resource is available starting in December 2024.
New response body: Data Transform Run History Collection Representation

211
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Salesforce CMS
Get a page of collection items for a channel
Make a GET request to the existing
/connect/cms/delivery/channels/channelId/collections/collectionKeyOrId resource.
New optional request parameters: pageSize, pageToken
Get a page of collection items for an Experience Cloud site
Make a GET request to the existing /connect/sites/siteId/cms/delivery/collections/collectionKeyOrId
resource.
New optional request parameters: pageSize, pageToken
Get the targets that a managed content space folder is shared with
Make a GET request to the new /connect/cms/folders/folderId/shares resource.
New response body: MCS Folder Share Collection
Update the targets that a managed content space folder is shared with
Make a PATCH request to the new /connect/cms/folders/folderId/shares resource.
New request body: MCS Folder Share Collection Update Input
New response body: MCS Folder Share Collection
Get the targets that a managed content space folder can be shared with
Make a GET request to the new /connect/cms/folders/folderId/share-targets resource.
New response body: MCS Folder Share Target Collection
Get the taxonomy terms associated with managed content
Make a GET request to the new /connect/cms/contents/contentKeyOrId/taxonomy-terms resource.
New response body: Managed Content Taxonomy Term Collection
Add or remove taxonomy term associations from managed content
Make a PATCH request to the new /connect/cms/contents/contentKeyOrId/taxonomy-terms resource.
New request body: Managed Content Taxonomy Terms Input
New response body: Managed Content Taxonomy Term Collection

Salesforce Flow
Get orchestration instance details
Make a GET request to the new /connect/interaction/orchestration/instance/detail resource.
Required request parameter: instanceId

Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies

These request bodies have changes.

Commerce
Checkout Address Input
This request body has this new property.
• shipToPhoneNumber—Phone number of the contact.

212
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Contact Information Input

This request body has this new property.
• isoCountryCodeForPhoneNumber—ISO code of the phone number country.
Product Search Grouping Input
This request body has these changed properties.
• groupingOption—This property now supports BestMatch, which groups search results by the best-match product of
the variation group.
• topProductType—This property is no longer available.
Invoice Input
This request body has these changed properties.
• accountId—Specify invoice creation using an account record ID.
• billingTransactionId—Specify invoice creation using a billing transaction record ID.
• configurationOverrides—Specifies whether the generation of payment schedules and payment schedule items
should be skipped in the case of billing for subscription products.
Cart Coupon Input
This request body has this new property.
• customFields—Array of sObjects and their associated custom fields.
Payment Intent Input
This request body has this new property.
• applyDomainValidations—Specifies whether to apply domain-specific validations on the payment intent request.

Data Cloud
Data Transform Input
This request body has this new property.
• creationType—The creation type of the data transform.

Named Credentials
External AuthI dentity Provider Input
This request body has these new properties.
• clientAuthentication—Client authentication method that describes how credentials are sent to the authorization
server.
• parameters—List of custom request parameters to customize and extend requests to the identity provider’s token endpoint.
• standardExternalIdentityProvider—Reference to a standard external auth identity provider.

Salesforce CMS
Managed Content Channel Create
This request body has this new property.
• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
Managed Content Channel Update
This request body has this new property.

213
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
Managed Content Variant Update Input
This request body has this new property.
• apiName—API name of the managed content variant.

Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies

These response bodies have changes.

Chatter
Email Message Capability
This response body has this new property.
• automationType—Automation type of the email message.

Commerce
Checkout Address
This response body has this new property.
• shipToPhoneNumber—Phone number of the contact.
Commerce Product Summary
This response body has this new property.
• productVariationInfo—Product variation attributes, metadata, and mappings of attribute combinations to variation
product IDs.
Delivery Group
This response body has this new property.
• totalCartItemCount—Number of cart items, including their quantities, of the type Product in the delivery group.
Product Attribute Info
This response body has these new properties.
• options—List of product attribute value metadata.
• viewType—View type for product attributes.
Application Context
This response body has this new property.
• subscriptionConfig—Commerce subscription configuration settings.
Cart Coupon
This response body has this new property.
• customFields—Array of sObjects and their associated custom fields.
Order Summary Lookup
This response body has these new properties.
• adjustments—Collection of adjustments for an order summary.
• owner—Buyer profile details for an order summary.
• payments—Payment details for an order summary.

214
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Order Item Summary Lookup

This response body has these new properties.
• processExceptions—Process exceptions information for an order item summary.
• productSellingModel—Product selling model information for an order item summary.
Product Overview
This response body has these new properties.
• name—Name of a product.
• productClass—Class of a product.
• productSellingModels—Product selling models information for a product.
• purchaseQuantityRule—Purchase quantity rule information for a product.
• urlName—URL name of a product.
• variationAttributeSet—Variation attribute set information for a product.
• variationInfo—Variation attributes information for a product.

Custom Domain
Custom Domain Detail
This response body has these new properties.
• domainStatus—Custom domain status.
• lastModifiedDate—Date when the custom domain was last modified.
Custom Domain Custom URL Collection
This property changed for this response body.
• CustomUrlList was renamed to CustomUrls.
Custom URL Detail
This response body has these new properties.
• lastModified—Date when the custom URL was last modified.
• status—Custom URL status.

Data Cloud
Activation Target Output
This response body has these new properties.
• connector—Details about the connector that is used for this activation target.
• isEnabled—Indicates whether the activation target is enabled (true) or not (false).
• platformPrivacyType—Platform privacy type for this activation target. Derived from Activation Platform.
• organizationId—Organization ID of the activation target.
Activation Output
This response body has these new properties.
• activationDefinitionId—ID of the activation definition.
• activationPlatformCustomerFileSourceEnum—Customer file source of the activation platform.
• activationTargetId—Activation target ID for the activation.
• activationTargetName—Activation target name for the activation.

215
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

• activationTargetObjectPath—Object path for the activation target.

• activationTargetSubject—Activation target subject for the activation.
• attributesConfig—Attributes for the activation.
• contactPointsConfig—Contact points for the activation.
• curatedEntityApiName—API name of the entity curated by the activation
• curatedEntityId—ID of the entity curated by the activation.
• curatedEntityName—Name of the entity curated by the activation.
• dataSourcesConfig—Data sources for the activation.
• dataSpaceName—Data space name for the activation.
• dataspaceId—Data space ID for the activation.
• developerName—Developer name for the activation.
• directDmoFiltersConfig—Direct DMO filters for the activation.
• enabled—Indicates if the activation is enabled (true) or not (false).
• relatedDmoFiltersConfig—Related DMO filters for the activation.
• segmentDefinitionId—Definition ID for the activation segment.

Named Credentials
External Auth Identity Provider
This response body has these new properties.
• clientAuthentication—Client authentication method that describes how credentials are sent to the authorization
server.
• parameters—List of custom request parameters to customize and extend requests to the identity provider’s token endpoint.
• standardExternalIdentityProvider—Reference to a standard external auth identity provider.

Salesforce CMS
Managed Content Channel
This response body has this new property.
• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
Managed Content Collection Items
This response body has these new properties.
• currentPageUrl—URL to the current page.
• nextPageUrl—URL to the next page.
• previousPageUrl—URL to the previous page.
Managed Content Delivery Channel
This response body has this new property.
• isDedicatedContentDelivery—Specifies whether the channel has off-core dedicated content delivery enabled.
Managed Content Space
This response body has this new property.
• fullyQualifiedName—Fully qualified name of the managed content space.

216
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Managed Content Variant

This response body has this new property.
• apiName—API name of the managed content variant.

Salesforce Flow
Orchestration Stage Instance
This response body has this new property.
• completionTime—The duration of the stage in seconds.
Orchestration Step Instance
This response body has these new properties.
• assignedTo—The ID of the user, group, or queue that’s assigned to a work item.
• assigneeType—The assignee type associated with a work item.
• comments—The string stored in an output variable with the API name of Comments from a flow called by a completed
orchestration step.
• completedBy—The ID of the user who completed the work item.
• completionTime—The duration of the step in seconds.
• description—The description associated with the orchestration step.

CRM Analytics REST API

Using the CRM Analytics REST API, bulk add items to your analytics collections and specify tooltip styles in your dashboards.

IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed CRM Analytics REST API Resources
These resources are new or have changes.
Changed CRM Analytics REST API Request Bodies
These request bodies have changes.
Changed CRM Analytics REST API Response Bodies
These response bodies have changes.

New and Changed CRM Analytics REST API Resources

These resources are new or have changes.
Add new items to an analytics collection in bulk
Make a POST request to the /analytics/collections/collectionId/bulk-items resource.
Request body includes the new Wave Collection Item Bulk Add Input representation.
Use the new tooltip style in dashboards
Make a GET request to the /wave/dashboards/dashboardIdOrApiName resource.
Response body includes the new Tooltip Style representation

Changed CRM Analytics REST API Request Bodies

These request bodies have changes.

217
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Grid Layout Widget Style Input

The request body has this new property.
• tooltipStyle—the tooltip style for the dashboard layout.

Changed CRM Analytics REST API Response Bodies

These response bodies have changes.
Grid Layout Widget Style
The response body has this new property.
• tooltipStyle—the tooltip style for the dashboard layout.

Invocable Actions
Invocable Actions represent the actions that can be accomplished on Salesforce with APIs.
Invocable actions are available through REST API. The following action has changed:
Create subscription records for subscription products included a Commerce order summary
Use the new createSubscriptionRecords action.
For more information on invocable actions, see the Actions Developer’s Guide.

Metadata API
Access more metadata through these new and changed metadata types.

Customization
Enable the View All Fields object permission in a permission set
Use the new viewAllFields field on the existing PermissionSet metadata type.
Enable the View All Fields object permission in a profile
Use the new viewAllFields field on the existing Profile metadata type.
Manage permission sets with an updated user interface
Use the new enhancedPermSetList field on the existing UserManagementSettings metadata type.
Manage roles with an updated user interface
Use the new enhancedUserRoleListView field on the existing UserManagementSettings metadata type.

Experience Cloud
DEPRECATED: The enableGuestRecordReassignOrgPref field on the CommunitySettings metadata type is deprecated
in API version 63.0
The preference is now always turned on.
DEPRECATED: The enableSitesRecordReassignOrgPref field on the SiteSettings metadata type is deprecated in
API version 63.0
The preference is now always turned on.

218
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Marketing Cloud
Retrieve and deploy branding for marketing workspaces
Use the existing DigitalExperienceBundle type to retrieve and deploy branding for marketing workspaces.

Salesforce CMS
Retrieve and deploy general workspaces
Use the existing DigitalExperienceBundle metadata type to retrieve and deploy general workspaces.
Specify whether content created from a custom content type is converted to metadata
Use the new isMetadataContent field on the existing ManagedContentType metadata type.
Move custom content types between orgs with second-generation managed packages
Use the existing ManagedContentType metadata type to package custom content types.

Salesforce Flow
Create subscription records for subscription products included a Commerce order summary
Use the new createSubscriptionRecords value in the existing actionType field, which is on the existing FlowActionCall
subtype of the Flow metadata type.
Create approval orchestrations with Flow Approval Processes
Use the new ApprovalWorkflow value in the processType field of the Flow metadata. For more information see Flow
Approval Processes.
Specify that an approval orchestration send no email notifications to approvers
Use the new SendNoApproverEmails value for the existing name field of the FlowMetadataValue type and set the value
field to a string that’s either true or false.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: The requiresAsyncProcessing field on the existing FlowStageStep metadata type is no longer used.
Previously, this field indicated whether a background step called a flow that contained an asynchronous action or a Wait element,
requiring asynchronous processing. A background step now automatically detects whether its associated flow runs synchronously
or asynchronously.
Specify the translated label for a step in an orchestration
Use the new FlowOrchestrationStepTranslation subtype of the FlowTranslation type.
Trigger flows with more out-of-the-box automation events
Use these new values in the existing actionType field of the FlowActionCall subtype of the Flow metadata type:
trgrOnWebCartAbandoned, processWebStoreUserRgstr, trgrOnWhatsAppSubscription,
trgrOnEmailOpenEngagement, trgrOnEmailLinkClickEngagement, trgrOnEmailBounceEngagement,
trgrOnSmsLinkClickEngagement, trgrOnSmsDeliveryFailureEngagement,
trgrOnSmsResponseEngagement, trgrOnWhatsAppResponseEngmt, trgrOnWhatsAppReadEngagement,
trgrOnWhatsAppDeliveredEngagement, trgrOnWhatsAppLinkClickEngmt, and
trgrOnWhatsAppDlvrFailureEngmt
Trigger a flow when a field in a data graph changes
Use the new DataGraphDataChange value in the existing triggerType field and the new triggeringDataGraph
and triggeringDataModelObjectPath fields in the existing FlowStart subtype of the Flow metadata type.
Reference an automation event in a Wait element
Use the new automationEventNameand automationEventType fields in the existing FlowWaitEvent subtype of the
Flow metadata type.
Specify the maximum number of records to store
Use the new limit field in the existing FlowRecordLookup subtype of the Flow metadata type.

219
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Specify a template for a screen component (generally available)

Use the new sourceTemplateApiName and sourceTemplateProviderType fields on the existing FlowScreenField
subtype, which is on the FlowScreen subtype of the Flow metadata type.
Show a progress indicator in a screen flow
Use the new customProperties field on the existing Flow metadata type.
Join source collections into a target collection in a flow
Use the new complexValue and complexValueType fields on the existing FlowElementReferenceOrValue subtype of the
Flow metadata type. And use the new InnerJoin value, which is in the existing transformType field on the
FlowTransformValueAction subtype of the Flow metadata type.

Security and Identity

Specify additional external auth identity provider types
Use these new values in the parameterType field to specify the type of external auth identity provider in the
ExternalAuthIdentityProviderParameter type.
• AuthorizeRequestQueryParameter
• ClientAuthentication
• IdentityProviderOptions
• RefreshRequestBodyParameter
• RefreshRequestHttpHeader
• RefreshRequestQueryParameter
• StandardExternalIdentityProvider
• TokenRequestBodyParameter
• TokenRequestHttpHeader
• TokenRequestQueryParameter
Set the order of parameters when an external auth identity provider has more than one parameter
Use the ExternalAuthIdentityProviderParameter sequenceNumber field to order the parameters when an external auth identity
provider has more than one parameter. Priority is from lower to higher numbers (for example, 1 is the highest priority).
Encrypt more data with manageable keys
Use the new canEncryptTransactionalDatabase, canManageDataCloudKeys, and
enableExternalKeyManagement fields on the existing EncryptionKeySettings type.
Configure Salesforce as a SAML single sign-on identity provider with the external client application framework
Use the new ExtlClntAppSamlConfigurablePolicies metadata type.
Configure headless user discovery for headless login flows
Use the new isUserDisambiguationAllowedUsernamePwd field on the existing NetworkAuthApiSettings subtype of
the Network metadata type.
Configure headless user discovery for headless forgot password flows
Use the new isUserDisambiguationAllowedForgotPwd field on the existing NetworkAuthApiSettings subtype of the
Network metadata type.
REMOVED: The Triple_Des value is removed
The Triple_Des value in the encryptionType field on the ConnectedAppSamlConfig subtype of the ConnectedApp
metadata type is removed. Instead, use the AES_128 or AES_256 values.

220
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Service
Build customer trust by supporting typing indicators and read and delivery receipts for inbound messages in Bring Your
Own Channel
Use the new IsInboundReceiptsEnabled and IsTypingIndicatorDisabled fields on the existing
ConversationChannelDefinition type.

SOAP API
These calls are new, changed, or deprecated in REST API version 63.0.

Changed Calls
describeLayout()
View a layout item's behavior (Edit, Required, or Readonly) with the new field uiBehavior under DescribeLayoutItem
in DescribeLayoutResult.
queryMore()
If blob objects are part of additional query results, queryMore() returns links to those objects. Previously, if a query had a blob
field in its select list, queryMore() returned one record at a time.
getDeleted()
Objects without a delete field flag or that aren’t written to the delete log now return an error even if they’ve been updated in the
specified time period.

Tooling API New and Changed Objects

Access more metadata through these new and changed Tooling API objects.

Commerce
Get information about the view type assigned to product attribute custom fields
Use the new CustomFieldDisplay object.

Security and Identity

Specify additional external auth identity provider types
Use these new values in the ParameterType field to specify the type of external auth identity provider in the
ExternalAuthIdentityProviderParameter type.
• AuthorizeRequestQueryParameter
• ClientAuthentication
• IdentityProviderOptions
• RefreshRequestBodyParameter
• RefreshRequestHttpHeader
• RefreshRequestQueryParameter
• StandardExternalIdentityProvider
• TokenRequestBodyParameter
• TokenRequestHttpHeader
• TokenRequestQueryParameter

221
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

Set the order of parameters when an external auth identity provider has more than one parameter
Use the ExternalAuthIdentityProviderParameter SequenceNumber field to order the parameters when an external auth identity
provider has more than one parameter. Priority is from lower to higher numbers (for example, 1 is the highest priority).

Service
Build trust with customers by supporting typing indicators and read and delivery receipts for inbound messages in Bring
Your Own Channel
Use the new IsInboundReceiptsEnabled and IsTypingIndicatorDisabled fields on the existing
ConversationChannelDefinition object.

User Interface API

Sort list views by multiple columns, and User Interface API supports more objects.

IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed User Interface API Resources
These resources are new or have changes.
Changed User Interface API Request Bodies
These request bodies have changes.
Changed User Interface API Response Bodies
These response bodies have changes.
Supported Objects
All new standard objects are auto-enabled for use with User Interface API.

SEE ALSO:
User Interface API Developer Guide

New and Changed User Interface API Resources

These resources are new or have changes.

Lists
Sort list views by multiple columns
These list view resources, with the specified request parameters or request body properties, support sorting by multiple fields.
• GET /ui-api/list-records/${listViewId}
sortBy request parameter

• POST /ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
sortBy property in the List Records Input request body

• PATCH /ui-api/list-preferences/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
orderedBy property in the List Preferences Input request body

• GET /ui-api/related-list-records/${parentRecordId}/${relatedListId}

222
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

sortBy request parameter

• POST /ui-api/related-list-records/${parentRecordId}/${relatedListId}
sortBy property in the Related List Records Input request body

• GET /ui-api/related-list-records/batch/${parentRecordId}/${relatedListIds}
sortBy request parameter

• POST /ui-api/related-list-records/batch/${parentRecordId}/${relatedListIds}
sortBy property in the Related List Records Batch Input request body

• PATCH /ui-api/related-list-info/${parentObjectApiName}/${relatedListId}
orderedByInfo property in the Related List User Preferences Input request body

Changed User Interface API Request Bodies

These request bodies have changes.

Lookups
Lookup Field Suggestion with POST
This request body has this new property.
• orderBy—Information describing how to order the results.

Changed User Interface API Response Bodies

These response bodies have changes.

Record Layouts
Record Layout Item
This response body has this new property.
• uiBehavior—Indicates the layout item behavior on the specified layout. The value doesn’t reflect user-level or profile-level
access. This property supports the Edit, Required, and Readonly values.
Record Layout Section
This response body has this new property.
• tabOrder—Indicates the tab order for the fields in the section in the edit view. This property supports the LeftRight
and TopDown values.

Supported Objects
All new standard objects are auto-enabled for use with User Interface API.
To view new objects that are auto-enabled for User Interface API, see New and Changed Objects.
These standard objects aren’t new to your org but are new for User Interface API.
• EmailTemplate
• ExpressionSetView
• LoyaltyProgramPartnerLedger

223
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers

• Network
• PermissionSet
These standard objects are already supported in User Interface API. They’re newly supported for list views and most recently used list
views.
• AppointmentInvitation
• AppointmentInvitee
• AppointmentTopicTimeSlot
• AssignedResource
• AuthApplicationAsset
• AuthApplicationPlace
• AuthorizationFormConsent
• BenefitSchedule
• BenefitSession
• BillingTreatmentItem
• ContactPointAddress
• Coupon
• CreditMemoAddressGroup
• CreditMemoInvApplication
• CreditMemoLine
• LoyaltyPartnerProduct
• LoyaltyPgmPtnrPrepaidPack
• LoyaltyProgramMbrPromotion
• LoyaltyProgramMemberCase
• MemberBenefit
• NetworkReferencedObject
• PriceAdjustmentSchedule
• ProductQuantityRule
• ProductSellingModelOption
• PromotionLoyaltyPtnrProdt
• PromotionMarketSegment
• PurchaseQuantityRule
• RevRecogTreatmentItemGroup
• RevenueDistributionMethod
• RevenueElement
• RevenueElementDistribution
• RevenueRecogTreatmentItem
• RevenueRecognitionPolicy
• RevenueRecognitionTreatment
• TimeSlot
• UserRole

224
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein

• WorkTypeGroupMember
These standard objects are already supported in User Interface API and for list views. They’re newly supported for most recently used
list views.
• AssetStatePeriod
• TaxEngineProvider

SEE ALSO:
User Interface API Developer Guide: Supported Objects

Einstein
Supercharge your workforce efficiency with predictive and generative AI.
Rights of ALBERT EINSTEIN are used with permission of The Hebrew University of Jerusalem / CMGWorldwide.

IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Features
Learn more about how Einstein can supercharge productivity across all Salesforce clouds. Einstein features are released as often as
monthly, so check back again soon for the latest AI solutions. Features included in the January monthly release generally become
available when Spring ’25 rolls out to your org.
Einstein Platform
Build smart solutions for your business cases with generative AI, predictive AI, and everything in between. Learn about functionality,
security, and performance improvements to AI at Salesforce. Einstein platform changes are released as often as monthly, so check
back again soon for the latest and greatest.

Einstein Features
Learn more about how Einstein can supercharge productivity across all Salesforce clouds. Einstein features are released as often as
monthly, so check back again soon for the latest AI solutions. Features included in the January monthly release generally become available
when Spring ’25 rolls out to your org.

Cloud Feature Release Note

January ’25

Automation & Integration Einstein for Flow: Formula Get Help Creating Flow Formulas with Einstein (Generally Available)
Creation

Automation & Integration Flow Creation with Einstein Get Help Building Flows Faster and More Accurately with Einstein
(Generally Available)

Automation & Integration Generate a Detailed Description of a Flow with Einstein

Commerce Coupons Create Coupons Using a Guided Workflow

Commerce Product Variations Create a Promotion Based on Specific Product Variations

Commerce Search Suggestions Offer Shoppers Relevant Search Suggestions

225
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Features

Cloud Feature Release Note

Communications Service Level Objective Analysis Track Service Level Objectives and Identify Potential Upsell
Assistant Opportunities

Education Cloud Data Cloud for Education: Gain Holistic Student Insights and Visualize Learner Progress
Holistic Student Insights

Education Cloud Philanthropic Research Agent Gain Meaningful Insights with the Philanthropic Research Agent

Education Cloud Student Recruitment Agent Autonomously Answer and Support Prospective Students

Einstein Search Einstein Search Filters Customize Explicit Filters in Search Manager

Energy and Utilities Einstein Summaries: Generate Einstein Generative AI for Energy and Utilities Cloud Enhancements
Case and Engagement on page 311
Summaries, Suggest Clean
Energy Programs for Service
Reps

Field Service Agentforce in the Field Service Get Solutions Easily from Agentforce by Including Images
Mobile App: Send images

Field Service Ask Field Service: Talk with Work Smarter by Using Siri to Communicate with Agentforce
Agentforce via Siri

Field Service Filling Gaps for Service Boost Productivity and Resource Utilization by Easily Filling
Resources Schedule Gaps

Field Service Pre-Work Brief: Read Aloud Listen Safely to Pre-Work Briefs with a Tap of a Button

Financial Services Cloud Boost Productivity with Financial Boost Productivity with Financial Services Cloud Embedded AI for
Services Cloud Embedded AI for Agents
Agents

Health Cloud Patient Services Agent Automate Patient Services with an AI Agent

Health Cloud Roster File Field Mapping with Automate Field Mapping with Einstein on page 329
Einstein

Industries Writeback Mapping Suggestions Automate Your Field Mapping With Einstein
with Einstein

Marketing Content Creation for Account Generate Account Engagement Content in More Languages
Engagement

Marketing Generate More Marketing Save Time with New AI Capabilities for Campaigns and Content
Content

Marketing Multi-Channel Campaign Create Campaigns with Agentforce Campaign Designer (Beta)
Designer

Platform Data Mask Use Einstein to Generate Data Mask Custom Libraries

Public Sector Solutions Household Overview Help Caseworkers Quickly Learn About a Household with Einstein

Revenue Cloud Update Context Tags Add Context Tags Automatically to Your Pricing Elements

226
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Cloud Feature Release Note

Sales Agentforce Sales Coach Enhance Agentforce Sales Coach Responses with a Data Library

Sales Einstein Conversation Insights Use Generative AI in All Languages Supported by Einstein
Conversation Insights

Sales Use Call Explorer in Flows

Service Agentforce for Service Manage Your Workforce More Efficiently with Agentforce

Service Agentforce Service Agent Monitor Real-time Conversations Between Agentforce Service
Agents and Customers (Release Update)

Service Flag Supervisors to Help with Agentforce Service Agent

Conversations

Service Chat with Agentforce Service Agent in Japanese (Beta)

Service Other Enhancements for Routing Work to Agentforce Service

Agents

Service Agentforce Service Planner Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click of a Button (Generally
Available)

Service Conversation Intelligence Optimize Business Processes Based on the Sentiment and Intent
Service of Real-Time Conversations (Pilot)

Service Customer Experience Get a Comprehensive Summary of Customer Engagement,

Intelligence Experience, and Data

Service Einstein Article Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with Einstein Article
Recommendations Recommendations (Pilot)

Service Einstein Conversation Mining, Einstein for Service

Einstein Service Replies

Service Einstein Work Summaries Get a Quick Overview of a Case and Ongoing Developments with
Case Summaries (Beta)

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Generative AI Features

Einstein Platform
Build smart solutions for your business cases with generative AI, predictive AI, and everything in between. Learn about functionality,
security, and performance improvements to AI at Salesforce. Einstein platform changes are released as often as monthly, so check back
again soon for the latest and greatest.

Feature Release Note

February ’25

227
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Feature Release Note

Agentforce Build, Test, and Troubleshoot Agents More Easily with Agent
Versions
Say Hello to Agent for Setup, Your Sidekick for Admin Tasks

January ’25

Agentforce Einstein Copilot for Salesforce is Now Agentforce

Chat with Agentforce in Your Preferred Language (Beta)

Einstein Bots Create Agentforce Service Agents Easily from Your Einstein Bots
(Beta)
Improve Bot Conversations with Disambiguation (Generally
Available)
Control Intent Recognition Enhancements for Enhanced Bots
(Generally Available)
Use Salesforce Records in Bot Conversations (Generally Available)
Set Bot Variables to Custom Values in Bot Builder
Get More Customer Responses to Static Option Messaging
Components
Einstein Bots Are Available in More Regions
Transition to Generative Knowledge Answers and Data Cloud
Get More Customer Responses to Static Option Messaging
Components
Control Session Timeout for Bot Conversations (Beta)
End Messaging for In-App and Web Conversations Thoughtfully
New Connect REST API Resources for Einstein Bots (Beta)
Input Recommender (Beta) Is Being Retired
Legacy Chat is Being Retired

Other Changes Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record Pages

Track Generated Content Quality and Feedback in Flow Builder
Try Out New Recipes for the LLM Open Connector

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Generative AI

Agentforce
Bring the power of assistive and autonomous AI to your business with Agentforce.

228
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Copilot for Salesforce is Now Agentforce
As we grow our team of Agentforce agents, we've renamed the Einstein Copilot for Salesforce agent type to Agentforce with no
changes in functionality. Permissions, UI elements, and Help documentation have been updated to reflect this change, with additional
minor updates in progress. In Setup, you'll see Agentforce or Agentforce (Default) for the agent name and type. This change won’t
impact your implementations. Your agent is still available to help your Salesforce users with everyday business interactions, embedded
right in the flow of work.
Chat with Agentforce in Your Preferred Language (Beta)
In addition to English, Agentforce (Default) now supports French, German, Italian, Japanese, Portuguese, and Spanish in certain
locales.
Build, Test, and Troubleshoot Agents More Easily with Agent Versions
Now you can create multiple versions of an agent, so you can iterate on, test, and troubleshoot your agents while minimizing
downtime and risk. Create a version of an active agent to make and test changes without taking the active version out of production.
Or create a version to save as a backup, so you can quickly revert to a previous version if your business strategy changes or you need
to debug an issue. You can create up to 20 versions of a single agent. The number of concurrently active agents supported varies
by agent type. For example, you can only have one active version of type Agentforce (Default).
Say Hello to Agent for Setup, Your Sidekick for Admin Tasks
Until now, your sales and service reps have taken advantage of all that Agentforce has to offer. But what about you, the trusty admin?
Now, you, too, can use Agentforce-smarts in your everyday admin tasks. Use Agent for Setup to troubleshoot user access issues,
create report types, or find answers in Salesforce Help documentation, all from the agent panel in Setup. Agent for Setup helps you
maximize your time when setting up your org for users.
New and Changed Standard Agent Topics and Actions
Quickly add powerful functionality to an agent with new and changed standard agent actions and topics.

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce is Now Agentforce

As we grow our team of Agentforce agents, we've renamed the Einstein Copilot for Salesforce agent type to Agentforce with no changes
in functionality. Permissions, UI elements, and Help documentation have been updated to reflect this change, with additional minor
updates in progress. In Setup, you'll see Agentforce or Agentforce (Default) for the agent name and type. This change won’t impact your
implementations. Your agent is still available to help your Salesforce users with everyday business interactions, embedded right in the
flow of work.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, the Salesforce mobile app for Android and iOS, the Field Service mobile app for
Android and iOS, and Sales Cloud Everywhere in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Einstein for Sales,
Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on. Setup for AI agents is available on the desktop site.
When: This change is available starting January 2025.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Agentforce Agents

Chat with Agentforce in Your Preferred Language (Beta)

In addition to English, Agentforce (Default) now supports French, German, Italian, Japanese, Portuguese, and Spanish in certain locales.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, the Salesforce mobile app, Salesforce Everywhere, Slack, the Field Service mobile
app for iOS and Android, and Sales Cloud Everywhere in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Einstein
for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on. Setup for AI Agents is available on the desktop site.

229
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Note: Enhanced language support for Agentforce (Default) is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at
Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and the Non-GA Credit Consumption,
Non-GA Gen AI, and the Non-GA Open AI LLM Provider terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is
at the Customer's sole discretion.
When: This change is available starting in January 2025.
How: In Agent Builder, on the Language Settings tab, specify a default language and select additional languages.
These language and locale codes are available.
• English (en_US, en_GB, en_AU)
• French (fr_FR, fr_CA)
• German (de_DE)
• Italian (it_IT)
• Japanese (ja_JA)
• Portuguese (pt_PT, pt_BR)
• Spanish (es_ES, es_MX)
Some LLMs generate responses that are close variants but not exact matches for the requested locale.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Update Language Settings

Build, Test, and Troubleshoot Agents More Easily with Agent Versions
Now you can create multiple versions of an agent, so you can iterate on, test, and troubleshoot your agents while minimizing downtime
and risk. Create a version of an active agent to make and test changes without taking the active version out of production. Or create a
version to save as a backup, so you can quickly revert to a previous version if your business strategy changes or you need to debug an
issue. You can create up to 20 versions of a single agent. The number of concurrently active agents supported varies by agent type. For
example, you can only have one active version of type Agentforce (Default).
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions for an additional
cost. Required add-on licenses vary by agent type. Setup for AI agents is available on the desktop site.
When: This change is available starting early February 2025.
How: To create a version of an agent, from the Agents Setup page, click the dropdown menu next to the agent you want to create a
new version of and select Save As New Version. You can also delete an agent version from the dropdown.
You can quickly switch between agent versions in the Agent Builder and on the Details page for your agent.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Agent Versions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Activate or Deactivate Your Agent (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Say Hello to Agent for Setup, Your Sidekick for Admin Tasks
Until now, your sales and service reps have taken advantage of all that Agentforce has to offer. But what about you, the trusty admin?
Now, you, too, can use Agentforce-smarts in your everyday admin tasks. Use Agent for Setup to troubleshoot user access issues, create
report types, or find answers in Salesforce Help documentation, all from the agent panel in Setup. Agent for Setup helps you maximize
your time when setting up your org for users.

230
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions.
When: This feature isn't part of the initial Spring '25 release and may be included at a later date.
How: When you enable Agentforce in your org, the Agent for Setup tile automatically shows up in Agent Builder. Customize your agent
in Agent Builder by adding topics, actions, and system messages, and then take it for a spin. Activate it and then get ready to use the
power of AI in setup.

New and Changed Standard Agent Topics and Actions

Quickly add powerful functionality to an agent with new and changed standard agent actions and topics.
Availability of standard agent topics, actions, and related prompt templates or flows can vary by edition and license.

February ’25
New Topic: Agent for Setup: Connected App Migration
This topic has two new actions for admins in Agent for Setup.
• Summarize OAuth in Connected App: Generates a summary of the OAuth configurations for a connected app, including general
information, OAuth configurations, and a description of OAuth Setting and Policy.
• Migrate Connected App: Identifies the configurations of a connected app and creates an external client app with identical
configurations to replace it.
New Topic: Agent for Setup: Fallback
This topic has one new action for admins in Agent for Setup.
• Answer Questions with Salesforce Documentation: Answers a question from a user based on information from relevant Salesforce
documentation, including links to source articles.
New Topic: Agent for Setup: Object Management
This topic has two new actions that enable admins to find objects and fields in Agent for Setup.
• Identify Object By Name: Interprets the user’s input to search for objects and returns a list of matching objects in the Object
Manager.
• Identify Field By Name: Interprets the user’s input to determine if a field exists within an object.

January ’25
New and changed agent topics and actions included in the January monthly release typically become available when Spring ’25 rolls
out to your org.
Updated Topic: Field Service Dispatcher Actions
This topic has two new actions to enable dispatchers to fill gaps in a service resource’s schedule.
• Get Appointments to Fill Gaps for Field Service: Searches for gaps for a specific service resource on a specific date and returns a
list of suitable appointments in ranked order, considering business rules and objectives.
• Assign Appointment to Service Resource for Field Service: Lets dispatchers select an appointment to fill the gap and assigns the
appointment to the service resource.
New Topic: Customer Experience Intelligence
This topic has three new actions that enable Customer Experience Intelligence users to search interaction records, summarize key
issues, and analyze feedback to identify top products and improve feature descriptions.
• Enhance Product Description: Analyzes product descriptions against customer reviews to identify discrepancies, align features
with customer experiences, and suggest improvements.

231
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

• Find Similar Interactions: Searches interaction records by channel or related terms for an issue, topic, or contact reason, and
creates an engagement summary for specified or all channels.
• Summarize Product Reviews: Summarizes customer reviews to identify top products from a specified list and displays sentiment
as positive, negative, mixed, or neutral, ideal for product summary queries.
New Action: Update Omni-Channel User Configuration
Use this agent action to add or remove queue or skill assignments for Omni-Channel users.

Einstein Bots
Create AI agents from Einstein bots, set bot variables to custom values in the Bot Builder, add the Disambiguation dialog and Object
Search action to your bots, and test your intent models with new Connect REST API resources. Also, Input Recommender (beta) is being
retired.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Agentforce Service Agents Easily from Your Einstein Bots (Beta)
Quickly build an Agentforce Service agent based on an Einstein bot. Agentforce generates agent topics and actions based on the
bot’s intents and dialogs. And, to help you adopt AI agents at your own pace, your bot stays active after you create an agent.
Improve Bot Conversations with Disambiguation (Generally Available)
Help bots that use a cross-lingual intent model understand customers better by turning on Disambiguation. When a bot with
Disambiguation can’t recognize a chatting customer’s intent, it suggests the most probable dialogs to the customer. And, if the
customer selects a suggested dialog, you can use that data to improve the bot’s cross-lingual intent model. Previously, a bot moved
immediately to the Confused dialog when it couldn’t confidently determine an intent.
Control Intent Recognition Enhancements for Enhanced Bots (Generally Available)
Enhanced bots that use the cross-lingual intent model now recognize the intent of the first message a customer sends when you
turn on the First Message Intent Recognition setting. Previously, only standard bots recognized the intent of the first message.
Use Salesforce Records in Bot Conversations (Generally Available)
Manage Salesforce records during customer conversations with the Object Search action. For example, your bot can show a customer
their last three orders, update an upcoming appointment in a custom object, or create feedback records. Define the object search
with conditional logic, and send up to three records in a message with merge field syntax.
Set Bot Variables to Custom Values in Bot Builder
Quickly customize bot behavior without leaving the Bot Builder. You can now set a bot variable to a custom value or another bot
variable in the Bot Builder. Previously, you could set bot variables to a context variable with only flows or Apex.
Einstein Bots Are Available in More Regions
You can now use Einstein Bots in London, Montreal, São Paulo, Sydney, and Tokyo.
Transition to Generative Knowledge Answers and Data Cloud
Generative Knowledge Answers data sources and knowledge articles are now indexed in Data Cloud. To enable Generative Knowledge
Answers for a bot, or edit a bot that currently uses Generative Knowledge Answers, you must set up Data Cloud. Also, Article Answers
is now in maintenance mode. To ensure the best experience for your customers, consider transitioning your bots to Generative
Knowledge Answers.
Get More Customer Responses to Static Option Messaging Components
Capture critical data from bot conversations consistently and effectively. Enhanced bots can now identify important information,
such as dates, email addresses, and locations, in text responses to dialog steps that use static option messaging components.
Previously, enhanced bots didn’t process text responses to dialog steps that use static option messaging components. Bots now
use named entity recognition to gather and store information from text responses in the dialog step output variable.

232
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Control Session Timeout for Bot Conversations (Beta)

You can now specify the number of minutes that a bot waits for a customer response before ending a messaging session on an
enhanced Messaging channel.
End Messaging for In-App and Web Conversations Thoughtfully
Enhanced bots on Messaging for In-App and Web channels now send a response that you specify in the End Chat system dialog,
including post-chat URLs, and end the messaging session. Previously, the customer had to end the conversation to receive post-chat
URLs, and a service rep had to end the messaging session.
New Connect REST API Resources for Einstein Bots (Beta)
Test the accuracy of an intent model and optimize your utterances with the Utterance Prediction API resources available with Einstein
Bots.
Input Recommender (Beta) Is Being Retired
Input Recommender is retiring with Spring ’25, and you can no longer use it. Utterances that you created by using Input Recommender
and added to an intent model aren’t impacted. We recommend transitioning to the cross-lingual model. You can train the cross-lingual
model with just a minimum of one utterance per language.
Legacy Chat is Being Retired
Legacy Chat is scheduled for retirement as of Summer ’24. Starting in February 2026, legacy chat is removed and you can’t use
standard bots on legacy chat channels. To avoid service interruptions, migrate to Messaging for In-App and Web and enhanced bots
before that date.

Create Agentforce Service Agents Easily from Your Einstein Bots (Beta)
Quickly build an Agentforce Service agent based on an Einstein bot. Agentforce generates agent topics and actions based on the bot’s
intents and dialogs. And, to help you adopt AI agents at your own pace, your bot stays active after you create an agent.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Einstein for
Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on.

Note: Create Agent from Bot guided setup is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
When: This change is available starting in January 2025.
Who: This feature is available to users with an Agentforce Service Agent license.
How: To use the Create Agent from Bot guided setup, contact Salesforce Customer Support.
Before you get started, set up Einstein generative AI and enable Agentforce (Default). Then, click Create Agent from Bot (Beta) from
the bot’s dropdown on the Einstein Bot Setup page. After creating the AI agent, you’re taken to Agent Builder, where you can customize
the agent’s topics, actions, and other settings.

SEE ALSO:
Agentforce Service Agent
Salesforce Help: Create AI Agents From Einstein Bots (Beta)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Einstein Generative AI

233
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Improve Bot Conversations with Disambiguation (Generally Available)

Help bots that use a cross-lingual intent model understand customers better by turning on Disambiguation. When a bot with
Disambiguation can’t recognize a chatting customer’s intent, it suggests the most probable dialogs to the customer. And, if the customer
selects a suggested dialog, you can use that data to improve the bot’s cross-lingual intent model. Previously, a bot moved immediately
to the Confused dialog when it couldn’t confidently determine an intent.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: In the Bot Builder, go to the Overview page for your bot. In the Intent Enhancements section of Settings, enable Use the
Cross-Lingual Intent Model with this bot and Use Disambiguation with this bot. Save your changes and then rebuild your bot’s
model on the Model Management page.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Turn on Disambiguation

Control Intent Recognition Enhancements for Enhanced Bots (Generally Available)

Enhanced bots that use the cross-lingual intent model now recognize the intent of the first message a customer sends when you turn
on the First Message Intent Recognition setting. Previously, only standard bots recognized the intent of the first message.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: In the Bot Builder, go to the Bot Overview page for your bot. In the Intent Enhancements section of Settings, enable Use First
Message Intent Recognition with this bot.
If you enabled First Message Intent Recognition before Spring ’25, the feature remains enabled for all enhanced bots. You can’t disable
first message intent recognition for individual bots.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Enhanced Bots

Use Salesforce Records in Bot Conversations (Generally Available)

Manage Salesforce records during customer conversations with the Object Search action. For example, your bot can show a customer
their last three orders, update an upcoming appointment in a custom object, or create feedback records. Define the object search with
conditional logic, and send up to three records in a message with merge field syntax.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: In Bot Builder, add an Action dialog step and then select Object Search as the action type. Object Search supports these standard
objects: Account, Case, Contact, Contract, Knowledge, Lead, Opportunity, Order, Task.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add an Object Search Action

Set Bot Variables to Custom Values in Bot Builder

Quickly customize bot behavior without leaving the Bot Builder. You can now set a bot variable to a custom value or another bot variable
in the Bot Builder. Previously, you could set bot variables to a context variable with only flows or Apex.

234
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: In the Step Properties panel for a Set Variable rule action, select Value or Variable from the Source dropdown. Then enter a
custom value or select a source variable.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up a Dialog Rule Step

Einstein Bots Are Available in More Regions

You can now use Einstein Bots in London, Montreal, São Paulo, Sydney, and Tokyo.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.

Transition to Generative Knowledge Answers and Data Cloud

Generative Knowledge Answers data sources and knowledge articles are now indexed in Data Cloud. To enable Generative Knowledge
Answers for a bot, or edit a bot that currently uses Generative Knowledge Answers, you must set up Data Cloud. Also, Article Answers
is now in maintenance mode. To ensure the best experience for your customers, consider transitioning your bots to Generative Knowledge
Answers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: When you create a data library, the Einstein Data Library indexes the library’s data sources in Data Cloud. Then, Data Cloud creates
a search index and retriever for the library that your bot can use via the Generative Knowledge Answers feature.
When a customer asks a bot with Generative Knowledge Answers a question, the Agentforce generates a response using the assigned
data library’s search index and retriever and then sends that response to the bot.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Answer Questions with Generative Knowledge Answers
Salesforce Help: Data Cloud Features and Learning Path

Get More Customer Responses to Static Option Messaging Components

Capture critical data from bot conversations consistently and effectively. Enhanced bots can now identify important information, such
as dates, email addresses, and locations, in text responses to dialog steps that use static option messaging components. Previously,
enhanced bots didn’t process text responses to dialog steps that use static option messaging components. Bots now use named entity
recognition to gather and store information from text responses in the dialog step output variable.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Ask a Question with Static Options with an Enhanced Bot

235
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Control Session Timeout for Bot Conversations (Beta)

You can now specify the number of minutes that a bot waits for a customer response before ending a messaging session on an enhanced
Messaging channel.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: To turn on this feature, contact Salesforce Customer Support.

End Messaging for In-App and Web Conversations Thoughtfully

Enhanced bots on Messaging for In-App and Web channels now send a response that you specify in the End Chat system dialog, including
post-chat URLs, and end the messaging session. Previously, the customer had to end the conversation to receive post-chat URLs, and a
service rep had to end the messaging session.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: In Bot Bot Builder, in the Dialogs panel, edit the End Chat dialog.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Understand System Bot Dialogs

New Connect REST API Resources for Einstein Bots (Beta)

Test the accuracy of an intent model and optimize your utterances with the Utterance Prediction API resources available with Einstein
Bots.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.

Note: Utterance Prediction API resources are pilot or beta services that are subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of these pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Predict the associated intent of bot utterances
Make a POST request to the /connect/bots/utterance-prediction/intent resource.
New request bodies: Bot Utterance Collection Prediction Input, Utterance Prediction Input
New response bodies: Bot Utterance Collection Prediction, Utterance Prediction, Utterance Prediction Summary
Predict the associated intent of bot utterances based on the intent set and utterances
Make a POST request to the /connect/bots/utterance-prediction/intentFromSet resource.
New request body: Bot Utterance Collection Prediction From Set Input

Input Recommender (Beta) Is Being Retired

Input Recommender is retiring with Spring ’25, and you can no longer use it. Utterances that you created by using Input Recommender
and added to an intent model aren’t impacted. We recommend transitioning to the cross-lingual model. You can train the cross-lingual
model with just a minimum of one utterance per language.

236
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Turn on the Cross-Lingual Intent Model

Legacy Chat is Being Retired

Legacy Chat is scheduled for retirement as of Summer ’24. Starting in February 2026, legacy chat is removed and you can’t use standard
bots on legacy chat channels. To avoid service interruptions, migrate to Messaging for In-App and Web and enhanced bots before that
date.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Chat & Live Agent Retirement

Other Changes
Enjoy expanded Einstein generative AI support for locales, models, and more.

IN THIS SECTION:
Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record Pages
Make the power of AI work for you with agent quick actions. Create these actions just as you would any quick action in Setup, and
then add them to your record pages. With the addition of AI-backed quick actions on record pages, your users can quickly discover
how helpful an agent can be in their day-to-day tasks.
Track Generated Content Quality and Feedback in Flow Builder
Stay proactive with real-time alerts when toxicity or negative feedback for any generative AI feature exceeds your set threshold, and
keep an eye on retrieval augmented generation faithfulness scores that fall below the acceptable value. Use this feedback to continually
enhance the quality of your content and refine generative AI responses across your features.
Try Out New Recipes for the LLM Open Connector
The new recipes on the Einstein Platform Cookbook site enable customers to extend Salesforce AI features with their own custom,
pretrained models. The site features recipes for connecting model endpoints through platforms like Hugging Face and Mulesoft.
The Hugging Face recipe covers the Serverless Inference API for all LLMs that support Chat Completion, as well as deploying the
service to a Heroku app. The Mulesoft recipes cover connecting and deploying model endpoints to Mulesoft via Anypoint Studio
and Anypoint Code Builder.

Add AI-Powered Quick Actions to Record Pages

Make the power of AI work for you with agent quick actions. Create these actions just as you would any quick action in Setup, and then
add them to your record pages. With the addition of AI-backed quick actions on record pages, your users can quickly discover how
helpful an agent can be in their day-to-day tasks.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions. On mobile, agent quick actions are available on the record home page.
When: This feature isn't part of the initial Spring '25 release and may be included at a later date.

237
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Platform

How: Create a quick action for an object in Object Manager in Setup, and select Agent Action as the action type. Add an utterance for
what you want the action to do. For example, if your action is meant to summarize a contact, use “Summarize this contact” as the
utterance and name the action Summarize. Then, add the action to your Lightning record page using the page layout editor. Users see
an icon to show that the action is AI-powered. After a user clicks the AI-enhanced quick action, the action triggers the agent and works
as though the user had typed the utterance in the agent panel. Expanding on the previous example, clicking a Summarize button works
the same way as having a user enter “summarize this contact” in the agent panel.

Track Generated Content Quality and Feedback in Flow Builder

Stay proactive with real-time alerts when toxicity or negative feedback for any generative AI feature exceeds your set threshold, and
keep an eye on retrieval augmented generation faithfulness scores that fall below the acceptable value. Use this feedback to continually
enhance the quality of your content and refine generative AI responses across your features.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein Platform
add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience. To purchase the Einstein Platform add-on, contact your Salesforce
account executive.
Who: To use these flows, users must turn on Einstein Generative AI. For Send Faithfulness Score Email flow, you must enable Einstein
Monitoring and Observability.
How: In Flow Builder, select and clone a flow: Send Content Quality Email, Send Toxic Content Category Email, Send Negative Feedback
Email, Send Negative Feedback Email for Feature, and Send Faithfulness Score Email.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Action: Generated Content Quality and Feedback

Try Out New Recipes for the LLM Open Connector

The new recipes on the Einstein Platform Cookbook site enable customers to extend Salesforce AI features with their own custom,
pretrained models. The site features recipes for connecting model endpoints through platforms like Hugging Face and Mulesoft. The
Hugging Face recipe covers the Serverless Inference API for all LLMs that support Chat Completion, as well as deploying the service to
a Heroku app. The Mulesoft recipes cover connecting and deploying model endpoints to Mulesoft via Anypoint Studio and Anypoint
Code Builder.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with an Einstein for Sales, Einstein
for Platform, or Einstein for Service add-on. To purchase the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Platform, or Einstein for Service add-on, contact
your Salesforce account executive.
When: This change is in effect starting the week of December 16, 2024.
Who: The LLM Open Connector is available to users with Data Cloud and Einstein Generative AI enabled.
Why: The LLM Open Connector is a developer option for connecting customer and partner LLMs using our existing Bring Your Own
Large Language Model (BYOLLM) feature in Einstein Studio Model Builder.
How: Create an HTTP REST service with the LLM Open Connector OpenAPI specification and use the connection in Model Builder.

SEE ALSO:
External: LLM Open Connector + Hugging Face
External: LLM Open Connector + MuleSoft + Cerebras
External: LLM Open Connector + MuleSoft + Ollama

238
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Experience Cloud

Experience Cloud
Enhanced LWR sites are now generally available. Create enhanced LWR sites and CMS workspaces, or upgrade existing sites to the
enhanced framework. You can also customize your site URLs to remove the /s at the end. In security updates, use trusted sites while the
content security provider is in strict mode, switch to single domain certificates for Salesforce CDN, and enjoy improvements to the identity
experience. Upgrade your Aura record components to the LWR framework to see improved performance and style, and provide a
seamless experience between apps by linking files from your LWR site to Salesforce.

IN THIS SECTION:
Aura and LWR Sites
Elevate the scalability and performance of your LWR site with Experience Delivery. A session timeout notification on LWR sites helps
your authenticated users avoid unexpected logouts and gives them time to save their work. Work efficiently in Experience Builder
with new user interface features.
Components in Experience Builder
Show data from Salesforce objects in a list view on your LWR site with the new Record List component (beta). Offer your LWR site
visitors more intuitive picklist behavior with the updated Record Detail component. Upgrade the record components on your Aura
site for improved accessibility and style updates. Use the new Biometric Login Button component to let users log in to your mobile
publisher for Experience Cloud apps with one tap.
Developer Productivity
Upload files from your LWR site to Salesforce with the File Upload Lightning web component, now generally available. Develop
Lightning web components for your LWR site more easily with local dev (beta).
Mobile for Experience Cloud
Good things have come to Mobile Publisher, and you can enjoy them in Experience Cloud. Here are a few of the changes to keep
an eye on.
Security and Sharing
Add trusted sites and turn off Lightning Locker while CSP is in strict mode. Improve site security by switching to single domain
certifications for Salesforce CDN. Enjoy new options for managing external users, and explore upgrades to your customer identity
implementation.

Aura and LWR Sites

Elevate the scalability and performance of your LWR site with Experience Delivery. A session timeout notification on LWR sites helps your
authenticated users avoid unexpected logouts and gives them time to save their work. Work efficiently in Experience Builder with new
user interface features.

IN THIS SECTION:
Upgrade to Enhanced LWR Sites (Generally Available) (Release Update)
Upgrade existing LWR sites to enhanced LWR sites to take advantage of the latest features, including partial deployment, enhanced
CMS workspaces and channels, expression-based visibility, and more. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes
since the last release, and is available as an update starting in Spring ’25.
Update the URL of Your LWR Site
Some older LWR sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL, making it difficult to achieve a completely custom site URL. Now,
you can remove this unwanted element and switch from https://mycustomdomain.com/s to a clutter-free
https://mycustomdomain.com. Removing /s is also a prerequisite when upgrading to an enhanced LWR site.

239
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Aura and LWR Sites

Improve LWR Site Performance with Experience Delivery (Beta)

Use Experience Delivery, a powerful new infrastructure for hosting LWR sites, to boost the scalability and performance of sites created
with the Build Your Own (LWR) template. Along with subsecond page load times, this new infrastructure provides improved security
and search engine optimization. Experience Delivery includes some changes since the previous pilot release.
Work More Efficiently in Experience Builder with Usability Updates
Set the font family for all the text on your LWR site at one time with the Base Font Family field. Keep a record of the changes that
you make to your Aura and LWR site each time that you publish, and see these details in your Change History panel. Dock the
component property panel when you work on your Aura or LWR site so that you can see the entire site on the canvas. Find all the
LWR components that are related to site headers in the new Site Headers section of the component palette.

Upgrade to Enhanced LWR Sites (Generally Available) (Release Update)

Upgrade existing LWR sites to enhanced LWR sites to take advantage of the latest features, including partial deployment, enhanced CMS
workspaces and channels, expression-based visibility, and more. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the
last release, and is available as an update starting in Spring ’25.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this release update in Spring ’26. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status,
search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: The enhanced sites and content platform is a flexible system that brings together Salesforce CMS and LWR sites. Since Winter ’23,
enhanced LWR sites and enhanced CMS workspaces that you create are hosted together on this redesigned platform. Now, as part of
the continued move to the enhanced platform, you can upgrade existing LWR sites to access features that are available only with
enhanced LWR sites, including:
• Expression-based visibility and variations: Create several versions of the same component, and then use visibility rules to determine
who sees what.
• Component-specific Style tab: Apply custom CSS from a component’s Style tab for more granular control over the look of each
component.
• Site content search: Use the Search Bar and Results Layout components to add search functionality that includes content results
from enhanced CMS workspaces.
• Data Cloud integration: Connect enhanced LWR sites to Data Cloud for a complete understanding of who’s visiting your site and
how you can best engage with them.
• Enhanced CMS workspaces: Avail of role-based workflows and approvals, content variations, collections, and workspace sharing.
How: Previously, admins couldn’t upgrade LWR sites that included /s in the site URL. Now you can update the site URL to remove /s
before upgrading to an enhanced LWR site.
To upgrade an LWR site, in Experience Builder, select Settings > Updates, and click Upgrade. After you upgrade your site to an enhanced
LWR site, the site’s metadata changes. Unlike non-enhanced LWR sites, which use the ExperienceBundle metadata type, enhanced LWR
sites use the DigitalExperienceBundle and the DigitalExperienceConfig types.

240
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Aura and LWR Sites

Note: Upgrading to an enhanced LWR site introduces new features, changes the metadata of your site, and affects the site
deployment process. Before you upgrade the site, we recommend creating a backup copy of your non-enhanced LWR site and
working in a sandbox environment to test any changes.

SEE ALSO:
Update the URL of Your LWR Site

Update the URL of Your LWR Site

Some older LWR sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL, making it difficult to achieve a completely custom site URL. Now,
you can remove this unwanted element and switch from https://mycustomdomain.com/s to a clutter-free
https://mycustomdomain.com. Removing /s is also a prerequisite when upgrading to an enhanced LWR site.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: You can update the URL in the URL Update area of the site’s Administration workspace. When you update the URL, the change
takes immediate effect on the live site. We automatically redirect the site's pages and update any custom URLs. However, if you use
hard-coded URLs as part of your site implementation, you must update these references manually.

SEE ALSO:
Upgrade to Enhanced LWR Sites (Generally Available) (Release Update)

Improve LWR Site Performance with Experience Delivery (Beta)

Use Experience Delivery, a powerful new infrastructure for hosting LWR sites, to boost the scalability and performance of sites created
with the Build Your Own (LWR) template. Along with subsecond page load times, this new infrastructure provides improved security
and search engine optimization. Experience Delivery includes some changes since the previous pilot release.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions. Developer Edition isn’t supported.

241
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Aura and LWR Sites

Note: For sites created with the Build Your Own (LWR) template, Experience Delivery is a pilot or beta service that is subject to
the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and
applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer’s sole discretion.
Why: Existing LWR sites use client-side rendering (CSR), meaning that all the HTML, JavaScript, CSS, and assets that make up the page
are downloaded to the client before being rendered in the browser.
By contrast, Experience Delivery uses server-side rendering (SSR) and a dedicated content delivery network (CDN) to render the page
on the server and then cache it in the CDN. This approach provides optimal site performance with page load times up to 60% faster,
which leads to increased conversions and lower bounce rates.
This release provides:
• Improved load-time performance for authenticated pages.
• Support for testing in sandbox before moving to production. Now you can create a custom domain in production that points to
your sandbox.
• Access to customizable availability pages, such as the Too Many Requests and the Down for Maintenance pages.
• SSR support for additional components and various bug fixes.
How: Experience Delivery is supported in new and existing LWR and enhanced LWR sites that use the Build Your Own (LWR) template.
This beta is for developers who are familiar with:
• Building LWR or enhanced LWR sites with Experience Builder
• Developing custom Lightning web components that are server-side ready
• Working with Salesforce DX
You can enable Experience Delivery at the site level in the Settings tab of the site’s Administration workspace.

Note: In D2C Commerce, Experience Delivery is generally available for new stores created by using the D2C Store template.

242
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Aura and LWR Sites

Work More Efficiently in Experience Builder with Usability Updates

Set the font family for all the text on your LWR site at one time with the Base Font Family field. Keep a record of the changes that you
make to your Aura and LWR site each time that you publish, and see these details in your Change History panel. Dock the component
property panel when you work on your Aura or LWR site so that you can see the entire site on the canvas. Find all the LWR components
that are related to site headers in the new Site Headers section of the component palette.
Where: This change applies to Aura and LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. You must have at least one active community license in your org to use this feature.
How: For LWR sites, in the Text section of the Theme panel, select a font family from the Base Font Family dropdown list.
• In LWR sites created in Spring ’25 and later, the Base Font Family property defaults to Visitor’s Native System Font. The Font Family
picklist for each text element in the Text panel defaults to Use Base Font Family.
• For all LWR sites, the Font Family dropdown list for each individual text element now includes choices for Use Base Font Family and
Visitor’s Native System Font.
With the addition of the Base Font Family property for LWR sites, the Salesforce Sans font is no longer available on LWR sites created in
Winter ’25 and later.

For Aura and LWR sites, the confirmation window for publishing the site now includes a Publication Description field where you can
detail the changes that you’re making to your site with that publication. These details appear in the Change History panel in Experience
Builder Settings, keeping your site updates visible over time.

243
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Aura and LWR Sites

On Aura and LWR sites, click the pushpin icon (1) in any component property panel to dock the panel and ensure that the entire site
page is visible on the canvas. Updates to the property panels for the Section component on Aura and LWR sites, and the Columns
component for LWR sites, make the Column Layout and Column Distribution properties easier to see (2). The thumbnail layout images
for Column Layout are a darker gray, and in the Column Distribution property, deselected columns are now gray. On Aura sites, the
Section component is visible only on pages with a flexible page layout.

Also on LWR sites, the components related to site headers, such as Navigation Menu and Site Logo, are now gathered in the Site Headers
section of the component palette.

244
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Components in Experience Builder

Components in Experience Builder

Show data from Salesforce objects in a list view on your LWR site with the new Record List component (beta). Offer your LWR site visitors
more intuitive picklist behavior with the updated Record Detail component. Upgrade the record components on your Aura site for
improved accessibility and style updates. Use the new Biometric Login Button component to let users log in to your mobile publisher
for Experience Cloud apps with one tap.

IN THIS SECTION:
Enable a Modernized Record Experience in Aura Sites (Release Update)
Starting in Winter ’25, you can upgrade record components in your Aura sites and see improved accessibility and stylistic changes.
Upgraded Create Record Form, Record Banner, and Record Detail components run on Lightning Web Component technology, which
improves accessibility and performance. In Summer ’25, the upgrade is enforced for all orgs. We strongly recommend that you test
all customized record components before the update.
Help Your Site Visitors View Records More Easily with the New Record List Component (Beta)
The Record List component (beta) for LWR sites helps you to easily view data through list views for different objects. Select your
desired object and list view in the property panel, and view live previews of records such as Accounts, Cases on the canvas. A built-in
search feature makes it easy to navigate your data for your site visitors. New styling options include customizable header settings,
record configuration, and pagination controls. New layout customization and component visibility options offer greater flexibility,
allowing you to refine the look and feel of your website.
Give Experience Cloud App Users the Ability to Log In with One Tap
Use the new Biometric Login Button component to let your users securely log in to your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app
with face or fingerprint recognition. The component creates a button that brings up the face or fingerprint login prompt. App users
can tap the button to retry biometric login if they initially dismiss the prompt, or if their previous attempt to log in with face or
fingerprint recognition fails.

245
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Components in Experience Builder

Enable a Modernized Record Experience in Aura Sites (Release Update)

Starting in Winter ’25, you can upgrade record components in your Aura sites and see improved accessibility and stylistic changes.
Upgraded Create Record Form, Record Banner, and Record Detail components run on Lightning Web Component technology, which
improves accessibility and performance. In Summer ’25, the upgrade is enforced for all orgs. We strongly recommend that you test all
customized record components before the update.
Where: This change applies to Aura sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: When the Use Lightning web components on your record pages in Aura sites setting is enabled, the Create Record Form, Record
Banner, and Record Detail components show minor style changes. New Aura sites created after Summer ’24 automatically include
upgraded record components. Here are some potential changes.
• Buttons are center-aligned. Previously, they were right-aligned.
• Text in the record window is indented compared to the title. Previously, the text and title were aligned with one another.
• If a form includes required fields, there’s now an explanation that an asterisk indicates a required field. Previously, there was no
explanation.
• If a required field is left blank, users now see a red outline around the required field and an inline error message telling them to
complete the field.
• Error messages are displayed at the bottom of the record form. Previously, errors were displayed at the top.
• Field focus is highlighted with a yellow background.
• Page headers scroll with the page rather than remaining frozen at the top.
• Success toast messages can refer to Salesforce IDs.
• New icons appear next to various fields and certain icons remain visible without mouseover.
• Links appear in various places where they were previously not included.
How: From Experience Builder, open Settings > Experience Management Settings and select Use Lightning web components
on your record pages in Aura sites to upgrade your components.

Help Your Site Visitors View Records More Easily with the New Record List Component
(Beta)
The Record List component (beta) for LWR sites helps you to easily view data through list views for different objects. Select your desired
object and list view in the property panel, and view live previews of records such as Accounts, Cases on the canvas. A built-in search
feature makes it easy to navigate your data for your site visitors. New styling options include customizable header settings, record
configuration, and pagination controls. New layout customization and component visibility options offer greater flexibility, allowing you
to refine the look and feel of your website.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions with active Experience Cloud licenses.

Note: Record List component (beta) for LWR sites is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements
- Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: In Experience Builder, drag the Record List (beta) component to the canvas. Select your object and list view, and configure your
settings. Create record detail pages to enable navigation within objects.

246
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Developer Productivity

Give Experience Cloud App Users the Ability to Log In with One Tap
Use the new Biometric Login Button component to let your users securely log in to your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app with
face or fingerprint recognition. The component creates a button that brings up the face or fingerprint login prompt. App users can tap
the button to retry biometric login if they initially dismiss the prompt, or if their previous attempt to log in with face or fingerprint
recognition fails.
Where: This change applies to apps created with Mobile Publisher for Aura and LWR sites in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions. You must have at least one active community license in your org to use this feature. The Biometric Login Button
component is supported only on Experience Cloud apps configured with User Opt-In Biometric Login.
How: Configure User Opt-In Biometric Login through your Experience Cloud app's connected app custom attributes. In Experience
Builder, drag the Biometric Login Button component to your app's login screen and configure the button's properties.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: User Opt-In Biometric Login (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable User Opt-In Biometric Login (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Standard Components for LWR Templates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Which Components Can I Use with Each Aura Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Developer Productivity
Upload files from your LWR site to Salesforce with the File Upload Lightning web component, now generally available. Develop Lightning
web components for your LWR site more easily with local dev (beta).

IN THIS SECTION:
Link Files from Your LWR Site to Salesforce is Generally Available
Now you can use the File Upload Lightning web component setting to upload files from an LWR site or an enhanced LWR site to
your Salesforce org. Previously, the File Upload component was available only for Aura sites.
Develop Lightning Web Components Faster in a Real-Time Preview of Your LWR Site (Beta)
Use Local Dev to develop Lightning web components in a real-time preview of your Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) site. Local Dev
is beta for LWR sites in Spring ’25. It detects changes in your source code and automatically updates your site preview so you don’t
have to redeploy code or manually refresh your browser.

Link Files from Your LWR Site to Salesforce is Generally Available

Now you can use the File Upload Lightning web component setting to upload files from an LWR site or an enhanced LWR site to your
Salesforce org. Previously, the File Upload component was available only for Aura sites.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: This feature is on by default for all orgs, with the user setting Use the File Upload Lightning web component for LWR sites enabled
by default for all orgs.

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Component Reference: File Upload (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

247
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Mobile for Experience Cloud

Develop Lightning Web Components Faster in a Real-Time Preview of Your LWR Site
(Beta)
Use Local Dev to develop Lightning web components in a real-time preview of your Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) site. Local Dev is
beta for LWR sites in Spring ’25. It detects changes in your source code and automatically updates your site preview so you don’t have
to redeploy code or manually refresh your browser.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. You must have at least one active community license in your org to use this
feature.

Note: Local Dev is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written
Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta
service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: To use this feature, first install Salesforce CLI. To turn on Local Dev for your org, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Local
Dev and then select Local Dev. To turn on Local Dev for all org users, select Enable Local Dev. Then, to install the Local Dev plug-in,
run the CLI command:
sf plugins install @salesforce/plugin-lightning-dev

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Preview Components with Local Dev
Salesforce Developers Blog: Develop LWC at Lightning Speed with the New Local Dev Experience

Mobile for Experience Cloud

Good things have come to Mobile Publisher, and you can enjoy them in Experience Cloud. Here are a few of the changes to keep an
eye on.

IN THIS SECTION:
Improve Your Experience Cloud App with the Latest Features from Mobile Publisher
With User Opt-In Biometric Login, which is now generally available, your app users can opt in to face or fingerprint recognition to
log in easily and securely. Upgrade your app’s biometric login experience with the new Biometric Login Button component in
Experience Builder, which creates a button that brings up the face or fingerprint prompt. Customize the style of your app’s Enhanced
Mobile App Security alerts with new color and font settings in Setup for Mobile Publisher. Boost your app’s download offerings with
newly supported methods, including unauthenticated downloads and dynamic, third-party, Base64, or custom or standard object
download links.

Improve Your Experience Cloud App with the Latest Features from Mobile Publisher
With User Opt-In Biometric Login, which is now generally available, your app users can opt in to face or fingerprint recognition to log
in easily and securely. Upgrade your app’s biometric login experience with the new Biometric Login Button component in Experience
Builder, which creates a button that brings up the face or fingerprint prompt. Customize the style of your app’s Enhanced Mobile App
Security alerts with new color and font settings in Setup for Mobile Publisher. Boost your app’s download offerings with newly supported
methods, including unauthenticated downloads and dynamic, third-party, Base64, or custom or standard object download links.

248
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Security and Sharing

Where: These changes apply to apps created with Mobile Publisher for Aura and LWR sites in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Give Experience Cloud Users the Ability to Log In with One Tap

Security and Sharing

Add trusted sites and turn off Lightning Locker while CSP is in strict mode. Improve site security by switching to single domain certifications
for Salesforce CDN. Enjoy new options for managing external users, and explore upgrades to your customer identity implementation.

IN THIS SECTION:
Use Trusted Sites and Disable Lightning Locker When CSP Is in Strict Mode
Site security is now more flexible with the ability to decouple Lightning Locker from your content security policy (CSP) settings and
allow trusted sites. You can add trusted sites regardless of mode, and choose whether you want to use Lightning Locker. Previously,
you could only add trusted sites when the (CSP) was in relaxed mode. In strict mode, you were required to have Lightning Locker
turned on.
Salesforce No Longer Supports Shared Domain Certificates for the Salesforce CDN
For improved security, all newly created Salesforce content delivery network (CDN) domains use single domain certificates. Salesforce
no longer supports shared domain certificates for the Salesforce CDN. If you’re using a shared certificate, update to a single certificate
immediately to avoid site disruptions.
Increase the Security of Your Site with When Managing External Users
Assign the Manage External Users (Limited) permission, instead of the Manage External Users permission, for greater security when
you grant users the ability to manage external users. Users with the Manage External Users (Limited) permission can manage only
external users that they have read and write access to. The Manage External Users permission allows them to manage all external
users.
Strengthen Your Customer Identity Implementation with New Features and Security Updates
Give users the ability to log in to headless apps with more options than just their username. Set up SAML single sign-on with the
external client apps framework, the new generation of the connected apps framework. To avoid potential service interruptions,
review security changes for integrations that use the services/oauth2/singleaccess endpoint. Also, the Triple DES
SAML encryption algorithm is being deprecated.

Use Trusted Sites and Disable Lightning Locker When CSP Is in Strict Mode
Site security is now more flexible with the ability to decouple Lightning Locker from your content security policy (CSP) settings and allow
trusted sites. You can add trusted sites regardless of mode, and choose whether you want to use Lightning Locker. Previously, you could
only add trusted sites when the (CSP) was in relaxed mode. In strict mode, you were required to have Lightning Locker turned on.
Where: This change applies to Aura and LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: With these enhancements, you can isolate your site from third-party components and custom code when Lightning Locker is
turned on. Or, allow third-party components and custom code to communicate with your site when Lightning Locker is off, all in strict
CSP mode. And with the added ability to trust sites while in CSP strict mode, you can choose exactly which sites you want to allow while
keeping your site secure.
How: To change your CSP settings, go to Experience Builder and open Settings > Security & Privacy. Then select Strict CSP: Block
Access to Inline Scripts and Permit Access to Allowed Hosts and individually allow any trusted sites.

249
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service

Salesforce No Longer Supports Shared Domain Certificates for the Salesforce CDN
For improved security, all newly created Salesforce content delivery network (CDN) domains use single domain certificates. Salesforce
no longer supports shared domain certificates for the Salesforce CDN. If you’re using a shared certificate, update to a single certificate
immediately to avoid site disruptions.
Where: This change applies to Aura and LWR, sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Domains, and then select Domains. For each domain with a shared certificate, select
the domain and click Edit a Domain. To update your certificate selection for the CDN, select Single certificate for Content Delivery
Network (CDN). This option appears only on domains that are using shared domain certificates. If you don’t have the option to switch
domains, your domain is using a single certificate.

Increase the Security of Your Site with When Managing External Users
Assign the Manage External Users (Limited) permission, instead of the Manage External Users permission, for greater security when you
grant users the ability to manage external users. Users with the Manage External Users (Limited) permission can manage only external
users that they have read and write access to. The Manage External Users permission allows them to manage all external users.
Where: This change applies to Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Strengthen Your Customer Identity Implementation with New Features and Security
Updates
Give users the ability to log in to headless apps with more options than just their username. Set up SAML single sign-on with the external
client apps framework, the new generation of the connected apps framework. To avoid potential service interruptions, review security
changes for integrations that use the services/oauth2/singleaccess endpoint. Also, the Triple DES SAML encryption
algorithm is being deprecated.
Where: These changes apply to LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not
available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: For more information about these changes, see these release notes.
• Give Headless App Users More Ways to Log In
• Integrate Single Sign-On Service Providers with the External Client Apps Framework
• GET Requests with Access Tokens in the URL Query String Are Blocked for the Single Access Endpoint
• Triple DES Encryption Is No Longer Supported for SAML Single Sign-On

Field Service
See what’s new in Field Service to help your team deliver on performance and customer service.

IN THIS SECTION:
Field Service Einstein
Discover innovative, AI-based features to help your teams deliver exceptional service.
Field Service Setup Home
Streamline, extend, and customize your Field Service setup.

250
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Einstein

Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

Explore the latest features to help dispatchers create, manage, and optimize your team’s schedule.
Field Service Asset Management
Discover what’s new to take asset management to the next level.
Field Service Operations
Optimize, expand, and personalize your Field Service operations.
Field Service Customer Engagement
Enhance and elevate your customer interactions with these new features.
Field Service Mobile
Explore what’s new in Field Service mobile, designed to help mobile workers provide outstanding service.
Spotlight on Field Service Content
Discover high-impact content to help you get your Field Service work done.

Field Service Einstein

Discover innovative, AI-based features to help your teams deliver exceptional service.

IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Productivity and Resource Utilization by Easily Filling Schedule Gaps with Agentforce
Let dispatchers focus on strategic tasks by using Agentforce Field Service Actions to fill schedule gaps. Agentforce uses your business
rules and objectives to recommend appointments for the gaps, and then schedules the appointment selected by the dispatcher.
Listen Safely to Pre-Work Briefs with a Tap of a Button
Take care of your mobile workers’ safety by keeping their eyes away from their phones. In the Einstein generative AI Pre-Work Brief,
mobile workers can now get the brief read aloud to them. For example, if a worker is at a busy job site and they want to prepare for
the job while remaining aware of what’s going on around them, they can listen to the brief.
Get Solutions Easily from Agentforce by Including Images
Mobile workers can now add images to their conversation with their AI agent in the Field Service mobile app. Agentforce analyzes
the images to assist the mobile worker. Workers can add images from their gallery or take a picture directly with their camera. For
example, instead of workers explaining an error code on an oven, they can add an image that shows the information.
Work Smarter by Using Siri to Communicate with Agentforce
Mobile workers can talk to Siri and have her request Agentforce to do something for them in the Field Service mobile app. When a
mobile worker says to Siri, “Ask Field Service,” followed by their request, the AI agent starts working its magic in the app. The AI agent
can quickly complete any request it’s been set up to do. For example, mobile workers can ask to draft a post-work summary, get
information from knowledge articles, or schedule a follow-up appointment.

Boost Productivity and Resource Utilization by Easily Filling Schedule Gaps with
Agentforce
Let dispatchers focus on strategic tasks by using Agentforce Field Service Actions to fill schedule gaps. Agentforce uses your business
rules and objectives to recommend appointments for the gaps, and then schedules the appointment selected by the dispatcher.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Field
Service add-on. This feature is also available in Lightning Experience in Einstein 1 Field Service edition. This feature requires the Field
Service managed package. Setup for Agentforce is available on the desktop site.

251
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Einstein

To purchase the Einstein for Field Service add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Who: Agentforce is available to users with the Use Agentforce Default Agent for Salesforce user permission. Field Service agent topics
and actions are available to users with the Access Agent Topics and Actions for Field Service user permission.
Why: Here's an example of how this feature works.
Sally, a dispatcher, just got a call from a customer who wants to cancel an appointment that was scheduled for tomorrow and assigned
to Rob. She then receives another call asking to reschedule an appointment that was assigned to Rob for tomorrow. Rob now has some
schedule gaps. Sally decides to use Agentforce to help her quickly find the best appointments to fill these gaps. She asks the agent to
“Fill the gaps in Rob’s schedule tomorrow.”
Agentforce uses that utterance and the actions from the Field Service Dispatcher Actions topic to suggest the best appointments to fill
the first gap. Sally selects the appointment that she thinks is the best fit and lets the agent schedule it for her. She can then click Show
Next Gap to repeat the process.
How: This feature works in Agentforce through the Field Service Dispatcher Actions topic. Add the Field Service Dispatcher Actions topic
from the asset library. Instruct your dispatchers to engage with the AI agent in the dispatcher console.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Agentforce for Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Fill Gaps in a Service Resource’s Schedule (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Agent Topic: Field Service Dispatcher Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Listen Safely to Pre-Work Briefs with a Tap of a Button

Take care of your mobile workers’ safety by keeping their eyes away from their phones. In the Einstein generative AI Pre-Work Brief,
mobile workers can now get the brief read aloud to them. For example, if a worker is at a busy job site and they want to prepare for the
job while remaining aware of what’s going on around them, they can listen to the brief.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Field Service
add-on. This change also applies to Lightning Experience in Einstein 1 Field Service edition. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning
Experience. The feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS.
To purchase the Einstein for Field Service add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: Instruct mobile workers to tap Read Aloud on the pre-work brief.

252
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Einstein

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Pre-Work Brief for Field Service Mobile Workers (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get Solutions Easily from Agentforce by Including Images

Mobile workers can now add images to their conversation with their AI agent in the Field Service mobile app. Agentforce analyzes the
images to assist the mobile worker. Workers can add images from their gallery or take a picture directly with their camera. For example,
instead of workers explaining an error code on an oven, they can add an image that shows the information.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Field Service
add-on. This change also applies to Lightning Experience in Einstein 1 Field Service edition. The feature is available in the Field Service
mobile app for Android and iOS. Setup for Agentforce is available on the desktop site.
To purchase the Einstein for Field Service add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
When: This feature is available later in Spring ‘25.
Who: Agentforce is available to users with the Use Agentforce Default Agent user permission. Field Service agent actions are available
to users with the Access Field Service Agent Actions user permission.
To use agent actions that execute prompt templates, users must have the Execute Prompt Templates user permission.
How: In a conversation with the AI agent, tap the + icon and add an image.

253
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Einstein

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Work Smarter by Using Siri to Communicate with Agentforce

Mobile workers can talk to Siri and have her request Agentforce to do something for them in the Field Service mobile app. When a
mobile worker says to Siri, “Ask Field Service,” followed by their request, the AI agent starts working its magic in the app. The AI agent
can quickly complete any request it’s been set up to do. For example, mobile workers can ask to draft a post-work summary, get
information from knowledge articles, or schedule a follow-up appointment.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Field
Service add-on. This feature is also available in Lightning Experience in Einstein 1 Field Service edition. The feature is available in the
Field Service mobile app for iOS only. Setup for Agentforce is available on the desktop site.
To purchase the Einstein for Field Service add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Who: Agentforce is available to users with the Use Agentforce Default Agent user permission. Field Service agent actions are available
to users with the Access Field Service Agent Actions user permission.
To use agent actions that execute prompt templates, users must have the Execute Prompt Templates user permission.
How: Instruct your iOS mobile workers to say, “Hey Siri, ask Field Service” or “Hey Siri, tell Field Service.” Siri replies, “What’s the request?”
and the mobile worker states the request. The iOS shortcut opens your AI agent in the Field Service mobile app, and the conversation
carries on from there. Mobile workers can also run the shortcut with the action button or add the shortcut to their home screen.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Agentforce Agents (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Apple Help: Run shortcuts with the Action button
Apple Help: Add a shortcut to the Home Screen on iPhone or iPad

254
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Setup Home

Field Service Setup Home

Streamline, extend, and customize your Field Service setup.

IN THIS SECTION:
Accelerate Time to Value with Field Service Setup (Beta)
Get your Field Service solution up and running in a snap with our streamlined setup experience. With one click, you can activate
Field Service, install the managed package, and create and assign the necessary permissions and profiles. Then you can use four
wizards to create the key data required to start scheduling your first appointment. You can also discover features and see how Field
Service delivers value to your business. The feature cards are enriched with dynamic videos, useful links, handy tips, and expert
recommendations that aid in transformational guidance, such as creating maintenance plans and setting up the mobile application.
This engaging, new experience is the first step in simplifying setup and tailoring your Field Service implementation to meet your
needs.

Accelerate Time to Value with Field Service Setup (Beta)

Get your Field Service solution up and running in a snap with our streamlined setup experience. With one click, you can activate Field
Service, install the managed package, and create and assign the necessary permissions and profiles. Then you can use four wizards to
create the key data required to start scheduling your first appointment. You can also discover features and see how Field Service delivers
value to your business. The feature cards are enriched with dynamic videos, useful links, handy tips, and expert recommendations that
aid in transformational guidance, such as creating maintenance plans and setting up the mobile application. This engaging, new
experience is the first step in simplifying setup and tailoring your Field Service implementation to meet your needs.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Note: Field Service Setup Home is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com
or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this
pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Setup Home and click Turn On.

255
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

Explore the latest features to help dispatchers create, manage, and optimize your team’s schedule.

IN THIS SECTION:
Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization
Benefit from advanced features and better schedule quality with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization.
Gain Visibility into the Scheduling History of Service Appointments
Track information on changes made to a service appointment and quickly resolve any related issues. Service Appointment Lifecycle
captures changes to key service appointment properties related to scheduling, such as service resource, duration, and scheduled
start and end times. This information shows on the service appointment record page, where dispatchers and Salesforce admins can
easily spot and review issues. Each change is also saved to the new Field Service object change record page. From the object list
view, Salesforce admins can identify and analyze patterns and trends and create reports to better manage the scheduling process.
Previously, only the current scheduling information for service appointments was available.
Renamed Field Service Agent Permission Set Name and Agent Persona
We’ve updated the Field Service Agent permission set name and changed the persona name to Field Service Call Center Rep. This
renaming makes it easy to distinguish between live experts and AI-powered assistants.
Quickly Identify and Manage Empty Appointment Bundles
Assign a dedicated status to appointment bundles with no remaining bundle members. Use the empty bundle status to keep track
of these empty bundles for monitoring or reporting purposes.

Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization

Benefit from advanced features and better schedule quality with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization.

256
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

IN THIS SECTION:
Increase Coverage with 24-Hour Availability for All Service Resources
Enable continuous round-the-clock availability for individual service resources to allow assigning appointments in specific scenarios,
such as emergencies during on-call shifts. This enhancement supports scheduling across standard and extended working hours for
a period that spans beyond 24 hours without breaking or requiring artificial gaps. Previously, only capacity-based resources were
always available.
Enhance Scheduling Flexibility by Assigning Service Appointments to Individuals or Crews
Get more options when scheduling service appointments that require a crew size of one by assigning them to either an individual
service resource or a crew. Previously, this functionality was available by default only when you're not using Enhanced Scheduling
and Optimization. Now, with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization, you can turn this functionality on or off with the Assign Service
Appointments to Individuals and Crews checkbox.
Reduce Labor Costs and Increase Resource Productivity with Consecutive Appointment Scheduling
Avoid financial penalties from failing to comply with labor laws and improve resource efficiency by preferring to schedule service
appointments continuously to prevent schedule gaps. Use the Minimize Gaps service objective for schedule, bulk schedule, in-day,
and global optimization operations to make sure service resources have a continuous block of appointments rather than multiple
idle times throughout the day. This objective, which targets mainly healthcare companies that have part-time employees, lets
customers better manage employee schedules with back-to-back appointments for improved productivity and profitability.

Increase Coverage with 24-Hour Availability for All Service Resources

Enable continuous round-the-clock availability for individual service resources to allow assigning appointments in specific scenarios,
such as emergencies during on-call shifts. This enhancement supports scheduling across standard and extended working hours for a
period that spans beyond 24 hours without breaking or requiring artificial gaps. Previously, only capacity-based resources were always
available.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Field Service managed package installed.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. To enable
continuous 24-hour availability for specific scenarios like emergencies, use operating hours or shifts and set a recordset filter criteria to
define the conditions. In the Service Resource Availability work rule, select Overtime to schedule service appointments during time
slots or shifts of the Extended type.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable 24-Hour Continuous Resource Availability for All Service Resources (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Operating Hours for Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Flexible Work Shifts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance Scheduling Flexibility by Assigning Service Appointments to Individuals or Crews

Get more options when scheduling service appointments that require a crew size of one by assigning them to either an individual service
resource or a crew. Previously, this functionality was available by default only when you're not using Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization.
Now, with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization, you can turn this functionality on or off with the Assign Service Appointments to
Individuals and Crews checkbox.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Field Service managed package installed.

257
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. Then, select
Scheduling, and under the Crews section enable Assign Service Appointments to individuals and crews.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Work Rule Type: Service Crew Resources Availability (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Work Type Fields for Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Reduce Labor Costs and Increase Resource Productivity with Consecutive Appointment Scheduling
Avoid financial penalties from failing to comply with labor laws and improve resource efficiency by preferring to schedule service
appointments continuously to prevent schedule gaps. Use the Minimize Gaps service objective for schedule, bulk schedule, in-day, and
global optimization operations to make sure service resources have a continuous block of appointments rather than multiple idle times
throughout the day. This objective, which targets mainly healthcare companies that have part-time employees, lets customers better
manage employee schedules with back-to-back appointments for improved productivity and profitability.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Field Service managed package installed.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. Add the
Minimize Gaps service objective to your scheduling policy from the Customize Scheduling Policies page in Guided Setup or the Scheduling
Policy Objectives related list on a policy.

258
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Minimize Gaps Service Objective (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create and Manage Field Service Scheduling Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Gain Visibility into the Scheduling History of Service Appointments

Track information on changes made to a service appointment and quickly resolve any related issues. Service Appointment Lifecycle
captures changes to key service appointment properties related to scheduling, such as service resource, duration, and scheduled start
and end times. This information shows on the service appointment record page, where dispatchers and Salesforce admins can easily
spot and review issues. Each change is also saved to the new Field Service object change record page. From the object list view, Salesforce
admins can identify and analyze patterns and trends and create reports to better manage the scheduling process. Previously, only the
current scheduling information for service appointments was available.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Field Service managed
package installed.
When: The Service Appointment Lifecycle feature is available starting on January 20, 2025.
How: From the object management settings for service appointments, use the Lightning App Builder to add the Service Appointment
Lifecycle Lightning web component to the service appointment record page. If you customized the layout of the service appointment
record page, you must add the Service Appointment Lifecycle component. If you didn’t customize the layout, the component is available
by default.

259
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Scheduling and Optimization

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Scheduling History in Field Service with Service Appointment Lifecycle (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)

Renamed Field Service Agent Permission Set Name and Agent Persona
We’ve updated the Field Service Agent permission set name and changed the persona name to Field Service Call Center Rep. This
renaming makes it easy to distinguish between live experts and AI-powered assistants.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Field Service managed package installed.
How: This change is reflected under Field Service Settings, in the Getting Started section.

260
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Asset Management

Quickly Identify and Manage Empty Appointment Bundles

Assign a dedicated status to appointment bundles with no remaining bundle members. Use the empty bundle status to keep track of
these empty bundles for monitoring or reporting purposes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Field Service managed
package installed.
When: This feature is available later in Spring ‘25.
How: In Appointment Bundle Config, deselect Delete empty bundles. Then, in Empty Bundle Status, select a status from the Canceled
category. A bundle service appointment changes to this status if it has no remaining bundle members but still appears in the appointment
list.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create an Appointment Bundle Config (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Field Service Asset Management

Discover what’s new to take asset management to the next level.

IN THIS SECTION:
View and Manage Asset Components in Real Time with the Asset Service Lifecycle Management Add-On
Get oriented with key asset information, troubleshoot effectively, and replace and relocate assets in one place. Asset Interactive
Hierarchy gives a real-time view of current, installed, and maintained views, including installation date, maintenance history, and
current status. Detailed asset information helps technicians efficiently manage and maintain assets during field operations.
Foresee Future Fixes with the Connected Assets Add-On
Say goodbye to uncertainty about future maintenance needs. Asset Service Prediction (ASP) analyzes your field service repairs and
finds patterns of work completed for a group of assets. Based on how often repairs are done together, ASP predicts the likelihood
of future work for the asset. The result is actionable insights that empower technicians to fix current and expected problems in one
visit. This one-and-done approach to maintenance reduces truck rolls, improves customer experience, and makes sure your assets
are always up and running.
Migrate from Maintenance Plan Frequency Fields to Maintenance Work Rules (Release Update)
The Frequency and Frequency Type fields on the Maintenance Plan are being retired. To prepare for this retirement and take advantage
of updated features, migrate your Frequency and Frequency Type data to maintenance work rules. This update was first available
in Summer ’22 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ‘22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ‘26.

View and Manage Asset Components in Real Time with the Asset Service Lifecycle
Management Add-On
Get oriented with key asset information, troubleshoot effectively, and replace and relocate assets in one place. Asset Interactive Hierarchy
gives a real-time view of current, installed, and maintained views, including installation date, maintenance history, and current status.
Detailed asset information helps technicians efficiently manage and maintain assets during field operations.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Asset Service Lifecycle Management with Field Service enabled. The feature
is available in the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS. To purchase the Asset Service Lifecycle Management add-on license,
contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: Go to the asset hierarchy from the asset or work order page. Click the Current, As Installed, or As Maintained view for asset
information.

261
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Asset Management

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Asset Interactive Hierarchy (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Foresee Future Fixes with the Connected Assets Add-On

Say goodbye to uncertainty about future maintenance needs. Asset Service Prediction (ASP) analyzes your field service repairs and finds
patterns of work completed for a group of assets. Based on how often repairs are done together, ASP predicts the likelihood of future
work for the asset. The result is actionable insights that empower technicians to fix current and expected problems in one visit. This
one-and-done approach to maintenance reduces truck rolls, improves customer experience, and makes sure your assets are always up
and running.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience Lightning Experience in Connected Assets with Field Service enabled. The feature
is available in the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS. To purchase the Connected Assets add-on license, contact your Salesforce
account executive.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service, and then select Asset Service Prediction.

Migrate from Maintenance Plan Frequency Fields to Maintenance Work Rules (Release
Update)
The Frequency and Frequency Type fields on the Maintenance Plan are being retired. To prepare for this retirement and take advantage
of updated features, migrate your Frequency and Frequency Type data to maintenance work rules. This update was first available in
Summer ’22 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ‘22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ‘26.
Where: This change is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

262
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Operations

When: This release update is enforced in Winter ’26. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: Recent changes to Maintenance Work Rules replace and improve the functionality provided by the frequency fields. In Winter
’26, the retired fields will impact work order generation.
How: Find the release update in Setup. For Migration from Frequency Fields, follow the testing and activation steps.
For all impacted maintenance plans, select a maintenance plan that uses the frequency fields without the maintenance work rules.
Update the selected maintenance plan to use maintenance work rules instead, and click Enable Test Run. To hide the frequency fields
after the migration, go to Setup, turn off Field Service, and then turn it on again.

Field Service Operations

Optimize, expand, and personalize your Field Service operations.

IN THIS SECTION:
Monitor Field Service Operations with New Dashboards (Beta)
Determine if you’re meeting your field service goals with the new Field Service Intelligence dashboards. The new dashboards help
your field service team improve operations and reduce costs with customer data, easy-to-understand visualizations, and key
performance indicators enhanced with Einstein. This app includes Work Order dashboards to help you understand where your orders
come from, and Service Appointment dashboards that help you understand trends, such as appointment duration and the first-time
fix rate.

Monitor Field Service Operations with New Dashboards (Beta)

Determine if you’re meeting your field service goals with the new Field Service Intelligence dashboards. The new dashboards help your
field service team improve operations and reduce costs with customer data, easy-to-understand visualizations, and key performance
indicators enhanced with Einstein. This app includes Work Order dashboards to help you understand where your orders come from, and
Service Appointment dashboards that help you understand trends, such as appointment duration and the first-time fix rate.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in the Unlimited Edition with the Einstein for Field Service add-on. This feature
is also available in Lightning Experience in Einstein 1 Field Service edition. To purchase the Einstein for Field Service add-on, contact your
Salesforce account executive.

Note: Field Service Intelligence is a beta service that’s subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: To use the Field Service Intelligence dashboards, you need the Tableau Einstein Included App Business User permission set. To
manage the Field Service Intelligence dashboards, you need the Tableau Included App Manager permission set.
How: To enable Field Service Intelligence, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Field Service Intelligence, and then
select Field Service Intelligence Setup. Follow the setup steps and enable Tableau Einstein.

Field Service Customer Engagement

Enhance and elevate your customer interactions with these new features.

263
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

IN THIS SECTION:
Promote Your Brand During Visual Remote Assistant Sessions
Create a personalized customer experience by customizing the mobile web browser screens shown before, during, and after each
Visual Remote Assistant session. Upload and integrate your brand assets to align each customer interaction with your brand identity
for enhanced recognition, trust, and engagement.
Find Available Slots More Efficiently When Booking Appointments with Appointment Assistant
Booking appointments is easier than ever with the simplified Appointment Assistant experience. Customers can now see a more
focused single-day view of available appointment slots, making it easier to find a time that works for them. No more sifting through
a list of the full-week’s schedule. If no slots are available for the selected week, customers can tap the option to move to the next
week and continue their search.

Promote Your Brand During Visual Remote Assistant Sessions

Create a personalized customer experience by customizing the mobile web browser screens shown before, during, and after each Visual
Remote Assistant session. Upload and integrate your brand assets to align each customer interaction with your brand identity for
enhanced recognition, trust, and engagement.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Field Service managed
package installed.
How: Go to App Launcher and search for Visual Remote Assistant Configuration. In the Mobile Web Branding section, upload your brand
assets, such as a logo and spinner.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Visual Remote Assistant for Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Find Available Slots More Efficiently When Booking Appointments with Appointment
Assistant
Booking appointments is easier than ever with the simplified Appointment Assistant experience. Customers can now see a more focused
single-day view of available appointment slots, making it easier to find a time that works for them. No more sifting through a list of the
full-week’s schedule. If no slots are available for the selected week, customers can tap the option to move to the next week and continue
their search.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Field Service managed package and the Field Service Appointment Assistant managed package installed.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Field Service Appointment Assistant (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Field Service Mobile

Explore what’s new in Field Service mobile, designed to help mobile workers provide outstanding service.

IN THIS SECTION:
Field Service Mobile App Device Deprecations
As of the Winter ‘25 release, the following devices are deprecated: Android 9 and any devices using iOS 16.

264
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

Data Capture
Discover what’s new for Data Capture and Discovery Framework Based Data Capture.
Automatically Unlock a Suite of Advanced Features with Lightning Data Service
Experience the power of Salesforce with the auto-enablement of Lightning Data Service for all new orgs and sandbox environments.
Features include Data Capture and Document Builder, which leverage the capabilities of Lightning Web Components. By integrating
these tools, your organization can streamline data collection, enhance document management, and ultimately drive greater business
efficiency and productivity.
Address Asset Issues Proactively with Asset Service Predictions (Generally Available)
Boost uptime and lower costs with asset service predictions. These predictions use the asset's service history while predicting about
a service appointment to help mobile workers plan for maintenance and repairs before a problem occurs.
Manage Service Records Automatically On the Go
Manage service records offline when mobile workers arrive or leave an area. Geolocation-based actions with mobile screen flows
run in the background as workers engage with the app. Previously, mobile workers had to go back online for the action’s data to be
synced and for the record-triggered flow to launch.
Get Notified When Mobile Workers Arrive at the Office or Pass by a Work Facility
To monitor mobile worker safety and automate check-ins, use geolocation-based actions with new support for service territory and
service territory members. You can trigger actions when mobile workers come in, out, or through the area. These enhancements
lead to streamlined operations, better resource management, and ultimately, higher customer satisfaction by making sure that
services are delivered more efficiently and safely. Previously, only service appointments were supported, not the service territory and
service territory members.
Update Field Service Records Quickly and Easily
Update record pages in the Field Service mobile app with improved performance. Update records faster and get a more intuitive
user experience.
Minimize Work Disruptions with Seamless Updates
Keep users current with essential Lightning web component (LWC) updates while avoiding disruptions to their workflow. Users
receive a notification when an important update is available. They can stay productive and update at their convenience, without
logging out or worrying about unstable connections. Previously, users had to log out or clear their cache to update LWC.
Update Service Appointment's En Route Status On the Go
Customize the service appointment's en route status value used by the Field Service mobile widget. When the mobile worker taps
the option that indicates they're on the way, the service appointment status is updated. Previously, the mobile worker had to select
a status manually.

Field Service Mobile App Device Deprecations

As of the Winter ‘25 release, the following devices are deprecated: Android 9 and any devices using iOS 16.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Service mobile app in iOS and Android.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Field Service Mobile App Requirements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Data Capture
Discover what’s new for Data Capture and Discovery Framework Based Data Capture.

265
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

IN THIS SECTION:
Simplify Mobile Forms with Data Capture Flow (Generally Available)
Create dynamic, responsive forms in Flow Builder with the Data Capture flow type. Data Capture is the Salesforce Field Service
solution for forms for everything from pre-work tasks like safety protocol to environmental assessments. With Data Capture, build
forms that use conditional logic to simplify the mobile experience, respond to mobile users’ input, and reduce task completion time.
Previously, you had to integrate external apps to create forms that launch from the mobile app. With the Data Capture flow, forms
are seamlessly integrated with the Salesforce platform and are tailored to the task.
Empower Mobile Workers with Data Capture Forms (Generally Available)
Get the job done faster, online or offline, with smart, dynamic Data Capture forms. Launch Data Capture forms from the Forms tab
on Work Order Overview or directly from a service appointment or work order line item from the Forms related list. Navigate freely
throughout Data Capture forms without missing a beat. Data Capture flows are auto-saved, so you don’t have to worry about losing
your work. From asset maintenance to environmental assessment, the conditional logic of Data Capture tailors data collection to
the task at hand, freeing mobile workers to focus on what matters and complete work faster.
Build Dynamic Forms with Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow (Generally Available)
Create dynamic, responsive forms in Flow Builder with the Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow type. Use Discovery Framework’s
assessment questions to build mobile-friendly forms that work even in poor connectivity areas. Add conditional logic and parent-child
questions to ensure that your mobile workers see only the necessary questions. Maintain a clear audit trail by reusing and versioning
questions across multiple forms.
Improve Mobile Worker Productivity with Discovery Framework Data Capture Forms (Generally Available)
Your Field Service mobile workers can collect information quickly, online or offline, with Discovery Framework Based Data Capture
forms. Launch the forms directly from a service appointment or work order line item from the Forms related list. From onboarding
new customers to capturing information during site visits, responses to the form questions are automatically saved in both online
and offline connectivity scenarios. Help your workers focus on important work and complete their tasks faster without worrying
about losing their work.
Gather All the Answers with the Assessment Variable for Discovery Framework Data Capture
Collect responses to all questions within a Discovery Framework Data Capture flow more easily. Create the new assessment variable
available in a Discovery Framework Data Capture flow. When the flow generates responses to assessment questions, this record
variable stores values to create the parent assessment for those responses. Previously, you created a variable and added logic in the
flow to store values for the parent assessment.

Simplify Mobile Forms with Data Capture Flow (Generally Available)

Create dynamic, responsive forms in Flow Builder with the Data Capture flow type. Data Capture is the Salesforce Field Service solution
for forms for everything from pre-work tasks like safety protocol to environmental assessments. With Data Capture, build forms that use
conditional logic to simplify the mobile experience, respond to mobile users’ input, and reduce task completion time. Previously, you
had to integrate external apps to create forms that launch from the mobile app. With the Data Capture flow, forms are seamlessly
integrated with the Salesforce platform and are tailored to the task.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Select the new Data Capture flow type in Flow Builder.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Flow Builder Tour (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

266
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

Empower Mobile Workers with Data Capture Forms (Generally Available)

Get the job done faster, online or offline, with smart, dynamic Data Capture forms. Launch Data Capture forms from the Forms tab on
Work Order Overview or directly from a service appointment or work order line item from the Forms related list. Navigate freely throughout
Data Capture forms without missing a beat. Data Capture flows are auto-saved, so you don’t have to worry about losing your work. From
asset maintenance to environmental assessment, the conditional logic of Data Capture tailors data collection to the task at hand, freeing
mobile workers to focus on what matters and complete work faster.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Build Dynamic Forms with Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow (Generally Available)
Create dynamic, responsive forms in Flow Builder with the Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow type. Use Discovery Framework’s
assessment questions to build mobile-friendly forms that work even in poor connectivity areas. Add conditional logic and parent-child
questions to ensure that your mobile workers see only the necessary questions. Maintain a clear audit trail by reusing and versioning
questions across multiple forms.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Field Service, Discovery
Framework, Discovery Framework Import or Export, and Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow are enabled.
How: In Flow Builder, select the Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow process type.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Build a Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow (Generally Available) (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Improve Mobile Worker Productivity with Discovery Framework Data Capture Forms (Generally
Available)
Your Field Service mobile workers can collect information quickly, online or offline, with Discovery Framework Based Data Capture forms.
Launch the forms directly from a service appointment or work order line item from the Forms related list. From onboarding new customers
to capturing information during site visits, responses to the form questions are automatically saved in both online and offline connectivity
scenarios. Help your workers focus on important work and complete their tasks faster without worrying about losing their work.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Field Service, Discovery
Framework, Discovery Framework Import or Export, and Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow are enabled.
How: Create assessment questions in Discovery Framework, then create a flow by using the Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow
process type in Flow Builder, and then add the necessary assessment questions to the flow.

267
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

Next, create a service appointment record for the field service agent. On the Related tab of the service appointment record, create a
form.
For the form’s Action Definition, select the Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow that you created.

As a Field Service mobile worker, in the Field Service mobile app, launch the Discovery Framework Data Capture form from the Related
tab on a service appointment record.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: About Discovery Framework Based Data Capture with Field Service Mobile App (Generally Available) (can be outdated
or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Discovery Framework and Assessments
Salesforce Help: Create Questions

Gather All the Answers with the Assessment Variable for Discovery Framework Data Capture
Collect responses to all questions within a Discovery Framework Data Capture flow more easily. Create the new assessment variable
available in a Discovery Framework Data Capture flow. When the flow generates responses to assessment questions, this record variable
stores values to create the parent assessment for those responses. Previously, you created a variable and added logic in the flow to store
values for the parent assessment.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
How: In a Discovery Framework flow, create a collection variable that uses the assessment API name, the Record data type, and the
Assessment object.

SEE ALSO:
Build Dynamic Forms with Discovery Framework Data Capture Flow (Generally Available)
Salesforce Help: Manage Every Aspect of Questionnaire-Driven Information Collection (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

268
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

Automatically Unlock a Suite of Advanced Features with Lightning Data Service

Experience the power of Salesforce with the auto-enablement of Lightning Data Service for all new orgs and sandbox environments.
Features include Data Capture and Document Builder, which leverage the capabilities of Lightning Web Components. By integrating
these tools, your organization can streamline data collection, enhance document management, and ultimately drive greater business
efficiency and productivity.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions .
When: As of November 4, 2024.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Move to Lightning Data Service for Field Service ((can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Address Asset Issues Proactively with Asset Service Predictions (Generally Available)
Boost uptime and lower costs with asset service predictions. These predictions use the asset's service history while predicting about a
service appointment to help mobile workers plan for maintenance and repairs before a problem occurs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Connected Assets with Field Service installed. The feature is available in the
Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS. To purchase the Connected Assets add-on license, contact your Salesforce account
executive.

SEE ALSO:
Foresee Future Fixes with Asset Service Prediction with the Connected Assets Add-On (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Manage Service Records Automatically On the Go

Manage service records offline when mobile workers arrive or leave an area. Geolocation-based actions with mobile screen flows run in
the background as workers engage with the app. Previously, mobile workers had to go back online for the action’s data to be synced
and for the record-triggered flow to launch.
Where: This change applies to the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS.
How: Create a quick action that triggers a mobile screen flow without a screen element. Create a geolocation-based action. For Action
Type, select Platform Alert. For Action Data, enter the quick action in json format. For example,{"quickAction":
"Global.LogACall"}.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Geolocation-Based Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get Notified When Mobile Workers Arrive at the Office or Pass by a Work Facility
To monitor mobile worker safety and automate check-ins, use geolocation-based actions with new support for service territory and
service territory members. You can trigger actions when mobile workers come in, out, or through the area. These enhancements lead
to streamlined operations, better resource management, and ultimately, higher customer satisfaction by making sure that services are
delivered more efficiently and safely. Previously, only service appointments were supported, not the service territory and service territory
members.
Where: This change applies to the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS.

269
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

How: For example, first, they arrive at headquarters, and the app clocks them in. Next, they're near a warehouse, so they’re notified about
missing spare parts. Then, the shift manager is notified when they arrive at the gathering area. Lastly, a message notifies the manager
after the worker returns from servicing a high-risk area.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Geolocation-Based Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Update Field Service Records Quickly and Easily

Update record pages in the Field Service mobile app with improved performance. Update records faster and get a more intuitive user
experience.
Where: This change applies to the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Custom Actions in the Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Minimize Work Disruptions with Seamless Updates

Keep users current with essential Lightning web component (LWC) updates while avoiding disruptions to their workflow. Users receive
a notification when an important update is available. They can stay productive and update at their convenience, without logging out
or worrying about unstable connections. Previously, users had to log out or clear their cache to update LWC.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Servcie Mobile app for Android and iOS.
How: The mobile worker is notified that an update is available. They can click Update Now or Remind Me Later.

Update Service Appointment's En Route Status On the Go

Customize the service appointment's en route status value used by the Field Service mobile widget. When the mobile worker taps the
option that indicates they're on the way, the service appointment status is updated. Previously, the mobile worker had to select a status
manually.
Where: This change applies to the Field Service mobile app for iOS.

270
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Spotlight on Field Service Content

How: Go to Field Service Settings in Setup, and in the Mobile Widget section, select the status that indicates that the mobile worker is
en route.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add the Field Service Mobile Widget (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Field Service Mobile Widget (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Spotlight on Field Service Content

Discover high-impact content to help you get your Field Service work done.

IN THIS SECTION:
Improve Your Scheduling and Optimization Proficiency with Revamped Salesforce Help Content
Explore updated documentation that boosts your self-sufficiency, enhances user engagement, and facilitates the adoption of our
automated features, maximizing your ROI. We enriched the Salesforce Help content on scheduling and optimization to simplify the
implementation process. For example, you get insights into feature configurations, capabilities, and limitations. You also get more
details about tools for scheduling automation and optimization, such as how to manage your service objectives and how to optimize
appointments by using priorities. Learn about the differences between the optimization engines and the advantages of transitioning
to Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization.

Improve Your Scheduling and Optimization Proficiency with Revamped Salesforce

Help Content
Explore updated documentation that boosts your self-sufficiency, enhances user engagement, and facilitates the adoption of our
automated features, maximizing your ROI. We enriched the Salesforce Help content on scheduling and optimization to simplify the
implementation process. For example, you get insights into feature configurations, capabilities, and limitations. You also get more details
about tools for scheduling automation and optimization, such as how to manage your service objectives and how to optimize appointments
by using priorities. Learn about the differences between the optimization engines and the advantages of transitioning to Enhanced
Scheduling and Optimization.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Field Service managed package installed.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create and Manage Field Service Objectives (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create and Manage Field Service Scheduling Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Fine-Tune the Scheduling Policy (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Optimize Field Service Appointments by Using Priorities (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Adopt and Implement Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

271
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Hyperforce

Hyperforce
Hyperforce is now available in more regions, including Israel and Osaka, Japan, expanding global data residency options. Hyperforce
Assistant’s instructions for automated pre-upgrade checks are clearer. Access to Hyperforce outbound IP addresses has been made more
convenient. Hyperforce Premium products offer new capabilities. Out of Region Disaster Recovery provides additional data protection
and business continuity. The Scale Test feature allows for high-traffic scenario simulations in sandbox environments. The Swiss Operating
Zone offers a new avenue to address Swiss data residency requirements.

IN THIS SECTION:
Access Salesforce in More Regions with Hyperforce
Hyperforce is now available in 17 countries, giving you more choice and control over data residency. We opened new Hyperforce
regions in Israel, as of June 2024, and in Osaka, Japan, as of October 2024.
Improved Instructions in Hyperforce Assistant
We’ve clarified the instructions in Hyperforce Assistant that explain how to use Optimizer to find hard-coded references. We’ve also
clarified instructions regarding MyDomain, and alternatives to IP allowlisting.
Access Hyperforce Outbound IP Lists
Keep your allowlists up to date with easier access to Hyperforce egress IPs.
Salesforce Out Of Region Disaster Recovery
Get extra peace of mind with a geographically remote disaster recovery (DR) solution for your orgs on Hyperforce.
Scale Test
Book scale test days on your sandbox instance calendar to get enhanced, production-like scale on your existing test environment.
The scale test process is ideal for simulating high-traffic scenarios to ensure that your implementations can scale optimally at peak
usage.
Swiss Operating Zone
Tackle Swiss data privacy requirements with a tailored set of policy, process, and architectural standards that keep customer data in
Switzerland, and in-region support in the EU.

Access Salesforce in More Regions with Hyperforce

Hyperforce is now available in 17 countries, giving you more choice and control over data residency. We opened new Hyperforce regions
in Israel, as of June 2024, and in Osaka, Japan, as of October 2024.
Where: Delivery via Hyperforce of the Salesforce Customer 360 application suite, including Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, B2B Commerce,
Platform, and Industries Cloud is automatically available in Australia, Brazil, Canada, France, Germany, India, Indonesia, Israel, Italy, Japan,
Singapore, South Korea, Sweden, Switzerland, the United States, the United Arab Emirates, and the United Kingdom. For the most
up-to-date list of products and regions, see Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation and the Hyperforce Security, Privacy and
Architecture documents.
These clouds and products recently became available on Hyperforce.

Cloud Product or Feature Description Available In

Commerce B2C Commerce Commerce Cloud powers United States
commerce everywhere with AI
+ Data + CRM, with the most
innovative, flexible storefronts

272
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Improved Instructions in Hyperforce Assistant

Cloud Product or Feature Description Available In

that give you the choice of the
right tool for every job.
Learn more in B2C Commerce
Hyperforce FAQ

Marketing Data Cloud Salesforce Data Cloud can help Now available in Brazil, Canada,
keep you centered with a single Japan, and the United Kingdom
source of truth, providing more
intelligent, actionable, and Also available in Germany, India,
trusted data. and the United States

Marketing Marketing Cloud Engagement Marketing Cloud Engagement Now available in Canada.
helps build customer
relationships efficiently with Also available in Australia, India,
personalized marketing and Japan
messages and automated
journeys.

MuleSoft MuleSoft Anypoint Platform Anypoint Platform is a Canada and Japan

comprehensive integration
platform designed to connect
applications, data, and devices
across on-premises and cloud
environments. It enables you to
create seamless, agile, and
scalable integrations, facilitating
faster innovation and improved
customer experiences.

Tableau Tableau Cloud Tableau Cloud is a fully-hosted, Canada, Germany, United

cloud-based, enterprise-grade Kingdom, United States
analytics solution designed to
empower organizations with
intelligent tools and insights
where people already work.
Learn more in Introducing
Tableau on Hyperforce - General
Information and FAQ.

Improved Instructions in Hyperforce Assistant

We’ve clarified the instructions in Hyperforce Assistant that explain how to use Optimizer to find hard-coded references. We’ve also
clarified instructions regarding MyDomain, and alternatives to IP allowlisting.
Where: Hyperforce Assistant is available in Lightning Experience, in all editions.
Who: To run Hyperforce Assistant, you need the Customize Application, Manage Users, and Modify All Data user permissions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter Hyperforce Assistant, and then select Hyperforce Assistant.

273
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Access Hyperforce Outbound IP Lists

Access Hyperforce Outbound IP Lists

Keep your allowlists up to date with easier access to Hyperforce egress IPs.
For customers who use allowlists, Salesforce provides Hyperforce IPs for connections from Salesforce to the customer network, for
products built on the Salesforce platform, including Sales, Service, Industries, and Tableau clouds. The IPs are now available in JSON
format at the URL: https://ip-ranges.salesforce.com/ip-ranges.json. Authentication isn’t required. New IPs are added 30 days before being
used in production. To avoid missing new additions, check for updates every two weeks. Learn more in Hyperforce IPs to Allow - Sales,
Service, Industries, and Tableau Clouds.
These IPs aren’t for Marketing Cloud, Commerce Cloud, Slack, or MuleSoft products. Government Cloud Plus customers, see the knowledge
article IP Addresses to Allow for Government Cloud Plus.

Salesforce Out Of Region Disaster Recovery

Get extra peace of mind with a geographically remote disaster recovery (DR) solution for your orgs on Hyperforce.
Salesforce Out of Region Disaster Recovery (OORDR) is a Hyperforce premium product offering that delivers business continuity during
extraordinary regional catastrophes. Salesforce Out of Region Disaster Recovery provides data backup in a global region that's geographically
remote from the primary Hyperforce region. The secondary region can be used to run the business during a disaster and as a source of
data recovery to the primary region.
Where: Salesforce Out of Region Disaster Recovery is only available to orgs hosted on Hyperforce. To get Salesforce OORDR, contact
your account representative.
Who: Salesforce Out of Region Disaster Recovery (OORDR) is available for customers with Hyperforce commercial orgs in the United
States and Japan. OORDR isn’t available for GovCloud orgs.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Out of Region Disaster Recovery - General Information and FAQ

Scale Test
Book scale test days on your sandbox instance calendar to get enhanced, production-like scale on your existing test environment. The
scale test process is ideal for simulating high-traffic scenarios to ensure that your implementations can scale optimally at peak usage.
Where: Scale Test applies to Lightning Experience in all editions. To get access, contact your customer success representative or account
executive.
Who: Scale Test is available to customers with a Full sandbox in all Hyperforce regions, except Singapore.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scale, and then click Scale Test.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Scale Test
Your App Shouldn’t Panic in Rush Hour Traffic – Here’s How to Prepare

Swiss Operating Zone

Tackle Swiss data privacy requirements with a tailored set of policy, process, and architectural standards that keep customer data in
Switzerland, and in-region support in the EU.

274
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries

Swiss Operating Zone (OZ) is a seamless integration of Salesforce services, advanced privacy controls, and dedicated EU-based support
that provides an additional layer of data protection. You can leverage Swiss OZ to reduce your regulatory risk associated with compliance
with Switzerland’s data-residency requirements.
Where: Contact your customer success representative or account executive to ask about Swiss OZ.
When: Swiss OZ is available in the first half of 2025.

Industries
Salesforce introduces a range of enhancements to streamline operations and improve productivity across industries. Einstein Generative
AI simplifies daily tasks across various sectors, including clean energy program suggestions in Energy and Utilities Cloud and benefit
applicant household overviews in Public Sector Solutions. Asset Management helps streamline inventory processes and orchestrate
real-time actions on assets. Automotive Cloud simplifies vehicle appraisals and loan negotiations, while Consumer Goods Cloud enhances
field operations with advanced geofencing and VS Code-based app customization. Financial Services Cloud brings significant enhancements
to business relationship plans, portfolio management, and wealth management, and Global Promotions Management introduces coupon
codes and milestone-based promotions. Health Cloud improves financial management, scheduling, provider searches, and request
processing, and Life Sciences Cloud streamlines pharmacy benefits verification and enrollments in financial assistance programs.
Manufacturing Cloud enhances run-rate business with revenue management features, while Net Zero Cloud aligns disclosures and
compliance workflows with CSRD guidelines. Salesforce for Education drives student engagement with Agentforce. We also bring exciting
changes in Insurance, Media Cloud, Nonprofit Cloud, Communications Cloud, and other industry-specific features.

IN THIS SECTION:
Asset Management
Maximize asset uptime, unlock hidden value from installed assets, and boost your service team's productivity. Manage the entire
lifecycle of asset service operations and streamline inventory processes by using the Asset Service Lifecycle Management features.
Orchestrate real-time actions on assets and predict potential asset issues before they become critical by using the Connected Assets
features.
Automotive Cloud
Manage trade-in appraisals and valuations of vehicles with Appraisal Management guided flows. Get prebuilt actionable event
orchestration experiences for asset registration and appointment scheduling, and help users quickly create orchestrations from
templates. Help dealers and customers effectively negotiate the terms and conditions of vehicle loan and lease proposals with
application rehashing capabilities. Streamline operational tasks with prebuilt service processes and get additional data streams in
the Automotive data kit.
Communications Cloud
Communications Cloud extends Salesforce Customer 360 to provide a solution specifically for the communications industry. It helps
businesses digitally transform to deliver new, industry-standard customer experiences and increase operational efficiencies. Explore
industry-specific apps including Enterprise Sales Management, Communications Cloud Agent Console, Multiplay Subscription
Management, and business solutions including Asset Service Lifecycle Management, Einstein Quick Quote, Configure, Price, Quote
(Industries CPQ), and Enterprise Product Catalog (EPC).
Consumer Goods Cloud
Tour drivers can deliver preordered products, generate invoices, and handle returns with delivery documents. Optimize field operations
and GPS data compliance with enhanced geofencing and time tracking for visits. Implement custom sharing of visits and their related
records because the Share visits feature is retired. Boost brand visibility by adding your company logo to the Consumer Goods offline
mobile app. Customize the offline mobile app by using Visual Studio Code based Modeler, because the Windows Server based
Modeler is retiring. Key account managers can now copy manual inputs for tactics, and new integration APIs enable retrieval and
auditing of manual inputs for account plans. Simplify upgrades with new Trade Promotion Management (TPM) permission sets in
the Consumer Goods managed package.

275
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries

Energy and Utilities Cloud

The Energy and Utilities Cloud now features enhanced Einstein Generative AI capabilities in the Agent Console, boosting service rep
efficiency. When creating cases, reps have easy access to related information such as billing account and service point.
Financial Services Cloud
Closely monitor business relationship planning with Objective Tracking Metrics. Use a guided flow to efficiently create account plan
objectives, and effectively implement them with action plans. Enhance the self-service loan application experience by giving guest
users access to your product catalog, and streamline the loan estimation process with the Loan Calculator tool. Help financial advisors
and wealth managers get a complete financial picture of a consumer’s financial health with data-driven alerts and actionable insights.
Align your client’s asset portfolio with their investment strategy with the new asset allocation visualization component for accounts.
Get real-time household financial data for managed package objects with the enhanced Household API setup.
Health Cloud
Protect communities proactively by tracking and managing diseases with the help of Disease Surveillance. Enhance financial and
operational management with Home Health’s comprehensive quoting, funding, and budgeting. Easily schedule recurring appointments
and incorporate business rules, such as patient prerequisites, into the Intelligent Appointment Management scheduling workflow.
Use Provider Search’s conversational AI agent to help patients find the most suitable provider. Process provider requests faster with
Utilization Management’s FHIR-aligned Coverage Requirement Discovery (CRD), Documentation Templates and Rules (DTR), and
Prior Authorization Support (PAS).
Insurance
Give users greater control over their data and enable seamless integrations with an enhanced Insurance data model. Streamline and
manage policy transactions, product configuration, pricing, and quoting workflows with ease. The enhancements to Insurance
(Managed Package) support multi-root policies by using new services.
Life Sciences Cloud
Simplify the financial assistance program enrollment process by allowing appeals for rejected applications, saving time and effort.
Enhance participant management with improved search settings, accessibility features, configuration experience, and recruitment
workflow. Help patient services representatives to verify patients' pharmacy benefits through electronic verification requests. Speed
up the selection and activation of sites and investigators by using advanced search, assessment creation, and scoring tools.
Loyalty Management
Increase member engagement by offering members rewards for reaching activity-driven milestones. Accurately calculate program
and promotion liability by tracing the usage of points even when the member points balance is negative. Gather rich insights about
customers and members with the enhanced data kit. Empower customers and sales reps to select the promotion they want to apply
for carts by using coupons. Design promotions quickly with enhanced product search and exclusion capabilities. Run targeted
promotions for account-based campaigns and automatically check whether promotions are eligible for stores and store groups.
Manufacturing Cloud
Modernize your commercial operations by deeply unifying your pricing, product catalog, product configuration, sales, and run-rate
business operations by using Revenue Cloud features in Manufacturing Cloud. Drive more run-rate business by using revenue
management features for Sales Agreements. Introduce flexibility in your actuals calculation processes and get greater visibility into
cost and quantity metrics by using enhanced Sales Agreement Foundations features. Streamline your inventory operations with
Inventory Count and Inventory Replenishment.
Media Cloud
Use the Media Cloud application suite to manage subscribers and subscriptions, create and manage ad campaigns, and perform
other key tasks, through community self-service interfaces or an agent console.

276
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries

Net Zero Cloud

Improve the efficiency, auditability, and transparency of disclosure responses by using the new features and enhancements to Net
Zero Cloud and Disclosure and Compliance Hub. Create disclosure reports directly in Google Docs by using the Salesforce Disclosure
and Compliance Hub add-in. Manage and report on environmental, social, and governance (ESG)-related topics for materiality
assessments in accordance with the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) framework. Create, manage, and score
Impacts and Risks and Opportunities (IROs) according to the CSRD framework. Streamline your ESG reporting with the improved
CSRD report template, now available directly in Net Zero Cloud. Meet the regulatory compliance requirements for CSRD by working
with trusted eXtensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL) tagging partners listed on Net Zero Marketplace. Allocate the final
scorecard emissions based on the ratio of the procurement item's spent amount and the total spent amount.
Public Sector Solutions
Use Einstein to help caseworkers quickly get an overview of a benefit applicant’s household. Build flexible job applications in which
applicants can skip optional sections and complete required sections in their preferred sequence. Give supervisors a guided workflow
to easily create tailored plans for employees on the Employee Experience portal. More easily migrate Dynamic Assessments across
Salesforce orgs by using Metadata API.
Referral Marketing
Maximize the reach and impact of your referral promotions with WhatsApp messages. Gather insights about advocates and their
referred friends with a prebuilt data kit.
Salesforce for Education
Use the power of Agentforce to answer prospective students' questions and to enhance the work of relationship officers and
advancement researchers. Manage student information with the enhanced data model that supports Student Information System
(SIS) functionality, including course scheduling and a unified student profile. Strengthen your advancement efforts with new objects
for prospect research and new fields on Fundraising objects for advancement-specific data processing. Understand student needs
better with Einstein academic insights, enhancements to Pulse Checks, and an improved appointment-scheduling workflow.
Streamline the application review process by using rubrics and scoring for admissions decisions and Stage Management for application
reviews.
Salesforce for Nonprofits
Customize Nonprofit Cloud with the improved Fundraising, Grantmaking, and Program and Case Management features. Leverage
the enhancements to gift entry, outreach source code generation, rollups, scoring frameworks, and the Business Process API in
Fundraising. Streamline grantmaking by batch assigning reviews and using the new stage management feature. Create multiple
indicator results and custom care plan goals, as well as clone care plan templates in Program and Case Management.
Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management
Ensure compatibility with the new document generation infrastructure and add greater flexibility to the workflows. Transition from
retired Visualforce-based Omniscripts to Lightning Web Component-based Omniscripts. Prepare for the retirement of Document
Generation 1.0 by upgrading to Document Generation 2.0, which introduces features like custom font configuration, a document
previewer, and hybrid client-side processing.
Industries Common Features
Some Salesforce Industries products share features, and we’ve enhanced efficiency and scalability across industries. Business Rules
Engine offers greater flexibility with transient attributes and context-based expression sets, while Collections helps minimize
delinquencies and optimize debt collection. Cross-Object Field History tracks related record changes in a single view, and Data
Processing Engine leverages Einstein Generative AI for field mapping suggestions. Group Membership and Households features
simplify member management, while Industries CPQ improves catalog management and promotional strategies. MuleSoft integration
apps now run in private spaces, and Omnistudio Document Generation 2.0 elevates document generation processes. Program and
Case Management introduces care plan templates and client-specific goal-setting. Record Rollup Definitions allow aggregation and
deletion of unused definitions, while Stage Management tracks stage transitions and progress toward key milestones. We've also
made enhancements to action launcher, context services, decision table, record rollup definitions, and stage management features.

277
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

Asset Management
Maximize asset uptime, unlock hidden value from installed assets, and boost your service team's productivity. Manage the entire lifecycle
of asset service operations and streamline inventory processes by using the Asset Service Lifecycle Management features. Orchestrate
real-time actions on assets and predict potential asset issues before they become critical by using the Connected Assets features.

IN THIS SECTION:
Asset Service Lifecycle Management
Get greater control over and predictability for your inventory operations and maximize the revenue from aftermarket asset services
by using the Asset Service Lifecycle Management features. With Work Order Estimation, estimate installation work for products in
quotes, orders, and field service work. Book service appointments independently as a standalone feature to enhance your operational
efficiency. With Inventory Count, streamline your inventory counting processes and identify inventory discrepancies. With Inventory
Replenishment, prevent stockouts by automating replenishment when inventories reach predefined thresholds. Boost your supervisor’s
efficiency with a supervisor's experience of Timesheet Management and Labor Cost Optimization.
Connected Assets
Accelerate your Connected Assets implementation and build touchless processes to take actions based on actionable asset events.
Reduce implementation effort by using or extending a predefined context definition for asset event details. Build actionable event
orchestrations without significant rework by easily creating, distributing, and using orchestration templates. Automatically register
assets and schedule asset service appointments based on telematics events by using predefined actionable event orchestration
templates, context definitions, flows, and event types.

Asset Service Lifecycle Management

Get greater control over and predictability for your inventory operations and maximize the revenue from aftermarket asset services by
using the Asset Service Lifecycle Management features. With Work Order Estimation, estimate installation work for products in quotes,
orders, and field service work. Book service appointments independently as a standalone feature to enhance your operational efficiency.
With Inventory Count, streamline your inventory counting processes and identify inventory discrepancies. With Inventory Replenishment,
prevent stockouts by automating replenishment when inventories reach predefined thresholds. Boost your supervisor’s efficiency with
a supervisor's experience of Timesheet Management and Labor Cost Optimization.

IN THIS SECTION:
Work Order Estimation
Estimate installation work for products and field service from various sources.
Service Appointment Booking
Book service appointments independently.
Inventory Count
Manage inventory count processes to get an accurate picture of your inventory and identify the discrepancies between physical and
system stocks. Inventory managers can schedule cycle and ad hoc counts for multiple products by creating comprehensive count
plans. Inventory count performers can count serialized and non-serialized products and take notes at inventory locations by using
the Salesforce Field Service mobile app.
Inventory Replenishment
Avoid stockouts and improve inventory turnover with Inventory Replenishment. Inventory managers and service managers can
design detailed replenishment policies that define how product items are replenished when their quantities fall below specified
thresholds. Run an automated process that identifies product items that require replenishment, matches product items with their
replenishment policies, and creates product requests. Easily identify the applicable replenishment policy out of all eligible policies
for product items.

278
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization Enhancements

Boost your supervisor’s efficiency with the enhanced desktop experience for Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization. Enable
supervisors, time clerks, and crew leads to bulk edit and approve timesheets. Gain insights into operations and costs with a unified
view using data from Enterprise Resource Planning systems, fleet management systems, labor union rules, and projects. View meal
equivalents earned with approved timesheets, implement custom validation rules for your labor unions, and improve timesheet
compliance using Business Rules Engine. Boost mobile worker efficiency with enhancements in the Salesforce Field Service Mobile
app.

Work Order Estimation

Estimate installation work for products and field service from various sources.

IN THIS SECTION:
Estimate Work Orders for Installations
Your service reps can now estimate the installation work for products in quotes and orders, in addition to the existing capability of
estimating field service work for assets. Launch work order estimations from various sources, including Accounts, Assets, Quotes,
Orders, and Work Type Groups, and even with no context. Streamline your entire workflow and ensure flexibility, consistency, and
improved communication by leveraging Omnistudio Document Generation to generate documents and send email proposals
seamlessly. This feature is now modular for easier customization, available out-of-the-box (OOTB) on Flows, and it can be integrated
into an Omniscript.

Estimate Work Orders for Installations

Your service reps can now estimate the installation work for products in quotes and orders, in addition to the existing capability of
estimating field service work for assets. Launch work order estimations from various sources, including Accounts, Assets, Quotes, Orders,
and Work Type Groups, and even with no context. Streamline your entire workflow and ensure flexibility, consistency, and improved
communication by leveraging Omnistudio Document Generation to generate documents and send email proposals seamlessly. This
feature is now modular for easier customization, available out-of-the-box (OOTB) on Flows, and it can be integrated into an Omniscript.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, and Media Cloud where Asset Service Lifecycle Management is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Work Order Estimation permission set.

Service Appointment Booking

Book service appointments independently.

IN THIS SECTION:
Book a Service Appointment Independently
Experience the convenience of booking service appointments as a standalone feature in Core, now independent of Work Order
Estimation. Easily invoke or embed this feature within other functionalities, with separate user permissions.

Book a Service Appointment Independently

Experience the convenience of booking service appointments as a standalone feature in Core, now independent of Work Order Estimation.
Easily invoke or embed this feature within other functionalities, with separate user permissions.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, and Media Cloud where Asset Service Lifecycle Management is enabled.

279
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

Who: This feature is available to users with the Book Service Appointment Experience User permission set.

Inventory Count
Manage inventory count processes to get an accurate picture of your inventory and identify the discrepancies between physical and
system stocks. Inventory managers can schedule cycle and ad hoc counts for multiple products by creating comprehensive count plans.
Inventory count performers can count serialized and non-serialized products and take notes at inventory locations by using the Salesforce
Field Service mobile app.

IN THIS SECTION:
Efficiently Schedule Inventory Counts for Products and Parts
Create cycle and ad hoc inventory count plans for different inventory locations. Schedule counts for a cycle count plan by specifying
the plan duration, the count frequency, and the count window. Easily add product items to count plans and assign inventory count
performers to count the product items. Give assignees a single view of the product items to be counted on specific days at designated
locations by using inventory count assessments.
Perform Inventory Counts on the Go
Capture the count details at inventory locations without hassle by using the Salesforce Field Service mobile app. Save time and
reduce data entry errors in counting serialized products by scanning their barcodes. Note relevant observations and reasons for
discrepancies. Save the count details intermittently, and continue your progress anytime during the count window. After you perform
counts, review the count details to detect potential errors and make sure that your count data is accurate.

Efficiently Schedule Inventory Counts for Products and Parts

Create cycle and ad hoc inventory count plans for different inventory locations. Schedule counts for a cycle count plan by specifying the
plan duration, the count frequency, and the count window. Easily add product items to count plans and assign inventory count performers
to count the product items. Give assignees a single view of the product items to be counted on specific days at designated locations by
using inventory count assessments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, and Media Cloud, and in Field Service with Asset Service Lifecycle Management.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Inventory Count Manager permission set.
How: Create an inventory count plan record, and specify the necessary details. Then, from a product items list, select the product items
that you want to add to the plan, and click Add to Inventory Count Plan. Specify the plan, an assignee, and other details.

Perform Inventory Counts on the Go

Capture the count details at inventory locations without hassle by using the Salesforce Field Service mobile app. Save time and reduce
data entry errors in counting serialized products by scanning their barcodes. Note relevant observations and reasons for discrepancies.
Save the count details intermittently, and continue your progress anytime during the count window. After you perform counts, review
the count details to detect potential errors and make sure that your count data is accurate.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, and Media Cloud, and in Field Service with Asset Service Lifecycle Management.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Inventory Count User permission set.
How: Add the Inventory Count Assessment list view to a Salesforce Field Service app configuration by using the Field Service Mobile
App Builder.
On the Salesforce Field Service mobile app, inventory count performers open an inventory count assessment. Then, open a related
inventory count product item, and tap Perform Count. Specify the count details.

280
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

Inventory Replenishment
Avoid stockouts and improve inventory turnover with Inventory Replenishment. Inventory managers and service managers can design
detailed replenishment policies that define how product items are replenished when their quantities fall below specified thresholds.
Run an automated process that identifies product items that require replenishment, matches product items with their replenishment
policies, and creates product requests. Easily identify the applicable replenishment policy out of all eligible policies for product items.

IN THIS SECTION:
Design Inventory Replenishment Policies with Nuanced Structures
Establish inventory replenishment policies that cover product items for specific products or product categories at all locations or
specific locations. Inventory managers and service managers can design time-bound policies that define how product items are
replenished when they reach a minimum stock level. Define the minimum stock level at which replenishment is triggered and the
maximum level until which the stock is replenished. Determine how the replenishment source locations are derived.
Minimize Stockouts with an Automated Replenishment Process
Avoid manual inventory checks and make inventory processes more predictable with automated replenishment of product items
based on applicable replenishment policies. Periodically run an automated process that identifies the product items that require
replenishment when they reach predefined stock thresholds. The process automatically determines the applicable policies for the
product items and creates product requests based on the policy specifications.
Easily Track Replenishment Policies for Product Items
Quickly identify the applicable replenishment policy out of all eligible policies for a product item in the Applicable Inventory
Replenishment Policy related list on the product item record page. Inventory managers and service managers create replenishment
policies for a combination of products, product categories, and locations. Save time in searching for policies and minimize errors in
policy creation by quickly identifying the most relevant, specific policies that apply to product items.

Design Inventory Replenishment Policies with Nuanced Structures

Establish inventory replenishment policies that cover product items for specific products or product categories at all locations or specific
locations. Inventory managers and service managers can design time-bound policies that define how product items are replenished
when they reach a minimum stock level. Define the minimum stock level at which replenishment is triggered and the maximum level
until which the stock is replenished. Determine how the replenishment source locations are derived.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, and Media Cloud, and in Field Service with Asset Service Lifecycle Management.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Inventory Replenishment permission set.
Why: Companies have diverse approaches to defining inventory replenishment policies. Some create policies for the stock of each
product at each inventory location, while others create policies for combinations of products, product categories, locations, and parent
locations. With Inventory Replenishment, inventory managers and service managers gain the flexibility to define policies at both a
granular level, such as individual products at specific locations, and at a broader level, such as product categories across all locations.
How: Create an inventory replenishment policy record, and specify the necessary details.

Minimize Stockouts with an Automated Replenishment Process

Avoid manual inventory checks and make inventory processes more predictable with automated replenishment of product items based
on applicable replenishment policies. Periodically run an automated process that identifies the product items that require replenishment
when they reach predefined stock thresholds. The process automatically determines the applicable policies for the product items and
creates product requests based on the policy specifications.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, and Media Cloud, and in Field Service with Asset Service Lifecycle Management.

281
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

Who: This feature is available to users with the Inventory Replenishment permission set.
How: Create a schedule-triggered flow to periodically run the Replenish Inventory batch job definition or manually run the Replenish
Inventory flow.

Easily Track Replenishment Policies for Product Items

Quickly identify the applicable replenishment policy out of all eligible policies for a product item in the Applicable Inventory Replenishment
Policy related list on the product item record page. Inventory managers and service managers create replenishment policies for a
combination of products, product categories, and locations. Save time in searching for policies and minimize errors in policy creation
by quickly identifying the most relevant, specific policies that apply to product items.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, and Media Cloud, and in Field Service with Asset Service Lifecycle Management.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Inventory Replenishment permission set.

Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization Enhancements

Boost your supervisor’s efficiency with the enhanced desktop experience for Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization. Enable supervisors,
time clerks, and crew leads to bulk edit and approve timesheets. Gain insights into operations and costs with a unified view using data
from Enterprise Resource Planning systems, fleet management systems, labor union rules, and projects. View meal equivalents earned
with approved timesheets, implement custom validation rules for your labor unions, and improve timesheet compliance using Business
Rules Engine. Boost mobile worker efficiency with enhancements in the Salesforce Field Service Mobile app.

IN THIS SECTION:
Validate and Approve Timesheets Quickly
Enhance accuracy and efficiency of your timesheet approval process with the new Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization desktop
experience. Implement custom validation rules for your labor unions using Business Rules Engine. Enable supervisors, time clerks,
and crew leads to bulk edit and approve timesheets. They can also quickly view the timesheets that were submitted the previous
day. During the approval process, supervisors can quickly identify and correct any errors highlighted by the compliance flags and
ensure that timesheets are accurate and complete.
Boost Mobile Worker Efficiency with Salesforce Field Service Mobile App
Speed up timesheet and shift submissions and ensure accurate payments for mobile workers. Improve timesheet compliance by
using automatic daily time summarizations and automatic time rounding of shift hours to the operating hours set for a mobile
worker. Your mobile workers can create, edit, and view their timesheets and shift details. They can also add up to three shifts in a
workday and view the absence schedules for upcoming vacations.
View Meals Earned When a Timesheet Is Approved
Mobile workers can now view the meals and meal equivalents earned every time a timesheet is approved. Meal equivalents can be
in the form of meal vouchers, allowances, or other forms of compensation and are calculated based on Labor Union agreement
rules.
Updated Objects
The enhanced objects support the Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization app.

SEE ALSO:
Get an Energy and Utilities Cloud Trial Org

282
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

Validate and Approve Timesheets Quickly

Enhance accuracy and efficiency of your timesheet approval process with the new Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization desktop
experience. Implement custom validation rules for your labor unions using Business Rules Engine. Enable supervisors, time clerks, and
crew leads to bulk edit and approve timesheets. They can also quickly view the timesheets that were submitted the previous day. During
the approval process, supervisors can quickly identify and correct any errors highlighted by the compliance flags and ensure that
timesheets are accurate and complete.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience for all editions of Field Service Plus for Energy & Utilities and all editions of Asset
Service Lifecycle Management.
Who: To configure the Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization app, you must be a Salesforce admin with the Labor Cost Optimization
Admin permission set. To validate and approve timesheets, you need the Labor Cost Optimization Supervisor permission set.
How: From Setup, enable the Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization features. To access the app, go to App Launcher, and then find
and select Timesheet Management.

SEE ALSO:
About Timesheet Management and Labor Cost Optimization
Get an Energy and Utilities Cloud Trial Org

Boost Mobile Worker Efficiency with Salesforce Field Service Mobile App
Speed up timesheet and shift submissions and ensure accurate payments for mobile workers. Improve timesheet compliance by using
automatic daily time summarizations and automatic time rounding of shift hours to the operating hours set for a mobile worker. Your
mobile workers can create, edit, and view their timesheets and shift details. They can also add up to three shifts in a workday and view
the absence schedules for upcoming vacations.
Where: This feature is available in the mobile app for all editions of Field Service Plus for Energy & Utilities, and all editions of Asset
Service Lifecycle Management.
Who: To configure the Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization in the Salesforce Field Service Mobile app, you must be a Salesforce
admin with the Labor Cost Optimization Admin permission set. To create, edit, and view timesheets in the Salesforce Field Service Mobile
App, you need the Labor Cost Optimization Resource and FieldServiceMobileStandardPermSet permission sets.
How: Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization is available as an app for mobile workers in the Field Service Mobile app. You can also
access the data model objects via the Salesforce Org desktop experience.

SEE ALSO:
About Timesheet Management and Labor Cost Optimization
Get an Energy and Utilities Cloud Trial Org

View Meals Earned When a Timesheet Is Approved

Mobile workers can now view the meals and meal equivalents earned every time a timesheet is approved. Meal equivalents can be in
the form of meal vouchers, allowances, or other forms of compensation and are calculated based on Labor Union agreement rules.
Where: This feature is available in the mobile app for all editions of Field Service Plus for Energy & Utilities, and all editions of Asset
Service Lifecycle Management.
Who: Salesforce admins with the Labor Cost Optimization Admin permission set can configure the Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization
app. Field service technicians with the Labor Cost Optimization Resource permission set can view meals and meal equivalents in the
Field Service Mobile App.

283
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

How: Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization is available as an app for mobile workers in the Field Service Mobile App. You can also
access the data model objects via the Salesforce Org desktop experience.

SEE ALSO:
About Timesheet Management and Labor Cost Optimization
Get an Energy and Utilities Cloud Trial Org

Updated Objects
The enhanced objects support the Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization app.
Store your labor cost optimization data
Use up to 15 new fields in each of these existing objects: Time Sheet Wage Type Summary, Time Sheet, Time Sheet Entry, Time Sheet
Entry Item, Service Resource Cost Rule, Pay Type, Resource Absence.
Set Time Hours in Time Sheet Wage Type Summary
Regular Time Hours, Double Time Hours, and Time and a Half Hours are now double fields. You can enter decimal numbers instead
of integer values to these fields in the Time Sheet Wage Type Summary object.

SEE ALSO:
Energy and Utilities Cloud Standard Objects
About Timesheet Management and Labor Cost Optimization

Connected Assets
Accelerate your Connected Assets implementation and build touchless processes to take actions based on actionable asset events.
Reduce implementation effort by using or extending a predefined context definition for asset event details. Build actionable event
orchestrations without significant rework by easily creating, distributing, and using orchestration templates. Automatically register assets
and schedule asset service appointments based on telematics events by using predefined actionable event orchestration templates,
context definitions, flows, and event types.

IN THIS SECTION:
Represent Asset Events by Using a Predefined Context Definition
Efficiently retrieve and use asset event data in actionable event orchestrations by using the predefined Asset Event Details context
definition. The context definition includes nodes and attributes to represent a typical asset event's data, including asset location,
energy consumption, environmental condition, and performance. Build actionable event orchestrations for assets by using the
context definition's predefined context tags as input and output variables.
Accelerate Actionable Event Orchestration Implementation with Templates
Get faster time-to-value for implementing orchestrations by using templates as they are or by modifying the orchestrations based
on your business processes. Users can save actionable event orchestration records as templates and use expression set templates
or flow templates directly as execution procedures for an orchestration. Consultants, partners, and admins can create and distribute
templates to share orchestrations for standardized processes and build similar orchestrations with minimal rework.

284
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Asset Management

Streamline Asset Registration Based on Telematics Events

Automatically bring up-to-date asset service and entitlement data to Salesforce when you onboard connected assets by using a
touchless orchestration process. Use prebuilt actionable event orchestration templates, flows, event types, and context definitions
to automatically create or update the asset, warranty, milestone, and entitlement records based on asset telematics events shared
from external systems. For example, when an event is triggered after a customer uses an asset for the first time, the process creates
an Asset Registered milestone, adds a support entitlement, and adds a standard product warranty for the Asset record.
Schedule Asset Service Appointments Based on Telematics Events
Automatically create service appointments for faulty assets based on real-time asset fault codes by using a touchless orchestration
process. Use the prebuilt Service Appointment for Faults actionable event orchestration template to get the list of eligible distributors
and available technicians near an asset's location. The orchestration schedules a service appointment based on the specific repair
or maintenance work type at the earliest available slot.

Represent Asset Events by Using a Predefined Context Definition

Efficiently retrieve and use asset event data in actionable event orchestrations by using the predefined Asset Event Details context
definition. The context definition includes nodes and attributes to represent a typical asset event's data, including asset location, energy
consumption, environmental condition, and performance. Build actionable event orchestrations for assets by using the context definition's
predefined context tags as input and output variables.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Connected Assets and Context
Service.
Who: To use the Asset Event Details context definition, users must have the Actionable Event Orchestration Designer and Context Service
Admin permission sets.

Accelerate Actionable Event Orchestration Implementation with Templates

Get faster time-to-value for implementing orchestrations by using templates as they are or by modifying the orchestrations based on
your business processes. Users can save actionable event orchestration records as templates and use expression set templates or flow
templates directly as execution procedures for an orchestration. Consultants, partners, and admins can create and distribute templates
to share orchestrations for standardized processes and build similar orchestrations with minimal rework.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Connected Assets.
Who: To create actionable event orchestration templates, users must have the Create Actionable Event Orchestration Templates user
permission.
Why: Admins can use templates to build orchestrations for similar business scenarios with less effort. For example, clone an actionable
event orchestration template that automatically creates record alerts when an asset completes 10,000 hours of usage to create an
orchestration that creates alerts when the asset completes 20,000 hours of usage with minimal rework.

Streamline Asset Registration Based on Telematics Events

Automatically bring up-to-date asset service and entitlement data to Salesforce when you onboard connected assets by using a touchless
orchestration process. Use prebuilt actionable event orchestration templates, flows, event types, and context definitions to automatically
create or update the asset, warranty, milestone, and entitlement records based on asset telematics events shared from external systems.
For example, when an event is triggered after a customer uses an asset for the first time, the process creates an Asset Registered milestone,
adds a support entitlement, and adds a standard product warranty for the Asset record.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Connected Assets.
Who: To use the prebuilt orchestration, flow, context definition, and event types, users must have the Actionable Event Orchestration
Designer and Context Service Admin permission sets and the Manage Flows user permission.

285
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

How: Use the Create Records for Asset Registration actionable event orchestration template to create the milestones, entitlements, and
warranties for first-time registration.
Use the Update Records for Asset Registration actionable event orchestration template for record updates such as upgrading the
warranties, modifying the support entitlements, and updating the milestone status.
Extend and customize the templates based on your needs.

Schedule Asset Service Appointments Based on Telematics Events

Automatically create service appointments for faulty assets based on real-time asset fault codes by using a touchless orchestration
process. Use the prebuilt Service Appointment for Faults actionable event orchestration template to get the list of eligible distributors
and available technicians near an asset's location. The orchestration schedules a service appointment based on the specific repair or
maintenance work type at the earliest available slot.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Connected Assets and
Salesforce Scheduler.
Who: To use the prebuilt orchestration, flow, context definition, and event types, users must have the Actionable Event Orchestration
Designer and Context Service Admin permission sets and the Manage Flows user permission.
Why: Offer proactive, real-time service scheduling for connected assets based on fault code information. Optimize technician schedules
and offer timely assistance to customers by efficiently matching service needs with available resources. The prebuilt actionable event
orchestration searches for all service territories within 20 miles of the asset's current latitude and longitude coordinates. The orchestration
matches the fault type with the type of service required and finds the technicians and time slots available for an appointment. Companies
can extend and customize this template based on their requirements.

Automotive Cloud
Manage trade-in appraisals and valuations of vehicles with Appraisal Management guided flows. Get prebuilt actionable event orchestration
experiences for asset registration and appointment scheduling, and help users quickly create orchestrations from templates. Help dealers
and customers effectively negotiate the terms and conditions of vehicle loan and lease proposals with application rehashing capabilities.
Streamline operational tasks with prebuilt service processes and get additional data streams in the Automotive data kit.

IN THIS SECTION:
Trade-In Appraisal Management (Generally Available)
Sales agents can streamline vehicle appraisals with Trade-In Appraisal Management. Create appraisals for vehicles by initiating a
simple guided flow. Capture detailed information about your customer's vehicle for trade-in, valuation, or sales. Easily integrate
external systems such as vehicle valuation providers and automotive research companies, to get accurate valuation estimates within
the appraisal process. Sales reps can adjust appraisal prices based on thorough vehicle inspections and valuations requested by
customers. You can also extend the predefined flow for other assets.
Connected Vehicle Enhancements
Give your users a head start on designing actionable event orchestrations for different types of vehicle telematics events. Create and
distribute easy-to-use templates for orchestrations that users can clone and customize for similar use cases. Get access to touchless
orchestrations for automatically registering vehicles and assets, and scheduling vehicle service appointments based on critical events.
For the predefined actionable event orchestrations, the related flows, context definitions, and event types are also automatically
available.

286
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

Vehicle and Asset Lending Enhancements

Dealers or customers can easily revise a vehicle loan or lease application from an Experience Cloud site during the application
post-intake process. Previously, dealers could either accept or reject a proposal selected by underwriters, with no scope for negotiation.
Dealers can now efficiently rehash and update proposals based on the needs of customers. They can choose a new payment structure
and a different vehicle to create a revised proposal. Dealers can share the revised proposal with the underwriters for further review.
Easily Visualize Vehicle Inventory Search Results with a Card-Based View
Help inventory managers view vehicle inventory search results in a simplified card-based format. Access search results faster and
compare vehicles with preset Flexcards that show attribute values such as stock code, vehicle registration number, exterior color,
market price, make and model name. Quickly access the vehicle record by using the hyperlinks on the search result cards.
Sync Financial Account Data by Using Prebuilt Data Streams
Send your customers' financial data from Automotive Cloud to Data Cloud by using the data streams in the Automotive data kit to
build actionable insights, perform calculations, and create segments. Bring back the transformed data into Automotive Cloud to
help sales and service teams at captive finance organizations to create personalized loan offers, sell lease extensions, and improve
customer retention. Regularly sync the data streams to send the most current data related to financial accounts, addresses, balances,
fees, statements, and transactions to Data Cloud.
Keep Your Financial Data Updated with Prebuilt Service Processes
Your service reps can efficiently collect data for various service requests by using intuitive intake forms. Create service processes by
using these prebuilt templates and easily customize the Omniscripts to meet your specific business needs. Launch these processes
from the Action Launcher for Automotive apps. Customers can also launch these actions in Experience Cloud for self-service.

Trade-In Appraisal Management (Generally Available)

Sales agents can streamline vehicle appraisals with Trade-In Appraisal Management. Create appraisals for vehicles by initiating a simple
guided flow. Capture detailed information about your customer's vehicle for trade-in, valuation, or sales. Easily integrate external systems
such as vehicle valuation providers and automotive research companies, to get accurate valuation estimates within the appraisal process.
Sales reps can adjust appraisal prices based on thorough vehicle inspections and valuations requested by customers. You can also extend
the predefined flow for other assets.

IN THIS SECTION:
Quickly Initiate Appraisals for Customers and Prospects
Quickly initiate appraisals from Lead, Opportunity, and Account record pages during engagements with customers and prospects.
Sales reps can increase revenue and improve customer satisfaction during the presales process by helping customers determine
the optimum value of their vehicle. Sales reps can also create appraisals from Case and Financial Account record pages. Use Flexcards
to create appraisal records with a single click.
Easily Capture Granular Vehicle Details for Appraisal
Sales reps can process vehicle appraisals and easily specify details of vehicles by using the vehicle appraisal workflow. Initiate appraisals
from lead, opportunity, or account pages for trade-in, valuation, or sales. Easily search for a vehicle by its vehicle identification number
(VIN), make and model, or license plate number. Derive the valuation by specifying details such as the trim, mileage, and condition
of a vehicle. Specify the ownership status of the vehicle and the customer's asking price based on their initial assessment. Customize
the appraisal experience to capture attributes such as color, location, or purchase date.
Enhance Valuation Accuracy with Vehicle Customization Details
Customizations made to a vehicle can significantly alter appraisal valuations compared to the original vehicle prices. During an
appraisal process, sales agents can capture the additional parts and accessories that are installed in the vehicle. Include details of
any modifications made to a vehicle, such as upgraded sound systems, leather upholstery, or custom interior designs.

287
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

Integrate External Sources for Better Vehicle Valuation

Receive vehicle valuations from external systems based on vehicle attributes. Compare valuations from market sources such as JD
Power, Kelly Blue Book (KBB), and Edmunds. Establish the baselines for vehicle valuations by classifying the vehicle condition as
average, clean, or rough. Store the valuation sources, prices, and dates for vehicle appraisals for future review.
Efficiently Adjust and Approve the Final Appraisal Value
Perform adjustments on appraisal valuations, such as discounts or markups, for specific items or at the overall appraisal level. Based
on inspection visits and customer requested prices, sales agents can adjust the appraisal price. Get the adjustments reviewed by
approval authorities.
View Appraisals Related to a Vehicle in a Single List
Easily identify trade-in vehicles from the vehicle page by viewing all related appraisals on a related list. When a sales rep initiates an
appraisal by using an existing vehicle identification number (VIN), the corresponding vehicle page stores and shows the vehicle
appraisal item details.

Quickly Initiate Appraisals for Customers and Prospects

Quickly initiate appraisals from Lead, Opportunity, and Account record pages during engagements with customers and prospects. Sales
reps can increase revenue and improve customer satisfaction during the presales process by helping customers determine the optimum
value of their vehicle. Sales reps can also create appraisals from Case and Financial Account record pages. Use Flexcards to create appraisal
records with a single click.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Automotive,
Appraisal Management, and Automotive Components for Appraisal Management enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Manage Appraisals and Valuations user permission.
How: On a record page, on the Request An Appraisal Flexcard, click Create Appraisal.

Easily Capture Granular Vehicle Details for Appraisal

Sales reps can process vehicle appraisals and easily specify details of vehicles by using the vehicle appraisal workflow. Initiate appraisals
from lead, opportunity, or account pages for trade-in, valuation, or sales. Easily search for a vehicle by its vehicle identification number
(VIN), make and model, or license plate number. Derive the valuation by specifying details such as the trim, mileage, and condition of a
vehicle. Specify the ownership status of the vehicle and the customer's asking price based on their initial assessment. Customize the
appraisal experience to capture attributes such as color, location, or purchase date.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Automotive,
Appraisal Management, and Automotive Components for Appraisal Management enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Manage Appraisals and Valuations user permission.
How: On a Lead, Opportunity, or Account record page, on the Request An Appraisal Flexcard, click Create Appraisal. On the Appraisal
record page, on the Get Valuation for an Item Flexcard, click Add Appraisal Item.

Enhance Valuation Accuracy with Vehicle Customization Details

Customizations made to a vehicle can significantly alter appraisal valuations compared to the original vehicle prices. During an appraisal
process, sales agents can capture the additional parts and accessories that are installed in the vehicle. Include details of any modifications
made to a vehicle, such as upgraded sound systems, leather upholstery, or custom interior designs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Automotive,
Appraisal Management, and Automotive Components for Appraisal Management enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Manage Appraisals and Valuations user permission.

288
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

Integrate External Sources for Better Vehicle Valuation

Receive vehicle valuations from external systems based on vehicle attributes. Compare valuations from market sources such as JD Power,
Kelly Blue Book (KBB), and Edmunds. Establish the baselines for vehicle valuations by classifying the vehicle condition as average, clean,
or rough. Store the valuation sources, prices, and dates for vehicle appraisals for future review.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Automotive,
Appraisal Management, and Automotive Components for Appraisal Management enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Manage Appraisals and Valuations user permission.

Efficiently Adjust and Approve the Final Appraisal Value

Perform adjustments on appraisal valuations, such as discounts or markups, for specific items or at the overall appraisal level. Based on
inspection visits and customer requested prices, sales agents can adjust the appraisal price. Get the adjustments reviewed by approval
authorities.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Automotive,
Appraisal Management, and Automotive Components for Appraisal Management enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Manage Appraisals and Valuations user permission.

View Appraisals Related to a Vehicle in a Single List

Easily identify trade-in vehicles from the vehicle page by viewing all related appraisals on a related list. When a sales rep initiates an
appraisal by using an existing vehicle identification number (VIN), the corresponding vehicle page stores and shows the vehicle appraisal
item details.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Automotive,
Appraisal Management, and Automotive Components for Appraisal Management enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Manage Appraisals and Valuations user permission.

Connected Vehicle Enhancements

Give your users a head start on designing actionable event orchestrations for different types of vehicle telematics events. Create and
distribute easy-to-use templates for orchestrations that users can clone and customize for similar use cases. Get access to touchless
orchestrations for automatically registering vehicles and assets, and scheduling vehicle service appointments based on critical events.
For the predefined actionable event orchestrations, the related flows, context definitions, and event types are also automatically available.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Actionable Event Orchestrations Faster
Reduce effort in creating actionable event orchestrations based on different event types by directly using templates, or cloning and
modifying the templates for your requirements. Users can save actionable event orchestration records as templates and use expression
set templates or flow templates directly as execution procedures for an orchestration.
Automatically Register Vehicles and Assets Based on Telematics Events
When connected vehicles are onboarded to Salesforce, easily register the vehicles by automatically creating or updating the related
warranties, entitlements, and milestone records. Use the prebuilt actionable event orchestration templates to automatically create
or update records for vehicle registration based on external telematics events. For example, after a customer uses a vehicle for the
first time, create an Asset Registered milestone, add web-based support entitlement, and add an asset warranty based on a standard
product warranty for the Vehicle record in Automotive Cloud.

289
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

Automatically Schedule Vehicle Service Appointments Based On Telematics Events

Quickly and easily schedule appointments based on diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). Suggest services to drivers while they're on the
go based on real-time telematics events. Get a list of dealers and technicians closest to the vehicle's location and schedule
appointments for specific repairs at the earliest available time.

Create Actionable Event Orchestrations Faster

Reduce effort in creating actionable event orchestrations based on different event types by directly using templates, or cloning and
modifying the templates for your requirements. Users can save actionable event orchestration records as templates and use expression
set templates or flow templates directly as execution procedures for an orchestration.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Automotive and Actionable
Event Orchestration are enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Create Actionable Event Orchestration Templates user permission.
Why: Consultants, partners, and admins can create and distribute templates for faster time-to-value implementation of actionable event
orchestrations. For example, an actionable event orchestration template that automatically creates record alerts when a vehicle completes
10,000 miles can be cloned and used with minimum rework for creating alerts when the vehicle completes 20,000 miles.

Automatically Register Vehicles and Assets Based on Telematics Events

When connected vehicles are onboarded to Salesforce, easily register the vehicles by automatically creating or updating the related
warranties, entitlements, and milestone records. Use the prebuilt actionable event orchestration templates to automatically create or
update records for vehicle registration based on external telematics events. For example, after a customer uses a vehicle for the first time,
create an Asset Registered milestone, add web-based support entitlement, and add an asset warranty based on a standard product
warranty for the Vehicle record in Automotive Cloud.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Automotive, Connected
Vehicle Services, and Actionable Event Orchestration are enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Actionable Event Orchestration Designer and Context Service Admin permission sets, and the
Manage Flows user permission.
Why: Use the Create Records for Asset Registration actionable event orchestration template to create milestones, entitlements, and
warranties for first-time registration. Use the Update Records for Asset Registration actionable event orchestration template to modify
the records such as upgrading the warranties, modifying the support entitlements, and updating the milestone status. Companies can
also extend and customize the templates.

Automatically Schedule Vehicle Service Appointments Based On Telematics Events

Quickly and easily schedule appointments based on diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). Suggest services to drivers while they're on the go
based on real-time telematics events. Get a list of dealers and technicians closest to the vehicle's location and schedule appointments
for specific repairs at the earliest available time.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Automotive, Automotive
Scheduler, Connected Vehicle Services, and Actionable Event Orchestration are enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Actionable Event Orchestration Designer and Context Service Admin permission sets, and the
Manage Flows user permission.
Why: The prebuilt actionable event orchestration searches for all service territories within 20 miles of the vehicle's current latitude and
longitude coordinates, matches the fault type with the type of service required, and finds the list of time slots and technicians available
for an appointment. Companies can extend and customize this template for their own requirements.

290
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

Vehicle and Asset Lending Enhancements

Dealers or customers can easily revise a vehicle loan or lease application from an Experience Cloud site during the application post-intake
process. Previously, dealers could either accept or reject a proposal selected by underwriters, with no scope for negotiation. Dealers can
now efficiently rehash and update proposals based on the needs of customers. They can choose a new payment structure and a different
vehicle to create a revised proposal. Dealers can share the revised proposal with the underwriters for further review.

IN THIS SECTION:
Find a Different Vehicle for Your Vehicle Loan or Lease Application
Dealers or customers can use Criteria-Based Search and Filter to change their vehicle of choice on the active proposal selected by
the underwriter. During the decisioning process, customers can request for a different vehicle that they need a loan for, or select a
lower-priced vehicle to improve the terms of their loan or lease. Dealers can search vehicles by attributes such as model name, make
name, model year, trim type, and retail price to compare vehicle prices and find the vehicle that best suits the customer's preferences.
Update the Application Payment Structure to Generate Better Offers
Dealers or customers can dynamically adjust the requested loan or lease amount, estimated interest amount, and the interest rate
for the active proposal selected by the underwriter. They can revise product attributes such as the loan or lease term, and the down
payment amount to align with the stipulations. Dealers can generate better payment terms for a loan or lease by updating the
price-impacting fields based on a preconfigured pricing procedure.
Easily Track Proposals During Various Stages of Decisioning
Dealers and underwriters can view all the proposals and their statuses in a single list for an application form product. During application
decisioning, dealers and underwriters have a unified view of all proposals and they can prioritize the proposals based on the status,
stage, and selection type. Proposals are classified based on the stakeholder that selects them.

Find a Different Vehicle for Your Vehicle Loan or Lease Application

Dealers or customers can use Criteria-Based Search and Filter to change their vehicle of choice on the active proposal selected by the
underwriter. During the decisioning process, customers can request for a different vehicle that they need a loan for, or select a lower-priced
vehicle to improve the terms of their loan or lease. Dealers can search vehicles by attributes such as model name, make name, model
year, trim type, and retail price to compare vehicle prices and find the vehicle that best suits the customer's preferences.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Lending,
Vehicle and Asset Lending, and Criteria-Based Search and Filter enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Vehicle and Asset Lending for Partners permission set.
How:
Design a search experience using the Vehicle Definition Searchable Field object as the basis for the search that maps data from Vehicle
Definition, Product, and Pricebook. Extend the search configuration to combine fields from other source objects.
As a dealer user, log in to Experience Cloud. Go to an Application Form Product record. On the active, final proposal shared by the
underwriter, click Rehash Proposal. In the Change the Vehicle section of the rehashed proposal, click Change Vehicle.

Update the Application Payment Structure to Generate Better Offers

Dealers or customers can dynamically adjust the requested loan or lease amount, estimated interest amount, and the interest rate for
the active proposal selected by the underwriter. They can revise product attributes such as the loan or lease term, and the down payment
amount to align with the stipulations. Dealers can generate better payment terms for a loan or lease by updating the price-impacting
fields based on a preconfigured pricing procedure.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Digital Lending,
Vehicle and Asset Lending, and Salesforce Pricing are enabled.

291
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

Who: To use this feature, users need the Vehicle and Asset Lending for Partners permission set.
How: As a dealer user, log in to Experience Cloud. Go to an Application Form Product record. On the active final proposal shared by the
underwriter, click Rehash Proposal. To finalize your selections and to update the price impacting attributes based on the pricing
procedure, click Apply Changes. To create and activate the rehashed proposal, click Calculate. To modify the application, click Update
Application.

Easily Track Proposals During Various Stages of Decisioning

Dealers and underwriters can view all the proposals and their statuses in a single list for an application form product. During application
decisioning, dealers and underwriters have a unified view of all proposals and they can prioritize the proposals based on the status,
stage, and selection type. Proposals are classified based on the stakeholder that selects them.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Digital Lending
and Vehicle and Asset Lending are enabled.
Who: To use this feature, dealers need the Vehicle and Asset Lending for Partners permission set. Underwriters need the Use Vehicle
and Asset Lending Underwriter Console user permission.
How:
Here's how proposals are classified based on their status and stage.
• When a customer selects a proposal during the intake process, it’s marked as Applicant Selected and set to active status.
• When underwriters share an active proposal with dealers for further negotiations, it’s marked as Lender Selected and is in the final
stage.
• When dealers rehash a proposal, it's marked as Applicant Revised and is in active status.
• Finally, when dealers accept an active final proposal that's also selected by the underwriter, it's marked as Applicant and Lender
Selected.

Easily Visualize Vehicle Inventory Search Results with a Card-Based View

Help inventory managers view vehicle inventory search results in a simplified card-based format. Access search results faster and compare
vehicles with preset Flexcards that show attribute values such as stock code, vehicle registration number, exterior color, market price,
make and model name. Quickly access the vehicle record by using the hyperlinks on the search result cards.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Automotive Cloud and
Criteria-Based Search and Filter are enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Automotive Foundation User and Criteria-Based Search and Filter permission sets.
Why: The card-based format offers a simpler and more intuitive navigation than the list view.
• Users don't have to go through long columns of a result list that shows irrelevant attributes.
• The card-based Flexcard shows key attributes in a compact layout with better scope for more precise comparison between different
vehicles.
• Unlike the list view, the card-based view also shows images of the vehicles.

Sync Financial Account Data by Using Prebuilt Data Streams

Send your customers' financial data from Automotive Cloud to Data Cloud by using the data streams in the Automotive data kit to build
actionable insights, perform calculations, and create segments. Bring back the transformed data into Automotive Cloud to help sales
and service teams at captive finance organizations to create personalized loan offers, sell lease extensions, and improve customer
retention. Regularly sync the data streams to send the most current data related to financial accounts, addresses, balances, fees, statements,
and transactions to Data Cloud.

292
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Data Cloud and Automotive
are enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need access to the objects and fields for the data streams included in the Automotive Data Kit bundle.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Data Streams tab, go to the All list view. Select a data stream, such as Financial Account Statement or Financial
Account Transaction.

Keep Your Financial Data Updated with Prebuilt Service Processes

Your service reps can efficiently collect data for various service requests by using intuitive intake forms. Create service processes by using
these prebuilt templates and easily customize the Omniscripts to meet your specific business needs. Launch these processes from the
Action Launcher for Automotive apps. Customers can also launch these actions in Experience Cloud for self-service.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions with Automotive Cloud.
Why: The prebuilt service processes, which include Omniscript-based guided flows, intake forms, and email templates, streamline your
service requests.
The service processes that you can deploy include:
• Address Update: Customers can keep their address information updated to ensure they receive timely and accurate communication
related to loans and leases.
• Fee Reversal: Customers can reverse any charges that are incorrectly placed on their account.
• Update Email or Phone: Customers can maintain accurate contact information, and enhance security through proper and timely
communication.

Communications Cloud
Communications Cloud extends Salesforce Customer 360 to provide a solution specifically for the communications industry. It helps
businesses digitally transform to deliver new, industry-standard customer experiences and increase operational efficiencies. Explore
industry-specific apps including Enterprise Sales Management, Communications Cloud Agent Console, Multiplay Subscription Management,
and business solutions including Asset Service Lifecycle Management, Einstein Quick Quote, Configure, Price, Quote (Industries CPQ),
and Enterprise Product Catalog (EPC).

IN THIS SECTION:
Enterprise Sales Management
Automatically assign quote member field values to product attributes, and apply bulk price adjustments to multiple quote line items.
Use predefined codes for easy pricing, and increase asset-to-quote limits for large projects. Improve cart performance with level-based
item retrieval. Easily search for and apply discounts. Support multiple languages. Keep product bundles organized with sequencing
and up to date by managing expired items.
Communications Cloud Agent Console
Quickly resolve service issues by using consistent troubleshooting and diagnostic tools for a better customer experience.
Einstein for Communications
Boost your users’ efficiency with Einstein generative AI in Communications Cloud.
Track Service Level Objectives and Identify Potential Upsell Opportunities
Leverage Data Cloud to track Service Level Objectives (SLOs) and proactively prevent service degradation. Monitor any bandwidth
shortages by tracking and analyzing performance metrics such as bandwidth, latency, and packet loss against predefined benchmarks.
Automatically detect SLO breaches and send email notifications suggesting service upgrades to configured receivers. Employ
generative AI capabilities to gain deeper insights into customer queries.

293
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Communications Cloud Sales

Introducing Communications Cloud Sales, your comprehensive solution for effective and consistent customer management, built
on the powerful Salesforce Platform. Access Communications Cloud Sales directly from the App Launcher in your Salesforce org
with the appropriate licenses. Leverage standard Salesforce objects and a rich portfolio of Revenue Cloud functionalities. Your sales
reps can seamlessly create location-based quotes for new and existing customers and enjoy flexible location data management.
Ensure efficiency and accuracy by establishing qualification rules so your sales reps can view qualified and disqualified products for
selected locations.
Asset Service Lifecycle Management
Get greater control over and predictability for your inventory operations and maximize the revenue from aftermarket asset services
by using the Asset Service Lifecycle Management features. With Inventory Count, streamline your inventory counting processes and
identify inventory discrepancies. With Inventory Replenishment, prevent stockouts by automating replenishment when inventories
reach predefined thresholds. Estimate installation work for products in quotes, orders, and field service work. Book service appointments
independently as a standalone feature to enhance your operational efficiency.

Enterprise Sales Management

Automatically assign quote member field values to product attributes, and apply bulk price adjustments to multiple quote line items.
Use predefined codes for easy pricing, and increase asset-to-quote limits for large projects. Improve cart performance with level-based
item retrieval. Easily search for and apply discounts. Support multiple languages. Keep product bundles organized with sequencing and
up to date by managing expired items.

IN THIS SECTION:
Tailor Quotes with Automatic Member Field Mapping
Enhance your quoting process by using automatic assignment of quote member field values to product attributes through a decision
table in the Business Rules Engine (BRE). Sales reps can create site-specific or subscriber-specific configurations, enabling them to
precisely tailor offers to each customer's unique needs.
Streamline Pricing with Bulk Price Adjustments in Enterprise Sales Management
Select multiple quote line items and apply price adjustments in one go. You can also include child product line items when you
apply bulk price adjustments.
Simplify Pricing with Predefined Adjustment Codes
Enhance your pricing adjustments in Enterprise Sales Management by using predefined adjustment codes from Enterprise Product
Catalog. Easily apply these codes to both one-time and recurring prices for a more streamlined and efficient process.
Increase Asset-to-Quote Limit in Enterprise Sales Management Asset Viewer
Enable better handling of large volumes of data in high-scale B2B scenarios by raising the asset-to-quote limit beyond the current
cap of six. Configure thresholds to decide if processing must be synchronous or asynchronous. Receive in-app notifications to stay
updated on the start and completion of the asset-to-quote process.
Improve Performance with Level-Based Item Retrieval in Enterprise Sales Management Configuration Cart
Reduce delays and prevent potential errors through a faster and more efficient process when you manage large bundles. Retrieve
and show bundle items one level at a time instead of fetching and showing all items at once.
Simplify Discount Management with Advanced Search and Flexible Bundle Selection
Quickly search for products within your quote or across the entire catalog when you apply custom discounts. Select entire product
bundles in one go, including all related child products. Add or remove products as needed. You can also include child product line
items when you apply custom discounts.

294
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Enhance Global Reach with Multilingual Support in Enterprise Sales Management

Leverage multilingual labels on the product catalog page and attributes. Show product information, promotions, and attributes in
multiple locales, adapting to each user's profile settings. Provide a seamless and consistent experience for our global customers
across different regions.
Optimize Bundle Management with Accurate Product and Attribute Sequencing
Experience an improved product bundle display in Enterprise Sales Management. Make your catalog management and working
cart operations smoother and more efficient by showing all products within a bundle, including their attributes, in the correct
sequence.
Keep Your Catalog and Cart Fresh
Keep your Enterprise Sales Management product catalog and configuration cart up to date by notifying reps when products expire
or reach the end of their selling period. Improve the overall user experience by making sure that only the current and available items
are included in transactions.

Tailor Quotes with Automatic Member Field Mapping

Enhance your quoting process by using automatic assignment of quote member field values to product attributes through a decision
table in the Business Rules Engine (BRE). Sales reps can create site-specific or subscriber-specific configurations, enabling them to precisely
tailor offers to each customer's unique needs.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.

Streamline Pricing with Bulk Price Adjustments in Enterprise Sales Management

Select multiple quote line items and apply price adjustments in one go. You can also include child product line items when you apply
bulk price adjustments.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
How: This change is automatically enabled.

Simplify Pricing with Predefined Adjustment Codes

Enhance your pricing adjustments in Enterprise Sales Management by using predefined adjustment codes from Enterprise Product
Catalog. Easily apply these codes to both one-time and recurring prices for a more streamlined and efficient process.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
How: This change is automatically enabled.

Increase Asset-to-Quote Limit in Enterprise Sales Management Asset Viewer

Enable better handling of large volumes of data in high-scale B2B scenarios by raising the asset-to-quote limit beyond the current cap
of six. Configure thresholds to decide if processing must be synchronous or asynchronous. Receive in-app notifications to stay updated
on the start and completion of the asset-to-quote process.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
Who: To use this feature, users must have access to the Enterprise Sales Management Asset Viewer.
How: This change is automatically enabled.

295
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Improve Performance with Level-Based Item Retrieval in Enterprise Sales Management Configuration
Cart
Reduce delays and prevent potential errors through a faster and more efficient process when you manage large bundles. Retrieve and
show bundle items one level at a time instead of fetching and showing all items at once.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
Who: This feature is available to all users with access to the Enterprise Sales Management configuration cart.

Simplify Discount Management with Advanced Search and Flexible Bundle Selection
Quickly search for products within your quote or across the entire catalog when you apply custom discounts. Select entire product
bundles in one go, including all related child products. Add or remove products as needed. You can also include child product line items
when you apply custom discounts.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
How: This change is automatically enabled.

Enhance Global Reach with Multilingual Support in Enterprise Sales Management

Leverage multilingual labels on the product catalog page and attributes. Show product information, promotions, and attributes in
multiple locales, adapting to each user's profile settings. Provide a seamless and consistent experience for our global customers across
different regions.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
How: This change is automatically enabled.

Optimize Bundle Management with Accurate Product and Attribute Sequencing

Experience an improved product bundle display in Enterprise Sales Management. Make your catalog management and working cart
operations smoother and more efficient by showing all products within a bundle, including their attributes, in the correct sequence.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
Who: This feature is available to all users with access to the ESM product catalog.
How: This change is automatically enabled.

Keep Your Catalog and Cart Fresh

Keep your Enterprise Sales Management product catalog and configuration cart up to date by notifying reps when products expire or
reach the end of their selling period. Improve the overall user experience by making sure that only the current and available items are
included in transactions.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Enterprise
Sales Management.
Who: To use this feature, users must have access to the ESM product catalog and working cart.
How: This change is automatically enabled.

296
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Communications Cloud Agent Console

Quickly resolve service issues by using consistent troubleshooting and diagnostic tools for a better customer experience.

IN THIS SECTION:
Streamline Customer Support for Service Issues
Quickly analyze and resolve customer service issues by identifying the underlying account, service, or network problems. Provide
your customer support reps with a consistent and service-aware approach to troubleshooting, reducing the need to access multiple
network-facing systems. With Service Troubleshooting, simplify the end-to-end process, and provide diagnostic tools to achieve
faster resolutions and ensure a better customer experience.

Streamline Customer Support for Service Issues

Quickly analyze and resolve customer service issues by identifying the underlying account, service, or network problems. Provide your
customer support reps with a consistent and service-aware approach to troubleshooting, reducing the need to access multiple
network-facing systems. With Service Troubleshooting, simplify the end-to-end process, and provide diagnostic tools to achieve faster
resolutions and ensure a better customer experience.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Customer
Service Management.
Who: To use this feature, you need the licenses for Communications Cloud Agent Console, Business Process Engine, Omnistudio, and
Industry Service Excellence.

Einstein for Communications

Boost your users’ efficiency with Einstein generative AI in Communications Cloud.

IN THIS SECTION:
Easily Enable Einstein for Communications from Setup
Get access to the existing and new generative AI features for Communications Cloud.

Easily Enable Einstein for Communications from Setup

Get access to the existing and new generative AI features for Communications Cloud.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Einstein generative AI is available
in Lightning Experience.
Who: To enable services in a Communications Cloud org, you need the Communications Cloud Advanced Admin Permission Set Group.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein Setup and select it. Turn on Einstein. Next, from Setup, in the Quick Find
box, enter Communications Cloud, and then select Services Setup. Turn on Enable Service Console, and then turn on Einstein
for Communications.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Einstein for Communications and Service Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Einstein Generative AI

297
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Track Service Level Objectives and Identify Potential Upsell Opportunities

Leverage Data Cloud to track Service Level Objectives (SLOs) and proactively prevent service degradation. Monitor any bandwidth
shortages by tracking and analyzing performance metrics such as bandwidth, latency, and packet loss against predefined benchmarks.
Automatically detect SLO breaches and send email notifications suggesting service upgrades to configured receivers. Employ generative
AI capabilities to gain deeper insights into customer queries.

IN THIS SECTION:
Use Data Cloud to Proactively Track Service Level Objectives
Leverage Data Cloud for real-time data streaming, active monitoring, and in-depth reporting. Automate the process of sending SLO
breach emails by using the Process Asset SLO Breach Tasks flow. Ensure comprehensive SLO analysis by customizing metrics through
the Get Service Level Objective and Network Data flow.
Analyze Service Level Objectives and Identify Opportunities for Upsell
Your service reps can use Einstein generative AI to analyze the data obtained from Data Cloud. When customers contact your service
reps about service degradation, the reps can employ generative AI for Service Level Objective (SLO) analysis. Your reps can choose
between a summarized or detailed analysis. They can also identify opportunities to recommend plan upgrades to customers to
prevent service performance issues.

Use Data Cloud to Proactively Track Service Level Objectives

Leverage Data Cloud for real-time data streaming, active monitoring, and in-depth reporting. Automate the process of sending SLO
breach emails by using the Process Asset SLO Breach Tasks flow. Ensure comprehensive SLO analysis by customizing metrics through
the Get Service Level Objective and Network Data flow.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To use Salesforce Data Cloud for Communications Cloud, you need the Communications Cloud Admin license and the Data Cloud
Admin or Data Cloud User license.
How: Set up Data Cloud for Communications Cloud. Use the Calculated Insights object to trigger a flow to send email notifications to
users. Modify the email notification template to include relevant information about the service level objective breach. Customize the
Get Service Level Objective and Network Data flow to make sure that your prompt includes all the fields needed to perform an SLO
analysis.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Data Cloud Aggregator for Communications Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Licenses Required to Use Service Level Objective Analysis Assistant Feature (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Customize Service Level Objective (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Calculated Insight Object in Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Use a Calculated Insight Object to Trigger Service Level Objective Notification Flow (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Customize Service Level Objective Data Fields (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Customize Network Usage Data Fields (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Einstein for Communications and Service Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Industries Common Resources Developer Guide: Engagement Data Model (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

298
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Analyze Service Level Objectives and Identify Opportunities for Upsell

Your service reps can use Einstein generative AI to analyze the data obtained from Data Cloud. When customers contact your service
reps about service degradation, the reps can employ generative AI for Service Level Objective (SLO) analysis. Your reps can choose
between a summarized or detailed analysis. They can also identify opportunities to recommend plan upgrades to customers to prevent
service performance issues.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To use Salesforce Data Cloud for Communications Cloud, you need the Communications Cloud Admin license and the Data Cloud
Admin or Data Cloud User license.
How: To use SLO Analysis Assistant, enable Einstein for Communications, and set up Data Cloud for Communications Cloud.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Using Generative AI Capabilities to Gain Deeper Insights into Service Level Objective Customer Queries (can be outdated
or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Einstein for Communications and Service Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Data Cloud Aggregator for Communications Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Licenses Required to Use Service Level Objective Analysis Assistant Feature (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Communications Cloud Sales

Introducing Communications Cloud Sales, your comprehensive solution for effective and consistent customer management, built on
the powerful Salesforce Platform. Access Communications Cloud Sales directly from the App Launcher in your Salesforce org with the
appropriate licenses. Leverage standard Salesforce objects and a rich portfolio of Revenue Cloud functionalities. Your sales reps can
seamlessly create location-based quotes for new and existing customers and enjoy flexible location data management. Ensure efficiency
and accuracy by establishing qualification rules so your sales reps can view qualified and disqualified products for selected locations.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Quotes for New and Existing Customers with the Onboard Customer Flow
When a customer contacts your sales rep, the sales rep can search for the customer’s account by using the customer's account name.
If they don’t find any account, they can easily capture the new customer's details and quote information. The sales rep can then
review and edit the customer's site as needed. Finally, they can browse catalogs, add products, and save the quote. They can also
provide billing details for the quote.
Easily Add Multiple Locations to Quotes and Orders
Your sales reps can go to the Locations tab of a quote and upload a CSV file with the location data. Salesforce automatically maps
the file columns, and your sales reps can also manually map the columns from the uploaded file to the expected fields in the Quote
Line Item Recipient or Order Product Recipient entities. Alternatively, they can add locations by selecting service accounts, or by
manually entering new location details.
Browse Product Catalogs and Assign Products to Locations
After your sales reps add locations to a quote, they can explore product catalogs. Based on the location selections that your sales
reps make on the Edit Locations window, they can see qualified and disqualified products. Your sales reps can also review and edit
the selected locations. To streamline the process of assigning products to locations, they can organize locations by their fields, such
as broadband connection type. After the products are added to the quote, the products are priced based on the locations that they
are assigned to.

299
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

Manage Your MultiSite Customer Assets

Your sales reps can amend or cancel assets for multiple locations. When an amendment quote or order is created, service accounts
are converted to quote line item recipients or order product recipients.
New Objects in Communications Cloud
Do more with the new objects in Communications Cloud that represent the entities that services are quoted or ordered for.

Create Quotes for New and Existing Customers with the Onboard Customer Flow
When a customer contacts your sales rep, the sales rep can search for the customer’s account by using the customer's account name.
If they don’t find any account, they can easily capture the new customer's details and quote information. The sales rep can then review
and edit the customer's site as needed. Finally, they can browse catalogs, add products, and save the quote. They can also provide billing
details for the quote.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Personal, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions with Communications Cloud Sales.
Who: To use this feature, you need the licenses required for Revenue Cloud—RevenueLifecycleManagementAddOn or
RevenueCloudPlusAddOn. You also need the CommsCloudRLMAddOn license.
How: Enable Revenue Settings. Customize the Onboard Customer flow and the associated flow screen components. Set up qualification
rules.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help:Get Ready for Your Revenue Cloud Implementation
Salesforce Help: Enable Revenue Settings
Salesforce Help: New Objects in Communications Cloud
Salesforce Help: Get Started with your Communications Cloud Sales Implementation
Salesforce Help: Use Communications Cloud Sales as a Sales Rep
Salesforce Help: Components in Communications Cloud Sales

Easily Add Multiple Locations to Quotes and Orders

Your sales reps can go to the Locations tab of a quote and upload a CSV file with the location data. Salesforce automatically maps the
file columns, and your sales reps can also manually map the columns from the uploaded file to the expected fields in the Quote Line
Item Recipient or Order Product Recipient entities. Alternatively, they can add locations by selecting service accounts, or by manually
entering new location details.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Personal, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions with Communications Cloud Sales.
Who: To use this feature, you need the Revenue Cloud license—RevenueLifecycleManagementAddOn or RevenueCloudPlusAddOn.
You also need the CommsCloudRLMAddOn and CSVImportLicenseAddOn licenses.

300
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Communications Cloud

How: Enable Revenue Settings. Edit the Quote record page to include the Locations tab. Customize the Import Locations flow and the
associated flow screen components to customize how your sales reps upload a file with location data.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: New Objects in Communications Cloud
Salesforce Help: Enable Revenue Settings
Salesforce Help: Get Started with your Communications Cloud Sales Implementation
Salesforce Help: Use Communications Cloud Sales as a Sales Rep
Salesforce Help: Add Multiple Locations to New and Existing Quotes and Orders
Salesforce Help: Components in Communications Cloud Sales

Browse Product Catalogs and Assign Products to Locations

After your sales reps add locations to a quote, they can explore product catalogs. Based on the location selections that your sales reps
make on the Edit Locations window, they can see qualified and disqualified products. Your sales reps can also review and edit the selected
locations. To streamline the process of assigning products to locations, they can organize locations by their fields, such as broadband
connection type. After the products are added to the quote, the products are priced based on the locations that they are assigned to.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Personal, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions with Communications Cloud Sales.
Who: To use this feature, you need the licenses required for Revenue Cloud—RevenueLifecycleManagementAddOn or
RevenueCloudPlusAddOn. You also need the CommsCloudRLMAddOn license.
How: Enable Revenue Settings. Configure the Product Discovery Settings to include the Communications: Discover Products flow. Modify
the flow and the associated flow screen components to customize how available catalogs are retrieved for selected locations. Set up
location based pricing.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Pricing
Salesforce Help: Enable Revenue Settings
Salesforce Help: Get Started with your Communications Cloud Sales Implementation
Salesforce Help: Browse Catalogs and Assign Products to Locations

Manage Your MultiSite Customer Assets

Your sales reps can amend or cancel assets for multiple locations. When an amendment quote or order is created, service accounts are
converted to quote line item recipients or order product recipients.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Personal, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions with Communications Cloud Sales.
Who: To use this feature, you need the Revenue Cloud license—RevenueLifecycleManagementAddOn or RevenueCloudPlusAddOn.
You also need the CommsCloudRLMAddOn license.

301
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

How: Enable Revenue Settings. Set up a flow to amend or cancel products.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Amend, Renew, and Cancel Assets in Revenue Cloud
Salesforce Help: Enable Revenue Settings
Salesforce Help: Get Started with your Communications Cloud Sales Implementation

New Objects in Communications Cloud

Do more with the new objects in Communications Cloud that represent the entities that services are quoted or ordered for.
Store information about sites, employees, or other entities that services are quoted for
Use the Quote Line Item Recipient object.
Store information about sites, employees, or other entities that services are ordered for
Use the Order Product Recipient object.

Asset Service Lifecycle Management

Get greater control over and predictability for your inventory operations and maximize the revenue from aftermarket asset services by
using the Asset Service Lifecycle Management features. With Inventory Count, streamline your inventory counting processes and identify
inventory discrepancies. With Inventory Replenishment, prevent stockouts by automating replenishment when inventories reach
predefined thresholds. Estimate installation work for products in quotes, orders, and field service work. Book service appointments
independently as a standalone feature to enhance your operational efficiency.

SEE ALSO:
Asset Service Lifecycle Management

Consumer Goods Cloud

Tour drivers can deliver preordered products, generate invoices, and handle returns with delivery documents. Optimize field operations
and GPS data compliance with enhanced geofencing and time tracking for visits. Implement custom sharing of visits and their related
records because the Share visits feature is retired. Boost brand visibility by adding your company logo to the Consumer Goods offline
mobile app. Customize the offline mobile app by using Visual Studio Code based Modeler, because the Windows Server based Modeler
is retiring. Key account managers can now copy manual inputs for tactics, and new integration APIs enable retrieval and auditing of
manual inputs for account plans. Simplify upgrades with new Trade Promotion Management (TPM) permission sets in the Consumer
Goods managed package.

IN THIS SECTION:
Retail Execution
For Direct Store Delivery, use delivery documents to deliver preordered products from the truck’s inventory. Improve field operations
and visit compliance with enhanced geofencing and time tracking. To share visits and access related records, implement custom
sharing. Enhance brand visibility by showcasing your company logo in the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app.

302
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

Plan for Windows Server Based Modeler’s Retirement

The Windows Server based Modeler is scheduled for retirement in late 2025, and will be in maintenance mode until then. We
recommend that you transition to Visual Studio (VS) Code based Modeler. VS Code based Modeler offers similar modeling capabilities
without the need for a separate Windows server and database. VS Code based Modeler includes the Consumer Goods Cloud Modeler
command line interface (CLI) plugin that's fully integrated into the Salesforce CLI. Use the Modeler CLI plugin to perform various
Modeler operations, such as validate contracts, build custom apps, run a simulation of your custom CG Cloud offline mobile app
directly on your machine, and create deployment packages.
Trade Promotion Management
Enable Key account managers (KAMs) to copy the manual inputs for a tactic to a new tactic when they copy tactics. Easily retrieve
and compare manual inputs for account plans with the new Get Manual Inputs integration API. Avoid managing permission sets
during every upgrade by using the new permission sets included in the Consumer Goods Managed package.
New and Changed Metadata Types in Consumer Goods Cloud
Make the most of the new and changed metadata types in Consumer Goods Cloud.

Retail Execution
For Direct Store Delivery, use delivery documents to deliver preordered products from the truck’s inventory. Improve field operations
and visit compliance with enhanced geofencing and time tracking. To share visits and access related records, implement custom sharing.
Enhance brand visibility by showcasing your company logo in the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app.

IN THIS SECTION:
Streamline Delivery Execution and Efficiently Complete Tours
With convenient access to delivery documents, tour drivers can swiftly deliver preordered products, obtain signatures, generate
invoices, and handle returns. After deliveries are done, tour drivers can complete end-of-tour tasks by easily checking in the remaining
products and recording the vehicle’s mileage or status. After finishing the end-of-tour activities, drivers can complete the tour and
track the time spent.
Ensure Visit Integrity with Geofencing and Time Tracking
Implement explicit start visit to make sure sales reps and tour drivers begin a visit before its execution in the Consumer Goods Cloud
offline mobile app. By using geofencing and time tracking, oversee visits, reduce the risk of fraudulent visits, and make visit execution
accurate and reliable. Make sure the sales reps or tour drivers are physically at the stores during the visit by letting them start or finish
a visit only within the defined radius and by limiting the number of in-progress visits to one.
Boost Brand Visibilty by Adding Your Company Logo on Consumer Goods Cloud Offline Mobile App
Make your brand more visible and meet the different needs of different markets, places, and business groups with company logos
in the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app. Showcase a unique logo for each sales organization on the Summary card of the
Your Day page.
Share Visits Is Retired
Starting Spring ’25, you can no longer enable the Share visits setting under Retail Execution Settings and only the owner of the visit
has access to the visit. For your users to share visits and access related records, implement custom sharing using any of Salesforce
platform sharing capabilities. If you’re an existing customer and haven’t turned off the Share visits setting, you must first implement
platform-based visit sharing and then manually turn off the setting before upgrading to Consumer Goods Cloud Spring ’25. Complete
this step to prevent unexpected results while sharing visits on the Consumer Goods Cloud Managed package.
Usability Improvements for Desktop Orders
Learn about the layout changes for desktop orders in Spring ’25.

303
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

Other Improvements in Retail Execution

Delete completed visits, add more promotions, customize the signature area, and ensure system compatibility with Consumer Goods
Cloud.
New and Changed Objects for Retail Execution
Do more with the new and updated Retail Execution objects.

Streamline Delivery Execution and Efficiently Complete Tours

With convenient access to delivery documents, tour drivers can swiftly deliver preordered products, obtain signatures, generate invoices,
and handle returns. After deliveries are done, tour drivers can complete end-of-tour tasks by easily checking in the remaining products
and recording the vehicle’s mileage or status. After finishing the end-of-tour activities, drivers can complete the tour and track the time
spent.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Retail Execution
is enabled.
Who: To set up delivery, product check-in, and end-tour activities through the Consumer Goods Cloud desktop app, you need the Direct
Store Delivery for Consumer Goods Cloud Offline Mobile App permission set.
To use the Delivery Cockpit on the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app, your users need the CGCloud Tour Driver permission set,
OR CGCloud Retail Tour Driver AND CGCloud Retail User permission sets.
How: On the Consumer Goods Cloud desktop app, configure the settings for tour, tour template, and their related object templates
such as visit, order, and order items.
Tour drivers can use the Delivery Documents card on the Delivery Cockpit on the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app for completing
deliveries. Tour drivers can access the Delivery Cockpit by selecting a visit from the Tour Cockpit. By using the End Tour Activities card
on the Driver Cockpit, tour drivers can finish the end-of-tour activities.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Delivery Execution with Delivery Documents (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configurations for Delivery Documents on the Consumer Goods Cloud Desktop App (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configurations for End of Tour Activities on the Consumer Goods Cloud Desktop App (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)

Ensure Visit Integrity with Geofencing and Time Tracking

Implement explicit start visit to make sure sales reps and tour drivers begin a visit before its execution in the Consumer Goods Cloud
offline mobile app. By using geofencing and time tracking, oversee visits, reduce the risk of fraudulent visits, and make visit execution
accurate and reliable. Make sure the sales reps or tour drivers are physically at the stores during the visit by letting them start or finish a
visit only within the defined radius and by limiting the number of in-progress visits to one.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Retail Execution
is enabled.
How: Configure the settings in Visit Template to implement explicit start visit and set a geofencing range. Use the fields in a visit to easily
identify visits that are started or completed outside the set radius. See New and Changed Objects for Retail Execution.

304
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

For Retail Execution visits, to work with geolocation validation, turn on both geolocation and explicit start visit settings.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enhanced Geofencing and Time Tracking for Consumer Goods Cloud Visits (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Boost Brand Visibilty by Adding Your Company Logo on Consumer Goods Cloud Offline Mobile App
Make your brand more visible and meet the different needs of different markets, places, and business groups with company logos in
the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app. Showcase a unique logo for each sales organization on the Summary card of the Your
Day page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud is enabled.
How: To upload the company logo in PNG or JPG format, set up the file upload capability in the appropriate sales organization object.
Then, in Visual Studio Code based Modeler, customize the contracts to define the company logo on the user cockpit page. Then, deploy
the changes to the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app.
When sales reps log in to the offline app and complete the sync, the company logo appears next to the sales rep’s name on the Summary
card of the Your Day page.

SEE ALSO:
Add Company Logo to the Summary Card in Consumer Goods Cloud Offline Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Share Visits Is Retired

Starting Spring ’25, you can no longer enable the Share visits setting under Retail Execution Settings and only the owner of the visit has
access to the visit. For your users to share visits and access related records, implement custom sharing using any of Salesforce platform
sharing capabilities. If you’re an existing customer and haven’t turned off the Share visits setting, you must first implement platform-based
visit sharing and then manually turn off the setting before upgrading to Consumer Goods Cloud Spring ’25. Complete this step to prevent
unexpected results while sharing visits on the Consumer Goods Cloud Managed package.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Retail Execution
is enabled.
Why: Implement platform-based visit sharing because supervisor and sales rep visits are inaccessible to other sales reps and substitutes.
Also, to avoid sync issues if shared visits are uploaded on the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app.

305
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

How: If you’re an existing customer, in Setup, find and select Retail Execution Settings, and disable the Share visits setting.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sharing and Record Access Feature
Salesforce Apex Developer Guide: Understanding Apex Managed Sharing

Usability Improvements for Desktop Orders

Learn about the layout changes for desktop orders in Spring ’25.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud is enabled.
Why: Retail Execution offers these layout enhancements for orders placed through the Consumer Goods Cloud desktop app.
• Configurable default tab for Orders: By default, the All Items tab is shown as the default tab. Configure the default tab as Basket
with the defaultTab attribute in Custom JSON for Order Items.
• Easy management of product quantities: Starting Spring ’25
– On the Add products page in Advanced Orders, you can now directly add products with quantities.
– To add multiple products with the same quantities, change the quantity for a product. Use the context menu of the Quantity
field to update the quantity for all products that are filtered and selected.
– You can further modify the product quantities in the Basket or the Order Items tab.
– The quantity is added to Custom JSON for Add Items by default. In existing projects and templates, for Quantity to be shown on
the Product List grid, you must add the Quantity field to Custom JSON for Add Items on Order Template.

• Layout improvements for the desktop order Lightning Web Component: Font size and padding for the product grids have
been enhanced for readability. The tables now align with the Salesforce Lightning Design System.
• Search bar for simplified search: Search for an assessment task definition by using the search bar in the Assessment Task Definitions
list view.

Other Improvements in Retail Execution

Delete completed visits, add more promotions, customize the signature area, and ensure system compatibility with Consumer Goods
Cloud.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud is enabled.
Why: Retail Execution offers these new enhancements for an admin user.
• Deletion of completed visits: Use the new Delete_Completed_Visit and Age_of_Visit custom system settings to turn on the
deletion on the Consumer Goods Cloud desktop app or through the API. By default, the app prevents the deletion of completed
visits.
• Increased promotion limit: Add up to 49,000 accounts per promotion.
• Consumer Goods Cloud batch process changes: Starting Spring ’25
– In Progress visits are marked with Distribution Relevant as False when the start date isn’t between the current date (Today) and
Distribution Relevant CutOff Date.
– AggregatePromotionBatch considers only the promotions that are of the Sellable Promotion record type. To consider all types
of promotions, use the PromotionAggregationForAllPromotions custom system setting.

• Direct Store Delivery Sync Rule Change: Extension of sync rule to include assortments not only for customers whose orders are
linked to tours but also for customers whose orders or visits are linked to tours.

306
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

• Sharing for Substitution: Starting Spring ’25, if the OvrideSharingForSubstTeamMbr setting is enabled, a user can activate account
substitution for a period, which is valid for the current date without sufficient privileges to add team members to the substituted
account. Until Spring ’25, the activation of account substitution for a period which is valid for the current date fails if the user didn’t
have sufficient privileges to add team members to the substituted account.
• Granular versioning details for troubleshooting: Find your installed app version and Salesforce build number on the Consumer
Goods Cloud offline mobile app. Use this information when you contact Salesforce to report an issue. This information is available
on the Device Status Overview page in the Sync Management app.

• Enhanced signing experience: Customize your signature area with the new buttons and labels that align with the Salesforce
theme. To style the signature area, configure the default Salesforce mobile theme or implement a custom theme.
• Package compatibility validation: Ensure compatibility of Consumer Goods Cloud with version validation checks for these
components:
– Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app, during the installation of deployment package
– Consumer Goods Cloud managed package in Salesforce, during the assignment of deployment package
– Deployment package, during the addition of a deployment package in the deployment package assignment process
– Visual Studio Code based Modeler simulator app, during the implementation of a customization project

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Custom System Settings for the Deletion of Retail Visit (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Promotions Limits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: AggregatePromotionBatch
Salesforce Help: CallOrderDistributionReOrgBatch

New and Changed Objects for Retail Execution

Do more with the new and updated Retail Execution objects.

Direct Store Delivery Execution

Indicate whether the vehicle details are reviewed during the end tour activities
Use the new cgcloud__Has_End_Tour_Veh_Details_Rvw__c field on the cgcloud__Tour__c object.
Generate invoices for delivery documents

307
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

Use the existing CashInvoice, CreditInvoice picklist values in the cgcloud__Document_Transaction_Type__c

field on the cgcloud__Order_Template__c object.
Define the invoice type for a delivery document in Account Extension
Use the existing CashInvoice, CreditInvoice picklist values in the
cgcloud__Payer_Role_Document_Transaction_Type__c field on the cgcloud__Account_Extension__c object.

Enhanced Geofencing and Time Tracking

Capture the user’s GPS location at visit completion
Use the new cgcloud__Loc_Capture_During_Complete__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Capture the user’s GPS location during visit cancellation
Use the new cgcloud__Loc_Capture_During_Cancel__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Capture the start and end time of a visit
Use the new cgcloud__Capture_Proceeding_Time__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Set the geofencing validation type when a user starts a visit
Use the new cgcloud__Start_Vst_Geolc_Validation__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Specify the geofencing validation type when a user starts a visit
Use the new None, Error, and Warning picklist values in the cgcloud__Start_Vst_Geolc_Validation__c field
object.
Set the geofencing validation type when a user completes a visit
Use the new cgcloud__Cmpl_Vst_Geolc_Validation__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Specify the geofencing validation type when a user completes a visit
Use the new None, Error, and Warning picklist values in the cgcloud__Cmpl_Vst_Geolc_Validation__c field
object.
Indicate whether the visit is started outside the allowed radius
Use the new cgcloud__Is_Vst_Start_Osid_Range__c field on the Visit object.
Indicate whether the visit is completed outside the allowed radius
Use the new cgcloud__Is_Vst_Cmpl_Osid_Range__c field on the Visit object.
Indicate whether starting a visit before visit execution is mandatory
Use the new cgcloud__Is_Start_Visit_Rqr_To_Check_In__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Specify whether an information message is shown to indicate that the visit hasn't started
Use the new cgcloud__Does_Show_Read_Only_Visit_Info__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Prevent users from executing multiple visits in parallel
Use the new cgcloud__Limit_To_One_Visit_In_Progress__c field on the cgcloud__Visit_Template__c object.
Track visits with In Progress status
Use the new In Progress picklist value in the Visit object.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Guide: Consumer Goods Cloud Developer Guide

308
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

Plan for Windows Server Based Modeler’s Retirement

The Windows Server based Modeler is scheduled for retirement in late 2025, and will be in maintenance mode until then. We recommend
that you transition to Visual Studio (VS) Code based Modeler. VS Code based Modeler offers similar modeling capabilities without the
need for a separate Windows server and database. VS Code based Modeler includes the Consumer Goods Cloud Modeler command
line interface (CLI) plugin that's fully integrated into the Salesforce CLI. Use the Modeler CLI plugin to perform various Modeler operations,
such as validate contracts, build custom apps, run a simulation of your custom CG Cloud offline mobile app directly on your machine,
and create deployment packages.
How: As part of this product retirement, the Modeler Contract Packages (MCP), Modeler Update Packages (MUP), and Framework Update
Packages (FUP) for this product will become unavailable. To get new Modeler features and better support for your customization projects,
migrate to Visual Studio (VS) Code based Modeler for Consumer Goods Cloud. To learn more, see Migrate Windows Server Based Modeler
Contracts to Visual Studio Code Based Modeler or contact Salesforce for assistance.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Visual Studio Code based Modeler

Trade Promotion Management

Enable Key account managers (KAMs) to copy the manual inputs for a tactic to a new tactic when they copy tactics. Easily retrieve and
compare manual inputs for account plans with the new Get Manual Inputs integration API. Avoid managing permission sets during
every upgrade by using the new permission sets included in the Consumer Goods Managed package.

IN THIS SECTION:
Reduce Time and Effort by Copying Manual Inputs for Tactics
Give key account managers (KAMs) the option to copy the manual inputs of a tactic when they copy a tactic. Previously, when KAMs
copied a tactic, they couldn't copy the tactic's manual inputs.
Retrieve and Audit Account Plan Manual Inputs
With the new Get Manual Inputs integration API, you can now retrieve the manual inputs for an account plan recorded as session
data in Consumer Goods Processing Services. If multiple changes are made to the account plan, the changes made at different times
and by different users are recorded as separate sessions. Use the Get Comparison integration API to retrieve the manual inputs
recorded in two separate sessions.
Manage TPM Permission Sets Efficiently
The Consumer Goods managed package now has new permission sets, such as TPM Standard Object Admin and TPM Master Data
Admin. These permission sets are automatically updated whenever the managed package is upgraded. Assign your users these
permission sets to save the hassle of managing permission sets every time you upgrade to the latest version of the Consumer Goods
managed package.
Preview Your Processing Service
Verify that a new version of the processing service is working seamlessly with the existing managed package. Test the new processing
service version in your Sandbox early on to ensure that you don’t face any hiccups when your production org uses the latest processing
service. The new processing service version is automatically available in Sandbox and Production org when the new version of
Salesforce core is available per the release timelines.
New and Changed Objects for Trade Promotion Management
Do more with the new and updated Trade Promotion Management objects.

309
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud

Reduce Time and Effort by Copying Manual Inputs for Tactics

Give key account managers (KAMs) the option to copy the manual inputs of a tactic when they copy a tactic. Previously, when KAMs
copied a tactic, they couldn't copy the tactic's manual inputs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Trade Promotion
Management is enabled.
How: In a tactic template, select Copy Manual Input.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Copying Manual Inputs

Retrieve and Audit Account Plan Manual Inputs

With the new Get Manual Inputs integration API, you can now retrieve the manual inputs for an account plan recorded as session data
in Consumer Goods Processing Services. If multiple changes are made to the account plan, the changes made at different times and by
different users are recorded as separate sessions. Use the Get Comparison integration API to retrieve the manual inputs recorded in two
separate sessions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Trade Promotion
Management is enabled.

Manage TPM Permission Sets Efficiently

The Consumer Goods managed package now has new permission sets, such as TPM Standard Object Admin and TPM Master Data
Admin. These permission sets are automatically updated whenever the managed package is upgraded. Assign your users these permission
sets to save the hassle of managing permission sets every time you upgrade to the latest version of the Consumer Goods managed
package.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Trade Promotion
Management is enabled.
How: Based on their role, assign the new permission sets to relevant users and delete the older assignments.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Permission Sets

Preview Your Processing Service

Verify that a new version of the processing service is working seamlessly with the existing managed package. Test the new processing
service version in your Sandbox early on to ensure that you don’t face any hiccups when your production org uses the latest processing
service. The new processing service version is automatically available in Sandbox and Production org when the new version of Salesforce
core is available per the release timelines.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Trade Promotion
Management is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sandbox Testing Recommendations for Consume Goods Processing Service in Spring ’25

310
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Energy and Utilities Cloud

New and Changed Objects for Trade Promotion Management

Do more with the new and updated Trade Promotion Management objects.
Copy manual inputs of a tactic when you copy the tactic
Use the new Duplicate_manual_inputs field on the tactic_template object.

New and Changed Metadata Types in Consumer Goods Cloud

Make the most of the new and changed metadata types in Consumer Goods Cloud.
Where: This feature applies to the Consumer Goods app in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Professional editions.

Settings
Regulate the sObject fields to synchronize between Salesfoce and the Consumer Good Cloud offline mobile app.
Use the new Custom Metadata Type cgcloud_Sync_Ignored_Field__mdt to specify the sObject fields to ignore during
data synchronization.

Energy and Utilities Cloud

The Energy and Utilities Cloud now features enhanced Einstein Generative AI capabilities in the Agent Console, boosting service rep
efficiency. When creating cases, reps have easy access to related information such as billing account and service point.

IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Generative AI for Energy and Utilities Cloud Enhancements
Boost the efficiency of your service reps with Einstein generative AI features. Expand the existing generative AI capabilities of Agent
Console to include engagement summaries, clean energy program suggestions, and case summaries.
Improve Case Management with Easy Access to Case Details
Help your contact center reps make informed decisions with related object fields in cases. When creating a case in Agent Console,
reps can quickly draw relevant insights with easy access to details of the related billing account, service point, location record and
more.

SEE ALSO:
Timesheets and Labor Cost Optimization Enhancements

Einstein Generative AI for Energy and Utilities Cloud Enhancements

Boost the efficiency of your service reps with Einstein generative AI features. Expand the existing generative AI capabilities of Agent
Console to include engagement summaries, clean energy program suggestions, and case summaries.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: Salesforce admins and service agents need the permission set licenses for Energy & Utilities Cloud, Energy & Utilities Cloud Billing
Account, and Energy & Utilities Other Features.
Why: Use Einstein to help your service reps:
• Summarize the last five engagement interactions of an account to get your service agents up to speed and reduce the time to value
for the customer. The summary is developed from data in Energy and Utilities objects.

311
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

• Identify the clean energy programs available for a customer by location. The suggestion is generated from clean energy programs
data in Energy and Utilities objects.

• Summarize the last five cases for an account to gather the customer inquiries, issue details, and resolution steps. The summary is
generated using data in Energy and Utilities objects.

Note: This tool uses generative AI, which can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Before you use Einstein Generative AI,
review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume responsibility for how the outcomes of Einstein are applied to your
organization.
How: After setting up the Agent Console, go to Setup and turn on Einstein and Einstein Generative AI for Energy and Utilities.
From the Einstein Summary section on the account page, you can generate a summary of the last five engagement interactions, a
summary of recent cases, or suggested programs for a customer.

SEE ALSO:
Set Up the Agent Console
About Einstein Generative AI
Prompt Builder
Get an Energy and Utilities Cloud Trial Org

Improve Case Management with Easy Access to Case Details

Help your contact center reps make informed decisions with related object fields in cases. When creating a case in Agent Console, reps
can quickly draw relevant insights with easy access to details of the related billing account, service point, location record and more.
Where: This change is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions with Agent Console.
Who: Salesforce admins and service reps with access to the Agent Console can use this feature.

SEE ALSO:
Agent Console
Get an Energy and Utilities Cloud Trial Org

Financial Services Cloud

Closely monitor business relationship planning with Objective Tracking Metrics. Use a guided flow to efficiently create account plan
objectives, and effectively implement them with action plans. Enhance the self-service loan application experience by giving guest users
access to your product catalog, and streamline the loan estimation process with the Loan Calculator tool. Help financial advisors and
wealth managers get a complete financial picture of a consumer’s financial health with data-driven alerts and actionable insights. Align
your client’s asset portfolio with their investment strategy with the new asset allocation visualization component for accounts. Get
real-time household financial data for managed package objects with the enhanced Household API setup.

312
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

IN THIS SECTION:
Business Relationship Plan
Track business relationship plans by using detailed tracking metrics that provide insights into the account plan objective progress
at both broad and granular levels. Effectively manage the execution of objectives with well-defined action plans. Evaluate the
objective progress by creating measures in the context of an objective, and associate related records with each measure within a
single guided flow.
Data Cloud for Financial Services Cloud
Get the benefits of both Data Cloud and Financial Services Cloud to get a complete financial picture of consumers' financial health.
Portfolio Management
Review client investment strategy in the new asset allocation visualization component for accounts.
Digital Lending—India
Reduce the risk of errors in a loan approval workflow by automating loan origination services through new integration templates.
Service Process Automation
Prebuilt service process templates help you get started quicker.
Wealth Management
View a summary of client financial health and show up-to-date household financial data for managed package objects.
Improve Readability and Clarity of Financial Account Party Record Names
The prefix for financial account party record names is changed from FAR to FAP. Enhance the clarity and consistency in record naming,
and easily identify and manage financial account party records. To ensure continued functionality and accuracy of the records, review
and update any object records, custom queries, Apex class queries, and report filters that currently use the FAR prefix to the new
FAP prefix.
Discovery Framework
Pause and resume Discovery Framework assessments by saving them as drafts.
Get Started Faster with Guided Setups
Discover the new guided setups in Financial Services Cloud.
New and Changed Financial Services Cloud Object Fields
Do more with new and updated Financial Services Cloud objects.

New and Enhanced Common Features for Financial Services Cloud

Financial Services Cloud includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features
to extend and customize Financial Services Cloud based on your business needs.
• Collections
Banks and financial institutions can streamline their collection processes, and achieve operational efficiency. Reduce delinquencies
and maintain positive customer relationships.

• Group Membership and Households

Easily add the correct members to your party relationship groups with the help of email IDs. Receive change event notifications for
more objects.

• Record Rollup Definitions

Aggregate tasks and events at a household or group level. Edit and delete record rollup definitions.

• Discovery Framework

313
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

Pause and resume Discovery Framework assessments by saving them as drafts.

Business Relationship Plan

Track business relationship plans by using detailed tracking metrics that provide insights into the account plan objective progress at
both broad and granular levels. Effectively manage the execution of objectives with well-defined action plans. Evaluate the objective
progress by creating measures in the context of an objective, and associate related records with each measure within a single guided
flow.

IN THIS SECTION:
Closely Monitor Business Relationship Planning with Objective Tracking Metrics
Help your relationship teams promptly address discrepancies by capturing deviations at both the account plan and objective levels.
The Objectives component now provides comprehensive tracking metrics, showing progress updates at both summarized and
detailed objective levels. At the broader level, view the total number of objectives, measures with no updates, and the number of
overdue tasks. At the granular level, see the count of completed measures, completed tasks, inactive measures, and overdue tasks
associated with a specific objective. Streamline the monitoring process to enhance efficiency and facilitate prompt interventions
through better performance tracking.
Effectively Implement Objectives with Action Plans
Use action plans to effectively complete the tasks required for business processes tied to account plan objectives. Your relationship
teams can now create tasks by using action plans from the Tasks Flexcard component on the account plan objective record page.
View an aggregated count of the tasks that are directly associated with objectives, whether they are created individually or through
action plans. Clearly visualize the distribution of tasks based on their progress by using a task distribution pie chart. Ensure timely
follow-up by receiving alerts for the overdue tasks associated with action plans. Provide better visibility into the progress of business
relationship plans by improving the overall task management for account plan objectives.
Efficiently Create Measures for Account Plan Objectives By Using a Guided Flow
Your relationship teams can now use a single guided flow to set target metrics for account plan objectives. Define measures for an
objective and link related records all at once, maintaining context throughout. Easily associate relevant opportunities, cases, and
financial deals as related records to the measures for the objectives that your relationship managers own. Visualize the progress of
each measure by using progress ring indicators. Reduce administrative overhead with an efficient, unified workflow that minimizes
clicks, saving objective owners time and effort.

Closely Monitor Business Relationship Planning with Objective Tracking Metrics

Help your relationship teams promptly address discrepancies by capturing deviations at both the account plan and objective levels. The
Objectives component now provides comprehensive tracking metrics, showing progress updates at both summarized and detailed
objective levels. At the broader level, view the total number of objectives, measures with no updates, and the number of overdue tasks.
At the granular level, see the count of completed measures, completed tasks, inactive measures, and overdue tasks associated with a
specific objective. Streamline the monitoring process to enhance efficiency and facilitate prompt interventions through better performance
tracking.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the FSC Sales & Service license or the FSC
Sales license.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select the Commercial Banking app, go to the Objectives tab on the Prebuilt Account Plan
Lightning page, and then create objectives.

314
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

Effectively Implement Objectives with Action Plans

Use action plans to effectively complete the tasks required for business processes tied to account plan objectives. Your relationship
teams can now create tasks by using action plans from the Tasks Flexcard component on the account plan objective record page. View
an aggregated count of the tasks that are directly associated with objectives, whether they are created individually or through action
plans. Clearly visualize the distribution of tasks based on their progress by using a task distribution pie chart. Ensure timely follow-up by
receiving alerts for the overdue tasks associated with action plans. Provide better visibility into the progress of business relationship plans
by improving the overall task management for account plan objectives.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the FSC Sales & Service license or the FSC
Sales license.
How: In the Tasks component on the account plan objective record page, click the down arrow next to the refresh icon and select New
Action Plan. To create tasks without action plans, go to Tasks from the App Launcher, and then create a task and associate it with the
account plan objective record.

Efficiently Create Measures for Account Plan Objectives By Using a Guided Flow
Your relationship teams can now use a single guided flow to set target metrics for account plan objectives. Define measures for an
objective and link related records all at once, maintaining context throughout. Easily associate relevant opportunities, cases, and financial
deals as related records to the measures for the objectives that your relationship managers own. Visualize the progress of each measure
by using progress ring indicators. Reduce administrative overhead with an efficient, unified workflow that minimizes clicks, saving
objective owners time and effort.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the FSC Sales & Service license or the FSC
Sales license.
How: In the Commercial Banking app, on the Objectives tab on the Account Plan Lightning page, create objectives. To create measures
through a guided path, click Add Measure. To add a measure from the Account Plan Objective Lightning page, in the Measures
component, click New.

Data Cloud for Financial Services Cloud

Get the benefits of both Data Cloud and Financial Services Cloud to get a complete financial picture of consumers' financial health.

IN THIS SECTION:
Keep Client Financial Goals on Track with Contextual Alerts and Actions
Help financial advisors and wealth managers proactively manage client financial goals with data-driven alerts and actionable insights.
They get a holistic view of their clients' financial health by using data from Data Cloud and Financial Services Cloud.

Keep Client Financial Goals on Track with Contextual Alerts and Actions
Help financial advisors and wealth managers proactively manage client financial goals with data-driven alerts and actionable insights.
They get a holistic view of their clients' financial health by using data from Data Cloud and Financial Services Cloud.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need Financial Services Cloud Extension. They must also purchase Financial Services Cloud Contextual
Alerts.
Why: Advisors can boost customer satisfaction and loyalty by giving timely and insightful guidance based on the financial data. The
alerts help you stay on top of upcoming milestones, off-track goals, and allocation changes. You can include actions such as creating or

315
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

reviewing a goal. These actions and alerts help advisors have personalized conversations with clients about what they want to do or
improve.
How: If you previously set up Contextual Alerts:
• Uninstall the Financial Service Cloud data kit.
• Install the new version to get new calculated insights that feed contextual alerts.
• Delete the context definition, expression set, and actionable event orchestration records.
• In Setup, go to the Contextual Alerts Guided Setup. Expand Set Up an Event Orchestration, and then click Create Actionable Event
Orchestration. This creates context definition, expression set, and actionable event orchestration records.

Portfolio Management
Review client investment strategy in the new asset allocation visualization component for accounts.

IN THIS SECTION:
Quickly Compare Actual and Target Allocations
Align your client’s asset portfolio with their investment strategy and give advice on rebalancing if the portfolio deviates from the
target allocations. Review the charts of your client’s current allocation by using the new asset allocation visualization component
for accounts.

Quickly Compare Actual and Target Allocations

Align your client’s asset portfolio with their investment strategy and give advice on rebalancing if the portfolio deviates from the target
allocations. Review the charts of your client’s current allocation by using the new asset allocation visualization component for accounts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the View Asset Allocation permission from the FSC Sales permission set.

Digital Lending—India
Reduce the risk of errors in a loan approval workflow by automating loan origination services through new integration templates.

IN THIS SECTION:
Increase the Efficiency of Your Loan Approval Workflow
Help your users perform purposeful loan-related verifications by connecting to their preferred external services through the new
integration templates. With the automated loan origination services, improve the efficiency and accuracy and reduce the manual
effort in verifying that applicants meet the loan approval criteria.

Increase the Efficiency of Your Loan Approval Workflow

Help your users perform purposeful loan-related verifications by connecting to their preferred external services through the new
integration templates. With the automated loan origination services, improve the efficiency and accuracy and reduce the manual effort
in verifying that applicants meet the loan approval criteria.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Digital Lending—India.
Who: To use this feature, your users need the Digital Lending India Admin User permission.

316
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

Why: Use the integration templates to build integrations for these loan origination services.
KYC OCR for Aadhaar
Confirm that a structurally valid Aadhaar card is uploaded and then return the document with the masked Aadhaar number.
Aadhaar OTP Authentication
Verify the applicant’s Aadhaar by sending a one-time password (OTP) to the applicant’s phone number. This integration also downloads
and stores the masked Aadhaar image.
Send for ESign
Generate and send a unique link to the applicant by email or SMS to e-sign the uploaded document.
Send for EStamp
Generate and send a unique link to the applicant by email or SMS to e-stamp the document.
Get Status for ESign
Get the status of the document that was sent for ESign.
Get Status for EStamp
Get the status of the document that was sent for EStamp.
Pan Profile Detailed
Get the applicant’s profile details from the uploaded PAN document.
Cheque OCR
Extract the bank account and owner details from the copy of the post-dated cheque uploaded during the disbursement operations
process.
Employer Search
Search for an employer by name to find out their Employee Provident Fund registration and exemption status.
Employee Search
Search for an employee by name to confirm their employment with the employer in the last three months.
Form 16 Authentication
Authenticate the Form-16 document issued by the employer for tax deduction.

Service Process Automation

Prebuilt service process templates help you get started quicker.

IN THIS SECTION:
Accelerate Retail Banking Service Process Setup with Prebuilt Templates
Prebuilt service process templates streamline the setup of retail management processes by providing ready-made process attributes,
intake forms, and fulfillment flows. Clone these templates to quickly obtain the necessary API endpoints, reducing development
time. These templates are designed for both assisted and self-service channels, enabling faster and more efficient service delivery.
Accelerate Wealth Banking Service Process Setup with Prebuilt Templates
Prebuilt service process templates simplify the setup of wealth management processes by providing ready-made process attributes,
intake forms, and fulfillment flows. Clone these templates to quickly obtain the necessary API endpoints, thereby reducing development
time. These templates are designed for both assisted and self-service channels, enabling faster and more efficient service delivery.

317
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

Accelerate Retail Banking Service Process Setup with Prebuilt Templates

Prebuilt service process templates streamline the setup of retail management processes by providing ready-made process attributes,
intake forms, and fulfillment flows. Clone these templates to quickly obtain the necessary API endpoints, reducing development time.
These templates are designed for both assisted and self-service channels, enabling faster and more efficient service delivery.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
Who: To use the prebuilt service process templates, users need these permission sets and permission set licenses:
• Industries Service Process permission set
• Omnistudio User permission set
• Industry Service Excellence permission set
• Financial Services Cloud Extension, Financial Services Cloud Basic, Financial Services Cloud Service, or Financial Services Cloud
Standard permission set license
Why: These prebuilt service processes support the Financial Account data model in the Financial Services Cloud managed package or
the Financial Account Management Standard Objects. Here are the retail banking service processes you can easily create from the
templates:
• Change Billing Cycle: Request to update the billing date of the selected credit card.
• Initiate Vehicle First Notice of Loss: Request to report a vehicle incident to initiate the first notice of loss.
• Lock Unlock Card: Request to lock or unlock the selected card.
• Manage Beneficiaries: Request to add or modify beneficiaries.
• Manage Card Usage: Request to manage the credit limit of a credit card.
• Manage Credit Limit: Request to update the billing date of the selected credit card.
• Notify Travel Plans: Request to notify travel plans to avoid card-related issues.
• Request Loan Payoff Statement: Request a loan payoff statement to view the settlement details.
• Reset PIN: Request to reset the PIN for the selected card.
How: In Setup, find and select Service Process Studio. Click New Service Process and select Create from Template. Select a service
process template and follow the on-screen instructions to set up your process.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Standard Retail Banking Service Processes for Financial Services Cloud

318
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

Accelerate Wealth Banking Service Process Setup with Prebuilt Templates

Prebuilt service process templates simplify the setup of wealth management processes by providing ready-made process attributes,
intake forms, and fulfillment flows. Clone these templates to quickly obtain the necessary API endpoints, thereby reducing development
time. These templates are designed for both assisted and self-service channels, enabling faster and more efficient service delivery.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
Who: To use the prebuilt service process templates, users need these permission sets and permission set licenses:
• Industries Service Process permission set
• Omnistudio User permission set
• Industry Service Excellence permission set
• Financial Services Cloud Extension, Financial Services Cloud Basic, Financial Services Cloud Service, or Financial Services Cloud
Standard permission set license
Why: These prebuilt service processes support the Financial Account data model in the Financial Services Cloud managed package or
the Financial Account Management Standard Objects. Here are the wealth banking service processes that you can easily create from
the templates:
• Estate Planning for Wealth: Outline instructions for notifying the death of an individual and initiating the process of managing
their financial accounts.
• Initiate Automated Account Transfer for Wealth (ACAT): Request to transfer securities between trading accounts.
• Manage Beneficiaries for Wealth: Request to add or modify beneficiaries for the selected investment account.
• Manage Standing Instructions for Wealth: Request to set up recurring, on-time payments for the selected investment account.
• Set Up Required Minimum Distribution for Wealth (RMD): Request the required minimum distribution for the selected retirement
account.
• Update Profile for Wealth: Request to update profile details.
How: In Setup, find and select Service Process Studio. Click New Service Process and select Create from Template. Select a service
process template and follow the on-screen instructions to set up your process.

Wealth Management
View a summary of client financial health and show up-to-date household financial data for managed package objects.

319
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Productivity with Financial Services Cloud Embedded AI for Agents
Generate a summary that incorporates details of the financial health of the client including asset allocation, portfolio performance,
and progress on financial goals. Advisors use this information to determine the next steps.

Boost Productivity with Financial Services Cloud Embedded AI for Agents

Generate a summary that incorporates details of the financial health of the client including asset allocation, portfolio performance, and
progress on financial goals. Advisors use this information to determine the next steps.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
Who: Customers need FSC for Service Einstein or FSC for Sales Einstein to access Gen AI client summaries.
• To configure the Record Summary Prompt Template, users need the Prompt Template Manager.
• To use the Record Summary Prompt Template, users need the Prompt Template User.
• To see the Einstein summary component, users need Einstein for Service Innovations. Only admin users can enable the Einstein For
Wealth Management setting.

Improve Readability and Clarity of Financial Account Party Record Names

The prefix for financial account party record names is changed from FAR to FAP. Enhance the clarity and consistency in record naming,
and easily identify and manage financial account party records. To ensure continued functionality and accuracy of the records, review
and update any object records, custom queries, Apex class queries, and report filters that currently use the FAR prefix to the new FAP
prefix.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence, and Financial Services Cloud Extension or FSC Service or FSC
Foundation permission sets.

Discovery Framework
Pause and resume Discovery Framework assessments by saving them as drafts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Discovery Framework is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Industries Assessment, or Financial Services Cloud Extension, or FSC Sales, or FSC Sales
and Service permission set licenses.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Discovery Framework

Get Started Faster with Guided Setups

Discover the new guided setups in Financial Services Cloud.

320
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud

IN THIS SECTION:
Configure Business Relationship Plans with Ease by Using Guided Setup
Get up and running quickly with the Business Relationship Plan guided setup. Use the guided setup to complete all the tasks required
to configure, use, and manage the Business Relationship Plan features.

Configure Business Relationship Plans with Ease by Using Guided Setup

Get up and running quickly with the Business Relationship Plan guided setup. Use the guided setup to complete all the tasks required
to configure, use, and manage the Business Relationship Plan features.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where the FSC Sales & Service license or the
FSC Sales license is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Business Relationship Plans, and then under Guided Setup, select Business
Relationship Plans.

New and Changed Financial Services Cloud Object Fields

Do more with new and updated Financial Services Cloud objects.

Financial Account Management Standard Objects

You can now use Financial Account and related objects without having to install the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Let
your users gain greater control and flexibility over their data models, enabling seamless integration and decreased dependencies by
using these standard objects. Enable the Financial Account Management Standard Objects setting and start using the Financial Account
and related standard objects, which help you to model financial accounts and related information for your users.
Store information about different financial accounts, such as investment accounts, bank accounts, or credit cards
Use the new FinancialAccount object.
Store information about the role assumed by a person or organization involved with a financial account, such as a beneficiary
or a trustee
Use the new FinancialAccountParty object.
Store information about the financial account balance
Use the new FinancialAccountBalance object.
Store information about each financial account transaction
Use the new FinancialAccountTransaction object.
Store information about each address related to a financial account, such as a communication address, a billing address, or
a statement address
Use the new FinancialAccountAddress object.
Store information about a financial account statement
Use the new FinancialAccountStatement object.
Store information about the additional owner of an asset
Use the new PartyFinclAssetAddlOwner object.
Store information about the financial asset owned by an individual or account
Use the new PartyFinancialAsset object.
Store information about a party asset associated with a financial account
Use the new FinclAcctPtyFinclAsset object.

321
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Store information about a financial liability held by a party

Use the new PartyFinancialLiability object.
Store information about an additional party associated with a financial liability
Use the new PartyFinclLiabAddlBrwr object.
Store information about the card issued to a customer, such as a debit card, credit card, prepaid card, gift card, or any other
card type
Use the new IssuedCard object.
Store information about the fee that's levied on the financial account for various requests, such as request for stop payment,
duplicate card, and more
Use the new FinancialAccountFee object.
Store information about a financial security instrument, such as a stock or bond
Use the new FinancialSecurity object.
Store information about the securities held for an asset or liability
Use the new Securities Holding object.

Data Cloud for Digital Lending

Data Cloud Data Model Objects (DMO) are used in the Data Cloud implementation for Digital Lending. The DMOs listed below live in
Data Cloud.
Represents the terms attached to a scheme to sanction the loan.
Use the new FinancialApplicationItemProposal data model object.
Represents a junction between an application form product and a deviation.
Use the new FinancialApplicationItem data model object.
Represents information about the individual or group that are applying.
Use the new Applicant data model object.
Represents the high level information of an application that's submitted for the product.
Use the new FinancialApplication data model object.

Health Cloud
Protect communities proactively by tracking and managing diseases with the help of Disease Surveillance. Enhance financial and
operational management with Home Health’s comprehensive quoting, funding, and budgeting. Easily schedule recurring appointments
and incorporate business rules, such as patient prerequisites, into the Intelligent Appointment Management scheduling workflow. Use
Provider Search’s conversational AI agent to help patients find the most suitable provider. Process provider requests faster with Utilization
Management’s FHIR-aligned Coverage Requirement Discovery (CRD), Documentation Templates and Rules (DTR), and Prior Authorization
Support (PAS).

IN THIS SECTION:
Disease Surveillance
Monitor cases, identify outbreaks, and manage disease effectively. Customize definitions, analyze trends, and perform on-site
inspections to support proactive public health actions.
Financial Assistance Program Enhancements
Streamline the enrollment process for a financial assistance program by using appeals. Save time by filing an appeal against a rejected
application instead of submitting a new application.

322
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Home Health Enhancements

Promote effective financial management, boost operational efficiency, and prioritize patient-centric care through Home Health’s
holistic approach to quoting, funding, and budgeting of home healthcare services. Optimize operations by using the enhanced
guided setup for configuring quoting and budgeting in your org.
Intelligent Appointment Management Enhancements
Ensure compliance with medical and operational requirements by verifying patient prerequisites and respecting provider capacity
limits. Enable schedulers to book recurring appointments. Expand self-scheduling to include assets such as clinics and labs. Enhance
appointment guidance flows with advanced scheduling options.
Pharmacy Benefits Verification Enhancements
Streamline the pharmacy benefits verification process by enabling patient services representatives to create an electronic verification
request to verify patients' pharmacy benefits.
Provider Network Management Enhancements
Streamline provider network management with enhanced roster file submission and automated field mapping recommendation.
Upload and track roster files through your provider portal by using automatic case creation for processing. With Einstein generative
AI, simplify field mapping through automated suggestions to save time and ensure accuracy.
Provider Search Enhancements
Boost your call center’s productivity by using an autonomous Patient Services agent.
Site Management (Pilot)
Streamline the process of selecting and activating clinical research study sites and investigators through the enhanced search,
assessment creation, and scoring capabilities of Salesforce.
Utilization Management Enhancements
Utilization Management now supports Coverage Requirement Discovery (CRD) and Documentation Templates and Rules (DTR) for
payer organizations. The new FHIR-aligned processes offer a smooth and refined workflow for managing requests for coverage
information and documentation requirements. Quickly process incoming requests and return responses in a matter of seconds.
Reduce administrative burdens and manual errors, ensure proper documentation for audits and regulatory compliance, and minimize
costs by using the automated end-to-end workflows.
Expedite Your Health Cloud Setup
Use the new steps included in Health Cloud’s guided setup to create personalized and connected experiences for customers, partners,
and employees by using portals, websites, and Salesforce mobile apps integrated with Salesforce CRM. Customize Health Cloud for
your unique requirements on the Additional Setup tab. Configure security and permissions for data privacy, create and manage code
set and code set bundle records for healthcare data, and tailor Experience sites to create engaging portals, all from one place.
New and Changed Objects in Health Cloud
Store and access more data with these new and changed Health Cloud objects.

Disease Surveillance
Monitor cases, identify outbreaks, and manage disease effectively. Customize definitions, analyze trends, and perform on-site inspections
to support proactive public health actions.

323
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance Public Health Monitoring
Define diseases, track cases, detect outbreaks, and conduct thorough investigations by using Disease Surveillance. Create disease
definitions with customizable criteria, efficiently manage patient health data, and monitor trends to identify outbreaks early. Leverage
inspection capabilities to support on-site evaluations when needed, ensuring a comprehensive approach to disease management.
Empower public health organizations to respond proactively and protect communities effectively.

Enhance Public Health Monitoring

Define diseases, track cases, detect outbreaks, and conduct thorough investigations by using Disease Surveillance. Create disease
definitions with customizable criteria, efficiently manage patient health data, and monitor trends to identify outbreaks early. Leverage
inspection capabilities to support on-site evaluations when needed, ensuring a comprehensive approach to disease management.
Empower public health organizations to respond proactively and protect communities effectively.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Health Cloud Add-On and
HealthCloudForCmtyAddon licenses.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Disease Surveillance, Omnistudio User, Action Plans, and Industries Licensing, permitting,
and inspections (LPI) permission sets.
How: On the Public Health Settings page in Setup, turn on Disease Surveillance. Next, on the Industries Licensing, Permitting, and
Inspections (LPI) Settings page, turn on Inspections.

Financial Assistance Program Enhancements

Streamline the enrollment process for a financial assistance program by using appeals. Save time by filing an appeal against a rejected
application instead of submitting a new application.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Financial Assistance Program
Salesforce Release Notes: Financial Assistance Program

Home Health Enhancements

Promote effective financial management, boost operational efficiency, and prioritize patient-centric care through Home Health’s holistic
approach to quoting, funding, and budgeting of home healthcare services. Optimize operations by using the enhanced guided setup
for configuring quoting and budgeting in your org.

IN THIS SECTION:
Streamline Home Healthcare with Integrated Quoting and Budgeting Capabilities
Care coordinators can effortlessly generate accurate quotes for home visits, finalize budgets, and obtain patient approval through
a single, unified process. Schedulers can subsequently initiate home visit scheduling with details automatically filled from the
approved quotes. Elevate operational effectiveness, promote care continuity, accelerate on-time payments, and reduce claim denials
by using this comprehensive, transparent, and time-saving solution for quoting, budgeting, and scheduling.
Expedite Your Home Health Setup
Use the new steps included in Home Health’s guided setup for configuring the quoting and budgeting workflow for home visits.
Reduce implementation time by following the simple, clear steps for tasks such as prerequisite checks and process setups, all from
one place. Stay focused and on track by using links to in-app setup pages and detailed help articles.

324
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Streamline Home Healthcare with Integrated Quoting and Budgeting Capabilities

Care coordinators can effortlessly generate accurate quotes for home visits, finalize budgets, and obtain patient approval through a
single, unified process. Schedulers can subsequently initiate home visit scheduling with details automatically filled from the approved
quotes. Elevate operational effectiveness, promote care continuity, accelerate on-time payments, and reduce claim denials by using this
comprehensive, transparent, and time-saving solution for quoting, budgeting, and scheduling.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Health Cloud and the Home Health
add-on licenses.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Home Health Quote, DocGen User, DocGen Runtime User, DocGen Designer, Health
Cloud Utilization Management, and Health Cloud Foundation permission sets.
How: From Setup, go to the Context Service Settings page, and turn on Context Definitions. From Setup, go to the Revenue Settings
page and set up Revenue Lifecycle Management. Then, from Setup, go to the General Settings page for Document Generation and turn
on Document Templates Export and Design Document Templates in Salesforce. Next, from Setup, go to Flows, and clone and activate
the Send Home Visit Budget Document flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Home Health

Expedite Your Home Health Setup

Use the new steps included in Home Health’s guided setup for configuring the quoting and budgeting workflow for home visits. Reduce
implementation time by following the simple, clear steps for tasks such as prerequisite checks and process setups, all from one place.
Stay focused and on track by using links to in-app setup pages and detailed help articles.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Health Cloud and the Home Health
add-on licenses.
How: From Setup, go to the Home Health Settings page to find the updated guided setup.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Home Health

Intelligent Appointment Management Enhancements

Ensure compliance with medical and operational requirements by verifying patient prerequisites and respecting provider capacity limits.
Enable schedulers to book recurring appointments. Expand self-scheduling to include assets such as clinics and labs. Enhance appointment
guidance flows with advanced scheduling options.

IN THIS SECTION:
Verify Prerequisites for Appointments
Ensure that patients receive the most appropriate care based on prerequisites such as their age and medical history. A prerequisite
check in the scheduling workflow alerts schedulers and can prevent them from booking appointments if the patient doesn’t meet
the required criteria.

325
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Optimize Resource Use with Capacity-Based Scheduling

Manage workload more effectively and improve service quality by defining resource capacity in Salesforce Scheduler. Based on the
resource capacity, Intelligent Appointment Management limits the number of appointments a scheduler can book for a given shift
and type of work. For example, you can set a cap on the number of new patients a scheduler can book with a provider or at a clinic
per day.
Schedule Ongoing Care with Recurring Appointments
With Salesforce Scheduler set up as your back-end scheduling system, create a series of appointments that take place at a regular
frequency. For example, schedule physical therapy, mental health counseling, or chronic disease management appointments that
occur every Wednesday for 12 weeks. Set the number of appointment occurrences and adjust individual occurrences before booking
the appointment series. Modify or cancel an occurrence later, or cancel the entire series if needed.
Give Patients the Ability to Book Assets
Enhance your Experience Cloud site with a configurable self-scheduling workflow that enables patients to schedule appointments
with resources such as clinics and labs as well as providers.
Simplify Scheduling with Enhanced Appointment Guidance
Improve your call center effectiveness by incorporating advanced scheduling features into your appointment guidance flow. Make
it easier for schedulers to book a series of related appointments, ongoing care, and appointments with assets and providers.

Verify Prerequisites for Appointments

Ensure that patients receive the most appropriate care based on prerequisites such as their age and medical history. A prerequisite check
in the scheduling workflow alerts schedulers and can prevent them from booking appointments if the patient doesn’t meet the required
criteria.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set. To create and edit a flow, users
need the Manage Flow permission. To schedule appointments with prerequisite checks, users need the Run Flow permission.
How: Clone and customize a prebuilt Check Appointment Prerequisites flow or create a flow from scratch that determines a patient's
eligibility for a visit type. To build the flow, from Setup, find and select Flows. To link your flow to a visit type, in a work type code set
bundle, select Prerequisites Check and specify your flow. To update a work type code set bundle, from the App Launcher, find and
select Work Type Code Set Bundles.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Verify Prerequisites for Appointments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Optimize Resource Use with Capacity-Based Scheduling

Manage workload more effectively and improve service quality by defining resource capacity in Salesforce Scheduler. Based on the
resource capacity, Intelligent Appointment Management limits the number of appointments a scheduler can book for a given shift and
type of work. For example, you can set a cap on the number of new patients a scheduler can book with a provider or at a clinic per day.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set.
How: In Setup, if you haven't already done so, complete the Salesforce Scheduler prerequisites for Capacity-Based Scheduling, including
running a script that updates existing shift work topics. In Salesforce Scheduler Settings, enable Capacity-Based Scheduling. For each
shift, set the number of appointments that can be booked for a particular work type. Then set the maximum or achievable capacity limit
for service territories, and add the shift capacity component to pages.

326
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Note: Capacity-based scheduling is supported for Salesforce Scheduler only, not external EHR systems.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Capacity-Based Scheduling for Intelligent Appointment Management (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Schedule Ongoing Care with Recurring Appointments

With Salesforce Scheduler set up as your back-end scheduling system, create a series of appointments that take place at a regular
frequency. For example, schedule physical therapy, mental health counseling, or chronic disease management appointments that occur
every Wednesday for 12 weeks. Set the number of appointment occurrences and adjust individual occurrences before booking the
appointment series. Modify or cancel an occurrence later, or cancel the entire series if needed.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set.
How: To add recurring scheduling to the Intelligent Appointment Management home page, edit a Lightning page with the Intelligent
Appointment Management console, such as a person account. In the Healthcare Appointment Scheduler component on that page,
make sure a home page Omniscript such as healthCloudIAM_HomePage_multiLanguage is specified. Then select Show recurring
scheduling.
To add recurring scheduling to your appointment guidance flow, set the SchedulingOption output variable to Recurring.

Note: Capacity-based scheduling is supported for Salesforce Scheduler only, not external EHR systems.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Recurring Scheduling for Intelligent Appointment Management (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Help: Schedule a Recurring Appointment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Give Patients the Ability to Book Assets

Enhance your Experience Cloud site with a configurable self-scheduling workflow that enables patients to schedule appointments with
resources such as clinics and labs as well as providers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud, the Health Cloud For
Community add-on license, and the Customer Community or Customer Community Plus add-on license.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set. To customize an Experience
Cloud site, users need the Create and Set Up Experiences permission or the View Setup and Configuration permission. To configure
Omniscripts, users need the Omnistudio Admin permission set.
How: From Setup, go to the Appointment Reason object in Object Manager and add the Resource Type field to the Appointment Reason
page layout. On the Experience Cloud Site that patients and caregivers use for self-scheduling, create a page for scheduling providers
and assets. Drag the Omniscript component to the page, and in Omniscript properties, select the
selfScheduleProvidersAndAssets flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Patients to Schedule Their Own Appointments

327
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Simplify Scheduling with Enhanced Appointment Guidance

Improve your call center effectiveness by incorporating advanced scheduling features into your appointment guidance flow. Make it
easier for schedulers to book a series of related appointments, ongoing care, and appointments with assets and providers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set. To create and edit a flow, users
need the Manage Flow permission. To specify the appointment guidance flow in the Intelligent Appointment Management console,
users need the Customize Application permission. To use appointment guidance, users need the Run Flow permission.
How: From Setup, find and select Flows, and then click your appointment guidance flow. To add a variable, from the toolbox, click New
Resource. Then add input and output variables for multi-step scheduling, multi-resource scheduling, recurring appointments, and asset
scheduling.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create an Appointment Guidance Flow

Pharmacy Benefits Verification Enhancements

Streamline the pharmacy benefits verification process by enabling patient services representatives to create an electronic verification
request to verify patients' pharmacy benefits.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Pharmacy Benefits Verification
Salesforce Help: Pharmacy Benefits Verification

Provider Network Management Enhancements

Streamline provider network management with enhanced roster file submission and automated field mapping recommendation. Upload
and track roster files through your provider portal by using automatic case creation for processing. With Einstein generative AI, simplify
field mapping through automated suggestions to save time and ensure accuracy.

IN THIS SECTION:
Streamline Roster File Submission with Provider Portal Enhancements
Submit roster files directly through an authenticated Experience Cloud portal. Upload multiple files at once, access detailed file
information, and download sample templates for guidance. Track file status and view past submissions with timestamps.
Automate Field Mapping with Einstein
Use Roster File Mapping with Einstein generative AI to simplify field mapping in Provider Network Management. Automate the
mapping process when you create a writeback node, with Einstein providing field mapping suggestions and confidence scores.
Review, accept, or reject these suggestions before you add them to the target object. Save time, improve accuracy, and reduce
manual efforts with this enhanced automation capability.

Streamline Roster File Submission with Provider Portal Enhancements

Submit roster files directly through an authenticated Experience Cloud portal. Upload multiple files at once, access detailed file information,
and download sample templates for guidance. Track file status and view past submissions with timestamps.

328
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions of Health Cloud with the Health Cloud Provider
Network Management Add-On license.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Customer Community or Customer Community Plus and the Health Cloud for Experience
Cloud Sites permission set licenses.

Automate Field Mapping with Einstein

Use Roster File Mapping with Einstein generative AI to simplify field mapping in Provider Network Management. Automate the mapping
process when you create a writeback node, with Einstein providing field mapping suggestions and confidence scores. Review, accept,
or reject these suggestions before you add them to the target object. Save time, improve accuracy, and reduce manual efforts with this
enhanced automation capability.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the EinsteinGPTFeedbackAddOn,
EinsteinGPTPlatformAddOn, EinsteinGPTPromptBuilderAddOn, EinsteinGPTTrustAddOn, and EinsteinServices licenses.
For more information, see Automate Your Field Mapping with Einstein.

Provider Search Enhancements

Boost your call center’s productivity by using an autonomous Patient Services agent.

IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Patient Services with an AI Agent
Help patients and caregivers connect with the most suitable providers faster and more efficiently. Create an AI agent that engages
in conversations with a patient to identify preferences such as provider location, specialty, and gender. After independently
crosschecking patient preferences against known providers, the AI agent suggests a list of potential matches. While the AI agent
responds to routine requests from authenticated and guest users on your Experience Cloud site, your call center representatives can
focus on more complex scheduling needs.

Automate Patient Services with an AI Agent

Help patients and caregivers connect with the most suitable providers faster and more efficiently. Create an AI agent that engages in
conversations with a patient to identify preferences such as provider location, specialty, and gender. After independently crosschecking
patient preferences against known providers, the AI agent suggests a list of potential matches. While the AI agent responds to routine
requests from authenticated and guest users on your Experience Cloud site, your call center representatives can focus on more complex
scheduling needs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Agentforce Service Agent User permission set. To create and edit a flow, users need the
Manage Flow permission. To customize an Experience Cloud site, users need the Create and Set Up Experiences permission or the View
Setup and Configuration permission.
How: From Setup, in Einstein Setup, enable Turn On Einstein, and in Health Cloud, enable Einstein for Health Cloud. Create a Patient
Services agent that performs Provider Matching. Assign permissions to the Patient Services agent. From Setup, configure Messaging
Settings and create and configure an embedded service deployment for your Experience Cloud site.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Patient Services Agent for Health Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

329
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Site Management (Pilot)

Streamline the process of selecting and activating clinical research study sites and investigators through the enhanced search, assessment
creation, and scoring capabilities of Salesforce.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Site Management (Pilot)

Utilization Management Enhancements

Utilization Management now supports Coverage Requirement Discovery (CRD) and Documentation Templates and Rules (DTR) for payer
organizations. The new FHIR-aligned processes offer a smooth and refined workflow for managing requests for coverage information
and documentation requirements. Quickly process incoming requests and return responses in a matter of seconds. Reduce administrative
burdens and manual errors, ensure proper documentation for audits and regulatory compliance, and minimize costs by using the
automated end-to-end workflows.

IN THIS SECTION:
Make Coverage Requirements Easily Accessible for Providers
Ensure a smooth and efficient collaboration with providers by quickly processing requests for Coverage Requirement Discovery
(CRD). Providers can now access member and coverage-related information in real time, directly from their Electronic Health Records
(EHR) system by using Clinical Decision Support (CDS) hooks. Reduce the time spent on administrative tasks, improve the chances
of coverage approval, and reduce human errors through the automation of coverage requirement discovery.
Ensure Submission of Required Documentation for Prior Authorization Requests
Communicate documentation requirements to providers in real time by using the new Da Vinci Documentation Templates and
Rules (DTR) for Utilization Management. Fast-track the exchange of critical information by helping providers access accurate and
up-to-date documentation requirements directly from their EHR systems or SMART on FHIR apps. Make sure that prior authorization
requests meet requirements the first time, reduce delays, and improve patient outcomes.
Author FHIR-Aligned Questionnaires Using the Enhanced Discovery Framework Designer
Easily create questionnaires that follow FHIR standards as part of Da Vinci Documentation Templates and Rules (DTR). When you
select the FHIR-Aligned Questionnaire usage type in Discovery Framework Designer, the updated component displays a section
where you can add additional details to the Omniscript such as purpose, performer type, and display type. After you build the
Omniscript, you can also add review details such as the last reviewed date, approval date, and publisher.
Capture Metrics for Coverage Requirement Discovery, Documentation Templates and Rules, and Prior Authorization Requests
Capture critical details of Coverage Requirement Discovery, Documentation Templates and Rules, and Prior Authorization requests
such as the request date, response date, and response status code by using the enhanced data models. Insightful metrics help to
reduce time spent on manual preparation for audits and boost confidence in regulatory compliance.

Make Coverage Requirements Easily Accessible for Providers

Ensure a smooth and efficient collaboration with providers by quickly processing requests for Coverage Requirement Discovery (CRD).
Providers can now access member and coverage-related information in real time, directly from their Electronic Health Records (EHR)
system by using Clinical Decision Support (CDS) hooks. Reduce the time spent on administrative tasks, improve the chances of coverage
approval, and reduce human errors through the automation of coverage requirement discovery.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Utilization Management, Omnistudio Admin, and Omnistudio User permission
sets. Users also need the Rule Engine Runtime and Rule Engine Designer permission sets.

330
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Why: Coverage requirement discovery is a complex and time-consuming process that requires multiple back and forth communications
between payers and providers. With this new update, providers can now easily access the list of clinical decision support services that
you provide and check coverage requirements for members within seconds.
How: Turn on Clinical Decision Support in Setup. Define a decision matrix to determine coverage requirements, and reference the
decision matrix from the prebuilt expression set template. Then, clone and configure the prebuilt
HlsClinicalDecisionSupportProcessOrderEcho integration procedure for each clinical decision support service that you provide.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Coverage Requirement Discovery for Payers

Ensure Submission of Required Documentation for Prior Authorization Requests

Communicate documentation requirements to providers in real time by using the new Da Vinci Documentation Templates and Rules
(DTR) for Utilization Management. Fast-track the exchange of critical information by helping providers access accurate and up-to-date
documentation requirements directly from their EHR systems or SMART on FHIR apps. Make sure that prior authorization requests meet
requirements the first time, reduce delays, and improve patient outcomes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud and Discovery Framework.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Utilization Management, Omnistudio Admin, and Omnistudio User permission
sets.
How: In Setup, turn on Documentation Templates and Rules. Set up a custom entity with fields that look up to Plan Type and Code Set,
and reference the fields in the prebuilt HlsDTRQuestionnaireMapping data mapper.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Documentation Templates and Rules for Payers

Author FHIR-Aligned Questionnaires Using the Enhanced Discovery Framework Designer

Easily create questionnaires that follow FHIR standards as part of Da Vinci Documentation Templates and Rules (DTR). When you select
the FHIR-Aligned Questionnaire usage type in Discovery Framework Designer, the updated component displays a section where you
can add additional details to the Omniscript such as purpose, performer type, and display type. After you build the Omniscript, you can
also add review details such as the last reviewed date, approval date, and publisher.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud and Discovery Framework.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Utilization Management, Omnistudio Admin, and Omnistudio User permission
sets.
How: Turn on Documentation Templates and Rules in Setup.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Author FHIR-Aligned Questionnaires

Capture Metrics for Coverage Requirement Discovery, Documentation Templates and Rules, and
Prior Authorization Requests
Capture critical details of Coverage Requirement Discovery, Documentation Templates and Rules, and Prior Authorization requests such
as the request date, response date, and response status code by using the enhanced data models. Insightful metrics help to reduce time
spent on manual preparation for audits and boost confidence in regulatory compliance.

331
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Utilization Management and Hls Clinical Decision Support permission sets.
How: Turn on Clinical Decision Support and Documentation Templates and Rules in Setup.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Coverage Requirement Discovery for Payers
Salesforce Help: Documentation Templates and Rules for Payers

Expedite Your Health Cloud Setup

Use the new steps included in Health Cloud’s guided setup to create personalized and connected experiences for customers, partners,
and employees by using portals, websites, and Salesforce mobile apps integrated with Salesforce CRM. Customize Health Cloud for your
unique requirements on the Additional Setup tab. Configure security and permissions for data privacy, create and manage code set and
code set bundle records for healthcare data, and tailor Experience sites to create engaging portals, all from one place.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Health Cloud.
How: To find the updated guided setup, go to Feature Settings in Setup, and select Health Cloud Setup under Health Cloud.

New and Changed Objects in Health Cloud

Store and access more data with these new and changed Health Cloud objects.

Assessments
Represents the definition of an assessment including details such as the last revised date and purpose
Use the new AssessmentDefinition object.
Represents the reasons for an assessment such as the associated coverage information
Use the new AssessmentReason field on the ServiceAppointmentGroup object.
Specify the date and time when the assessment was completed
Use the new CompletedDateTime field on the Assessment object.
Specify the person who carried out the assessment and recorded the responses
Use the new Assessor field on the Assessment object.
Specify the unique identifier of a completed or partially completed assessment in the source system
Use the new Identifier field on the Assessment object.
Specify the category of the display text when the data type is Text Block
Use the new DisplayTextCategory field on the AssessmentQuestion object.
Specify the category of the display text when the data type is Text Block
Use the new DisplayTextCategory field on the AssessmentQuestionVersion object.
Specify the origin of the assessment question response
Use the new OriginType field on the AssessmentQuestionResponse object.
Specify the role of the person who reviewed and edited the response
Use the new ReviewerRole field on the AssessmentQuestionResponse object.
Specify the person who reviewed and edited the response
Use the new Reviewer field on the AssessmentQuestionResponse object.

332
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Home Health
Specify additional notes such as comments from the party or the recurrence pattern of appointments associated with the
appointment request
Use the new AdditionalNotes field on the PartyAppointmentRequest object.
Specify the count of recurring appointments associated with the appointment request
Use the new RecurringAppointmentCount field on the PartyAppointmentRequest object.

Intelligent Appointment Management

Specify the type of resource associated with the appointment
Use the new ResourceType field on the AppointmentReason object.
Specify the type of appointment group associated with the service appointment group
Use the new AppointmentGroupType field on the ServiceAppointmentGroup object.
Indicate whether the flow associated with the work type code set bundle checks prerequisites or not
Use the new HasPrerequisitesCheckInFlow field on the WorkTypeCodeSetBundle object.

Utilization Management
Represents details about a service information request, such as the date and time when the request was submitted and the
type of service requested
Use the new ServiceInformationRequest object.
Represent additional details about a service information request, such as the detail type and detail code
Use the new ServiceInfoRequestDetail object.
Represent a response to a service information request
Use the new ServiceInformationResponse object.
Represent coverage details about a service information response. For example, if additional information or documentation
is required for the coverage to be provided
Use the new ServiceInfoResponseCoverage object.
Represents additional coverage details about a service information response
Use the new SvcInfoRespCoverageDetail object.
Represent suggestions in a service information response. For example, suggesting a change in medication dosage
Use the new ServiceInfoRespSuggestion object.
Represent actions to be performed as suggested by a service information response
Use the new ServiceInfoResponseAction object.
Represent the URLs of resources relevant to a service information response
Use the new ServiceInfoRespResourceUrl object.
Represent the possible reasons for overriding a service information response
Use the new ServiceInfoRespOvrideOpt object.
Represent the questionnaire associated with a service information request or service information response coverage
Use the new SvcInfoRelatedQuestionnaire object.
Represent the system operation performed for a service information request such as a session launch or a questionnaire
package operation
Use the new ServiceInfoRequestOperation object.

333
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Health Cloud

Represent the outcome of a service information request operation

Use the new ServiceInfoRqstOpOutcome object.
Represent details about supporting content of a care request such as assessments or content documents
Use the new CareRequestSupportingCntnt object.
Represent information about a care request exchange
Use the new CareRequestExchangeInfo object.
Specify the type of plan the member is covered by
Use the new CoveragePlanType field on the CareRequestExtension object.
Specify the URL of supporting documentation of a care request such as a questionnaire
Use the new SupportingDocUrl field on the CareRequestExtension object.
Specify an identifier of the client's source system that sent the care request
Use the new ClientSourceSysIdentifier field on the CareRequestExtension object.
Specify the code of the action taken by the reviewer for the requested drug
Use the new StatusCode field on the CareRequestDrug object.
Specify the transaction number assigned to the drug request
Use the new TransactionNumber field on the CareRequestDrug object.
Specify the unique identifier of the coverage assertion
Use the new AssertionIdentifier field on the CareRequestDrug object.
Specify the date and time when the drug request was submitted
Use the new SubmittedDateTime field on the CareRequestDrug object.
Specify the date and time when the response was sent for the drug request
Use the new ResponseDateTime field on the CareRequestDrug object.
Specify the number of responses required for the requested drug
Use the new RequiredResponseCount field on the CareRequestDrug object.
Specify the service information response associated with the drug request
Use the new ServiceInformationResponse field on the CareRequestDrug object.
Specify the code of the action taken by the reviewer for the requested item
Use the new StatusCode field on the CareRequestItem object.
Specify the transaction number assigned to the item request
Use the new TransactionNumber field on the CareRequestItem object.
Specify the unique identifier of the requested item in the coverage information
Use the new AssertionIdentifier field on the CareRequestItem object.
Specify the date and time when the item request was submitted
Use the new SubmittedDateTime field on the CareRequestItem object.
Specify the date and time when the response was sent for the requested item
Use the new ResponseDateTime field on the CareRequestItem object.
Specify the number of responses required for the requested item
Use the new RequiredResponseCount field on the CareRequestItem object.

334
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

Specify the service information response associated with the requested item
Use the new ServiceInformationResponse field on the CareRequestItem object.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Guide: Home Health

Insurance
Give users greater control over their data and enable seamless integrations with an enhanced Insurance data model. Streamline and
manage policy transactions, product configuration, pricing, and quoting workflows with ease. The enhancements to Insurance (Managed
Package) support multi-root policies by using new services.

IN THIS SECTION:
Insurance
Simplify insurance quote and policy management with new APIs and invocable actions. Gain granular control over product and
quote pricing by using pricing procedures and procedure plans. Create products, attributes, and rules quickly in Product Catalog
Management.
Insurance (Managed Package)
Use new managed package services to issue multi-root policies and create endorsement quotes.

Insurance
Simplify insurance quote and policy management with new APIs and invocable actions. Gain granular control over product and quote
pricing by using pricing procedures and procedure plans. Create products, attributes, and rules quickly in Product Catalog Management.

IN THIS SECTION:
Policy Management
Streamline policy transactions such as issuance, endorsement, renewal, and cancellation for short-term, annual, or multi-year policies,
by using APIs and invocable actions. Calculate premiums, taxes, and prorated amounts for terms with greater efficiency and accuracy.
Enhance productivity by providing insurance reps with immediate access to comprehensive policy details through the Insurance
Policy Lightning web component.
Products
Build new products, attributes, and rules faster by using Product Catalog Management. Save time and reduce errors by using product
extended attributes to retrieve field values from other objects for use in Products.
Pricing
Tailor pricing formulas to provide your customers with a smooth pricing experience by using pricing procedures. Price quotes and
products more accurately by defining pricing procedures at the quote or product level.
Quoting
Streamline quoting for external users with invocable actions, and use APIs to enhance quote generation. Internal users can use the
quote configurator to customize, create, update, and price quotes with ease.
Rules
Define criteria for displaying accurate products, minimizing configuration errors, and managing the progression of quotes through
the sales stages.

335
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

New Connect REST APIs in Insurance

Learn more about the new Connect REST APIs in Insurance.
New Invocable Actions in Insurance
Use the new invocable actions for Insurance.

Policy Management
Streamline policy transactions such as issuance, endorsement, renewal, and cancellation for short-term, annual, or multi-year policies,
by using APIs and invocable actions. Calculate premiums, taxes, and prorated amounts for terms with greater efficiency and accuracy.
Enhance productivity by providing insurance reps with immediate access to comprehensive policy details through the Insurance Policy
Lightning web component.

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Policies with Policy APIs and Invocable Actions
Use policy APIs and invocable actions to perform the issuance, endorsement, renewal, and cancellation of policies. Reduce manual
effort and minimize errors by using these capabilities that enhance workflow efficiency and integrate seamlessly with Salesforce
flows and Omniscripts.
View Policy Information at a Glance
Show insurance reps policy details and related attributes in a single location by using the Insurance Policy Lightning web component.
They can review the policy hierarchy—which includes insured assets, participants, coverages—and evaluate premiums, taxes, and
fees. You can also configure the side panel to provide insurance reps more details and attributes for each policy line item.

Manage Policies with Policy APIs and Invocable Actions

Use policy APIs and invocable actions to perform the issuance, endorsement, renewal, and cancellation of policies. Reduce manual effort
and minimize errors by using these capabilities that enhance workflow efficiency and integrate seamlessly with Salesforce flows and
Omniscripts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
DigitalInsuranceProductAdministrationAddOn, DigitalInsurancePolicyAdministrationAddOn, DigitalInsuranceProductRuntimeCCAddOn,
and DigitalInsuranceProductRuntimePCAddOn licenses.
Who: This feature is available to users with the DigitalInsuranceProductAdmin, DigitalInsuranceProductAdminRunTime,
DigitalInsurancePolicyAdmin, and FSCInsurance permission sets.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Insurance APIs
Salesforce Help: Insurance Invocable Actions

View Policy Information at a Glance

Show insurance reps policy details and related attributes in a single location by using the Insurance Policy Lightning web component.
They can review the policy hierarchy—which includes insured assets, participants, coverages—and evaluate premiums, taxes, and fees.
You can also configure the side panel to provide insurance reps more details and attributes for each policy line item.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
DigitalInsuranceProductAdministrationAddOn and the DigitalInsurancePolicyAdministrationAddOn licenses.

336
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

Who: To configure Insurance Policy Lightning web component, users need DigitalInsuranceProductAdmin,
DigitalInsuranceProductAdminRunTime, DigitalInsurancePolicyAdmin, and FSCInsurance permission sets.
How: Add the Insurance Policy component to the Insurance Policy page via Lightning App Builder.

Products
Build new products, attributes, and rules faster by using Product Catalog Management. Save time and reduce errors by using product
extended attributes to retrieve field values from other objects for use in Products.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create and Manage Insurance Products with Ease
Quickly design and manage an entire product portfolio with Product Catalog Management for Insurance. Components such as
attributes, product classifications, and rules streamline your product building workflow so that you can focus on delivering exceptional
products to the market quickly and easily.
Reduce Data Duplication by Using Extended Attributes
Keep customer data centralized and prevent duplication by using product extended attributes to retrieve field values from other
objects. Save time and effort by configuring an extended attribute to fetch specific field values from existing records.

Create and Manage Insurance Products with Ease

Quickly design and manage an entire product portfolio with Product Catalog Management for Insurance. Components such as attributes,
product classifications, and rules streamline your product building workflow so that you can focus on delivering exceptional products
to the market quickly and easily.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Insurance Platform
where Digital Insurance Product Administration and Product Catalog Management are enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manage Product Catalog permission set.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Product Catalog Management.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Product Catalog Management
Salesforce Help: Set Up Insurance Products

Reduce Data Duplication by Using Extended Attributes

Keep customer data centralized and prevent duplication by using product extended attributes to retrieve field values from other objects.
Save time and effort by configuring an extended attribute to fetch specific field values from existing records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Insurance Platform
where Digital Insurance Product Administration and Product Catalog Management are enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manage Product Catalog permission set.

337
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

How: From the Product Catalog Management app’s home page, click Attributes. Create an attribute, and then assign it to a product
classification.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Dynamic Attributes
Salesforce Help: Create Extended Attributes

Pricing
Tailor pricing formulas to provide your customers with a smooth pricing experience by using pricing procedures. Price quotes and
products more accurately by defining pricing procedures at the quote or product level.

IN THIS SECTION:
Accurately Calculate Insurance Prices with Precise Pricing Formulas
Calculate the final net price of your insurance products and services by using pricing procedures.
Offer Precise Product and Quote Pricing to Customers
Calculate prices more accurately for insurance products by defining pricing procedures at the product and quote levels instead of
at the org level.

Accurately Calculate Insurance Prices with Precise Pricing Formulas

Calculate the final net price of your insurance products and services by using pricing procedures.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Insurance Platform
where Digital Insurance Product Administration and Salesforce Pricing are enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Customize Application and Salesforce Pricing Design Time permissions.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Pricing Procedures. Create a pricing procedure, and then use Pricing Procedure Builder
to add pricing elements.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pricing Procedures
Salesforce Help: Set Up Insurance Pricing

Offer Precise Product and Quote Pricing to Customers

Calculate prices more accurately for insurance products by defining pricing procedures at the product and quote levels instead of at the
org level.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Insurance Platform
where Digital Insurance Product Administration and Salesforce Pricing are enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Procedure Plan Access and Salesforce Pricing Design Time permissions.

338
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

How: From Setup, find and select Procedure Plan Setup. Create a procedure plan and map pricing procedures to specific product or
transaction types for quotes.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Procedure Plan Framework
Salesforce Help: Assign a Specific Pricing Procedure to a Product
Salesforce Help: Setup for Insurance Quoting

Quoting
Streamline quoting for external users with invocable actions, and use APIs to enhance quote generation. Internal users can use the quote
configurator to customize, create, update, and price quotes with ease.

IN THIS SECTION:
Facilitate Quote Management with New Quoting Invocable Actions and APIs
Automate quote generation by using new quoting APIs and invocable actions to create or modify quotes and line items. Guide users
through quoting processes with APIs and invocable actions designed to integrate with Salesforce Flows or Omniscripts.
Simplify Quote Management with Quote Configurator
Streamline quote management processes for internal users by using the quote configurator. Use an intuitive user interface to help
internal users customize, create, update, and price quotes.

Facilitate Quote Management with New Quoting Invocable Actions and APIs
Automate quote generation by using new quoting APIs and invocable actions to create or modify quotes and line items. Guide users
through quoting processes with APIs and invocable actions designed to integrate with Salesforce Flows or Omniscripts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Insurance Platform.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Insurance Quoting APIs and Invocable Actions
Salesforce Help: Insurance Invocable Actions
Salesforce Help: Insurance APIs

Simplify Quote Management with Quote Configurator

Streamline quote management processes for internal users by using the quote configurator. Use an intuitive user interface to help
internal users customize, create, update, and price quotes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Insurance Platform.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Insurance Quote Configurator

Rules
Define criteria for displaying accurate products, minimizing configuration errors, and managing the progression of quotes through the
sales stages.

339
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Quote-Related Business Decisions with Product Underwriting Rules
Use predefined conditions to determine whether a quote progresses to the next state. You can set rules for state transition and
define action for when conditions are met and not met. For example, you can define a rule to move a quote from Submitted state
to Underwriter Review state if the Risk Category is High.
Capture Quotes Accurately with Configuration and Qualification Rules
Define product behavior when users configure quotes. Implement qualification rules to define customer eligibility for products, so
that users see only specific products in the product catalog. Simplify configuration experience and reduce configuration errors with
configuration rules.

Automate Quote-Related Business Decisions with Product Underwriting Rules

Use predefined conditions to determine whether a quote progresses to the next state. You can set rules for state transition and define
action for when conditions are met and not met. For example, you can define a rule to move a quote from Submitted state to Underwriter
Review state if the Risk Category is High.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Digital Insurance Platform
where Digital Insurance Product Administration, Stage Management Design User, and Stage Management User Add-ons are enabled.
How: From Stage Management, create a stage definition for the Quote object and then configure stage transitions for each stage in the
Quote. In the Lightning App Builder, add the Underwriting Rules Lightning web component to the insurance product page. Use that
component in the product record to create new rules.

Capture Quotes Accurately with Configuration and Qualification Rules

Define product behavior when users configure quotes. Implement qualification rules to define customer eligibility for products, so that
users see only specific products in the product catalog. Simplify configuration experience and reduce configuration errors with configuration
rules.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Digital Insurance Platform where
Product Configuration is enabled with the Revenue Lifecycle Management Add-on.
How: To create new qualification rules, from the Product Catalog Management home page, click Qualification Rules and select New.
To create new configuration rules, from the Product Catalog Management home page, click Configuration Rules and select New.

New Connect REST APIs in Insurance

Learn more about the new Connect REST APIs in Insurance.
Issue Insurance Policy
Create an insurance policy.
Endorse Insurance Policy
Create an endorsed version of an insurance policy.
Cancel Insurance Policy
Cancel insurance policy versions.
Get Insurance Policy Details
Retrieve insurance policy details, including the list of participants, coverages, and assets, along with their attributes.
Create Insurance Quote
Create an insurance quote.

340
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

Update Insurance Quote

Update an insurance quote by adding, updating, or deleting quote line items.
Renew Insurance Policy
Renew an insurance policy.
Insurance Product Rating
Rate products for use in quoting processes.
Insurance Underwriting Rules
Create an underwriting rule for a root product based on the selected state definition, transition, and object name.
Insurance Underwriting Rules (Invoke)
Invoke underwriting rules for different object records during run time.
Insurance Underwriting Rule
Update or fetch an underwriting rule for a root product.
Insurance Product Surcharge
Create one or more product surcharges to associate with a root product.
Insurance Product Surcharges
Update or fetch one or more product surcharges to associate with a root product.
Insurance Get Quote Detail
Retrieve quote and quote line item details from a quote record, along with their attributes.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Insurance APIs

New Invocable Actions in Insurance

Use the new invocable actions for Insurance.
Issue an insurance policy
Use the issueInsurancePolicy action.
Endorse an insurance policy
Use the endorseInsurancePolicy action.
Renew an insurance policy
Use the renewInsurancePolicy action.
Cancel an insurance policy
Use the cancelInsurancePolicy action.
Get the details of an insurance policy
Use the getInsurancePolicy action.
Create an insurance quote
Use the createInsuranceQuote action.
Recalculate the price of insurance products
Use the repriceInsuranceProduct action.

341
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Insurance

Get the details of an insurance quote

Use the getInsuranceQuoteDetails action.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Insurance Invocable Actions

Insurance (Managed Package)

Use new managed package services to issue multi-root policies and create endorsement quotes.

IN THIS SECTION:
Transform Insurance Offerings with Multi-Root Policy Services
Facilitate insurance carriers in bundling multiple products such as auto and home insurance, into one unified policy by using multi-root
policy services. Easily manage policies, reduce administrative hassle, and save money by creating, endorsing, and processing
transactions for multi-root policies. Boost customer retention and meet the demand for bundled products by using these
comprehensive packages.
Ensure Precision in Pending Payment Calculations
Exclude specific claim payment statuses from pending payment calculations by configuring the ExcludeStatusesForPayment custom
setting. This setting ensures accurate pending values in the Policy Terms Standing chart for Claim Coverage Payment Detail records.
For example, excluding the Approved for Payment status makes sure that payments already made aren’t counted as pending, even
if the claim status changes from Paid to Approved for Payment.
New Services in Insurance
Use the new services for Insurance.

Transform Insurance Offerings with Multi-Root Policy Services

Facilitate insurance carriers in bundling multiple products such as auto and home insurance, into one unified policy by using multi-root
policy services. Easily manage policies, reduce administrative hassle, and save money by creating, endorsing, and processing transactions
for multi-root policies. Boost customer retention and meet the demand for bundled products by using these comprehensive packages.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions with the Insurance Industries
managed package.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Managing Multiroot Policies
Salesforce Help: InsPolicyService:createMultiRootPolicy
Salesforce Help: InsPolicyService:createMultiRootPolicyVersion
Salesforce Help: InsQuoteService:createEndorsementQuote
Salesforce Help: InsPolicyService:getPolicyAsyncJobStatus

Ensure Precision in Pending Payment Calculations

Exclude specific claim payment statuses from pending payment calculations by configuring the ExcludeStatusesForPayment custom
setting. This setting ensures accurate pending values in the Policy Terms Standing chart for Claim Coverage Payment Detail records. For
example, excluding the Approved for Payment status makes sure that payments already made aren’t counted as pending, even if the
claim status changes from Paid to Approved for Payment.

342
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions with the Insurance Industries
and the Insurance Industries Extension managed packages.
How: From Setup, select Custom Settings. Open Insurance Configuration Setup and edit ExcludeStatusesForPayment. In the Setup
Value field, enter the payment detail statuses to exclude from the pending amount calculation.

New Services in Insurance

Use the new services for Insurance.
Issue a multi-root policy from a quote
Use the InsPolicyService:createMultiRootPolicy service.
Endorse a multi-root policy from an endorsed quote
Use the InsPolicyService:createMultiRootPolicyVersion service.
Create an endorsement quote with quote line items for single-root and multi-root policies
Use the InsQuoteService:createEndorsementQuote service.
Retrieve the status of asynchronous batch jobs
Use the InsPolicyService:getPolicyAsyncJobStatus service.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: InsPolicyService:createMultiRootPolicy
Salesforce Help: InsPolicyService:createMultiRootPolicyVersion
Salesforce Help: InsQuoteService:createEndorsementQuote
Salesforce Help: InsPolicyService:getPolicyAsyncJobStatus

Life Sciences Cloud

Simplify the financial assistance program enrollment process by allowing appeals for rejected applications, saving time and effort.
Enhance participant management with improved search settings, accessibility features, configuration experience, and recruitment
workflow. Help patient services representatives to verify patients' pharmacy benefits through electronic verification requests. Speed up
the selection and activation of sites and investigators by using advanced search, assessment creation, and scoring tools.

IN THIS SECTION:
Financial Assistance Program Enhancements
Streamline the enrollment process for a financial assistance program by using appeals. Save time by filing an appeal against a rejected
application instead of submitting a new application.
Participant Management Enhancements
Improve the accuracy of clinical trial search by configuring range types to filter the results. Save time and effort and ensure a seamless
configuration experience by using a new toggle. Enhance the recruitment efficiency by using a unified flow that helps users capture
the assessment responses of registered candidates. Provide an Omni-Channel experience to candidates by making the recruitment
journey accessible on mobile and tablet browsers.
Pharmacy Benefits Verification Enhancements
Streamline the pharmacy benefits verification process by enabling patient services representatives to create an electronic verification
request to verify patients' pharmacy benefits.

343
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Site Management (Pilot)

Streamline the process of selecting and activating clinical research study sites and investigators through the enhanced search,
assessment creation, and scoring capabilities of Salesforce. Configure the search settings and use Criteria-Based Search and Filter
(CBSF) to identify the sites and investigators that fulfill the clinical trial requirements. Manage and track the overall lifecycle of the
identified sites by creating care program sites.
New and Changed Objects in Life Sciences Cloud
Store and access more data with the new and changed Life Sciences Cloud objects.

Financial Assistance Program Enhancements

Streamline the enrollment process for a financial assistance program by using appeals. Save time by filing an appeal against a rejected
application instead of submitting a new application.

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Appeals for Financial Assistance Program
Enable your patient services representatives to file an appeal for a rejected application on behalf of a care program enrollee. After
an appeal is filed, another representative can approve or reject the appeal by verifying whether the issues leading to the initial
rejection were resolved.
View the Appeals History of a Rejected Application
Track a rejected application's journey by reviewing the appeals history of the application along with the reasons for the rejection.

Manage Appeals for Financial Assistance Program

Enable your patient services representatives to file an appeal for a rejected application on behalf of a care program enrollee. After an
appeal is filed, another representative can approve or reject the appeal by verifying whether the issues leading to the initial rejection
were resolved.
Where: This feature applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud
license.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud Foundation (for Health
Cloud), Industry Service Excellence, OmniStudio Admin, OmniStudio User, Rule Engine Runtime, Rule Engine Designer and Manage
Financial Assistance Program permission sets.
How: Add the FinancialAssistanceProgramContainer Flexcard to the Care Program Enrollee record page. To file an appeal, under Financial
Assistance Programs on any care program enrollee record page, go to the Applications tab, and click File Appeal.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Financial Assistance Program
Salesforce Help: File an Appeal for a Financial Assistance Program

View the Appeals History of a Rejected Application

Track a rejected application's journey by reviewing the appeals history of the application along with the reasons for the rejection.
Where: This feature applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud
license.

344
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Who: This feature is available to users with Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud Foundation (for Health Cloud),
Industry Service Excellence, OmniStudio Admin, OmniStudio User, Rule Engine Runtime, Rule Engine Designer and Manage Financial
Assistance Program permission sets.
How: Add the FinancialAssistanceProgramContainer Flexcard to the Care Program Enrollee record page. To file an appeal, under Financial
Assistance Programs on any care program enrollee record page, go to the Applications tab, and click Appeals History.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Financial Assistance Program
Salesforce Help: Approve or Reject an Appeal

Participant Management Enhancements

Improve the accuracy of clinical trial search by configuring range types to filter the results. Save time and effort and ensure a seamless
configuration experience by using a new toggle. Enhance the recruitment efficiency by using a unified flow that helps users capture the
assessment responses of registered candidates. Provide an Omni-Channel experience to candidates by making the recruitment journey
accessible on mobile and tablet browsers.

IN THIS SECTION:
Access Recruitment Features on Mobile or Tablet Devices
Reduce recruitment time and costs and deliver an Omni-Channel experience to the candidates by making the entire recruitment
journey more responsive and easily accessible. Candidates can securely engage with the recruitment process from the convenience
of their mobile phone or tablet (not a Salesforce app). Previously, they accessed the recruitment activities only on the web browser.
Configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter Automatically with a Toggle
Save time and effort and ensure a seamless configuration experience with a new toggle in the Participant Management settings.
Merge Prescreening and Registration Omniscripts for a Unified Flow
Enhance recruitment efficiency by introducing a unified flow that helps users to seamlessly capture the assessment responses of
registered candidates. They can capture and use the assessment responses for future evaluations by using the newly merged
Omniscript.
Refine Search Results by Using Range-Based Filtering Options
Improve the accuracy of clinical trial search results for number and date fields by configuring range types to filter results in Criteria-Based
Search and Filter. Configure the In-Range and Range Overlap range types, and users can filter the results based on the configuration
you select.

Access Recruitment Features on Mobile or Tablet Devices

Reduce recruitment time and costs and deliver an Omni-Channel experience to the candidates by making the entire recruitment journey
more responsive and easily accessible. Candidates can securely engage with the recruitment process from the convenience of their
mobile phone or tablet (not a Salesforce app). Previously, they accessed the recruitment activities only on the web browser.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud or Life Sciences Cloud and the Participant Enrollment
add-on license.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter, Criteria-Based Search and Filter, and Criteria-Based Search and Filter
Experience Cloud User permission set licenses.

345
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter Automatically with a Toggle

Save time and effort and ensure a seamless configuration experience with a new toggle in the Participant Management settings.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud or Life Sciences Cloud and the Participant Enrollment
add-on license.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Criteria-Based Search and Filter and Clinical Trial Manager permission set licenses.
How: In Setup, find and select Participant Management Settings. Turn on Participant Recruitment and Enrollment. Under Set Up
Participant Recruitment, turn on Enable Criteria-Based Search and Filter Default Configuration.

Merge Prescreening and Registration Omniscripts for a Unified Flow

Enhance recruitment efficiency by introducing a unified flow that helps users to seamlessly capture the assessment responses of registered
candidates. They can capture and use the assessment responses for future evaluations by using the newly merged Omniscript.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud or Life Sciences Cloud and the Participant Enrollment
add-on license.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter, Omnistudio Admin, and Omnistudio User permission set licenses.
How: From Setup, enable the Prefill Assessment Questions, Omnistudio Settings, Participant Recruitment and Enrollment, Data Pipelines,
and Criteria-Based Search and Filter org preferences. Add the Authorization Form Text record details and Person Account record ID to
the TrialManagement_candidateEligibiltiyAndRegistration Omniscript. Add the reCAPTCHA to the Omniscript, and configure the duplicate
rules.

Refine Search Results by Using Range-Based Filtering Options

Improve the accuracy of clinical trial search results for number and date fields by configuring range types to filter results in Criteria-Based
Search and Filter. Configure the In-Range and Range Overlap range types, and users can filter the results based on the configuration you
select.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud or Life Sciences Cloud and the Participant Enrollment
add-on license.
Who: Users with the Criteria-Based Search and Filter system permission can configure and use the criteria-based search and filter
capabilities. To select or configure an Omnistudio Flexcard for the card view, users need the Omnistudio Admin permission set.
Why: Range type configuration helps users tailor the search results based on the number and date fields. Consider the example of a
search for clinical trials based on the participant's age.
• In-Range: You set the age range to 25–35 years. When you use the In-Range type, the results include only the trials where the
candidate's age falls within the range, such as 26, 30, and 35. It excludes the trials where the participant's age is outside the specified
range, such as 24 and 36.
• Range Overlap: You set the age range to 25–35 years. When you use the Range Overlap type, the results include the trials where the
age range extends into or overlaps with the specified range, such as age ranges of 20–30 and 30–40.
How: In Setup, find and select Criteria-Based Search and Filter. On the setup page, turn on Criteria-Based Search and Filter. On the
Search Configuration tab, click New.

Pharmacy Benefits Verification Enhancements

Streamline the pharmacy benefits verification process by enabling patient services representatives to create an electronic verification
request to verify patients' pharmacy benefits.

346
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Representative's Productivity with Electronic Verification
Streamline the process of verifying a patient’s pharmacy benefits by using electronic verification, eliminating the need for multiple
manual interactions with payors. Patient services representatives can engage more with patients, gain deeper insights into patients'
needs, and deliver enhanced support in patients' healthcare journeys. Your representatives can electronically verify an existing
manual verification request too.

Boost Representative's Productivity with Electronic Verification

Streamline the process of verifying a patient’s pharmacy benefits by using electronic verification, eliminating the need for multiple
manual interactions with payors. Patient services representatives can engage more with patients, gain deeper insights into patients'
needs, and deliver enhanced support in patients' healthcare journeys. Your representatives can electronically verify an existing manual
verification request too.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud
license.
Who: This feature is available to users with the OmniStudio Admin, OmniStudio User, Manage Pharmacy Benefits Verification, and Health
Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud Foundation (for Health Cloud) permission set.
How: Add the PharmacyBenefitsVerification Flexcard to the Care Program Enrollee record page. To verify the pharmacy benefits
electronically, under Pharmacy Benefits Verification on any care program enrollee record page, click New Electronic Request.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pharmacy Benefits Verification

Site Management (Pilot)

Streamline the process of selecting and activating clinical research study sites and investigators through the enhanced search, assessment
creation, and scoring capabilities of Salesforce. Configure the search settings and use Criteria-Based Search and Filter (CBSF) to identify
the sites and investigators that fulfill the clinical trial requirements. Manage and track the overall lifecycle of the identified sites by creating
care program sites.
Send site feasibility questionnaires to the care program sites to assess the suitability of the sites and investigators from their responses.
Enable faster site selection by using the assessment scoring feature that automatically scores the overall response for an assessment
based on the scores assigned to individual responses to objective questions. Easily find the assessment responses with higher scores
from the assessment score dashboard. For quicker turnaround of the site selection process in the future, assign tags to the sites and
investigators based on the therapeutic areas and other important features. The investigators can review and respond to the assessments
on the Experience Cloud portal. For questions that have the prefill option enabled, investigators can review their responses from the
earlier questionnaires. They can also review and update the details of their own profiles and the profiles of their sites.

Note: Site Management is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

IN THIS SECTION:
Identify Investigators and Sites for Clinical Trials by Using Enhanced Search Capabilities (Pilot)
Study managers can use a customized search to obtain a comprehensive list of the suitable sites and investigators for conducting
a clinical research study. With Criteria-Based Search and Filter (CBSF), they can map fields from the relevant objects and configure
searchable objects and actions. They can also convert these sites into care program sites for effective management and tracking.

347
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Create and Deploy Site Feasibility Assessments (Pilot)

Identify the sites that match the research study requirements by using site feasibility assessments. Study managers can create and
deploy a questionnaire or use a previously used questionnaire. Enable the built-in generative AI and Industries AI capabilities to
create questionnaires that are tailored to the specific study requirements. Configure the prefill assessment settings to enable study
managers to use assessment responses from a previous assessment questionnaire. In the assessment score dashboard, they can
easily view and analyze the responses from the sites and investigators.
Assign Scores to the Investigators and Sites for Effective and Faster Site Selection (Pilot)
Generate a weighted investigator or a site score by considering attributes such as clinical trial experience, trial performance cycle
times, and compliance. Use the site score to understand the feasibility of the site for conducting specific studies.
Accelerate the Site Feasibility Assessment Process (Pilot)
Assign scores to the responses received from the sites and use the scores to generate a priority list that’s specific to the investigator
or site. Study managers can add scoring rules such as base score and weightage, and then assign a score value to each option. The
scoring feature uses the inbuilt formula question capabilities of the discovery framework.
Tag the Sites and Investigators for Future Site Selection Efforts (Pilot)
Configure the Interest Tagging feature for research study sites and investigators to help Study Managers categorize the sites and
investigators based on tags. Organize your interest tags in up to three levels of categories. Study Managers can check the tags in the
future to identify the suitable sites and investigators for conducting a specific study.
Accelerate Your Site Management Configurations with a Guided Setup (Pilot)
Use the guided setup to easily and quickly set up the Site Management feature. Follow the guided setup to go to the setup page
for each configuration task and complete the task.

Identify Investigators and Sites for Clinical Trials by Using Enhanced Search Capabilities (Pilot)
Study managers can use a customized search to obtain a comprehensive list of the suitable sites and investigators for conducting a
clinical research study. With Criteria-Based Search and Filter (CBSF), they can map fields from the relevant objects and configure searchable
objects and actions. They can also convert these sites into care program sites for effective management and tracking.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud
license.

Note: Site Management is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud Foundation (for Health
Cloud) permission set.
How: In Setup, find and select Site Management Settings. On the setup page, turn on Site Management, and follow the guided setup
to configure the feature. To set up a search, go to Set Up Site Investigator Search.

Create and Deploy Site Feasibility Assessments (Pilot)

Identify the sites that match the research study requirements by using site feasibility assessments. Study managers can create and deploy
a questionnaire or use a previously used questionnaire. Enable the built-in generative AI and Industries AI capabilities to create
questionnaires that are tailored to the specific study requirements. Configure the prefill assessment settings to enable study managers
to use assessment responses from a previous assessment questionnaire. In the assessment score dashboard, they can easily view and
analyze the responses from the sites and investigators.

348
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Einstein GPT Platform and the
Omnistudio Designer licenses, and the Industries Generative AI platform license. The Site Management (Pilot) org permission must be
enabled with Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud license.

Note: Site Management is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Study Manager and Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) permission sets or the
Health Cloud Foundation (for Health Cloud) permission set. Users also require the Generative AI Assessment Questions, NLP Service, and
Scoring Framework licenses.
How: In Setup, find and select Site Management Settings. On the setup page, turn on Site Management to use the guided setup. To
set up assessments in your org, go to Get Your Org Ready for Assessments. To enable the assessment generation using the built-in AI
capabilities, go to Enable Generative AI Assessment Generation. To set up your Experience Cloud portal, go to Configure Digital Experiences.

Warning: Generative AI can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume
responsibility for how the outcomes of Einstein are applied to your organization.

Assign Scores to the Investigators and Sites for Effective and Faster Site Selection (Pilot)
Generate a weighted investigator or a site score by considering attributes such as clinical trial experience, trial performance cycle times,
and compliance. Use the site score to understand the feasibility of the site for conducting specific studies.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Site Management (Pilot) org permission
enabled with Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud license.

Note: Site Management is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud Foundation (for Health
Cloud) permission sets.
How: In Setup, find and select Site Management Settings. On the setup page, turn on Site Management to use the guided setup. To
set up scores for site investigators, in the Set Up Site Investigator Search section, click Go to Setup next to Set Up Site Investigator
Scoring.

Accelerate the Site Feasibility Assessment Process (Pilot)

Assign scores to the responses received from the sites and use the scores to generate a priority list that’s specific to the investigator or
site. Study managers can add scoring rules such as base score and weightage, and then assign a score value to each option. The scoring
feature uses the inbuilt formula question capabilities of the discovery framework.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Site Management (Pilot) org permission
enabled with Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud license.

Note: Site Management is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: This feature is available to users with the OmniStudio Admin and Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud
Foundation (for Health Cloud) permission set.
How: In Setup, find and select Site Management Settings. On the setup page, turn on Site Management to use the guided setup. To
set up scores for sites, go to Configure Site Feasibility Score.

349
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Tag the Sites and Investigators for Future Site Selection Efforts (Pilot)
Configure the Interest Tagging feature for research study sites and investigators to help Study Managers categorize the sites and
investigators based on tags. Organize your interest tags in up to three levels of categories. Study Managers can check the tags in the
future to identify the suitable sites and investigators for conducting a specific study.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Site Management (Pilot) org permission
enabled with Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud license.

Note: Site Management is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud Foundation (for Health
Cloud) permission set.
How: In Setup, find and select Site Management Settings. On the setup page, turn on Site Management and follow the guided setup
to configure the feature. To set up interest tags, go to Set Up Interest Tagging.

Accelerate Your Site Management Configurations with a Guided Setup (Pilot)

Use the guided setup to easily and quickly set up the Site Management feature. Follow the guided setup to go to the setup page for
each configuration task and complete the task.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Site Management (Pilot) org permission
enabled with Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud license.

Note: Site Management is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter (for Life Sciences Cloud) or Health Cloud Foundation (for Health
Cloud) permission set.
How: In Setup, find and select Site Management Settings. On the setup page, turn on Site Management and use the guided setup.

New and Changed Objects in Life Sciences Cloud

Store and access more data with the new and changed Life Sciences Cloud objects.

Site Management (Pilot)

Represent information about the clinical trial investigator associated with a site
Use the new Care Site Investigator Searchable Field object.
Represent the association of a care program site and a contract
Use the new Care Program Site Contract object.
Represent the details of a party's publication
Use the new Party Publication object.
Represent the details of the research study protocol document
Use the new Research Study Protocol Information object.
Represent the healthcare facility associated with the accreditation
Use the new HealthcareFacility field on the Accreditation object.

350
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Indicate the investigator who is responsible for conducting the research study at the healthcare facility.
Use the new Investigator field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the turnaround time for the preparation of the regulatory documents for IRB or the ethics committee submission
Use the new RegulatoryDocTurnaroundDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of days between the start of the site activation process and the release of the investigational product
at the site
Use the new InvtglProductReleaseDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of days between the site qualification visit and the site initiation visit
Use the new QualVstToInitVstDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of days between the site activation and the first participant visit to the site
Use the new SiteActvToFirstPtcpDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of days between the site activation and the last participant visit to the site
Use the new SiteActvToLastPtcpDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the projected number of days to enroll participants at the site
Use the new ProjectedPtcpEnrlDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the actual number of days spent enrolling participants at the site
Use the new ActualPtcpEnrollmentDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of participants that are expected to enroll for the research study at the site
Use the new ProjectedPtcpEnrlCount field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the actual number of participants that are enrolled for the research study at the site
Use the new ActualPtcpEnrollmentCount field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of participants screened for the research study at the site
Use the new ScreenedParticipantCount field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of participants randomly assigned to different study groups at the site
Use the new RandomizedParticipantCount field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of participants who completed the research study at the site
Use the new RsrchStudyCmplPtcpCount field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of protocol deviations reported during the research study at the site
Use the new ProtocolDeviationCount field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the number of serious adverse events reported during the research study at the site
Use the new SeriousAdverseEventCount field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the representative of the sponsor for the site during the research study
Use the new SponsorRepresentative field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the time taken to execute the clinical trial agreement
Use the new ClnclTrialAgreeTrnarndDrtn field on the CareProgramSite object.
Indicate the healthcare facility associated with the specialty
Use the new HealthCareFacility field on the CareProviderFacilitySpecialty object.
Indicate the count of research studies completed by the care provider for the specialty
Use the new CompletedResearchStudyCount field on the CareProviderFacilitySpecialty object.
Indicate the count of active research studies that are performed by the care provider for the specialty
Use the new ActiveResearchStudyCount field on the CareProviderFacilitySpecialty object.

351
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Specify the classification of the healthcare provider, such as Previous Partner, Key Opinion Leader, and Novice Member
Use the new Classification field on the HealthcareProvider object.
Indicate whether the healthcare provider participates in research studies or not
Use the new DoesParticipateInRsrchStudy field on the HealthcareProvider object.
Specify the research study phase that the healthcare provider has experience with
Use the new ResearchStudyPhase field on the HealthcareProviderSpecialty object.
Specify the research study type that the healthcare provider has experience with
Use the new ResearchStudyType field on the HealthcareProviderSpecialty object.
Indicate the count of research studies completed by the healthcare provider for the specialty
Use the new CompletedResearchStudyCount field on the HealthcareProviderSpecialty object.
Indicate the count of active research studies that are performed by the healthcare provider for the specialty
Use the new ActiveResearchStudyCount field on the HealthcareProviderSpecialty object.
Indicate the healthcare provider associated with the taxonomy
Use the new HealthcareProvider field on the HealthcareProviderTaxonomy object.
Indicate whether the healthcare facility is affiliated to the site management organization
Use the new IsAfflWithSiteMgmtOrg field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether the healthcare facility is a satellite site of another healthcare facility or not
Use the new IsSatelliteSite field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the start year of the research study at the healthcare facility
Use the new ResearchStudyStartYear field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the age range of the patients at the healthcare facility
Use the new PatientAgeRange field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average count of the patients that visit the OPD at the healthcare facility
Use the new AverageOpdPatientCount field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average count of the patients that visit the OPD at the healthcare facility
Use the new AverageOpdPatientCount field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the phases under which the study is conducted
Use the new ResearchStudyPhase field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the type of research study conducted at the healthcare facility
Use the new ResearchStudyType field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the type of investigational product available at the healthcare facility
Use the new InvestigationalProductType field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the method of conducting the study at the healthcare facility
Use the new ResearchStudyMethod field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the type of clinical trial agreement that can be done with the healthcare facility
Use the new ClinicalTrialAgreementType field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average time taken to execute the clinical trial agreement
Use the new AvgClnclTrialAgreeDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether a dedicated room is available at the healthcare facility to conduct the research study
Use the new IsDedResearchStudyRoomAvl field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether a dedicated room is available at the healthcare facility to monitor the research study
Use the new IsDedRsrchStdyMntrRmAvl field on the HealthcareFacility object.

352
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud

Indicate whether a store is available at the healthcare facility to keep the research study materials, such as laboratory kits
Use the new IsRsrchStudyMtrlStoreAvl field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether PKPD specimen collection and storage is available at the healthcare facility
Use the new IsPkpdSpcmnCollStrgAvl field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether pharmacogenomic specimen collection is available at the healthcare facility
Use the new IsPgxSpcmnCollAvl field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the features of the investigational product store available at the healthcare facility
Use the new InvtglProductStorageCpbl field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the type of Investigational product disposal capability
Use the new InvtglProdtDestructionCpbl field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the list of handling equipment available at the facility for the investigational product
Use the new InvtglProdtPreparationCpbl field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether any training is provided to the research staff at the healthcare facility
Use the new IsTrainingProvided field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether good clinical practice training is provided at the healthcare facility
Use the new IsGoodClnclPracTrnPrvd field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether the facility supports the regulatory document submission to the Institutional Review Board (IRB) or Ethics
Committee (EC)
Use the new IsRsrchEthicalRvwSbmsSupp field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the average duration required for an approval for the clinical trial at the healthcare facility from the Institutional
Review Board (IRB) or Ethics Committee (EC)
Use the new AvgRsrchEthicalReviewDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the type of the Institutional Review Board (IRB) or Ethics Committee (EC)
Use the new RsrchEthicalRvwComteType field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average turnaround time for the preparation of the regulatory documents for Institutional Review Board
(IRB) or the Ethics Committee (EC) submission
Use the new AvgRegltyDocTrnarndDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average number of days between the start of the site activation process and the release of the investigational
product at the site
Use the new AvgInvtglProductReleaseDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average number of days between the site qualification visit and site initiation visit
Use the new AvgQualVstToInitVstDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average number of days between the site activation and the first participant visit to the site
Use the new AvgSiteActvToFstPtcpDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average number of days between the site activation and the last participant visit to the site
Use the new AvgSiteActvToLastPtcpDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average projected number of days to enroll participants at the site
Use the new AvgProjectedPtcpEnrlDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average actual number of days spent enrolling participants at the site
Use the new AverageActualPtcpEnrlDrtn field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average number of participants that are expected to enroll for the research study at the site
Use the new AvgProjectedPtcpEnrlCount field on the HealthcareFacility object.

353
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Loyalty Management

Indicate the average actual number of participants that are enrolled for the research study at the site
Use the new AvgActualPtcpEnrlCount field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the number of regulatory violations reported during the research study at the site
Use the new RegulatoryViolationCount field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the average number of protocol deviations reported during the research study at the site
Use the new AvgProtocolDeviationCount field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate the healthcare provider associated with the facility
Use the new HealthcareProvider field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Specify the classification of the healthcare facility, such as Previous Partner, Key Opinion Leader, and Novice Member
Use the new Classification field on the HealthcareFacility object.
Indicate whether research studies are conducted in the healthcare facility or not
Use the new AreResearchStudiesConducted field on the HealthcareFacility object.

Financial Assistance Program

Notifies subscribers of changes to the status of an appeal filed against a financial assistance program
Use the new Application Form Appeal Status Change Event object.
Specifies the mode of verification used in the care benefit verify request
Use the new Verification Mode field on the Care Benefit Verify Request object.

Loyalty Management
Increase member engagement by offering members rewards for reaching activity-driven milestones. Accurately calculate program and
promotion liability by tracing the usage of points even when the member points balance is negative. Gather rich insights about customers
and members with the enhanced data kit. Empower customers and sales reps to select the promotion they want to apply for carts by
using coupons. Design promotions quickly with enhanced product search and exclusion capabilities. Run targeted promotions for
account-based campaigns and automatically check whether promotions are eligible for stores and store groups.

IN THIS SECTION:
Gamify Member Engagement with Milestone-Based Promotions
Incentivize members for reaching activity-driven milestones. Use the Engagement Trail promotion template to quickly set up
milestone-based promotions. Track long-term member behavior with varied milestones such as referring three friends or buying
five units of a product.
Report Liability Accurately by Tracing Negative Points Usage
Get a granular account of how members have spent their points over time, even when members’ point balance is negative. You can
track the specific transactions that led to a negative point balance. When members with a negative point balance accrue points, the
related loyalty ledger traceability record's action type is set to Credit for Arrears. For redemptions, the action type is Debit with Arrears.
Effectively Track Promotional Points by Using Currency Subtype
Get a holistic view of the points credited by promotions and improve promotion liability accounting. Use currency subtypes to trace
the points that promotions credit to members.
Gather Richer Customer Insights with the Enhanced Data Kit
Get a comprehensive view of members with the refreshed Loyalty Management data kit. The data kit comes with data bundles based
on your Loyalty Management license. The data bundles include data streams for all Loyalty Management and Global Promotion
Management objects available in your org.

354
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Loyalty Management

Global Promotions Management

Provide customers and sales reps the flexibility to choose the promotion for a cart by using coupons. Quickly search for promotion
products by using codes or SKUs. Easily exclude products and categories from promotion rules. Run promotions for account-based
campaigns and add stores to existing store groups without promotion downtime.
New and Changed Objects in Loyalty Management
Do more with the new and updated Loyalty Management objects.

Gamify Member Engagement with Milestone-Based Promotions

Incentivize members for reaching activity-driven milestones. Use the Engagement Trail promotion template to quickly set up
milestone-based promotions. Track long-term member behavior with varied milestones such as referring three friends or buying five
units of a product.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Loyalty
Management - Growth or Loyalty Management - Advanced.
How: On the Select Promotion Template step in the Quick Promotion guided setup, select Engagement Trail.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Engagement Trail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Report Liability Accurately by Tracing Negative Points Usage

Get a granular account of how members have spent their points over time, even when members’ point balance is negative. You can
track the specific transactions that led to a negative point balance. When members with a negative point balance accrue points, the
related loyalty ledger traceability record's action type is set to Credit for Arrears. For redemptions, the action type is Debit with Arrears.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available.

355
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Loyalty Management

How: On the Loyalty Management Settings page in Setup, turn on Trace Usage of Points and Members Can Have a Negative Point
Balance.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Points Accounting with Traceability (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Effectively Track Promotional Points by Using Currency Subtype

Get a holistic view of the points credited by promotions and improve promotion liability accounting. Use currency subtypes to trace the
points that promotions credit to members.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available.
How: On the Select Promotion Template step in the Quick Promotions guided flow, select a Loyalty Promotions type template. Click
Next. When you add a reward that credits non-qualifying points to members, select the currency subtype.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Rule Configuration with Loyalty Promotion Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Gather Richer Customer Insights with the Enhanced Data Kit

Get a comprehensive view of members with the refreshed Loyalty Management data kit. The data kit comes with data bundles based
on your Loyalty Management license. The data bundles include data streams for all Loyalty Management and Global Promotion
Management objects available in your org.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Loyalty
Management and Data Cloud.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Kit for Loyalty Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

356
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Loyalty Management

Global Promotions Management

Provide customers and sales reps the flexibility to choose the promotion for a cart by using coupons. Quickly search for promotion
products by using codes or SKUs. Easily exclude products and categories from promotion rules. Run promotions for account-based
campaigns and add stores to existing store groups without promotion downtime.

IN THIS SECTION:
Empower Customers and Sales Reps to Select Promotions by Using Coupons
Customers can use coupons to decide which eligible promotion they want to apply for their cart. During assisted sales, sales reps
can offer customers the promotion that best fits their needs. Sales reps also have the power to not apply promotions for carts when
customers' don't require it. Companies can collaborate with other brands and run promotions with personalized coupons.
Accurately Search for Products Using Enhanced Search Options
Marketing managers can search for products with SKU and code to quickly find and select the exact products they’re looking for.
The search results show the product’s SKU and code, along with the product name.
Exclude Ineligible Products and Categories Efficiently
Simplify the process of designing and adjusting promotions by focusing on a smaller list of exclusions. Marketing managers can
easily filter ineligible products or categories from promotion rules.
Simplify the Evaluation of In-Store Promotions
The updated promotion context definition enables the Eligible Promotions API to automatically check whether customer carts are
eligible for in-store promotions. Continue running promotions when stores are added to a promotion’s store group. Previously,
marketing managers were required to deactivate a promotion when stores were added to a store group.
Easily List Accounts Eligible for Promotions with Campaigns
Run promotions targeted towards accounts that are members of a campaign. Offer accounts promotion rewards such as discounts,
vouchers, and games.
Easily Select All Eligible Products for a Promotion Rule
Include all eligible products of a promotion in a rule with a single click.
Automate Promotion Data Sync with Prebuilt Data Streams
Simplify the process of syncing promotion data in Data Cloud with the new Global Promotions Management data stream bundle.
The bundle comes with data streams for most Global Promotions Management objects.
Decide How Customers' Data Cloud Segment is Verified
Choose whether the Eligible Promotions API uses the Query API or data graphs to determine if customers belong to the Data Cloud
segments associated with promotions. Previously, the Eligible Promotions API used the Query API by default with an option to switch
to data graphs.

Empower Customers and Sales Reps to Select Promotions by Using Coupons

Customers can use coupons to decide which eligible promotion they want to apply for their cart. During assisted sales, sales reps can
offer customers the promotion that best fits their needs. Sales reps also have the power to not apply promotions for carts when customers'
don't require it. Companies can collaborate with other brands and run promotions with personalized coupons.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available and Global Promotions Management is enabled.
How: On the Define Promotion Eligibility step in the Quick Promotions guided flow, create coupons for the promotion.

357
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Loyalty Management

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define Promotion Eligibility (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Run Pricing Promotions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Accurately Search for Products Using Enhanced Search Options

Marketing managers can search for products with SKU and code to quickly find and select the exact products they’re looking for. The
search results show the product’s SKU and code, along with the product name.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available and Global Promotions Management is enabled.

Exclude Ineligible Products and Categories Efficiently

Simplify the process of designing and adjusting promotions by focusing on a smaller list of exclusions. Marketing managers can easily
filter ineligible products or categories from promotion rules.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available and Global Promotions Management is enabled.
How: On the Configure Promotion Template step in the Quick Promotion guided flow, select the Products tab or the Categories tab.
• To exclude categories, select Customers can purchase from any eligible category, and select the categories that you want to
exclude from the rule.
• To exclude products, select Customers can purchase from any eligible product, and select the products that you want to exclude
from the rule.

358
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Loyalty Management

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Plan Your Promotion’s Design (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Rule Configuration with Pricing Promotion Templates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Simplify the Evaluation of In-Store Promotions

The updated promotion context definition enables the Eligible Promotions API to automatically check whether customer carts are eligible
for in-store promotions. Continue running promotions when stores are added to a promotion’s store group. Previously, marketing
managers were required to deactivate a promotion when stores were added to a store group.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available and Global Promotions Management is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Extend Standard Context Definition (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Define Promotion Eligibility (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Easily List Accounts Eligible for Promotions with Campaigns

Run promotions targeted towards accounts that are members of a campaign. Offer accounts promotion rewards such as discounts,
vouchers, and games.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available and Global Promotions Management is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define Promotion Eligibility (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Easily Select All Eligible Products for a Promotion Rule

Include all eligible products of a promotion in a rule with a single click.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is available and Global Promotions Management is enabled.
How: On the Configure Promotion Template step in the Quick Promotion guided flow, on the Products tab, select Customers can
purchase from any eligible product.

359
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Loyalty Management

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Rule Configuration with Pricing Promotion Templates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Automate Promotion Data Sync with Prebuilt Data Streams

Simplify the process of syncing promotion data in Data Cloud with the new Global Promotions Management data stream bundle. The
bundle comes with data streams for most Global Promotions Management objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Loyalty
Management and Data Cloud where Global Promotions Management is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Kit for Global Promotions Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Decide How Customers' Data Cloud Segment is Verified

Choose whether the Eligible Promotions API uses the Query API or data graphs to determine if customers belong to the Data Cloud
segments associated with promotions. Previously, the Eligible Promotions API used the Query API by default with an option to switch
to data graphs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Loyalty
Management and Data Cloud where Global Promotions Management is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Customer Segment Verification (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

360
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud

New and Changed Objects in Loyalty Management

Do more with the new and updated Loyalty Management objects.
Add coupons for promotions
Use the Coupon object.
Track the redemption of coupons by members
Use the CouponCodeRedemption object.
Track members' negative point balance changes
Use the new CreditForArrears and DebitWithArrears values on the existing ActionType field on the
LoyaltyLedgerTraceability object.

Manufacturing Cloud
Modernize your commercial operations by deeply unifying your pricing, product catalog, product configuration, sales, and run-rate
business operations by using Revenue Cloud features in Manufacturing Cloud. Drive more run-rate business by using revenue management
features for Sales Agreements. Introduce flexibility in your actuals calculation processes and get greater visibility into cost and quantity
metrics by using enhanced Sales Agreement Foundations features. Streamline your inventory operations with Inventory Count and
Inventory Replenishment.

IN THIS SECTION:
Revenue Management Features for Sales Agreements
Modernize your run-rate business processes and win more business by using revenue management features for Sales Agreements.
Easily identify the right products for your customers from your product portfolio. Personalize deals by configuring product attributes
for sales agreements based on customer preferences. Add the same product multiple times to a sales agreement by configuring
different combinations of attributes. Optimally price deals with dynamic, rules-driven prices in sales agreements. Track the planned
and actual values of products with attributes in sales agreements. Easily check the attributes of the products in a side panel in the
sales agreement table. Manage the entire lifecycle of sales agreements that contain products with attributes—from inception to
renewal.
Sales Agreements Foundations Enhancements
Calculate the actuals for sales agreements based on your business needs by using a data processing engine definition. Calculate the
actuals for current and future schedules for a sales agreement, getting a peek into the actuals calculations for future schedules. Get
clear insights into the actuals calculation for a specific number of future schedules, based on orders. Calculate margins by adding
the cost price to the sales agreement.
Streamline Your Inventory Counting Processes
Compare physical and system inventory stocks, schedule inventory counts at scale, and easily capture count details by using Inventory
Count. Inventory managers can efficiently schedule cycle and ad hoc inventory counts for products and parts by creating inventory
count plans. Inventory count performers can easily capture product counts at inventory locations and record observations and
instructions by using the Salesforce Field Service mobile app.
Minimize Stockouts with Automated Inventory Replenishment
Use Inventory Replenishment to automate the replenishment of product items when they reach predefined stock levels. Inventory
managers and service managers can design nuanced inventory replenishment policies at both a granular level, such as individual
products at specific locations, and at a broader level, such as product categories across all locations. Automate the process to identify
product items that require replenishments, find their applicable policies, and create product requests. Promptly address inventory
needs and easily identify the applicable policy for each product item to avoid tedious policy searches.

361
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud

Revenue Management Features for Sales Agreements

Modernize your run-rate business processes and win more business by using revenue management features for Sales Agreements. Easily
identify the right products for your customers from your product portfolio. Personalize deals by configuring product attributes for sales
agreements based on customer preferences. Add the same product multiple times to a sales agreement by configuring different
combinations of attributes. Optimally price deals with dynamic, rules-driven prices in sales agreements. Track the planned and actual
values of products with attributes in sales agreements. Easily check the attributes of the products in a side panel in the sales agreement
table. Manage the entire lifecycle of sales agreements that contain products with attributes—from inception to renewal.

IN THIS SECTION:
Identify Perfect Products for Sales Agreements from Expansive Catalogs
Easily find and add suitable products to sales agreements by browsing through product catalogs. Key account managers can find
the right products the way they prefer: navigating through category hierarchies, performing keyword searches, sorting product lists,
or filtering the list by qualified products. Select the products to be added, and specify the quantity of each product to sell across the
entire duration of a sales agreement. Before you add products to sales agreements, quickly review a summary of product selections
to prevent mistakes.
Drive Sales by Tailoring Product Configurations to Customer Preferences
Personalize offers and accurately reflect customer choices by adding products with custom attributes in sales agreements. Key
account managers can easily select the most suitable combination of attributes for products by using an intuitive product configurator.
Make informed negotiations and evaluate the revenue implications by getting the latest, rules-driven price for products based on
their configurations. Configure existing products in sales agreements to rectify incorrect product specifications, reflect updated
negotiations, or accommodate customer requests. Add the same product multiple times to a sales agreement by configuring different
combinations of attributes.
Maximize Your Margins with Rules-Driven Pricing in Sales Agreements
Set optimal, finely tuned prices for products in a sales agreement by using rules-based pricing features. Pricing teams can use
Salesforce Pricing to establish price and discount calculation rules for products based on factors such as product volume and quantity
sold. Key account managers can get the latest, rules-based prices before, during, and after product configuration, and adjust the
final sales prices. Key account managers can also examine the reasons for discounts and price adjustments by using price waterfalls.
Easily Compare Committed and Fulfilled Sales of Products with Attributes in Sales Agreements
Track revenue for complex product configurations and monitor customer compliance by comparing planned and actual metrics of
products with attributes in the sales agreements table. Monitor actuals that are automatically derived from orders and contracts of
products with attributes. Recalculate actuals anytime to make sure that agreement terms reflect the latest sales.
Check Product Specifications for Sales Agreements Without Switching Pages
View the attribute, pricing, and other key details of products in sales agreements on a pane that opens when you click a product
name in a sales agreements table. Key account managers can quickly review customers’ preferred product configurations and
differentiate between the same products with different attributes in an agreement. They can also track critical quantity and revenue
for products and categories in the pane.
Renew Sales Agreements with Same Products and Attributes
Continue long-run business relationships with partners and customers without any friction by renewing sales agreements that
contain products with attributes. Key account managers can renew sales agreements with a new start date and the same agreement
terms, including the same product and attribute combinations and initial total quantities.

362
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud

Identify Perfect Products for Sales Agreements from Expansive Catalogs

Easily find and add suitable products to sales agreements by browsing through product catalogs. Key account managers can find the
right products the way they prefer: navigating through category hierarchies, performing keyword searches, sorting product lists, or
filtering the list by qualified products. Select the products to be added, and specify the quantity of each product to sell across the entire
duration of a sales agreement. Before you add products to sales agreements, quickly review a summary of product selections to prevent
mistakes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud and
Revenue Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreements, Pricing Features for Sales Agreements, Product Catalog
Features for Sales Agreements, Salesforce Pricing Run Time User, Product Discovery User, Context Service Runtime, Product Catalog
Management Viewer, and Product Configuration permission sets.
How: On a sales agreement record page, click Browse Catalog. Select a catalog, and add the products to the sales agreement.

Drive Sales by Tailoring Product Configurations to Customer Preferences

Personalize offers and accurately reflect customer choices by adding products with custom attributes in sales agreements. Key account
managers can easily select the most suitable combination of attributes for products by using an intuitive product configurator. Make
informed negotiations and evaluate the revenue implications by getting the latest, rules-driven price for products based on their
configurations. Configure existing products in sales agreements to rectify incorrect product specifications, reflect updated negotiations,
or accommodate customer requests. Add the same product multiple times to a sales agreement by configuring different combinations
of attributes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud and
Revenue Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreements, Pricing Features for Sales Agreements, Product Catalog
Features for Sales Agreements, Salesforce Pricing Run Time User, Product Discovery User, Context Service Runtime, Product Catalog
Management Viewer, and Product Configuration permission sets.

Maximize Your Margins with Rules-Driven Pricing in Sales Agreements

Set optimal, finely tuned prices for products in a sales agreement by using rules-based pricing features. Pricing teams can use Salesforce
Pricing to establish price and discount calculation rules for products based on factors such as product volume and quantity sold. Key
account managers can get the latest, rules-based prices before, during, and after product configuration, and adjust the final sales prices.
Key account managers can also examine the reasons for discounts and price adjustments by using price waterfalls.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud and
Revenue Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreements, Pricing Features for Sales Agreements, Product Catalog
Features for Sales Agreements, Salesforce Pricing Run Time User, Product Discovery User, Context Service Runtime, Product Catalog
Management Viewer, and Product Configuration permission sets.

Easily Compare Committed and Fulfilled Sales of Products with Attributes in Sales Agreements
Track revenue for complex product configurations and monitor customer compliance by comparing planned and actual metrics of
products with attributes in the sales agreements table. Monitor actuals that are automatically derived from orders and contracts of
products with attributes. Recalculate actuals anytime to make sure that agreement terms reflect the latest sales.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud and
Revenue Cloud.

363
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud

Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreements, Pricing Features for Sales Agreements, Product Catalog
Features for Sales Agreements, Salesforce Pricing Run Time User, Product Discovery User, Context Service Runtime, Product Catalog
Management Viewer, and Product Configuration permission sets.

Check Product Specifications for Sales Agreements Without Switching Pages

View the attribute, pricing, and other key details of products in sales agreements on a pane that opens when you click a product name
in a sales agreements table. Key account managers can quickly review customers’ preferred product configurations and differentiate
between the same products with different attributes in an agreement. They can also track critical quantity and revenue for products and
categories in the pane.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud and
Revenue Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreements, Pricing Features for Sales Agreements, Product Catalog
Features for Sales Agreements, Salesforce Pricing Run Time User, Product Discovery User, Context Service Runtime, Product Catalog
Management Viewer, and Product Configuration permission sets.
How: To view the product details on a pane, open the Lightning App Builder for a sales agreement record page. Click the Agreement
Terms component on the page, and in the properties pane for the component, select Show side panel when users click a record
link. Click Select, and then select the fields that you want to show on the side panel.

Renew Sales Agreements with Same Products and Attributes

Continue long-run business relationships with partners and customers without any friction by renewing sales agreements that contain
products with attributes. Key account managers can renew sales agreements with a new start date and the same agreement terms,
including the same product and attribute combinations and initial total quantities.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud and
Revenue Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreements, Pricing Features for Sales Agreements, Product Catalog
Features for Sales Agreements, Salesforce Pricing Run Time User, Product Discovery User, Context Service Runtime, Product Catalog
Management Viewer, and Product Configuration permission sets.
How: Open a sales agreement record that’s active, under revision, or expired, and is within its renewal period. Click Renew.

Sales Agreements Foundations Enhancements

Calculate the actuals for sales agreements based on your business needs by using a data processing engine definition. Calculate the
actuals for current and future schedules for a sales agreement, getting a peek into the actuals calculations for future schedules. Get clear
insights into the actuals calculation for a specific number of future schedules, based on orders. Calculate margins by adding the cost
price to the sales agreement.

IN THIS SECTION:
Calculate Sales Agreement Actuals by Using Data Processing Engine
Calculate the actual revenue and quantity for sales agreements based on the sales data that's stored in order records, transaction
journal records, or custom object records. Easily schedule to periodically run the new data processing engine (DPE) template, Calculate
Actual Metrics for Products. Use the DPE to transform data from multiple data sources. Extend the calculation logic in the data
processing engine to include custom fields or modify the calculation logic based on your business requirements.

364
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud

Maximize Sales Agreement Profitability with Cost Visibility

Set up costs for products by using the cost book. Add the new Cost Price and margin metrics to a sales agreement to view the cost
price for products.
Recalculate Actuals for Future Schedules
Get visibility into your business by gaining an insight into the future schedules for actuals calculations on sales agreements. Plan
your work better with increased visibility into your confirmed orders for future schedules. For example, you can plan the number of
units of a product you must manufacture in the next six months.
Add Multiple Instances of the Same Product to a Sales Agreement
Use unique display names to add any number of duplicate products to a sales agreement. Previously, you added a product to a sales
agreement only once.
Easily View the Unallocated Quantity for a Product
View the total unallocated quantity for a product in a sales agreement at a glance. Easily allocate this remaining quantity across
schedules. For example, if the initial planned quantity value is 1200 batteries, and you allocate 300 units to one schedule, the total
unallocated planned quantity is immediately adjusted to 900 units to reflect this change.

Calculate Sales Agreement Actuals by Using Data Processing Engine

Calculate the actual revenue and quantity for sales agreements based on the sales data that's stored in order records, transaction journal
records, or custom object records. Easily schedule to periodically run the new data processing engine (DPE) template, Calculate Actual
Metrics for Products. Use the DPE to transform data from multiple data sources. Extend the calculation logic in the data processing engine
to include custom fields or modify the calculation logic based on your business requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreement Psl permission set.
How: On the Sales Agreements page in Setup, select Using a Data Processing Engine Definition as the default actuals calculation
mode.

Maximize Sales Agreement Profitability with Cost Visibility

Set up costs for products by using the cost book. Add the new Cost Price and margin metrics to a sales agreement to view the cost price
for products.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreement Psl permission set.
Why: Here’s an example of how the cost price is used to calculate the planned margin percentage. For a planned quantity of 10 generators,
the wholesale price is US$110 per unit and the cost price is $100 per unit. Then the planned margin percentage ({Planned Margin
Amount/Planned Amount}*100) is 9.09%.
How: Add the cost price to a sales agreement metric group.

Recalculate Actuals for Future Schedules

Get visibility into your business by gaining an insight into the future schedules for actuals calculations on sales agreements. Plan your
work better with increased visibility into your confirmed orders for future schedules. For example, you can plan the number of units of
a product you must manufacture in the next six months.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreement Psl permission set.

365
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud

How: On the Sales Agreements page in Setup, specify the number of future schedules for future actuals calculation schedules. You can
select up to 24 future schedules in a weekly, monthly, or quarterly format.
To recalculate the actuals for future schedules for a sales agreement, select Recalculate Actuals, and then select Current and future
schedules. The nightly job also considers the new option on the Setup page.

Add Multiple Instances of the Same Product to a Sales Agreement

Use unique display names to add any number of duplicate products to a sales agreement. Previously, you added a product to a sales
agreement only once.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreement Psl permission set.
How: If there are multiple instances of a product, select one of the instances as the primary product to use for the actuals calculation.
To select the product, on the Sales Agreement Product page, select Actuals Calculation Product.

Easily View the Unallocated Quantity for a Product

View the total unallocated quantity for a product in a sales agreement at a glance. Easily allocate this remaining quantity across schedules.
For example, if the initial planned quantity value is 1200 batteries, and you allocate 300 units to one schedule, the total unallocated
planned quantity is immediately adjusted to 900 units to reflect this change.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreement Psl permission set.
How: While creating a sales agreement, select User Specifies Planned Quantity to be able to distribute the values manually. Update
the Planned Quantity field for a product and hover on the information icon next to the product name to view the adjusted total unallocated
planned quantity.

Streamline Your Inventory Counting Processes

Compare physical and system inventory stocks, schedule inventory counts at scale, and easily capture count details by using Inventory
Count. Inventory managers can efficiently schedule cycle and ad hoc inventory counts for products and parts by creating inventory
count plans. Inventory count performers can easily capture product counts at inventory locations and record observations and instructions
by using the Salesforce Field Service mobile app.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Inventory Count Manager and Inventory Count User permission sets.

Minimize Stockouts with Automated Inventory Replenishment

Use Inventory Replenishment to automate the replenishment of product items when they reach predefined stock levels. Inventory
managers and service managers can design nuanced inventory replenishment policies at both a granular level, such as individual products
at specific locations, and at a broader level, such as product categories across all locations. Automate the process to identify product
items that require replenishments, find their applicable policies, and create product requests. Promptly address inventory needs and
easily identify the applicable policy for each product item to avoid tedious policy searches.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Inventory Replenishment permission set.

366
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Media Cloud

Media Cloud
Use the Media Cloud application suite to manage subscribers and subscriptions, create and manage ad campaigns, and perform other
key tasks, through community self-service interfaces or an agent console.

IN THIS SECTION:
Advertising Sales Management
Efficiently manage media sales, and collate and analyze data from multiple sources by integrating Advertising Sales Management
with WideOrbit and Salesforce Data Cloud.

Advertising Sales Management

Efficiently manage media sales, and collate and analyze data from multiple sources by integrating Advertising Sales Management with
WideOrbit and Salesforce Data Cloud.

IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Efficiency in Your Advertising Sales Workflow
Manage sales seamlessly and efficiently by integrating Advertising Sales Management with WideOrbit and combining the strengths
of the two platforms. Manage proposals and orders directly from WideOrbit, while continuing to handle accounts in Advertising
Sales Management.
Target Granular Audience Segments By Using Salesforce Data Cloud
Simplify your audience data management by integrating Advertising Sales Management with a remote Data Cloud instance. Import
audience targeting segments from Salesforce Data Cloud, and use these segments to define targeting for your order line items.
Upload the segment content to your external ad server, such as Google Ad Manager, directly from Salesforce Data Cloud.

Boost Efficiency in Your Advertising Sales Workflow

Manage sales seamlessly and efficiently by integrating Advertising Sales Management with WideOrbit and combining the strengths of
the two platforms. Manage proposals and orders directly from WideOrbit, while continuing to handle accounts in Advertising Sales
Management.

Note: This integration works with only WO Traffic TV.

Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in all editions.

How: Connect your WideOrbit account to your Advertising Sales Management org by setting up Media External Account WideOrbit
Integrations API in MuleSoft Direct. Sales Reps can also use any integration layer with the Salesforce inbound and outbound Account
APIs.

Target Granular Audience Segments By Using Salesforce Data Cloud

Simplify your audience data management by integrating Advertising Sales Management with a remote Data Cloud instance. Import
audience targeting segments from Salesforce Data Cloud, and use these segments to define targeting for your order line items. Upload
the segment content to your external ad server, such as Google Ad Manager, directly from Salesforce Data Cloud.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in all editions.
Who: This feature is available to all Media Cloud users who also have a Salesforce Data Cloud instance.

367
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Net Zero Cloud

How: To use this integration, create and enable the DataSpace custom setting, and create a lightning page for the Salesforce Data Cloud
segment import.

Net Zero Cloud

Improve the efficiency, auditability, and transparency of disclosure responses by using the new features and enhancements to Net Zero
Cloud and Disclosure and Compliance Hub. Create disclosure reports directly in Google Docs by using the Salesforce Disclosure and
Compliance Hub add-in. Manage and report on environmental, social, and governance (ESG)-related topics for materiality assessments
in accordance with the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) framework. Create, manage, and score Impacts and Risks
and Opportunities (IROs) according to the CSRD framework. Streamline your ESG reporting with the improved CSRD report template,
now available directly in Net Zero Cloud. Meet the regulatory compliance requirements for CSRD by working with trusted eXtensible
Business Reporting Language (XBRL) tagging partners listed on Net Zero Marketplace. Allocate the final scorecard emissions based on
the ratio of the procurement item's spent amount and the total spent amount.

IN THIS SECTION:
Author Disclosure Reports in Google Docs
Use Google Docs to create disclosure reports by using the Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub add-in. Access Salesforce data
when you generate disclosures in Google Docs. Use the built-in information library search to efficiently fill the report.
Perform Materiality Assessments and Score Impacts and Risks and Opportunities for CSRD Compliance
Efficiently manage and report on environmental, social, and governance (ESG)-related topics for materiality assessments in line with
the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) framework. Easily create, manage, and score Impacts and Risks and
Opportunities (IROs) according to the CSRD directive. Show your IROs in an automatically generated heat map to identify the material
ESG topics for your company. Track the IROs throughout your reporting journey in the Information Library.
Streamline CSRD Reporting with Simplified Setup and Enhanced Features
Use the improved Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) report template for your environmental, social, and governance
(ESG) reporting. Enjoy an easier and more efficient setup experience by using the built-in CSRD report builder. Save the reporting
manager's time and costs by deploying with a single click the Omnistudio components needed for the CSRD report builder. The
CSRD report builder Version 3 includes the European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG) questionnaire published in April
2024.
Find XBRL Tagging Providers to Comply with CSRD Requirements
Meet the regulatory compliance requirements for Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) by digitally assigning eXtensible
Business Reporting Language (XBRL) standard tags to the disclosure reports. Find XBRL tagging providers on Net Zero Marketplace
to help you comply with XBRL filing requirements, enabling end-to-end ESG reporting.
Allocate Scorecard Emissions Based on Spent Amount
Allocate the final scorecard emissions in Supplier Scorecard to the related allocated scorecard emissions in the Scope 3 Procurement
Item based on the spent amount. Previously, allocations were based only on the ratio of calculated scope 3 emissions.
New and Changed Objects in Net Zero Cloud
Do more with the new and changed Net Zero Cloud objects.

Author Disclosure Reports in Google Docs

Use Google Docs to create disclosure reports by using the Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub add-in. Access Salesforce data
when you generate disclosures in Google Docs. Use the built-in information library search to efficiently fill the report.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Net Zero
Growth license and the Disclosure and Compliance Hub add-on license.

368
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Net Zero Cloud

Who: To edit Google Doc documents, you need a Google developer account.
How: In Setup, find and select Disclosure and Compliance Hub Settings. For Get Disclosure and Compliance Hub Plugin, select
Google Docs from the list.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable the Disclosure and Compliance Hub (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Integrate Google Docs with Salesforce for Net Zero Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Author Disclosures by Using Google Docs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Author Disclosures by Using OmniScript Forms and Google Docs (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Perform Materiality Assessments and Score Impacts and Risks and Opportunities for
CSRD Compliance
Efficiently manage and report on environmental, social, and governance (ESG)-related topics for materiality assessments in line with the
Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) framework. Easily create, manage, and score Impacts and Risks and Opportunities
(IROs) according to the CSRD directive. Show your IROs in an automatically generated heat map to identify the material ESG topics for
your company. Track the IROs throughout your reporting journey in the Information Library.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Net Zero
Growth license and the Materiality Assessment add-on license.
How: In Setup, find and select Net Zero Settings. Turn on Manage Materiality Assessments.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Materiality Assessment Hub (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline CSRD Reporting with Simplified Setup and Enhanced Features

Use the improved Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) report template for your environmental, social, and governance
(ESG) reporting. Enjoy an easier and more efficient setup experience by using the built-in CSRD report builder. Save the reporting
manager's time and costs by deploying with a single click the Omnistudio components needed for the CSRD report builder. The CSRD
report builder Version 3 includes the European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG) questionnaire published in April 2024.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Net Zero
Growth license and the Disclosure and Compliance Hub add-on license.
How: In Setup, find and select Disclosure and Compliance Hub Settings. Turn on Manage ESG Reports and Manage CSRD Reports.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable the Disclosure and Compliance Hub (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage CSRD Report Templates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create CSRD Disclosures Report by Using the Net Zero Cloud Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

369
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Net Zero Cloud

Find XBRL Tagging Providers to Comply with CSRD Requirements

Meet the regulatory compliance requirements for Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) by digitally assigning eXtensible
Business Reporting Language (XBRL) standard tags to the disclosure reports. Find XBRL tagging providers on Net Zero Marketplace to
help you comply with XBRL filing requirements, enabling end-to-end ESG reporting.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Net Zero
Growth license and the Disclosure and Compliance Hub add-on license.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Discover XBRL Tagging Providers to Tag Disclosure Reports (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Allocate Scorecard Emissions Based on Spent Amount

Allocate the final scorecard emissions in Supplier Scorecard to the related allocated scorecard emissions in the Scope 3 Procurement
Item based on the spent amount. Previously, allocations were based only on the ratio of calculated scope 3 emissions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Net Zero
Growth license and the Net Zero Cloud External Engagement Management add-on license.
How: In Setup, find and select Net Zero Settings. Turn on Allocate Scorecard Emissions Based on Spent Amount.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Net Zero Cloud Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Allocate Supplier Data to Procurement Items (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New and Changed Objects in Net Zero Cloud

Do more with the new and changed Net Zero Cloud objects.

Changed Objects
Specify the predefined disclosure definition version associated with the disclosure
Use the new PredefinedDisclosureDefVersion field on the Disclosure object.
Indicate whether or not a topic is material
Use the new IsMaterial field on the MaterialityTopic object.
Specify values to author disclosure reports in Google Docs
Use the new GoogleDocs or OmniscriptAndGoogleDocs values in the AuthoringMode field on the DisclosureDefinitionVersion
object. These values are available only when Use Disclosure and Compliance Hub Plugin in Disclosure and Compliance Hub Settings
is set to Google Docs.
Changed field type from ForeignKey to EnumOrId
This change results in the removal of the DisclosureDefinitionId field and addition of the DisclosureDefinition
field. If you have any custom SoQL-based integration using the DisclosureDefinitionId field, modify the query to use
the DisclosureDefinition field.

New Objects
Store information about the impact, risk, or opportunity
Use the new Impact Risk Opportunity object.

370
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Public Sector Solutions

Store information about the assessment of ESG-related impacts, risks, and opportunities
Use the new Impact Risk Opportunity Assessment object.
Store information about the score of an impact, risk, or opportunity for an assessment
Use the new Impact Risk Opportunity Score object.
Create a junction between an impact risk opportunity assessment and a materiality topic
Use the new Impact Risk Opportunity Assessment Topic object.
Create a junction between an impact risk opportunity and a materiality topic
Use the new Impact Risk Opportunity Topic object.

Public Sector Solutions

Use Einstein to help caseworkers quickly get an overview of a benefit applicant’s household. Build flexible job applications in which
applicants can skip optional sections and complete required sections in their preferred sequence. Give supervisors a guided workflow
to easily create tailored plans for employees on the Employee Experience portal. More easily migrate Dynamic Assessments across
Salesforce orgs by using Metadata API.

IN THIS SECTION:
Help Caseworkers Quickly Learn About a Household with Einstein
When caseworkers review a benefit application, they can use Einstein to get an instant overview of the applicant’s household. Learn
about each member’s name, age, and income, and their relationship to the applicant. Use the information to make faster, more
informed decisions about the applicant’s benefit eligibility.
Enhance Job Applications for Talent Recruitment Management
Organize questions in applications into well-defined sections. Identify required sections on applications, and the sections that
applicants can skip. Give applicants the flexibility to complete the sections in their preferred sequence. Similarly, create intake forms
with sections for complaints and referrals.
Easily Create Personalized Care Plans for Employees
Help employees' career development by using a guided flow to publish care plans for them on an Employee Experience cloud site.
Start with a published care plan template, and add or remove goals and benefits to suit the employee’s needs. Then, preview the
plan and assign it to the employee.
Quickly Migrate Dynamic Assessments with Metadata API
Save the time and effort in migrating your Dynamic Assessments from a sandbox to production or across orgs by using Metadata
APIs. Previously, you recreated the assessment questions, Omniscripts, and action plan templates in the target org.
Updated Metadata API Type in Public Sector Solutions
Access more metadata through this changed metadata type.
New and Changed Objects in Public Sector Solutions
Do more with these new and changed Public Sector Solutions objects.

New and Enhanced Common Features for Public Sector Solutions

Public Sector Solutions includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features
to extend and customize Public Sector Solutions based on your business needs.
• Action Plans
Increase convenience of the users when working with action plans for their business processes. Enhance the user experience by
automating updates for the action plans as the user completes the task action plan items.

371
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Public Sector Solutions

• Business Rules Engine

Monitor and manage the usage of Business Rules Engine components with the new Guardrail Connect API. Use transient attributes
to temporarily store interim calculation results in an expression set. Activate and save expression sets in one step when copying
them from templates. Create context-based expression sets easily, without marking steps as output. Retrieve datetime information
in CSV decision tables by using the date/time data type. Track the CSV upload status for decision tables.

• Compliant Data Sharing

Quickly deactivate Salesforce users who have Compliant Data Sharing records by using a new setting.

• Data Processing Engine

Simplify field mapping in writeback nodes by using Einstein generative AI. Use the append and hierarchy nodes in Data Cloud to
run batch transformations on large volumes of org data that you can later use for analytics and reporting. Ensure data integrity by
using the composite writeback feature to group related records at run time, and write them back to the core. Download the failed
records file and use it to debug the issues in composite writeback or CSV file ingestion when the Data Processing Engine definition
run fails.

• Grantmaking
Streamline the grant review process by supporting grant managers to batch-assign multiple applications to reviewers, saving time
and boosting efficiency. Automate routine tasks with Stage Management to ensure accuracy and compliance through clearly defined
stage criteria.

• Group Membership and Households

Receive change events for more objects. Effortlessly add the right Members to your party relationship groups.

• Omnistudio
Use Omnistudio with the Salesforce Lightning Design System 2 (SLDS 2) template for a refreshed user interface. OmniAnalytics is
now enabled for guest users on Experience Cloud by default. Access customers' saved session information to create context-driven
communications on your sites. In addition to improving usability, we made a few translation, accessibility, security, and deployment
updates.

• Omnistudio Document Generation

Ensure compatibility with the new document generation infrastructure and add flexibility to document generation workflows. Get
increased hourly and daily limits for batch server-side document generation requests. Plan for the retirement of Document Generation
1.0 by switching to Document Generation 2.0. The enhancements in Document Generation 2.0 include a new custom fonts
configuration, document previewer, and hybrid client-side processing. Use dynamic image tokens in document templates for
server-side document generation.

• Outcome Management
Manage your impact strategy more efficiently and improve consistency by entering multiple indicator results in a spreadsheet-like
experience.

• Program and Case Management

Create personalized care plans by setting client-specific goals in the Care Plan UI, making the plans more meaningful and motivating.
Improve care plan quality and consistency and create compliant care plan templates from the existing ones.

• Record Rollup Definitions

Aggregate tasks and events at a household or group level to help relationship managers stay organized and easily track the progress
of events and tasks. Reduce clutter by deleting outdated and unused record rollup definitions. Edit the name and description of a
definition for better clarity and usability.

372
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Public Sector Solutions

Help Caseworkers Quickly Learn About a Household with Einstein

When caseworkers review a benefit application, they can use Einstein to get an instant overview of the applicant’s household. Learn
about each member’s name, age, and income, and their relationship to the applicant. Use the information to make faster, more informed
decisions about the applicant’s benefit eligibility.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Public Sector Solutions
is enabled, with the Einstein Platform add-on. To purchase the add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Built-In Einstein Generative AI Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Get Household Overview (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance Job Applications for Talent Recruitment Management

Organize questions in applications into well-defined sections. Identify required sections on applications, and the sections that applicants
can skip. Give applicants the flexibility to complete the sections in their preferred sequence. Similarly, create intake forms with sections
for complaints and referrals.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Public Sector
Solutions is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Multi-Section Job Applications (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Easily Create Personalized Care Plans for Employees

Help employees' career development by using a guided flow to publish care plans for them on an Employee Experience cloud site. Start
with a published care plan template, and add or remove goals and benefits to suit the employee’s needs. Then, preview the plan and
assign it to the employee.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Public Sector
Solutions is enabled, with the Employee Experience for Public Sector add-on.
Who: To use the guided flow, employee supervisors need the Employee Experience For Public Sector permission set license.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Employee Experience for Public Sector Solutions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Quickly Migrate Dynamic Assessments with Metadata API

Save the time and effort in migrating your Dynamic Assessments from a sandbox to production or across orgs by using Metadata APIs.
Previously, you recreated the assessment questions, Omniscripts, and action plan templates in the target org.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Public Sector
Solutions is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Dynamic Assessments Migration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

373
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Referral Marketing

Updated Metadata API Type in Public Sector Solutions

Access more metadata through this changed metadata type.
Retrieve the omni assessment tasks associated with an Omniscript
Use the new OmniAssessmentTasks field on the existing OmniScript metadata type.

New and Changed Objects in Public Sector Solutions

Do more with these new and changed Public Sector Solutions objects.
Define a section of an intake form, such as an application
Use the new IntakeFormSection object.
Relate an omni process to an omni assessment task
Use the new OmniProcessOmniAsmtTask object.
Relate a recruitment posting to an application form
Use the new RecruitmentPosting field on the existing ApplicationForm object.
REMOVED: The ActionPlanBaseTemplateAsgn object is removed
The ActionPlanBaseTemplateAsgn object is removed in API version 63.0 and later. Instead, use the ActionPlanTemplateAssignment
object.
Specify the date when a job position was last filled
Use the new LastFilledDate field on the existing JobPosition object.
Specify the status of a job position
Use the new Status field on the existing JobPosition object.
Capture the date and time when a recruitment requisition was approved
Use the new ApprovalDateTime field on the existing RecruitmentRequisition object.
Capture the date and time when a vetting evaluation started
Use the new VettingStartDateTime field on the existing VettingEvaluation object.
Capture the date and time when a vetting evaluation ended
Use the new VettingEndDateTime field on the existing VettingEvaluation object.

Referral Marketing
Maximize the reach and impact of your referral promotions with WhatsApp messages. Gather insights about advocates and their referred
friends with a prebuilt data kit.

IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance Your Promotion’s Reach with WhatsApp Messages
Enable your brand to engage advocates and their friends by using WhatsApp as a mobile communication channel. To enhance a
promotion's impact, configure personalized WhatsApp messages in the Referral Promotion guided setup. Advocates and their friends
receive targeted messages directly through WhatsApp.
Choose How to Verify Advocates' Data Cloud Segments
Choose whether the Refer A Friend widget and the Referral Advocate Enrollments API use the Query API or data graphs to verify
that advocates belong to the Data Cloud segments associated with referral promotions. Previously, Query API was used by default
with an option to switch to data graphs.

374
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Referral Marketing

Sync Referral Marketing Data with Prebuilt Data Streams

Easily send data from Referral Marketing objects to Data Cloud by using the brand-new Referral Marketing data kit. The data kit
comes with data streams for all Referral Marketing objects.
Get Predictions on Contacts' Likelihood to Refer
Get accurate predictions on the likelihood of contacts referring their friends. Gain insights into your contacts, identify individuals
with higher referral potential, and optimize promotional efforts. By focusing on individuals most likely to refer, organizations can
manage marketing costs more effectively, reduce member dissatisfaction, and drive greater referral success.
New and Changed Objects in Referral Marketing
Access and manage your Referral Marketing data through these objects.

Enhance Your Promotion’s Reach with WhatsApp Messages

Enable your brand to engage advocates and their friends by using WhatsApp as a mobile communication channel. To enhance a
promotion's impact, configure personalized WhatsApp messages in the Referral Promotion guided setup. Advocates and their friends
receive targeted messages directly through WhatsApp.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Referral
Marketing is available.
How: On the Communication Assets step in the Referral Promotion guided setup, select WhatsApp as the communication channel.
Select and personalize the messages for each promotion stage.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: WhatsApp Setup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Choose How to Verify Advocates' Data Cloud Segments

Choose whether the Refer A Friend widget and the Referral Advocate Enrollments API use the Query API or data graphs to verify that
advocates belong to the Data Cloud segments associated with referral promotions. Previously, Query API was used by default with an
option to switch to data graphs.

375
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Referral Marketing

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Referral
Marketing is available.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Advocate Segment Verification (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sync Referral Marketing Data with Prebuilt Data Streams

Easily send data from Referral Marketing objects to Data Cloud by using the brand-new Referral Marketing data kit. The data kit comes
with data streams for all Referral Marketing objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Referral Marketing
and Data Cloud.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Kit for Referral Marketing (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get Predictions on Contacts' Likelihood to Refer

Get accurate predictions on the likelihood of contacts referring their friends. Gain insights into your contacts, identify individuals with
higher referral potential, and optimize promotional efforts. By focusing on individuals most likely to refer, organizations can manage
marketing costs more effectively, reduce member dissatisfaction, and drive greater referral success.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Referral Marketing, CRM Analytics for
Loyalty Management, and Scoring Framework are enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Referral Marketing and Loyalty Analytics Apps permission set licenses.
How: To get predictions, go to the Scoring Framework page in Setup. Create a CRM Analytics template configuration by using the
Contacts' Likelihood to Refer template configuration type.

376
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Education

New and Changed Objects in Referral Marketing

Access and manage your Referral Marketing data through these objects.
Select a type of communication channel for a promotion.
Use the new CommunicationChannelType object.
Select a template for the communication channels of a promotion.
Use the new CommunicationChannelTemplate object.
Select a communication channel for the internal organization unit.
Use the new InternalOrgUnitCommChannel object.
Associate a promotion stage with a communication channel template.
Use the new PromStageCommChannelTmpl object.

Salesforce for Education

Use the power of Agentforce to answer prospective students' questions and to enhance the work of relationship officers and advancement
researchers. Manage student information with the enhanced data model that supports Student Information System (SIS) functionality,
including course scheduling and a unified student profile. Strengthen your advancement efforts with new objects for prospect research
and new fields on Fundraising objects for advancement-specific data processing. Understand student needs better with Einstein academic
insights, enhancements to Pulse Checks, and an improved appointment-scheduling workflow. Streamline the application review process
by using rubrics and scoring for admissions decisions and Stage Management for application reviews.

IN THIS SECTION:
Autonomously Answer and Support Prospective Students
Grow your admissions team’s capacity in minutes. With Student Recruitment Agent for Agentforce, prospective students get
immediate answers to their questions about application processes, deadlines, cost of attendance, financial aid, and more. The agent
is preconfigured to respond with content from both published knowledge articles and applicable recruitment and admissions
objects.
Gain Meaningful Insights with the Philanthropic Research Agent
Empower relationship officers with insights that enhance philanthropic research and engagement. The philanthropic research AI
agent helps relationship officers and researchers by using party philanthropic milestone records to answer questions about prospects.
Consolidate Information in Student Records with the Student Management App
Give staff and faculty quick access to important student information. In a single, accessible view, include emergency contacts,
relationships, student contact information, and enrollment data in student records. Add a relationship graph to convey students’
relationships to households. Assign access to advisors, registrars, and faculty.
Get More from the Intelligent Degree Planner and the Learner Progress View
Use the Intelligent Degree Planner and the Learner Progress view to view courses that a student retakes, and help students plan
their academic careers more effectively with new enrollment statuses. Advisors can now compare program plans for students.
Customize the view for advisors by using the Compare Program Plans flow template. Add a button that staff can use to run a program
plan comparison from records such as cases.
Streamline Advancement-Specific Data Processing
Manage and report on advancement designations by capturing important reporting details. Advancement operations teams can
track a variety of funds, including endowed, capital, and operational, with flexible fields for additional reporting information. Ensure
consistent data collection for institutional reporting, and support compliance with industry reporting standards. This feature also
introduces a person’s role with the institution, graduation status, giving levels, and the purpose of their gifts.

377
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Education

Drive Comprehensive Prospect Research Activities

Store and manage detailed prospect research data for alumni, donors, and households. Relationship officers and prospect researchers
can track and analyze wealth indicators, philanthropic events, research assessments, and key milestones to build a complete picture
of activity. This long-term view supports continuous research efforts, so that your institution can uncover deeper insights and
strengthen relationships based on a lifetime of engagement and activity.
Unlock Deeper Insights with Generational Categories
Better understand your alumni through analysis of generational cohort and graduation status. Relationship officers and prospect
researchers can now categorize alumni by groups like baby boomers, Gen X, millennials, and Gen Z. They can also group alumni
into segments by graduation date.
Gain Holistic Student Insights and Visualize Learner Progress
Get the latest student data from external systems using Data Cloud for Education: Holistic Student Insights. With Einstein generative
AI, get insights on a student, including their academic, current term, course offering participant, attendance, and course participation
details. Use Visual Indicator to show a student’s performance in the current term based on their course component scores. You can
use custom categories such as At Risk, On Track, and Needs Attention.
Get a Unified View of Student Data with Learner Profile
Use the learner profile record page to get a unified view of student data from multiple related objects. Search, sort, and filter the
records to create student list views, and then perform bulk actions on the lists. Schedule a batch job with the Update Learner Profiles
with CRM Data definition to automatically create and update learner profile records.
Schedule Appointments Efficiently with a New Lightning Web Component
Use the new Lightning web component, Schedule Appointment, on your Experience Cloud site to streamline the appointment
booking process. With the new workflow, students can check whether their advisor is available and see the available time slots
before they make the appointment.
Capture Student Sentiment with Icon Responses in Pulse Checks
Create pulse check assessment questions with the icon data type so students can respond with emojis. Then, create a rating scale
by assigning numeric values to the icon responses and view the student's sentiments over time on score graphs.
Score Applications with Rubrics
Make faster, more consistent, and more equitable admissions decisions with Application Scoring. Processors and reviewers can now
use rubrics to score applications anytime after they’re received. Administrators can define program-specific rubrics with weighted
or unweighted criteria and ratings and assign rubrics to application types. After a processor or reviewer rates an application, a decision
maker sees a score that captures the reviewer’s recommendation and comments.
Streamline Admissions Reviews with Stage Management
Automate complex application processes with greater visibility and control. Define stage transition criteria and create a transition
plan for each stage of the application review workflow. In addition to Case and Opportunity, stage management is now available
for use with these Education Cloud objects: Application Review, Application Decision, and Individual Application. Give processors
and reviewers a comprehensive view of the progress across stages with the Record Stage Overview Lightning web component.
New and Changed Objects in Education Cloud
Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects.
New and Changed Data Model Objects in Education Cloud
Access new education-specific data model objects (DMOs) within Data Cloud to bring learner data from external learning management,
student information, engagement, advancement, and enterprise resource planning systems into Data Cloud. Then, you can harmonize
the data to build segments, create calculated insights, and analyze key metrics.

378
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Education

New and Enhanced Common Features for Education Cloud

Education Cloud includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features to extend
and customize Education Cloud based on your business needs.
• Context Service
Simplify the sharing and consumption of data for business applications by using Context Service. Context Service is a general module
that connects applications and processes. It makes it easy to find and use data across different industries at every step of the digital
process. Build a structure for efficient data access with context definitions. Map the nodes and attributes defined in your definition
to the right input data sources. Import and export context definitions between orgs. Invoke and hydrate context instances through
invocable actions by using Salesforce Flows.

• Fundraising
Updates to Fundraising make it easy to manage and track campaign and donor information. You can automatically generate multiple
outreach source codes at once, add interest tags to outreach source codes, get soft credit metrics at a glance, automatically update
data rollups, and map custom fields for use in gift entry. You can also set up page layouts for summary objects, use the BP API to
create or manage pledges, and customize how RFM Scoring is calculated.

• Stage Management
With Stage Management, simplify the implementation of the application process with greater visibility and control. Define stage
transition criteria and create a transition plan for each stage of the application review workflow. Your users can have a comprehensive
view of the record stage progress by using the Record Stage Overview Lightning Web Component.

Autonomously Answer and Support Prospective Students

Grow your admissions team’s capacity in minutes. With Student Recruitment Agent for Agentforce, prospective students get immediate
answers to their questions about application processes, deadlines, cost of attendance, financial aid, and more. The agent is preconfigured
to respond with content from both published knowledge articles and applicable recruitment and admissions objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and the applicable Agentforce add-on license are enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can configure Student Recruitment Agent. Any user, including guest
users, can use the Student Recruitment Agent.

Gain Meaningful Insights with the Philanthropic Research Agent

Empower relationship officers with insights that enhance philanthropic research and engagement. The philanthropic research AI agent
helps relationship officers and researchers by using party philanthropic milestone records to answer questions about prospects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and the applicable Agentforce add-on license are enabled. For additional information, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can configure and use the Philanthropic Research Agent.

Consolidate Information in Student Records with the Student Management App

Give staff and faculty quick access to important student information. In a single, accessible view, include emergency contacts, relationships,
student contact information, and enrollment data in student records. Add a relationship graph to convey students’ relationships to
households. Assign access to advisors, registrars, and faculty.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.

379
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Education

Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can use this feature.

Get More from the Intelligent Degree Planner and the Learner Progress View
Use the Intelligent Degree Planner and the Learner Progress view to view courses that a student retakes, and help students plan their
academic careers more effectively with new enrollment statuses. Advisors can now compare program plans for students. Customize the
view for advisors by using the Compare Program Plans flow template. Add a button that staff can use to run a program plan comparison
from records such as cases.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can set up and manage degree plans in the CRM. Users with the
Education Cloud Experience Cloud Access permission set can create degree plans on your Experience Cloud site.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Intelligent Program Comparison Engine (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline Advancement-Specific Data Processing

Manage and report on advancement designations by capturing important reporting details. Advancement operations teams can track
a variety of funds, including endowed, capital, and operational, with flexible fields for additional reporting information. Ensure consistent
data collection for institutional reporting, and support compliance with industry reporting standards. This feature also introduces a
person’s role with the institution, graduation status, giving levels, and the purpose of their gifts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and Fundraising are enabled.
Who: To use Fundraising with Education Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to
your users.

Drive Comprehensive Prospect Research Activities

Store and manage detailed prospect research data for alumni, donors, and households. Relationship officers and prospect researchers
can track and analyze wealth indicators, philanthropic events, research assessments, and key milestones to build a complete picture of
activity. This long-term view supports continuous research efforts, so that your institution can uncover deeper insights and strengthen
relationships based on a lifetime of engagement and activity.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and Fundraising are enabled.
Who: To use Fundraising with Education Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to
your users.

Unlock Deeper Insights with Generational Categories

Better understand your alumni through analysis of generational cohort and graduation status. Relationship officers and prospect
researchers can now categorize alumni by groups like baby boomers, Gen X, millennials, and Gen Z. They can also group alumni into
segments by graduation date.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and Fundraising are enabled.

380
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Education

Who: To use Fundraising with Education Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to
your users.

Gain Holistic Student Insights and Visualize Learner Progress

Get the latest student data from external systems using Data Cloud for Education: Holistic Student Insights. With Einstein generative AI,
get insights on a student, including their academic, current term, course offering participant, attendance, and course participation details.
Use Visual Indicator to show a student’s performance in the current term based on their course component scores. You can use custom
categories such as At Risk, On Track, and Needs Attention.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and the Einstein for Sales or Einstein for Service add-on license are enabled, with Data Cloud as part of an Einstein add-on or as a
standalone license.
Who: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access and Data Cloud permission sets can use Data Cloud for Education.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Student Insights for Advisors (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get a Unified View of Student Data with Learner Profile

Use the learner profile record page to get a unified view of student data from multiple related objects. Search, sort, and filter the records
to create student list views, and then perform bulk actions on the lists. Schedule a batch job with the Update Learner Profiles with CRM
Data definition to automatically create and update learner profile records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can configure this feature.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Learner Profile for Advisors (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Schedule Appointments Efficiently with a New Lightning Web Component

Use the new Lightning web component, Schedule Appointment, on your Experience Cloud site to streamline the appointment booking
process. With the new workflow, students can check whether their advisor is available and see the available time slots before they make
the appointment.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can use this feature.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Schedule Appointments with My Appointments Header (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Capture Student Sentiment with Icon Responses in Pulse Checks

Create pulse check assessment questions with the icon data type so students can respond with emojis. Then, create a rating scale by
assigning numeric values to the icon responses and view the student's sentiments over time on score graphs.

381
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Education

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can use this feature.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pulse Checks for Learner Feedback (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Score Applications with Rubrics

Make faster, more consistent, and more equitable admissions decisions with Application Scoring. Processors and reviewers can now use
rubrics to score applications anytime after they’re received. Administrators can define program-specific rubrics with weighted or
unweighted criteria and ratings and assign rubrics to application types. After a processor or reviewer rates an application, a decision
maker sees a score that captures the reviewer’s recommendation and comments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access or the Education Cloud Limited Access permission set can use this feature.

Streamline Admissions Reviews with Stage Management

Automate complex application processes with greater visibility and control. Define stage transition criteria and create a transition plan
for each stage of the application review workflow. In addition to Case and Opportunity, stage management is now available for use with
these Education Cloud objects: Application Review, Application Decision, and Individual Application. Give processors and reviewers a
comprehensive view of the progress across stages with the Record Stage Overview Lightning web component.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Stage Management Design User permission set can configure this feature.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Verify, Review, and Decide on Applications (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New and Changed Objects in Education Cloud

Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects.
Represent a learner’s profile
Use the new LearnerProfile object.
Associate a summary with a course offering participant
Use the new Summary field on the CourseOfferingParticipant object.
Associate an assessment question version choice with an assessment question response
Use the new AssessmentQuestionVerChoice field on the AssessmentQuestionResponse object.
Represent the resources required for the execution of an academic term grade point average calculation policy rule
Use the new AcademicTermGpaCalcEvent object.
Represent a junction between a regulatory code and a regulation clause version
Use the new RgltyCodeRegClauseVer object.

382
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Education

Represent a junction between a regulatory code violation and a regulation clause version
Use the new RgltyCodeViolRegClVer object.
Specify the usage type for a business operations process
Use the new UsageType field on the BusinessOperationsProcess object.
Specify the usage type for a compliance control
Use the new UsageType field on the ComplianceControl object.
Represent more details about a student's academic term
Use the new AcademicStanding field on the AcademicTermEnrollment object.
Picklist values for AcademicStanding:
• Good Standing
• HonorsDeans List
• Academic Warning
• Academic Probation
• Academic Dismissal
• Required Withdrawal
• Reinstatement Status
Specify more parameters for assessing an application to an institution
Use the new fields on the ActionPlanTemplateAssignment object: AssignmentQueueName, AssignmentSize, and
AssignmentType. The picklist value for AssignmentType is Staff Review.
Represent the calculated score for a reviewer’s assessment of an application to an institution
Use the new Score field on the ApplicationDecision, ApplicationReview, and Assessment objects.
Represent a learner’s participation in a course more clearly
Use the new labels added to the ParticipantResultStatus field on the CourseOfferingPtcpResult object. The new labels
are: Failed, Passed, Withdrew.
Indicate whether a course offering is active
Use the new IsActive field on the CourseOffering object.
Represent a rubric criterion for a course offering
Use the new CourseOfrgRubricCriterion object.
Represent the grade that a course offering participant received for an assignment, quiz, or other course offering activity
Use the new CourseOfrPtcpActvtyGrd object.
Represent more course participation statuses
Use the new picklist values on the ParticipationStatus field on the CourseOfferingParticipant object: Declined Waitlist,
Dropped, Registering.
Represent timeframe, recurrence, and type, such as class or lab, in a course schedule
Use the new fields on the CourseOfferingSchedule object: EndDate, RecurrencePattern, StartDate, and Type.
Represent timeframe, recurrence, and type, such as class or lab, in a template for course schedule
Use the new fields on the CourseOfferingSchedule object: EndDate, RecurrencePattern, StartDate, and Type.
Record permission to make FERPA disclosures
Use the two new fields on the ContactProfile object: HasFerpaParentalDisclosure, HasFerpaThrdPtyDisclosure.
Represent the review and decision associated with an individual application task
Use the new fields on the IndividualApplicationTask object: ApplicationDecision, ApplicationReview.

383
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Nonprofits

Represent more details in a learner’s program plan

Use the new fields on the LearnerProgram object: CatalogYear, ClassCohort, and ExpectedGraduationDate.

SEE ALSO:
Education Cloud Developer Guide: Education Cloud Standard Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New and Changed Data Model Objects in Education Cloud

Access new education-specific data model objects (DMOs) within Data Cloud to bring learner data from external learning management,
student information, engagement, advancement, and enterprise resource planning systems into Data Cloud. Then, you can harmonize
the data to build segments, create calculated insights, and analyze key metrics.
Represent a learner’s activity in the Learning Management System, for example, logins
Use the new LearnerLearningSystemActivity object.
Represent a learner’s activity on campus, for example, use of a library or gym
Use the new LearnerCampusSpacesActivity object.
Represent meal card transactions
Use the new MealCardActivityId object.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Education Cloud Data Model Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce for Nonprofits

Customize Nonprofit Cloud with the improved Fundraising, Grantmaking, and Program and Case Management features. Leverage the
enhancements to gift entry, outreach source code generation, rollups, scoring frameworks, and the Business Process API in Fundraising.
Streamline grantmaking by batch assigning reviews and using the new stage management feature. Create multiple indicator results
and custom care plan goals, as well as clone care plan templates in Program and Case Management.

IN THIS SECTION:
Nonprofit Cloud
Nonprofit Cloud improved Fundraising, Grantmaking, and Program and Case Management in this release. Enhancements to gift
entry, outreach source code generation, rollups, scoring frameworks, and the Business Process API are available in Fundraising. Batch
assigning reviews and a stage management feature to streamline grantmaking processes are new to Grantmaking. The ability to
create multiple indicator results and custom care plan goals, as well as clone care plan templates is available in Program and Case
Management with this release.
Salesforce for Nonprofits Managed Packages
The foundationConnect managed package is retiring.

Nonprofit Cloud
Nonprofit Cloud improved Fundraising, Grantmaking, and Program and Case Management in this release. Enhancements to gift entry,
outreach source code generation, rollups, scoring frameworks, and the Business Process API are available in Fundraising. Batch assigning
reviews and a stage management feature to streamline grantmaking processes are new to Grantmaking. The ability to create multiple
indicator results and custom care plan goals, as well as clone care plan templates is available in Program and Case Management with
this release.

384
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce for Nonprofits

• Fundraising
Easily manage and track campaign and donor information with Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. Quickly generate multiple outreach
source codes, add interest tags to outreach source codes, get soft credit metrics at-a-glance, automatically update data rollups, and
map custom fields in gift entry. Additionally, set up page layouts for summary objects, use the Business Process (BP) API to create
or manage pledges, and customize how Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) Scoring is calculated.

• Outcome Management
Manage your impact strategy more efficiently and improve consistency by entering multiple indicator results in a spreadsheet-like
experience.

• Program and Case Management

Create personalized care plans by setting client-specific goals in the Care Plan UI, making the plans more meaningful and motivating.
Improve care plan quality and consistency and create compliant care plan templates from the existing ones.

• Grantmaking
Streamline the grant review process by supporting grant managers to batch-assign multiple applications to reviewers, saving time
and boosting efficiency. Automate routine tasks with Stage Management to ensure accuracy and compliance through clearly defined
stage criteria.

New and Enhanced Common Features for Nonprofit Cloud

Nonprofit Cloud includes some features that are available across the clouds and products in Industries. Use these features to extend and
customize Nonprofit Cloud based on your business needs.
• Action Launcher
Contact center agents can now find recommended actions based on semantic search.

• Action Plans
Increase convenience of the users when working with action plans for their business processes. Enhance the user experience by
automating updates for the action plans as the user completes the task action plan items.

• Business Rules Engine

Monitor and manage the usage of Business Rules Engine components with the new Guardrail Connect API. Use transient attributes
to temporarily store interim calculation results in an expression set. Activate and save expression sets in one step when copying
them from templates. Create context-based expression sets easily, without marking steps as output. Retrieve datetime information
in CSV decision tables by using the date/time data type. Track the CSV upload status for decision tables.

• Compliant Data Sharing

Quickly deactivate Salesforce users who have Compliant Data Sharing records using a new setting.

• Data Processing Engine

Simplify field mapping in writeback nodes by using Einstein generative AI. Use the append and hierarchy nodes in Data Cloud to
run batch transformations on large volumes of org data that you can later use for analytics and reporting. Ensure data integrity by
using the composite writeback feature to group related records at run time, and write them back to the core. Download the failed
records file and use it to debug the issues in composite writeback or CSV file ingestion when the Data Processing Engine definition
run fails.

• Discovery Framework
Salesforce users can save assessments as drafts, providing the conveneicne of completing them at a later time.

385
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management

• Group Membership and Households

Receive change events for more objects. Effortlessly add the right Members to your party relationship groups.

• Omnistudio Document Generation

Ensure compatibility with the new document generation infrastructure and add flexibility to document generation workflows. Get
increased hourly and daily limits for batch server-side document generation requests. Plan for the retirement of Document Generation
1.0 by switching to Document Generation 2.0. The enhancements in Document Generation 2.0 include a new custom fonts
configuration, document previewer, and hybrid client-side processing. Use dynamic image tokens in document templates for
server-side document generation.

• Record Rollup Definitions

Aggregate tasks and events at a household or group level to help relationship managers stay organized and easily track the progress
of events and tasks. Reduce clutter by deleting outdated and unused record rollup definitions. Edit the name and description of a
definition for better clarity and usability.

Salesforce for Nonprofits Managed Packages

The foundationConnect managed package is retiring.

IN THIS SECTION:
foundationConnect is Being Retired
Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. After January 31, 2025, you can't renew subscriptions for this product, and foundationConnect
is scheduled for retirement on January 31, 2026.

foundationConnect is Being Retired

Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. After January 31, 2025, you can't renew subscriptions for this product, and foundationConnect
is scheduled for retirement on January 31, 2026.
Where: This change applies to all foundationConnect products and editions.
Why: Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in Introduction for Grantmaking and contact your Account Executive
with any questions.

Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management

Ensure compatibility with the new document generation infrastructure and add greater flexibility to the workflows. Transition from
retired Visualforce-based Omniscripts to Lightning Web Component-based Omniscripts. Prepare for the retirement of Document
Generation 1.0 by upgrading to Document Generation 2.0, which introduces features like custom font configuration, a document
previewer, and hybrid client-side processing.

IN THIS SECTION:
Visualforce-Based Document Generation Omniscripts Are Being Retired
The singleDocxVF, multiDocxVF, singleWebVF, and generic document generation Omniscripts are retired. Salesforce no longer
supports these Omniscripts and their clones. To use Omniscripts for document generation, switch to Lightning Web Component-based
(LWC) Omniscripts. Use the sample LWC Omniscripts, such as singleDocxLwc, multiDocxLwc, and singleWebLwc, in the Industries
Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities, and Insurance managed packages.

386
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management

Document Generation 1.0 is Being Retired

Document Generation 1.0 is scheduled for retirement on July 31, 2025. Document Generation 1.0 refers to the document generation
within the Industries Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio
managed packages up to the Winter ‘25 release. To continue to use document generation capabilities, switch to Document Generation
2.0, which includes updates to the client-side document generation processing, the PDF previewer, and the custom font configuration.
Enhance Document Generation with Document Generation 2.0
Make document generation more robust without significantly altering your day-to-day experience or existing features within the
Industries Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio managed
packages. You must provide in-app consent to transition to Document Generation 2.0, which includes changes to the client-side
document generation process, the PDF previewer’s look and feel, and minor changes to the custom font configuration. The client-side
document generation adopts a hybrid approach, processing .docx files locally within the package and leveraging Hyperforce
infrastructure for limited operations, ensuring consistency with server-side generation while adhering to its limits

Visualforce-Based Document Generation Omniscripts Are Being Retired

The singleDocxVF, multiDocxVF, singleWebVF, and generic document generation Omniscripts are retired. Salesforce no longer supports
these Omniscripts and their clones. To use Omniscripts for document generation, switch to Lightning Web Component-based (LWC)
Omniscripts. Use the sample LWC Omniscripts, such as singleDocxLwc, multiDocxLwc, and singleWebLwc, in the Industries
Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities, and Insurance managed packages.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Vlocity Templates. Then, install and activate the Lightning Experience Web
Component-based Omniscripts available in the DocGenerationSampleLwc datapack.

SEE ALSO:
Visualforce Omniscripts Retirement
Install and Activate Other Sample Omniscripts for CME Winter '23 and Later Releases
Generic Document Generation
docGenerationSample/singleDocxVFt
docGenerationSample/multiDocxVF
docGenerationSample/singleWebVF
docGenerationSample/singleDocxLwc
docGenerationSample/multiDocxLwc
docGenerationSample/singleWebLwc

Document Generation 1.0 is Being Retired

Document Generation 1.0 is scheduled for retirement on July 31, 2025. Document Generation 1.0 refers to the document generation
within the Industries Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio
managed packages up to the Winter ‘25 release. To continue to use document generation capabilities, switch to Document Generation
2.0, which includes updates to the client-side document generation processing, the PDF previewer, and the custom font configuration.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Document Generation 1.0 is set to retire by July 31, 2025. To continue access to document generation capabilities, upgrade to
the Spring ‘25 managed package, provide in-app consent, and configure Document Generation 2.0.

387
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management

How: To continue to access document generation capabilities, upgrade to the Spring ‘25 managed package, provide in-app consent,
and perform post-upgrade steps to use Document Generation 2.0 services and features.

SEE ALSO:
Document Generation 1.0 Retirement
Changes to Document Generation Process and Previewer in Spring '25
Document Generation Processing with Document Generation 2.0

Enhance Document Generation with Document Generation 2.0

Make document generation more robust without significantly altering your day-to-day experience or existing features within the Industries
Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio managed packages. You
must provide in-app consent to transition to Document Generation 2.0, which includes changes to the client-side document generation
process, the PDF previewer’s look and feel, and minor changes to the custom font configuration. The client-side document generation
adopts a hybrid approach, processing .docx files locally within the package and leveraging Hyperforce infrastructure for limited operations,
ensuring consistency with server-side generation while adhering to its limits
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Document Generation 2.0 Notification. Then, click Server-Side Notice. Review the
terms and conditions, complete the Document Generation 2.0 installation.

IN THIS SECTION:
Migrate and Sync Custom Fonts
Manage your custom fonts in Document Generation 2.0 by migrating them to a centralized repository and syncing them across
orgs. If you add, delete, or modify font files, sync the fonts again to ensure the changes are applied.

SEE ALSO:
Document Generation 1.0 Retirement
Changes to Document Generation Process and Previewer in Spring '25

388
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Migrate and Sync Custom Fonts

Manage your custom fonts in Document Generation 2.0 by migrating them to a centralized repository and syncing them across orgs. If
you add, delete, or modify font files, sync the fonts again to ensure the changes are applied.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To migrate and sync fonts, users need the DocGen Designer permission set.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Document Generation and select Custom Fonts Configuration. To migrate
your custom fonts, transfer them from Static Resources to the centralized Custom Fonts Library and click Migrate. To sync your custom
fonts, click Sync.

Industries Common Features

Some Salesforce Industries products share features, and we’ve enhanced efficiency and scalability across industries. Business Rules Engine
offers greater flexibility with transient attributes and context-based expression sets, while Collections helps minimize delinquencies and
optimize debt collection. Cross-Object Field History tracks related record changes in a single view, and Data Processing Engine leverages
Einstein Generative AI for field mapping suggestions. Group Membership and Households features simplify member management, while
Industries CPQ improves catalog management and promotional strategies. MuleSoft integration apps now run in private spaces, and
Omnistudio Document Generation 2.0 elevates document generation processes. Program and Case Management introduces care plan
templates and client-specific goal-setting. Record Rollup Definitions allow aggregation and deletion of unused definitions, while Stage
Management tracks stage transitions and progress toward key milestones. We've also made enhancements to action launcher, context
services, decision table, record rollup definitions, and stage management features.

IN THIS SECTION:
AI Accelerator and Scoring Framework
Build and deploy propensity models effortlessly by using Scoring Framework. Define template configurations to create CRM Analytics
apps with Einstein Discovery models, and recipes without writing any code.
Action Launcher
Contact center agents can now find recommended actions based on semantic search.
Action Plans
Increase convenience of the users when working with action plans for their business processes. Enhance the user experience by
automating updates for the action plans as the user completes the task action plan items.
Business Rules Engine
Monitor and manage the usage of Business Rules Engine components with the new Guardrail Connect API. Use transient attributes
to temporarily store interim calculation results in an expression set. Activate and save expression sets in one step when copying
them from templates. Create context-based expression sets easily, without marking steps as output. Retrieve datetime information
in CSV decision tables by using the date/time data type. Track the CSV upload status for decision tables.
Collections
Financial institutions and businesses can streamline their collection processes, reduce delinquencies, and maintain positive customer
relationships. Effectively manage collection plans and related details by ingesting data from third-party systems with CSV File Import
and Composite Graph API. Simplify client interactions by using the prebuilt features in the Collections console app. Collections
specialists can create promise-to-pay agreements, generate and send payment links, and request direct debit to the core banking
system. Additionally, Salesforce Pay Now provides additional payment options, and MuleSoft integration expedites the collection
process and improves overall cash flow.
Compliant Data Sharing
Quickly deactivate Salesforce users who have Compliant Data Sharing records using a new setting.

389
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Context Service
Improve performance and minimize repetitive data retrieval from the database by using reference definitions. Automatically populate
data in a context definition by using system information nodes. Store temporary data changes in the cache for a context definition,
without saving them to the database by using the Transient option. Query, update, and delete context instances by using flow
actions.
Cross-Object Field History (Beta)
Track and visualize field changes across related objects in a single view.
Data Processing Engine
Simplify field mapping in writeback nodes by using Einstein generative AI. Use the append and hierarchy nodes in Data Cloud to
run batch transformations on large volumes of org data that you can later use for analytics and reporting. Ensure data integrity by
using the composite writeback feature to group related records at run time, and write them back to the core. Download the failed
records file and use it to debug the issues in composite writeback or CSV file ingestion when the Data Processing Engine definition
run fails.
Discovery Framework
Salesforce users can save assessments as drafts, providing the conveneicne of completing them at a later time.
Einstein Autofill (Beta)
Streamline form completion by providing your teams access to the AI-powered Einstein Autofill feature.
Fundraising
Easily manage and track campaign and donor information with Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. Quickly generate multiple outreach
source codes, add interest tags to outreach source codes, get soft credit metrics at-a-glance, automatically update data rollups, and
map custom fields in gift entry. Additionally, set up page layouts for summary objects, use the Business Process (BP) API to create
or manage pledges, and customize how Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) Scoring is calculated.
Grantmaking
Streamline the grant review process by supporting grant managers to batch-assign multiple applications to reviewers, saving time
and boosting efficiency. Automate routine tasks with Stage Management to ensure accuracy and compliance through clearly defined
stage criteria.
Group Membership and Households
Receive change events for more objects. Effortlessly add the right Members to your party relationship groups.
Industries Configure, Price, Quote (CPQ)
Spring 25 brings enhancements to streamline catalog management, promotions, and user experiences. Updates include automated
duplicate offer resolution, seamless DC–CPQ integration, support for large promotion bundles, and timezone-aware catalog data.
Additional features such as API versioning and anonymous user pricing offer greater flexibility and accuracy. These changes simplify
processes, enhance efficiency, and improve overall performance.
Integration Solutions with MuleSoft
Save and reuse the configuration details when you enable an integration to connect your Salesforce org to an external system.
Omnistudio Document Generation
Ensure compatibility with the new document generation infrastructure and add flexibility to document generation workflows. Get
increased hourly and daily limits for batch server-side document generation requests. Plan for the retirement of Document Generation
1.0 by switching to Document Generation 2.0. The enhancements in Document Generation 2.0 include a new custom fonts
configuration, document previewer, and hybrid client-side processing. Use dynamic image tokens in document templates for
server-side document generation.
Outcome Management
Manage your impact strategy more efficiently and improve consistency by entering multiple indicator results in a spreadsheet-like
experience.

390
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Program and Case Management

Create personalized care plans by setting client-specific goals in the Care Plan UI, making the plans more meaningful and motivating.
Improve care plan quality and consistency and create compliant care plan templates from the existing ones.
Record Rollup Definitions
Aggregate tasks and events at a household or group level to help relationship managers stay organized and easily track the progress
of events and tasks. Reduce clutter by deleting outdated and unused record rollup definitions. Edit the name and description of a
definition for better clarity and usability.
Stage Management
Ensure alignment with overarching business goals by declaratively controlling parent object stage transitions based on child object
criteria. Save time and effort by cloning stage definitions for similar business processes across different record types. Track progress
towards a specific stage with the new Milestone step type. Optimize workflows with conditional step execution by using expression
sets.

AI Accelerator and Scoring Framework

Build and deploy propensity models effortlessly by using Scoring Framework. Define template configurations to create CRM Analytics
apps with Einstein Discovery models, and recipes without writing any code.

IN THIS SECTION:
Improve Prediction Accuracy by Optimizing Training and Scoring Data
Refine your training and scoring data by using the new separate filter options in the Scoring Framework. Optimize your training data
to improve model accuracy and align your scoring process with business objectives. Streamline your workflow and boost overall
performance by easily switching between separate filters or applying a single filter for both training and scoring data.

Improve Prediction Accuracy by Optimizing Training and Scoring Data

Refine your training and scoring data by using the new separate filter options in the Scoring Framework. Optimize your training data to
improve model accuracy and align your scoring process with business objectives. Streamline your workflow and boost overall performance
by easily switching between separate filters or applying a single filter for both training and scoring data.
Where: This change applies to the Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
Who: Scoring Framework is available to users in Automotive, Communications, Consumer Goods, Education, Energy and Utilities, Financial
Services, Health, Manufacturing, and Media Clouds with their respective Revenue Intelligence licenses.
How: To create a template configuration, go to the Scoring Framework Setup page, and select the relevant template configuration type.

Action Launcher
Contact center agents can now find recommended actions based on semantic search.

IN THIS SECTION:
Reduce the Cognitive Load of Contact Center Agents with Recommended Actions
Contact center agents (CCAs) can find recommended actions in Action Launcher by using semantic search, which is based on the
meaning of search keywords and intents derived from a chat or voice call transcript. With semantic search, CCAs can find actions
quickly without entering the exact search keyword.

391
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Reduce the Cognitive Load of Contact Center Agents with Recommended Actions
Contact center agents (CCAs) can find recommended actions in Action Launcher by using semantic search, which is based on the
meaning of search keywords and intents derived from a chat or voice call transcript. With semantic search, CCAs can find actions quickly
without entering the exact search keyword.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Starter, Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Data Cloud license and the Industry Service Excellence, Data Cloud Semantic Search, Einstein
Generative Services, Digital Engagement, and Service Cloud Voice add-on licenses.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Action Launcher, and then select Recommended Actions. Enable recommended
actions. To find recommended actions, turn on Recommended Actions on Action Launcher. Either type the search keyword and click
Search, or click Show Topics and select a topic.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Action Launcher

Action Plans
Increase convenience of the users when working with action plans for their business processes. Enhance the user experience by automating
updates for the action plans as the user completes the task action plan items.

IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Status Update for Action Plans
Enable the status of the action plan to be in sync with the status of the task action plan items. Previously, the user had to manually
update the status of the action plan. The action plan status can now automatically be updated according to the status of the task
action plan items.

Automate Status Update for Action Plans

Enable the status of the action plan to be in sync with the status of the task action plan items. Previously, the user had to manually update
the status of the action plan. The action plan status can now automatically be updated according to the status of the task action plan
items.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find Box, select Flows. Clone and activate the existing Update Action Plan Status flow.

Business Rules Engine

Monitor and manage the usage of Business Rules Engine components with the new Guardrail Connect API. Use transient attributes to
temporarily store interim calculation results in an expression set. Activate and save expression sets in one step when copying them from
templates. Create context-based expression sets easily, without marking steps as output. Retrieve datetime information in CSV decision
tables by using the date/time data type. Track the CSV upload status for decision tables.

392
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

IN THIS SECTION:
Monitor the Usage of Business Rules Engine Components
Inspect hourly limits on Business Rules Engine components by using the Guardrail Connect API and prevent errors caused by
exceeding these limits. Optimize business rule management by building scheduled flows with Apex and Business Rules Engine
Guardrail Connect API. Monitor usage and configure actions based on limits, such as sending email alerts when you reach a threshold.
Simplify Calculations By Using Transient Attributes
Break down complex calculations into multiple steps by using transient attributes from the linked context definition to temporarily
store interim calculation results in expression set steps. Transient attributes don’t require mapping, and their values aren't saved in
the database.
Easily Activate Expression Set Templates in a Single Step
Quickly get expression sets ready for immediate testing and use. When you save a context-based template as an expression set or
copy a context-based expression set, rank the expression set version and activate it.
Efficiently Configure Context-Based Expression Sets
Create business rules that use context-based expression sets without explicitly marking any step as an output step. This simplified
configuration eliminates the need to manually select the Input in Output option and reduces the time and effort required to design
complex business rules. Manage the output by using the context mapping itself.
Simplify Datetime Retrieval with the New Date/Time Data Type
Decision tables created using CSV as the data source now support the date/time data type, in addition to the existing data types.
Use the date/time data type to tailor your decision tables to improve decision making and retrieve information such as created date,
modified date, start date, or end date from date-time columns.
Monitor CSV Upload Progress for Decision Tables
Get visibility into CSV upload progress for decision tables with the CSV Upload Details field. The field is available on the Table tab of
decision tables created using CSV as the source. You can start using the decision table when the upload is completed.

Monitor the Usage of Business Rules Engine Components

Inspect hourly limits on Business Rules Engine components by using the Guardrail Connect API and prevent errors caused by exceeding
these limits. Optimize business rule management by building scheduled flows with Apex and Business Rules Engine Guardrail Connect
API. Monitor usage and configure actions based on limits, such as sending email alerts when you reach a threshold.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Business Rules Engine and
Context Service are enabled.

Simplify Calculations By Using Transient Attributes

Break down complex calculations into multiple steps by using transient attributes from the linked context definition to temporarily store
interim calculation results in expression set steps. Transient attributes don’t require mapping, and their values aren't saved in the database.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Business Rules Engine and
Context Service are enabled.
Who: To create context definitions, users need the Context Service Admin permission set. To use context definitions in expression sets,
users need the Rule Engine Designer permission set.
How: To mark an attribute as transient, select the Transient option in the context definition.

393
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Easily Activate Expression Set Templates in a Single Step

Quickly get expression sets ready for immediate testing and use. When you save a context-based template as an expression set or copy
a context-based expression set, rank the expression set version and activate it.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Business Rules Engine and
Context Service are enabled.
Who: To create context definitions, users need the Context Service Admin permission set. To use context definitions in expression sets,
users need the Rule Engine Designer permission set.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Configure Your Expression Set Version (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create and Configure Your Expression Set Version (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Efficiently Configure Context-Based Expression Sets

Create business rules that use context-based expression sets without explicitly marking any step as an output step. This simplified
configuration eliminates the need to manually select the Input in Output option and reduces the time and effort required to design
complex business rules. Manage the output by using the context mapping itself.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Business Rules Engine and
Context Service are enabled.
Who: To create context definitions, users need the Context Service Admin permission set. To use context definitions in expression sets,
users need the Rule Engine Designer permission set.

Simplify Datetime Retrieval with the New Date/Time Data Type

Decision tables created using CSV as the data source now support the date/time data type, in addition to the existing data types. Use
the date/time data type to tailor your decision tables to improve decision making and retrieve information such as created date, modified
date, start date, or end date from date-time columns.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions for Industries clouds where Business
Rules Engine is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Supported Data Types and Operators in Decision Tables (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Monitor CSV Upload Progress for Decision Tables

Get visibility into CSV upload progress for decision tables with the CSV Upload Details field. The field is available on the Table tab of
decision tables created using CSV as the source. You can start using the decision table when the upload is completed.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions for Industries clouds where Business
Rules Engine is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add CSV Data to Decision Tables (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

394
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Collections
Financial institutions and businesses can streamline their collection processes, reduce delinquencies, and maintain positive customer
relationships. Effectively manage collection plans and related details by ingesting data from third-party systems with CSV File Import
and Composite Graph API. Simplify client interactions by using the prebuilt features in the Collections console app. Collections specialists
can create promise-to-pay agreements, generate and send payment links, and request direct debit to the core banking system. Additionally,
Salesforce Pay Now provides additional payment options, and MuleSoft integration expedites the collection process and improves overall
cash flow.

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Collection Activities Efficiently with Collections Console App
Help your collections specialists and supervisors streamline and optimize the debt collection processes, and achieve operational
efficiency. Enhance transparency and improve the tracking and recovery of debts by using the console app’s intuitive features for
monitoring, managing, and communicating with debtors.
Save Time and Effort with a Preconfigured Action Launcher Deployment
Your collections specialists can quickly launch collection actions, such as create promise to pay, and generate and send payment
link on a collection plan record page. Use Collection Plan Processes, a preconfigured Action Launcher deployment that includes
context objects, and frequently used actions. Customize this preconfigured deployment to meet your business needs.
Create Promise to Pay Agreements Quickly
Your collections specialists can use the Create Promise to Pay prebuilt action on the collection plan Lightning record page. This
action triggers the Create Promise to Pay prebuilt flow that helps collections specialists to get the payment commitment details
from a delinquent borrower, to create a corresponding payment schedule, and to send an email to the borrower with the promised
payment details. Customize this prebuilt flow according to your business requirements.
Offer Additional Payment Options with Salesforce Pay Now
Help your collections specialists facilitate payment activities related to an ongoing collection activity with Pay Now. From the
Collections console app, your collections specialists can generate payment links on the fly and send them to customers, increasing
the probability of timely payments, and reducing the time required for follow-up actions. Significantly boost recovery rates by making
it easier for customers to complete payments through branded, mobile-responsive Pay Now web pages. Use the Generate and Send
Payment Link prebuilt flow to quickly gather payment details and generate and send the payment link to the customer by email.
Use the automatically triggered Send Reminder with Payment Link prebuilt flow to send the payment link to the customer one day
before the payment due date. Customize these flows according to your business requirements.
Automatically Update Payments Received in Collection Plans and Payment Schedules
Automate the process to update the payments received details to save time, minimize human errors, and make sure that users
always have access to the most accurate and up-to-date information. Use the Collections: Update Payment Details prebuilt flow that
is triggered automatically when a payment intent event is created for a successful transaction. Customize the flow according to your
business requirements.
Notify Customers of Payment Status Automatically
Enhance transparency, reduce customer inquiries, and improve the overall customer experience by automating the payment status
notification process. Use the Collections: Send Payment Status Email prebuilt flow that’s triggered automatically when a payment
transaction event is created. Customize the flow according to your business requirements.
Automate Case Creation and Closure for Collection Plans
Use the prebuilt flows to help your collections specialists manage and track the cases for collection plans smoothly and efficiently.
Customize the Create Case for Collection Plan prebuilt flow that creates a case for a collection plan and is triggered automatically
when a collection plan record is created with a valid reason. Customize the Close Collection Plan and Associated Cases prebuilt flow
that’s triggered automatically and sets the status of a collection plan and all its associated cases to closed based on certain predefined
conditions.

395
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Determine Collection Plan Segments with Business Rules Engine

Determine and update the collection plan segments for collection plan records in bulk by using the prebuilt event orchestration
procedure that uses Business Rules Engine components. Help collections managers create tailored collection strategies, mitigate
credit risk, and prioritize collection efforts according to different segments. Collections managers can also customize the communication
based on each segment, and enhance customer relationships. Clone and customize the Business Rules Engine components according
to your business requirements.
Create a Prioritized List of Collection Plans with Actionable Segmentation
Prioritize high-value recovery efforts and improve recovery rates with prioritized lists of collection plans. Create actionable list
definitions by using the Collection Plan and related objects. Your collections supervisors or collections managers can create prioritized
lists of collection plans by using these list definitions. Collections managers can plan collection activities more effectively, streamline
work distribution, and improve collaboration by assigning these lists or list members to collections specialists. Filter the lists by due
amount, days past due, and collection plan segment, or even fields from other objects related to collections, including city or financial
account type.
Maximize Collections with Request Direct Debit Action
Make your collections process more effective and efficiently address failed debits by using the Request Direct Debit action. When a
mandated direct debit fails, the account enters a collections list because of an outstanding balance. Collections specialists can quickly
request a new debit from the customer’s account on an actionable list page, expediting the collection process, and improving overall
cash flow. Use MuleSoft integration to help your collections specialist to submit a direct debit request to the core banking system.
Import Collections Data with CSV File Import
Simplify and accelerate the process of managing Collections data from external systems by using CSV File Import. Easily import large
volumes of Collections data from CSV files into Collection Plan and related objects.
Streamline Record Creation for Collection Plan and Related Objects with Composite Graph API
Automate Collections data import processes, ensuring data consistency and integrity by using the Composite Graph API. Create all
your collection plans, collection plan items, contacts, and other related object records in one go, through a single Composite Graph
API request.
Create Effective Collection Campaigns with Collections Data Kit
Help collections managers effortlessly manage collection campaigns, segments, and content with Marketing Cloud Growth, without
logging into a separate marketing app. After installing the Collections Data Kit, collections managers can readily use collections data
to create Data Cloud segments by using criteria such as days past due, total overdue amount, or collection plan segment. Use
automated workflows to run these targeted campaigns across multiple channels, such as email and SMS, to enhance the chances
of successful collection outcomes and maintain positive relationships. Track the performance of your collection campaigns in real
time and make data-driven adjustments to optimize results.
Get Collections Up and Running with Ease
Use the new Collections Guided Setup to assign required permissions, enable features, and use a preconfigured Action Launcher
deployment. Set up integrated case management, Business Rules Engine components, Actionable Segmentation, Salesforce Pay
Now, and MuleSoft Integration to get started with Collections activities easily and quickly.
New and Changed Objects
Do more with these new and updated Collections objects.

Manage Collection Activities Efficiently with Collections Console App

Help your collections specialists and supervisors streamline and optimize the debt collection processes, and achieve operational efficiency.
Enhance transparency and improve the tracking and recovery of debts by using the console app’s intuitive features for monitoring,
managing, and communicating with debtors.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.

396
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

When: Collections is available starting April 2025.

Why: Collections specialists and collections supervisors or collections managers can streamline client interactions by using the prebuilt
features in the Collections console app. Access collection plans, collection lists, cases, accounts, and contacts from the console’s homepage.
The home page also shows collection performance as of the current date, and the assigned lists of collection plans. Collections specialists
and managers can see a borrower’s profile card, loan details, promise to pay agreements, collection events on a timeline, and financial
account details. They can also launch the important actions that are easily accessible on the collection plan record details pages.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Collections.

Save Time and Effort with a Preconfigured Action Launcher Deployment

Your collections specialists can quickly launch collection actions, such as create promise to pay, and generate and send payment link
on a collection plan record page. Use Collection Plan Processes, a preconfigured Action Launcher deployment that includes context
objects, and frequently used actions. Customize this preconfigured deployment to meet your business needs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Action Launcher, and then select Deployments. Select Collection Plan Processes,
and click Use Deployment.

Create Promise to Pay Agreements Quickly

Your collections specialists can use the Create Promise to Pay prebuilt action on the collection plan Lightning record page. This action
triggers the Create Promise to Pay prebuilt flow that helps collections specialists to get the payment commitment details from a delinquent
borrower, to create a corresponding payment schedule, and to send an email to the borrower with the promised payment details.
Customize this prebuilt flow according to your business requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
Why: By getting a commitment from the borrower to pay a specific amount by a certain date, banks and financial institutions can better
manage their cash flow and financial planning. The promise to pay agreements streamline the collection process, so collections specialists
can focus on more complex cases and reduce the time spent on follow-ups. Use a formal promise to pay agreement as legal documentation
in cases of dispute. Offer flexible payment plans and maintain positive relationships with customers, leading to improved customer
loyalty.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select Flows. Open the Create Promise to Pay flow, and click Save As
New Version.

Offer Additional Payment Options with Salesforce Pay Now

Help your collections specialists facilitate payment activities related to an ongoing collection activity with Pay Now. From the Collections
console app, your collections specialists can generate payment links on the fly and send them to customers, increasing the probability
of timely payments, and reducing the time required for follow-up actions. Significantly boost recovery rates by making it easier for
customers to complete payments through branded, mobile-responsive Pay Now web pages. Use the Generate and Send Payment Link
prebuilt flow to quickly gather payment details and generate and send the payment link to the customer by email. Use the automatically
triggered Send Reminder with Payment Link prebuilt flow to send the payment link to the customer one day before the payment due
date. Customize these flows according to your business requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.

397
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Automatically Update Payments Received in Collection Plans and Payment Schedules

Automate the process to update the payments received details to save time, minimize human errors, and make sure that users always
have access to the most accurate and up-to-date information. Use the Collections: Update Payment Details prebuilt flow that is triggered
automatically when a payment intent event is created for a successful transaction. Customize the flow according to your business
requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select Flows. Open the Collections: Update Payment Details flow, and
click Save As New Version.

Notify Customers of Payment Status Automatically

Enhance transparency, reduce customer inquiries, and improve the overall customer experience by automating the payment status
notification process. Use the Collections: Send Payment Status Email prebuilt flow that’s triggered automatically when a payment
transaction event is created. Customize the flow according to your business requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds with Data Cloud and Marketing Cloud.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select Flows. Open the Collections: Send Payment Status Email flow,
and click Save As New Version.

Automate Case Creation and Closure for Collection Plans

Use the prebuilt flows to help your collections specialists manage and track the cases for collection plans smoothly and efficiently.
Customize the Create Case for Collection Plan prebuilt flow that creates a case for a collection plan and is triggered automatically when
a collection plan record is created with a valid reason. Customize the Close Collection Plan and Associated Cases prebuilt flow that’s
triggered automatically and sets the status of a collection plan and all its associated cases to closed based on certain predefined conditions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select Flows. Open the flow that you want to customize, and click
Save As New Version.

Determine Collection Plan Segments with Business Rules Engine

Determine and update the collection plan segments for collection plan records in bulk by using the prebuilt event orchestration procedure
that uses Business Rules Engine components. Help collections managers create tailored collection strategies, mitigate credit risk, and
prioritize collection efforts according to different segments. Collections managers can also customize the communication based on each
segment, and enhance customer relationships. Clone and customize the Business Rules Engine components according to your business
requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Business Rules Engine.

398
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Create a Prioritized List of Collection Plans with Actionable Segmentation

Prioritize high-value recovery efforts and improve recovery rates with prioritized lists of collection plans. Create actionable list definitions
by using the Collection Plan and related objects. Your collections supervisors or collections managers can create prioritized lists of
collection plans by using these list definitions. Collections managers can plan collection activities more effectively, streamline work
distribution, and improve collaboration by assigning these lists or list members to collections specialists. Filter the lists by due amount,
days past due, and collection plan segment, or even fields from other objects related to collections, including city or financial account
type.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Actionable Segmentation, and then select Actionable Segmentation
Settings.

Maximize Collections with Request Direct Debit Action

Make your collections process more effective and efficiently address failed debits by using the Request Direct Debit action. When a
mandated direct debit fails, the account enters a collections list because of an outstanding balance. Collections specialists can quickly
request a new debit from the customer’s account on an actionable list page, expediting the collection process, and improving overall
cash flow. Use MuleSoft integration to help your collections specialist to submit a direct debit request to the core banking system.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Actionable Lists. Open a collection plan list. Select the collection plans, and click Request
Direct Debit.

Import Collections Data with CSV File Import

Simplify and accelerate the process of managing Collections data from external systems by using CSV File Import. Easily import large
volumes of Collections data from CSV files into Collection Plan and related objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select CSV File Import.

Streamline Record Creation for Collection Plan and Related Objects with Composite Graph API
Automate Collections data import processes, ensuring data consistency and integrity by using the Composite Graph API. Create all your
collection plans, collection plan items, contacts, and other related object records in one go, through a single Composite Graph API
request.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.

399
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Create Effective Collection Campaigns with Collections Data Kit

Help collections managers effortlessly manage collection campaigns, segments, and content with Marketing Cloud Growth, without
logging into a separate marketing app. After installing the Collections Data Kit, collections managers can readily use collections data to
create Data Cloud segments by using criteria such as days past due, total overdue amount, or collection plan segment. Use automated
workflows to run these targeted campaigns across multiple channels, such as email and SMS, to enhance the chances of successful
collection outcomes and maintain positive relationships. Track the performance of your collection campaigns in real time and make
data-driven adjustments to optimize results.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds with Data Cloud and Marketing Cloud.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.

Get Collections Up and Running with Ease

Use the new Collections Guided Setup to assign required permissions, enable features, and use a preconfigured Action Launcher
deployment. Set up integrated case management, Business Rules Engine components, Actionable Segmentation, Salesforce Pay Now,
and MuleSoft Integration to get started with Collections activities easily and quickly.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
When: Collections is available starting April 2025.
How: From Setup, go to Guided Setup, and click Collections.

New and Changed Objects

Do more with these new and updated Collections objects.
Store details about the outstanding amounts linked to financial accounts, contacts, accounts, or cases associated with
individuals or an organization
Use the new CollectionPlan object.
Store the delinquency details for multiple invoices in a single CollectionPlan record
Use the new CollectionPlanItem object.
Store the reason for initiating the collection process, including non-payment of bills, bankruptcy, outstanding invoices, and
deceased account holders
Use the new CollectionPlanReason object.
Store the name of the source of funds to fulfill a commitment to make a payment
Use the new PaymentSource field on the existing PaymentSchedule object.
Store the usage type for a payment
Use the new UsageType field on the existing PaymentSchedule and PaymentScheduleItem objects.
Store the cumulative sum of payments received for all payment schedule items linked to a payment schedule
Use the new TotalPaymentsReceived field on the existing PaymentSchedule object.
Store the payment received from the borrower for the payment schedule item
Use the new PaymentsReceived field on the existing PaymentScheduleItem object.
Store the payment link that is sent to the borrower to repay the outstanding amount
Use the new PaymentLinkId field on the existing PaymentScheduleItem object.

Compliant Data Sharing

Quickly deactivate Salesforce users who have Compliant Data Sharing records using a new setting.

400
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

IN THIS SECTION:
Deactivate Users and Retain Compliant Data Sharing Participant Records
Save time deactivating Salesforce users who have Compliant Data Sharing records using the new Deactivate a user while retaining
users' inactive participant records setting. Previously, you were required to remove access to the data granted through compliant
data sharing before you deactivated a Salesforce user. This new setting retains the participant records for compliance and auditing.

Deactivate Users and Retain Compliant Data Sharing Participant Records

Save time deactivating Salesforce users who have Compliant Data Sharing records using the new Deactivate a user while retaining users'
inactive participant records setting. Previously, you were required to remove access to the data granted through compliant data sharing
before you deactivated a Salesforce user. This new setting retains the participant records for compliance and auditing.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions.
How: In Setup, select General Settings in Compliant Data Sharing. Then select Delete participant records before deactivating a
user or Deactivate a user while retaining users' inactive participant records.

Context Service
Improve performance and minimize repetitive data retrieval from the database by using reference definitions. Automatically populate
data in a context definition by using system information nodes. Store temporary data changes in the cache for a context definition,
without saving them to the database by using the Transient option. Query, update, and delete context instances by using flow actions.

IN THIS SECTION:
Optimize Performance by Using Reference Definitions
Use reference definitions to efficiently reuse and share common data among multiple context definitions. Reduce database load,
enhance speed, and ensure consistency across context definitions that use the shared data.
Simplify Data Population for Nodes and Attributes
Use system information nodes to automatically generate and manage data for nodes and attributes within a context definition.
Eliminate the need to manually define nodes, attributes, mappings, and data retrieval, simplifying the entire process. For example,
directly generate data for the UserProfile attribute from user information without the need for manual mapping. They're suffixed
with "_s" to easily identify them.
Conveniently Store Temporary Changes to Attributes
Store changes made to an attribute temporarily in the cache without saving them to the database. Simplify data management,
reduce database load, and improve data processing speed, leading to enhanced performance.
Efficiently Manage Context Instances by Using Context Actions in Flows
Enhance user experience and save time by invoking multiple Context Service actions in Salesforce Flow. Use the Query Context
action to query context instances by using tags associated with a context definition. Use the Delete Context action to delete context
instances from the database. Use the Update Context Attributes action to update context attributes by using context tags.
Increase Database Efficiency with Polymorphic Fields
Simplify data modeling and reduce redundant foreign keys by enabling a single object field to reference multiple associated domains.
Configure and handle diverse data types easily within a single attribute mapping. For example, define a single field to reference
various domains to store different data entities, such as users, products, or orders. Enhance context-aware data management, faster
data retrieval, reduced complexity, and a more efficient database structure. Previously, a field could reference only a fixed, single
domain at a time to retrieve data.

401
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Effortlessly Sync Extended Context Definitions

When an extended definition is out of sync with the standard definition, use the Sync Now option to instantly upgrade the standard
components to their latest version. Easily track the progress of the sync by checking the progress status.
Easily Generate Tags for Attributes
Eliminate the need to manually select individual attributes for tag generation. Ensure that tags generated across all nodes and
attributes within a context definition remain unique, even when attribute names are duplicated across different nodes. Use the
Regenerate All option to generate new tags for the selected node and its attributes, including nodes and attributes with tags. Use
the Retain and Generate option to generate tags only for the selected node and attributes without tags.
Easily Clone a Context Mapping
Save time and reduce manual effort by reusing existing mappings in context definition setup. Simplify the mapping by cloning
context mappings for standard objects, context definition objects, data model objects, or any other input data source.
Conveniently Map Context Definitions to Data Model Objects
Enhance navigation, streamline data management, and easily access data model objects (DMOs). Quickly locate and map context
definitions by using the dedicated tab for Data Model Objects.
New Object in Context Service
Store reference relationships between context definitions with the new ContextDefinitionReference object.

Optimize Performance by Using Reference Definitions

Use reference definitions to efficiently reuse and share common data among multiple context definitions. Reduce database load, enhance
speed, and ensure consistency across context definitions that use the shared data.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Context Definitions. In the Custom Definitions tab, click New, or select a
definition and click , then select Edit. In the Create Context Definition or Edit Context Definition page, select Reference Definition.
If a new definition isn't marked as a reference, you can link it to two other definitions that act as reference definitions.

Simplify Data Population for Nodes and Attributes

Use system information nodes to automatically generate and manage data for nodes and attributes within a context definition. Eliminate
the need to manually define nodes, attributes, mappings, and data retrieval, simplifying the entire process. For example, directly generate
data for the UserProfile attribute from user information without the need for manual mapping. They're suffixed with "_s" to easily identify
them.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Context Definitions. In the Custom Definitions tab, click New, or select a
definition and click , then select Edit. In the Create Context Definition or Edit Context Definition page, specify the definition details
and click Next. On the Add Nodes page, select System Information Node.

Conveniently Store Temporary Changes to Attributes

Store changes made to an attribute temporarily in the cache without saving them to the database. Simplify data management, reduce
database load, and improve data processing speed, leading to enhanced performance.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.

402
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Context Definitions. In the Custom Definitions tab, select the definition and
click , then select Edit. In the Edit Context Definition page, click Next and navigate to the Edit Attributes page. Select the node, click
Add Attributes, and then select Transient.

Efficiently Manage Context Instances by Using Context Actions in Flows

Enhance user experience and save time by invoking multiple Context Service actions in Salesforce Flow. Use the Query Context action
to query context instances by using tags associated with a context definition. Use the Delete Context action to delete context instances
from the database. Use the Update Context Attributes action to update context attributes by using context tags.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.
Who: To use actions in flows, users need the ContextService Admin and ContextService Runtime permissions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Flows. Click New Flow, select Start From Scratch, and then click Next. Select
Screen Flow and then click Create. Click and then select Action. In the category section, select Context Service. Find and select
the Query Context, Delete Context, or Update Context Attributes action that you want to use in flows.

Increase Database Efficiency with Polymorphic Fields

Simplify data modeling and reduce redundant foreign keys by enabling a single object field to reference multiple associated domains.
Configure and handle diverse data types easily within a single attribute mapping. For example, define a single field to reference various
domains to store different data entities, such as users, products, or orders. Enhance context-aware data management, faster data retrieval,
reduced complexity, and a more efficient database structure. Previously, a field could reference only a fixed, single domain at a time to
retrieve data.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.
How: To map multiple domains to a context definition, start by opening the context definition. On the Context Definition Details page,
go to the Map Data tab and select Add Mapping. On the Context Mapping page, go to the Connect Objects tile , search for the object
that you want to map, click next to the object name, and select the domain.

Effortlessly Sync Extended Context Definitions

When an extended definition is out of sync with the standard definition, use the Sync Now option to instantly upgrade the standard
components to their latest version. Easily track the progress of the sync by checking the progress status.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Context Definitions. In the Custom Definitions tab, select a definition to
upgrade. In the Sync Status column, click Sync Now.

Easily Generate Tags for Attributes

Eliminate the need to manually select individual attributes for tag generation. Ensure that tags generated across all nodes and attributes
within a context definition remain unique, even when attribute names are duplicated across different nodes. Use the Regenerate All
option to generate new tags for the selected node and its attributes, including nodes and attributes with tags. Use the Retain and
Generate option to generate tags only for the selected node and attributes without tags.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.

403
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Context Definitions. In the Custom Definitions tab, select a definition and click
, then select Edit. In the Edit Context Definition page, click Next and navigate to the Edit Attribute Tags page, then click Generate
All Tags or Generate Node Tags. In the Generate Tags window, select Regenerate All or Retain and Generate.

Easily Clone a Context Mapping

Save time and reduce manual effort by reusing existing mappings in context definition setup. Simplify the mapping by cloning context
mappings for standard objects, context definition objects, data model objects, or any other input data source.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Context Definitions. In the Custom Definitions tab, select a definition and
click , then select Edit.On the Edit Definitions page, select Map Data. Select a mapping, click , and then select Clone.

Conveniently Map Context Definitions to Data Model Objects

Enhance navigation, streamline data management, and easily access data model objects (DMOs). Quickly locate and map context
definitions by using the dedicated tab for Data Model Objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Context Service
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter find and select Context Definitions. In the Custom Definitions tab, select a definition
and click , then select Edit. On the Edit Definitions page, select Map Data. Click Add Mapping, specify the mapping details, and click
Next. On the Mapping Intent Details tile, select at least one Mapping Intent operation and then click Map. On the Connect Objects
tile, click Select data source. Select the Data Model Objects tab, search for the DMO that you want to map, click , and then click
Done.

New Object in Context Service

Store reference relationships between context definitions with the new ContextDefinitionReference object.
Store information about the reference relationships between context definitions
Use the new ContextDefinitionReference object.

Cross-Object Field History (Beta)

Track and visualize field changes across related objects in a single view.

IN THIS SECTION:
Track Changes Across Related Objects with Cross-Object Field History (Beta)
Identify key updates made by different users by easily monitoring changes to records across related objects in a single view. Eliminate
the hassle of checking each record individually by using the Cross-Object Field History Lightning web component. Improve the
auditability of record changes and derive inferences effortlessly by viewing these consolidated changes. Track updates across multiple
objects with complex data models, such as those used for Know Your Customer and Business Relationship Plan.

404
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Track Changes Across Related Objects with Cross-Object Field History (Beta)
Identify key updates made by different users by easily monitoring changes to records across related objects in a single view. Eliminate
the hassle of checking each record individually by using the Cross-Object Field History Lightning web component. Improve the auditability
of record changes and derive inferences effortlessly by viewing these consolidated changes. Track updates across multiple objects with
complex data models, such as those used for Know Your Customer and Business Relationship Plan.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Note: Cross-Object Field History is a beta service that’s subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this beta
service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: In Setup, search for and select Cross-Object Field History (Beta). Turn on Cross-Object Field History. Set up the objects to be
tracked for field changes by using the Object Relationship Graphs builder.

Data Processing Engine

Simplify field mapping in writeback nodes by using Einstein generative AI. Use the append and hierarchy nodes in Data Cloud to run
batch transformations on large volumes of org data that you can later use for analytics and reporting. Ensure data integrity by using the
composite writeback feature to group related records at run time, and write them back to the core. Download the failed records file and
use it to debug the issues in composite writeback or CSV file ingestion when the Data Processing Engine definition run fails.

IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Your Field Mapping with Einstein
Simplify the tedious task of manually mapping fields when you create a writeback node. Use Einstein generative AI to get field
mapping suggestions. Review, accept, or reject the field mapping suggestions based on the Einstein score before you add them to
the target object.
Perform Bulk Transformations with Data Cloud
Process large volumes of data and run complex transformations in Data Cloud runtime. Integrate data from various data sources
into a single dataset by using the append node, and use this consolidated data for analysis and reporting. Visualize and process
hierarchical relationships within your data by using the hierarchy nodes and get deeper insights into your org data.
Ensure Data Integrity for the Writeback of Transformed Data
Define the relationships between the records of different writeback nodes in your Data Processing Engine definition. Prevent data
inconsistencies by using Data Processing Engine to group related records and write them back to the core as an atomic operation.
Define prewrite hooks that can further transform the data.
Troubleshoot Composite Writeback or CSV File Ingestion
When a Data Processing Engine definition fails because of any error in composite writeback or CSV file ingestion, download the failed
records in CSV format and use the CSV file for debugging purposes.
Changed Object in Data Processing Engine
Do more with the Data Processing Engine changed object.

Automate Your Field Mapping with Einstein

Simplify the tedious task of manually mapping fields when you create a writeback node. Use Einstein generative AI to get field mapping
suggestions. Review, accept, or reject the field mapping suggestions based on the Einstein score before you add them to the target
object.

405
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Data Processing
Engine and Einstein AI.

SEE ALSO:
Set Up Einstein Generative AI

Perform Bulk Transformations with Data Cloud

Process large volumes of data and run complex transformations in Data Cloud runtime. Integrate data from various data sources into a
single dataset by using the append node, and use this consolidated data for analysis and reporting. Visualize and process hierarchical
relationships within your data by using the hierarchy nodes and get deeper insights into your org data.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Data Cloud with
Data Processing Engine.

Ensure Data Integrity for the Writeback of Transformed Data

Define the relationships between the records of different writeback nodes in your Data Processing Engine definition. Prevent data
inconsistencies by using Data Processing Engine to group related records and write them back to the core as an atomic operation. Define
prewrite hooks that can further transform the data.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Data Processing
Engine.

Troubleshoot Composite Writeback or CSV File Ingestion

When a Data Processing Engine definition fails because of any error in composite writeback or CSV file ingestion, download the failed
records in CSV format and use the CSV file for debugging purposes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Data Processing
Engine.
How: In Monitor Workflow Services, on the Tasks tab, click next to the batch job part that you want to debug, and then click Download
Failed Records.

Changed Object in Data Processing Engine

Do more with the Data Processing Engine changed object.
Store failed records from a definition's run in CSV, JSON, or TXT formats
Use the new FailedRecFile field on the existing BatchJobPart object.

SEE ALSO:
Industries Common Resources Developer Guide

Discovery Framework
Salesforce users can save assessments as drafts, providing the conveneicne of completing them at a later time.

406
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

IN THIS SECTION:
Save Discovery Framework Assessments as Drafts to Complete Later
Salesforce users can save drafts of Discovery Framework-based assessments that they’re not ready to submit. They can easily find
the draft assessments that are in progress and complete them at their convenience later. The flexibility to save drafts prevents loss
of work when users pause an assessment for any reason.

Save Discovery Framework Assessments as Drafts to Complete Later

Salesforce users can save drafts of Discovery Framework-based assessments that they’re not ready to submit. They can easily find the
draft assessments that are in progress and complete them at their convenience later. The flexibility to save drafts prevents loss of work
when users pause an assessment for any reason.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Discovery Framework is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the General Settings for Discovery Framework, turn on Save Assessment As Draft.

As a Salesforce user, to save an assessment as draft, click Save for later. To finish an assessment, click the action menu on an assessment
in progress and select Continue.

Einstein Autofill (Beta)

Streamline form completion by providing your teams access to the AI-powered Einstein Autofill feature.

IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Efficiency and Customer Satisfaction with Einstein Autofill (Beta)
Your users can instantly transform call and chat conversations into form suggestions by using AI-driven recommendations. Reduce
manual data entry, speed up response times, and improve customer experience by seamlessly integrating Einstein Autofill with
Omniscripts. Ensure smoother processes by filling forms based on conversations.

Boost Efficiency and Customer Satisfaction with Einstein Autofill (Beta)

Your users can instantly transform call and chat conversations into form suggestions by using AI-driven recommendations. Reduce
manual data entry, speed up response times, and improve customer experience by seamlessly integrating Einstein Autofill with Omniscripts.
Ensure smoother processes by filling forms based on conversations.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions of multiple Industries clouds.

Note: Einstein Autofill (Beta) is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com
or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this
pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence add-on license.

407
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Why: Customer service reps in banking and other industries such as hospital receptionists, automotive dealers, retail support, insurance
claims, often struggle with time-consuming and error-prone manual data entry, especially when they handle customer complaints.
Inefficient data entry can lead to delays, repeated information requests, and frustration for both CSRs and customers.
How: In Omniscript Builder, enter Einstein Autofill in the search elements box and select Einstein Autofill (1). From the
Einstein menu, drag the Einstein Autofill component onto the Omniscript step (2). Enter the details in the Einstein Autofill Properties
pane (3).

Fundraising
Easily manage and track campaign and donor information with Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. Quickly generate multiple outreach
source codes, add interest tags to outreach source codes, get soft credit metrics at-a-glance, automatically update data rollups, and map
custom fields in gift entry. Additionally, set up page layouts for summary objects, use the Business Process (BP) API to create or manage
pledges, and customize how Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) Scoring is calculated.

IN THIS SECTION:
Scale Your Fundraising Efforts by Autogenerating Outreach Source Codes
Automate source code generation to efficiently manage large-scale fundraising campaigns. Ensure accuracy and consistency in your
source codes, so you can focus on strategic tasks.
Understand Donor Impact by Using Soft Credit Rollups
Get a better understanding of a donor's impact on your organization by viewing their soft credit rollups. Help fundraisers track who
influenced a gift by using soft credits to easily check donor contributions.
Automatically Receive Fundraising Rollup Calculation Updates
Automate the process of receiving updates to the rollup calculations without losing custom configurations and without manually
re-cloning the latest Data Processing Engine (DPE) definition.
Delivered Idea: Customize Summary Displays
Fundraising admins can now set up page layouts for the summary objects, enhancing the visibility and organization of key information.
We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.

408
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Enhance Donor Segmentation

Campaign managers can assign interest tags to outreach source codes for better donor segmentation.
Delivered Idea: Improve Donor Relations and Track the Impact of Gifts
Capture and store relevant information by mapping custom fields for use during gift entry. Add additional information to gifts, such
as a donor's preferred communication method or the purpose of the gift. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on
IdeaExchange.
Create and Manage Pledges in Bulk
Send multiple pledges or pledge updates to Nonprofit Cloud through the /commitments post of the Business Process API. Pledges
are gifts with a predefined amount and an end date that the donor pays in the future, either in one payment or in multiple payments.
Customize Sources and Destinations for RFM Scoring
Choose the source objects and fields from which to build the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) scores. Select the
destination object and fields on which to show the singular scores and the composite RFM score.
Streamline Advancement-Specific Data Processing
Manage and report on advancement designations by capturing important reporting details. Advancement operations teams can
track a variety of funds, including endowed, capital, and operational, with flexible fields for additional reporting information. Ensure
consistent data collection for institutional reporting, and support compliance with industry reporting standards. This feature also
introduces a person’s role with the institution, graduation status, giving levels, and the purpose of their gifts.
Drive Comprehensive Prospect Research Activities
Store and manage detailed prospect research data for alumni, donors, and households. Relationship officers and prospect researchers
can track and analyze wealth indicators, philanthropic events, research assessments, and key milestones to build a complete picture
of activity. To support continuous research efforts and uncover deeper insights, this long-term view helps your institution strengthen
relationships based on a lifetime of engagement and activity.
Gain Insight Through Generational Cohorts and Graduation Status
Unlock deeper alumni insights by analyzing generational cohorts and graduation status. Relationship officers and prospect researchers
can now categorize alumni by groups such as baby boomers, Gen X, millennials, and Gen Z. They can also group alumni into segments
by graduation date.
New and Changed Objects and Fields for Fundraising
Do more with the new and updated Fundraising objects.

Scale Your Fundraising Efforts by Autogenerating Outreach Source Codes

Automate source code generation to efficiently manage large-scale fundraising campaigns. Ensure accuracy and consistency in your
source codes, so you can focus on strategic tasks.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then select Outreach Source Codes. Turn on Outreach Source
Code Generation and format your codes.

Understand Donor Impact by Using Soft Credit Rollups

Get a better understanding of a donor's impact on your organization by viewing their soft credit rollups. Help fundraisers track who
influenced a gift by using soft credits to easily check donor contributions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.

409
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.

Automatically Receive Fundraising Rollup Calculation Updates

Automate the process of receiving updates to the rollup calculations without losing custom configurations and without manually
re-cloning the latest Data Processing Engine (DPE) definition.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.

Customize Summary Displays

Fundraising admins can now set up page layouts for the summary objects, enhancing the visibility and organization of key information.
We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.

Enhance Donor Segmentation

Campaign managers can assign interest tags to outreach source codes for better donor segmentation.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.

Improve Donor Relations and Track the Impact of Gifts

Capture and store relevant information by mapping custom fields for use during gift entry. Add additional information to gifts, such as
a donor's preferred communication method or the purpose of the gift. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then select Gift Entry. Use Field Mapping to map custom fields
for gift entry.

Create and Manage Pledges in Bulk

Send multiple pledges or pledge updates to Nonprofit Cloud through the /commitments post of the Business Process API. Pledges are
gifts with a predefined amount and an end date that the donor pays in the future, either in one payment or in multiple payments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.

410
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Customize Sources and Destinations for RFM Scoring

Choose the source objects and fields from which to build the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) scores. Select the destination
object and fields on which to show the singular scores and the composite RFM score.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: To access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising, users need the FundraisingAccess permission set. To use Fundraising with Education
Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to your users.

Streamline Advancement-Specific Data Processing

Manage and report on advancement designations by capturing important reporting details. Advancement operations teams can track
a variety of funds, including endowed, capital, and operational, with flexible fields for additional reporting information. Ensure consistent
data collection for institutional reporting, and support compliance with industry reporting standards. This feature also introduces a
person’s role with the institution, graduation status, giving levels, and the purpose of their gifts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and Fundraising are enabled.
Who: To use Fundraising with Education Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to
your users.

Drive Comprehensive Prospect Research Activities

Store and manage detailed prospect research data for alumni, donors, and households. Relationship officers and prospect researchers
can track and analyze wealth indicators, philanthropic events, research assessments, and key milestones to build a complete picture of
activity. To support continuous research efforts and uncover deeper insights, this long-term view helps your institution strengthen
relationships based on a lifetime of engagement and activity.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and Fundraising are enabled.
Who: To use Fundraising with Education Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to
your users.

Gain Insight Through Generational Cohorts and Graduation Status

Unlock deeper alumni insights by analyzing generational cohorts and graduation status. Relationship officers and prospect researchers
can now categorize alumni by groups such as baby boomers, Gen X, millennials, and Gen Z. They can also group alumni into segments
by graduation date.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
and Fundraising are enabled.
Who: To use Fundraising with Education Cloud, enable Fundraising in Education Cloud, and then create and assign a permission set to
your users.

New and Changed Objects and Fields for Fundraising

Do more with the new and updated Fundraising objects.

411
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

New Education Cloud and Nonprofit Cloud Objects and Fields

Represent a formalized assessment of the wealth of a person, household, or organization. Examples of this assessment type
are a third-party wealth assessment, a property valuation, a financial asset assessment, or an internal assessment
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicAssessment object.
Represent an unconfirmed or soft indication that highlights the wealth or growth potential of a person, household, or
organization
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicIndicator object.
Represent philanthropic activities and financial status at a specific time
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicMilestone object.
Represent a confirmed or financially quantifiable occurrence in which the wealth of of a person, household, or organization
changed
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicOccurrence object.
Track Soft Credits on the Donor Gift Summary
Use the new CurrentYearSoftCreditCount, LastYearSoftCreditsAmount,
CurrentYearSoftCreditsAmount, LastTwoYearSoftCreditCount, LastYearSoftCreditCount, and
TotalSoftCreditsAccount fields on the existing DonorGiftSummary object.
Represent more details about a person’s role or relationship with an institution
Use the new AdvancementGraduationDate, AdvancementType, GraduationCohort, and GraduationStatus
fields on the ContactProfile object in Education Cloud.
Enable gift entry clerks to designate and report on funding for current operations versus capital purposes
Use the new CapitalPurpose and CurrentOperationsPurpose fields on the GiftDesignation object in Education
Cloud. Values align with the Council for Advancement and Support of Education's Voluntary Support of Education standards.
Represent more contextual information about the schedule for fulfilling a gift commitment
Use the new AdvancementType, GraduationCohort, and GraduationAchievement fields on the
GiftCommitmentSchedule object in Education Cloud.
Represent more contextual information about a person to whom a soft credit is attributed
Use the new AdvancementType, GenerationalCohort, GraduationAchievement, and
GraduationCohortfields on the GiftSoftCredit object in Education Cloud.
Represent more contextual information about a donor in a gift transaction
Use the new AdvancementType, GraduationAchievement, and GraduationCohort fields on the GiftTransaction
object in Education Cloud.
Represent the amount a person, household, or organization has donated in the current year
Use the new GivingLevel field on the DonorGiftSummary object. Values align with the Council for Advancement and Support
of Education's Voluntary Support of Education standards.
Represent a donor’s age group
Use the new GenerationalCohort field on the ContactProfile object.
Picklist values for GenerationalCohort that align with industry standards:
• Silent Generation (1928–1945)
• Baby Boomers (1946–1964)
• Generation X (1965-1980)
• Millennials (1981–1996)
• Generation Z (1997–2012)
• Generation Alpha (2013–2025)

412
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Represent the amount a person, household, or organization has donated in the current year
Use the new GivingLevel field on the DonorGiftSummary object.
Picklist values included for GivingLevel that align with U.S. industry standards:
• $25,000,000+
• $10,000,000–$24,999,999
• $5,000,000–$9,999,999
• $1,000,000–$4,999,999
• $250,000–$999,999
• $100,000–$249,999
• $50,000–$99,999
• $25,000–$49,999
• $10,000–$24,999
• $5,000–$9,999
• $2,500–$4,999
• $1,000–$2,499
• $500–$999
• $100–$499
• Under $100
Represent the contact for a gift commitment
Use the new Contact field on the GiftCommitment object.
Represent more contextual information about the schedule for fulfilling a gift commitment
Use the new AdvancementType, GraduationAchievement,and GraduationCohort fields on the
GiftCommitmentSchedule object in Education Cloud.
Picklist values for AdvancementType that align with industry standards:
• Alumni
• Student
• Parent
• Faculty or Staff
• Private Institution Trustee or Board Member
• Public Institution Board Member
• Other Individual
Picklist values for GraduationAchievement that align with industry standards:
• Secondary Diploma
• Associate Degree
• Postgraduate Degree
• Multiple Degrees
• Non-Graduate
• Other
Picklist values for GraduationCohort that align with industry standards:
• Silent Generation (1928–1945)

413
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

• Baby Boomers (1946–1964)

• Generation X (1965-1980)
• Millennials (1981–1996)
• Generation Z (1997–2012)
• Generation Alpha (2013–2025)
Represent a donor’s age group
Use the new GenerationalCohort field on the GiftCommitmentSchedule object.
Picklist values for GenerationalCohort that align with industry standards:
• Silent Generation (1928–1945)
• Baby Boomers (1946–1964)
• Generation X (1965-1980)
• Millennials (1981–1996)
• Generation Z (1997–2012)
• Generation Alpha (2013–2025)
Represent a donor’s age group
Use the new GenerationalCohort field on the GiftTransaction object.
Picklist values for GenerationalCohort that align with industry standards:
• Silent Generation (1928–1945)
• Baby Boomers (1946–1964)
• Generation X (1965-1980)
• Millennials (1981–1996)
• Generation Z (1997–2012)
• Generation Alpha (2013–2025)
Represent a donor’s age group
Use the new GenerationalCohort field on the GiftSoftCredit object in Education Cloud and Nonprofit Cloud.
Picklist values for GenerationalCohort that align with industry standards:
• Silent Generation (1928–1945)
• Baby Boomers (1946–1964)
• Generation X (1965-1980)
• Millennials (1981–1996)
• Generation Z (1997–2012)
• Generation Alpha (2013–2025)
Represent the tax deduction applicable to a gift
Use the new TaxDeductionAmount field on the GiftTransaction object.
Represent a formalized assessment of the wealth of a person, household, or organization, such as a third-party wealth
assessment, a property valuation, a financial asset assessment, or an internal assessment
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicAssessment object.
Represent an unconfirmed or soft indication that highlights the wealth or growth potential of a person, household, or
organization
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicIndicator object.

414
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Represent the activities and financial status of a philanthropic project for a point in time
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicMilestone object.
Represent a confirmed or financially quantifiable occurrence in which the wealth of of a person, household, or organization
has changed
Use the new PartyPhilanthropicOccurrence object.

New Education Cloud Objects and Fields

Represent more details about a person’s role or relationship with an institution
Use the new AdvancementGraduationDate, AdvancementType, GraduationAchievement, and
GraduationCohort fields on the ContactProfile object in Education Cloud.
Picklist values for AdvancementType that align with industry standards:
• Alumni
• Student
• Parent
• Faculty or Staff
• Private Institution Trustee or Board Member
• Public Institution Board Member
• Other Individual
Picklist values for GraduationAchievement that align with industry standards:
• Secondary Diploma
• Associate Degree
• Postgraduate Degree
• Multiple Degrees
• Non-Graduate
• Other
Picklist values for GraduationCohort that align with industry standards:
• 0–5 Years Since Graduation
• 6–10 Years Since Graduation
• 11–20 Years Since Graduation
• 21–30 Years Since Graduation
• 31–40 Years Since Graduation
• 41–50 Years Since Graduation
• 50+ Years Since Graduation
Let gift entry clerks designate and report on funding for current operations versus capital purposes
Use the new CapitalPurpose and CurrentOperationsPurpose fields on the GiftDesignation object in Education
Cloud
Picklist values for CapitalPurpose that align with industry standards:
• Property
• Buildings and Equipment
• Endowment: Income Unrestricted

415
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

• Endowment: Income Restricted

• Loan Funds
• Other Capital Purpose
Picklist values for CurrentOperationsPurpose that align with industry standards:
• Unrestricted
• Academic
• Faculty / Staff Compensation
• Research
• Student Financial Aid
• Student Affairs / Life
• Athletics
• Other Restricted
Represent more contextual information about a person to whom a soft credit is attributed
Use the new AdvancementType, GraduationAchievement, and GraduationCohort fields on the GiftSoftCredit
object in Education Cloud.
Picklist values for AdvancementType that align with industry standards:
• Alumni
• Student
• Parent
• Faculty or Staff
• Private Institution Trustee or Board Member
• Public Institution Board Member
• Other Individual
Picklist values for GraduationAchievement that align with industry standards:
• Secondary Diploma
• Associate Degree
• Postgraduate Degree
• Multiple Degrees
• Non-Graduate
• Other
Picklist values for GraduationCohort that align with industry standards:
• Silent Generation (1928–1945)
• Baby Boomers (1946–1964)
• Generation X (1965-1980)
• Millennials (1981–1996)
• Generation Z (1997–2012)
• Generation Alpha (2013–2025)
Represent more contextual information about a donor in a gift transaction
Use the new AdvancementType, GraduationAchievement, and GraduationCohort fields on the GiftTransaction
object in Education Cloud.

416
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Picklist values for AdvancementType that align with industry standards:

• Alumni
• Student
• Parent
• Faculty or Staff
• Private Institution Trustee or Board Member
• Public Institution Board Member
• Other Individual
Picklist values for GraduationAchievement that align with industry standards:
• Secondary Diploma
• Associate Degree
• Postgraduate Degree
• Multiple Degrees
• Non-Graduate
• Other
Picklist values for GraduationCohort that align with industry standards:
• Silent Generation (1928–1945)
• Baby Boomers (1946–1964)
• Generation X (1965-1980)
• Millennials (1981–1996)
• Generation Z (1997–2012)
• Generation Alpha (2013–2025)

Grantmaking
Streamline the grant review process by supporting grant managers to batch-assign multiple applications to reviewers, saving time and
boosting efficiency. Automate routine tasks with Stage Management to ensure accuracy and compliance through clearly defined stage
criteria.

IN THIS SECTION:
Delivered Idea: Save Time by Bulk-Assigning Grant Application Reviews
Streamline the grant review process by creating flows so grant managers can assign multiple applications to reviewers and share
the related records. Save time, reduce frustration, improve consistency and compliance, and enhance the overall user experience
with these flows alongside Stage Management. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Streamline Grantmaking Processes with Stage Management
Automate routine tasks, ensure accuracy, and enhance compliance through defined entry and exit criteria of stages. Additionally,
grant managers can save time and effort, and focus on meaningful tasks by assigning reviews in batches.
Enter Multiple Grant Funding Results in Experience Cloud
Grant recipients can easily report results they achieved thanks to your funding. Provide a spreadsheet-like experience to enter multiple
results in one go on your Experience Cloud site.

417
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Delivered Idea: Share Funding Disbursements

You can now customize sharing settings for funding disbursements and set the default internal or external access to Private, Public
Read Only, or Public Read-Write. These additional sharing settings give you more flexibility to control who can see and edit your
data. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Changed Objects for Grantmaking
To build complex grant applications and to define and measure the impact of your grants, use the new and updated Grantmaking
objects and fields. These new objects and fields support the form framework for applications, progress reports, and reviews.

Save Time by Bulk-Assigning Grant Application Reviews

Streamline the grant review process by creating flows so grant managers can assign multiple applications to reviewers and share the
related records. Save time, reduce frustration, improve consistency and compliance, and enhance the overall user experience with these
flows alongside Stage Management. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Grantmaking
is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Bulk Review Assignment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Grant Application Reviews, Batch Assign Reviews, and Share Application Records (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)

Streamline Grantmaking Processes with Stage Management

Automate routine tasks, ensure accuracy, and enhance compliance through defined entry and exit criteria of stages. Additionally, grant
managers can save time and effort, and focus on meaningful tasks by assigning reviews in batches.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Grantmaking
is enabled.
When: You can enable and configure Stage Management starting on February 17, 2025.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Grant Application Reviews, Batch Assign Reviews, and Share Application Records (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Improve Accuracy and Compliance with Stage Management for Grantmaking (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Enter Multiple Grant Funding Results in Experience Cloud

Grant recipients can easily report results they achieved thanks to your funding. Provide a spreadsheet-like experience to enter multiple
results in one go on your Experience Cloud site.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Grantmaking
is enabled.

418
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

How: On your Experience Cloud site, on the Funding Award page, add the Create Indicator Results component.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define and Measure the Impact of Grants with Outcome Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Share Funding Disbursements

You can now customize sharing settings for funding disbursements and set the default internal or external access to Private, Public Read
Only, or Public Read-Write. These additional sharing settings give you more flexibility to control who can see and edit your data. We
delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Grantmaking
is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Funding Disbursement - Funding Award as Lookup relationship (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Changed Objects for Grantmaking

To build complex grant applications and to define and measure the impact of your grants, use the new and updated Grantmaking
objects and fields. These new objects and fields support the form framework for applications, progress reports, and reviews.
Specify the status of the application review
Use the new Draft picklist value on the ApplicationReview object. Use the updated Canceled picklist value on the
ApplicationReview object.
Specify the usage type of the application render method
Use the new Form Framework picklist value picklist value for UsageType on the ApplicationRenderMethod object, where
Grantmaking is the default value.
Specify the type of application stage definition
Use the new Form Framework picklist value for Type on the ApplicationStageDefinitionMethod object.
Identify the owner or funding recipient
Use the OwnerId field on the FundingDisbursement object. Sharing and SharingRules associated objects are available on
FundingDisbursment.
Track planned and actual budget utilization
Use the EstimatedUtilizationAmount and UtilizedAmount fields on the Budget object.

SEE ALSO:
Developer Guide: Grantmaking Developer Guide (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Group Membership and Households

Receive change events for more objects. Effortlessly add the right Members to your party relationship groups.

419
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

IN THIS SECTION:
Receive Change Event Notifications for More Objects
Use Change Data Capture to receive notifications of record changes for the Party Relationship Group, Account Account Relation,
Contact Contact Relation, Party Role Relation, and Record Aggregation Result objects. Record changes include creating a record,
updating a record, and deleting a record.
Easily Find Contacts for Party Relationship Groups
Easily add the correct members to your party relationship groups with the help of email IDs. When you create a party relationship
group, if the member search lists two contacts with the same name, identify the correct contact by using the associated email ID
and phone number that appears next to a contact. Previously, only the phone number appeared next to a contact.

Receive Change Event Notifications for More Objects

Use Change Data Capture to receive notifications of record changes for the Party Relationship Group, Account Account Relation, Contact
Contact Relation, Party Role Relation, and Record Aggregation Result objects. Record changes include creating a record, updating a
record, and deleting a record.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
How: On the Change Data Capture page in Setup, select the objects that you want to get notifications for, and save the changes.

SEE ALSO:
Object Documentation: Account Account Relation
Object Documentation: Contact Contact Relation
Object Documentation: Party Relationship Group
Object Documentation: Party Role Relation

Easily Find Contacts for Party Relationship Groups

Easily add the correct members to your party relationship groups with the help of email IDs. When you create a party relationship group,
if the member search lists two contacts with the same name, identify the correct contact by using the associated email ID and phone
number that appears next to a contact. Previously, only the phone number appeared next to a contact.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Party Relationship Groups. Click New Group. Enter a group name, and search for and
select contacts to add as members to the group.

Industries Configure, Price, Quote (CPQ)

Spring 25 brings enhancements to streamline catalog management, promotions, and user experiences. Updates include automated
duplicate offer resolution, seamless DC–CPQ integration, support for large promotion bundles, and timezone-aware catalog data.
Additional features such as API versioning and anonymous user pricing offer greater flexibility and accuracy. These changes simplify
processes, enhance efficiency, and improve overall performance.

IN THIS SECTION:
Detect and Resolve Duplicate Offers During Hierarchical Catalog Compilation
Manage complex catalog structures and compile all catalogs in a hierarchy simultaneously without manual intervention. The Digital
Commerce framework enhancements automatically detect and resolve duplicate offers across hierarchical catalogs. This automation
reduces errors, saves time, and simplifies catalog management.

420
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Configuring and Pricing Bundles for Anonymous User

From Spring ‘25, a new single Digital Commerce (DC) API allows anonymous B2C users to configure and price product bundles
without adding them to a cart. This streamlines the browsing and comparison process, enhancing the overall customer experience.
The API also supports advanced pricing models, including usage-based and attribute-based pricing.
Support for Offer Specification
From Spring'25, Offer Specification is supported for Standard DC APIs. Offer Specification allows service providers flexibility for existing
subscribers to manage in-life changes with purchased configurations.
Ensure Seamless Promotion Management Across Digital Commerce and Standard CPQ
The Communications, Media, and Energy & Utilities (CME) Managed Package now supports interoperability between Standard Digital
Commerce (DC) and Standard Configure, Price, Quote (CPQ). You can now resolve the promotion cache conflicts and enable unified
promotion compilation, ensuring consistent and reliable promotion management across both the systems.
Process Large Promotion Bundles Seamlessly in Standard Digital Commerce
Scale your promotional strategies with enhanced support for large, complex bundles in Standard Digital Commerce (DC). By removing
size constraints, you can compile and process bundles with over 200 line items effortlessly. Save time and reduce manual efforts
with optimized processing for intricate promotional structures.
Automate Cache Cleanup with Lifecycle Management
Reduce maintenance efforts in Developer and Sandbox orgs with the new Cache Lifecycle Management Job. This automated job
clears stale snapshot data and removes duplicates, freeing up storage space and improving system performance.
Simplify MACD (Move, Add, Change, Delete) Journeys with Guided Transform Multiplay
Boost flexibility and efficiency in Move, Add, Change, and Delete (MACD) workflows with a new guided journey for the Transform
Multiplay feature, available as part of the CPQ UI Lightning Web Component (LWC). This enhancement empowers sales representatives
to split, merge, and replace offers in existing assets, enabling service providers to deliver tailored solutions and optimized bundles.
Integrate Salesforce Pricing with Standard Digital Commerce APIs
Extend Salesforce Pricing integration to the Standard Digital Commerce (DC) APIs. This integration supports unified pricing and
simplifies setup with a common configuration for Standard Cart CPQ and Digital Commerce APIs.
Sync Product and Promotion Launch Dates Across Time Zones
Align effective date and end date of products and promotions with the right time zone based on the user's locale and eliminate
errors caused by GMT-based time zone calculations. Ensure real-time accuracy, improving customer experience and operational
precision in global order executions. For instance, when an admin schedules a product launch on Black Friday at noon US time,
customers around the world can experience the launch at the corresponding local time.

Detect and Resolve Duplicate Offers During Hierarchical Catalog Compilation

Manage complex catalog structures and compile all catalogs in a hierarchy simultaneously without manual intervention. The Digital
Commerce framework enhancements automatically detect and resolve duplicate offers across hierarchical catalogs. This automation
reduces errors, saves time, and simplifies catalog management.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed.
Who: For users with admin or developer permissions to configure Digital Commerce catalog settings.
How: Admins and developers can access the updated Digital Commerce job framework to compile catalogs in a hierarchy. The system
automatically identifies and resolves duplicate offers during the process. No additional configuration is needed.

421
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Configuring and Pricing Bundles for Anonymous User

From Spring ‘25, a new single Digital Commerce (DC) API allows anonymous B2C users to configure and price product bundles without
adding them to a cart. This streamlines the browsing and comparison process, enhancing the overall customer experience. The API also
supports advanced pricing models, including usage-based and attribute-based pricing.
This API retrieves fully priced product bundles based on user inputs such as estimated usage, location, and product attributes. It supports
pricing calculations through Unit-Based Pricing (UBP), Attribute-Based Pricing (ABP), and the Business Rules Engine (BRE). The API provides
a detailed price breakdown, including a waterfall view, for each configured bundle, facilitating easy comparison of offers. This functionality
meets a critical need for B2C customers and reduces the dependency on custom code for anonymous pricing scenarios.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed and
Digital Commerce APIs is enabled.
Who: This feature is accessible to anonymous B2C users.

Support for Offer Specification

From Spring'25, Offer Specification is supported for Standard DC APIs. Offer Specification allows service providers flexibility for existing
subscribers to manage in-life changes with purchased configurations.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed and
Digital Commerce APIs is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the necessary permissions to configure and manage offers in Standard DC APIs.

Ensure Seamless Promotion Management Across Digital Commerce and Standard CPQ
The Communications, Media, and Energy & Utilities (CME) Managed Package now supports interoperability between Standard Digital
Commerce (DC) and Standard Configure, Price, Quote (CPQ). You can now resolve the promotion cache conflicts and enable unified
promotion compilation, ensuring consistent and reliable promotion management across both the systems.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the CME managed package is installed.
Who: To enable and manage DC and standard CPQ Promotion Integration, users must have permissions to manage promotions in both
Standard Digital Commerce and Standard CPQ.
How: Admins can enable and manage DC and standard CPQ Promotion Integration through existing promotion compilation workflows.
The CME managed package automatically resolves cache conflicts, ensuring seamless promotion management across both DC and CPQ
without additional configuration. End users benefit from consistent promotion behavior across systems.

Process Large Promotion Bundles Seamlessly in Standard Digital Commerce

Scale your promotional strategies with enhanced support for large, complex bundles in Standard Digital Commerce (DC). By removing
size constraints, you can compile and process bundles with over 200 line items effortlessly. Save time and reduce manual efforts with
optimized processing for intricate promotional structures.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed.
Who: This feature is available to users with permissions to configure and manage promotions in Standard DC.
Why: Previously, large promotional bundles exceeded system limits, requiring manual restructuring and frequent cache clearance to
process. With the latest enhancements, you can eliminate those barriers to manage and scale large promotions efficiently without
applying workarounds.
How: Admins and developers can compile large promotional bundles directly in Standard DC without additional configuration.

422
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Automate Cache Cleanup with Lifecycle Management

Reduce maintenance efforts in Developer and Sandbox orgs with the new Cache Lifecycle Management Job. This automated job clears
stale snapshot data and removes duplicates, freeing up storage space and improving system performance.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed.
Who: This feature is available to admins and developers managing org storage and cache configurations.
How: Admins can schedule or run the Cache Lifecycle Management Job through the Vlocity CMT Administration EPC Jobs interface.
The job automatically identifies and clears outdated snapshot records and duplicate data, ensuring optimized storage use without
requiring additional configuration or manual intervention.

Simplify MACD (Move, Add, Change, Delete) Journeys with Guided Transform Multiplay
Boost flexibility and efficiency in Move, Add, Change, and Delete (MACD) workflows with a new guided journey for the Transform
Multiplay feature, available as part of the CPQ UI Lightning Web Component (LWC). This enhancement empowers sales representatives
to split, merge, and replace offers in existing assets, enabling service providers to deliver tailored solutions and optimized bundles.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed.
Who: This feature is accessible to users with permissions to manage assets and configure offers in the CME managed package.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Transformation of Multiplay Offers

Integrate Salesforce Pricing with Standard Digital Commerce APIs

Extend Salesforce Pricing integration to the Standard Digital Commerce (DC) APIs. This integration supports unified pricing and simplifies
setup with a common configuration for Standard Cart CPQ and Digital Commerce APIs.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed.
Why: Previously, Salesforce Pricing integration was limited to the Standard Cart API. This enhancement introduces support for the
Standard DC APIs, ensuring consistent and accurate pricing across both APIs while reducing the need for separate configurations.
How: Set up Salesforce Pricing integration. See at Standard Salesforce Pricing for Communications, Media, and Energy (CME). The setup
process is shared between the Standard Cart and Standard DC APIs, making configuration straightforward and efficient.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Standard Salesforce Pricing for Communications, Media, and Energy (CME)

Sync Product and Promotion Launch Dates Across Time Zones

Align effective date and end date of products and promotions with the right time zone based on the user's locale and eliminate errors
caused by GMT-based time zone calculations. Ensure real-time accuracy, improving customer experience and operational precision in
global order executions. For instance, when an admin schedules a product launch on Black Friday at noon US time, customers around
the world can experience the launch at the corresponding local time.
Where: This change applies to all editions where the Communications, Media, and Energy (CME) managed package is installed and
Digital Commerce APIs is enabled. This feature is currently not available to Standard Digital Commerce users.
How: Both Admins and Product Designers can add time zone information to the product and promotion effectivity dates, so that accurate
availability data is consistent with regional customer expectations.

423
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Sales Reps can access the latest offers and confirm product availability in real time based on localized timing. They can view catalog
items accurately aligned with purchase timing across customer regions. When scheduling jobs, admins can verify the time across different
time zones, ensuring correct execution and alignment with intended timelines.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Create Products in the Product Designer

Integration Solutions with MuleSoft

Save and reuse the configuration details when you enable an integration to connect your Salesforce org to an external system.

IN THIS SECTION:
Save and Reuse Connection Settings When You Enable MuleSoft Integrations
Work faster by reusing the saved connection settings instead of reentering them every time you enable an integration. Reuse the
saved settings for other apps or the dependent apps of the same integration app with minimal effort. Edit, delete, or disconnect the
failed connections to improve your workflow efficiency.
Integration Solutions with MuleSoft Video
Watch the video to learn the capabilities of Integration Solutions with MuleSoft.

Save and Reuse Connection Settings When You Enable MuleSoft Integrations
Work faster by reusing the saved connection settings instead of reentering them every time you enable an integration. Reuse the saved
settings for other apps or the dependent apps of the same integration app with minimal effort. Edit, delete, or disconnect the failed
connections to improve your workflow efficiency.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience where MuleSoft Direct is enabled.
Who: To save the connection configurations, users must have the Salesforce Administrator user permission.
How: In Setup, find and select MuleSoft Direct. Enable an integration by providing the configuration details. Save the configuration
with a connection name.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Integrations

Integration Solutions with MuleSoft Video

Watch the video to learn the capabilities of Integration Solutions with MuleSoft.
• Get Started with MuleSoft Direct Integrations shows how admins can connect an org with MuleSoft instance.

Omnistudio Document Generation

Ensure compatibility with the new document generation infrastructure and add flexibility to document generation workflows. Get
increased hourly and daily limits for batch server-side document generation requests. Plan for the retirement of Document Generation
1.0 by switching to Document Generation 2.0. The enhancements in Document Generation 2.0 include a new custom fonts configuration,
document previewer, and hybrid client-side processing. Use dynamic image tokens in document templates for server-side document
generation.

424
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

IN THIS SECTION:
Process More Batch Server-Side Document Generation Requests with Increased Limits
Process up to 2,500 batch server-side document generation requests per hour and up to 60,000 requests per day. The previous
hourly and daily limits for these requests were 1,000 and 24,000, respectively. After you provide the in-app consent to use Document
Generation 2.0, the client-side PDF generation requests will transition to Hyperforce infrastructure, where processing will be subject
to the server-side document generation limits.
Document Generation 1.0 is Being Retired
Document Generation 1.0 is scheduled for retirement on July 31, 2025. Document Generation 1.0 refers to the document generation
within the Industries Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio
managed packages up to the Winter ‘25 release. To continue to use document generation capabilities, switch to Document Generation
2.0, which includes updates to the client-side document generation processing, the PDF previewer, and the custom font configuration.
Enhance Document Generation with Document Generation 2.0
Make document generation more robust without significantly altering your day-to-day experience or existing features within the
Industries Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio managed
packages. You must provide in-app consent to transition to Document Generation 2.0, which includes changes to the client-side
document generation process, the PDF previewer’s look and feel, and minor changes to the custom font configuration. The client-side
document generation adopts a hybrid approach, processing .docx files locally within the package and leveraging Hyperforce
infrastructure for limited operations, ensuring consistency with server-side generation while adhering to its limits.
Enrich Server-Side Document Generation with Dynamic Images
Insert product images, barcodes, or pie charts in your generated .docx and .pdf documents by using image tokens in a Microsoft
Word or Microsoft PowerPoint document template. Use a single image, multiple images, and loop images. Place image tokens
anywhere within a document template, including paragraphs, tables, and text boxes. Define the height and width of the images in
Omnistudio Data Mapper Transform. Use image tokens within the Token Data and Token Data Content Document fields of the
Document Generation Process. Add images to the rich text field for server-side document generation. Use a custom class to load a
blob for dynamic image rendering from sources, such as non-contentDocumentId, URL, sObjectID, or other strings and identifiers.

Process More Batch Server-Side Document Generation Requests with Increased Limits
Process up to 2,500 batch server-side document generation requests per hour and up to 60,000 requests per day. The previous hourly
and daily limits for these requests were 1,000 and 24,000, respectively. After you provide the in-app consent to use Document Generation
2.0, the client-side PDF generation requests will transition to Hyperforce infrastructure, where processing will be subject to the server-side
document generation limits.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Metering and Throttling
Document Generation with Omniscript

Document Generation 1.0 is Being Retired

Document Generation 1.0 is scheduled for retirement on July 31, 2025. Document Generation 1.0 refers to the document generation
within the Industries Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio
managed packages up to the Winter ‘25 release. To continue to use document generation capabilities, switch to Document Generation
2.0, which includes updates to the client-side document generation processing, the PDF previewer, and the custom font configuration.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

425
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

When: Document Generation 1.0 is set to retire by July 31, 2025. To continue access to document generation capabilities, upgrade to
the Spring ‘25 managed package, provide in-app consent, and configure Document Generation 2.0.
How: To continue to access document generation capabilities, upgrade to the Spring ‘25 managed package, provide in-app consent,
and perform post-upgrade steps to use Document Generation 2.0 services and features.

SEE ALSO:
Document Generation 1.0 Retirement
Changes to Document Generation Process and Previewer in Spring '25
Document Generation Processing with Document Generation 2.0

Enhance Document Generation with Document Generation 2.0

Make document generation more robust without significantly altering your day-to-day experience or existing features within the Industries
Communications, Media, Energy & Utilities (CME), Insurance (INS), Vlocity Government (PS), and Omnistudio managed packages. You
must provide in-app consent to transition to Document Generation 2.0, which includes changes to the client-side document generation
process, the PDF previewer’s look and feel, and minor changes to the custom font configuration. The client-side document generation
adopts a hybrid approach, processing .docx files locally within the package and leveraging Hyperforce infrastructure for limited operations,
ensuring consistency with server-side generation while adhering to its limits.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Document Generation 2.0 Notification. Then, click Server-Side Notice. Review the
terms and conditions, complete the Document Generation 2.0 installation.

IN THIS SECTION:
Migrate and Sync Custom Fonts
Manage your custom fonts in Document Generation 2.0 by migrating them to a centralized repository and syncing them across
orgs. If you add, delete, or modify font files, sync the fonts again to ensure the changes are applied.

SEE ALSO:
Document Generation 1.0 Retirement
Changes to Document Generation Process and Previewer in Spring '25

426
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Migrate and Sync Custom Fonts

Manage your custom fonts in Document Generation 2.0 by migrating them to a centralized repository and syncing them across orgs. If
you add, delete, or modify font files, sync the fonts again to ensure the changes are applied.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To migrate and sync fonts, users need the DocGen Designer permission set.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Document Generation and select Custom Fonts Configuration. To migrate
your custom fonts, transfer them from Static Resources to the centralized Custom Fonts Library and click Migrate. To sync your custom
fonts, click Sync.

Enrich Server-Side Document Generation with Dynamic Images

Insert product images, barcodes, or pie charts in your generated .docx and .pdf documents by using image tokens in a Microsoft Word
or Microsoft PowerPoint document template. Use a single image, multiple images, and loop images. Place image tokens anywhere
within a document template, including paragraphs, tables, and text boxes. Define the height and width of the images in Omnistudio
Data Mapper Transform. Use image tokens within the Token Data and Token Data Content Document fields of the Document Generation
Process. Add images to the rich text field for server-side document generation. Use a custom class to load a blob for dynamic image
rendering from sources, such as non-contentDocumentId, URL, sObjectID, or other strings and identifiers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To insert dynamic images into a generated document, first store the images in the Files, or Documents tab of your Salesforce org.
Create custom text fields in the object that you want to fetch your image from. Map the uploaded images to the custom fields by using
the image API names. Add image tokens in the document template, provide data mapping in the Extract and Transform Data Mappers,
and then generate the document with dynamic images.

Outcome Management
Manage your impact strategy more efficiently and improve consistency by entering multiple indicator results in a spreadsheet-like
experience.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Multiple Indicator Results
Capture multiple indicator results on one easy-to-use page. Enter results in a spreadsheet format on Lightning record pages or your
Experience Cloud site. Easily manage your impact strategy and collect clean, usable data to track your progress. Customize the
information you capture to fit your organization's workflow.

Create Multiple Indicator Results

Capture multiple indicator results on one easy-to-use page. Enter results in a spreadsheet format on Lightning record pages or your
Experience Cloud site. Easily manage your impact strategy and collect clean, usable data to track your progress. Customize the information
you capture to fit your organization's workflow.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Outcome Management is
enabled.

427
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

How: Add the Create Indicator Results component to Program, Outcome, or other Lightning record pages. Add, remove, or configure
fields in the grid.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Track Progress with Indicator Results (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Program and Case Management

Create personalized care plans by setting client-specific goals in the Care Plan UI, making the plans more meaningful and motivating.
Improve care plan quality and consistency and create compliant care plan templates from the existing ones.

IN THIS SECTION:
Delivered Idea: Create Custom Care Plan Goals
Make every client feel special. Create personalized care plans with custom goals that fit each client's unique needs. Make care plans
more meaningful and engaging for your clients. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Delivered Idea: Clone Care Plan Templates
Improve care plan quality and consistency and create compliant care plan templates from the existing ones. Create a flow based on
the Copy Care Plan Template flow template and add a button to launch the flow on the page layouts. We delivered this feature
thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Improve Accuracy and Compliance with Stage Management
Use Stage Management to automate repetitive tasks, reduce human errors, and ensure regulatory compliance for program enrollments.
Create well-defined stages with specific entry and exit criteria to drive efficiency for your program staff.
Set a Default Status for Program Enrollments
Now, you can use your own default status for program enrollments when you click Add Participant on a program. Previously, all
program enrollments defaulted to Applied, even if your default was different.
Updated Objects for Program and Case Management
Do more with the updated Program and Case Management objects. To use the new fields, add them to page layouts and make sure
your users have edit access for them.

Create Custom Care Plan Goals

Make every client feel special. Create personalized care plans with custom goals that fit each client's unique needs. Make care plans more
meaningful and engaging for your clients. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Care Plans
are enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Care Plans Prerequisites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Help Documentation: Create Goal Definitions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Help Documentation: Create a Care Plan for a Case (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
IdeaExchange: Ability to create Goal Definition ad hoc in Care Plan wizard (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

428
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Clone Care Plan Templates

Improve care plan quality and consistency and create compliant care plan templates from the existing ones. Create a flow based on the
Copy Care Plan Template flow template and add a button to launch the flow on the page layouts. We delivered this feature thanks to
your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Care Plans
are enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Use a Flow to Clone Care Plan Templates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
IdeaExchange: Allow Care Plan Templates to be modified once published (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve Accuracy and Compliance with Stage Management

Use Stage Management to automate repetitive tasks, reduce human errors, and ensure regulatory compliance for program enrollments.
Create well-defined stages with specific entry and exit criteria to drive efficiency for your program staff.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program
Management is enabled.
When: You can enable and configure Stage Management starting on February 17, 2025.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Improve Accuracy and Compliance with Stage Management for Program Management (can be outdated or
unavailable during release preview)

Set a Default Status for Program Enrollments

Now, you can use your own default status for program enrollments when you click Add Participant on a program. Previously, all program
enrollments defaulted to Applied, even if your default was different.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program
Management is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Enroll Individual Participants in Programs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Updated Objects for Program and Case Management

Do more with the updated Program and Case Management objects. To use the new fields, add them to page layouts and make sure
your users have edit access for them.
Create a personalized name for your goal
Use the new CustomGoalName field on the existing GoalAssignment object.
Indicate whether a custom goal name is required for a goal assignment related to the goal definition
Use the new IsCustomGoalNameRequired field on the existing GoalDefinition object.

429
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

Record Rollup Definitions

Aggregate tasks and events at a household or group level to help relationship managers stay organized and easily track the progress of
events and tasks. Reduce clutter by deleting outdated and unused record rollup definitions. Edit the name and description of a definition
for better clarity and usability.

IN THIS SECTION:
Aggregate Tasks and Events with Record Rollup Definitions
Create record rollup definitions for Task and Event objects. Provide deeper insights and context to your relationship managers to
make informed decisions by aggregating tasks and events at a household or group level. Easily track progress and stay organized
with a comprehensive view of all tasks and events related to a household or group.
Delete Record Rollup Definitions
Reduce the data clutter and simplify maintenance by deleting record rollup definitions that you no longer use. You can delete only
the definitions that are in the draft status.
Provide More Meaningful Names and Descriptions to Your Record Rollup Definitions
Effortlessly edit the names and descriptions of your record rollup definitions to ensure that your definitions clearly communicate
their purpose. You can edit only the definitions that are in the draft or inactive status.

Aggregate Tasks and Events with Record Rollup Definitions

Create record rollup definitions for Task and Event objects. Provide deeper insights and context to your relationship managers to make
informed decisions by aggregating tasks and events at a household or group level. Easily track progress and stay organized with a
comprehensive view of all tasks and events related to a household or group.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Rollup Definitions, and then select Record Rollup Definitions. To create a
record rollup definition, click New Rollup Definition, and select Event or Task as the rollup source object or rollup target object
according to your business requirements.

Delete Record Rollup Definitions

Reduce the data clutter and simplify maintenance by deleting record rollup definitions that you no longer use. You can delete only the
definitions that are in the draft status.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Rollup Definitions, and then select Record Rollup Definitions. Open the
definition that you want to delete, and click Delete.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Delete a Record Rollup Definition

Provide More Meaningful Names and Descriptions to Your Record Rollup Definitions
Effortlessly edit the names and descriptions of your record rollup definitions to ensure that your definitions clearly communicate their
purpose. You can edit only the definitions that are in the draft or inactive status.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.

430
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Industries Common Features

How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Rollup Definitions, and then select Record Rollup Definitions. Open an
inactive or draft record rollup definition that you want to edit, and click .

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Edit a Record Rollup Definition

Stage Management
Ensure alignment with overarching business goals by declaratively controlling parent object stage transitions based on child object
criteria. Save time and effort by cloning stage definitions for similar business processes across different record types. Track progress
towards a specific stage with the new Milestone step type. Optimize workflows with conditional step execution by using expression
sets.

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Parent and Child Stage Transitions Declaratively
Enhance business process management by using a declarative approach to control parent object stage transitions based on child
object stage transitions. Configure the criteria and conditions to automatically update the parent object’s stage whenever the child
object meets specific criteria. Your users can efficiently oversee and track interconnected business processes, making sure that
dependent processes align with the overarching business goals.
Clone and Customize Stage Definitions
Save time and effort by cloning stage definitions and mapping their stages to the new definitions. Easily create definitions for similar
business processes applicable to different record types.
Define Key Checkpoints with Milestones
With the Milestone step type in the Stage Management builder, users can track their progress towards a specific stage in a business
process. Set specific goals based on completed steps or key actions, such as document validation for a party profile record. Easily
track and visualize progress in the Record Stage Overview lightning web component.
Automate Step Definition Execution
Optimize your workflows and improve process efficiency with conditional step execution in Stage Management. Use predefined
logic to automate complex decision-making processes by using expression sets. The expression set evaluates the specified conditions
and, based on the results, determines whether the step must be executed or skipped.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Stage Management

Manage Parent and Child Stage Transitions Declaratively

Enhance business process management by using a declarative approach to control parent object stage transitions based on child object
stage transitions. Configure the criteria and conditions to automatically update the parent object’s stage whenever the child object
meets specific criteria. Your users can efficiently oversee and track interconnected business processes, making sure that dependent
processes align with the overarching business goals.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Stage Management.
How: After you set up the stage transition for the reference object, in the Stage Management builder, click Stage Transition Rules.
Then, select Add Child Object Criteria and Conditions.

431
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing

Clone and Customize Stage Definitions

Save time and effort by cloning stage definitions and mapping their stages to the new definitions. Easily create definitions for similar
business processes applicable to different record types.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Stage Management.
How: Clone a stage definition from the Stage Management Setup page or from the Stage Management builder.

Define Key Checkpoints with Milestones

With the Milestone step type in the Stage Management builder, users can track their progress towards a specific stage in a business
process. Set specific goals based on completed steps or key actions, such as document validation for a party profile record. Easily track
and visualize progress in the Record Stage Overview lightning web component.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Stage Management.

Automate Step Definition Execution

Optimize your workflows and improve process efficiency with conditional step execution in Stage Management. Use predefined logic
to automate complex decision-making processes by using expression sets. The expression set evaluates the specified conditions and,
based on the results, determines whether the step must be executed or skipped.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Stage Management.

Marketing
Salesforce offers three marketing products: Account Engagement (formerly known as Pardot), Engagement (formerly known as Marketing
Cloud), and Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced editions.

IN THIS SECTION:
Marketing Cloud
Marketing Cloud offers a number of enhancements in Spring ’25, including channel support for WhatsApp, more control over
campaign flows, and scoring for accounts. Plus, new and improved Agentforce capabilities for content generation.
Marketing Cloud Account Engagement
Marketing Cloud Account Engagement introduces a number of exciting updates in Spring '25, including the ability to generate
marketing copy in multiple languages with Einstein Assistant, API support for copying marketing assets to Salesforce CMS, and
troubleshooting email send failures more precisely with upgraded list email reports. Plus, save time and optimize your marketing
efforts by ingesting Account Engagement data into Data Cloud with a new data bundle.
Marketing Cloud Engagement
The Spring ’25 Marketing Cloud Engagement release occurs February 21, 2025 through March 14, 2025. Some features are made
available to you within a week of the release. Get an exclusive, in-depth look at the new features by tuning into the Spring ’25
Marketing Cloud Engagement Release New Feature Overview webinar. Stay tuned for updates on this page!
Personalization
Enhance customer experiences using Personalization (previously named Einstein Personalization) and other Marketing Cloud products.
Configure personalization experiences directly on any website using Personalization and the Data Cloud Web SDK. Create custom
recommender objectives, test experiences using web-based experimentation, and build custom attribution models to visualize
customer engagement journeys.

432
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

Marketing Cloud
Marketing Cloud offers a number of enhancements in Spring ’25, including channel support for WhatsApp, more control over campaign
flows, and scoring for accounts. Plus, new and improved Agentforce capabilities for content generation.

IN THIS SECTION:
Reach More People with WhatsApp
Add WhatsApp to your multichannel marketing strategy to better connect with your customers around the world. After you set up
WhatsApp in your org, marketers can use the new Blank WhatsApp campaign option to create WhatsApp messages that include
rich media content, such as audio and video.
Save Time with New AI Capabilities for Campaigns and Content
Generate campaign content with ease with the Agentforce (Default) agent for emails and landing pages. Plus, get going faster by
using the campaign brief prompt in Prompt Builder to generate a brief name, key message, audience description, and detailed
campaign goals.
Create Campaigns with Agentforce Campaign Designer (Beta)
Edit and refine your campaign strategy, multi-channel flows, and content from a single interface. This feature helps marketers quickly
generate targeted campaigns that better resonate with your audience.
Personalize Emails Consistently with Reusable Personalization Settings and Expressions
Save time and avoid starting from scratch every time you want to personalize content. To craft consistent personalized emails,
marketers can reuse personalization settings when they create variations of email components. They can also save and reuse criteria
for defining merge fields for consistent use across marketing content.
Reach the Right Customers with Enhanced Audience Tools
Now it’s easier than ever to manage and target audience members at every stage of the customer lifecycle. Enjoy a more accurate
pipeline with the new Prospect object, apply scoring rules to accounts, and quickly create and preview segments right from a
campaign.
Connect Experiences on External Sites
Now you can collect information from your customers on external sites with an embedded form. Plus, relate activity from your site
to a campaign for reporting.
Extend Your Marketing with Enhanced Messaging Tools
Now you can expand your SMS marketing to more locations around the globe. Plus, manage blockout windows, and easily review
the source of consent status changes in Data Cloud.
Get More Flexibility and Visibility with Campaigns and Flows
Now you have more visibility and control over your flows from the campaign record. You can also plan and track campaigns with
the new marketing calendar. Plus, use custom fields with campaign briefs, and get insight into the status of your campaign flows
with the Flow Version Occurrence related list and the Campaign Stage field.
Create and Manage Content More Efficiently
Now marketers can save time with content cloning capabilities, shared workspaces, and default branding for new content. Plus, get
more insight on the status of your landing page, form, and brand content.
Get Started Faster with Setup Enhancements
Whether you’re new to Marketing Cloud or exploring new features, our improved setup experience saves you time so your team
can get to work. Now it’s easier to track your setup progress, authenticate a domain for branding or sending email, automatically
generate an identity resolution ruleset, and more.

433
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

User Interface Updates in Marketing Cloud

Take advantage of improvements throughout the Marketing Cloud app that make it easier for you to accomplish tasks and get
important details at a glance.

Reach More People with WhatsApp

Add WhatsApp to your multichannel marketing strategy to better connect with your customers around the world. After you set up
WhatsApp in your org, marketers can use the new Blank WhatsApp campaign option to create WhatsApp messages that include rich
media content, such as audio and video.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.
How: Marketing Cloud now includes these features and functions.
• A WhatsApp campaign option that includes a preconfigured flow with a Send WhatsApp Message element
• Flow Builder elements to support 2-way conversation
• A WhatsApp message builder experience for content creation that includes support for audio, video, and document files
• Communication subscription support and a default preference page for WhatsApp
• Marketing Performance dashboards that include comprehensive insights on delivery rates, reads, replies, and other key metrics.
To get started, connect your WhatsApp Business Account to Salesforce and create communication subscriptions to store consent for
WhatsApp messages. Then, set up Marketing Performance to get detailed metrics about your new channel. After setup is complete,
marketers can import consent data and begin crafting WhatsApp campaign content.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up WhatsApp for Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Save Time with New AI Capabilities for Campaigns and Content

Generate campaign content with ease with the Agentforce (Default) agent for emails and landing pages. Plus, get going faster by using
the campaign brief prompt in Prompt Builder to generate a brief name, key message, audience description, and detailed campaign
goals.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Agentforce Campaigns and Einstein in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Create Campaigns with Agentforce Campaign Designer (Beta)

Edit and refine your campaign strategy, multi-channel flows, and content from a single interface. This feature helps marketers quickly
generate targeted campaigns that better resonate with your audience.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Advanced edition or
Marketing Cloud Account Engagement Plus, Advanced, and Premium editions.

Note: Agentforce Campaign Designer is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

434
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

Personalize Emails Consistently with Reusable Personalization Settings and Expressions

Save time and avoid starting from scratch every time you want to personalize content. To craft consistent personalized emails, marketers
can reuse personalization settings when they create variations of email components. They can also save and reuse criteria for defining
merge fields for consistent use across marketing content.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

Reuse Personalization Settings Throughout Email Components

Improve conversations and deliver more effective email campaigns by consistently personalizing components throughout an email. To
create variations of a component with preconfigured personalization settings, clone a personalization point. Marketers can clone one
from the same email or from a different email to personalize consistently across content. Within the same email, marketers can also link
components to one personalization point and control them with the same personalization settings, which ensures consistency and
saves time while editing.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Linked Personalization Points in Dynamic Content (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: How Dynamic Content and Personalization Work Together (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Reduce Message Design Time with Reusable Expressions that Define Personalized Merge Fields
Marketers can quickly and consistently build marketing content by reusable filter and sort criteria to select a data attribute, such as
Product Name, to use in a merge field. They save this criteria in a new content type called an expression in Salesforce CMS. Content
creators can also get more timely and accurate results for merge fields from across multiple related data objects. For example, with a
merge field related to both accounts and opportunities, a marketer can define criteria for an email that returns the most recent opportunity
for a specific account.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Personalize Marketing Content (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Create and Manage an Expression (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Reach the Right Customers with Enhanced Audience Tools

Now it’s easier than ever to manage and target audience members at every stage of the customer lifecycle. Enjoy a more accurate pipeline
with the new Prospect object, apply scoring rules to accounts, and quickly create and preview segments right from a campaign.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

Create a Segment with Quick Filters

Marketers can now create a segment from the campaign record with common attribute filters, such as New Leads. With quick filters,
marketers can work in the context of the campaign without going into the segment canvas. Add as many filters as needed, and then
save it to continue building the campaign.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Add and Preview Segments from a Campaign (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

435
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

Preview Segment Membership Before Sending

To help marketers make sure they’re sending to the right people, they can now preview segment membership before activating a
campaign flow. A marketer can preview up to 1,000 members for any published segment on a campaign, and search for specific people.
To update the preview with the latest data, republish a segment from the campaign record before previewing again.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Add and Preview Segments from a Campaign (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Expand Your Customer Base with Prospects and Leads

Grow your audience by creating prospects manually or through form submission. Drive engagement with personalized campaigns that
are tailored to their interests. Nurture your prospects until they meet the qualification threshold. After they’re qualified, convert them to
leads manually or through automated flows.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Manage Prospects and Leads (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Prioritize Ready-to-Purchase Accounts with Account Scoring

Prioritize and manage your accounts more efficiently with rule-based account scoring. Now you can segment accounts based on
engagement, fit, and intention to purchase, so that you can focus your sales efforts on the accounts that matter most to your business.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Configure Account Scoring in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Connect Experiences on External Sites

Now you can collect information from your customers on external sites with an embedded form. Plus, relate activity from your site to a
campaign for reporting.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

Embed Forms on External Sites

Deliver a form from exactly where you need it by embedding it on your own hosted web page. After some configuration in both your
external site and in Salesforce, grab a form’s code block from its detail page, and then embed it into the HTML of an external site. The
external site must support iframes, be secure, and use HTTPS.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Forms on External Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Relate External Web Engagement to a Campaign

Get important web traffic data for your sites by relating a campaign to an external web tracking connector. After you configure the
campaign and connector, add the tracking snippet to your external site’s source code. Then, you can evaluate your web engagement
using Marketing Performance reports and dashboards.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Track Activity on External Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

External Tracking Data Kit Was Updated

To support the web tracking connector and campaign association, we updated the external tracking data kit. If you already have external
web tracking configured, you must install the new data kit from the Web Tracking page in Salesforce Setup, and then deploy both of
the included data streams. To retain your previous customizations, save a copy of your current Sitemap code, configure the new settings,
and then reapply the custom code. You don’t need to make any changes to the tracking snippet on your site.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Track Activity on External Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

436
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

Extend Your Marketing with Enhanced Messaging Tools

Now you can expand your SMS marketing to more locations around the globe. Plus, manage blockout windows, and easily review the
source of consent status changes in Data Cloud.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

Expand SMS Marketing to More Countries

Marketing Cloud now supports sending SMS messages in more than 50 countries. Request the applicable codes and determine how to
send SMS messages to different countries around the world. Many countries have different sending and compliance guidelines, so review
rules before you begin.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Set Up SMS Messages in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Brand Vetting to Enhance Your SMS Sending Reputation

Validate your identity during the SMS channel setup process. Brand vetting improves your reputation more quickly and increases the
number of SMS messages you can send from newly approved long and short codes.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Vet Your SMS Brand in Unified Messaging (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Blockout Windows to Send SMS and WhatsApp Messages at the Right Time
Customers can learn a lot from your messages but notifications for noncritical messages can be overwhelming. This feeling is especially
true for messages that send alerts when they’re delivered, such as SMS and WhatsApp. To increase the chances that messages are well
received, set a blockout window for SMS and WhatsApp that schedules messages more effectively.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Configure Blockout Windows in Unified Messaging (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Review Consent Source Details in Data Cloud

To help you comply with marketing laws and regulations that apply to your business, review the source of a consent status change from
the Consent Audit Trail in Data Explorer. You also get details about each consent source, such as the import file name when the source
was a consent import.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Review Marketing Consent Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get More Flexibility and Visibility with Campaigns and Flows

Now you have more visibility and control over your flows from the campaign record. You can also plan and track campaigns with the
new marketing calendar. Plus, use custom fields with campaign briefs, and get insight into the status of your campaign flows with the
Flow Version Occurrence related list and the Campaign Stage field.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

Manage More of Your Flow from the Campaign

Now you’re squarely in the driver’s seat with more visibility and control over each flow from the campaign record. View up to 5 message
or time-based wait elements on the campaign’s flow summary in the same order that they appear in Flow Builder. Plus, edit time-based
wait elements from the campaign without going into Flow Builder.

437
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Navigating Campaigns in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Gain Insight on Campaign ROI with Opportunity Influence

Use engagement data to automatically attribute revenue from each Closed/Won opportunity back to specific campaigns. Opportunity
Influence comes with first-touch and last-touch attribution models, so marketers can see which campaigns are most effective at different
stages of the customer journey. After you enable the feature in Salesforce Setup, Opportunity Influence appears on the sidebar of
campaign records under Performance.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Enable Opportunity Influence (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Track your Campaigns and Flows with Marketing Calendar

Collaboration between marketing and sales teams has never been easier with the new Marketing Calendar, integrated with the Sales
Calendar. Check out the new Marketing Calendar tab for a unified view of all your planned and activated campaigns and segment flows.
Manage items directly from the calendar, add new events, and create custom object calendars.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Manage Your Campaigns and Flows with Marketing Calendar (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Get Insight into the Status of All Flows in a Campaign

Help your marketing team keep tabs on the progress of each campaign with the Campaign Stage field. The campaign stage is based
on the status of all the flows related to a campaign. Add the field to the campaign page layout and set the field-level security for each
profile that needs access to the field.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Tools for Monitoring and Reporting on Campaigns (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Monitor the Progress of Flow Version Occurrences

Inform your users about the running status of flow interviews in the Flow Version Occurrences section of a Flow’s related list. If a flow
fails, your users can find the cause with detailed error information that they can use to fix the problem quickly.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Monitoring your Flow Status(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance Campaign Briefs with Custom Fields

Improve the effectiveness of your campaign briefs by including custom fields. This feature enables you to add extra context for additional
use cases, making your briefs more comprehensive and useful for your team.

Create and Manage Content More Efficiently

Now marketers can save time with content cloning capabilities, shared workspaces, and default branding for new content. Plus, get
more insight on the status of your landing page, form, and brand content.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

Content Processing Status Was Added

When a landing page, form, or branding content type is in the process of publishing or unpublishing, the content status is Processing.
Users can’t make changes while content is processing.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Marketing Cloud Content Items and Status (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

438
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

Work More Efficiently with Workspace Content

To save time and storage space, users can reuse branded content in multiple workspaces. Users can now make copies of a shared content
record and save it to a folder in a shared workspace. Previously, users couldn’t save the cloned content to a specific folder.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Create Content in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Organize and Share Content in a Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Set a Default Brand for Your Marketing Workspace

Ensure that the look and feel of your content is always on brand. When a Content Admin or Content Manager sets a default brand for a
marketing workspace, all emails, landing pages, and forms created in the workspace use those brand values.

To apply a brand that’s created for a special event or campaign, a content author can change the brand for an individual piece of content.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Brand Your Content in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Add a Brand to Your Forms

Assign a brand to the forms that you create and keep the look of your forms consistent with your other content. If your workspace has
an assigned default brand, the form reflects those brand values. If you embed the form in a landing page with a different brand, the form
reflects the landing page’s brand values. If you include the form on an external website, the form retains the brand that you assigned to
it.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Brand Your Content in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Forms on External Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get Started Faster with Setup Enhancements

Whether you’re new to Marketing Cloud or exploring new features, our improved setup experience saves you time so your team can
get to work. Now it’s easier to track your setup progress, authenticate a domain for branding or sending email, automatically generate
an identity resolution ruleset, and more.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.

439
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud

Track Your Progress in Marketing Cloud Setup

Find and complete the most important tasks in Salesforce Setup. Our new setup assistant home page provides a shortcut to required
and recommended settings, and includes checkboxes so you can track your progress along the way.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Get Started with Marketing Cloud Setup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Install or Update the Sales Data Kit Quickly

The required Sales data kit is now available in the Marketing Cloud setup assistant, so that you can install or update it with one click. The
Sales data kit includes data streams for Salesforce standard objects like Account, Contact, and Lead. Previously, you had to install or
update the Sales data kit on a separate page in Salesforce Setup.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Install and Deploy Data Streams for Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Authenticate Domains More Easily

Setting up an authenticated domain for branding or email sending is easier than ever with a new guided experience. After you add a
domain in Unified Messaging setup, update your DNS records with your domain registrar. Then, return to Unified Messaging setup to
verify that everything is set up correctly and complete your domain authentication. Plus, you can easily add a From email address for
sending during the setup process or after you authenticate your domain.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Authenticate a Domain for Unified Messaging

Create an Identity Resolution Ruleset with One Click

To help you consolidate your data from multiple sources, we now provide the option to automatically generate an identity resolution
ruleset. The autogenerated ruleset uses Normalized Email as match criteria to create Unified Individual profiles. Previously, you had to
create a ruleset and manually configure its match rules.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Create an Identity Resolution Ruleset for Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

User Interface Updates in Marketing Cloud

Take advantage of improvements throughout the Marketing Cloud app that make it easier for you to accomplish tasks and get important
details at a glance.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced
editions.
Why: Here are the changes that we made for Spring ’25.
• Undo and restore functionality is now available for emails. While you draft or revise email content, use keyboard commands or the
onscreen buttons to undo changes or restore the original content.

440
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud Account Engagement

• Quickly add or move sections in an email or landing page. Select a section and click the + button at the top or bottom of the section
to add a new section. Reposition a section on the canvas more intuitively with improved drag-drop functionality, which highlights
where the moved section will appear.
• Adjust section layouts more easily in emails and landing pages. In the Section property panel, use column layout presets (1), add or
delete a column (2), drag the handle to resize columns (3), or delete a column (4).

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Content in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Marketing Cloud Account Engagement

Marketing Cloud Account Engagement introduces a number of exciting updates in Spring '25, including the ability to generate marketing
copy in multiple languages with Einstein Assistant, API support for copying marketing assets to Salesforce CMS, and troubleshooting
email send failures more precisely with upgraded list email reports. Plus, save time and optimize your marketing efforts by ingesting
Account Engagement data into Data Cloud with a new data bundle.

IN THIS SECTION:
Get Helpful Resources for Enabling Marketing Cloud
A new Optimizer page called Enable Marketing Cloud is available to guide you and your business units as you access new marketing
functionality in Salesforce Marketing Cloud. Review curated resources, prerequisites, and tasks to help you take advantage of the
power of Salesforce Data Cloud and new Marketing Cloud campaign innovations like Agentforce and SMS. To view these resources,
navigate to the Optimizer, and click Enable Marketing Cloud in the Optimizer welcome banner.

441
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud Account Engagement

Automate Account Engagement Data Stream Creation in Data Cloud

Automatically create data streams in Data Cloud with the Account Engagement CRM Data data bundle. Previously, you had to create
the landing page, list email, and marketing form data streams manually and individually map the fields of each object. The new data
bundle includes all three streams and their field mappings.
Expedite Content Creation by Copying Assets to CMS via API
Copy email, file, form, and landing page objects from your Account Engagement business unit to a Salesforce CMS workspace by
using Version 5 of the Account Engagement API.
Streamline Content Creation by Copying Additional Asset Types to CMS
For more consistent and efficient content creation, you can now copy existing landing pages to a Salesforce CMS workspace for use
in new marketing campaigns. You can also copy inline CSS when copying a form to a CMS workspace.
Get More Visibility into Email Send Issues
List email reporting includes more reasons for prospect email send failures, such as invalid or banned email addresses. And when
an email fails to send, the configuration issue now appears in the Account Engagement Optimizer. The issue description links to the
Failed Email Sends table, which lists the emails that failed with the prospect’s name, company, failure reason, and other related
details.
Generate Account Engagement Content in More Languages
Use generative AI to streamline your content creation process in French, German, Japanese, Portuguese (Brazil), and Spanish. Quickly
create forms, landing pages, email subject lines, and email body copy with Content Creation for Account Engagement, powered by
Einstein.
Prepare for End of Support for Enhanced Email Experience
Support for Enhanced Email Experience in Account Engagement ends beginning Winter ’25. To create emails with the same
functionality, use the Classic Email Builder.

Get Helpful Resources for Enabling Marketing Cloud

A new Optimizer page called Enable Marketing Cloud is available to guide you and your business units as you access new marketing
functionality in Salesforce Marketing Cloud. Review curated resources, prerequisites, and tasks to help you take advantage of the power
of Salesforce Data Cloud and new Marketing Cloud campaign innovations like Agentforce and SMS. To view these resources, navigate
to the Optimizer, and click Enable Marketing Cloud in the Optimizer welcome banner.
Where: This change applies to Account Engagement Growth, Plus, Advanced, and Premium editions with Data Cloud enabled in regions
where Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced editions are supported.

Automate Account Engagement Data Stream Creation in Data Cloud

Automatically create data streams in Data Cloud with the Account Engagement CRM Data data bundle. Previously, you had to create
the landing page, list email, and marketing form data streams manually and individually map the fields of each object. The new data
bundle includes all three streams and their field mappings.
Where: This change applies to all Account Engagement editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Ingesting Account Engagement Data into Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

442
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud Account Engagement

Expedite Content Creation by Copying Assets to CMS via API

Copy email, file, form, and landing page objects from your Account Engagement business unit to a Salesforce CMS workspace by using
Version 5 of the Account Engagement API.
• To copy an object, use the/copyToCms endpoint.
• To verify that an object successfully copied, use the /salesforceCmsId read-only field.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer: Marketing Cloud Account Engagement API Version 5 (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline Content Creation by Copying Additional Asset Types to CMS

For more consistent and efficient content creation, you can now copy existing landing pages to a Salesforce CMS workspace for use in
new marketing campaigns. You can also copy inline CSS when copying a form to a CMS workspace.
Where: This change applies to Account Engagement Growth, Plus, Advanced, and Premium editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Copy Landing Pages from Your Account Engagement Business Unit to a CMS Workspace (can be outdated or
unavailable during release preview)

Get More Visibility into Email Send Issues

List email reporting includes more reasons for prospect email send failures, such as invalid or banned email addresses. And when an
email fails to send, the configuration issue now appears in the Account Engagement Optimizer. The issue description links to the Failed
Email Sends table, which lists the emails that failed with the prospect’s name, company, failure reason, and other related details.
Where: This change applies to Account Engagement Growth, Plus, Advanced, and Premium editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View the List Email Report (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Access Account Engagement Optimizer (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Generate Account Engagement Content in More Languages

Use generative AI to streamline your content creation process in French, German, Japanese, Portuguese (Brazil), and Spanish. Quickly
create forms, landing pages, email subject lines, and email body copy with Content Creation for Account Engagement, powered by
Einstein.
Where: This change applies to Account Engagement Advanced and Premium editions and to Lightning Experience in Enterprise,
Unlimited, and Performance editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Assistant in Account Engagement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

443
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Marketing Cloud Engagement

Prepare for End of Support for Enhanced Email Experience

Support for Enhanced Email Experience in Account Engagement ends beginning Winter ’25. To create emails with the same functionality,
use the Classic Email Builder.
Where: This change applies to all Account Engagement Editions with Salesforce Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Classic Email for Account Engagement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: We’re Ending Support for the Enhanced Email Experience in Account Engagement (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)

Marketing Cloud Engagement

The Spring ’25 Marketing Cloud Engagement release occurs February 21, 2025 through March 14, 2025. Some features are made available
to you within a week of the release. Get an exclusive, in-depth look at the new features by tuning into the Spring ’25 Marketing Cloud
Engagement Release New Feature Overview webinar. Stay tuned for updates on this page!

Personalization
Enhance customer experiences using Personalization (previously named Einstein Personalization) and other Marketing Cloud products.
Configure personalization experiences directly on any website using Personalization and the Data Cloud Web SDK. Create custom
recommender objectives, test experiences using web-based experimentation, and build custom attribution models to visualize customer
engagement journeys.

IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Personalization Is Now Called Personalization
The name is changed, but the functionality remains the same. Please bear with us as we update our documentation and UI to reflect
this change.
Explore the Enhanced Web Personalization Manager
Save and publish your personalization experiences with ease, ensuring that your changes go live in a controlled and dynamic manner.
Select which decisions you want to preview to get a broader view of how your content appears to different audiences. Edit your
personalization experiences with an intuitive user interface.
Define Custom Objectives for Recommendations
Take advantage of machine learning and AI to create custom objective-based recommenders based on your desired business
outcomes. Select specific engagement signals for model training, and reuse objectives across different recommenders.
Use Scheduling Rules for Decisions
When defining a Personalization Decision targeting rule, you can define scheduling rules to use a date range or time of day when
determining who is eligible for personalization decisions.
Test the Effectiveness of Personalized Experiences
Discover which personalized experiences resonate best with your customers. Design A/B/n experiments using measures of success
that you define to compare the effectiveness of personalized experiences. You can apply the tests to AI-based recommendations.

444
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Personalization

Use Only Authenticated Endpoints When Accessing Data Cloud

When using Data Cloud authenticated server-to-server real time data capture, you can require that personalization points use
authenticated endpoints for evaluations. When creating a personalization point, select the Authentication Required checkbox to
require using only authenticated endpoints for sending real-time events to and requesting authenticated recommendations from
Data Cloud.
View Recommender Training Status and Refresh History
Use the Recommender record Refresh History tab to view a list of the last 30 recommender refresh dates, times, and resulting refresh
status.
Track and Evaluate Visitor Engagement Through Attribution
Evaluate the effectiveness of personalization decisions or strategies by creating custom attribution configurations using first touch
or last touch models. Use engagement signals and metrics that can track the customer journey from initial contact to conversion.
Visualize the Customer Journey with the Attribution Dashboard
Create and run custom or preconfigured attribution models, and then view the attribution results from the Analytics tab of the
attribution model record.
Personalize Business Processes and Screens with Flow
Use the new Get Personalization Decisions invocable action in Flow to request personalized content from the Decisioning API.
Integrate and deliver personalized content directly into your workflows and custom screens. Use the Get Personalization Decisions
action in screen flows to design and embed personalized content to Salesforce pages. You can also use it in triggered flows to
automatically get personalized recommendations based on specific events or tasks.

Einstein Personalization Is Now Called Personalization

The name is changed, but the functionality remains the same. Please bear with us as we update our documentation and UI to reflect
this change.
Where: This change applies to all editions supporting Personalization.

Explore the Enhanced Web Personalization Manager

Save and publish your personalization experiences with ease, ensuring that your changes go live in a controlled and dynamic manner.
Select which decisions you want to preview to get a broader view of how your content appears to different audiences. Edit your
personalization experiences with an intuitive user interface.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Personalization, available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and
Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Web Personalization Manager (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Define Custom Objectives for Recommendations

Take advantage of machine learning and AI to create custom objective-based recommenders based on your desired business outcomes.
Select specific engagement signals for model training, and reuse objectives across different recommenders.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions with Data Cloud.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure a Custom Objective (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

445
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Personalization

Use Scheduling Rules for Decisions

When defining a Personalization Decision targeting rule, you can define scheduling rules to use a date range or time of day when
determining who is eligible for personalization decisions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions with Data Cloud.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Targeting Rule (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Test the Effectiveness of Personalized Experiences

Discover which personalized experiences resonate best with your customers. Design A/B/n experiments using measures of success that
you define to compare the effectiveness of personalized experiences. You can apply the tests to AI-based recommendations.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Web Experimentation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Only Authenticated Endpoints When Accessing Data Cloud

When using Data Cloud authenticated server-to-server real time data capture, you can require that personalization points use authenticated
endpoints for evaluations. When creating a personalization point, select the Authentication Required checkbox to require using only
authenticated endpoints for sending real-time events to and requesting authenticated recommendations from Data Cloud.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure a Personalization Point (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

View Recommender Training Status and Refresh History

Use the Recommender record Refresh History tab to view a list of the last 30 recommender refresh dates, times, and resulting refresh
status.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions.

Track and Evaluate Visitor Engagement Through Attribution

Evaluate the effectiveness of personalization decisions or strategies by creating custom attribution configurations using first touch or
last touch models. Use engagement signals and metrics that can track the customer journey from initial contact to conversion.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Custom Attribution Models (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

446
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes MuleSoft

Visualize the Customer Journey with the Attribution Dashboard

Create and run custom or preconfigured attribution models, and then view the attribution results from the Analytics tab of the attribution
model record.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Visualize Attribution Intelligence Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Personalize Business Processes and Screens with Flow

Use the new Get Personalization Decisions invocable action in Flow to request personalized content from the Decisioning API. Integrate
and deliver personalized content directly into your workflows and custom screens. Use the Get Personalization Decisions action in screen
flows to design and embed personalized content to Salesforce pages. You can also use it in triggered flows to automatically get
personalized recommendations based on specific events or tasks.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions with Data Cloud.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Documentation: Get Personalization Decisions API (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

MuleSoft
Use the MuleSoft Anypoint Platform suite of products to connect and integrate apps, systems, and data across your enterprise. Streamline
operations by building and automating processes with clicks instead of code. You can design, develop, govern, and share APIs and
integration apps and host them in the cloud or on-premises.
• The Mulesoft Release Notes are organized by product.
• The MuleSoft Release Note Summary by Month is organized by latest updates.
To learn more about MuleSoft products, see MuleSoft Documentation.

Mobile
User Opt-In Biometric Login is now generally available in Mobile Publisher. Customize your Experience Cloud app's security alerts with
new fields and use newly supported download methods. There are also upgrades to the Salesforce mobile app and Briefcase Builder.

IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Mobile App
Send attachments from the Salesforce mobile app. Malware Detection security policy is being retired.
Mobile Publisher
Enable fast and secure Experience Cloud app logins with User Opt-In Biometric Login, which is now generally available. Customize
the style of your Experience Cloud app's security alerts with new fields in Setup for Mobile Publisher. Upgrade your Experience Cloud
app's download offerings with newly supported download methods.

447
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Mobile App

General Mobile Updates

Assign a briefcase to your mobile workforce by their profile. We've made enhancements to Seller-Focused Mobile Experience. Also,
diagnose and improve mobile and offline development with the latest versions of the ESLint rules plugin and Salesforce Extensions
for Visual Studio Code.

Salesforce Mobile App

Send attachments from the Salesforce mobile app. Malware Detection security policy is being retired.

IN THIS SECTION:
Everything That’s New in the Salesforce Mobile App
Our latest round of new and improved Salesforce mobile app features makes it easier to access Salesforce on the go.

Everything That’s New in the Salesforce Mobile App

Our latest round of new and improved Salesforce mobile app features makes it easier to access Salesforce on the go.
The new Salesforce mobile app is available for all editions, except Database.com, without an additional license. Your org’s Salesforce
edition and licenses, as well as a user’s assigned profile and permission sets, determines the Salesforce data and features that are available
to each user.
Most features become available for the Salesforce mobile app the week of February 18, 2025.

Set Up in
Salesforce for Salesforce for
Salesforce App Enhancements and Changes the Full
Android iOS
Site
Files

Send Attachments in Messaging on the Salesforce Mobile App

Access and Security

Malware Detection Security Policy for Android is Being Retired

IN THIS SECTION:
Malware Detection Security Policy for Android is Being Retired
We're retiring the Malware Detection security policy for Android on January 31, 2025. We rely on Android SafetyNet API from Google
to offer this policy. Google is retiring this API and any call to it fails after January 31, 2025. To maintain security, consider enabling
alternative policies such as Block Jailbroken Device and Minimum Security Patch Version.
Send Attachments in Messaging on the Salesforce Mobile App
Service reps can now send attachments while messaging from the Salesforce mobile app. This change improves parity between the
mobile app’s messaging experience and the desktop site’s messaging experience. Previously, service reps messaging from the
Salesforce app could only send messages; transfer messages to other reps, bots, or queues; send messaging components; and send
voice notes.

448
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Mobile Publisher

Malware Detection Security Policy for Android is Being Retired

We're retiring the Malware Detection security policy for Android on January 31, 2025. We rely on Android SafetyNet API from Google to
offer this policy. Google is retiring this API and any call to it fails after January 31, 2025. To maintain security, consider enabling alternative
policies such as Block Jailbroken Device and Minimum Security Patch Version.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Mobile App Plus and Mobile Publisher for Android in all editions.
How: If you have the Malware Detection policy for Android enabled with Enhanced Mobile Security, either with Salesforce Mobile App
Plus or Mobile Publisher, we recommend that you disable it. Disabling the policy prevents disruption to users who are using older versions
of the Salesforce Mobile App or Mobile Publisher apps. If no action is taken, this policy is automatically turned off with the Spring ‘25
release and can’t be configured for your org.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable and Configure Mobile App Security Policies
Salesforce Help: Enhanced Mobile App Security Policies for Mobile Publisher

Send Attachments in Messaging on the Salesforce Mobile App

Service reps can now send attachments while messaging from the Salesforce mobile app. This change improves parity between the
mobile app’s messaging experience and the desktop site’s messaging experience. Previously, service reps messaging from the Salesforce
app could only send messages; transfer messages to other reps, bots, or queues; send messaging components; and send voice notes.
Where: This feature applies to Enhanced messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: In the agent console of the Salesforce mobile app, click the agent actions launcher. Then select the camera icon. From the Upload
Files icon, choose whether to open the photo library, take a photo, or choose a file. Then send your file to the end user.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations and Limitations for Messaging in the Salesforce Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Help: Message Customers in the Salesforce Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Mobile Publisher
Enable fast and secure Experience Cloud app logins with User Opt-In Biometric Login, which is now generally available. Customize the
style of your Experience Cloud app's security alerts with new fields in Setup for Mobile Publisher. Upgrade your Experience Cloud app's
download offerings with newly supported download methods.

IN THIS SECTION:
Download Files Your Way in Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud
To give you more flexibility and control over the download links that you specify for your users, Mobile Publisher now supports
additional download methods. You can specify a third-party URL, like a Google or Box URL, as a download link for authenticated or
guest users. You can also support chat transcript downloads from Messaging for In-App and Web via a Binary Large Object (Blob)
(authenticated iOS users only). Previously, Mobile Publisher supported only authenticated downloads from specified SObjects.
Remove Unwanted /s Elements in Older Experience Cloud LWR Site URLs
Some older LWR Experience Cloud sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL. You can now update the site URL in the site’s
Experience Cloud Administration workspace to remove this unwanted element. After you update the URL of an LWR site, no related
changes are required for a Mobile Publisher app that was created from that site.

449
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Mobile Publisher

Set Up Opt-In Biometric Login for Fast and Secure Experience Cloud App Logins (Generally Available)
Now generally available, User Opt-In Biometric Login for your Experience Cloud app lets users opt in to using biometric credentials
(face or fingerprint recognition) to log in. After a user first logs in to the app with their username and password, they can opt in to
using their biometric credentials for future logins.
Customize Mobile Publisher Android App Permission Requests to Post Notifications
In Setup for Mobile Publisher, you can now customize the text shown to users when your Android app requests permission to post
notifications to the notification tray on their device. Make sure that your permission description meets Google Play's requirements
for prominent disclosure.
Customize the Style of Your Experience Cloud App's Security Alerts
With Enhanced Mobile App Security for your Experience Cloud app, you can configure how your app responds to security threats.
Now you can customize the style of your app's security alerts to match the user experience of your app. Select the alert button color
and text color, and upload your own custom fonts.

Download Files Your Way in Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud

To give you more flexibility and control over the download links that you specify for your users, Mobile Publisher now supports additional
download methods. You can specify a third-party URL, like a Google or Box URL, as a download link for authenticated or guest users.
You can also support chat transcript downloads from Messaging for In-App and Web via a Binary Large Object (Blob) (authenticated iOS
users only). Previously, Mobile Publisher supported only authenticated downloads from specified SObjects.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app versions 13.010 and later. Setup for Mobile Publisher is available
in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Supported Objects for Download (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Remove Unwanted /s Elements in Older Experience Cloud LWR Site URLs

Some older LWR Experience Cloud sites include /s at the end of the site’s base URL. You can now update the site URL in the site’s
Experience Cloud Administration workspace to remove this unwanted element. After you update the URL of an LWR site, no related
changes are required for a Mobile Publisher app that was created from that site.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites that are accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs)
in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Update the URL of Your LWR Site

Set Up Opt-In Biometric Login for Fast and Secure Experience Cloud App Logins
(Generally Available)
Now generally available, User Opt-In Biometric Login for your Experience Cloud app lets users opt in to using biometric credentials (face
or fingerprint recognition) to log in. After a user first logs in to the app with their username and password, they can opt in to using their
biometric credentials for future logins.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app versions 14.000 and later.

450
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Mobile Updates

How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Connected App, and then select Manage Connected Apps. Find your Mobile Publisher
for Experience Cloud app's connected app, and then add custom attributes that configure opt-in biometric login.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: User Opt-In Biometric Login (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable User Opt-In Biometric Login (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Customize Mobile Publisher Android App Permission Requests to Post Notifications

In Setup for Mobile Publisher, you can now customize the text shown to users when your Android app requests permission to post
notifications to the notification tray on their device. Make sure that your permission description meets Google Play's requirements for
prominent disclosure.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud Android apps. Setup for Mobile Publisher is available in Lightning
Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In your app's Setup for Mobile Publisher project, enable the Post Notifcation app permission. Then, edit the permission description
to explain to users why your app is requesting permission to post notifications.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: App Permissions for Device Capabilities (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Customize the Style of Your Experience Cloud App's Security Alerts

With Enhanced Mobile App Security for your Experience Cloud app, you can configure how your app responds to security threats. Now
you can customize the style of your app's security alerts to match the user experience of your app. Select the alert button color and text
color, and upload your own custom fonts.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app versions 14.000 and later. Setup for Mobile Publisher is
available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions.
How: Enable Enhanced Mobile App Security in your app's Setup for Mobile Publisher project. Then configure the colors and fonts under
Security Alert Settings.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Enhanced Mobile App Security for Mobile Publisher (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

General Mobile Updates

Assign a briefcase to your mobile workforce by their profile. We've made enhancements to Seller-Focused Mobile Experience. Also,
diagnose and improve mobile and offline development with the latest versions of the ESLint rules plugin and Salesforce Extensions for
Visual Studio Code.

IN THIS SECTION:
Assign Briefcases to Users by Profile
You can now assign a briefcase to your mobile workforce by their profile. For example, to enable a mobile sales department to access
records in low-connectivity settings, you can assign a briefcase to a profile that represents the sales department. Previously, briefcases
were assigned only to users or user groups.

451
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Mobile Updates

Do More with Seller-Focused Mobile Experience

Prepare for meetings with Seller-Focused Mobile Experience. Customize the app using Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience.
Validate Mobile Lightning Web Components with ESLint Rules
Use the new ESLint rules plugin to help you develop code that works with mobile and offline Lightning web components.
Reduce Mobile Performance Issues with the Salesforce Extensions Pack
The latest version of the Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code comes with new diagnostic improvements to help flag and
resolve mobile and offline performance-related issues.
Accept On-Site Payments with Tap-to-Pay
Use the PaymentsService API to create a Lightning web component that lets your customers use the Tap-to-Pay capability of the
Payments plug-in to pay mobile workers directly. The Field Service mobile app then integrates with Pay Now to connect the LWC
to a secure payment system that processes the interaction.

Assign Briefcases to Users by Profile

You can now assign a briefcase to your mobile workforce by their profile. For example, to enable a mobile sales department to access
records in low-connectivity settings, you can assign a briefcase to a profile that represents the sales department. Previously, briefcases
were assigned only to users or user groups.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience desktop and in Salesforce with Field Service (SFS) enabled. Briefcase Builder supports
the Salesforce Field Service mobile app for iOS and Android and Salesforce Mobile App Plus.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Briefcase Builder, and then select Briefcase Builder. Update an existing briefcase or
create a new briefcase.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Briefcase (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Profiles (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Do More with Seller-Focused Mobile Experience

Prepare for meetings with Seller-Focused Mobile Experience. Customize the app using Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience.
Where: Seller-Focused Sales Mobile Experience for Android and iOS on phones and tablets in all editions, except Database.com.

SEE ALSO:
Prepare for Meetings Without Opening Your Laptop
Customize Seller-Focused Mobile Experience (Beta)

Validate Mobile Lightning Web Components with ESLint Rules

Use the new ESLint rules plugin to help you develop code that works with mobile and offline Lightning web components.

Note: Salesforce recommends using Visual Studio Code with the Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code to develop offline
Lightning web components.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce Mobile App Plus for iOS and Android on devices in all editions, except Database.com.
How:
The ESLint rules flag violations for:

452
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Mobile Updates

• Apex usage
• Offline GraphQL feature limitations
• Offline GraphQL hard limits
Here’s an example of a lint rule violation popup for the use of semi-join filter with GraphQL offline.

An example resolution for semi-join filter use with GraphQL offline.

453
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Mobile Updates

SEE ALSO:
Mobile and Offline Developer Guide: Install ESLint Rules for Mobile Lightning Web Components
GitHub: ESLint Rules for Mobile Lightning Web Components
Mobile and Offline Developer Guide: Use Apex While Mobile and Offline
Mobile and Offline Developer Guide: Use GraphQL While Mobile and Offline

454
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes General Mobile Updates

Reduce Mobile Performance Issues with the Salesforce Extensions Pack

The latest version of the Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code comes with new diagnostic improvements to help flag and resolve
mobile and offline performance-related issues.

Note: Salesforce recommends using Visual Studio Code with the Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code to develop offline
Lightning web components.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce Mobile App Plus for iOS and Android on devices in all editions, except Database.com.
How:
The new diagnostic improvements flag potential performance issues related to:
• Large number of fields exceeding 32KB
• Base Lightning web components that aren’t optimized for mobile offline use
• Use of wire adapters getRelatedListRecords and getRelatedListCount while offline
Here’s an example of the diagnostic tool flagging field sizes exceeding 32KB.

An example resolution for field sizes exceeding 32KB.

Go to the Visual Studio Marketplace to install the Salesforce Extension Pack.

SEE ALSO:
GitHub: Salesforce Mobile Extensions for Visual Studio Code
GraphQL API: Parent-to-Child Relationships

455
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Omnistudio

Accept On-Site Payments with Tap-to-Pay

Use the PaymentsService API to create a Lightning web component that lets your customers use the Tap-to-Pay capability of the Payments
plug-in to pay mobile workers directly. The Field Service mobile app then integrates with Pay Now to connect the LWC to a secure
payment system that processes the interaction.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS with the Salesforce Payments and Pay Now licenses.

Note: PaymentsService does not and cannot function when running in a web browser, whether on a desktop or mobile device.

How: To develop an LWC with the Payments Service plug-in features, use the Payments Plugin API as your method for accessing a
device’s native Tap to Pay functionality.
1. Import PaymentsService to make the PaymentsService API functions available to your code.
2. Test to make sure PaymentsService is available before you call payment functions.
3. Use the payment functions to start collecting payments.
For more details, see Accept On-Site Payments with Tap-to-Pay in the Mobile and Offline Developer Guide.

SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Payments Service API

Omnistudio
Use Omnistudio with the Salesforce Lightning Design System 2 (SLDS 2) template for a refreshed user interface. OmniAnalytics is now
enabled for guest users on Experience Cloud by default. Access customers' saved session information to create context-driven
communications on your sites. In addition to improving usability, we made a few translation, accessibility, security, and deployment
updates.

IN THIS SECTION:
Explore Omnistudio's Refreshed Visual Style with SLDS 2
Enhance the user experience (UI) of your Omnistudio applications at runtime with the new Omnistudio Salesforce Lightning Design
System 2 (SLDS 2) theme. Turn on the Omnistudio SLDS 2 theme in your org, which uses the features of SLDS 2 and the new UI. Get
a clear and consistent visual experience in Omnistudio through a simplified color palette, improved font styles, better spacing, and
higher contrast.
Integrate Guest User Data on Experience Cloud with OmniAnalytics
Get clear insights about how guest users interact with your Omniscripts and Flexcards, and also see the visualization on the
OmniAnalytics dashboard.
Use Omniscript Saved Sessions in Emails and Email Templates
Access customers' saved session information to create context-driven communications tailored to customer interactions on your
sites. Populate email templates and email messages with relevant Omniscript saved session information. This helps reengage
customers with personalized and timely email-based communication.
Save Costs and Time with Built-In Translations for Omniscripts and Flexcards
Use autotranslated system labels to localize your single-language Omniscripts and Flexcards based on the user's locale. Note that
these autotranslated labels won't affect your multi-language Omniscripts, which use the translations that are defined using custom
labels.

456
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Explore Omnistudio's Refreshed Visual Style with SLDS 2

Seamlessly Enable Omnistudio Metadata in Scratch Orgs by Updating the Org Shape File
To enable the Omnistudio Metadata setting after you create a scratch org with an org shape file, include the
OmniStudioSettings property in the org shape file.
Upgrade to a Secure Node.js Version for OmniOut
Secure your org by installing the latest supported version of Node.js. OmniOut now supports Node.js versions from 18.20.4 to 22.11.0.
Securely Deploy Omnistudio Components by Using the Latest Versions of Build Tool and Node.js
Upgrade your Build Tool to a version later than 1.17.11, and the Node.js to a version later than 18 to deploy Omnistudio components.
This upgrade also includes an upgrade to the Puppeteer version from 5.3.1 to 21.11.0.
Accessibility Enhancements in Omnistudio
Learn about important changes that make Omnistudio more accessible.
Other Improvements in Omnistudio
Learn about enhancements to the Apex Class Permission Checker and the UserLocaleDateTime Omni Interaction Configuration in
Spring '25.
Deprecation and End of Support for AngularJS-Based Omniscripts
Omnistudio no longer supports Omniscripts built on AngularJS. To continue using these Omniscripts, migrate all AngularJS-based
Omniscripts to the Omniscript Lightning Web Component framework.
Omnistudio Minor Releases
Find out about bug fixes, minor updates, and known issues about Omnistudio made after the Spring '25 and before Summer '25.

Explore Omnistudio's Refreshed Visual Style with SLDS 2

Enhance the user experience (UI) of your Omnistudio applications at runtime with the new Omnistudio Salesforce Lightning Design
System 2 (SLDS 2) theme. Turn on the Omnistudio SLDS 2 theme in your org, which uses the features of SLDS 2 and the new UI. Get a
clear and consistent visual experience in Omnistudio through a simplified color palette, improved font styles, better spacing, and higher
contrast.
Where: This change applies to all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the standard runtime.
How: Verify if the SLDS 2 theme is activated in your Salesforce org: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Themes and
Branding, and then verify the SLDS 2 theme setting. If the SLDS 2 theme is already activated in the Salesforce org, turn on the
corresponding setting in your Omnistudio org. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Omnistudio Settings, and then turn
on Omnistudio SLDS 2.
You can choose to turn on Omnistudio SLDS 2 in your Omnistudio org even if the SLDS 2 theme is not activated in the Salesforce org.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio Installation and Upgrade: Enable the Omnistudio SLDS 2 Theme (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Integrate Guest User Data on Experience Cloud with OmniAnalytics

Get clear insights about how guest users interact with your Omniscripts and Flexcards, and also see the visualization on the OmniAnalytics
dashboard.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.

457
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Use Omniscript Saved Sessions in Emails and Email
Templates

Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the standard runtime.
How: OmniAnalytics is now turned on for guest users on Experience Cloud by default. When OmniAnalytics is turned on in your org,
guest user interactions are automatically tracked for Omniscripts and Flexcards.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio: Enable OmniAnalytics and Store Tracking Data

Use Omniscript Saved Sessions in Emails and Email Templates

Access customers' saved session information to create context-driven communications tailored to customer interactions on your sites.
Populate email templates and email messages with relevant Omniscript saved session information. This helps reengage customers with
personalized and timely email-based communication.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the standard runtime.
How: To use Omniscript Saved Session in an email template:
In App Launcher, find and select Email Template. Create an email template, and select Omniscript Saved Session from the Related
Entity Type list.
To use Omniscript Saved Session in an email:
Create a new email message record and map the OmniScriptSavedSession object to the RelatedTo field.

SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: EmailMessage
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: EmailTemplate

Save Costs and Time with Built-In Translations for Omniscripts and Flexcards
Use autotranslated system labels to localize your single-language Omniscripts and Flexcards based on the user's locale. Note that these
autotranslated labels won't affect your multi-language Omniscripts, which use the translations that are defined using custom labels.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the standard runtime.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio: Considerations for Single-Language Omniscripts (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio: Configure Flexcard Settings

458
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Seamlessly Enable Omnistudio Metadata in Scratch Orgs by
Updating the Org Shape File

Seamlessly Enable Omnistudio Metadata in Scratch Orgs by Updating the

Org Shape File
To enable the Omnistudio Metadata setting after you create a scratch org with an org shape file, include the OmniStudioSettings
property in the org shape file.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the standard runtime.
How: Add this key-value pair in the OmniStudioSettings property in the org shape file:
"OmniStudioSettings": {
"enableOmniStudioMetadata": true
}

Upgrade to a Secure Node.js Version for OmniOut

Secure your org by installing the latest supported version of Node.js. OmniOut now supports Node.js versions from 18.20.4 to 22.11.0.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the managed package runtime.
How: Existing OmniOut users can upgrade the npm packages by using the npm install command. If you’re new to OmniOut, see
OmniOut in Salesforce Help.

Securely Deploy Omnistudio Components by Using the Latest Versions of

Build Tool and Node.js
Upgrade your Build Tool to a version later than 1.17.11, and the Node.js to a version later than 18 to deploy Omnistudio components.
This upgrade also includes an upgrade to the Puppeteer version from 5.3.1 to 21.11.0.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
When: The Puppeteer version upgrade on the Build Tool version later than 1.17.11 is scheduled for January 03, 2025.
Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the managed package runtime and standard runtime.

Accessibility Enhancements in Omnistudio

Learn about important changes that make Omnistudio more accessible.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the standard runtime.
Why: The Read-Only property is now replaced with Disabled for Radio and Radio Group elements. If this property is enabled, these
elements are no longer a part of the focus order for users navigating with keyboards.

459
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Other Improvements in Omnistudio

Other Improvements in Omnistudio

Learn about enhancements to the Apex Class Permission Checker and the UserLocaleDateTime Omni Interaction Configuration in Spring
'25.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
Who: The Apex Class Permission Checker feature is available to Omnistudio customers who use the managed package runtime and the
standard runtime. The changes for the UserLocaleDateTime Omni Interaction Configuration feature are available for customers who use
the standard runtime.
Why: Omnistudio offers these new enhancements.
• Users assigned a permission set or permission set group can now call the allowlisted Apex classes remotely. Previously, the Apex
Class Permissions Checker enforced the checks only on the Apex classes that were assigned to a user’s profile. Now, the checker also
checks for Apex classes that are assigned to a user's permission set or permission set group.
• The UserLocaleDateTime Omni Interaction Configuration now considers the user locale for Datetime and Time field types when set
to true. Previously, only the Date field type was supported. In addition, when this configuration is enabled, the FORMATDATETIME
function also adheres to the user locale. This means, when the function has an input with a Date, Datetime, or Time in a format that
matches your user locale, the output is returned in the same format.
How: Review the Apex classes that you’ve added to permission sets or permission set groups, and remove any Apex classes that you
don’t want users to access from the allowlist.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio: Add an Apex Class Permissions Checker
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio for Managed Packages: Add an Apex Class Permissions Checker
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio: Configure Date and Time Settings in Data Mappers

Deprecation and End of Support for AngularJS-Based Omniscripts

Omnistudio no longer supports Omniscripts built on AngularJS. To continue using these Omniscripts, migrate all AngularJS-based
Omniscripts to the Omniscript Lightning Web Component framework.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Omnistudio is enabled.
When: Salesforce ended support for AngularJS-based Omniscript on December 31, 2022.
Who: This change impacts Omnistudio customers who use the managed package runtime and standard runtime.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio for Managed Packages: Lightning Web Component Omniscripts
Salesforce Help for Omnistudio for Managed Packages: Convert an Angular Omniscript to an LWC Omniscript

Omnistudio Minor Releases

Find out about bug fixes, minor updates, and known issues about Omnistudio made after the Spring '25 and before Summer '25.
Omnistudio Minor Releases

460
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Revenue Cloud

Revenue Cloud
Quickly create products by using Deep Clone. Speed up product discovery through faceted search and partial indexing. Improve Salesforce
Pricing by using tools for accurate discounts, troubleshooting, pricing recipes, and optimal strategies. Save and reuse configurations.
Use streamlined rules and dynamic configurations to design bundles faster. Support large, complex deals through robust quoting,
ordering, contracting, and approvals. Manage usage-based products through usage modeling, rate management, and consumption
tracking. Integrate Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts to streamline reviews, configure file formats, enhance workflows, and extract
data from images by using multimodal processing. With Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator, streamline order processing, automate tasks,
track fulfillment changes, and manage ramp deal orders. Customize and optimize billing by using flexible invoice schedules, PDF
generation, error reduction, multi-currency support, and automated journal entries.

IN THIS SECTION:
Product Catalog Management
Clone existing products and their related information to increase productivity. For products that support decimal quantities, specify
exact product quantities. Accelerate your product discovery with faceted search and partial indexing. Faceted search simplifies
browsing, and partial indexing supports quick updates to product data without a full index rebuild.
Salesforce Pricing
Leverage Einstein generative AI for automated context tagging. Use enhanced Salesforce Pricing capabilities for accurate discount
application, streamlined pricing recipe management and troubleshooting, and optimised pricing strategies. Improve efficiency and
pricing accuracy through expanded data type support in the Assignment element within a pricing procedure.
Product Configurator
Save and reuse your configurations, design bundles faster with streamlined rules and dynamic configurations, and use decimal
quantities. Create constraint models with CML and customize product cards and UI elements for better visibility and control.
Transaction Management
Support large, complex deals efficiently. The Revenue Cloud enhancements make quoting, ordering, contracting, and approvals
robust and intuitive. To honor and track your customers’ negotiated prices, use pricing contracts to make tiered volume adjustments
and use pricing agreement contracts to specify pricing at the line item level. Provide more transparency with custom fields for
usage-based pricing, and enable usage selling on Experience Cloud. Streamline approval processes with email approvals and
submitter notifications. Create larger, more complex quotes and orders faster, thanks to performance improvements.
Usage Management (Generally Available)
Manage consumption of usage-based products with Usage Management. It includes usage modeling to simplify the setup of product
definitions, rate management to establish and adjust rates, and consumption management to track consumption data. It also provides
invoice-ready consumption summaries and wallet management to manage entitlements and facilitate drawdowns based on
consumption data.
Salesforce Contracts
Quickly and easily integrate Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts through a guided setup. Use private and non-private modes
during external reviews, and restart private reviews with new reviewers by using the improved privacy controls. Contract authors
can configure the file attachment formats for check-in documents. Maintain consistent branding by applying custom fonts to
generated documents.

461
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Catalog Management

Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

Process incoming orders depending on their priority and quantity. Assetize and hand over fulfilled products to customers without
delay, independent of other in-progress items. Link, review, and act upon dependent steps that are part of other fulfillment plans.
Automate manual task assignments with custom rules, routing tasks to specific users, queues, or those users with the least workload.
Track all changes in your fulfillment steps from a comprehensive history view. Plan and run fulfillment order line items on a specified
future date and time. Decompose and fulfill ramp deal orders directly with Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator. Decompose products
with quantities that are in decimal format.
Billing
Enhance billing flexibility and simplify accounting with our advanced invoicing solutions. Use the enhanced invoice scheduler for
instant one-time invoicing, automatic deactivation, multi-currency support, and effortless editing of draft or inactive schedules.
Suspend billing for specific accounts or schedule groups as needed. Preview upcoming invoices and adjust billing parameters to fit
your business requirements. Generate invoices for amendments, cancellations, or early renewals of evergreen subscriptions.

Product Catalog Management

Clone existing products and their related information to increase productivity. For products that support decimal quantities, specify
exact product quantities. Accelerate your product discovery with faceted search and partial indexing. Faceted search simplifies browsing,
and partial indexing supports quick updates to product data without a full index rebuild.

IN THIS SECTION:
Accelerate Product Creation with Deep Clone
Clone product definitions, including all related entities such as attributes, child components, and selling models. Simplify product
creation, boost productivity, ensure consistency across your catalog, eliminate manual record recreation, reduce errors, and save
time by streamlining the product creation process through Deep Clone.
Define Decimal Values for Product Quantity
Specify accurate product quantities for products that support decimal values. Define the number of decimal places the product
supports, with specific rounding methodologies. This feature is key for customers where specifying exact product quantities is crucial
for their business.
Update Product Index Quickly with Partial Index Rebuilds
You no longer have to rebuild the entire index whenever you add, remove, or update product information. With the new Partial
Index feature, you can efficiently capture product updates and apply incremental indexing swiftly for product search. For instance,
you can quickly publish product changes and search for products on the product discovery page.
Enhance Product Discovery with Faceted Search
Elevate your search capabilities with Faceted Search. Facets provide a powerful filtering mechanism for your search results. Quickly
locate the products you need by narrowing down the search results based on the chosen facets. For example, when searching for
a phone, you can refine your search results using facets such as color, screen size, storage capacity, memory, and more.
Changed Objects in Product Catalog Management
Access more data with the new fields in Product Catalog Management objects.
Connect REST APIs
Connect REST APIs for Product Catalog Management help customers, partners, and ISVs access data related to products, categories,
and catalogs.

462
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Catalog Management

Accelerate Product Creation with Deep Clone

Clone product definitions, including all related entities such as attributes, child components, and selling models. Simplify product creation,
boost productivity, ensure consistency across your catalog, eliminate manual record recreation, reduce errors, and save time by streamlining
the product creation process through Deep Clone.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Catalog Management is enabled.

Define Decimal Values for Product Quantity

Specify accurate product quantities for products that support decimal values. Define the number of decimal places the product supports,
with specific rounding methodologies. This feature is key for customers where specifying exact product quantities is crucial for their
business.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Catalog Management is enabled.

Update Product Index Quickly with Partial Index Rebuilds

You no longer have to rebuild the entire index whenever you add, remove, or update product information. With the new Partial Index
feature, you can efficiently capture product updates and apply incremental indexing swiftly for product search. For instance, you can
quickly publish product changes and search for products on the product discovery page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Catalog Management is enabled.

Enhance Product Discovery with Faceted Search

Elevate your search capabilities with Faceted Search. Facets provide a powerful filtering mechanism for your search results. Quickly locate
the products you need by narrowing down the search results based on the chosen facets. For example, when searching for a phone,
you can refine your search results using facets such as color, screen size, storage capacity, memory, and more.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Catalog Management is enabled.
How: Configure filters for your org that translate to facets during runtime based on the search result.

Changed Objects in Product Catalog Management

Access more data with the new fields in Product Catalog Management objects.
Define the units and systems of units used to express and account for quantities
Use the new UnitOfMeasure field on the existing Product2 and AttributePicklist objects.

Connect REST APIs

Connect REST APIs for Product Catalog Management help customers, partners, and ISVs access data related to products, categories, and
catalogs.

463
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Catalog Management

IN THIS SECTION:
New and Updated Connect REST API Resources
Learn more about the resources available with Product Catalog Management.
Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies
These request bodies have changes.
Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies
These response bodies have changes.

New and Updated Connect REST API Resources

Learn more about the resources available with Product Catalog Management.
Retrieve the created snapshots and snapshot indexes
Make a GET request to the /connect/pcm/index/snapshots resource.
New request parameter: numberOfIndexLogs
Fetch settings related to indexing and search
Make a GET request to the /connect/pcm/index/setting resource.
New response body: Index Setting
Update settings related to indexing and search
Make a PATCH request to the /connect/pcm/index/setting/settingId resource.
New request body: Index Setting Input
New response body: Index Setting Update
Get count and details of errors that occurred during the indexing process
Make a GET request to the /connect/pcm/index/error resource.
New response body: Snapshot Index Error
Copy related records of an object along with the main product record
Make a POST request to the /connect/pcm/deep-clone resource.
New request body: Deep Clone Input
New response body: Deep Clone Response

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Product Catalog Management Business APIs
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Product Discovery Business APIs

Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies

These request bodies have changes.

Product Catalog Management

Index Configuration Input
This request body has these new properties.
• isFacetable—Indicates whether the field is facetable.

464
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Catalog Management

• facetDisplayRank—Sort order for displaying the facets at run time.

Criteria Input
This request body has this new property.
• attributeType—Search attribute type of the facet for a faceted search.

Product Discovery
Filter Criteria Input
This request body has this new property.
• attributeType—Search attribute type of the facet for a faceted search.

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Product Catalog Management Business APIs
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Product Discovery Business APIs

Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies

These response bodies have changes.

Product Catalog Management

Snapshot Index
This response body has these new properties.
• indexInfos—Index information records associated with the snapshot index.
• indexLogs—Index logs associated with the snapshot index.
• venueId—Venue ID of the snapshot index.
Fields Info
This response body has these new properties.
• isSearchableConfigurable—Indicates whether the field is facetable.
• isFacetableConfigurable—Indicates whether the field is searchable.
Index Configuration Field
This response body has these new properties.
• isFacetable—Indicates whether the field is facetable.
• facetDisplayRank—Sort order for displaying the facets at run time.
Products
This response body has this new property.
• facets—Details of the faceted search.

Product Discovery
CPQ Base List
This response body has this new property.

465
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Pricing

• facets—Details of the faceted search.

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Product Catalog Management Business APIs
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Product Discovery Business APIs

Salesforce Pricing
Leverage Einstein generative AI for automated context tagging. Use enhanced Salesforce Pricing capabilities for accurate discount
application, streamlined pricing recipe management and troubleshooting, and optimised pricing strategies. Improve efficiency and
pricing accuracy through expanded data type support in the Assignment element within a pricing procedure.

IN THIS SECTION:
Add Context Tags Automatically to Your Pricing Elements
Leverage Einstein generative AI to map the appropriate context tags as inputs within your pricing elements. Automating this process
minimizes the manual effort and improves the accuracy for pricing designers.
Apply Discounts Accurately by Using the Discount Distribution Service Element
Ensure pricing transparency by applying discounts fairly across all line items using the Discount Distribution Service element. Control
discounts by excluding products or categories that you don’t want the discounts to apply to. Customize the element for your specific
business needs and safeguard profitability by setting floor price limits.
Determine the Right Price for a Product by Combining Multiple Outputs
Assist organizations in offering their customers the best price for a product when a given pricing rule produces multiple outcomes.
Users can configure procedure output resolution records to determine the optimal price or discounts by using the List Price and
Price Tracking elements.
Troubleshoot Pricing Errors with the Pricing Operations Console
Troubleshoot and fix issues that arise after your users run pricing APIs or simulations. View and open price logs to resolve errors with
all the necessary log information available directly in the Pricing Operations Console app.
Streamline Line Item Tagging
Accurately and efficiently calculate the prices for each line item by using the Map Line Items element. Easily map the tags for each
line item detail by mapping them once and using parent tag mappings, instead of repeating the mappings in each pricing element.
Delete Pricing Recipes
To locate the right pricing recipe and prevent unnecessary data storage, delete pricing recipes created on a Salesforce Pricing org.
Previously, pricing recipes could only be modified or created.
Enhance Flexibility with New Data Types in Assignment Element
Use the date and time, text (string), boolean, number, and currency data types to expand data compatibility with other elements
within Salesforce Pricing. Previously, only the number and currency data types were supported.
Simplify Line Item Mapping
Eliminate the need to reenter line item variables in each discovery element. Map the line item variable in a discovery procedure by
using the Discovery Settings element.
New and Changed Objects in Salesforce Pricing
Do more with these new and changed Salesforce Pricing objects.

466
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Pricing

Add Context Tags Automatically to Your Pricing Elements

Leverage Einstein generative AI to map the appropriate context tags as inputs within your pricing elements. Automating this process
minimizes the manual effort and improves the accuracy for pricing designers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled, with the Einstein for Platform add-on license.
How: To fully access Einstein generative AI to map your context tags in a pricing element, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter
Einstein, and then select Einstein Setup. Turn on Einstein.
On your pricing element, select Auto Populate Context Tags.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Generative AI for Salesforce Pricing (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Apply Discounts Accurately by Using the Discount Distribution Service Element

Ensure pricing transparency by applying discounts fairly across all line items using the Discount Distribution Service element. Control
discounts by excluding products or categories that you don’t want the discounts to apply to. Customize the element for your specific
business needs and safeguard profitability by setting floor price limits.

467
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Pricing

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Discount Distribution Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Determine the Right Price for a Product by Combining Multiple Outputs

Assist organizations in offering their customers the best price for a product when a given pricing rule produces multiple outcomes. Users
can configure procedure output resolution records to determine the optimal price or discounts by using the List Price and Price Tracking
elements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled.
How: Define the pricing resolution strategy for a pricing element by creating a procedure output resolution record.
To derive the best price or discounts from multiple outputs, select Enable Output Resolution only in the List Price element or the Price
Tracking element. Provide the resolution variables and optionally, add write-back conditions to determine the best price.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Procedure Output Resolution (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Troubleshoot Pricing Errors with the Pricing Operations Console

Troubleshoot and fix issues that arise after your users run pricing APIs or simulations. View and open price logs to resolve errors with all
the necessary log information available directly in the Pricing Operations Console app.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled.

468
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Pricing

How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Salesforce Pricing, and then select Salesforce Pricing Setup. Turn on Price
Logs Capture.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pricing Operations Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline Line Item Tagging

Accurately and efficiently calculate the prices for each line item by using the Map Line Items element. Easily map the tags for each line
item detail by mapping them once and using parent tag mappings, instead of repeating the mappings in each pricing element.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Discovery Procedure. Click , and select the Map Line Item element from the list.
From the App Launcher, find and select Pricing Procedure. Click , and select the Map Line Item element from the list.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Map Line Item (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Delete Pricing Recipes

To locate the right pricing recipe and prevent unnecessary data storage, delete pricing recipes created on a Salesforce Pricing org.
Previously, pricing recipes could only be modified or created.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled.
Who: To delete pricing recipes, users need the Salesforce Pricing Design Time permission.

Enhance Flexibility with New Data Types in Assignment Element

Use the date and time, text (string), boolean, number, and currency data types to expand data compatibility with other elements within
Salesforce Pricing. Previously, only the number and currency data types were supported.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Assignment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Simplify Line Item Mapping

Eliminate the need to reenter line item variables in each discovery element. Map the line item variable in a discovery procedure by using
the Discovery Settings element.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Salesforce
Pricing is enabled.

469
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Configurator

How: Add the Discovery Settings element as the first element in your Discovery Procedure.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Discovery Settings Element (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New and Changed Objects in Salesforce Pricing

Do more with these new and changed Salesforce Pricing objects.
Define a pricing resolution strategy for a pricing element
Use the new ProcedureOutputResolution object.
Store Pricing API execution logs
Use the new PricingApiExecution object.
Track the records generated when discovery and pricing procedures are run
Use the new PricingProcessExecution object.
Associate different business processes in a procedure plan definition record
Use the new ProcessType field on the ProcedurePlanDefinition object.

Product Configurator
Save and reuse your configurations, design bundles faster with streamlined rules and dynamic configurations, and use decimal quantities.
Create constraint models with CML and customize product cards and UI elements for better visibility and control.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Quotes and Orders Faster by Saving and Reusing Configurations
Sales reps can save their frequently used configurations, and then reuse them with just a few clicks. Use the saved configurations to
quickly create quotes and orders even when they're working with complex bundles and products.
Create Precise Configurations with Decimal Quantity Support
For products that are measured with decimal precision, your sales reps and rule designers can enter decimal values for the quantity
when they configure the products and define the rules. Sales reps and rule designers can also see the associated unit of measure
record and an infobubble that shows the number of decimal values that the value is rounded off to. For attributes that require a
decimal input, your sales reps and rule designers can see the associated unit of measure record. However, attribute values aren’t
rounded off.
Design Product Configurations Faster With Product Classes and Flexible Rules
Rules for creating product bundles are now simpler and more flexible. You can define a class of values to display in dropdowns at
run time, as opposed to statically defining the dropdowns. Also, when defining a rule with a condition, you can choose anything
that's related via Context Service mappings. These changes make your rules more compact, faster to create, and easier to maintain.
View More Products at Once with Compact Mode in Product Configurator
With compact mode, see more products onscreen and work with large bundles more easily. Use the toggle to turn Compact Mode
on and off.
Find Products in a Large Bundle Easily
Use the search field in Product Configurator to easily find a product in the current bundle. To show the search field, make sure that
the product configuration flow contains the Product Configurator Breadcrumb Navigation component (included by default in the
Default Product Configurator Flow).

470
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Configurator

Show More Details About Your Products with Customized Product Cards
Select the fields that you want to show on a product card and capture the information that isn’t covered in the default card layout.
To select fields in the Product Configurator Option Groups component, choose up to 5 options in each of the two picklists. The
selected fields appear in two rows in the product card, with options from the first picklist in the top row.
Set Up Complex Product Validation Rules Easily by Using Advanced Configurator
Rule designers can set up validation rules for complex product configurations by using Advanced Configurator in Product Configurator.
Based on your business requirements, you can use Advanced Configurator or the existing Standard Configurator. After you enable
Advanced Configurator, rule designers can use Constraint Builder to create advanced configuration rules.
Configure Complex Products Accurately with Constraint Models
Manage the complex configuration and validation for your products by using constraint models. Create constraint models in the
Constraint Builder, a part of the Advanced Configurator, to use constraints in addition to if-then rules to customize complex products
quickly and accurately.
New Configurator Flow Component Fields
Ensure more control over layout and other functions by using the new fields added to the Product Configurator Flow screen
components.

Create Quotes and Orders Faster by Saving and Reusing Configurations

Sales reps can save their frequently used configurations, and then reuse them with just a few clicks. Use the saved configurations to
quickly create quotes and orders even when they're working with complex bundles and products.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Configurator is enabled.

How: Open Product Configurator. To save a configuration for reuse, click . To load a saved configuration, click and then select
Load Configuration.

Create Precise Configurations with Decimal Quantity Support

For products that are measured with decimal precision, your sales reps and rule designers can enter decimal values for the quantity
when they configure the products and define the rules. Sales reps and rule designers can also see the associated unit of measure record
and an infobubble that shows the number of decimal values that the value is rounded off to. For attributes that require a decimal input,
your sales reps and rule designers can see the associated unit of measure record. However, attribute values aren’t rounded off.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Configurator is enabled.
Who: To enter decimal quantities, users must have the DecimalQuantityRuntime permission set.

SEE ALSO:
Define Decimal Values for Product Quantity

Design Product Configurations Faster With Product Classes and Flexible Rules
Rules for creating product bundles are now simpler and more flexible. You can define a class of values to display in dropdowns at run
time, as opposed to statically defining the dropdowns. Also, when defining a rule with a condition, you can choose anything that's
related via Context Service mappings. These changes make your rules more compact, faster to create, and easier to maintain.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions where Revenue Cloud is enabled

471
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Configurator

Who: You must have the Product Configuration Rules Designer permission.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Configuration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

View More Products at Once with Compact Mode in Product Configurator

With compact mode, see more products onscreen and work with large bundles more easily. Use the toggle to turn Compact Mode on
and off.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Configurator is enabled.

Find Products in a Large Bundle Easily

Use the search field in Product Configurator to easily find a product in the current bundle. To show the search field, make sure that the
product configuration flow contains the Product Configurator Breadcrumb Navigation component (included by default in the Default
Product Configurator Flow).

Note: If you’re looking for a product that isn’t in the current bundle, search for it on the Browse Products page in the catalog.

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Configurator is enabled.

472
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Configurator

Show More Details About Your Products with Customized Product Cards
Select the fields that you want to show on a product card and capture the information that isn’t covered in the default card layout. To
select fields in the Product Configurator Option Groups component, choose up to 5 options in each of the two picklists. The selected
fields appear in two rows in the product card, with options from the first picklist in the top row.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Configurator is enabled.

Set Up Complex Product Validation Rules Easily by Using Advanced Configurator

Rule designers can set up validation rules for complex product configurations by using Advanced Configurator in Product Configurator.
Based on your business requirements, you can use Advanced Configurator or the existing Standard Configurator. After you enable
Advanced Configurator, rule designers can use Constraint Builder to create advanced configuration rules.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Configurator is enabled.

473
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Configurator

Who: To enable Advanced Configurator and create Advanced Configurator rules, you and rule designers must have the Advanced
Configurator Designer permission set. To use Advanced Configurator rules, users must have the Advanced Configurator User permission
set.
How: On the Revenue Settings page, turn on Advanced Configurator.

Configure Complex Products Accurately with Constraint Models

Manage the complex configuration and validation for your products by using constraint models. Create constraint models in the Constraint
Builder, a part of the Advanced Configurator, to use constraints in addition to if-then rules to customize complex products quickly and
accurately.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Product
Configurator is enabled.
Who: To use the Constraint Builder, users must have the Advanced Configurator Designtime permission set license.
How: To open the Constraint Builder, in the App Launcher enter constraints, and select Constraints. On the Constraints page,
click New Constraint. In the New Constraint modal, enter a name. For Usage Type select Constraint, and click Save. In the Constraints
details page, click the constraint name to open the Constraint Builder.

Note: To view the Constraint Builder, on the Revenue Settings page, turn on Advanced Configurator.

To create a constraint model, in the Constraint Builder, click Create New Type and specify the details.

474
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Product Configurator

SEE ALSO:
Set Up Complex Product Validation Rules Easily by Using Advanced Configurator

New Configurator Flow Component Fields

Ensure more control over layout and other functions by using the new fields added to the Product Configurator Flow screen components.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions with Revenue Cloud.

Context Definition
A JSON string that contains the context definition, which includes the developer name and ID. The field appears on the Option Groups
component.

Context Metadata
A JSON string containing metadata for a sales transaction item. The metadata is generated from the Context Service. The field appears
on the Data Manager and Option Groups components.

Current Line Item ID

The ID of the current transaction line from which Configurator is launched. The field on the Data Manager component.

Layout Mode
A string value that specifies the layout mode of the Configurator UI, either Compact or Standard. The field appears on the Data Manager,
Header, Option Groups, Summary, and Product Header components.

Navigation Tabs
A collection of Apex transaction line records displayed as tabs in the Configurator. The field appears on the Data Manager and Header
components.

Option Groups Display Style

The display style to use for option groups, either tabs (the default) or accordions. The field appears on the Option Groups component.

475
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Transaction Management

Ramp Deals Enabled

A Boolean that indicates whether Ramp Deals are enabled. This feature was formerly known as Price Ramp. The field appears on the
Data Manager and components.

Sales Transaction Items

A collection of Apex sales transaction item records that contain sales transaction item details. One use for this field is to quickly access
sales transaction item details that have already been added to a transaction. The field appears on the Data Manager, Option Groups, and
Summary components.

Searchable Products
A collection of Apex search item info records that represent products available to search in the Configurator. Use this field to constrain
search to specific products. The field appears on the Data Manager and Breadcrumb Navigation components.

Select Up to 5 Fields
A JSON string that contains a list of the fields to show on the first or second line of the product option card. The field appears on the
Option Groups component.

Wait for API

The API name of a boolean resource that indicates whether the API call is in progress. When selected, fields on the component are locked
until the call completes. The field appears on the Footer, Product Attributes, Data Manager, Breadcrumb Navigations, Header, Option
Groups, and Product Header components.

Transaction Management
Support large, complex deals efficiently. The Revenue Cloud enhancements make quoting, ordering, contracting, and approvals robust
and intuitive. To honor and track your customers’ negotiated prices, use pricing contracts to make tiered volume adjustments and use
pricing agreement contracts to specify pricing at the line item level. Provide more transparency with custom fields for usage-based
pricing, and enable usage selling on Experience Cloud. Streamline approval processes with email approvals and submitter notifications.
Create larger, more complex quotes and orders faster, thanks to performance improvements.

IN THIS SECTION:
Amend Evergreen Subscriptions on Any Date
You can amend evergreen subscriptions on any date without being restricted to the anniversary date. This update provides flexibility
and timely adjustments to meet your changing business needs when managing subscriptions. Avoid delays that could put your
revenue opportunities at risk.
Create Precise Quotes and Orders with Decimal Quantity Support
For products that are measured with decimal precision, sales reps, partners, and customers can enter decimal values for quantity
from Transaction Line Editor and line item pages. Also, they can see the unit of measure field on the side panel and line item pages,
by default.
Negotiate Tiered Volume Adjustments and Prices by Using Contract Pricing
Your sales reps and contract managers can add volume tiers to contract pricing to specify the price or discount your customers
receive based on sales quantity volume. Create individual tiers directly associated with a contract item price record from the contract
record page. Manage a product's negotiated pricing in your contract pricing agreements more easily and accurately.

476
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Transaction Management

Unlock More Flexibility with Line Item Level Pricing Contracts

With the new Pricing Contract field on the quote line item level and order line item level, override the header level contract price
agreement with a line level contract price agreement. You can also price individual transaction lines by using different contracts. To
get the right price for your customers, choose a specific pricing contract that you want to use for the transaction or for individual
lines.
Specify Pricing Agreement Type Contracts for Quotes and Orders
To price a transaction or line item, create a specific pricing agreement contract. This contract is different from the existing sales
contract that contains the assets. Easily distinguish between pricing agreement contracts and sales contracts when you create quotes
or orders. Choose different contracts for pricing purposes for your customers so that the correct contracts are used for the right
transactions. You can also have multiple pricing contracts for any account.
Track Pricing Agreement Contracts Easily
Use the new Is Pricing Contract field for reporting when you track which contracts are used for pricing purposes. Easily differentiate
between sales contracts and pricing contracts in your reporting. The Is Pricing Contract field is set when you add a contract item
price or a price adjustment schedule to a contract. The field denotes the contract record as a pricing contract because the contract
captures customer-negotiated pricing.
Organize Quote and Order Line Items into Groups with Ease
Work on large, complex deals efficiently in Revenue Cloud with the more intuitive quoting and ordering experience. With the
Transaction Line Editor, sales reps can organize line items on quotes and on orders into groups, expand and collapse these groups
with a click, and edit line items across groups. Also, notification badges on groups indicate unsaved changes and errors, prompting
sales reps to take action.
Enhance Transparency with Custom Fields on Usage-Based Products
Use custom fields to give sales reps and customers a more detailed and comprehensive view of the usage rates for consumption-based
products. Give your sales reps the tools to configure and quote your company’s unique products and services by showing custom
fields on the product’s usage rate card.
Enable Usage Selling on Experience Cloud Sites
Expand your company’s market reach by enabling partners and guest users to sell usage-based products on Experience Cloud for
Partner Communities and Customer Community Plus.
Receive Email Notifications for Approval Submissions
You can now receive email confirming approval submissions and when those submissions are updated.
Manage Advanced Approvals Through Email
With Advanced Approvals, approvers and delegates receive email when there are submissions that need their attention. They can
also approve and reject submissions by responding to email.
Create Quotes and Orders Fast with More Responsive Pages
Pages are more responsive when creating quotes and orders. Thanks to API improvements, clicks and selections are up to twice as
fast.
Create Complex Quotes and Orders
During quoting and ordering, you can now create, configure, and price a single large quote or order for complex products governed
by intricate rules. The revamped API supports processing up to 1,000 lines synchronously, ensuring smoother and more efficient
processing.
New and Changed Objects in Transaction Management
Transaction Management has one new object: ContractItemPriceAdjTier. Three existing objects are now available for Experience
Cloud to support Community Plus users with advanced approvals: ApprovalSubmission, ApprovalSubmissionDetail, and
ApprovalWorkItem.

477
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Transaction Management

Amend Evergreen Subscriptions on Any Date

You can amend evergreen subscriptions on any date without being restricted to the anniversary date. This update provides flexibility
and timely adjustments to meet your changing business needs when managing subscriptions. Avoid delays that could put your revenue
opportunities at risk.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.

Create Precise Quotes and Orders with Decimal Quantity Support

For products that are measured with decimal precision, sales reps, partners, and customers can enter decimal values for quantity from
Transaction Line Editor and line item pages. Also, they can see the unit of measure field on the side panel and line item pages, by default.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.
Who: To enter decimal quantities, users must have the DecimalQuantityRuntime permission set.
How: Add the Quantity Unit of Measure field to Transaction Line Editor and the related lists for line items to show the unit of measure.

SEE ALSO:
Define Decimal Values for Product Quantity

Negotiate Tiered Volume Adjustments and Prices by Using Contract Pricing

Your sales reps and contract managers can add volume tiers to contract pricing to specify the price or discount your customers receive
based on sales quantity volume. Create individual tiers directly associated with a contract item price record from the contract record
page. Manage a product's negotiated pricing in your contract pricing agreements more easily and accurately.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.
Why: Sales reps and contract managers need an easier way to negotiate and capture volume adjustments or prices as a part of their
customer-specific contract pricing agreements. New pricing data is secure based on the contract.
How: Add the Contract Item Price Adjustment Tier related list to the Contract Item Price page layout. Configure the pricing procedure
to apply the new volume tiers data model at runtime.

Unlock More Flexibility with Line Item Level Pricing Contracts

With the new Pricing Contract field on the quote line item level and order line item level, override the header level contract price
agreement with a line level contract price agreement. You can also price individual transaction lines by using different contracts. To get
the right price for your customers, choose a specific pricing contract that you want to use for the transaction or for individual lines.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.
How: Salesforce admins must add the Pricing Contract field to an existing custom permission set, and add the Pricing Contract field to
the quote and order page layouts. You must also update your pricing procedure based on the latest template to apply the contract from
the Pricing Contract field.

478
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Transaction Management

Specify Pricing Agreement Type Contracts for Quotes and Orders

To price a transaction or line item, create a specific pricing agreement contract. This contract is different from the existing sales contract
that contains the assets. Easily distinguish between pricing agreement contracts and sales contracts when you create quotes or orders.
Choose different contracts for pricing purposes for your customers so that the correct contracts are used for the right transactions. You
can also have multiple pricing contracts for any account.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.
How: Salesforce admins must add the new Pricing Contract field to the Quote and Order page layouts. You must update your pricing
procedure based on the latest template to apply the contract from the Pricing Contract field.

Track Pricing Agreement Contracts Easily

Use the new Is Pricing Contract field for reporting when you track which contracts are used for pricing purposes. Easily differentiate
between sales contracts and pricing contracts in your reporting. The Is Pricing Contract field is set when you add a contract item price
or a price adjustment schedule to a contract. The field denotes the contract record as a pricing contract because the contract captures
customer-negotiated pricing.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.
How: Salesforce admins must add the Is Pricing Contract field to the contract page layout.

Organize Quote and Order Line Items into Groups with Ease
Work on large, complex deals efficiently in Revenue Cloud with the more intuitive quoting and ordering experience. With the Transaction
Line Editor, sales reps can organize line items on quotes and on orders into groups, expand and collapse these groups with a click, and
edit line items across groups. Also, notification badges on groups indicate unsaved changes and errors, prompting sales reps to take
action.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.
Who: Sales reps who can create and edit quotes and orders in Revenue Cloud can group line items.
How: In Revenue Settings, enable the Enable Groups in quotes and orders setting. On a quote or order, organize your transaction
by grouping line items.

Enhance Transparency with Custom Fields on Usage-Based Products

Use custom fields to give sales reps and customers a more detailed and comprehensive view of the usage rates for consumption-based
products. Give your sales reps the tools to configure and quote your company’s unique products and services by showing custom fields
on the product’s usage rate card.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.
Who: Administrators with Customize Application can create custom fields, map custom fields to objects, and use Lightning App Builder
to customize components.
How: Create a custom field and map the field to the Quote, Order, and Asset objects. In Lightning App Builder, open the Usage Rates
component and add the custom field. The custom field is visible on the Price By Usage page for quotes and orders that contain usage-based
products.

479
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Transaction Management

Enable Usage Selling on Experience Cloud Sites

Expand your company’s market reach by enabling partners and guest users to sell usage-based products on Experience Cloud for Partner
Communities and Customer Community Plus.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Transaction
Management is enabled.

Receive Email Notifications for Approval Submissions

You can now receive email confirming approval submissions and when those submissions are updated.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Revenue
Cloud Approvals is enabled.

Manage Advanced Approvals Through Email

With Advanced Approvals, approvers and delegates receive email when there are submissions that need their attention. They can also
approve and reject submissions by responding to email.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Revenue
Cloud Advanced Approvals is enabled.

Create Quotes and Orders Fast with More Responsive Pages

Pages are more responsive when creating quotes and orders. Thanks to API improvements, clicks and selections are up to twice as fast.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Revenue
Cloud Advanced Approvals is enabled.

Create Complex Quotes and Orders

During quoting and ordering, you can now create, configure, and price a single large quote or order for complex products governed by
intricate rules. The revamped API supports processing up to 1,000 lines synchronously, ensuring smoother and more efficient processing.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Revenue
Cloud Advanced Approvals is enabled.

New and Changed Objects in Transaction Management

Transaction Management has one new object: ContractItemPriceAdjTier. Three existing objects are now available for Experience Cloud
to support Community Plus users with advanced approvals: ApprovalSubmission, ApprovalSubmissionDetail, and ApprovalWorkItem.
Set up price adjustment tiers for products in contracts
Use the new ContractItemPriceAdjTier object.
Track approval submissions
The ApprovalSubmission object is now available in Experience Cloud.
Work with the details of approval submissions
The ApprovalSubmissionDetail object is now available in Experience Cloud.
Track the work items associated with approval submissions
The ApprovalWorkItem object is now available in Experience Cloud.

480
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Usage Management (Generally Available)

Usage Management (Generally Available)

Manage consumption of usage-based products with Usage Management. It includes usage modeling to simplify the setup of product
definitions, rate management to establish and adjust rates, and consumption management to track consumption data. It also provides
invoice-ready consumption summaries and wallet management to manage entitlements and facilitate drawdowns based on consumption
data.

IN THIS SECTION:
Usage Modeling
Manage usage-based products easily with Usage Modeling. Define sellable products, usage resources, and product usage grants to
lay a foundation for accurate and efficient usage management. Define aggregation policies and policies to manage grants allocated
to the sellable products.
Rate Management
Calculate rates for the consumption of usage-based products based on the negotiations. Improve control over rate card entries from
creation to activation and deactivation, ensuring immutability and reliability throughout the consumption management process.
Consumption Management
Track and manage consumption data, rate consumption accurately, and generate invoice-ready summaries for billing.
Wallet Management
Wallet management provides an intuitive interface to list, view, and manage the consumption of usage resources.
New Objects in Usage Management
Do more with these new Usage Management objects.

Usage Modeling
Manage usage-based products easily with Usage Modeling. Define sellable products, usage resources, and product usage grants to lay
a foundation for accurate and efficient usage management. Define aggregation policies and policies to manage grants allocated to the
sellable products.

IN THIS SECTION:
Define Sellable Products and Usage Resources
Define different business models by using sellable products, such as pay-as-you-go or prepurchase and overage. Use usage resources
to define a service, such as cloud storage that’s sold or granted with the sellable product.
Define Units of Measure to Quantify Usage Resources
Quantify how much of a usage resource a customer consumes by defining a new unit of measure class and a related unit of measure.
Units of measure can be time-based, transaction-based, volume-based, or count-based.
Track and Rate Usage Consumption with Product Usage Grants
Use product usage grants to track and rate resource consumption. When configuring product usage grants, set properties such as
overage charges, validity, renewability, and rollover policies. To streamline your credit redemption processes, populate the Drawdown
Order field when defining the product usage grant.
Define Refresh Policies for Usage Resources
Specify how often usage resource grants are refreshed. For a specified term of the sellable product, the grants are periodically
refreshed. Renewal frequency for the grant refresh can be set to monthly, quarterly, or annually.

481
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Usage Management (Generally Available)

Manage Unused Usage Grants Effectively

Control what happens to unused usage grants after they expire by defining rollover policies for usage resources. You can choose to
expire the grants immediately after a specified date, roll over for a specified period, or roll over indefinitely.
Define Usage Aggregation Methods and Periods
Specify how usage is aggregated over time for a given resource by creating usage aggregation policies. By defining an accumulation
method and an accumulation period, you can use the policy to rate the usage amounts in a given billing period.
Manage Grants for Sellable Products
Define grant-binding policies to manage the allocation and the appropriate timing of distributing grants to customers. With greater
control and flexibility over their grant allocations, your executives can address their needs for tailored scheduling and management.

Define Sellable Products and Usage Resources

Define different business models by using sellable products, such as pay-as-you-go or prepurchase and overage. Use usage resources
to define a service, such as cloud storage that’s sold or granted with the sellable product.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Products. On the Products list view, click New.
From the App Launcher, find and select Usage Resource. On the Usage Resources list view page, click New.

Define Units of Measure to Quantify Usage Resources

Quantify how much of a usage resource a customer consumes by defining a new unit of measure class and a related unit of measure.
Units of measure can be time-based, transaction-based, volume-based, or count-based.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Unit of Measure Class. On the Unit of Measure Classes list view page, click New.
From the App Launcher, find and select Units of Measure. On the Units of Measure list view page, click New.

Track and Rate Usage Consumption with Product Usage Grants

Use product usage grants to track and rate resource consumption. When configuring product usage grants, set properties such as
overage charges, validity, renewability, and rollover policies. To streamline your credit redemption processes, populate the Drawdown
Order field when defining the product usage grant.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Product Usage Grants. On the Product Usage Grants list view page, click New.

Define Refresh Policies for Usage Resources

Specify how often usage resource grants are refreshed. For a specified term of the sellable product, the grants are periodically refreshed.
Renewal frequency for the grant refresh can be set to monthly, quarterly, or annually.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Usage Grant Refresh Policies. On the Usage Grant Refresh Policies list view page, click
New.

482
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Usage Management (Generally Available)

Manage Unused Usage Grants Effectively

Control what happens to unused usage grants after they expire by defining rollover policies for usage resources. You can choose to
expire the grants immediately after a specified date, roll over for a specified period, or roll over indefinitely.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Usage Grant Rollover Policies. On the Usage Grant Rollover Policies list view page, click
New.

Define Usage Aggregation Methods and Periods

Specify how usage is aggregated over time for a given resource by creating usage aggregation policies. By defining an accumulation
method and an accumulation period, you can use the policy to rate the usage amounts in a given billing period.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Usage Aggregation Policies. On the Usage Aggregation Policies list view page, click
New.

Manage Grants for Sellable Products

Define grant-binding policies to manage the allocation and the appropriate timing of distributing grants to customers. With greater
control and flexibility over their grant allocations, your executives can address their needs for tailored scheduling and management.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Usage Product Grant Binding Policies. On the Usage Product Grant Binding Policies
list view page, click New.

Rate Management
Calculate rates for the consumption of usage-based products based on the negotiations. Improve control over rate card entries from
creation to activation and deactivation, ensuring immutability and reliability throughout the consumption management process.

IN THIS SECTION:
Optimize Usage Costs with Predefined Negotiable Rating Elements
Use the predefined negotiable rating procedure or create a rating procedure by using the negotiable rating elements to calculate
negotiated rates. Use Rating Procedure Builder to calculate negotiated rates and make sure that you apply the most accurate and
favorable rates for your usage resources, reflecting any special agreements made during the negotiation. Provide precise billing and
maintain customer satisfaction by honoring the negotiated terms. Default to base rates when specific negotiations don't exist.
Manage the Lifecycle of Rate Card Entries Effectively
Simplify the transition of rate card entries from the draft to the active or the inactive state. Leverage the flexibility of status-based
management to edit rate card entries in the draft status.
New and Changed Objects in Rate Management
Do more with these changed Rate Management objects.

483
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Usage Management (Generally Available)

Optimize Usage Costs with Predefined Negotiable Rating Elements

Use the predefined negotiable rating procedure or create a rating procedure by using the negotiable rating elements to calculate
negotiated rates. Use Rating Procedure Builder to calculate negotiated rates and make sure that you apply the most accurate and
favorable rates for your usage resources, reflecting any special agreements made during the negotiation. Provide precise billing and
maintain customer satisfaction by honoring the negotiated terms. Default to base rates when specific negotiations don't exist.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Rate
Management is enabled.
How: From the list of expression sets, select Negotiable Rating Procedure.

Manage the Lifecycle of Rate Card Entries Effectively

Simplify the transition of rate card entries from the draft to the active or the inactive state. Leverage the flexibility of status-based
management to edit rate card entries in the draft status.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Rate
Management is enabled.
How: When you create a rate card entry for a rate card record, define the status as draft, active, or inactive.

484
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Usage Management (Generally Available)

New and Changed Objects in Rate Management

Do more with these changed Rate Management objects.
Define the status of rate card entries for immutability
Use the new Status field on the RateCardEntry object.
Define the status of the rate card entry related to tier-based rate adjustments
Use the new RateCardEntryStatus field on the RateAdjustmentByTier object.
Define the status of the rate card entry related to attribute-based rate adjustments
Use the new RateCardEntryStatus field on the RateAdjustmentByAttribute object.
Define the type of rate card associated with the rate card entry
Use the new RateCardType field on the RateCardEntry object.
Define the type of rate negotiation applicable to the rate card entry
Use the new RateNegotiation field on the RateCardEntry object.

Consumption Management
Track and manage consumption data, rate consumption accurately, and generate invoice-ready summaries for billing.

485
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Usage Management (Generally Available)

IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance Reporting with On-Demand Summary Generation
Empower account executives to quickly create comprehensive usage summaries that they can use to generate reports and forecast
consumption of a resource. With quick access to consumption records and summaries, executives can swiftly resolve customer
disputes.
Calculate Rates for Usage Summaries on Demand
Quickly resolve customer disputes and generate reports outside the schedule by calculating rates for usage summaries when needed.
The process makes sure that all unrated usage records are considered. You can select specific usage records.
Streamline Billing with Enhanced Liable Summary Generation
Simplify your billing cycle and reduce errors in consumption logging with liable summaries that are autogenerated every month.
The predefined Data Processing Engine (DPE) job effectively logs and rates consumption, converts the consumed units into payable
amounts, and prepares them for invoicing. By optimizing your billing processes, the DPE jobs guarantees precision and expedites
consumption management, which ensures a clear, dispute-free invoicing process.

Enhance Reporting with On-Demand Summary Generation

Empower account executives to quickly create comprehensive usage summaries that they can use to generate reports and forecast
consumption of a resource. With quick access to consumption records and summaries, executives can swiftly resolve customer disputes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Transaction Journals. On the Transaction Journals list view page, select the journals,
and then click Summarize.

Calculate Rates for Usage Summaries on Demand

Quickly resolve customer disputes and generate reports outside the schedule by calculating rates for usage summaries when needed.
The process makes sure that all unrated usage records are considered. You can select specific usage records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: To calculate the rate for specific usage summaries, from the App Launcher, find and select Usage Summaries. On the Usage
Summaries list view page, select the usage summaries, and then click Calculate Rate.

Streamline Billing with Enhanced Liable Summary Generation

Simplify your billing cycle and reduce errors in consumption logging with liable summaries that are autogenerated every month. The
predefined Data Processing Engine (DPE) job effectively logs and rates consumption, converts the consumed units into payable amounts,
and prepares them for invoicing. By optimizing your billing processes, the DPE jobs guarantees precision and expedites consumption
management, which ensures a clear, dispute-free invoicing process.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.

Wallet Management
Wallet management provides an intuitive interface to list, view, and manage the consumption of usage resources.

486
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Usage Management (Generally Available)

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Wallets for Usage Resources
Seamlessly manage wallets for various usage resources’ transactions with Wallet Management. Account executives can manage
credits and consumption, and handle entitlements and transactions, and customers can effectively track and control their service
usage.

Manage Wallets for Usage Resources

Seamlessly manage wallets for various usage resources’ transactions with Wallet Management. Account executives can manage credits
and consumption, and handle entitlements and transactions, and customers can effectively track and control their service usage.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Usage
Management is enabled.
How: To view the list of wallets and their consumption details, go to the Wallet tab on an account page.

New Objects in Usage Management

Do more with these new Usage Management objects.
Store usage entitlements granted with the sellable product
Use the new TransactionUsageEntitlement object.
Store entitlement account details related to the asset that holds the wallet with the granted units
Use the new UsageEntitlementAccount object.
Store usage entitlement details, such as usage consumption and rollovers, for each tenure
Use the new UsageEntitlementEntry object.
Store a usage entitlement granted with the sellable product
Use the new UsageEntitlementBucket object.

487
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Contracts

Aggregate transaction journal entries of a usage entitlement for a specified period

Use the new UsageSummary object.
Aggregate usage summaries to calculate the rate at which the overages are charged
Use the new UsageRatableSummary object.
Calculate overages for the usage entitlement and the amount charged for these overages
Use the new UsageBillingPeriodItem object.
Define a group to classify units of measure
Use the new UnitOfMeasureClass object.
Define an entitlement granted by a provider, such as data storage, computing power, or any other product or service
Use the new UsageResource object.
Define the policy to manage rollovers of a usage grant
Use the new UsageGrantRolloverPolicy object.
Define the policy to manage usage grant refreshes at a specified frequency
Use the new UsageGrantRenewalPolicy object.
Define the details of a grant associated with a resource, product, or service
Use the new ProductUsageGrant object.
Define the aggregation policy for resource consumption before rating the usage resource
Use the new UsageResourceBillingPolicy object.
Associate the grants of a usage resource with a sellable product
Use the new UsageProductGrantBinding object.
Store consumption details of a usage resource
Use the new TransactionJournal object.

Salesforce Contracts
Quickly and easily integrate Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts through a guided setup. Use private and non-private modes during
external reviews, and restart private reviews with new reviewers by using the improved privacy controls. Contract authors can configure
the file attachment formats for check-in documents. Maintain consistent branding by applying custom fonts to generated documents.

IN THIS SECTION:
Use a Guided Setup to Easily Integrate Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts
Find all the necessary steps in one place to get a clear and organized path to complete the integration. Easily configure key components
and ensure an error-free setup with step validation, embedded help content, and walkthrough videos. Simplify the integration,
reduce setup time, address all prerequisites, and minimize troubleshooting. Eliminate the need for rediscovery with prebuilt
configurations. Resolve issues efficiently with the help of clear error messages.
Enhance Privacy with a Discreet External Review Process
Safeguard document integrity and establish full control over your review process with additional privacy controls for external reviews.
Prevent internal comments and user-specific changes from being exposed to third parties. Ensure document integrity by controlling
the access for various stakeholders during different stages of the review. Contract authors can select between private and non-private
modes when they share contract documents for review. In private review, the ownership of the temporary document copy is
transferred to third-party reviewers and the contract author doesn’t have access to this document. Comments and changes from
external reviewers are anonymized. Contract authors can even restart a private review with a revised set of reviewers.

488
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Contracts

Specify Attachment Format During Document Check-In

Contract authors can specify the file format for the document to be attached to a contract document version when they check in
the document. Use the Check In Document File Type setting in Contract Type Config to control whether only .docx or both .pdf and
.docx versions of the document are attached during check-in.
Manage Custom Fonts for Consistent Document Branding
Easily align your documents with your organization’s branding by using proprietary custom fonts. Upload, organize, and synchronize
your font library across Hyperforce servers to ensure consistent branding in generated documents. Maintain a professional and
cohesive brand identity throughout your document generation process.

Use a Guided Setup to Easily Integrate Microsoft 365 with Salesforce Contracts
Find all the necessary steps in one place to get a clear and organized path to complete the integration. Easily configure key components
and ensure an error-free setup with step validation, embedded help content, and walkthrough videos. Simplify the integration, reduce
setup time, address all prerequisites, and minimize troubleshooting. Eliminate the need for rediscovery with prebuilt configurations.
Resolve issues efficiently with the help of clear error messages.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To perform guided setup, the user must be a system administrator or contract administrator.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Microsoft 365 and Azure Integration, and then select it.

Enhance Privacy with a Discreet External Review Process

Safeguard document integrity and establish full control over your review process with additional privacy controls for external reviews.
Prevent internal comments and user-specific changes from being exposed to third parties. Ensure document integrity by controlling
the access for various stakeholders during different stages of the review. Contract authors can select between private and non-private
modes when they share contract documents for review. In private review, the ownership of the temporary document copy is transferred
to third-party reviewers and the contract author doesn’t have access to this document. Comments and changes from external reviewers
are anonymized. Contract authors can even restart a private review with a revised set of reviewers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To initiate external reviews, contract authors need the Microsoft 365 Word User permission set.

Specify Attachment Format During Document Check-In

Contract authors can specify the file format for the document to be attached to a contract document version when they check in the
document. Use the Check In Document File Type setting in Contract Type Config to control whether only .docx or both .pdf and .docx
versions of the document are attached during check-in.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To define the contract type config settings, users need the CLM Admin User permission set.

Manage Custom Fonts for Consistent Document Branding

Easily align your documents with your organization’s branding by using proprietary custom fonts. Upload, organize, and synchronize
your font library across Hyperforce servers to ensure consistent branding in generated documents. Maintain a professional and cohesive
brand identity throughout your document generation process.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To manage fonts, the user must be a Salesforce Admin.

489
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

Process incoming orders depending on their priority and quantity. Assetize and hand over fulfilled products to customers without delay,
independent of other in-progress items. Link, review, and act upon dependent steps that are part of other fulfillment plans. Automate
manual task assignments with custom rules, routing tasks to specific users, queues, or those users with the least workload. Track all
changes in your fulfillment steps from a comprehensive history view. Plan and run fulfillment order line items on a specified future date
and time. Decompose and fulfill ramp deal orders directly with Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator. Decompose products with quantities
that are in decimal format.

IN THIS SECTION:
Prioritize Orders for Processing
Process order submissions based on defined priority levels—High, Default, or Bulk. Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator processes
high-priority transactions with established hourly limits. Manage the default and bulk transactions so as to make the most of system
resources.
Optimize Fulfillment Efficiency with Staged Assetization
You can now assetize fulfilled products individually, without waiting for the entire fulfillment plan to finish. This change facilitates
faster revenue recognition, especially when dealing with partially fulfilled orders.
Manage Dependencies Across Related Fulfillment Plans
Make sure that your fulfillment plans are connected and aligned by enabling fulfillment designers to establish cross-plan dependencies
between steps that should be part of different fulfillment plans. Fulfillment managers can view and easily access dependencies
directly from the plan view. Reduce manual effort and time by using this real-time visibility to act on the steps that require attention.
Define Rules to Assign Manual Tasks
When configuring tasks, fulfillment designers can now use the new task-assignment rules to automatically assign tasks to a specific
user or a queue. They can customize the rules and set conditions and priorities. For example, assign tasks to a resource with the least
current workload or use a specific context for the assignment.
Track Your Fulfillment Step Changes
Gain a clear understanding of the progress and status of each step, improving your ability to manage and optimize the fulfillment
process. The step details page now shows the activity history.
Configure Future Dated Steps
Fulfillment designers can now configure steps to execute at a future date and time. They can also set intervals between the start
date of the order line items and the execution time of previous steps.
Decompose Orders with Decimal Quantities
Generate fulfillment order line items with decimal precision. Decompose commercial products into technical products even when
the quantity values are in the decimal format.
Fulfill Ramp Deal Orders
Decompose orders containing ramp deals into fulfillment lines and orchestrate the orders directly with Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
To ensure easy data management, fulfillment assets now stay synchronized with the asset state periods of their related assets.
New and Changed Objects in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator
Do more with these new and changed Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator objects.

Prioritize Orders for Processing

Process order submissions based on defined priority levels—High, Default, or Bulk. Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator processes high-priority
transactions with established hourly limits. Manage the default and bulk transactions so as to make the most of system resources.

490
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.

Optimize Fulfillment Efficiency with Staged Assetization

You can now assetize fulfilled products individually, without waiting for the entire fulfillment plan to finish. This change facilitates faster
revenue recognition, especially when dealing with partially fulfilled orders.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Fulfillment Workspaces and add a fulfillment step. Select Staged Assetize as the step
type to assetize the entire bundle.

Manage Dependencies Across Related Fulfillment Plans

Make sure that your fulfillment plans are connected and aligned by enabling fulfillment designers to establish cross-plan dependencies
between steps that should be part of different fulfillment plans. Fulfillment managers can view and easily access dependencies directly
from the plan view. Reduce manual effort and time by using this real-time visibility to act on the steps that require attention.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.
How: In the Fulfillment Workspace, connect step definitions between plans by using the Cross Plan scope. At runtime, click the View
External Dependencies icon on a step in the fulfillment plan.

Define Rules to Assign Manual Tasks

When configuring tasks, fulfillment designers can now use the new task-assignment rules to automatically assign tasks to a specific user
or a queue. They can customize the rules and set conditions and priorities. For example, assign tasks to a resource with the least current
workload or use a specific context for the assignment.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.
How: Create a fulfillment task assignment rule and associate it with a manual fulfillment step. The rule automatically assigns the step
to a user based on the assignment source, destination, priority, and any defined condition.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manual Task Fulfillment Step(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Track Your Fulfillment Step Changes

Gain a clear understanding of the progress and status of each step, improving your ability to manage and optimize the fulfillment process.
The step details page now shows the activity history.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.

Configure Future Dated Steps

Fulfillment designers can now configure steps to execute at a future date and time. They can also set intervals between the start date
of the order line items and the execution time of previous steps.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.

491
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

How: From the App Launcher, find and select Fulfillment Workspaces and add a fullfillment step. When you add the Fulfillment Step
Definition, from the Execute On field, select either Order Line Start Date or Previous Steps Execution Date and then enter a delay
unit value.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Dependencies Between Fulfillment Steps(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Decompose Orders with Decimal Quantities

Generate fulfillment order line items with decimal precision. Decompose commercial products into technical products even when the
quantity values are in the decimal format.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.

Fulfill Ramp Deal Orders

Decompose orders containing ramp deals into fulfillment lines and orchestrate the orders directly with Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
To ensure easy data management, fulfillment assets now stay synchronized with the asset state periods of their related assets.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Revenue Cloud.

New and Changed Objects in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

Do more with these new and changed Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator objects.
Perform a set of actions to assign a manual task to an assignee
Use the new FulfillmentTaskAssignmentRule object.
Specify the priority of the fulfillment plan execution
Use the new Priority field on the FulfillmentPlan object.
Specify when to execute the fulfillment step
Use the new ExecuteBasedOn field on the FulfillmentStepDefinition and FulfillmentStep objects.
Specify the unit for the delay of the fulfillment step
Use the new DelayUnit field on the FulfillmentStepDefinition and FulfillmentStep objects.
Specify the user or queue that's assigned to the manual task
Use the new AssignedTo field on the FulfillmentStep object.
Specify the unit of measure for the asset quantity
Use the new UnitOfMeasure field on the FulfillmentAsset and FulfillmentOrderLineItem objects.
Specify the delay value to execute the fulfillment step
Use the new DelayValue field on the FulfillmentStepDefinition and FulfillmentStep objects.
Specify whether the rule applies to all fulfillment requests or only to specific ones
Use the new RuleEnforcement field on the ProductDecompEnrichmentRule object.
Identifies the group of sales transactions that require synchronization before processing
Use the new GroupIdentifier field on the SalesTransactionFulfillReq object.
Identifies the ramp segment associated with the asset state period
Use the new SegmentIdentifier field on the AssetFulfillmentDecomp object.

492
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Billing
Enhance billing flexibility and simplify accounting with our advanced invoicing solutions. Use the enhanced invoice scheduler for instant
one-time invoicing, automatic deactivation, multi-currency support, and effortless editing of draft or inactive schedules. Suspend billing
for specific accounts or schedule groups as needed. Preview upcoming invoices and adjust billing parameters to fit your business
requirements. Generate invoices for amendments, cancellations, or early renewals of evergreen subscriptions.

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Bulk Invoicing Efficiently with the New Invoice Scheduler Features
Reduce manual effort and respond efficiently to changing business needs with instant one-time invoicing, automatic deactivation,
multicurrency selection, and the easy edit feature for draft or inactive schedulers.
Suspend and Resume Billing for Accounts and Billing Schedule Groups
Tackle billing errors, disputes, and any payment disruptions by pausing or suspending billing for customer accounts or for a set of
billing schedule groups. Resume billing after the suspension period, without restarting the entire billing cycle.
Preview Upcoming Invoices to Get Billing Estimates
Reduce billing disputes and increase billing transparency with your customers with invoice previews. Use the Invoice Preview API
to generate previews for the next two invoices of any billing transaction, without having to store the invoicing data in Salesforce.
Share the invoice previews with your customers so that they assess the estimated charges of orders, finalize order details, and get
purchase order approvals.
Update Billing Parameters Any Time During the Customer Lifecycle
Get increased flexibility for parameters that impact billing transactions by changing them at any time for any asset based on your
needs. Edit the billing day of the month, the override next billing date, and the tax treatment of billing schedule groups.
Generate Invoices on Demand for Accounts and Orders
Generate invoices for any account or activated orders when your customers demand them, after milestone completions, or as soon
as a product or service is delivered. Save time by generating these invoices with a few clicks, without having to configure an invoice
run.
Create Invoices from Internal or External Data
Use the Invoice Ingestion API to import invoices from an external system or to create invoices by providing the required details, and
skip the intermediate step of creating billing schedules. Provide details from any standard or custom Salesforce object record, or an
external system. Invoice records, Invoice Line records, and Invoice Line Tax records are created based on the provided details.
Streamline Invoice Due Dates with End-of-Month Payment Terms
Configure end-of-month payment terms to define a uniform invoice due date for products and services sold on a monthly basis. Set
invoice due dates to be at the end of the month in which the invoice is posted or for a specific period after the end of the month.
Accurately Bill Amended or Canceled Evergreen Subscriptions
Flexibly handle various business scenarios for evergreen subscriptions by billing them accurately when they’re amended or canceled
on any date. When your customers cancel evergreen subscriptions, bill the appropriate amount based on the end date of the
subscription. When your customers amend evergreen subscription, bill the correct amount based on the type and date of the
amendment.
Align Billing Subscriptions with Early Renewal
Simplify the billing process for customers who renew their subscriptions before the current one expires. Enhance operational efficiency
and customer satisfaction by automatically generating invoices that reflect the early renewal dates and adjusted pricing, ensuring
accurate billing for all overlapping and new renewal periods.

493
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Make Billing for Rampable Products More Efficient

Streamline the billing process for rampable products by generating invoices that align with the evolving pricing structure of ramped
contracts. Businesses can efficiently manage billing for contracts with extended terms, support larger orders and longer agreement
periods, while ensuring predictable cash flow.
Simplify Financial Accounting by Capturing Transaction Amounts in Corporate Currency
Easily manage multiple currencies for billing transactions by viewing the transaction amounts not only in the transactional currency
but also in your corporate currency. All the transaction amounts in corporate currency are used for accounting, thus simplifying your
accounting process.
New and Changed Objects for Billing
Store and access more data with these new and changed Billing objects.
New Platform Events for Billing
Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new Billing platform events.
Changed Metadata Types
Learn more about the changed metadata types in Billing.
Connect REST APIs
Use Billing Connect REST APIs to manage billing for accounts and billing schedule groups, or to preview invoices for upcoming billing
transactions.

Manage Bulk Invoicing Efficiently with the New Invoice Scheduler Features
Reduce manual effort and respond efficiently to changing business needs with instant one-time invoicing, automatic deactivation,
multicurrency selection, and the easy edit feature for draft or inactive schedulers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To schedule invoice runs, you need the Billing Admin or Billing Operations User permission set.
Why: The invoice run scheduler includes these new features.
• Ad Hoc Invoicing: With the Run Now feature, initiate a one-time invoice run instantly and address urgent invoicing needs.
• Automatic Scheduler Deactivation: Use Stop Scheduler Recurrence to set an end date for invoice schedulers.
• Multicurrency Selection: Select multiple currencies simultaneously to handle invoicing spanning across various regions and
locations.
• Invoice Editing: Use the Edit option to modify draft or inactive invoice schedulers.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Billing Batch Scheduler. To modify existing drafts or inactive invoice schedulers, edit
the invoice schedulers and add the new features. You can also create invoice schedulers that include the new features.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Generate Invoices Automatically Based on Billing Schedules (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Suspend and Resume Billing for Accounts and Billing Schedule Groups
Tackle billing errors, disputes, and any payment disruptions by pausing or suspending billing for customer accounts or for a set of billing
schedule groups. Resume billing after the suspension period, without restarting the entire billing cycle.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.

494
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Who: To suspend and resume billing, you need the Billing Admin permission set, or the Billing Operations User permission set, or the
Billing Customer Service User permission set.
How: From the quick actions menu of the Account record or the Billing Schedule Group record that you want to suspend and resume
billing for, click Suspend Billing or Resume Billing, or use the Suspend and Resume Billing APIs.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Suspend and Resume Billing (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Preview Upcoming Invoices to Get Billing Estimates

Reduce billing disputes and increase billing transparency with your customers with invoice previews. Use the Invoice Preview API to
generate previews for the next two invoices of any billing transaction, without having to store the invoicing data in Salesforce. Share
the invoice previews with your customers so that they assess the estimated charges of orders, finalize order details, and get purchase
order approvals.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To use the Invoice Preview API, you need the Billing Operations User permission set or the Billing Customer Service User permission
set.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Generate Invoice Previews (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Update Billing Parameters Any Time During the Customer Lifecycle

Get increased flexibility for parameters that impact billing transactions by changing them at any time for any asset based on your needs.
Edit the billing day of the month, the override next billing date, and the tax treatment of billing schedule groups.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.

495
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Who: To update the billing parameters, you need the Billing Admin permission set or the Billing Operations User permission set.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Update Billing Schedule Groups (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Generate Invoices on Demand for Accounts and Orders

Generate invoices for any account or activated orders when your customers demand them, after milestone completions, or as soon as
a product or service is delivered. Save time by generating these invoices with a few clicks, without having to configure an invoice run.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To generate invoices for accounts or orders, you need the Billing Operations User permission set or the Billing Customer Service
User permission set.
How: From the quick actions menu on an Account or Order record, click Generate Invoices. You receive a notification when the invoices
are generated.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Generate Invoices for Accounts or Orders (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Create Invoices from Internal or External Data

Use the Invoice Ingestion API to import invoices from an external system or to create invoices by providing the required details, and skip
the intermediate step of creating billing schedules. Provide details from any standard or custom Salesforce object record, or an external
system. Invoice records, Invoice Line records, and Invoice Line Tax records are created based on the provided details.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.

496
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Who: To use the Invoice Ingestion API, you need the Billing Operations User permission set.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Standalone Invoices or Import External Invoices (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline Invoice Due Dates with End-of-Month Payment Terms

Configure end-of-month payment terms to define a uniform invoice due date for products and services sold on a monthly basis. Set
invoice due dates to be at the end of the month in which the invoice is posted or for a specific period after the end of the month.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To create payment terms and payment term items, you need the Billing Operations User permission set.
How: Create a payment term and then create a related payment term item with Derive End of Month and Add Period as the type.
When invoices are generated for billing schedules, payment terms specified for the orders related to the billing schedules are used to
calculate the invoice due date.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Payment Term Items (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Accurately Bill Amended or Canceled Evergreen Subscriptions

Flexibly handle various business scenarios for evergreen subscriptions by billing them accurately when they’re amended or canceled
on any date. When your customers cancel evergreen subscriptions, bill the appropriate amount based on the end date of the subscription.
When your customers amend evergreen subscription, bill the correct amount based on the type and date of the amendment.

497
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To generate invoices, you need the Billing Admin permission set or the Billing Operations User permission set.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Billing Schedule Groups (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Align Billing Subscriptions with Early Renewal

Simplify the billing process for customers who renew their subscriptions before the current one expires. Enhance operational efficiency
and customer satisfaction by automatically generating invoices that reflect the early renewal dates and adjusted pricing, ensuring
accurate billing for all overlapping and new renewal periods.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To create invoices, you need the Billing Admin or the Billing Operations User permission set.
How: To invoice for products with early renewals, from the App Launcher, find and select Billing Batch Schedulers. You can then
generate invoices by using the New Invoice Scheduler option.

Make Billing for Rampable Products More Efficient

Streamline the billing process for rampable products by generating invoices that align with the evolving pricing structure of ramped
contracts. Businesses can efficiently manage billing for contracts with extended terms, support larger orders and longer agreement
periods, while ensuring predictable cash flow.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To create invoices, you need the Billing Admin or the Billing Operations User permission set.
How: To generate invoices for ramp deal products, from the App Launcher, find and select Billing Batch Schedulers. You can then
generate invoices for billing schedules by using the New Invoice Scheduler option.

Simplify Financial Accounting by Capturing Transaction Amounts in Corporate Currency

Easily manage multiple currencies for billing transactions by viewing the transaction amounts not only in the transactional currency but
also in your corporate currency. All the transaction amounts in corporate currency are used for accounting, thus simplifying your
accounting process.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Revenue Cloud where Billing
is enabled.
Who: To turn on Store Transaction Amounts in Corporate Currency, you need the Billing Admin permission set.
How: From the Billing Settings page in Setup, turn on Store Transaction Amounts in Corporate Currency.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Capture Transaction Amounts in Corporate Currency (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

498
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

New and Changed Objects for Billing

Store and access more data with these new and changed Billing objects.

New Objects
Get information about the billing accounts related to accounts
Use the new AccountBillingAccount object.
Get information about the suspension dates and resumption dates of billing accounts
Use the new BillingAccount object.

Changed Objects
Indicate whether the invoice scheduler must start the run immediately or not
Use the new ShouldStartRunImmediately field on the existing BillingBatchScheduler object.
Specify the units used to measure the overage
Use the new UnitOfMeasure field on the existing BillingPeriodItem object.
Specify the unit of measure for a billing schedule
Use the new UnitOfMeasureId field on the existing BillingSchedule object.
Specify the date when billing for the asset related to the billing schedule group is resumed
Use the new BillingResumptionDate field on the existing BillingScheduleGroup object.
Specify the date when billing for the asset related to the billing schedule group is suspended
Use the new BillingSuspensionDate field on the existing BillingScheduleGroup object.
Override the next billing dates of all the billing schedules related to a billing schedule group
Use the new NextBillingDateOverride field on the existing BillingScheduleGroup object.
Stores a credit memo’s sum of the total amount with tax in corporate currency
Use the new CorpCrcyCnvTotAmtWithTax field on the existing CreditMemo object.
Stores the date on which a credit memo’s total amount with tax is converted into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnDate field on the existing CreditMemo object.
Specify the exchange rate that’s used to convert a credit memo’s total amount with tax into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnRate field on the existing CreditMemo object.
Stores the currency ISO code of the corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyIsoCode field on the existing CreditMemo and CreditMemoLine objects.
Stores a credit memo line’s charge amount in corporate currency
Use the new CorpCurrencyCnvChargeAmt field on the existing CreditMemoLine object.
Stores a credit memo line’s total amount with tax in corporate currency
Use the new CorpCurrencyCnvTotalTaxAmt field on the existing CreditMemoLine object.
Stores the date on which a credit memo line’s amounts are converted into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnDate field on the existing CreditMemoLine object.
Specify the exchange rate that’s used to convert a credit memo line's amounts into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnRate field on the existing CreditMemoLine object.
Stores the currency ISO code of the corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyIsoCode field on the existing CreditMemoLine object.

499
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Stores a credit memo line tax’s total tax amount in corporate currency
Use the new CorpCurrCnvTaxAmount field on the existing CreditMemoLineTax object.
Stores the date on which a credit memo line tax’s total tax amount is converted into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnDate field on the existing CreditMemoLineTax object.
Specify the exchange rate that’s used to convert credit memo line tax’s total tax amount into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnRate field on the existing CreditMemoLineTax object.
Stores the currency ISO code of the corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyIsoCode field on the existing CreditMemoLineTax object.
Stores the date on which an invoice’s total amount with tax was converted into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnDate field on the existing Invoice object.
Specify the exchange rate that’s used to convert an invoice’s total amount with tax into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnRate field on the existing Invoice object.
Stores the currency ISO code of the corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyIsoCode field on the existing Invoice object.
Indicates whether an invoice is generated from a billing transaction directly or from a billing schedule group
Use the new IsBillingScheduleGroupSkipped field on the existing Invoice object.
Indicates the unique identifier of an externally ingested invoice that’s used to ensure that duplicate invoices aren't inserted
Use the new UniqueIdentifier field on the existing Invoice object.
Indicates the status subtype of the invoice batch run that corresponds to the status of the invoice batch run
Use the new StatusSubtype field on the existing InvoiceBatchRun object.
Specify whether the invoice date is derived from the run date or target date
Use the new IsInvoiceDateFromRunDate field on the existing InvoiceBatchRunCriteria object.
Stores an invoice line’s charge amount in corporate currency
Use the new CorpCurrencyCnvChargeAmt field on the existing InvoiceLine object.
Stores an invoice line’s total tax amount in corporate currency
Use the new CorpCurrencyCnvTotalTaxAmt field on the existing InvoiceLine object.
Stores the date on which an invoice line’s amounts are converted into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnDate field on the existing InvoiceLine object.
Specify the exchange rate that’s used to convert an invoice line’s amounts into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnRate field on the existing InvoiceLine object.
Stores the currency ISO code of the corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyIsoCode field on the existing InvoiceLine object.
Specify the unit of measure of the product associated with the invoice line
Use the new UnitOfMeasure field on the existing InvoiceLine object.
Stores the total tax amount of an invoice line tax in corporate currency
Use the new CorpCrcyCnvTaxAmount field on the existing InvoiceLineTax object.
Stores the date on which an invoice line tax’s amounts are converted into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnDate field on the existing InvoiceLineTax object.
Specify the exchange rate that’s used to convert an invoice line tax’s amounts into corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyCvsnRate field on the existing InvoiceLineTax object.
Stores the currency ISO code of the corporate currency
Use the new CorporateCurrencyIsoCode field on the existing InvoiceLineTax object.

500
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

Specifies the identifier of the primary record associated with the error log
Use the new PrimaryTextRecord field on the existing RevenueTransactionErrorLog object.
REMOVED: The Product2Id field on the InvoiceLineTax object is removed from API version 63.0 and later
Instead, use the Product2Id field on the InvoiceLine object.
REMOVED: The Quantity field on the InvoiceLineTax object is removed from API version 63.0 and later
Instead, use the Quantity field on the InvoiceLine object.
REMOVED: The UnitPrice field on the InvoiceLineTax object is removed from API version 63.0 and later
Instead, use the UnitPrice field on the InvoiceLine object.
REMOVED: The Product2Id field on the CreditMemoLineTax object is removed from API version 63.0 and later
Instead, use the Product2Id field on the CreditMemoLine object.

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Billing Standard Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New Platform Events for Billing

Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new Billing platform events.
Notify subscribers when the process of creating billing schedule from order items is complete
Subscribe to the new BillingScheduleCreatedEvent platform event to receive notifications related to the process completion for the
/commerce/invoicing/billing-schedules/actions/create request.
Notify subscribers about the errors that occurred when creating billing scheduling from order items
Subscribe to the new BillSchdCreatedEventDetail platform event to receive notifications related to errors.

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Billing Platform Events (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Changed Metadata Types

Learn more about the changed metadata types in Billing.

Metadata Type
Enable conversion of amounts of the Invoice, Invoice Line, Credit Memo, and Credit Memo Line records to your corporate
currency
Use the new enableTrxnAmountsStorageInCorpCurrency field on the existing BillingSettings metadata type.

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: BillingSettings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Connect REST APIs

Use Billing Connect REST APIs to manage billing for accounts and billing schedule groups, or to preview invoices for upcoming billing
transactions.

501
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Billing

IN THIS SECTION:
New Connect REST API Resources
Learn more about the new resources available with Billing.
Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies
This request body has changes.

New Connect REST API Resources

Learn more about the new resources available with Billing.
Suspend billing for billing schedule groups or an account for a predefined period
Make a POST request to the /commerce/invoicing/actions/suspend-billing resource.
New request body: Suspend Billing Input
New response body: Suspend Resume Billing
Resume billing for billing schedule groups or an account
Make a POST request to the /commerce/invoicing/actions/resume-billing resource.
New request body: Resume Billing Input
New response body: Suspend Resume Billing
Generate preview invoices for a billing transaction
Make a POST request to the /commerce/invoicing/invoices/collection/actions/preview resource.
New request body: Invoice Preview Input
New response body: Invoice Preview
Calculate estimated tax for invoices
Make a POST request to the
/commerce/invoicing/invoices/collection/actions/calculate-estimated-tax resource.
New request body: Invoice Estimated Tax Calculation Input

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Cloud Developer Guide: Billing Business APIs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies

This request body has changes.
Invoice Input
This request body has these new properties.
• accountId—ID of the account record to create the invoices for
• billingTransactionId—ID of the billing transaction record, which is the order ID, to create the invoices for

502
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales

Sales
Boost your sales teams’ results with new features across Sales Cloud. Help your account teams collaborate, strategize, and succeed with
more efficiency and accountability with enhancements to Account Plans. Manually upload video recordings to Einstein Conversation
Insights to get key insights and action items for meetings from external sources. Forecast your consumption-based business. Customize
the mobile app with Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience. And plan quotas that reflect ramp-up time and seasonal sales patterns
in Quota Planning.

IN THIS SECTION:
Agentforce for Sales
Scale your sales team by using sales agents.
Sales Cloud Go
See feature-specific permission sets or permission set groups in context during setup in Sales Cloud Go. Monitor permission set
license assignments and active users.
Sales Fundamentals
Help your account teams collaborate, strategize, and succeed with more efficiency and accountability with Account Plan enhancements.
Einstein Conversation Insights
Einstein Conversation Insights (ECI) users can upload previously recorded meetings to ECI to identify coachable moments for meetings
from external sources. A few generative AI features (Call Summaries, Call Explorer, and Generative Conversation Insights) are now
supported in 37 languages. And Explore Conversation is supported in Flow as a standard action.
Sales Engagement
Let Prospecting Center find your most qualified customer, using trusted data and AI. Prospecting Center analyzes your CRM and
external data and identifies your most promising opportunities with the highest probability of closing, so you know which deals to
prioritize. With the power of Data Cloud, you can analyze your accounts, contacts, and leads to identify your most accurate, data-driven
prospects.
Salesforce Forecasting
Collaborative Forecasts is now called Pipeline Forecasting. Forecast managers can now apply their judgment to a direct subordinate’s
opportunity that’s split across multiple owners. Your sales team can accurately forecast consumption-based businesses.
Pipeline Inspection
Get a more consistent user experience in Pipeline Inspection list views. Close Date Predictions, a feature of Einstein Deal Insights in
Pipeline Inspection, is being retired as of Spring ’25.
Sales Programs, Partner Tracks, and In-App Guidance
Enhance your sales approach with data-driven insights and take complete control of your Enablement settings. Quickly deploy
in-app guidance into your Salesforce orgs.
Sales Performance Management
Plan quotas that account for ramp-up of new reps and seasonal sales patterns in Quota Planning. Publish quota plans to territory-based
forecast types within Pipeline Forecasting. Navigate with ease among various sales planning disciplines. Simplify activity and qualified
mileage tracking in timesheets for reps who rely on Salesforce Maps. And set expectations with your reps for working in the now
standard, enhanced user experience within Salesforce Maps.
Email, Calendar, and Integrations
Prepare for service account OAuth 2.0 retirement by upgrading to org-level OAuth 2.0 authentication. If you use Salesforce Inbox,
allowlist *.svc.sfdcfc.net. And Salesforce for Outlook retires in December 2027.

503
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Sales

Partner Relationship Management

Maximize channel sales, collaborate on shared business, and maintain trusted relationships with more efficient tools in your partner
experience.
Sales Cloud Everywhere
We streamlined navigation by moving top object shortcuts to a dedicated page and adding the recent records component.
Sales Cloud on Mobile
Prepare for meetings in Seller-Focused Mobile Experience. Customize the app with Mobile Bulder for Seller-Focused Experience
(Beta).
Other Changes in the Sales Cloud
Anticipate other changes that can affect your sales teams.

Agentforce for Sales

Scale your sales team by using sales agents.

IN THIS SECTION:
Agentforce Sales Coach
Help sales reps grow in their role and close more deals with Agentforce Sales Coach.
Scale Your Sales Funnel with Agentforce SDR
Agentforce SDR (Sales Development Rep) helps sales teams expand their top-of-funnel efforts with an AI agent, qualifying more
leads and giving sales reps more time to nurture relationships. The SDR agent sends initial emails, nudges, and responses to interested
replies by answering questions, connecting leads to sales reps, and offering to book a meeting.
Monitor Agentforce Sales Coach and SDR Usage with Digital Wallet
You can now monitor your Sales Coach Agent and Agentforce SDR (Sales Development Rep) usage in Digital Wallet, an account
management tool for consumption-based features. On the Digital Wallet homepage, the Conversations consumption card summarizes
the combined usage of Sales Coach Agent and Agentforce SDR along with ASA Messaging (formerly Agentforce Service Agent -
Inbound). Additionally, Digital Wallet’s Consumption Insights page offers a breakdown of your combined Agentforce usage by time
period to help you detect trends over time.

Agentforce Sales Coach

Help sales reps grow in their role and close more deals with Agentforce Sales Coach.

IN THIS SECTION:
Coach Sales Reps at Scale with Agentforce Sales Coach
Provide personalized coaching at scale to enhance sales rep’s ability to handle challenging conversations, improve performance,
and increase ROI. Sales Coach agent, an Agentforce agent, analyzes sales pitches and role play sessions. It then delivers tailored
feedback by using AI and CRM data to help sales reps advance deals more effectively.
Enhance Agentforce Sales Coach Responses with a Data Library
Give Agentforce Sales Coach access to a collection of files, knowledge articles, and other information via a Data Library. Data Libraries
allow Agentforce Sales Coach to generate more personalized and reliable responses based on trusted data when conducting role
play sessions and generating feedback for sales reps.

504
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Sales

Coach Sales Reps at Scale with Agentforce Sales Coach

Provide personalized coaching at scale to enhance sales rep’s ability to handle challenging conversations, improve performance, and
increase ROI. Sales Coach agent, an Agentforce agent, analyzes sales pitches and role play sessions. It then delivers tailored feedback by
using AI and CRM data to help sales reps advance deals more effectively.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Expereince in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Agentforce Sales Coach
add-on.
When: This change is available starting in late October.
How: Sales Coach agent is available on Opportunity pages via the new Agentforce Sales Coach Lightning page component.

For opportunities in the Qualification or Needs Analysis stages, sales reps practice a sales pitch. After the sales pitch is completed, Sales
Coach agent analyzes the transcript and provides feedback.
For opportunities in the Proposal/Pricing Quote or Negotiation/Review stages, sales reps engage in a role-play session with Sales Coach
agent as the customer. After the role-play, Sales Coach agent provides personalized feedback and outlines next steps for improvement.

505
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Sales

To generate accurate, actionable, and personalized coaching, Sales Coach agent includes these new Agent topics.
• Sales Coach Agent: Opportunity Coaching
• Sales Coach Agent: Negotiation/Review Role-Play
• Sales Coach Agent: Proposal/Pricing Quote Role-Play
Sales Coach agent includes a new prompt template type called Sales Pitch Feedback.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Agentforce Sales Coach (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance Agentforce Sales Coach Responses with a Data Library

Give Agentforce Sales Coach access to a collection of files, knowledge articles, and other information via a Data Library. Data Libraries
allow Agentforce Sales Coach to generate more personalized and reliable responses based on trusted data when conducting role play
sessions and generating feedback for sales reps.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Agentforce Sales Coach
add on.
When: This change is available starting on December 17, 2024.
How: From Agent Builder setup, in the Select Data Step.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Data Library (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Agentforce Sales Coach (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Scale Your Sales Funnel with Agentforce SDR

Agentforce SDR (Sales Development Rep) helps sales teams expand their top-of-funnel efforts with an AI agent, qualifying more leads
and giving sales reps more time to nurture relationships. The SDR agent sends initial emails, nudges, and responses to interested replies
by answering questions, connecting leads to sales reps, and offering to book a meeting.

506
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Sales

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Agentforce SDR add-on.
Setup for agents is available on the desktop site.
When: This change is available beginning October, 2024.
Why: The SDR agent can work around the clock, initiating contact with leads on a schedule you set. The agent generates a customized
initial email based on the lead record details. If a lead doesn’t reply, the agent sends a follow-up. When a lead replies, the agent detects
whether the lead is interested, sends a response containing a meeting link from the lead owner’s calendar, and copies the sales rep.
When leads respond with a question, the agent can provide specific answers generated from product and service literature you upload
in Agent Builder. Reps can also see past and upcoming emails in the Activity Timeline of the lead.
Agentforce SDR requires these additional Sales Cloud features to perform its work.
• Sales Engagement: engages leads with planned prospect outreach cadences
• Einstein Activity Capture: keeps data between Salesforce and the agent’s email client and calendar applications up to date
• Einstein Copilot: The AI agents platform chooses which actions to take and drafts emails
• Einstein Generative AI: drafts emails and creates summaries
• Salesforce Inbox: provides Outlook and Gmail integration and performs email tasks
• Automated Actions: adds, removes, and manages prospects in outreach cadences
• Data Cloud: provides auditing, feedback, the Einstein Trust Layer, and analytics
Agentforce SDR has access to Digital Wallet, a free Salesforce account management tool that offers near real-time consumption data
for enabled products across your active contracts. Access Digital Wallet to track your usage. To learn more, see About Digital Wallet in
Salesforce Help
How: When you turn on Agentforce SDR, the guided setup takes you through enabling the required related features, creating a user
record for the agent, and configuring agent settings in Agent Builder.

507
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Sales

To let your agent generate specific and accurate replies to prospect questions about your company's products or services, you can upload
text, HTML, or PDF files such as product descriptions, price sheets, white papers, etc.

508
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Sales

You can assign leads to the agent with rules set in the Agent Builder, automated actions, or manually.

509
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Sales

Monitor Agentforce Sales Coach and SDR Usage with Digital Wallet
You can now monitor your Sales Coach Agent and Agentforce SDR (Sales Development Rep) usage in Digital Wallet, an account
management tool for consumption-based features. On the Digital Wallet homepage, the Conversations consumption card summarizes
the combined usage of Sales Coach Agent and Agentforce SDR along with ASA Messaging (formerly Agentforce Service Agent - Inbound).
Additionally, Digital Wallet’s Consumption Insights page offers a breakdown of your combined Agentforce usage by time period to help
you detect trends over time.
Where: Digital Wallet is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Agentforce SDR is available in Lightning
Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Setup for agents is available on the desktop site. Sales Coach is available
in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

510
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Cloud Go

Who: Digital Wallet is available to users with the View Consumption user permission or Your Account access. Agentforce SDR is available
with the Agentforce for Sales add-on. Sales Coach is available to users with the Agentforce for Sales add-on.
How: To get started with Digital Wallet, see Access Digital Wallet. To get started with Agentforce SDR, see Set Up Agentforce SDR. To
get started with Agentforce Sales Coach, see Setting Up Agentforce Sales Coach.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sales Cloud Agents
Salesforce Help: About Digital Wallet

Sales Cloud Go
See feature-specific permission sets or permission set groups in context during setup in Sales Cloud Go. Monitor permission set license
assignments and active users.

IN THIS SECTION:
View and Assign Permission Sets and Monitor Usage in Sales Cloud Go
With Sales Cloud Go, we show you the exact permission sets and permission set groups for your Sales Cloud feature. Assign access
to your users in Sales Cloud Go while setting up a feature. Previously, you searched through long lists to find the permission sets and
permission set groups that you needed. You can easily monitor permission set licenses for each feature, tracking both assigned and
actively used licenses. You also get options for customizing Lightning pages and email panes.

View and Assign Permission Sets and Monitor Usage in Sales Cloud Go
With Sales Cloud Go, we show you the exact permission sets and permission set groups for your Sales Cloud feature. Assign access to
your users in Sales Cloud Go while setting up a feature. Previously, you searched through long lists to find the permission sets and
permission set groups that you needed. You can easily monitor permission set licenses for each feature, tracking both assigned and
actively used licenses. You also get options for customizing Lightning pages and email panes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Pro Suite, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Einstein 1 Sales
Edition editions.
Who: To view Sales Cloud Go, users must have the View Setup and Configuration user permission. To turn on features, users must have
the Customize Application user permission.
How: From the gear menu ( ), select Sales Setup, or access Sales Cloud Go from Sales Setup in the Setup Menu. Find the feature that
you want to turn on. On the feature’s page, click Manage Permissions to see the permission sets and permission set groups for the
feature and assign them to your users.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Discover and Set Up Sales Cloud Features With Sales Cloud Go (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sales Fundamentals
Help your account teams collaborate, strategize, and succeed with more efficiency and accountability with Account Plan enhancements.

511
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Fundamentals

IN THIS SECTION:
Accounts
Help your account teams collaborate, strategize, and succeed with more efficiency and accountability. Create more specific, measurable
goals for your long-term account strategy, and find new upsell and cross-sell opportunities more easily. Quickly find all the tasks and
events that your team has planned for achieving your account growth objectives.
Activities
Take advantage of the increased limit of custom fields for activities.

Accounts
Help your account teams collaborate, strategize, and succeed with more efficiency and accountability. Create more specific, measurable
goals for your long-term account strategy, and find new upsell and cross-sell opportunities more easily. Quickly find all the tasks and
events that your team has planned for achieving your account growth objectives.

IN THIS SECTION:
Track Progress Toward Sales Account Plan Objectives More Easily
Gain immediate insight into the progress your teams make toward achieving your sales account plan’s measurable objectives. Define
the objects, fields, and specific conditions that satisfy your goals for long-term account growth, and select the specific records that
you want to track activity on. For example, set a goal for your team to achieve a certain dollar amount from closing a specific set of
opportunities. Progress is calculated and updated automatically. Standardize account plan tracking across your enterprise by reusing
calculation definitions across all your accounts, specifying different target values for different objectives.
Delivered Idea: Coordinate Your Sales Team’s Activities with More Transparency
Provide accountability and alignment on your sales account team members’ activities. Create sales action plans that specify the tasks
and events that you want users to achieve. Associate sales action plans with accounts, cases, campaigns, contacts, contracts, leads,
and opportunities. If you use sales account plans, collaborate on the work needed to achieve your measurable goals for long-term
account growth by adding sales action plans to each account plan objective’s Strategic Tracker. We delivered this feature thanks to
your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Discover Untapped Selling Opportunities
Sales teams can use the Account Plan Whitespace Map component to identify potential upsell or cross-sell opportunities more easily.
Strategically plan for your next deal by reviewing top-selling products from closed-won opportunities, filtering by amount, count,
or quantity, and comparing with related accounts in the account hierarchy.

Track Progress Toward Sales Account Plan Objectives More Easily

Gain immediate insight into the progress your teams make toward achieving your sales account plan’s measurable objectives. Define
the objects, fields, and specific conditions that satisfy your goals for long-term account growth, and select the specific records that you
want to track activity on. For example, set a goal for your team to achieve a certain dollar amount from closing a specific set of opportunities.
Progress is calculated and updated automatically. Standardize account plan tracking across your enterprise by reusing calculation
definitions across all your accounts, specifying different target values for different objectives.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions and in Einstein 1 Sales Edition
with Sales Cloud.
Why: Previously, your sales team could only manually edit an objective’s current value. With this enhancement, your sales team has
more flexibility to specify and track different types of qualitative and quantitative objectives and include related records.
How: From the Sales Account Plans page in Setup, create and activate the calculation definitions that you want to make available to
your sales teams. Two prebuilt calculation definitions are available by default.

512
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Fundamentals

As a Sales user, when you add an objective to a sales account plan, select a calculation definition (1), specify a target value (2), and select
related campaigns, cases, contacts, or opportunities (3).

As sales team members complete activity that satisfies the calculation definition’s criteria, the objective’s current value is updated. The
current value is updated daily based on activity on the selected records. If users select a different calculation definition or select different
records, the current value is updated immediately.
Calculation definitions are optional. You can still create objective measures that require manual progress updates.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Turn on Sales Account Plans (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Sales Account Plan Objectives, Measures, and Calculation Definitions (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Coordinate Your Sales Team’s Activities with More Transparency

Provide accountability and alignment on your sales account team members’ activities. Create sales action plans that specify the tasks
and events that you want users to achieve. Associate sales action plans with accounts, cases, campaigns, contacts, contracts, leads, and
opportunities. If you use sales account plans, collaborate on the work needed to achieve your measurable goals for long-term account
growth by adding sales action plans to each account plan objective’s Strategic Tracker. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas
on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions and in Einstein 1 Sales Edition
with Sales Cloud.
When: Sales action plans are available on a rolling basis starting in Spring ‘25 and are available to all customers by late March to mid-April
2025. To access sales action plans in a sandbox, they must be available in production first. Then, run the Match Production Licenses tool
or request a refresh.
How: Sales action plans extend Industries action plans and use the same standard objects but include the unique Event item type. To
get started, go to Sales Action Plans in Setup to assign permissions and create sales action plan templates.
To access sales action plans from most supported objects, add the Action Plans related list to the object’s page layout.
To access sales action plans from a sales account plan, click Action Plans from the objective’s Strategic Tracker. Or, when viewing a sales
account plan objective, find sales action plans under the Strategic Tracker heading.

513
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Fundamentals

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sales Action Plans (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Strategic Tracker (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Discover Untapped Selling Opportunities

Sales teams can use the Account Plan Whitespace Map component to identify potential upsell or cross-sell opportunities more easily.
Strategically plan for your next deal by reviewing top-selling products from closed-won opportunities, filtering by amount, count, or
quantity, and comparing with related accounts in the account hierarchy.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Einstein 1 Sales Edition editions with
Sales Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with access to account plans.
How: The Account Plan Whitespace Map component automatically displays on the default account plan page layout.

Activities
Take advantage of the increased limit of custom fields for activities.

IN THIS SECTION:
Take Advantage of the Increased Custom Field Limit for Activities
The custom field limit of activities for Salesforce orgs with fewer than 400 million activities has increased from 100 to 300, allowing
for enhanced data tracking, more powerful reports, and improved feature integrations without complex workarounds.

Take Advantage of the Increased Custom Field Limit for Activities

The custom field limit of activities for Salesforce orgs with fewer than 400 million activities has increased from 100 to 300, allowing for
enhanced data tracking, more powerful reports, and improved feature integrations without complex workarounds.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Capture More Data with the Increased Limit of Custom Fields for Activities

514
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Conversation Insights

Einstein Conversation Insights

Einstein Conversation Insights (ECI) users can upload previously recorded meetings to ECI to identify coachable moments for meetings
from external sources. A few generative AI features (Call Summaries, Call Explorer, and Generative Conversation Insights) are now
supported in 37 languages. And Explore Conversation is supported in Flow as a standard action.
Einstein Conversation Insights doesn’t record your calls. You connect it with your recording system such as Sales Dialer, Service Cloud
Voice, or other supported partners. It’s a customer’s responsibility to manage consent and comply with local privacy requirements in
the way that calls are recorded.

IN THIS SECTION:
Identify Coachable Moments from Recorded Video Calls with Einstein Conversation Insights
Process important meetings that were recorded on a third-party platform by using Einstein Conversation Insights. Upload video call
recordings under 2 GB in the MP4 format and get insights, see transcripts, and identify coachable moments surfaced from that
meeting.
Use Generative AI in All Languages Supported by Einstein Conversation Insights
Want to see call summaries for Catalan conversations? Have queries about Korean calls? Most of the generative AI features available
in Einstein Conversation Insights are supported in 37 languages. The features include Call Summaries, Call Explorer, and Generative
Conversation Insights.
Use Call Explorer in Flows
Want to automate record updates related to customer calls so your sales teams can focus on selling? Harness the power of flows to
automatically capture insights and update Salesforce records. Explore Conversation is available as a standard action in Flow Builder.

Identify Coachable Moments from Recorded Video Calls with Einstein Conversation
Insights
Process important meetings that were recorded on a third-party platform by using Einstein Conversation Insights. Upload video call
recordings under 2 GB in the MP4 format and get insights, see transcripts, and identify coachable moments surfaced from that meeting.
Where: This change applies to Einstein Conversation Insights in Lightning Experience. Einstein Conversation Insights is available in
Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions and as an add-on in Enterprise Edition for more than 10 users.
Who: This feature is available only for orgs on Hyperforce. Einstein Conversation Insights (ECI) users must be authenticated with least
one of these vendors—Zoom, Microsoft Teams, or Google Meet—to use this feature.
Why: From the Conversation Insights tab, ECI users can upload the video call file by clicking +Upload Video Call. The file must be in
the MP4 format and under 2 GB. Each user can upload a maximum of three video call recordings in a day.

515
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Conversation Insights

The Upload Video Call window enables users to fetch details from a calendar event or enter the meeting details. Add internal users,
customer contacts, or leads that were part of the meeting, select the meeting platform, and upload the meeting file.
How: To turn on the feature, from Setup, enter Einstein Conversation Insights in the Quick Find box, and then select
General Settings. Then turn on Let Users Upload Calls.

Use Generative AI in All Languages Supported by Einstein Conversation Insights

Want to see call summaries for Catalan conversations? Have queries about Korean calls? Most of the generative AI features available in
Einstein Conversation Insights are supported in 37 languages. The features include Call Summaries, Call Explorer, and Generative
Conversation Insights.
Where: This feature requires Einstein Conversation Insights and Einstein for Sales and is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise,
Performance, and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
To purchase Einstein for Sales, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Why: Einstein Conversation Insights (ECI) now supports Call Summaries, Call Explorer, and Generative Conversation Insights in all 37
ECI-supported languages. The supported languages include:
• Arabic
• Bulgarian
• Catalan

516
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein Conversation Insights

• Chinese (Simplified and Traditional)

• Croatian
• Czech
• Danish
• Dutch
• English (Australia), English (England), English (India), English (Ireland), English (New Zealand), English (Scotland), English (US)
• Finnish
• French (Canada), French (France)
• German
• Greek
• Hebrew
• Hindi
• Hungarian
• Icelandic
• Indonesian
• Italian
• Japanese
• Korean
• Latvian
• Lithuanian
• Norwegian
• Polish
• Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal)
• Punjabi
• Romanian
• Russian
• Serbian
• Slovak
• Spanish (Spain), Spanish (US)
• Swedish
• Thai
• Turkish
• Ukrainian
• Vietnamese
Sales Signals is available only in English.

Important: The languages supported include languages not covered by the Einstein Trust Layer. Sensitive data isn’t automatically
detected and masked for some regions and languages. Review the risks before using any features, and check your output for safety
and accuracy.

517
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Engagement

Use Call Explorer in Flows

Want to automate record updates related to customer calls so your sales teams can focus on selling? Harness the power of flows to
automatically capture insights and update Salesforce records. Explore Conversation is available as a standard action in Flow Builder.
Where: This change applies to Einstein Conversation Insights in Lightning Experience. Einstein Conversation Insights is available in
Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions and as an add-on in Enterprise Edition for more than 10 users.
Who: This feature is available to Salesforce admins with access to Einstein Conversation Insights and Einstein for Sales features.
How: You can add Explore Conversation as a standard action in Flow Builder.

All flows are supported, including screen flows, scheduled flows, and record-triggered flows. For more information about using flows,
see Automate Tasks with Flows.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Call Explorer Powered by Generative AI (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sales Engagement
Let Prospecting Center find your most qualified customer, using trusted data and AI. Prospecting Center analyzes your CRM and external
data and identifies your most promising opportunities with the highest probability of closing, so you know which deals to prioritize.
With the power of Data Cloud, you can analyze your accounts, contacts, and leads to identify your most accurate, data-driven prospects.
For pricing details, contact your Salesforce account executive. Sales Dialer is also available for an extra cost as an add-on license.

IN THIS SECTION:
Find Your Next Customer with Prospecting Center, a new Data Cloud App
To build a healthy revenue pipeline, let Prospecting Center find your next customer by using trusted data and AI. Identify the accounts
that are most likely to use the right buyer signals to engage. Use various external and internal signals to calculate Fit, Engagement,
and Intent scores, all powered by Data Cloud. Sales reps get powerful insights on time with the Unified Prospecting Center view, so
they can spend more time nurturing the prospect and less time navigating.

518
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Engagement

Change Einstein Activity Capture Permissions for Sales Engagement Basic Users (Release Update)
In Spring ’25, the Sales Engagement Basic User permission set no longer includes access to Einstein Activity Capture. Previously,
admins could grant users access to Einstein Activity Capture through the Use Einstein Activity Capture permission included in the
Sales Engagement Basic User permission set.

Find Your Next Customer with Prospecting Center, a new Data Cloud App
To build a healthy revenue pipeline, let Prospecting Center find your next customer by using trusted data and AI. Identify the accounts
that are most likely to use the right buyer signals to engage. Use various external and internal signals to calculate Fit, Engagement, and
Intent scores, all powered by Data Cloud. Sales reps get powerful insights on time with the Unified Prospecting Center view, so they can
spend more time nurturing the prospect and less time navigating.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Performance and Unlimited editions.
Who: This feature is available to Sales Cloud users who have Prospecting Center enabled.
How: Sales reps can create rules that calculate account scores, which help identify the next best customer. Use Account scores to contact
the right prospects (leads and contacts) and close deals faster. Sales reps can also use segments to filter prospects based on their business
preferences. All the data can be brought in from third party data connectors like Zoominfo and Demandbase.

Change Einstein Activity Capture Permissions for Sales Engagement Basic Users
(Release Update)
In Spring ’25, the Sales Engagement Basic User permission set no longer includes access to Einstein Activity Capture. Previously, admins
could grant users access to Einstein Activity Capture through the Use Einstein Activity Capture permission included in the Sales Engagement
Basic User permission set.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud.
When: To let Sales Engagement Basic users continue using Einstein Activity Capture, update your permissions by January 1, 2025.
Why: Access to Einstein Activity Capture now requires the Standard Einstein Activity Capture permission set. The Use Einstein Activity
Capture app permission will be removed from the Sales Engagement Basic User permission set and any permission sets cloned from it.

519
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Forecasting

How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates.
Assign the Standard Einstein Activity Capture permission set to users who currently have access to Einstein Activity Capture through the
Sales Engagement Basic User permission set or a clone.
We recommend performing bulk permission set assignments with the Permission Set Manager. For more information, see Manage
Permission Set Assignments in Salesforce Help.

Salesforce Forecasting
Collaborative Forecasts is now called Pipeline Forecasting. Forecast managers can now apply their judgment to a direct subordinate’s
opportunity that’s split across multiple owners. Your sales team can accurately forecast consumption-based businesses.

IN THIS SECTION:
Collaborative Forecasts Is Now Pipeline Forecasting
Manage your opportunity-based forecast models the same way you have, but now under the name Pipeline Forecasting, which is
part of the Salesforce Forecasting product umbrella. The new name better positions forecasts that use the standard opportunity and
closely related objects such as opportunity product, opportunity split, and line item schedules. It also accommodates forecast models
that use Data Cloud data, including Consumption Forecasting. With this change, you continue to view all your forecasts on the
forecasts page.
Improve Pipeline Forecast Visibility with Manager Judgments on Opportunity Splits
Forecast managers can now apply their judgment to a direct subordinate’s opportunity that’s split across multiple owners. Each
manager’s judgment on their portion of the opportunity rolls up through their forecast hierarchy, allowing sales and specialist leaders
insight into their own forecasts for their areas of the business. Previously, front-line managers could apply judgments only to
opportunities that had a single owner. This change applies to opportunity split-based forecast types in user role and territory forecast
hierarchies, and it doesn’t include opportunity product splits.
Forecast Your Consumption-Based Business
With Consumption Forecasting, enable your sales team to accurately forecast consumption-based businesses monthly and quarterly.
After you create forecast types, your sales team can forecast and view details such as actual and predicted revenue. This feature is
an addition to Pipeline Forecasting, so now you can create consumption-based forecasts alongside opportunity-based forecasts.

Collaborative Forecasts Is Now Pipeline Forecasting

Manage your opportunity-based forecast models the same way you have, but now under the name Pipeline Forecasting, which is part
of the Salesforce Forecasting product umbrella. The new name better positions forecasts that use the standard opportunity and closely
related objects such as opportunity product, opportunity split, and line item schedules. It also accommodates forecast models that use
Data Cloud data, including Consumption Forecasting. With this change, you continue to view all your forecasts on the forecasts page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional and Developer editions and in Enterprise and Unlimited editions
with the Sales Cloud.
How: Active forecast types continue to be available to you on a single forecasts page.

520
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Forecasting

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Forecasting (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve Pipeline Forecast Visibility with Manager Judgments on Opportunity Splits

Forecast managers can now apply their judgment to a direct subordinate’s opportunity that’s split across multiple owners. Each manager’s
judgment on their portion of the opportunity rolls up through their forecast hierarchy, allowing sales and specialist leaders insight into
their own forecasts for their areas of the business. Previously, front-line managers could apply judgments only to opportunities that had
a single owner. This change applies to opportunity split-based forecast types in user role and territory forecast hierarchies, and it doesn’t
include opportunity product splits.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional and Developer editions and in Enterprise and Unlimited editions
with the Sales Cloud.
Why: With this change, forecast managers can use judgments to help define their path to their committed forecast number, even if
their team doesn’t own 100% of an opportunity. Sales leaders can make sure that all managers who are part of a split opportunity are
in alignment about whether an opportunity is included as part of the committed forecast.
How: Manager judgments are available on opportunity splits when Team Selling and Opportunity Splits are enabled in Setup and the
Manager Judgments option is selected on the Forecasts Settings page. Make sure that you add the Manager Judgment column to the
opportunity list for your forecast types that are based on the Opportunity Split object.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Opportunity Splits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Allow Manager Judgments in Pipeline Forecasts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Forecast Your Consumption-Based Business

With Consumption Forecasting, enable your sales team to accurately forecast consumption-based businesses monthly and quarterly.
After you create forecast types, your sales team can forecast and view details such as actual and predicted revenue. This feature is an
addition to Pipeline Forecasting, so now you can create consumption-based forecasts alongside opportunity-based forecasts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions and in Einstein 1 Sales Edition with Sales Cloud.
Why: Consumption Forecasting helps you and your sales team:

521
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Forecasting

• Bring data from your CRM system and from external sources to generate comprehensive forecasts.
• Forecast consumption-based data to provide leadership teams with actionable insights.
• View the historical trends of your metrics aggregated by different dimensions and user hierarchies.
• Adjust forecast values individually or in bulk by smart adjustments.
• Roll up adjustments in the hierarchy in real time.
• Show progress toward quota attainment.
How: Enable Salesforce Forecasting and set up Data Cloud prior to turning on Consumption Forecasting. On the Forecast Settings page,
turn on Consumption Forecasting and create consumption-based forecast types.
After you set up Consumption Forecasting, sales reps and managers can view their consumption-based business measures and adjust
their own forecasts that are rolled up in the hierarchy.

522
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Pipeline Inspection

Pipeline Inspection
Get a more consistent user experience in Pipeline Inspection list views. Close Date Predictions, a feature of Einstein Deal Insights in
Pipeline Inspection, is being retired as of Spring ’25.

IN THIS SECTION:
Get an Improved User Experience in Pipeline Inspection List View
Fields you mark as Read-Only on the Opportunity page layout now behave that way in the Pipeline Inspection list view. This change
gives you a more consistent user experience. Previously in the Pipeline Inspection list view, you could make inline edits to fields even
when they were marked as Read-Only. Field-level security settings still take precedence over the field’s configuration on the
Opportunity page layout.
Close Date Predictions Has Been Retired
As of this release, Close Date Predictions, a feature of Einstein Deal Insights in Pipeline Inspection, has been retired. The best replacement
for Close Date Predictions is Einstein Opportunity Scoring, which gives robust predictions of an opportunity’s likelihood of closing.
You can continue using all other features of Einstein Deal Insights in Pipeline Inspection, such as insights from calls, emails, and
service cases.

Get an Improved User Experience in Pipeline Inspection List View

Fields you mark as Read-Only on the Opportunity page layout now behave that way in the Pipeline Inspection list view. This change
gives you a more consistent user experience. Previously in the Pipeline Inspection list view, you could make inline edits to fields even
when they were marked as Read-Only. Field-level security settings still take precedence over the field’s configuration on the Opportunity
page layout.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud.

Close Date Predictions Has Been Retired

As of this release, Close Date Predictions, a feature of Einstein Deal Insights in Pipeline Inspection, has been retired. The best replacement
for Close Date Predictions is Einstein Opportunity Scoring, which gives robust predictions of an opportunity’s likelihood of closing. You
can continue using all other features of Einstein Deal Insights in Pipeline Inspection, such as insights from calls, emails, and service cases.
Where: This change applies to all users of Pipeline Inspection. Pipeline Inspection is available in Lightning Experience with Sales Cloud
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Close Date Predictions Retirement

Sales Programs, Partner Tracks, and In-App Guidance

Enhance your sales approach with data-driven insights and take complete control of your Enablement settings. Quickly deploy in-app
guidance into your Salesforce orgs.

IN THIS SECTION:
Sales Programs and Partner Tracks with Enablement
Elevate your sales strategy with seamless access to Enablement analytics that guide you in making data-driven decisions for your
teams. Gain complete control over your Enablement settings with the new Enablement switch.

523
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Programs, Partner Tracks, and In-App Guidance

In-App Guidance
Deploy In-App Guidance into production quickly, with the flexibility to version managed packages that contain prompts, walkthroughs,
and their dependencies.

Sales Programs and Partner Tracks with Enablement

Elevate your sales strategy with seamless access to Enablement analytics that guide you in making data-driven decisions for your teams.
Gain complete control over your Enablement settings with the new Enablement switch.

IN THIS SECTION:
Empower Your Sales Leaders with Enablement Analytics
Enhance your sales team’s performance by providing your sales leaders with essential analytical insights to develop impactful
strategies and drive success. With the Manage Enablement Analytics permission, sales leaders can view Enablement analytics without
being an admin. Leaders can use the Enablement-specific data to analyze their team’s performance and take informed decisions.
Previously, Enablement reports and dashboards were accessible to Enablement admins only.
Take Full Control of Your Enablement Settings with One Switch
Tailor your Enablement settings to meet the specific configuration requirements of your Salesforce org. With the Enablement switch
on the settings page, Salesforce admins can now enable or disable Enablement with one click. By default, the switch is turned on
for you if your company has an Enablement add-on license.

Empower Your Sales Leaders with Enablement Analytics

Enhance your sales team’s performance by providing your sales leaders with essential analytical insights to develop impactful strategies
and drive success. With the Manage Enablement Analytics permission, sales leaders can view Enablement analytics without being an
admin. Leaders can use the Enablement-specific data to analyze their team’s performance and take informed decisions. Previously,
Enablement reports and dashboards were accessible to Enablement admins only.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Einstein 1 Sales Edition, and Developer
editions with Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or Salesforce Platform. An Enablement add-on license is required.
Who: Enablement users who have the Manage Enablement Analytics permission can view prebuilt Enablement reports and dashboards.
How: Sales leaders go to the Reports page in Lightning Experience and access the reports folder for a specific release. Leaders then
select the report that they want to view.

524
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Programs, Partner Tracks, and In-App Guidance

Sales leaders go to the Dashboards page in Lightning Experience and access the dashboard folder for a specific release. Leaders then
select the dashboard that they want to view and apply filters to see the analytics for a particular program.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Tracking Enablement Programs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Take Full Control of Your Enablement Settings with One Switch

Tailor your Enablement settings to meet the specific configuration requirements of your Salesforce org. With the Enablement switch on
the settings page, Salesforce admins can now enable or disable Enablement with one click. By default, the switch is turned on for you
if your company has an Enablement add-on license.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Einstein 1 Sales Edition, and Developer
editions with Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or Salesforce Platform. An Enablement add-on license is required.
How: From Setup, on the Enablement Settings page, turn on Enablement.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Setting Up Enablement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

525
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Performance Management

In-App Guidance
Deploy In-App Guidance into production quickly, with the flexibility to version managed packages that contain prompts, walkthroughs,
and their dependencies.

IN THIS SECTION:
Deliver In-App Guidance Quickly with Managed Packages
Speed up the deployment of in-app guidance and its dependencies in your Salesforce org by using second-generation managed
packages. Create packages with prompts and walkthroughs to provide real-time, contextual help and enhance user engagement
across all environments and versions of your application. Previously, prompts were available for first-generation managed packages
only.

Deliver In-App Guidance Quickly with Managed Packages

Speed up the deployment of in-app guidance and its dependencies in your Salesforce org by using second-generation managed
packages. Create packages with prompts and walkthroughs to provide real-time, contextual help and enhance user engagement across
all environments and versions of your application. Previously, prompts were available for first-generation managed packages only.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Einstein 1
Sales Edition, and Developer editions. An Enablement add-on license is required.
How: Metadata components are available for prompts and walkthroughs in second-generation managed packages. Package developer
bundles in-app Guidance components along with their dependencies, such as custom objects, profiles, and standard apps. Package
versions are distributed on the AppExchange.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Guidelines for In-App Guidance in Managed Packages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Second-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide: Components Available in Second-Generation Managed Packages (can be
outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sales Performance Management

Plan quotas that account for ramp-up of new reps and seasonal sales patterns in Quota Planning. Publish quota plans to territory-based
forecast types within Pipeline Forecasting. Navigate with ease among various sales planning disciplines. Simplify activity and qualified
mileage tracking in timesheets for reps who rely on Salesforce Maps. And set expectations with your reps for working in the now standard,
enhanced user experience within Salesforce Maps.

IN THIS SECTION:
Sales Planning
Plan sales targets that account for ramp-up of new reps and tenure of experienced ones, and seasonal sales patterns in Quota
Planning. Experience intuitive navigation among the various disciplines for planning sales strategies.
Salesforce Maps
Increase your reps’ time with customers when you simplify timesheet entries for activities and qualified travel distances. Set parameters
for distances that qualify for reimbursements, and establish a timesheet approval process. Familiarize yourself with the new permission
set for communications with Hyperforce, and prepare all reps for the now standard, enhanced user experience.

526
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Performance Management

Sales Planning
Plan sales targets that account for ramp-up of new reps and tenure of experienced ones, and seasonal sales patterns in Quota Planning.
Experience intuitive navigation among the various disciplines for planning sales strategies.

IN THIS SECTION:
Plan Accurate Quotas That Account for Ramp and Seasonality
Reflect anticipated ramp-up time for new reps and consider the tenure of experienced ones when you plan quotas. And account
for seasonal sales patterns and other realities that affect your business in Quota Planning. Then publish ramp- and season-adjusted
quotas to active territory-based forecasts in Pipeline Forecasting.
Publish Quota Plans to Pipeline Forecasting
Provide a clear path for your sales reps to meet quotas when you publish plans from Quota Planning to territory-based forecasting
types in Pipeline Forecasting.
Design Sales Strategies with a More Intuitive Experience
Plan territories with the full context of segments in Sales Planning. Navigate easily among segmentation, territory planning, and
quota planning disciplines without losing your place.
Other Improvements Within Sales Performance Management
Identify improvements to Sales Planning and Territory Planning resulting from customer requests.

Plan Accurate Quotas That Account for Ramp and Seasonality

Reflect anticipated ramp-up time for new reps and consider the tenure of experienced ones when you plan quotas. And account for
seasonal sales patterns and other realities that affect your business in Quota Planning. Then publish ramp- and season-adjusted quotas
to active territory-based forecasts in Pipeline Forecasting.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Sales Planning, open a sales plan and click Settings. Specify seasonal adjustments and add ramp profiles.

Anyone with access to the entire sales plan can further adjust ramp-up and seasonality values in segments.

Publish Quota Plans to Pipeline Forecasting

Provide a clear path for your sales reps to meet quotas when you publish plans from Quota Planning to territory-based forecasting types
in Pipeline Forecasting.

527
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Performance Management

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Publishing quotas to territory-based forecasts requires an active territory model with designated forecast managers in Sales
Territories. In addition, publishing requires a forecast type that includes a territory-based hierarchy with the option to show quotas.
In Sales Planning, open a sales plan, select a segment, and then open a quota plan within it. Click Publish, and then select Territory-based
Forecast.

Select a territory-based forecast type and a root territory. Then select a quota column from your plan. Identify any mismatched territories,
and then publish the ones that match.

Design Sales Strategies with a More Intuitive Experience

Plan territories with the full context of segments in Sales Planning. Navigate easily among segmentation, territory planning, and quota
planning disciplines without losing your place.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Sales Planning, open a segment, and then click New Dataset. Then follow the prompts to create the dataset based on the
segment.

528
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Performance Management

Access settings for Sales Planning and Territory Planning together by searching for Sales Planning Settings in the app launcher.

Other Improvements Within Sales Performance Management

Identify improvements to Sales Planning and Territory Planning resulting from customer requests.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional (except for Sales Planning), Enterprise,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Sales Planning and Territory Planning now include these improvements.

Product Improvement
Sales Planning Sales Planning now sets field types when importing data from CSV files and matching fields.

Territory Planning Territory Planning now includes these enhancements.

• When filtering data, planners can select the Starts with filter operator.
• When carving territories, planners can now remove territories and their descendants in the territory
hierarchy within Territory Planning, instead of only individual territories.
• Planners can now select multiple records by pressing Shift+.

529
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Performance Management

Product Improvement

• Planners can now identify the number of unique values, such as accounts and industries, within
territories.

Sales Territories Designated team members can now administer specific territories and their descendants. To designate
team members, assign them the Administer Territory Operations permission.
Then configure fields for the TerritoryAdminAssignment standard object through Salesforce API version
63 and later. Designated team members who administer at least one territory get read access to all
records assigned to that territory and its descendants. Specify whether these team members can:
• Update and delete the territory and its descendants, and create descendants.
• Assign other team members to descendant territories.
• Manage record assignments and rules for the territory and its descendants.

SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: TerritoryAdminAssignment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Maps
Increase your reps’ time with customers when you simplify timesheet entries for activities and qualified travel distances. Set parameters
for distances that qualify for reimbursements, and establish a timesheet approval process. Familiarize yourself with the new permission
set for communications with Hyperforce, and prepare all reps for the now standard, enhanced user experience.

IN THIS SECTION:
Simplify Activity Tracking and Reimburse for Qualified Travel Distances
Maximize your reps’ time in the field when you simplify activity and distance tracking in Salesforce Maps. Specify distance parameters
that qualify for reimbursements and establish an approval process for timesheets.
The Enhanced User Experience Is Now Standard
Set expectations among your teams who haven’t yet worked with the enhanced user experience in Salesforce Maps. All reps can
now experience dramatic performance improvements while plotting high-volume data including ArcGIS Online layers and complex
shape layers. Your reps can also access modern and robust list views.
New Permission Set for Communications with Hyperforce
Know what change to expect when you install or update Salesforce Maps. For communicating with Hyperforce services, Salesforce
Maps adds the new SF Maps Platform Integration User permission set and assigns it to the Platform Integration user.

Simplify Activity Tracking and Reimburse for Qualified Travel Distances

Maximize your reps’ time in the field when you simplify activity and distance tracking in Salesforce Maps. Specify distance parameters
that qualify for reimbursements and establish an approval process for timesheets.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Salesforce Maps Settings, click Mileage Administration. Create a timesheet period, such as semi-monthly, bi-weekly, or weekly.
If only certain travel distances qualify for reimbursements, create a reimbursement rule. Schedule the timesheet creation Apex job, and
then create or update permission groups and timesheet settings. Give access to managers by role or manager hierarchies. Next, assign
reps to those permission groups.

530
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Performance Management

Your reps manage their timesheets by using the Salesforce app. Timesheets capture activities, time spent with customers, and distances
traveled between visits. Distance calculations consider historical traffic patterns, and not necessarily the actual routes that your reps
travel. Reps can adjust timesheets to account for unscheduled or route changes. Your reps can then submit their timesheets for manager
approval.

Managers gain clarity on their reps’ activities, time, and distances traveled. Update multiple timesheets simultaneously. And review and
approve timesheets individually.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Simplifying Timesheet Administration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

531
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations

The Enhanced User Experience Is Now Standard

Set expectations among your teams who haven’t yet worked with the enhanced user experience in Salesforce Maps. All reps can now
experience dramatic performance improvements while plotting high-volume data including ArcGIS Online layers and complex shape
layers. Your reps can also access modern and robust list views.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Getting More from Salesforce Maps with the Enhanced User Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

New Permission Set for Communications with Hyperforce

Know what change to expect when you install or update Salesforce Maps. For communicating with Hyperforce services, Salesforce Maps
adds the new SF Maps Platform Integration User permission set and assigns it to the Platform Integration user.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Give Users Access to Salesforce Maps Products (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Email, Calendar, and Integrations

Prepare for service account OAuth 2.0 retirement by upgrading to org-level OAuth 2.0 authentication. If you use Salesforce Inbox, allowlist
*.svc.sfdcfc.net. And Salesforce for Outlook retires in December 2027.

IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Activity Capture
Prepare for service account OAuth 2.0 retirement by upgrading to org-level OAuth 2.0 authentication.
Outlook Integration
Microsoft is making changes that impact the Salesforce Outlook integration. Take action before these changes are rolled out to
maintain access to the integration.
Gmail Integration
Embed your Gmail integration in the Chrome side panel and take advantage of Agentforce.
Salesforce Inbox
To support the required email integrations, allowlist *.svc.sfdcfc.net.
Salesforce for Outlook Is Being Retired in December 2027
For the latest integration with Microsoft Outlook, we recommend moving to our next-generation products, the Outlook integration
and Einstein Activity Capture. These products replace Salesforce for Outlook features and give users new capabilities. We continue
to introduce enhancements for these products every release.

Einstein Activity Capture

Prepare for service account OAuth 2.0 retirement by upgrading to org-level OAuth 2.0 authentication.

532
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations

IN THIS SECTION:
Upgrade Your Service Account Connections to Org-Level OAuth 2.0 Authentication
Microsoft is retiring the ApplicationImpersonation role in Exchange Online in February 2025. As a result, Salesforce is retiring service
account OAuth 2.0 access to Microsoft Office 365 from Einstein Activity Capture. To make sure that Einstein Activity Capture continues
working, upgrade to org-level OAuth 2.0 authentication.

Upgrade Your Service Account Connections to Org-Level OAuth 2.0 Authentication

Microsoft is retiring the ApplicationImpersonation role in Exchange Online in February 2025. As a result, Salesforce is retiring service
account OAuth 2.0 access to Microsoft Office 365 from Einstein Activity Capture. To make sure that Einstein Activity Capture continues
working, upgrade to org-level OAuth 2.0 authentication.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions or through Einstein 1 Sales Edition,
Sales Engagement, or Revenue Intelligence.
Why: Your Microsoft Office 365 connections that use service account OAuth2.0 authentication continue to work until February 2025.
But if you haven’t upgraded to org-level OAuth 2.0 by then, your Einstein Activity Capture connection stops working.
How: Upgrade to org-level OAuth 2.0 in Einstein Activity Capture settings in Setup. During the upgrade process, you’re prompted to
log in to your Office 365 tenant. Make sure you log in to the same tenant you used when creating the connection. If you don’t, you have
to reset your Einstein Activity Capture connection and start over.
After you upgrade, you can scope authentication to a specific set of users with Microsoft Exchange Role Based Access Control.

Until you upgrade your connection, all admins for your org receive a weekly email reminder. You can turn off the notification in Setup.

533
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: EAC to MS Office 365: Service Account OAuth 2.0 Retirement
Microsoft Exchange Team Blog: Retirement of RBAC Application Impersonation in Exchange Online
Salesforce Help: Use a Service Account to Connect Microsoft Office 365 and Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)

Outlook Integration
Microsoft is making changes that impact the Salesforce Outlook integration. Take action before these changes are rolled out to maintain
access to the integration.

IN THIS SECTION:
Maintain Access to the Outlook Integration
Microsoft is deprecating legacy features that impact the Salesforce Outlook integration. To maintain access to the integration, work
with your Microsoft 365 admin to take action before these changes are rolled out.

Maintain Access to the Outlook Integration

Microsoft is deprecating legacy features that impact the Salesforce Outlook integration. To maintain access to the integration, work with
your Microsoft 365 admin to take action before these changes are rolled out.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions. This change
impacts Exchange Online only.
When: For information on when Microsoft is deprecating legacy features, see Nested App Authentication and Outlook Legacy Tokens
Deprecation FAQ.
How: In Setup, go to the Outlook Integration and Sync section. Use the Admin Consent Flow to make these changes and authorize the
add-in for all users. Otherwise, individual users must manually authorize the integration after Microsoft rolls out the changes.
These scopes are required for the Salesforce Outlook integration to function.

534
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations

• Calendars.ReadWrite.Shared
• email
• Mail.ReadWrite.Shared
• offline_access
• openid
• profile
• User.Read

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Integration with Outlook (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: Microsoft Updating Salesforce Outlook Integration 2024

Gmail Integration
Embed your Gmail integration in the Chrome side panel and take advantage of Agentforce.

IN THIS SECTION:
Use Agentforce with Your Gmail Integration
When your Gmail integration is in the Chrome side panel, you can use Agentforce while working on emails and events.
Increase Efficiency by Using the Gmail Integration in the Chrome Side Panel
Keep the Gmail integration email functionality while using other features in the Chrome side panel. Changes include maintaining
your user session, therefore reducing logouts. And the Chrome side panel is visible as you work in your email and calendar, and
navigate from page to page in your browser.

Use Agentforce with Your Gmail Integration

When your Gmail integration is in the Chrome side panel, you can use Agentforce while working on emails and events.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Starter, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Change your Gmail integration to appear in the Chrome side panel. You’re automatically asked if you want to try this new location
when you open the Gmail integration.
To use Agentforce in the side panel, click Einstein.

535
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Outlook and Gmail Integrations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Gmail Integration in the Chrome Side Panel (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Agentforce: Agents and Copilot (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Increase Efficiency by Using the Gmail Integration in the Chrome Side Panel
Keep the Gmail integration email functionality while using other features in the Chrome side panel. Changes include maintaining your
user session, therefore reducing logouts. And the Chrome side panel is visible as you work in your email and calendar, and navigate from
page to page in your browser.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, and Lightning Platform in Essentials, Group, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: All Gmail integration users can choose to work with their integration in the Chrome side panel. Open the integration and the
onboarding process starts.

536
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations

The updated side panel is in its own frame. (1) No matter which tab is active, the side panel is visible. It includes a menu (2) and, if
available, Einstein copilot (3).
You can return to the old way of working with the Gmail integration. From the side panel navigation menu, select Switch back to
embedded mode.

537
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Outlook and Gmail Integrations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Gmail Integration in the Chrome Side Panel (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Inbox
To support the required email integrations, allowlist *.svc.sfdcfc.net.

IN THIS SECTION:
Allowlist the Required Domain for Salesforce Inbox
To support the required email integration for Salesforce Inbox, add *.svc.sfdcfc.net to the allowlists for your network,
firewalls, and proxies.

Allowlist the Required Domain for Salesforce Inbox

To support the required email integration for Salesforce Inbox, add *.svc.sfdcfc.net to the allowlists for your network, firewalls,
and proxies.

538
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Partner Relationship Management

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the mobile app in
Starter, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Inbox (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Allow the Required Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce for Outlook Is Being Retired in December 2027

For the latest integration with Microsoft Outlook, we recommend moving to our next-generation products, the Outlook integration and
Einstein Activity Capture. These products replace Salesforce for Outlook features and give users new capabilities. We continue to introduce
enhancements for these products every release.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Contact Manager, Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: When Salesforce for Outlook is retired, it will no longer sync contacts, events, or tasks. Admins and users also lose access to Salesforce
for Outlook features, such as the side panel.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Salesforce for Outlook Retirement
Salesforce Help: Move from Salesforce for Outlook to the Next-Generation Products (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Trailblazer Community: Salesforce for Outlook Release Notes

Partner Relationship Management

Maximize channel sales, collaborate on shared business, and maintain trusted relationships with more efficient tools in your partner
experience.

IN THIS SECTION:
Expand and Maintain Shared Business with Trusted Partners
Provide a more trusted, complete connection for the leads and opportunities that your company shares with partners through
Partner Connect. Maintain a vendor connection in fewer clicks with new options for resending or deleting a field mapping. Maintain
a partner connection more easily by importing an updated field mapping that a vendor sent you. Export lookup fields from a vendor
org so you can share more data between Salesforce orgs.

Expand and Maintain Shared Business with Trusted Partners

Provide a more trusted, complete connection for the leads and opportunities that your company shares with partners through Partner
Connect. Maintain a vendor connection in fewer clicks with new options for resending or deleting a field mapping. Maintain a partner
connection more easily by importing an updated field mapping that a vendor sent you. Export lookup fields from a vendor org so you
can share more data between Salesforce orgs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud or Service Cloud. Vendors
are required to purchase a PRM add-on license for the partner admin user and each partner user who vendors want to export records.

539
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Cloud Everywhere

How: In a vendor’s org, on the Partner Connect for Vendors page in Setup, the actions dropdown menu for an integrated object includes
new options for editing, deleting, and emailing the field mapping.

In a partner’s org, on the Partner Connect page in Setup, the actions dropdown menu includes a new Update JSON option for updating
the field mapping with the new version that the vendor emailed.

In addition, a vendor can now export the Account Name and Primary Campaign Source lookup fields on the Opportunity object. When
a partner then imports a field mapping that includes a lookup field, only the name of the referenced field is imported. Lookup fields can’t
sent or receive updates.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Integrating Shared Business Across Salesforce Orgs with Partner Connect (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Sales Cloud Everywhere

We streamlined navigation by moving top object shortcuts to a dedicated page and adding the recent records component.

540
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Cloud Everywhere

IN THIS SECTION:
Access Your Records Easily in Everywhere
We streamlined the Everywhere landing page by moving top object shortcuts to a dedicated My Records page. A recent records
component provides quick navigation.

Access Your Records Easily in Everywhere

We streamlined the Everywhere landing page by moving top object shortcuts to a dedicated My Records page. A recent records
component provides quick navigation.
Where: Everywhere is available in Lightning Experience Sales Cloud in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: The top object shortcuts are on their own My Records page, accessed from the menu.

The Everywhere landing page displays recent records.

541
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Cloud on Mobile

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sales Cloud Everywhere (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sales Cloud on Mobile

Prepare for meetings in Seller-Focused Mobile Experience. Customize the app with Mobile Bulder for Seller-Focused Experience (Beta).

IN THIS SECTION:
Prepare for Meetings Without Opening Your Laptop
Seller-Focused Mobile Experience is the latest and best way to turn every lead into a sale from your phone or tablet. In Winter ’24,
the Seller-Focused Mobile Experience app became generally available. Now, we've redesigned the Events detail page to make your
meetings more meaningful. Also, the Ask Einstein field is now the Ask Agentforce field.
Customize Seller-Focused Mobile Experience (Beta)
Seller-Focused Mobile Experience shows you the records that you need in order to plan meetings, connect with decision makers,
and close deals. And now, with Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience (beta) you can add native pages for custom objects
and customize the layout of record home pages in the app.

Prepare for Meetings Without Opening Your Laptop

Seller-Focused Mobile Experience is the latest and best way to turn every lead into a sale from your phone or tablet. In Winter ’24, the
Seller-Focused Mobile Experience app became generally available. Now, we've redesigned the Events detail page to make your meetings
more meaningful. Also, the Ask Einstein field is now the Ask Agentforce field.
Where: Seller-Focused Sales Mobile Experience is available for Android and iOS on phones and tablets in all editions, except Database.com.
Who: To use Seller-Focused Mobile Experience, you must have the Salesforce Mobile App: Native Seller Experience permission. Agentforce
is available if you have the Use Agentforce Default Agent user permission.
How: To bring up the detail page for an event, tap the event. From the detail page, you can view and edit meeting details, view attendance
responses, and related records.

542
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Sales Cloud on Mobile

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Seller-Focused Mobile Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Customize Seller-Focused Mobile Experience (Beta)

Seller-Focused Mobile Experience shows you the records that you need in order to plan meetings, connect with decision makers, and
close deals. And now, with Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience (beta) you can add native pages for custom objects and customize
the layout of record home pages in the app.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in all editions. The Seller-Focused Mobile Experience for Android and iOS is
available on phones and tablets in all editions, except Database.com.

Note: Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements
- Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: To use Seller-Focused Mobile Experience, users must have the Salesforce Mobile App: Native Seller Experience permission.
How: To use the mobile builder, enable Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience in Salesforce Mobile App Setup. From Setup, in
the Quick Find box, enter Salesforce Mobile App and select it. Enable Mobile Builder for Seller-Focused Experience (beta).

543
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Other Changes in the Sales Cloud

Drag the components on to the canvas. (1) Define component properties in the properties pane. (2) See your changes in the interactive
canvas. (3)

Other Changes in the Sales Cloud

Anticipate other changes that can affect your sales teams.

IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Automated Contacts Is Being Retired in February 2025
To build content-rich profiles for all your contacts, we recommend moving to Automatic Contact Creation in Einstein Activity Capture.
This feature replaces Einstein Automated Contacts and gives users new capabilities.

Einstein Automated Contacts Is Being Retired in February 2025

To build content-rich profiles for all your contacts, we recommend moving to Automatic Contact Creation in Einstein Activity Capture.
This feature replaces Einstein Automated Contacts and gives users new capabilities.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: When Einstein Automated Contacts is retired, Salesforce won’t suggest new contacts and opportunity contact roles. Salesforce
admins and users also lose access to Einstein Contact Suggestions and Einstein Opportunity Contact Role Suggestions items on the App
Launcher, the Added by Einstein list view, and other items.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Einstein Automated Contacts Retirement
Salesforce Help: Automatic Contact Creation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

544
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce CMS

Salesforce CMS
Classify CMS content with content taxonomy, then tag content to create dynamic collections. Clone content and save it to a shared
workspace. Deliver content from any CMS workspace to any public or restricted channel, and remove more types of channels from
enhanced CMS workspaces.

IN THIS SECTION:
Classify CMS Content with Content Taxonomy
Improve content organization and enhance discoverability when you create a content taxonomy and apply it to CMS content. In
the Digital Experiences app, content taxonomists can create one overarching content taxonomy for an org and establish a hierarchical
relationship between terms. Then, in the CMS content Tags tab, a CMS content admin or content manager applies those terms as
tags to enhanced CMS content.
Streamline Content Management with Automated Tag-Based Conditions
Use taxonomy tags and define conditions to automatically organize enhanced CMS content into dynamic collections for your
channels. The dynamic collection continuously updates with new content that meets these criteria. Apply conditions to content
from multiple workspaces connected to the channel, and you can enhance content reach and utilization.
Save Time with Content Record Cloning in Your Shared Enhanced CMS Workspaces
After workspaces are shared, you can make copies of a shared content record and save it to a folder in a target enhanced CMS
workspace. Previously, you could make and save copies of content only in the workspace where it was created.
Scale Content Delivery for High Performance
Orgs hosted on Hyperforce can use Dedicated Content Delivery to deliver image content types with high performance and low
latency. This setting is on by default for all new public channels in an enhanced CMS workspace.
Deliver Content from Any CMS Workspace to Any Public or Restricted Channel
Now all public or restricted channels are enhanced, and you can deliver content to these channels from enhanced and non-enhanced
CMS workspaces. Previously, some public or restricted channels created before Summer ’24 were non-enhanced. These newly
enhanced channels have the Use non-enhanced APIs setting enabled by default, so you can continue to use non-enhanced CMS
Managed Content Resources without disrupting your current workflow.
Remove More Types of Channels from Enhanced CMS Workspaces
To better control where your content is available, remove Aura sites from enhanced CMS workspaces, and remove enhanced public
or restricted channels that have the Use non-enhanced APIs setting enabled. Previously, you could remove only enhanced LWR sites
and enhanced channels only when the setting was disabled.

Classify CMS Content with Content Taxonomy

Improve content organization and enhance discoverability when you create a content taxonomy and apply it to CMS content. In the
Digital Experiences app, content taxonomists can create one overarching content taxonomy for an org and establish a hierarchical
relationship between terms. Then, in the CMS content Tags tab, a CMS content admin or content manager applies those terms as tags
to enhanced CMS content.
Where: This change applies to enhanced CMS workspaces in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: To create a content taxonomy, open the Digital Experiences app and select Content Taxonomy from the tab menu. Click Create
Content Taxonomy. Add terms and save your changes.

545
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Streamline Content Management with Automated Tag-Based
Conditions

To apply taxonomy tags to enhanced CMS content, open the content detail page. Click the Tags tab and search and add tags to the
content. Save your changes. To make the changes available to your CMS channels, publish your changes.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Understanding Content Taxonomy (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline Content Management with Automated Tag-Based Conditions

Use taxonomy tags and define conditions to automatically organize enhanced CMS content into dynamic collections for your channels.
The dynamic collection continuously updates with new content that meets these criteria. Apply conditions to content from multiple
workspaces connected to the channel, and you can enhance content reach and utilization.
Where: This change applies to enhanced CMS workspaces in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: Define conditions based on tags, and the enhanced CMS workspaces that are available to your channels are searched for content
that meets the conditions. The collection search results can include up to 250 content items, ordered by relevance.
To create a dynamic collection, open the enhanced CMS workspace. Click Add, and select Dynamic Collection. Define conditions that
automatically add content items to the collection. Preview content that appears in the collection by available channels. To make the
collection available to your channels, publish the collection.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Understanding Content Taxonomy (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Save Time with Content Record Cloning in Your Shared Enhanced CMS
Workspaces
After workspaces are shared, you can make copies of a shared content record and save it to a folder in a target enhanced CMS workspace.
Previously, you could make and save copies of content only in the workspace where it was created.
Where: This change applies to enhanced CMS workspaces in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: There are two ways to clone content. From the content detail page in your enhanced CMS workspace, click Clone. Or, from the
row-level actions in the workspace’s content list, select Clone. You can clone variants of the content record, too.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Manage CMS Content (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Share Content Across Enhanced CMS Workspaces (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Scale Content Delivery for High Performance

Orgs hosted on Hyperforce can use Dedicated Content Delivery to deliver image content types with high performance and low latency.
This setting is on by default for all new public channels in an enhanced CMS workspace.
Where: This change applies to enhanced CMS workspaces in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions hosted on Hyperforce.

546
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Deliver Content from Any CMS Workspace to Any Public or
Restricted Channel

How: To enable Dedicated Content Delivery for existing public channels on Hyperforce, edit the channel settings. When you enable this
feature, newly published content is served through Hyperforce. Existing published content is served through Hyperforce the next time
it’s published.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: CMS Channels (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Deliver Content from Any CMS Workspace to Any Public or Restricted

Channel
Now all public or restricted channels are enhanced, and you can deliver content to these channels from enhanced and non-enhanced
CMS workspaces. Previously, some public or restricted channels created before Summer ’24 were non-enhanced. These newly enhanced
channels have the Use non-enhanced APIs setting enabled by default, so you can continue to use non-enhanced CMS Managed Content
Resources without disrupting your current workflow.
Where: This change applies to enhanced CMS workspaces in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: CMS Channels (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Connect REST API Developer Guide: CMS Managed Content Resources (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Remove More Types of Channels from Enhanced CMS Workspaces

To better control where your content is available, remove Aura sites from enhanced CMS workspaces, and remove enhanced public or
restricted channels that have the Use non-enhanced APIs setting enabled. Previously, you could remove only enhanced LWR sites and
enhanced channels only when the setting was disabled.
Where: This change applies to enhanced CMS workspaces in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: To remove a channel from an enhanced CMS workspace, go to the workspace’s list of channels and click Manage Channels.
When you remove a channel from a workspace, all the workspace’s content is unpublished from the channel. To prevent broken content
links on your Aura site, make sure that the site isn’t using any content from the workspace before you remove it.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add or Remove a Channel from a CMS Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Flow
Compose intelligent workflows with Flow Builder and Flow Orchestration. Build approval orchestrations with automated approvals.
Integrate across any system with Flow Integration.

547
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

IN THIS SECTION:
Flow Builder
Search and filter automations with the new flow creation experience. Build flows with Einstein and generative AI. Automate your
responses to customer actions with automation events. Manually select a winning path in the Path Experiment element. Define flow
triggers by using real-time data from Data Cloud. Enhance your Flow Builder emails by sharing documents or files with your recipients
by using Send Email action. Have unlimited paused and waiting flows. Promote your tested Data Cloud triggered flows from sandbox
to production environments.
Flow Orchestration
Create custom email notifications to assigned users. View improved orchestration details on the Orchestration Run details view.
Flow Approval Processes
Build approval orchestrations that involve multiple people over multiple stages with multiple flows. Assign an approval work item
to an individual, a public group, or a queue. Send notifications to people who submit approvals and the assigned approvers and
their delegates. Display approval work items to approvers on relevant record pages.
Streamline External System Integration with MuleSoft for Flow: Integration (Generally Available)
MuleSoft for Flow: Integration provides no-code connectivity to external systems using third-party connectors. Create flows where
third-party connectors act as triggers or actions. These connectors facilitate data and information exchange between different
systems and provide in-line field mapping capabilities for improved data accuracy. Manage all your org’s connections in a single
view with the new Connections tab in the Automation Lightning app.
MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce
MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce makes it easy to integrate data from any system with clicks, and invoke processes in any flow.
When you create a secure process to connect the information stored in different systems, you build a real-time, integrated view of
your customers and business.

Flow Builder
Search and filter automations with the new flow creation experience. Build flows with Einstein and generative AI. Automate your responses
to customer actions with automation events. Manually select a winning path in the Path Experiment element. Define flow triggers by
using real-time data from Data Cloud. Enhance your Flow Builder emails by sharing documents or files with your recipients by using
Send Email action. Have unlimited paused and waiting flows. Promote your tested Data Cloud triggered flows from sandbox to production
environments.

IN THIS SECTION:
Flow Builder Updates
Assign stages to screen elements from the screen properties editor. Search and filter automations with the new flow creation
experience. Build flows with Einstein and generative AI. Get more out of Data Cloud with support for new data types in flows. Launch
active autolaunched flows as subflows from within a prompt flow. Undo, redo, and save as with new keyboard shortcuts.
Flow for Marketing Cloud
Automate your responses to customer actions with automation events. Manually select a winning path in the Path Experiment
element. Define flow triggers by using real-time data from Data Cloud. Access data graph attributes in Decision elements, exit rules,
and campaign emails.
Flow Testing and Debugging
Debug flows more easily with a more readable Debug Details pane.
Flow Runtime
Versioned updates are available for flows that are configured to run on API version 63.0.

548
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Flow Management
Promote your tested Data Cloud triggered flows from sandbox to production environments. View failed and paused flow interviews
from the Automation Lightning app.
Flow Extensions
Create a Lightning web component that enhance a flow screen component’s error message experience at run time.
Flow and Process Release Updates
Salesforce Flow has several release updates that are scheduled to be enforced in future releases.

Flow Builder Updates

Assign stages to screen elements from the screen properties editor. Search and filter automations with the new flow creation experience.
Build flows with Einstein and generative AI. Get more out of Data Cloud with support for new data types in flows. Launch active
autolaunched flows as subflows from within a prompt flow. Undo, redo, and save as with new keyboard shortcuts.

IN THIS SECTION:
Screen Flow Updates
Run autolaunched flows in the background when screen actions change. Screen components check if they have invalid inputs in
real time. Use visual guides to lead users through the stages of your screen flow. Assign stages to screen elements from the screen
properties editor.
User Experience Updates
Search and filter automations with the new flow creation experience. Find and select resources up to 10 layers deep with nested
search. Find and manage different versions of a flow from within Flow Builder. Troubleshoot your flow with an improved Errors and
Warnings pane. Undo, redo, and save as with keyboard shortcuts. Create text templates and formula flow resources more easily.
Get Help Building Flows Faster and More Accurately with Einstein (Generally Available)
Get Einstein to use the power of generative AI and automatically build flows for you based on your instructions. Describe what you
want to automate, and Einstein takes care of the rest. This feature, which is now generally available, includes some changes since
the beta release. Einstein now generates more accurate flows, and it does so faster than before. You can help Einstein get even better
by using the prominent feedback buttons to provide feedback on your flows.
Generate a Detailed Description of a Flow with Einstein
Maintaining a flow can be challenging, especially if you didn’t create it. Without a detailed flow description, it can be tough to figure
out what the flow does. Now you can use Einstein to summarize an existing flow or a new one as you create it. The summary describes
all the flow steps and includes the input and output variables, the objects that the flow changes, and the subflows that the flow
refers to. You can then add the generated summary to the flow description to keep everyone informed.
Get Help Creating Flow Formulas with Einstein (Generally Available)
Build flow formulas with ease by describing what you want to calculate and letting Einstein generative AI figure out the functions
and operators for you. Formulas created by Einstein are available only in Flow Formula Builder. Generative AI can produce inaccurate
or harmful responses, so it’s important to test your formula for accuracy and safety before activating your flow. This feature is now
generally available.
Join Collections with the Transform Element
Combine source collections from related flow resources into one target collection. For example, you can combine order records
from an external system with Salesforce orders to get a combined data structure that is displayed in a data table in a flow screen.
The flow screen shows each order along with the amount and the quantities.

549
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Send Emails with Attachments in Flow Builder

Enhance your Flow Builder emails by sharing documents or files with your recipients by using Send Email action. To attach a file,
provide the ID of a file to the Send Email action. The maximum size of the email created, including attachments, is 35 MB.
Retrieve More Information from Data Cloud by Using Newly Supported Data Types
Flow Builder now supports these additional data types from Data Cloud: Email, URL, Phone, Percent, Boolean, and Currency. Use
Data Model Object (DMO) and Calculated Insight Object (CIO) fields of the newly supported data types to set entry conditions in
Data Cloud triggered flows, send data to Data Cloud with the Send to Data Cloud action, and specify filter conditions in the Get
Records element. Fields of these data types now appear in the $Record resource.
Launch an Active Autolaunched Flow as a Subflow Within a Prompt Flow
Now in Flow Builder, you can include an active autolaunched flow as a referenced flow in a prompt flow. Previously, you could only
reference other prompt flows within a prompt flow. Referenced autolaunched flows with Wait elements aren’t supported.
Enhance Flow Performance by Controlling the Number of Records Retrieved with Get Records
When you work with large datasets, you can hit performance issues or governor limits if you use the Get Records element to retrieve
all records. If you set an upper limit to control data retrieval, you improve flow performance and reduce the risk of timeouts or errors.
Use the All records, up to a specified limit option to set an upper limit on the number of records to retrieve.

Screen Flow Updates

Run autolaunched flows in the background when screen actions change. Screen components check if they have invalid inputs in real
time. Use visual guides to lead users through the stages of your screen flow. Assign stages to screen elements from the screen properties
editor.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Responsive Screens with Automatically Triggered Screen Actions (Beta)
You can now run autolaunched flows automatically in the background when the input values associated with screen actions change.
Previously, the only way to trigger a screen action was with the click of a button by using the Action Button component. The output
can be displayed on the same screen, so your users can see the results of their actions on the same screen without clicking any
buttons.
View Immediate Feedback from Screen Components with Invalid Values
Now your flow user can see whether an input value in a flow screen component is invalid when the user changes the focus to outside
the component. For example, the user enters a value for an email component. The component validates that the input value contains
the right domain as soon as your user clicks another screen component. Previously, component validation error messages appeared
only when you moved to another screen or finished the flow.
Guide Users Through Screen Flows with Built-In Visual Progress Indicators
Visually guide your users through the stages of your screen flows by using the built-in progress indicator—no more writing custom
code to create your own. Your users see which stage they’re on and how many stages remain. Configure whether you want to show
the progress indicator at the top of the screen or in the footer. Pick from a simple-style or a path-style progress indicator. Path-style
progress indicators are supported only at the top of the screen.

550
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Assign Stages to Screen Elements More Efficiently

Now you can assign stages to screen elements right from the screen properties editor instead of using assignment elements to set
the $Flow.CurrentStage and $Flow.ActiveStages global variables. When a screen loads, $Flow.CurrentStage is automatically updated
to the stage that’s associated with the screen, and the stage is added to the end of $Flow.ActiveStages if it isn’t an active stage
already. To show users where they are in the flow and how many stages remain, use the built-in progress indicator or a custom
progress indicator.

SEE ALSO:
Design Component Errors for a Better Experience

Create Responsive Screens with Automatically Triggered Screen Actions (Beta)

You can now run autolaunched flows automatically in the background when the input values associated with screen actions change.
Previously, the only way to trigger a screen action was with the click of a button by using the Action Button component. The output can
be displayed on the same screen, so your users can see the results of their actions on the same screen without clicking any buttons.
Where: This change applies to both Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Essentials, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. It’s supported only in Lightning runtime for flows.

Note: Automatically triggering screen actions is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements
- Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: In Flow Builder, create an autolaunched flow that retrieves data and saves that data in output variables. Activate the autolaunched
flow. Then, create a screen flow and add a Screen element. Next, add a screen action and select the autolaunched flow that you created.
Configure the screen action, and set input values. After that, add another component to the screen element that uses the output of the
autolaunched flow. To use the output from the autolaunched flow, in the screen component’s input, select the autolaunched flow, then
Results, and finally the output variable from the autolaunched flow. You can see only the variables that were marked as Available for
output. Then, save and run the flow.
For example, suppose you want to automatically show all contacts for a selected account record. Create an autolaunched flow that
retrieves all contacts for an account. Activate the autolaunched flow. Then, create a Screen flow and add a screen element to it. Add a
Lookup component so that users can select an account record. Add the activated autolaunched flow as a screen action and set the input
values. This way, the autolaunched flow runs when the input values for the Lookup component change. Lastly, add a Data Table
component, and add the Full Name, Email, and Business Phone columns. The output of the autolaunched flow automatically populates
the Data Table when the lookup value changes.

At run time, when your user selects an account, they automatically see all the contacts for that account on the same screen—no button
clicks required.

551
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Screen Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

View Immediate Feedback from Screen Components with Invalid Values

Now your flow user can see whether an input value in a flow screen component is invalid when the user changes the focus to outside
the component. For example, the user enters a value for an email component. The component validates that the input value contains
the right domain as soon as your user clicks another screen component. Previously, component validation error messages appeared
only when you moved to another screen or finished the flow.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. It’s not supported in Classic runtime for flows. This feature is only available in flows that run on API
version 63.0 or later.

Guide Users Through Screen Flows with Built-In Visual Progress Indicators
Visually guide your users through the stages of your screen flows by using the built-in progress indicator—no more writing custom
code to create your own. Your users see which stage they’re on and how many stages remain. Configure whether you want to show
the progress indicator at the top of the screen or in the footer. Pick from a simple-style or a path-style progress indicator. Path-style
progress indicators are supported only at the top of the screen.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. It’s supported only in Lightning runtime for flows. Built-in progress indicators are enabled by default
for flows created in Spring ’25 and later. For flows that were created in Winter ’25 or earlier, the built-in progress indicators must be
manually enabled. Built-in progress indicators aren’t supported in Field Service Mobile or Salesforce Scheduler flows. The progress
indicator settings are ignored when the flow is implemented in an Actions & Recommendations component because the component
already displays the stages.
How: Progress indicators use stage variables to determine what stage the user is on. When a screen loads, $Flow.CurrentStage
is automatically updated to the stage that’s associated with the screen, and the stage is added to the end of $Flow.ActiveStages
if it isn’t an active stage already. Create stage resources and define the stage label, order, and whether the stage is active by default or
not. Then, select the stage resource under the Stage field of the Screen element, or assign the stage resources manually by using
assignment elements.

552
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Finally, to show a visual progress indicator, open the flow version properties. Then, select Show a progress indicator on screen
elements and then select the progress indicator type.

The user sees their progress on the page at run time.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Show Users Progress Through a Flow with Stages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

553
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Assign Stages to Screen Elements More Efficiently

Now you can assign stages to screen elements right from the screen properties editor instead of using assignment elements to set the
$Flow.CurrentStage and $Flow.ActiveStages global variables. When a screen loads, $Flow.CurrentStage is automatically updated to the
stage that’s associated with the screen, and the stage is added to the end of $Flow.ActiveStages if it isn’t an active stage already. To
show users where they are in the flow and how many stages remain, use the built-in progress indicator or a custom progress indicator.
Where: This change applies to both Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) and Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Create your stage resources. For every stage resource, specify the stage label and order, and select whether the stage is active by
default or not. Then, when you’re ready to assign a stage to a screen element, from the Screen properties editor, find and select the stage
resource under the Stage field.

When used together with the progress indicator, the user sees the stage that they’re in at run time.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Show Users Progress Through a Flow with Stages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

User Experience Updates

Search and filter automations with the new flow creation experience. Find and select resources up to 10 layers deep with nested search.
Find and manage different versions of a flow from within Flow Builder. Troubleshoot your flow with an improved Errors and Warnings
pane. Undo, redo, and save as with keyboard shortcuts. Create text templates and formula flow resources more easily.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Flows with a New Streamlined Creation Experience
We reorganized the flow creation window to help you create the automation you need quickly and more efficiently. Flows are
separated into four main categories, and you can filter and search to find the automation you need.

554
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Search for Nested Resources

When searching for and selecting resources in Flow Builder, resource pickers can now traverse up to 10 layers deep. Nested search
is automatically enabled in Decision, Create Records, Assignment, Loop, Subflow, Sort, Orchestrator Stage, and Orchestrator Step
elements. Nested search is also enabled for other elements, but can contain a mix of the older and newer resource pickers.
Access Flow Versions in Flow Builder
Quickly manage different versions of a flow and view the status of each version in Flow Builder. To see a flow’s versions, click the
flow’s name in the Flow Builder navigation header. Clicking on a different version opens that version in Flow Builder in a new browser
tab.
Troubleshoot Your Flow Configuration with Improvements to the Errors and Warning Pane
You can now dismiss warnings that you don't want to see again from the Errors and Warnings pane. The pane also includes more
actionable messages for all elements, with links that direct you to the source of the error on the Flow Builder canvas. Errors are
grouped by element so that you can address them more efficiently.
Create New Text Template and Formula Flow Resources More Easily
Flow Builder extends enhanced resource selection in creating text template and formula flow resources with improved grouping
and user-friendly labeling. These improvements make it easier for you to discover the resources that you need.
Navigate Collection Filter Flow Child Resources Efficiently
You can now search for and select child resources of the Collection Filter element in the updated resource menu within a flow.
Previously, you selected the element of the child resource first, and then you selected the child resource.
Undo, Redo, and Save As with Keyboard Shortcuts
Increase your productivity with new keyboard shortcuts for undo, redo, and save as.

Create Flows with a New Streamlined Creation Experience

We reorganized the flow creation window to help you create the automation you need quickly and more efficiently. Flows are separated
into four main categories, and you can filter and search to find the automation you need.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
How: To access the new flow creation experience, click New Flow from the Automation Lightning app.

Search for Nested Resources

When searching for and selecting resources in Flow Builder, resource pickers can now traverse up to 10 layers deep. Nested search is
automatically enabled in Decision, Create Records, Assignment, Loop, Subflow, Sort, Orchestrator Stage, and Orchestrator Step elements.
Nested search is also enabled for other elements, but can contain a mix of the older and newer resource pickers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.

555
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Access Flow Versions in Flow Builder

Quickly manage different versions of a flow and view the status of each version in Flow Builder. To see a flow’s versions, click the flow’s
name in the Flow Builder navigation header. Clicking on a different version opens that version in Flow Builder in a new browser tab.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
How: To access different flow versions and see their statuses, click the name of the flow in the Flow Builder navigation header.

Troubleshoot Your Flow Configuration with Improvements to the Errors and Warning Pane
You can now dismiss warnings that you don't want to see again from the Errors and Warnings pane. The pane also includes more
actionable messages for all elements, with links that direct you to the source of the error on the Flow Builder canvas. Errors are grouped
by element so that you can address them more efficiently.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
How: Create a flow, and then click the Show Error icon.

556
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Create New Text Template and Formula Flow Resources More Easily
Flow Builder extends enhanced resource selection in creating text template and formula flow resources with improved grouping and
user-friendly labeling. These improvements make it easier for you to discover the resources that you need.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Create or open a flow in Flow Builder, and then click New Resource under the Manager panel. For the resource type, select Text
Template or Formula. Insert a resource by entering a value or search for resources. The clickable breadcrumb path (1) helps you identify
where you are and navigate resource groups. You can recognize resource types quickly with more intuitive icons.

557
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Navigate Collection Filter Flow Child Resources Efficiently

You can now search for and select child resources of the Collection Filter element in the updated resource menu within a flow. Previously,
you selected the element of the child resource first, and then you selected the child resource.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Create or open a flow. Then add or edit a Collection Filter element. Click in the Apply Filter Conditions field and value. The clickable
breadcrumb path (1) helps you identify where you are and navigate resource groups. Recognize resource types quickly with more
intuitive icons. To get helpful information (2) about a resource, hover over the resource’s info icon. To create a resource quickly, click
New Resource (3).

558
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Undo, Redo, and Save As with Keyboard Shortcuts

Increase your productivity with new keyboard shortcuts for undo, redo, and save as.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, and
Developer editions.
How: Use these shortcuts to undo, redo, or save as:

Command Shortcut
Undo Windows: Ctrl+Z
macOS: Cmd+Z

Redo Windows: Ctrl+Y

macOS: Cmd+Y

Save As Windows: Shift+Ctrl+S

macOS: Shift+Cmd+S

Note: These keyboard shortcuts are available on the Flow Builder canvas and element configuration panels. They aren’t supported
in element window pop-ups.
In Flow Builder, press Ctrl+/ or Cmd+/ to view keyboard shortcuts.

Get Help Building Flows Faster and More Accurately with Einstein (Generally Available)
Get Einstein to use the power of generative AI and automatically build flows for you based on your instructions. Describe what you want
to automate, and Einstein takes care of the rest. This feature, which is now generally available, includes some changes since the beta
release. Einstein now generates more accurate flows, and it does so faster than before. You can help Einstein get even better by using
the prominent feedback buttons to provide feedback on your flows.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Sales,
Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience. To purchase the Einstein for
Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.

Important: Flow creation with Einstein consumes Einstein Requests credits. Einstein Requests is a usage metric for generative
AI. The use of generative AI capabilities, in either a production or sandbox environment, consumes Einstein Requests. To learn
more, see Einstein Usage.
How:
Turn on Einstein generative AI in Setup. Next, from Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter Flow Creation with Einstein, and
activate it. Create a flow by using the Automation Lightning app. In the Let Einstein Build your Automation section, click Get Started.

559
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Write instructions from scratch (1), or get started with sample instructions (2).

After your draft flow opens in Flow Builder, check the flow for accuracy and safety. Also, before activating, be sure to debug and test the
flow.
To get more accurate results from Einstein, share your feedback in the Einstein panel by clicking thumbs up or thumbs down (1). If the
flow doesn’t meet your needs, edit the instructions or start over (2) in a new window.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Build a Flow with Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Generate a Detailed Description of a Flow with Einstein

560
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Generate a Detailed Description of a Flow with Einstein

Maintaining a flow can be challenging, especially if you didn’t create it. Without a detailed flow description, it can be tough to figure
out what the flow does. Now you can use Einstein to summarize an existing flow or a new one as you create it. The summary describes
all the flow steps and includes the input and output variables, the objects that the flow changes, and the subflows that the flow refers
to. You can then add the generated summary to the flow description to keep everyone informed.
Where:This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Sales, Einstein
for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience. To purchase the Einstein for Sales,
Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: Turn on Einstein generative AI in Setup. Next, from Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter Flow Creation with Einstein,
and activate it. To summarize a flow, open it in Flow Builder. In the Einstein panel, click Summarize Flow. The Einsten panel is open by

default. If you don't see it, click Einstein .

After you generate the summary, you can shorten or lengthen it (1). The standard summary provides a high-level overview and includes
the objects that were modified in the flow. The shorter version summarizes the flow in one or two sentences.

You can then add the summary to the flow description (2). If your flow has an existing description, you can update the description.
Updating the description replaces the existing description with the flow summary.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Summarize Flows with Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

561
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Get Help Creating Flow Formulas with Einstein (Generally Available)

Build flow formulas with ease by describing what you want to calculate and letting Einstein generative AI figure out the functions and
operators for you. Formulas created by Einstein are available only in Flow Formula Builder. Generative AI can produce inaccurate or
harmful responses, so it’s important to test your formula for accuracy and safety before activating your flow. This feature is now generally
available.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Sales,
Einstein for Service, or Einstein for Platform add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience. To purchase Einstein for
Sales, Einstein for Platform, or Einstein for Service add-ons, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: Turn on Einstein generative AI in Setup. Then, in Setup, find and select Process Automation Settings, and enable formulas
created by Einstein.
To create formulas with Einstein, open a Formula resource or an element with Formula Builder. Open the Einstein section and click the
Einstein button (1). Describe the formula you want Einstein to create (2). When adding resources to your formula description, use the
resource menu (3) to select them instead of manually writing them in. Click Create (4).

After Einstein creates the formula (5), check its syntax to make sure it’s set up correctly (6) and test your formula for accuracy and safety
before activating the flow.

562
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Creating Flow Formulas with Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Join Collections with the Transform Element

Combine source collections from related flow resources into one target collection. For example, you can combine order records from
an external system with Salesforce orders to get a combined data structure that is displayed in a data table in a flow screen. The flow
screen shows each order along with the amount and the quantities.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance,
and Developer editions.
How: From Flow Builder, add the Transform element. Add two flow resources for the source collections. Add a target collection that
stores the combined data from the source collections.

563
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Configure the join keys for each source collection, and select the join fields to return into the target collection.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Join Collections in a Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

564
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Send Emails with Attachments in Flow Builder

Enhance your Flow Builder emails by sharing documents or files with your recipients by using Send Email action. To attach a file, provide
the ID of a file to the Send Email action. The maximum size of the email created, including attachments, is 35 MB.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Flow Builder, in the element menu, search for and select Send Email. When you set input values, turn on the Attachment ID
field, and then add the ID of the attachment. The ID can be of a Document, Content Version, or Attachment items. If you want to add
more attachment IDs, enter them as a comma-delimited list.

Note: Using attachments in the Send Email action changes the API called by the action, which changes the daily email send limit
to the General Email Limit instead of the Daily Workflow Email Limit.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Core Action: Send Email (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Apex Reference Guide: SingleEmailMessage Methods

565
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Retrieve More Information from Data Cloud by Using Newly Supported Data Types
Flow Builder now supports these additional data types from Data Cloud: Email, URL, Phone, Percent, Boolean, and Currency. Use Data
Model Object (DMO) and Calculated Insight Object (CIO) fields of the newly supported data types to set entry conditions in Data Cloud
triggered flows, send data to Data Cloud with the Send to Data Cloud action, and specify filter conditions in the Get Records element.
Fields of these data types now appear in the $Record resource.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions where Data Cloud is
enabled.
How: Open a Data Cloud triggered flow. Where Data Cloud fields are supported, select a DMO or CIO field of one of the newly supported
data types. Configure the rest of the flow. Save and run the flow.

566
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Launch an Active Autolaunched Flow as a Subflow Within a Prompt Flow

Now in Flow Builder, you can include an active autolaunched flow as a referenced flow in a prompt flow. Previously, you could only
reference other prompt flows within a prompt flow. Referenced autolaunched flows with Wait elements aren’t supported.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available
in Lightning Experience.
How: Create a template-triggered prompt flow. Select a prompt template type that triggers the flow, and then set the input data type.
Add the Subflow element to the canvas. Search for and select the autolaunched flow to be referenced. Use values from the parent flow
to set the inputs for the referenced prompt flow.
To use the outputs of the referenced flow later in the flow, either reference the output of the Subflow element or store them as manually
assigned variables.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Element: Subflow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance Flow Performance by Controlling the Number of Records Retrieved with Get Records
When you work with large datasets, you can hit performance issues or governor limits if you use the Get Records element to retrieve all
records. If you set an upper limit to control data retrieval, you improve flow performance and reduce the risk of timeouts or errors. Use
the All records, up to a specified limit option to set an upper limit on the number of records to retrieve.
Where:This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To set a limit on the number of records that the Get Records element retrieves, first add a Get Records element to your flow. Then,
under How Many Records to Store, select All Records, up to a specified limit (1). Enter the maximum number of records to store (2).
The Get Records element retrieves all the records that meet the criteria up to the specified limit.

567
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Element: Get Records (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Flow for Marketing Cloud

Automate your responses to customer actions with automation events. Manually select a winning path in the Path Experiment element.
Define flow triggers by using real-time data from Data Cloud. Access data graph attributes in Decision elements, exit rules, and campaign
emails.

IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Your Responses to Common Customer Actions with More Automation Events
Streamline how you respond to customer behaviors with more Salesforce-provided events in automation event-triggered flows.
Trigger a flow based on key business events such as WhatsApp channel subscriptions, message interactions, SMS link clicks, email
engagements, cart abandonment, and communication issues such as bounced emails or failed message deliveries. You can also
respond to events that signal an issue with one of your communication channels such as a bounced email or a failure to deliver a
WhatsApp or SMS message.
Pick a Winning Path, Test Subsets of your Audience, and More in the Path Experiment Element
After you determine which path is working the best for your customer journey, you can manually select that winning path in the
Path Experiment element. You can also set a subset of your audience to run the experiment on, keeping the remainder of your
audience on hold as you determine the winning path. Path Experiment is now also supported in Automation Event-Triggered flows,
so you can create experiments that are triggered off of form submissions and more.

568
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Define Your Own Flow Trigger by Using Real-Time Data from Data Cloud
In an automation event-triggered flow, define event conditions that trigger the flow by using real-time data from Data Cloud without
persisting the event to the Event Library. To define the event, you select a data graph and a data model object that include the fields
that trigger the flow, and then specify the conditions that trigger the flow. You can choose to trigger the flow every time conditions
are met, the first time conditions are met, or any time the conditions evaluate from false to true. You can also choose whether a user
can start the flow multiple times concurrently.
Personalize Your Flows with Access to Data Cloud Data in More Elements
Now you can access data graph attributes in Decision elements, exit rules, and the Content tab of campaign emails. To access data
graph attributes in a Decision element, your flow must include a Wait for Amount of Time element before the Decision element
with the Amount of Time set to 24 hours or more. This delay gives Marketing Cloud's data engine time to establish the identity of
the individual in the flow. Similarly, exit rules that reference data graph attributes are executed 24 hours after you activate the flow.
View Metrics in Flow Builder with Embedded Analytics
Your flow element metrics are more clearly displayed on the Flow Builder canvas with element cards. With element cards, detailed
metrics are just a single click away. The embedded analytics include a more granular visual breakdown of the element’s status.
Previously, the element graph showed only successes and errors. This feature was formerly named on-canvas insights.
Preview and Test WhatsApp Messages
In the Send WhatsApp Message action, you can preview and test your messages to make sure that your messages are properly
formatted before you send them out.
Debug Automation Event-Triggered Flows
Understand a customer’s path through an automation event-triggered flow with support for debugging. Specify a triggering event
and see how your flow responds. For example, see how your flow progresses when an order with a particular order number is placed
or when an email subscription event is received for a given individual. Restart the flow anytime to specify different parameters.

Automate Your Responses to Common Customer Actions with More Automation Events
Streamline how you respond to customer behaviors with more Salesforce-provided events in automation event-triggered flows. Trigger
a flow based on key business events such as WhatsApp channel subscriptions, message interactions, SMS link clicks, email engagements,
cart abandonment, and communication issues such as bounced emails or failed message deliveries. You can also respond to events that
signal an issue with one of your communication channels such as a bounced email or a failure to deliver a WhatsApp or SMS message.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for Marketing Cloud Growth Edition.
Who: To create automation event-triggered flows, users need the Manage Flow permission or the Create or Modify Automation
Event-Triggered Flows permission.
How: From the Flows or Campaigns tab, create an automation event-triggered flow. In the Start node, select an Event from the Event
Library, such as Email Subscription. Configure the event. Save and run the flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Event Library (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Triggering Flows After a Business Event with Automation Event Triggers (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Pick a Winning Path, Test Subsets of your Audience, and More in the Path Experiment Element
After you determine which path is working the best for your customer journey, you can manually select that winning path in the Path
Experiment element. You can also set a subset of your audience to run the experiment on, keeping the remainder of your audience on
hold as you determine the winning path. Path Experiment is now also supported in Automation Event-Triggered flows, so you can create
experiments that are triggered off of form submissions and more.

569
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for Salesforce Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Advanced
edition.
How: To select a winning path, select the Path Experiment element on the Flow Builder canvas. In the Winning Path dropdown, select
the path that you want to designate as the winning path. Selecting a winning path sends all new, remaining, and delayed group members
of your audience down that path, including audience members that have entered the flow but haven't yet entered the experiment. By
selecting a winning path you can make changes to the flow without creating a new flow version.

To experiment on a subset of your audience, select Test a subset of your audience in the Path Experiment properties panel. Enter the
percentage of the audience that you want to enter the experiment, and a duration for how long to leave the delayed group out of the
experiment. If the duration expires, the delayed group is released to the experiment and randomly assigned paths based on your path
distribution percentages. Testing a subset of the audience is available only for flows that are set to run once.

Define Your Own Flow Trigger by Using Real-Time Data from Data Cloud
In an automation event-triggered flow, define event conditions that trigger the flow by using real-time data from Data Cloud without
persisting the event to the Event Library. To define the event, you select a data graph and a data model object that include the fields
that trigger the flow, and then specify the conditions that trigger the flow. You can choose to trigger the flow every time conditions are
met, the first time conditions are met, or any time the conditions evaluate from false to true. You can also choose whether a user can
start the flow multiple times concurrently.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for Marketing Cloud Growth Edition.
Who: To create automation event-triggered flows, users need the Manage Flow permission or the Create or Modify Automation
Event-Triggered Flows permission.

570
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

How: From the Flows or Campaigns tab, create an automation event-triggered flow. In the Start node, click Select Event. In the Event
Library, select Custom Real-Time Data Cloud Event. Configure the event. Configure the rest of the flow. Save and run the flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Event Library (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Triggering Flows After a Business Event with Automation Event Triggers (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Personalize Your Flows with Access to Data Cloud Data in More Elements
Now you can access data graph attributes in Decision elements, exit rules, and the Content tab of campaign emails. To access data graph
attributes in a Decision element, your flow must include a Wait for Amount of Time element before the Decision element with the
Amount of Time set to 24 hours or more. This delay gives Marketing Cloud's data engine time to establish the identity of the individual
in the flow. Similarly, exit rules that reference data graph attributes are executed 24 hours after you activate the flow.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for Marketing Cloud Growth Edition.
Who: To manage flows, users need the Manage Flow permission or the View Flows, Create or Edit Flows, and Activate or Deactivate
Flows permissions.
How: From the Flows or Campaigns tab, create a segment-triggered or automation event-triggered flow. Configure the flow and
reference a data graph attribute in the flow. For example, add an exit rule to the flow with a condition that includes a data graph attribute
as a resource. Save and run the flow.

View Metrics in Flow Builder with Embedded Analytics

Your flow element metrics are more clearly displayed on the Flow Builder canvas with element cards. With element cards, detailed
metrics are just a single click away. The embedded analytics include a more granular visual breakdown of the element’s status. Previously,
the element graph showed only successes and errors. This feature was formerly named on-canvas insights.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for Salesforce Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth
or Advanced editions.
How: On the Flow Builder canvas, each element is represented by a card that shows its metrics. Click on a card to see a more detailed
breakdown of the element’s metrics.

571
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Preview and Test WhatsApp Messages

In the Send WhatsApp Message action, you can preview and test your messages to make sure that your messages are properly formatted
before you send them out.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
How: In the element’s configuration panel, click the dropdown menu on the WhatsApp message and then click Preview and Test.
From there, you can preview the message by using a marketing segment, or send test messages to specific numbers.

Debug Automation Event-Triggered Flows

Understand a customer’s path through an automation event-triggered flow with support for debugging. Specify a triggering event and
see how your flow responds. For example, see how your flow progresses when an order with a particular order number is placed or
when an email subscription event is received for a given individual. Restart the flow anytime to specify different parameters.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for Marketing Cloud Growth Edition.
Who: To create automation event-triggered flows, users need the Manage Flow permission or the Create or Modify Automation
Event-Triggered Flows permission.
How: Open an automation event-triggered flow. Click Debug. Set the debug options and input variables. Click Run. Review the Debug
Details pane.

Flow Testing and Debugging

Debug flows more easily with a more readable Debug Details pane.

IN THIS SECTION:
Debug Flows at a Glance with the Improved Debugging Experience
The debugging experience for flows now includes element-level summaries to help you understand more quickly what happened
at each point in a flow. For example, for an Update Records element, the Debug Details pane shows at a glance how many elements
were updated after the element was executed.

SEE ALSO:
Troubleshoot Your Flow Configuration with Improvements to the Errors and Warning Pane

Debug Flows at a Glance with the Improved Debugging Experience

The debugging experience for flows now includes element-level summaries to help you understand more quickly what happened at
each point in a flow. For example, for an Update Records element, the Debug Details pane shows at a glance how many elements were
updated after the element was executed.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for record-triggered flows and flows in Marketing Cloud Growth Edition.
How: Open a supported flow. Click Debug. Set the debug options and input variables. Click Run. Review the Debug Details pane.

Flow Runtime
Versioned updates are available for flows that are configured to run on API version 63.0.

572
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

IN THIS SECTION:
Flow and Process Run-Time Changes
Get new flow updates with these versioned changes.

Flow and Process Run-Time Changes

Get new flow updates with these versioned changes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Essentials, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. These updates affect flows only if they're configured to run on API version
63.0 or later.
How: With versioned updates you can test and adopt run-time behavior changes for individual flows and processes at your convenience.
To change the run-time API version of a flow, open it in Flow Builder and edit the flow version properties. To change the run-time API
version of a process, open it in Process Builder and edit its properties.
Clear a Reactive Data Table If the Source Collection Isn't Set
If a Data Table component's source collection is the output of a screen action, and the screen action's autolaunched flow doesn't
set a value for the output collection, the Data Table contents are cleared. For example, let's say that a Data Table component is
populated with records from a screen action's output record collection. Then, the screen action is triggered again, but this time the
output record collection isn't assigned any records. The records that were in the Data Table from the first time the screen action ran
are now cleared from the Data Table. Previously, the records that were in the Data Table from the first time the screen action ran
would remain in the Data Table.
See Feedback from Screen Components with Invalid Values
Now your flow user can see whether an input value in a flow screen component is invalid when the user changes the focus to outside
the component. Previously, component validation error messages appeared only when you moved to another screen or finished
the flow. See View Immediate Feedback from Screen Components with Invalid Values.
Variables with Same Names in Parent and Referenced Flows Were Changed
Variables with the same API names in a referenced flow and parent flow no longer inherit values from the parent flow. For example,
a screen flow creates an account that assigns a value to the group_type variable. The screen flow includes the Subflow element that
executes a referenced flow. The referenced flow also includes a group_type variable. The Decision element in the referenced flow
checks the value of the group_type variable that’s set in the referenced flow and not inherited from the parent flow. The flow follows
different outcome paths depending on the value of the group_type variable.

Flow Management
Promote your tested Data Cloud triggered flows from sandbox to production environments. View failed and paused flow interviews
from the Automation Lightning app.

IN THIS SECTION:
Copy Data Cloud-Triggered Flows from Sandbox to Production
Integrate Data Cloud-triggered flow changes made in a sandbox environment back into the production environment using changesets.
Thorough testing in a sandbox helps make sure that only high-quality changes are deployed to production, because you can identify
and fix issues before they impact your production environment.
Monitor All Failed and Paused Flow Interviews from the Automation Lightning app
The new Monitor tab in the Automation Lightning app is your one-stop shop for finding all your failed and paused flow interviews.
The Monitor tab provides valuable data about why a flow interview failed. Debug failed flow interviews and resume paused flow
interviews all from the Automation Lightning app. Having the necessary information in one place helps ensure smooth and
uninterrupted business operations and improves overall efficiency and productivity.

573
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Copy Data Cloud-Triggered Flows from Sandbox to Production

Integrate Data Cloud-triggered flow changes made in a sandbox environment back into the production environment using changesets.
Thorough testing in a sandbox helps make sure that only high-quality changes are deployed to production, because you can identify
and fix issues before they impact your production environment.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions where Data Cloud is enabled.

Monitor All Failed and Paused Flow Interviews from the Automation Lightning app
The new Monitor tab in the Automation Lightning app is your one-stop shop for finding all your failed and paused flow interviews. The
Monitor tab provides valuable data about why a flow interview failed. Debug failed flow interviews and resume paused flow interviews
all from the Automation Lightning app. Having the necessary information in one place helps ensure smooth and uninterrupted business
operations and improves overall efficiency and productivity.
Where:This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: If you’ve enabled access to the Automation Lightning app, the Monitor tab automatically becomes available. View all the paused
and failed flow interviews on the Monitor tab.

To debug a failed flow interview, on the Details page of the failed flow interview, click Open.

To resume a pause flow interview, on the Details page of the paused flow interview, click Resume.

574
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor and Manage Paused and Failed Flow Runs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Flow Extensions
Create a Lightning web component that enhance a flow screen component’s error message experience at run time.

IN THIS SECTION:
Design Component Errors for a Better Experience
Your developers can now enhance error handling at run time for your Lightning web component on a flow screen. Previously, the
input validation error message from the flow appeared only under the component. Now components that manage their own
validation can control how and where errors appear without the risk of showing duplicate errors. Use the @api interface to
implement the existing validate() method and the new methods setCustomValidity(externalErrorMessage:
string) and reportValidity().

Design Component Errors for a Better Experience

Your developers can now enhance error handling at run time for your Lightning web component on a flow screen. Previously, the input
validation error message from the flow appeared only under the component. Now components that manage their own validation can
control how and where errors appear without the risk of showing duplicate errors. Use the @api interface to implement the existing
validate() method and the new methods setCustomValidity(externalErrorMessage: string) and
reportValidity().
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. It’s not supported in Classic runtime for flows.
Why: Previously, if the component contained an invalid input, the flow displayed an input validation error message below the component
at run time. If the component also contained validation logic that displayed an error message, the flow user saw duplicate error messages.
Now you can customize how to display the error messages.
How: For components that contain validation logic, you can now implement these methods to take control of rendering errors.
• validate()
• setCustomValidity(externalErrorMessage: string)
• reportValidity()

575
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

For existing component validation, you can keep the same logic that's contained in the validate() method. Like before, the flow
calls the validate() method when a flow user navigates to the next screen or finishes the flow. The flow calls the new
setCustomValidity(externalErrorMessage: string) method when there are input validation errors. When the
setCustomValidity(externalErrorMessage: string) method is called, the component stores the input validation
error message from the flow, so it can be displayed later. The flow calls the reportValidity() method when it’s time to render
any errors that your component is aware of.

Flow and Process Release Updates

Salesforce Flow has several release updates that are scheduled to be enforced in future releases.

IN THIS SECTION:
Enable Secure Redirection for Flows (Release Update)
To protect your users and network, apply stricter validation to the flow URL parameter that determines where you redirect users
after they complete a screen flow. With stricter validation, Salesforce blocks requests to redirect users to URLs that don’t meet the
additional validation requirements unless they’re on your list of trusted URLs in Setup. When Salesforce blocks a request, users see
an invalid-page redirection error. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.
Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs (Release Update)
This update enables permission requirements to be enforced for built-in Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It also
guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the current component context. Currently, Apex actions rely on the previous
component context. This behavior leads to failed flow interviews when the flow includes an Apex action that contains a built-in
Apex class with permission requirements as input. This release update was first available in Summer ’24 and was scheduled to be
enforced in Spring ’25, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ’26.
Enforce Rollbacks for Apex Action Exceptions in REST API (Release Update)
This update was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’25. Starting Spring ’25, Salesforce no longer enforces this update, but recommends
enabling it. Once enabled, it preserves data integrity by rolling back transactions that end in an exception. When you execute an
Apex action using the REST API, the API call doesn’t change Salesforce data if that exception occurs.
Enhance Flexibility and Reusability in Prompt Flows (Release Update)
This update removes the ability to specify a flex prompt template type from a template-triggered prompt flow. Instead, create
template-triggered prompt flows that use manual inputs because the flows aren’t limited to a single prompt template type. You
must update existing flows that reference flex prompt template types to use manual inputs. This update is available starting in Winter
’25.
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder (Release Update)
This update fixes a bug with the evaluation criteria in processes that have multiple criteria and a record update. This release update
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with
a value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
Restrict User Access to Run Flows (Release Update)
This update was first made available in Winter ’24 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’25, but we postponed the enforcement
to Winter ’26. With this update enabled, Salesforce restricts a user’s ability to run a flow. A user must be granted the correct profile
or permission set to run the flow. When enabled, this release update deprecates the FlowSites org permission, which gave all users
in the org access to run any flow. With this update, flows run more securely because only users who are granted correct profiles or
permission sets can run flows. Salesforce postponed the enforcement to allow additional time for admins to test and prepare for
the change. There is no impact to admins who already enabled the update. We appreciate your adoption of this change.
Sort Apex Batch Action Results by Request Order (Release Update)
This update enables Apex batch action results to be returned in the order the requests are received. Currently, error-prone requests
are prioritized at the top of the result list, while successful ones are positioned at the bottom.

576
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

Enable Secure Redirection for Flows (Release Update)

To protect your users and network, apply stricter validation to the flow URL parameter that determines where you redirect users after
they complete a screen flow. With stricter validation, Salesforce blocks requests to redirect users to URLs that don’t meet the additional
validation requirements unless they’re on your list of trusted URLs in Setup. When Salesforce blocks a request, users see an invalid-page
redirection error. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update starting in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status,
search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
the Enable Secure Redirection for Flows release update, review the documentation links that describe valid redirection URLs, and then
follow the testing and activation steps.

SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Salesforce Help: Customize a Flow URL to Control Finish Behavior
Salesforce Help: Manage Redirections to External URLs

Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs (Release Update)
This update enables permission requirements to be enforced for built-in Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It also
guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the current component context. Currently, Apex actions rely on the previous
component context. This behavior leads to failed flow interviews when the flow includes an Apex action that contains a built-in Apex
class with permission requirements as input. This release update was first available in Summer ’24 and was scheduled to be enforced in
Spring ’25, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ’26.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Winter ’26. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: Currently, Apex actions rely on the previous component context. With this update enabled, permission requirements are enforced
for built-in Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It also guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the
current component context.
How: When this update is enabled, permission requirements for Apex inputs that use built-in Apex classes are enforced, and the affected
Apex action operates within the current component context. Then, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates,
and then select Release Updates. To get the Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs release
update, follow the testing and activation steps.

Enforce Rollbacks for Apex Action Exceptions in REST API (Release Update)
This update was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’25. Starting Spring ’25, Salesforce no longer enforces this update, but recommends
enabling it. Once enabled, it preserves data integrity by rolling back transactions that end in an exception. When you execute an Apex
action using the REST API, the API call doesn’t change Salesforce data if that exception occurs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: This update was first made available in Spring ’23 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’25. Salesforce is no longer enforcing
this update.

577
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

How: Before you apply this update, review your Apex-defined invocable actions and ensure that they don’t generate exceptions when
executed. If the output isn’t void, ensure that inputs and outputs match on both the size and order. Then, from Setup, in the Quick Find
box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get the Enforce Rollback for Apex Action Exceptions in REST
API release update, follow the testing and activation steps.

SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

Enhance Flexibility and Reusability in Prompt Flows (Release Update)

This update removes the ability to specify a flex prompt template type from a template-triggered prompt flow. Instead, create
template-triggered prompt flows that use manual inputs because the flows aren’t limited to a single prompt template type. You must
update existing flows that reference flex prompt template types to use manual inputs. This update is available starting in Winter ’25.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available
in Lightning Experience.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: Before this update is enabled or enforced, flex prompt template types are available to template-triggered prompt flows. Only a
flex prompt template type can run a template-triggered prompt flow that references the same flex prompt template type.
After this update is enabled or enforced, flex prompt template types are no longer available as prompt template types in template-triggered
prompt flows. New and existing template-triggered prompt flows are no longer associated with a flex prompt template type.
You can create template-triggered prompt flows that use manual inputs because the flows aren’t limited to a single prompt template
type. Reuse the flows across various prompt template types.
How: When this update is enabled or enforced, existing template-triggered prompt flows that reference flex templates fail to run because
the flex templates they referenced are now undefined. Existing flex templates are no longer available in template-triggered prompt
flows.
Before you enable this update, you must update existing template-triggered prompt flows that reference flex templates to use manual
inputs. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select Flows. Open each template-triggered prompt flow that uses
a flex prompt template type. Open the Start element. Make a note of the current inputs and their data types.
Change the prompt template input type from automatic to manual. For each input in the flex template, create a variable of the same
data type with Available for input selected. Because you replaced the previous input with manual variables, you must update all references
to inputs throughout the flow. Save and activate your flow.
To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Enhance
Flexibility and Reusability in Prompt Flows, follow the testing and activation steps.

Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder (Release Update)
This update fixes a bug with the evaluation criteria in processes that have multiple criteria and a record update. This release update
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with a
value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.

578
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Builder

How: To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder, follow the testing and activation steps.
If you have a process with the Do you want to execute the actions only when specified changes are made to the record? option selected, or
it uses the ISCHANGED() function in your criteria, this update can cause the process to behave differently.

SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

Restrict User Access to Run Flows (Release Update)

This update was first made available in Winter ’24 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’25, but we postponed the enforcement
to Winter ’26. With this update enabled, Salesforce restricts a user’s ability to run a flow. A user must be granted the correct profile or
permission set to run the flow. When enabled, this release update deprecates the FlowSites org permission, which gave all users in the
org access to run any flow. With this update, flows run more securely because only users who are granted correct profiles or permission
sets can run flows. Salesforce postponed the enforcement to allow additional time for admins to test and prepare for the change. There
is no impact to admins who already enabled the update. We appreciate your adoption of this change.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Essentials, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Winter ’26. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab. See the knowledge article for frequently asked questions.
Why: Previously, in some cases, all users could run all flows without profiles or permission sets. Enabling this update restricts user access
to users who are granted the profile or permission set to run the flow.
How: To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
Restrict User Access to Run Flows, follow the testing and activation steps.
After you enable Restrict User Access to Run Flows, all users must be granted access to run a flow. Add the Run Flows permission to a
permission set. For more granular access control, restrict specific flow access to an available permission set. We recommend that you
disable the Flow User preference in Setup for each user. If the Flow User preference is enabled in a user’s details in Setup, the user can
run all flows. To create, update, and delete a flow, add the Manage Flow permission. See the knowledge article for frequently asked
questions.

Sort Apex Batch Action Results by Request Order (Release Update)

This update enables Apex batch action results to be returned in the order the requests are received. Currently, error-prone requests are
prioritized at the top of the result list, while successful ones are positioned at the bottom.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: Currently, results with errors are prioritized at the top of the result list, and successful ones are positioned at the bottom. With this
change, all results are sorted by when the associated requests were received.
How: After this update is applied, Apex batch action results are ordered according to when the incoming requests were received. Then,
from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get the Enforce Permission
Requirements Defined on File-Based Apex Classes Used as Inputs release update, follow the testing and activation steps.

579
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Orchestration

Flow Orchestration
Create custom email notifications to assigned users. View improved orchestration details on the Orchestration Run details view.

IN THIS SECTION:
Customize Email Notifications for Interactive Steps
You no longer have to create a background step to send custom notification emails to assignees. Now you can configure each
interactive step to send a unique custom email notification to assignees when a work item is created. To configure a custom email
notification, in the Properties panel, select Customize notification email and provide a subject and body. If a work item is reassigned,
however, the orchestration still sends the default email notification.
View Improved Orchestration Run Details
The new layout for orchestration run details in the Automation Lightning app gives you instant insights into the execution of an
orchestration. The Run Details tab shows information about all the stages and steps in the orchestration run, including completion
times and assignees. The Work Items tab shows details about all the work items generated by the orchestration run so you can
identify work items that you want to reassign. Use the quick menu to cancel, debug, or suspend a running orchestration. You can
also resume an orchestration that was suspended or that failed because of a recoverable error from the detail page.
Other Changes to Flow Orchestration
Learn about improvements to Flow Orchestration.

Customize Email Notifications for Interactive Steps

You no longer have to create a background step to send custom notification emails to assignees. Now you can configure each interactive
step to send a unique custom email notification to assignees when a work item is created. To configure a custom email notification, in
the Properties panel, select Customize notification email and provide a subject and body. If a work item is reassigned, however, the
orchestration still sends the default email notification.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To configure a custom email, in the Interactive Step Properties panel, select Customize notification email. To personalize the
subject and body of the email, use text templates.

Note: To send default or custom emails to assignees, don’t select the Stop Sending Orchestration Work Item Email Notifications
setting in Process Automation Settings.

View Improved Orchestration Run Details

The new layout for orchestration run details in the Automation Lightning app gives you instant insights into the execution of an
orchestration. The Run Details tab shows information about all the stages and steps in the orchestration run, including completion times
and assignees. The Work Items tab shows details about all the work items generated by the orchestration run so you can identify work
items that you want to reassign. Use the quick menu to cancel, debug, or suspend a running orchestration. You can also resume an
orchestration that was suspended or that failed because of a recoverable error from the detail page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Other Changes to Flow Orchestration

Learn about improvements to Flow Orchestration.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

580
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Flow Approval Processes

Enhanced Sales To Do List

When you click an orchestration work item in the Sales To Do List, the link now takes you to the related record page, where you can
complete the work item in the Work Guide.

Automatically Detect Background Step Processing

Background steps now automatically determine whether their referenced flow must be run synchronously or asynchronously. As a result
of this change, we removed the Contains external callouts or wait elements checkbox from the Background Step properties panel.

Updated Process Automation Setting

Because you can now Customize Email Notifications for Interactive Steps, we changed the Process Automation setting controlling
whether orchestrations send email notifications. The Stop Sending Orchestration Work Item Email Notifications replaces the Stop Sending
Orchestration Work Item Default Email Notifications.

Improved Step Properties Panel

To save space in the Properties panel for orchestrations, we removed the graphic that used to appear when a flow referenced by an
orchestration step has no input parameters.

Improved Validation Messages

Validation error messages are now clearer and easier to understand when you’re building an orchestration.

Flow Approval Processes

Build approval orchestrations that involve multiple people over multiple stages with multiple flows. Assign an approval work item to an
individual, a public group, or a queue. Send notifications to people who submit approvals and the assigned approvers and their delegates.
Display approval work items to approvers on relevant record pages.
The Flow Approval Processes feature is suitable for complex and evolving business needs. It offers flexibility and customization, supporting
detailed logging for compliance and audit trails. Approval orchestrations built with Flow Approval Processes support dynamic routing
that adapts based on data and business rules. Approval processes built with classic Approval Processes are tied to specific objects with
limited support for processes using conditions and rely on the Submit for Approval button. Approval orchestrations provide a more
flexible and user-friendly interface, using record triggers or custom buttons in Lightning App Builder. Finally, when an approval orchestration
runs, you can monitor its progress to gain insight into performance and to help identify bottlenecks.

IN THIS SECTION:
Assign Approval Steps to Groups or Queues
Keep approvals moving smoothly by assigning an approval step to a queue or public group instead of a specific person. All queue
or public group members and their delegates receive an email when the approval work item is created. If more than one person
starts the work item, the first person to approve or reject it completes the step. Anyone else who tries to approve or reject the work
item gets an error. As soon as the first person approves or rejects the work item, no one else can see it on the related record. Public
groups are groups with a type of Regular. Queues are groups with a type of Queue.

581
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Streamline External System Integration with MuleSoft for Flow:
Integration (Generally Available)

Send Notifications to Approval Users

Keep approval users apprised of the status of approvals they submit and notify approvers and their delegates when they have
assigned approval work items. You can configure each approval step to send an email notification that includes details about the
record to be approved. The custom email is sent to approvers and their delegates when the associated approval work item is created.
If you reassign an approval work item, the newly assigned approver and their delegates receive default email notifications. You can
also turn off emails to the people who submit approvals or to the approvers and their delegates.
Reply to Emails to Approve or Reject Approval Work Item
Approvers have choices when it comes to approving or rejecting their assigned approval work items. Approvers can run the screen
flow associated with their approval step to approve or reject their assigned approval work item. Or approvers or their delegates can
approve or reject the assigned approval work item by replying to their notification email.

Assign Approval Steps to Groups or Queues

Keep approvals moving smoothly by assigning an approval step to a queue or public group instead of a specific person. All queue or
public group members and their delegates receive an email when the approval work item is created. If more than one person starts the
work item, the first person to approve or reject it completes the step. Anyone else who tries to approve or reject the work item gets an
error. As soon as the first person approves or rejects the work item, no one else can see it on the related record. Public groups are groups
with a type of Regular. Queues are groups with a type of Queue.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Send Notifications to Approval Users

Keep approval users apprised of the status of approvals they submit and notify approvers and their delegates when they have assigned
approval work items. You can configure each approval step to send an email notification that includes details about the record to be
approved. The custom email is sent to approvers and their delegates when the associated approval work item is created. If you reassign
an approval work item, the newly assigned approver and their delegates receive default email notifications. You can also turn off emails
to the people who submit approvals or to the approvers and their delegates.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Reply to Emails to Approve or Reject Approval Work Item

Approvers have choices when it comes to approving or rejecting their assigned approval work items. Approvers can run the screen flow
associated with their approval step to approve or reject their assigned approval work item. Or approvers or their delegates can approve
or reject the assigned approval work item by replying to their notification email.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Streamline External System Integration with MuleSoft for Flow: Integration

(Generally Available)
MuleSoft for Flow: Integration provides no-code connectivity to external systems using third-party connectors. Create flows where
third-party connectors act as triggers or actions. These connectors facilitate data and information exchange between different systems
and provide in-line field mapping capabilities for improved data accuracy. Manage all your org’s connections in a single view with the
new Connections tab in the Automation Lightning app.
MuleSoft for Flow: Integration provides:
• No-Code Connectivity: Use third-party connectors in your flows to connect to external systems without writing code, making
integration faster and more accessible.

582
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Streamline External System Integration with MuleSoft for Flow:
Integration (Generally Available)

• Centralized Connection Management: Manage all your org’s connections in a single view with the Connections tab in the
Automation Lightning app, simplifying access and authorization.
• Enhanced Workflow Efficiency: Automate processes with External System Change-Triggered flows, which respond to events from
external systems, streamlining workflow management.
• Seamless Data Mapping: Leverage in-line transform capabilities to map fields in flows to fields in third-party connectors.

IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance Data Exchange with Third-Party Connectors
Use third-party connectors in flows for no-code connectivity to external systems. Users can create a flow with a third-party connector
as a trigger or an action. Also, users can use third-party connectors to facilitate data and information exchange between different
systems.
Manage External System Integrations in the Connections Tab
Manage all your org’s connections in a single view with the Connections tab in the Automation Lightning app. Each connection
provides access and authorization configurations, along with metadata for specific APIs or objects. Use these connections multiple
times in flows for enhanced automation and integration.
Trigger Flows from External Systems
Create External System Change-Triggered flows to connect and automate processes based on events from external systems. External
System Change-Triggered flows are triggered when a third-party system is polled and the results indicate that there was a change
in the connected external system. This new flow type improves workflow efficiency by managing external events with ease.
Map Flow Fields to Fields in Third-Party Systems
Use in-line transform capabilities to map fields in flows to fields in third-party connectors. Existing transform capabilities are now
embedded in each connector action, allowing the connector to intelligently present the target data based on the third-party system.
Apply transformations and formulas in-line to improve data integrity and workflow accuracy.

Enhance Data Exchange with Third-Party Connectors

Use third-party connectors in flows for no-code connectivity to external systems. Users can create a flow with a third-party connector
as a trigger or an action. Also, users can use third-party connectors to facilitate data and information exchange between different systems.
For example, when using a third-party connector as a trigger, when creating a new Contact in NetSuite, the flow creates a Lead in
Salesforce. Or, when using a third-party connector as an action, when an Order is created or updated in Salesforce, the flow creates a
Sales Order in NetSuite.
The following connectors are generally available:
• Abstract Company Enrichment

• Abstract Email Validator

• Abstract Phone Validator

• Adobe Marketo Engage

• Anthropic

• Asana

• Bloomfire

• Calendly

• Clockify

583
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Streamline External System Integration with MuleSoft for Flow:
Integration (Generally Available)

• Courier

• DHL Tracking

• Discord

• Eventbrite

• Freshdesk

• Gmail

• Google BigQuery

• Google Calendar

• Google Gemini

• Google Sheets

• Guru

• HubSpot

• Intercom

• Jira

• Maxio (Chargify)

• Microsoft Entra ID

• Microsoft Excel

• Microsoft Outlook

• Microsoft Power BI

• Microsoft Teams

• Moosend

• NetSuite

• OpenAI

• OpenWeatherMap

• PagerDuty

• PayPal

• Qualtrics

• QuickBooks Online

• Salesforce

• Salesforce Marketing Cloud

• SignUpGenius

584
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Streamline External System Integration with MuleSoft for Flow:
Integration (Generally Available)

• Square

• SurveyMonkey

• Twilio

• WordPress

• Zendesk

• Zoom

• Zuora

Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions. Connections
can be edited or deleted only in the Automation Lightning app. MuleSoft for Flow: Integration is available for an additional cost as an
add-on license.
Who: To create, view, edit, and delete connections, users need the Manage Integration Connections permission.
How: Use third-party connectors to either trigger a flow or as an action within a flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Third-Party Connectors Reference (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Third-Party Connectors and External System Change-Triggered Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Flow with a Third-Party Connector as a Trigger (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Flow with a Third-Party Connector as an Action (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Manage External System Integrations in the Connections Tab

Manage all your org’s connections in a single view with the Connections tab in the Automation Lightning app. Each connection provides
access and authorization configurations, along with metadata for specific APIs or objects. Use these connections multiple times in flows
for enhanced automation and integration.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions. Connections can be edited or
deleted only in the Automation Lightning app. MuleSoft for Flow: Integration is available for an additional cost as an add-on license.
Who: To create, view, edit, and delete connections, users need the Manage Integration Connections permission.
How: To view the Automation Lightning app, in Setup, under Process Automation Settings, select Enable the Automation Lightning
app. Then, in the Automation Lightning app, click the Connections tab.

585
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Streamline External System Integration with MuleSoft for Flow:
Integration (Generally Available)

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Connections Tab (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Connect to an External System (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Trigger Flows from External Systems

Create External System Change-Triggered flows to connect and automate processes based on events from external systems. External
System Change-Triggered flows are triggered when a third-party system is polled and the results indicate that there was a change in
the connected external system. This new flow type improves workflow efficiency by managing external events with ease.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions. Connections
can be edited or deleted only in the Automation Lightning app. MuleSoft for Flow: Integration is available for an additional cost as an
add-on license.
Who: To create and edit External System Change-Triggered flows owned by or shared with you, users need the Create or Edit Flows or
the View Flows permission. To create and edit External System Change-Triggered flows in the Automation Lightning app, regardless of
sharing settings, users need the Manage Flow, Create or Edit Flows, View Flows, or View All Non-Admin Flows permission. To create,
view, edit, and delete connections, users need the Manage Integration Connections permission.
How: In the Automation Lightning app, go to Flows and click New. Click Triggered, and then click External System Change-Triggered
Flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Types
Salesforce Help: Create a Flow with a Third-Party Connector as a Trigger(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Third-Party Connectors and External System Change-Triggered Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Map Flow Fields to Fields in Third-Party Systems

Use in-line transform capabilities to map fields in flows to fields in third-party connectors. Existing transform capabilities are now
embedded in each connector action, allowing the connector to intelligently present the target data based on the third-party system.
Apply transformations and formulas in-line to improve data integrity and workflow accuracy.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions. Connections
can be edited or deleted only in the Automation Lightning app. MuleSoft for Flow: Integration is available for an additional cost as an
add-on license.
Who: To create, view, edit, and delete connections, users need the Manage Integration Connections permission.

586
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce

How: Create a flow with a third-party connector as an action, in Body, click Add <> Fields, and then click Apply. Users can now map
fields using the Transform View to map fields.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Transform Data in Flow
Salesforce Help: Create a Flow with a Third-Party Connector as an Action(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce

MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce makes it easy to integrate data from any system with clicks, and invoke processes in any flow. When
you create a secure process to connect the information stored in different systems, you build a real-time, integrated view of your customers
and business.
Where: Flow Integration for Salesforce is available for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions that have enabled
Lightning Experience.
For Composer release notes and help, see MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce.

Salesforce for Slack Integrations

Use Slack and Salesforce together to connect with customers, track progress, collaborate seamlessly, and deliver team success from
anywhere.
See the release notes for the latest updates: Salesforce for Slack Integrations Release Notes.

Security, Identity, and Privacy

Log in to Salesforce with your email address with the Log In with Email button on login.salesforce.com. Deliver convenient login
experiences with headless user discovery. Use an external client apps to configure Salesforce as a SAML single sign-on identity provider.
Use external auth identity providers to centralize your OAuth configurations for outbound callouts under named credentials. Define
more HTTP status codes to refresh access tokens. Monitor details of Transaction Security Policy triggering events, and keep tabs on key
certificate information. Monitor transactional database tenant secrets. To adopt the latest content security policy directives via a new
release update, update your trusted URLs. A release update ends redirections for legacy host names in production and demo orgs, and
another .

587
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Domains

IN THIS SECTION:
Domains
A new release update ends redirections for legacy host names in production and demo orgs. And you can disable those redirections
without disabling all previous My Domain host name redirections.
Identity and Access Management
Log in to Salesforce with only your email address by using the Log In with Email button on login.salesforce.com. Customize the
welcome email that internal users receive when they first access your Salesforce org. Use external client apps to configure Salesforce
as a SAML single sign-on (SSO) identity provider.
Named Credentials
Use external auth identity providers to centralize your OAuth configurations for outbound callouts under named credentials. Define
more HTTP status codes to refresh expired or invalid access tokens.
Privacy Center
Bypass triggers and validation rules while processing records. Mask and anonymize inactive users.
Salesforce Shield
Access and visualize low-latency event log data via standard objects with the Event Log Object framework (generally available). You
can bring your own data encryption keys for search indexes that use the latest Search framework. And you can now use named
principal credentials with Cache-Only Keys.
Security Center
Keep tabs on key certificate information. Monitor transactional database tenant secrets. Easily navigate through your Security Center
dashboard with a new and improved navigation menu. New prompts on the Security Landscape page help you get the most out
of Security Center.
Policy Center
Meet Policy Center, your home for managing policies across your trusted privacy and security apps.
Other Security Changes
To adopt the latest content security policy (CSP) directives via a new release update, update your trusted URLs. Identify redirections
that use malformed URLs more easily, and get more information about CSP violations and blocked redirections by using new event
types.

Domains
A new release update ends redirections for legacy host names in production and demo orgs. And you can disable those redirections
without disabling all previous My Domain host name redirections.

IN THIS SECTION:
Update References to Legacy Host Names (Release Update)
Prevent disruption for your customers and end users when the temporary redirection of legacy (non-enhanced) Salesforce host
names ends. With this release update, legacy host name redirections end in production and demo orgs. Those redirections already
ended in all other orgs in Winter ’25. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.
Disable Redirections for Legacy Host Names
After you update references to your legacy Salesforce domains in production, disable redirections for the related host names by
disabling the new My Domain setting, Redirect legacy (non-enhanced) My Domain hostnames. This setting isn’t available in
non-production orgs except demo orgs. Previously, to disable redirections for legacy host names, you disabled redirections for all
previous My Domain host names.

588
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Domains

Trailhead Playgrounds Use Salesforce Edge Network

To improve your Trailhead experience, newly created Trailhead Playgrounds use Salesforce Edge Network, which delivers improved
download times and a consistent experience regardless of the user’s location. To get those benefits in an existing Trailhead Playground,
enable Salesforce Edge Network on the My Domain Setup page.

Update References to Legacy Host Names (Release Update)

Prevent disruption for your customers and end users when the temporary redirection of legacy (non-enhanced) Salesforce host names
ends. With this release update, legacy host name redirections end in production and demo orgs. Those redirections already ended in all
other orgs in Winter ’25. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Group, Essentials, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. This change affects production and demo orgs created in June 2022 or
earlier.
When: In Summer ’25 and in Winter ’26, Salesforce automatically disables legacy host name redirections unless you opt out of that
change before your org gets each release. In those releases, you can enable and disable legacy host name redirections. Salesforce enforces
this update in Spring ’26. With that enforcement, you can’t reenable legacy host name redirections. To get the major-release upgrade
date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your My Domain name or instance, and then click the maintenance tab.
To review the changes and your options in each release, see Enhanced Domains Timeline (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview).
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
Update References to Legacy Host Names, follow the testing and activation steps.
You can opt out of the automatic enablement of this change in Summer ’25. From the My Domain page in Setup, in the Redirections
section, click Edit. Turn on Maintain legacy redirections during the Summer ’25 upgrade, and then save your changes. Repeat that
step in each production or demo org where you want to opt out of that behavior. That setting has no impact on the final enforcement
of this update.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Prepare for the End of Redirections for Non-Enhanced Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Release Updates

Disable Redirections for Legacy Host Names

After you update references to your legacy Salesforce domains in production, disable redirections for the related host names by disabling
the new My Domain setting, Redirect legacy (non-enhanced) My Domain hostnames. This setting isn’t available in non-production orgs
except demo orgs. Previously, to disable redirections for legacy host names, you disabled redirections for all previous My Domain host
names.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Group, Essentials, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Setup, find and select My Domain. In the Redirections section, click Edit. Then disable Redirect legacy (non-enhanced) My
Domain hostnames (1) and save your changes. This setting is enabled by default.

589
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

When you disable redirections to legacy My Domain host names, the settings for force.com site URL redirections (2) are unavailable.
Also, the Instanced URL redirection option (3) is set to Don’t redirect and you can’t change it.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Prepare for the End of Redirections for Non-Enhanced Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage My Domain Redirections (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Update References to Legacy Host Names (Release Update)

Trailhead Playgrounds Use Salesforce Edge Network

To improve your Trailhead experience, newly created Trailhead Playgrounds use Salesforce Edge Network, which delivers improved
download times and a consistent experience regardless of the user’s location. To get those benefits in an existing Trailhead Playground,
enable Salesforce Edge Network on the My Domain Setup page.
Where: This change applies to Trailhead Playground that use Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in
Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. With this change, Salesforce Edge Network
is available with Trailhead Playgrounds that use partitioned domains.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Route My Domain Through Salesforce Edge Network (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Partitioned Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Identity and Access Management

Log in to Salesforce with only your email address by using the Log In with Email button on login.salesforce.com. Customize the welcome
email that internal users receive when they first access your Salesforce org. Use external client apps to configure Salesforce as a SAML
single sign-on (SSO) identity provider.

590
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

IN THIS SECTION:
Log In with Your Email Address
Log in to Salesforce with only your email address by using the Log In with Email button on login.salesforce.com. Previously, the log
in with email experience was reserved only for Salesforce Starter and Base Suite Pro users. It’s now available for anyone who logs in
to Salesforce through the UI on login.salesforce.com. If you have access to more than one Salesforce org with your email address,
see them all in the Environment Switcher dashboard.
Delivered Idea: Brand the Welcome Email for Internal Users
For more control of branding and user experience, customize the welcome email that internal users, such as employees and
contractors, receive when they first access your Salesforce org. For example, change the look of the email to suit your brand, or
change the text of the email to include onboarding instructions that are specific to your company. We delivered this feature thanks
to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Use Multi-Factor Authentication for Password Reset
To help users be more successful in resetting their passwords, users now verify their identity using their registered multi-factor
authentication (MFA) method. This change simplifies password reset for users by giving them a familiar verification process that
they already use frequently for login. Because it’s hard for attackers to get access to an MFA method, this change also improves the
security of password reset.
Password Reset Link Stays Valid After Multiple Clicks
Spend less time helping users reset their passwords. Users can now click the link in the password reset email multiple times. Previously,
if a user accidentally clicked the link but didn’t complete password reset, the link became invalidated. If a user wanted to finish
resetting their password, they had to start from square one. Some email security tools also invalidated the link while scanning it for
spam. Now, the link remains valid for 24 hours even when clicked or scanned.
Control Access to the setPassword() API More Easily
To control whether apps can change a user’s password, you can now edit the Allow use of setPassword() API for self-resets setting
in Password Policies regardless of whether you previously disabled it. Previously, if you deselected this setting, there was no way to
re-enable it. Now you can freely enable and disable it as necessary.
Give Headless App Users More Ways to Log In
No username? No problem. With headless user discovery, deliver convenient login experiences where users log in with any identifier
you want, like an email address, phone number, order number, or case number, along with their password. For a consistent experience
across your app, complement your login implementation with a similar password reset experience.
Troubleshoot Errors with the Headless Registration Apex Handler
To make troubleshooting easier, the /services/oauth2/authorize endpoint now returns information about Apex errors
that occur when executing the headless registration handler. Previously, if the handler threw an exception, the endpoint returned
a generic error and the Apex errors were reflected only in Apex debug logs.
Issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-Based Access Tokens in Hybrid OAuth Flows
To improve compatibility with external systems, issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens instead of opaque tokens in
hybrid OAuth 2.0 flows. JWT-based access tokens can be a better option when you have a variety of third-party services and you
want a Salesforce token that works with all of them. By introspecting JWT-based tokens locally, avoid repeated callouts to Salesforce
endpoints, which can slow performance. This change applies to the hybrid web server flow and hybrid refresh token flow. JWT-based
access tokens aren’t supported for the hybrid user-agent flow.
Manage Sessions Associated with JSON Web Token (JWT)-Based Access Tokens
JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens are now backed by sessions, making them easier to manage. View sessions that are
associated with JWT-based access tokens on the Session Management page in Setup, and end suspicious sessions if necessary.
Manage session security on the Session Settings page in Setup.

591
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

Additional Session Is Established When a User Logs In to the UI

When a user logs in to your Salesforce org and accesses Lightning Experience, Salesforce now establishes an additional session.
Previously, Salesforce established multiple sessions, including sessions of these types: Aura, Content, TempAuraExchange,
TempContentExchange, TempUiFrontdoor, and UI, all with Application as the login type. With this change, this list now includes a
session where the session type is API and the login type is Unknown.
GET Requests with Access Tokens in the URL Query String Are Blocked for the Single Access Endpoint
To improve security, we now block GET requests to the services/oauth2/singleaccess endpoint if the request contains
an access token as a URL query string parameter. To avoid service interruptions, update your integrations to use a more secure
request format.
Enjoy Usability Improvements for Token Exchange Setup
We made some minor improvements to the Token Exchange Handlers page in Setup. We updated the text of the confirmation
modal that displays when you remove an app from a token exchange handler. The new modal text clarifies that you can still re-enable
an app anytime after you disable it. To help you resolve enablement issues faster, we also updated the text for the failure toast that
appears when you try to enable an app that already has a default handler.
Integrate Single Sign-On Service Providers with the External Client Apps Framework
Use the external client apps framework, a new generation of the connected apps framework, to configure Salesforce as a SAML
single sign-on (SSO) identity provider. Compared to the connected apps framework, the external client apps framework has a cleaner
metadata structure and is more secure. Use it to configure an SSO flow where users log in to a third-party service provider with their
Salesforce credentials.
Triple DES Encryption Is No Longer Supported for SAML Single Sign-On
To keep your SAML single sign-on (SSO) configurations secure, we no longer support encryption of SAML responses using the Triple
DES encryption algorithm. This change applies to all SSO configurations that use the Triple DES algorithm, whether you use Salesforce
as an identity provider or as a service provider. With Spring ’25, you can’t create configurations that use this algorithm. This change
doesn’t break configurations that existed before Spring ’25, but we strongly recommend that you stop using the Triple DES algorithm
to avoid future interruptions. To improve security, use the AES 128 or AES 256 encryption algorithms instead.
Verify SAML Integrations (Release Update)
Salesforce is upgrading its SAML framework as part of regular ongoing maintenance. This maintenance update improves Salesforce’s
security posture, and as a result, improves your security posture. This update can impact integrations that use SAML, including single
sign-on (SSO) and single logout. This update is visible starting in Winter ’25 and is enforced in Summer ’25. To avoid potential service
interruptions, test your SAML integrations as soon as Summer ’25 sandboxes become available.
Migrate to a Multiple-Configuration SAML Framework (Release Update)
If you see this release update, your Salesforce instance is using our original single-configuration SAML framework, which supports
single sign-on (SSO) with only one external identity provider. With this release update, we’re removing support for the
single-configuration SAML framework and supporting only the multiple-configuration SAML framework. To preserve your existing
configuration, follow the steps to apply this update. If you don’t, your SSO configuration stops working when this update is enforced
for production instances in Spring ’26.
Enable Embedded Login
Although Salesforce doesn’t recommend it, if you must use Embedded Login with your new Experience Cloud Site, you can contact
Salesforce support to enable it. In Spring ’25, Salesforce removed Embedded Login settings by default to encourage users to move
to OAuth 2.0 Web Server Flow or OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow.

592
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

Log In with Your Email Address

Log in to Salesforce with only your email address by using the Log In with Email button on login.salesforce.com. Previously, the log in
with email experience was reserved only for Salesforce Starter and Base Suite Pro users. It’s now available for anyone who logs in to
Salesforce through the UI on login.salesforce.com. If you have access to more than one Salesforce org with your email address, see them
all in the Environment Switcher dashboard.
Where: This change applies to the UI log in experience on login.salesforce.com.
When: This feature is not part of the initial Spring '25 release and may be included at a later date.
Who: Log in with email isn’t available for Sandbox users, users with a shared email account, or users who can’t access emails sent to
their email address. Also, users who are required to use My Domain can't log in with their email address.
Why: Your Salesforce account has both a username and a valid email address associated with it. Each username is formatted just like
an email address, but it doesn't have to be an actual email address. Now, you can log in using only the email address that’s associated
with your Salesforce account.
How: On login.salesforce.com, select Log in with Email. Enter your email address and if you have only one Salesforce account, enter your
password. If you have more than one Salesforce account, enter your email address, and then copy the verification code from the email
that you receive to the verification code field.
The Environment Switcher opens to show all your accounts in one place. Choose the account to log in to and complete the login process.
The setting to prevent logins outside of my domain now includes both login.salesforce.com and welcome.salesforce.com. To require
users to log in through My Domain, admins can select Prevent login from https://login.salesforce.com and
https://welcome.salesforce.com.

Brand the Welcome Email for Internal Users

For more control of branding and user experience, customize the welcome email that internal users, such as employees and contractors,
receive when they first access your Salesforce org. For example, change the look of the email to suit your brand, or change the text of
the email to include onboarding instructions that are specific to your company. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on
IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: Create a custom classic email template. To make sure that users meet the email verification requirement, include the new
{!NewUserWelcomeEmailLink} merge field. The field gets populated with a verification link. When users click the link, they
start the email verification process.
From the Session Settings page in Setup, add the email template in the Welcome Email Template field.

SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Customizable new-user email
Salesforce Help: Customize the Welcome Email for Internal Users (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

593
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

Use Multi-Factor Authentication for Password Reset

To help users be more successful in resetting their passwords, users now verify their identity using their registered multi-factor
authentication (MFA) method. This change simplifies password reset for users by giving them a familiar verification process that they
already use frequently for login. Because it’s hard for attackers to get access to an MFA method, this change also improves the security
of password reset.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
When: This change is available on a rolling basis starting on February 17, 2025. The rollout concludes on March 31, 2025.
Who: This change applies only to internal users who access Salesforce orgs. It doesn’t apply to external users, also known as customers
and partners, who log in to Experience Cloud sites.
For internal users, this change applies under these conditions.
• The user is required to log in with MFA. This change applies whether you require MFA via your org settings or via user permissions.
• The user has an MFA method set up.

Note: All internal Salesforce users are contractually required to use MFA for every login through the user interface to Salesforce
products (including partner solutions). The requirement applies equally to direct logins using a Salesforce username and password
and to single sign-on (SSO) logins.
Otherwise, internal users verify their identity by answering a security question.
How: When a user clicks the forgot password link on the login page, they get an email with instructions to reset their password. When
they click the link in the email, they’re prompted to verify their identity by using their registered MFA method. After they complete the
MFA challenge, they can reset their password.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Reset Passwords for Your Users (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Reset Your Forgotten Password (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Multi-Factor Authentication for Salesforce Orgs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Password Reset Link Stays Valid After Multiple Clicks

Spend less time helping users reset their passwords. Users can now click the link in the password reset email multiple times. Previously,
if a user accidentally clicked the link but didn’t complete password reset, the link became invalidated. If a user wanted to finish resetting
their password, they had to start from square one. Some email security tools also invalidated the link while scanning it for spam. Now,
the link remains valid for 24 hours even when clicked or scanned.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: This behavior is controlled by a new setting on the Identity Verification page in Setup, which is enabled by default. When the
setting is enabled, there’s an extra step to the password reset process. After users click the password reset link, Salesforce displays a page
where the user confirms that they want to reset their password before moving on to the next step.

594
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define Identity Verification Settings for Your Orgs and Experience Cloud Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Help: Reset Passwords for Your Users (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Reset Your Forgotten Password (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Control Access to the setPassword() API More Easily

To control whether apps can change a user’s password, you can now edit the Allow use of setPassword() API for self-resets setting in
Password Policies regardless of whether you previously disabled it. Previously, if you deselected this setting, there was no way to re-enable
it. Now you can freely enable and disable it as necessary.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: To edit the setting, go to the Password Policies page in Setup. When the setting is enabled, apps can use the setPassword()
API to change a user’s password to a specific value. When the setting is disabled, apps can’t directly change a user’s password.

595
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Password Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SOAP API Developer Guide: setPassword() (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Give Headless App Users More Ways to Log In

No username? No problem. With headless user discovery, deliver convenient login experiences where users log in with any identifier
you want, like an email address, phone number, order number, or case number, along with their password. For a consistent experience
across your app, complement your login implementation with a similar password reset experience.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
Why: It can be tricky for users to remember all of the usernames that they use across different services. By giving users multiple ways to
log in, save them from the frustration of forgetting their username and let them choose an easier login option.
You can also build experiences that help users get to the information they want as fast as possible. For example, you have a headless
ecommerce app that sends users an order number when they make a purchase. With headless user discovery, develop an experience
where users log in with their order number. Instead of logging in with a username and then navigating to their order, users see their
order information as soon as they log in.
How: Develop an Apex class that implements the Auth.HeadlessUserDiscoveryHandler interface to find users based on
an identifier of your choice. Add the Apex handler to your Experience Cloud settings. Then, configure headless login or password reset.
Headless user discovery is supported for Headless Identity APIs and for flows that use the OAuth 2.0 for First-Party Applications draft
standard.
During login, users enter the identifier along with their password. Your headless app sends the identifier in a login_hint parameter
in its request to the services/oauth2/authorize endpoint or the
services/oauth2/v1/authorization_challenge endpoint. Then, your Apex handler takes over to find the email
address or phone number associated with the user identifier.
Similarly, during password reset, your app sends the user identifier to the services/auth/headless/forgot_password
endpoint, and the Apex handler finds the user. Salesforce sends an OTP that the user enters to verify their identity before resetting their
password.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Headless Login Without a Username (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Headless Identity for Customers and Partners (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

596
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

Troubleshoot Errors with the Headless Registration Apex Handler

To make troubleshooting easier, the /services/oauth2/authorize endpoint now returns information about Apex errors that
occur when executing the headless registration handler. Previously, if the handler threw an exception, the endpoint returned a generic
error and the Apex errors were reflected only in Apex debug logs.
Where: This change is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
How: During headless registration, your app sends a request to the /services/oauth2/authorize endpoint. The request
includes information to help create a user. Salesforce passes this information to your implementation of the
Auth.HeadlessSelfRegistrationHandler interface. The Apex handler tries to create the user and link it to an account.
If there's an error that disrupts the execution of the handler, the endpoint returns an API error response with an apex_error field.
Here's an example error response.
{
"error": "registration_error",
"error_description": "user was unable to be created in apex",
"apex_error": "MyException: exception message"
}

Because you can create custom exceptions, you can customize the exception message that's shown in the apex_error field. Here's
an example Apex snippet to create a custom message.
throw new MyException('exception message');

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Headless Identity APIs: Headless Registration Flow for Public Clients (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Headless Identity APIs: Headless Registration Flow for Private Clients (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Apex Reference Guide: HeadlessSelfRegistrationHandler Interface (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-Based Access Tokens in Hybrid OAuth Flows
To improve compatibility with external systems, issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens instead of opaque tokens in hybrid
OAuth 2.0 flows. JWT-based access tokens can be a better option when you have a variety of third-party services and you want a Salesforce
token that works with all of them. By introspecting JWT-based tokens locally, avoid repeated callouts to Salesforce endpoints, which can
slow performance. This change applies to the hybrid web server flow and hybrid refresh token flow. JWT-based access tokens aren’t
supported for the hybrid user-agent flow.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: When you develop an integration that uses a hybrid OAuth flow, enable your external client app or connected app to issue
JWT-based access tokens.

597
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

If refresh token rotation is enabled for the external client app or connected app, you can’t issue JWT-based access tokens for hybrid flows,
even if you aren’t actively using the refresh token flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: JWT-Based Access Tokens (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: OAuth 2.0 Hybrid Web Server Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: OAuth 2.0 Hybrid App Refresh Token Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Manage Sessions Associated with JSON Web Token (JWT)-Based Access Tokens
JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens are now backed by sessions, making them easier to manage. View sessions that are associated
with JWT-based access tokens on the Session Management page in Setup, and end suspicious sessions if necessary. Manage session
security on the Session Settings page in Setup.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: View active sessions and their details on the Session Management page, where you can create custom list views that display
specific information.
To end a session from the Session Management page, select the session and click Remove. For most Salesforce services, ending the
session immediately revokes the associated token. For some services, it can take up to 30 minutes before the associated token is revoked.
To control security settings, such as how login IP ranges are enforced, go to the Session Settings page in Setup. You can't control timeout
settings for JWT-based access tokens on this page. Configure the token timeout in your external client app or connected app policies
instead.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: JWT-Based Access Tokens (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: View User Session Information on the Session Management Page (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Modify Session Security Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: AuthSession (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Additional Session Is Established When a User Logs In to the UI

When a user logs in to your Salesforce org and accesses Lightning Experience, Salesforce now establishes an additional session. Previously,
Salesforce established multiple sessions, including sessions of these types: Aura, Content, TempAuraExchange, TempContentExchange,
TempUiFrontdoor, and UI, all with Application as the login type. With this change, this list now includes a session where the session type
is API and the login type is Unknown.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.
How: To get session information, go to the Session Management page in Setup or use the AuthSession object.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View User Session Information on the Session Management Page (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: User Session Types (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: AuthSession (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

598
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

GET Requests with Access Tokens in the URL Query String Are Blocked for the Single
Access Endpoint
To improve security, we now block GET requests to the services/oauth2/singleaccess endpoint if the request contains
an access token as a URL query string parameter. To avoid service interruptions, update your integrations to use a more secure request
format.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
Why: Access tokens are considered sensitive information because they grant access to protected Salesforce resources. If you pass access
tokens in URL query string parameters, they can be leaked in the browser. Here’s an example of an insecure request that gets blocked
with this change.
https://mydomainname.my.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/singleaccess?access_token=<access
token>
&redirect_uri=lightning/setup/ManageUsers/home

How: Update your integrations to use a more secure request format.

For GET requests, send the access token in an Authorization header.
GET /services/oauth2/singleaccess? HTTP 1.1
Host: mydomainname.my.salesforce.com
Authorization: Bearer <access token>

redirect_uri=lightning/setup/ManageUsers/home

For POST requests, send the access token in an Authorization header or in the request body. Here’s an example with an access token in
the body of a POST request.
POST /services/oauth2/singleaccess? HTTP 1.1
Host: mydomainname.my.salesforce.com

access_token=<access token>&
redirect_uri=lightning/setup/ManageUsers/home

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Generate a Frontdoor URL to Bridge into UI Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enjoy Usability Improvements for Token Exchange Setup

We made some minor improvements to the Token Exchange Handlers page in Setup. We updated the text of the confirmation modal
that displays when you remove an app from a token exchange handler. The new modal text clarifies that you can still re-enable an app
anytime after you disable it. To help you resolve enablement issues faster, we also updated the text for the failure toast that appears
when you try to enable an app that already has a default handler.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: OAuth 2.0 Token Exchange Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

599
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

Integrate Single Sign-On Service Providers with the External Client Apps Framework
Use the external client apps framework, a new generation of the connected apps framework, to configure Salesforce as a SAML single
sign-on (SSO) identity provider. Compared to the connected apps framework, the external client apps framework has a cleaner metadata
structure and is more secure. Use it to configure an SSO flow where users log in to a third-party service provider with their Salesforce
credentials.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Group, Essentials, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Create an external client app via Metadata API and configure its SAML policies. A SAML-enabled external client app consists of
these three metadata types.
• ExternalClientApplication—The parent external client app.
• ExtlClntAppConfigurablePolicies—The external client app policies where you enable the SAML plugin.
• ExtlClntAppSamlConfigurablePolicies—The external client app SAML configuration. Depending on your use case, this type can also
include the ExtlClntAppSamlConfigurablePoliciesAttribute subtype.
Currently, you can’t configure SAML in the External Client App Manager in Setup. SAML-enabled external client apps can’t be packaged
and distributed.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Integrate a SAML SSO Service Provider as an External Client App (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: External Client Apps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Triple DES Encryption Is No Longer Supported for SAML Single Sign-On

To keep your SAML single sign-on (SSO) configurations secure, we no longer support encryption of SAML responses using the Triple
DES encryption algorithm. This change applies to all SSO configurations that use the Triple DES algorithm, whether you use Salesforce
as an identity provider or as a service provider. With Spring ’25, you can’t create configurations that use this algorithm. This change
doesn’t break configurations that existed before Spring ’25, but we strongly recommend that you stop using the Triple DES algorithm
to avoid future interruptions. To improve security, use the AES 128 or AES 256 encryption algorithms instead.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
Why: The Triple DES algorithm uses a cryptographic key that's too short to be secure. The AES 128 and AES 256 algorithms use longer
keys that make these algorithms harder to attack.
For more information about encryption algorithm security from the National Institute of Standards and Technology, go to
https://csrc.nist.gov/pubs/sp/800/131/a/r3/ipd.
How: If you use Salesforce as an identity provider, check your connected app SAML configuration. First, go to your connected app Web
App Settings and check the Block Encryption Algorithm setting. If Block Encryption Algorithm is set to Triple DES, update your connected
app configuration to use a more secure algorithm. On the service provider, update your settings to decrypt the new algorithm.

600
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

Note: If you don’t have the Encrypt SAML Response setting enabled, this change doesn’t apply to you, and the Block Encryption
Algorithm setting doesn’t appear in your connected app configuration.
If you use Salesforce as a service provider, check with your identity provider to see what encryption algorithm they use. If they use the
Triple DES algorithm, work with your identity provider to use a more secure algorithm and generate a new decryption certificate. In
Salesforce, update the Assertion Decryption Certificate in your SAML Single Sign-On Settings.

For new configurations that are created after Spring ’25, you can’t use the Triple DES encryption algorithm. If your identity provider or
service provider uses this algorithm, you get an error when you try to set up SSO with Salesforce. Use a more secure algorithm instead.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure SSO with Salesforce as a SAML Service Provider (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Salesforce as a SAML Identity Provider (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Verify SAML Integrations (Release Update)

Salesforce is upgrading its SAML framework as part of regular ongoing maintenance. This maintenance update improves Salesforce’s
security posture, and as a result, improves your security posture. This update can impact integrations that use SAML, including single
sign-on (SSO) and single logout. This update is visible starting in Winter ’25 and is enforced in Summer ’25. To avoid potential service
interruptions, test your SAML integrations as soon as Summer ’25 sandboxes become available.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
When: This update is enforced in Summer ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, locate your
instance, and then click the maintenance tab.
This update was first made available in Winter ’25 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’25, but we postponed the enforcement
date to Summer ’25.

601
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Identity and Access Management

Why: As part of ongoing maintenance, Salesforce is upgrading its SAML framework in Summer ’25. Although we don’t expect much
production impact, to minimize the risk of production outages, we recommend that you test your SAML integrations as soon as Summer
’25 sandboxes become available.
How: To understand how enforcement of the SAML upgrade impacts you, assess your orgs and Experience Cloud sites to see where
you use SAML, including these integrations.
• SAML SSO where users log in to Salesforce via a third-party identity provider, such as Okta
• SAML SSO where users log in to a third-party app via Salesforce. These configurations use connected apps.
• SAML SSO between Salesforce orgs or Experience Cloud sites
• All SAML single logout configurations
So that you can copy and test your integrations in a sandbox, gather information about how you use SAML in production. When Summer
’25 sandboxes become available, set up a Summer ’25 sandbox with the same SAML integrations that you use in production. Test your
integrations thoroughly. If you have any issues, contact Salesforce Customer Support.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Verify
SAML Integrations, follow the testing and activation steps.

Migrate to a Multiple-Configuration SAML Framework (Release Update)

If you see this release update, your Salesforce instance is using our original single-configuration SAML framework, which supports single
sign-on (SSO) with only one external identity provider. With this release update, we’re removing support for the single-configuration
SAML framework and supporting only the multiple-configuration SAML framework. To preserve your existing configuration, follow the
steps to apply this update. If you don’t, your SSO configuration stops working when this update is enforced for production instances in
Spring ’26.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.

Note: This release update is available only if you’re using a single-configuration SAML framework. If you don’t see this release
update, you’re already using the multiple-configuration framework, and this release update doesn’t apply to your instance.
When: This update is enforced for production instances in Spring ’26 and was enforced for sandboxes in Summer ’24. To get the major
release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
This update was first made available in Spring ’24. It was scheduled to be enforced for all instances in Summer ’24, but we enforced it
only for sandboxes in Summer ’24. We postponed the enforcement date for production instances to Spring ’25 and then postponed it
again to Spring ’26.
Why: We’re no longer supporting the single-configuration SAML SSO framework that you’re currently using. When this update is enforced,
you’re required to use a multiple-configuration SAML framework. To keep using your existing SAML SSO configuration, migrate to the
multiple-configuration framework. Otherwise, your SAML SSO stops working for you when this update is enforced.
How: These changes apply to your existing SAML SSO configuration.
• SAML responses from your identity provider must include the audience attribute.
• Your Salesforce login URL changes.
• If Salesforce can’t parse a SAML response, it isn’t recorded in the login history.
Make sure that you understand these changes, update your configuration accordingly, and test all changes in a sandbox before enabling
this update. If you don’t, your configuration stops working when this update is enforced.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Migrate
to a Multiple-Configuration SAML Framework, follow the testing and activation steps.

602
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Named Credentials

Enable Embedded Login

Although Salesforce doesn’t recommend it, if you must use Embedded Login with your new Experience Cloud Site, you can contact
Salesforce support to enable it. In Spring ’25, Salesforce removed Embedded Login settings by default to encourage users to move to
OAuth 2.0 Web Server Flow or OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow.
Where: This change applies to Lightning communities accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in
all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: We recommend that you use the web server flow, the user-agent flow, or another redirect-based OAuth 2.0 flow instead of
Embedded Login. Embedded Login relies on third-party cookies, which are blocked or restricted in most browsers. And Embedded Login
works only on Google Chrome and only as long as third-party cookies are allowed there by default.
How: To use Embedded Login on your Experience Cloud Site, contact support to enable the feature, and then enable it on the Login &
Registration page. From Setup in the Quick Find Box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select All Sites. In the Digital
Experiences picklist, select Workspaces and then click Administration. On the Login & Registration tab select Allow embedded login
on your Experience Cloud site.

Named Credentials
Use external auth identity providers to centralize your OAuth configurations for outbound callouts under named credentials. Define
more HTTP status codes to refresh expired or invalid access tokens.

IN THIS SECTION:
Simplify OAuth Configurations with External Auth Identity Providers
To streamline OAuth configurations for outbound callouts to external systems, create an external auth identity provider and link it
to an external credential. Easily connect with external systems that require the Proof Key for Code Exchange (PKCE) extension to
obtain an OAuth token. Define custom request parameters, such as key-value pairs, to interact with the identity provider’s token
endpoint without writing custom Apex code. Add an external auth identity provider component to second-generation managed
packages (managed 2GP) and unlocked packages for distribution across many orgs or across development, test, and production
environments.
Refresh Access Tokens for Named Credentials with More HTTP Status Codes
When you configure named credentials, you can account for more external systems that leverage nonstandard HTTP status codes
for token refresh. In addition to the standard 401 and other 4xx responses, Salesforce can refresh tokens when the external system
returns 6xx HTTP status codes or greater.

Simplify OAuth Configurations with External Auth Identity Providers

To streamline OAuth configurations for outbound callouts to external systems, create an external auth identity provider and link it to an
external credential. Easily connect with external systems that require the Proof Key for Code Exchange (PKCE) extension to obtain an
OAuth token. Define custom request parameters, such as key-value pairs, to interact with the identity provider’s token endpoint without
writing custom Apex code. Add an external auth identity provider component to second-generation managed packages (managed
2GP) and unlocked packages for distribution across many orgs or across development, test, and production environments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
Why: External auth identity providers offer greater flexibility and control over your OAuth connections with external systems. Here are
a few things to keep in mind.
• You can create an external auth identity provider from the Named Credentials page in Setup or with Connect REST API or Apex.

603
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Privacy Center

• External auth identity providers currently support only integrations that use the OAuth 2.0 authentication protocol with the
authorization code browser flow.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create or Edit an External Auth Identity Provider (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Refresh Access Tokens for Named Credentials with More HTTP Status Codes
When you configure named credentials, you can account for more external systems that leverage nonstandard HTTP status codes for
token refresh. In addition to the standard 401 and other 4xx responses, Salesforce can refresh tokens when the external system returns
6xx HTTP status codes or greater.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Named Credentials, and then select Named Credentials. Create or edit an
external credential, and in the Additional Status Codes for Token Refresh field, enter 6xx status codes or greater, like 601 or 701.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create or Edit an External Credential (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Privacy Center
Bypass triggers and validation rules while processing records. Mask and anonymize inactive users.

IN THIS SECTION:
Process the User Object with Privacy Policies
Use Data Management or Right to Be Forgotten (RTBF) policies to anonymize or mask inactive users. When you anonymize a user,
all standard fields are obfuscated, and the typical notifications for username changes aren’t triggered. When you mask a user, you
can specify how individual standard fields are processed. You can now also retain user records in your Privacy Center retention store.
You can’t use privacy policies to process active users or delete user records.
Bypass Triggers and Validation Rules While Processing Records
If a record has value restrictions or is used to trigger a flow, errors can occur during policy execution. To reduce job errors and avoid
further record changes caused by record-triggered flows, use this bypass configuration. Add a custom permission to the trigger or
validation rule that you want to bypass, and then assign the permission to your privacy policies via a session-based permission set.

Process the User Object with Privacy Policies

Use Data Management or Right to Be Forgotten (RTBF) policies to anonymize or mask inactive users. When you anonymize a user, all
standard fields are obfuscated, and the typical notifications for username changes aren’t triggered. When you mask a user, you can
specify how individual standard fields are processed. You can now also retain user records in your Privacy Center retention store. You
can’t use privacy policies to process active users or delete user records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Anonymize Inactive Users (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

604
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Shield

Bypass Triggers and Validation Rules While Processing Records

If a record has value restrictions or is used to trigger a flow, errors can occur during policy execution. To reduce job errors and avoid
further record changes caused by record-triggered flows, use this bypass configuration. Add a custom permission to the trigger or
validation rule that you want to bypass, and then assign the permission to your privacy policies via a session-based permission set.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Bypass Triggers and Validation Rules During Policy Execution (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Shield
Access and visualize low-latency event log data via standard objects with the Event Log Object framework (generally available). You can
bring your own data encryption keys for search indexes that use the latest Search framework. And you can now use named principal
credentials with Cache-Only Keys.

IN THIS SECTION:
Event Monitoring
Store and query all of your event data via the API with the new event log object framework. Correlate Event Log Files and Event Log
Objects to troubleshoot performance issues. Access all Event Monitoring data with the Event Monitoring User permission. Identify
and address content security policy violations that originate from Lightning pages with the CSP Violation event type. Reduce end-user
frustration by cleaning up blocked redirections.
Shield Platform Encryption
You can now bring your own data encryption keys for search indexes. And you can now use named principal credentials for cache-only
keys.

Event Monitoring
Store and query all of your event data via the API with the new event log object framework. Correlate Event Log Files and Event Log
Objects to troubleshoot performance issues. Access all Event Monitoring data with the Event Monitoring User permission. Identify and
address content security policy violations that originate from Lightning pages with the CSP Violation event type. Reduce end-user
frustration by cleaning up blocked redirections.

IN THIS SECTION:
Query Low-Latency Event Data with Event Log Objects (Generally Available)
Store your event data for the past 30 days and query any 15-day window within that stored data via the API by using the event log
object framework, now generally available, that captures event data in standard objects.
Correlate Logs with a Custom Request Identifier
Quickly debug and troubleshoot performance issues by using the customizable Request Identifier field to correlate logs. This field
is now available in all Event Monitoring logs.
Access All Event Monitoring Data with One Permission Set
Simplify manual permission set assignments with the new Event Monitoring User permission. You can access all your Event Monitoring
data, including Event Log Files, Objects, Real-Time Events, and Threat Detection.

605
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Shield

Monitor Content Security Policy (CSP) Violations

Identify and address content security policy violations that originate from Lightning pages with the CSP Violation event type. CSP
directives control the types of resources that Lightning components, third-party APIs, and WebSocket connections can load from a
trusted URL.
Dig into Details About Blocked Redirections
Reduce end-user frustration by cleaning up blocked redirections. To get information on blocked redirections to untrusted and
malformed URLs, use the Blocked Redirect event type. This event type captures the page where the blocked redirection occurred
and whether the target URL is malformed.

Query Low-Latency Event Data with Event Log Objects (Generally Available)
Store your event data for the past 30 days and query any 15-day window within that stored data via the API by using the event log object
framework, now generally available, that captures event data in standard objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions where Event Monitoring is enabled.

Note: Event Log Objects is not yet available in these regions: Asia Pacific (Seoul), Asia Pacific (Jakarta), South America (São Paulo),
and Middle East (UAE).
Who: This change is available to Hyperforce customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on
subscriptions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter Permission, and select Permission Sets. Select View Event Log Object Data to
access Event Log Objects, or select Event Monitoring User to access all of your Event Monitoring data, including Event Log Objects.

Correlate Logs with a Custom Request Identifier

Quickly debug and troubleshoot performance issues by using the customizable Request Identifier field to correlate logs. This field is now
available in all Event Monitoring logs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions where Event Monitoring is enabled.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
How: In an API call to Salesforce, set the X-SFDC-REQUEST-ID header with a 32-character OTEL compatible TraceID or a 22-character
alphanumeric ID.

Access All Event Monitoring Data with One Permission Set

Simplify manual permission set assignments with the new Event Monitoring User permission. You can access all your Event Monitoring
data, including Event Log Files, Objects, Real-Time Events, and Threat Detection.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions where Event Monitoring is enabled.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter Permission, and select Permission Sets. Then enable the Event Monitoring User
permission.

606
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Shield

Monitor Content Security Policy (CSP) Violations

Identify and address content security policy violations that originate from Lightning pages with the CSP Violation event type. CSP
directives control the types of resources that Lightning components, third-party APIs, and WebSocket connections can load from a
trusted URL.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions. The CSP Violation event type is available in the API but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Who: This event is free for all customers with a 24-hour data retention period.
Why: The Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations list in Setup summarizes CSP violations for the font-src (fonts), frame-src
(iframe content), and img-src (image) directives. To help you manage that list, the CSP Violation event type provides details about
those violations. The new event type also captures violations of other directives, such as media-src (audio and video) and
style-src (style sheets).
How: To collect CSP violation details over multiple days, schedule a daily query of the CSP Violation event type via REST API.

SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: CSP Violation Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Dig into Details About Blocked Redirections

Reduce end-user frustration by cleaning up blocked redirections. To get information on blocked redirections to untrusted and malformed
URLs, use the Blocked Redirect event type. This event type captures the page where the blocked redirection occurred and whether the
target URL is malformed.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions. This event type captures blocked redirections that originate from components and pages that were built in Salesforce
Classic. The Blocked Redirect event type is available in the API but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Who: This event is free for all customers with a 24-hour data retention period.
How: To gather information about blocked redirections over time, schedule a daily query of the Blocked Redirection event type.

SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: Blocked Redirect Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage Redirections to External URLs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Shield Platform Encryption

You can now bring your own data encryption keys for search indexes. And you can now use named principal credentials for cache-only
keys.

IN THIS SECTION:
Bring Your Own Data Encryption Keys for Search Indexes
If you're using Salesforce root keys and data encryption keys (DEKs) to encrypt search indexes, you can now upload a DEK that you
generate outside of Salesforce. With Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) support for DEKs, you control more of the lifecycle for keys that
encrypt search indexes.

607
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Salesforce Shield

Encrypt Data Cloud Search Indexes

Platform Encryption for Data Cloud now encrypts search indexes in Data Cloud. This improvement expands the pool of data secured
by your customer-managed keys.
Used Named Principal Authentication with Cache-Only Keys
Shield Platform Encryption Cache-Only Keys now supports the use of named principals to authenticate into your external key service.
Some key management services require named principal authentication. Salesforce supports both the new named principal-based
credentials and the legacy credentials that don’t use named principals.

Bring Your Own Data Encryption Keys for Search Indexes

If you're using Salesforce root keys and data encryption keys (DEKs) to encrypt search indexes, you can now upload a DEK that you
generate outside of Salesforce. With Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) support for DEKs, you control more of the lifecycle for keys that encrypt
search indexes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
How: BYOK for DEKs works similarly to BYOK for tenant secrets. Before you get started, make sure that encryption for search indexes is
turned on and that you have an active root key. You can generate your DEK with a tool of your choice, but it must be 256-bit size. Then,
on the Key Management page in Setup, select the Search Index tab, and then click Bring Your Own Key. Click Generate Certificate,
follow the prompts on the page, and save your work. When the page reloads, click Download Certificate & Token. Wrap your DEK
with the certificate’s public key. Then upload your wrapped DEK and session token.

Encrypt Data Cloud Search Indexes

Platform Encryption for Data Cloud now encrypts search indexes in Data Cloud. This improvement expands the pool of data secured by
your customer-managed keys.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: This functionality is available starting in January 2025.
How: On the Encryption Settings page in Setup, turn on Manage Data Cloud Keys. We generate a root key for you in Salesforce. Your
root key encrypts and controls the data encryption key (DEK) in AWS that encrypts your Data Cloud data. Both new and existing DEKs
automatically begin encrypting search index data.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Encrypt Data Cloud with Customer-Managed Root Keys Encryption (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Used Named Principal Authentication with Cache-Only Keys

Shield Platform Encryption Cache-Only Keys now supports the use of named principals to authenticate into your external key service.
Some key management services require named principal authentication. Salesforce supports both the new named principal-based
credentials and the legacy credentials that don’t use named principals.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions that have Salesforce
Shield or Shield Platform Encryption, and the Cache-Only Key Service add-on subscriptions.
Why: In Winter ’23, Salesforce introduced an improved named credential that’s extensible, customizable, and more secure. Though you
can still use legacy named credentials with Cache-Only keys, we strongly recommend that you use this preferred credential instead of
legacy named credentials.

608
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Security Center

How: Creating a cache-only key that uses the new named principal authentication is a six step process. In Setup, you create an external
credential, an external named principal, and a permission set for the named principal. Assign the autoproc user to the permission
set Create the named credential for the cache-only key, and then assign the named credential to your cache-only key.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Optimize Security Using Named Credentials and Cache-Only Keys (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Security Center
Keep tabs on key certificate information. Monitor transactional database tenant secrets. Easily navigate through your Security Center
dashboard with a new and improved navigation menu. New prompts on the Security Landscape page help you get the most out of
Security Center.

IN THIS SECTION:
Monitor Certificates Across Your Salesforce Landscape
Keep tabs on key certificate information, such as expiration dates, certificate type, creation date, and active status, without going
into Setup.
Track your Transactional Database Encryption status with the Existing Encryption Policies metric
Monitor transactional database tenant secrets without diving into the Key Management pages for each of your orgs.
Discover More Ways to Optimize Security Center
New prompts on the Security Landscape page make it easy to set up Alerts and connect tenants—helping you unlock the full
potential of Security Center.
Streamline Navigation with New Icons
Easily work your way through the Security Center dashboard with a new and improved navigation menu with updated icons.

Monitor Certificates Across Your Salesforce Landscape

Keep tabs on key certificate information, such as expiration dates, certificate type, creation date, and active status, without going into
Setup.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: This change applies to customers with the Security Center add-on subscription.
How: Monitor the Certificates metric from your Security Center dashboard via the Configuration category.

Track your Transactional Database Encryption status with the Existing Encryption
Policies metric
Monitor transactional database tenant secrets without diving into the Key Management pages for each of your orgs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: This change applies to customers with the Security Center add-on subscription. Database Encryption is available to customers
with a Shield or Shield Platform Encryption licenses and the Cache-Only Key add-on in select Hyperforce environments. Transactional
Database Encryption must be enabled on the organization’s instance.
How: Monitor the Encryption Policy metric from your Security Center dashboard via the Configuration category.

609
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Policy Center

Discover More Ways to Optimize Security Center

New prompts on the Security Landscape page make it easy to set up Alerts and connect tenants—helping you unlock the full potential
of Security Center.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: This change is available to users with the Security Center add-on subscription.

Streamline Navigation with New Icons

Easily work your way through the Security Center dashboard with a new and improved navigation menu with updated icons.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: This change applies to customers with the Security Center add-on subscriptions.

Policy Center
Meet Policy Center, your home for managing policies across your trusted privacy and security apps.

IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Privacy and Security Policies in Policy Center
Streamline your policy management and creation across different privacy and security apps with Policy Center. See, edit, and create
policies in one place from tools like Data Mask and Privacy Center.

Manage Privacy and Security Policies in Policy Center

Streamline your policy management and creation across different privacy and security apps with Policy Center. See, edit, and create
policies in one place from tools like Data Mask and Privacy Center.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: Policy Center is available to users with the Modify All Policy Center Policies and View All Policy Center Policies permissions.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Policy Center. Create a new policy from the Home tab, or view your existing policies on
the Policies tab.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Policy Center: Control Data Security and Management Policies

610
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Other Security Changes

Other Security Changes

To adopt the latest content security policy (CSP) directives via a new release update, update your trusted URLs. Identify redirections that
use malformed URLs more easily, and get more information about CSP violations and blocked redirections by using new event types.

IN THIS SECTION:
Update Your Trusted URLs for the Latest CSP Directives (Release Update)
To help protect your org from cross-site scripting (XSS) and other code-injection attacks, Salesforce updated the delivered content
security policy (CSP) directives for Lightning pages. This change can prevent externally hosted fonts and images from loading. It can
also prevent external websites from loading within an iframe on your Lightning pages. To adopt these required directives, review
the impact and update your trusted URLs. This release update is available starting in Spring ’25 and is enforced in Summer ’25.
Diagnose Failed Redirections Faster
To help you address redirections on the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violation list, that list now differentiates between redirections
to a malformed URL and redirections that are blocked. Malformed URLs contain typos or mistakes that make them invalid. The
violation type for blocked redirections to an untrusted URL was relabeled to Blocked Redirection for clarity. Previously, both types
of failed redirections were labeled External Redirection. Also, to clarify when redirections are blocked and logged in the violations
list, Salesforce Help was updated.
Locate the Source of Content Security Policy (CSP) Violations and Blocked Redirections
Learn more about each entry on the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations in Setup, including where each violation originated,
with the Blocked Redirect and CSP Violation event types.
Secure Cross-Cloud Integrations Across Asia with Private Connect
As part of expanding the AWS partnership with Salesforce, Private Connect support for AWS integrations is available in new regions
in Asia.

Update Your Trusted URLs for the Latest CSP Directives (Release Update)
To help protect your org from cross-site scripting (XSS) and other code-injection attacks, Salesforce updated the delivered content
security policy (CSP) directives for Lightning pages. This change can prevent externally hosted fonts and images from loading. It can also
prevent external websites from loading within an iframe on your Lightning pages. To adopt these required directives, review the impact
and update your trusted URLs. This release update is available starting in Spring ’25 and is enforced in Summer ’25.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions. The CSP Violations event type is available in the API but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app. That event
is free for all customers with a 24-hour data-retention period.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’25. In orgs created in Summer ’24 and later, this release update is enabled by default.
To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and then click the maintenance
tab.
Why: This release update replaces the canceled Adopt Updated Content Security Policy (CSP) Directives release update. To better help
you analyze the impact of this change, Salesforce recalibrated the sampling process that generates the Trusted URL and Browser Policy
Violations list in Setup. Also, to see details about each CSP violation, you can use the new CSP Violation event type.
How: To identify the impacted redirections, go to the Setup page Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations, and then filter the list on
Violation Type. Use the equals operator and select img-src (image), frame-src (iframe content), and font-src (fonts). To help you
make the required updates, this filtered list view includes resources that are blocked with this change, even if this release update isn’t
enabled for testing.

611
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Other Security Changes

To get more detail about these violations, you can schedule a daily query of the CSP Violation event type. To allow a CSP directive for
an untrusted URL, add the URL to the Trusted URLs allowlist.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For the
release update Update Your Trusted URLs for the Latest CSP Directives, follow the testing and activation steps.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: CSP Violation Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release Updates

Diagnose Failed Redirections Faster

To help you address redirections on the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violation list, that list now differentiates between redirections
to a malformed URL and redirections that are blocked. Malformed URLs contain typos or mistakes that make them invalid. The violation
type for blocked redirections to an untrusted URL was relabeled to Blocked Redirection for clarity. Previously, both types of failed
redirections were labeled External Redirection. Also, to clarify when redirections are blocked and logged in the violations list, Salesforce
Help was updated.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. The list captures
qualifying failed redirections that originate from components and pages built in Salesforce Classic.
Why: Here’s an example of the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations list in Setup with the new labels. Entries with the Malformed
URL violation type represent a redirection for which the target URL failed a syntax check.

612
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Other Security Changes

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Locate the Source of Content Security Policy (CSP) Violations and Blocked Redirections
Learn more about each entry on the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations in Setup, including where each violation originated, with
the Blocked Redirect and CSP Violation event types.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Dig into Details About Blocked Redirections
Monitor Content Security Policy (CSP) Violations

Secure Cross-Cloud Integrations Across Asia with Private Connect

As part of expanding the AWS partnership with Salesforce, Private Connect support for AWS integrations is available in new regions in
Asia.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Performance editions.
How: To create a private connection between Salesforce and your data hosted within AWS, go to the Private Connect page in Setup,
and then click AWS Regions.
The latest AWS regions that have direct connectivity to Salesforce data centers are:
• ap-northeast-3
• il-central-1

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Secure Cross-Cloud Integrations with Private Connect (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

613
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Service

Service
Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click of a Button (Generally Available). Monitor Real-time Conversations Between Agentforce
Service Agents and Customers. Integrate Knowledge with Data Cloud.

IN THIS SECTION:
Agentforce for Service Cloud
Help your service reps resolve cases faster with AI agents.
Einstein for Service
Supercharge your AI offerings with Einstein. Use Conversation Mining on Voice channels, customize the Einstein Service Replies for
Email prompt template in Prompt Builder, get Work Summaries for Case (beta), and get AI features in more languages.
Employee Service
Explore the Alumni Portal for alumni services and networking. Employee Hub is now Employee Portal, and HR Service Workspace is
renamed as HR Service Console. Manage employee life events with Employee Enablement Program. Manage Workday data in
Salesforce by using the new MuleSoft integration apps.
Service Data Kit
Add more of your service data to Service Cloud and Data Cloud.
Service Insights
Explore your service performance with Service Insights.
Channels
Enjoy improved flexibility when refining automated emails. Customize your Messaging for Web text message bubbles with custom
lightning web components (LWC). Route work items through a single system with Unified Routing for voice.
Knowledge
Integrate knowledge articles into Data Cloud to improve AI outcomes. Open links from articles ingested from third-party sources
directly within Salesforce to avoid context-switching. Add and manage more complex, multi-stage approval processes to your
knowledge base. Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool to access Classic Knowledge.
Entitlements and Milestones
Empower your service agents excel in their roles and optimize overall service operations. By automating closure of milestones through
flows and using custom Case Milestone report type, your agents can work more efficiently and effectively.
Self Service
Help your customers help themselves. Check out new features that enable your customers to find what they are looking for faster.
Routing
Redirect more types of work with work reassignment. Route voice calls using Omni-Channel Unified Routing. Allocate rep capacity
for voice calls based on work status with status-based capacity.
Feedback Management
Capture more data by saving responses from partially completed surveys. Enhance Net Promoter Score questions with customizable
labels for more meaningful feedback. Access survey data directly within messaging sessions and create tailored reports for deeper
insights.
Customer Experience Intelligence
Unify customer data, extract product insights, and improve data quality for personalized customer experiences. Gain insights into
customer engagement, identify top products, and refine product descriptions with the Customer Experience Intelligence agent
topic.

614
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Service Cloud

Service Adoption
Explore different service areas available to you based on business goals and more.

Agentforce for Service Cloud

Help your service reps resolve cases faster with AI agents.

IN THIS SECTION:
Agentforce Service Agent
To optimize the support provided by Agentforce Service Agents, take advantage of these enhancements.
Agentforce Service Planner
Meet the latest addition to the AI agents for Service family: Agentforce Service Planner. As an assistive agent in the Case record page,
it helps your service reps resolve cases faster with real-time case summaries and step-by-step resolution guidance grounded in your
Case data. Check out the latest features and improvements here.

Agentforce Service Agent

To optimize the support provided by Agentforce Service Agents, take advantage of these enhancements.

IN THIS SECTION:
Monitor Real-time Conversations Between Agentforce Service Agents and Customers (Release Update)
To improve the quality of service, supervisors can now monitor live messaging sessions between this type of AI agent and your
customers. Specifically, they can monitor enhanced Messaging and Messaging for In-App and Web sessions from within Omni
Supervisor. To notify supervisors which conversations need human support, add the Raise Flag action to the AI agent. Supervisors
can lower the flag and transfer conversations to human representatives.
Flag Supervisors to Help with Agentforce Service Agent Conversations
While hundreds of Service Agent conversations can happen simultaneously, help supervisors focus on the ones that need their
assistance. Use the Raise Flag action to alert a supervisor if a conversation between the AI agent and a customer needs their attention.
For example, alert the supervisor if a customer is upset or requests a refund.
Agentforce Service Agent is Now ASA Messaging in Digital Wallet
Agentforce Service Agent - Inbound is now called ASA Messaging in Digital Wallet, the account management tool for
consumption-based products. On Digital Wallet’s homepage, the Conversations consumption card now also summarizes the
combined usage of ASA Messaging, along with usage data on Agentforce Sales Coach and Agentforce SDR. Additionally, Digital
Wallet’s Consumption Insights page offers a breakdown of your combined Agentforce usage by time period to help you detect
trends over time.
Enhance User Search Experience by Using Context-Driven Conversations with Agentforce Service Agent
Empower your users with faster resolution to their queries by passing the real-time search context from site visitors to Agentforce
Service Agent. Agentforce Service Agent suggests solutions to user queries by accessing the knowledge base.
Chat with Agentforce Service Agent in Japanese (Beta)
In addition to English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, and Spanish in certain locales, Agentforce Service Agent now supports
Japanese.

615
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Service Cloud

Monitor Real-time Conversations Between Agentforce Service Agents and Customers (Release
Update)
To improve the quality of service, supervisors can now monitor live messaging sessions between this type of AI agent and your customers.
Specifically, they can monitor enhanced Messaging and Messaging for In-App and Web sessions from within Omni Supervisor. To notify
supervisors which conversations need human support, add the Raise Flag action to the AI agent. Supervisors can lower the flag and
transfer conversations to human representatives.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the Einstein for
Service, Einstein Platform, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on.
How: To set up this feature, add the Raise Flag action to your AI agents and, if a supervisor configuration is used, show the AI Agents
tab in Omni Supervisor.

To view an active conversation between an AI agent and a customer, in the AI Agents tab of Omni Supervisor, a supervisor can click
Monitor. If the AI agent needs help, the supervisor can reassign the conversation to a service rep.

616
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Service Cloud

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Agentforce Service Agents (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Flag Supervisors to Help with Agentforce Service Agent Conversations

While hundreds of Service Agent conversations can happen simultaneously, help supervisors focus on the ones that need their assistance.
Use the Raise Flag action to alert a supervisor if a conversation between the AI agent and a customer needs their attention. For example,
alert the supervisor if a customer is upset or requests a refund.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the Einstein for
Service, Einstein Platform, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on.
How: To define when a Service Agent raises a flag, modify the AI agent’s topic instructions. To respond to a raised flag in Omni Supervisor,
the supervisor can reassign the conversation to a service rep or lower the flag.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flag Conversations for a Supervisor (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Agentforce Service Agent is Now ASA Messaging in Digital Wallet

Agentforce Service Agent - Inbound is now called ASA Messaging in Digital Wallet, the account management tool for consumption-based
products. On Digital Wallet’s homepage, the Conversations consumption card now also summarizes the combined usage of ASA
Messaging, along with usage data on Agentforce Sales Coach and Agentforce SDR. Additionally, Digital Wallet’s Consumption Insights
page offers a breakdown of your combined Agentforce usage by time period to help you detect trends over time.
Where: Digital Wallet is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. ASA Messaging is part of Service Cloud
Usage Billing and is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
Who: Digital Wallet is available to users with the View Consumption user permission or Your Account access. Service Cloud Usage Billing
is available to users with the Conversation add-on.

617
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Service Cloud

How: To get started with Digital Wallet, see Access Digital Wallet. To get started with ASA Messaging, see Set Up a Service Agent.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Agentforce Service Agent
Salesforce Help: About Digital Wallet

Enhance User Search Experience by Using Context-Driven Conversations with Agentforce Service
Agent
Empower your users with faster resolution to their queries by passing the real-time search context from site visitors to Agentforce Service
Agent. Agentforce Service Agent suggests solutions to user queries by accessing the knowledge base.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web and all sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic
in Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on.
Why: Passing search context in real time enables Agentforce Service Agent to automatically suggest answers to user’s search queries,
providing a faster resolution and overall better support experience.
How: In the Experience Workspaces, go to the AI Experiences tile and turn on the Share search queries with Agentforce Service
Agent option. When enabled, users’ search context is passed to Agentforce Service Agent in real time. It then starts suggesting answers
to search queries.

Chat with Agentforce Service Agent in Japanese (Beta)

In addition to English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, and Spanish in certain locales, Agentforce Service Agent now supports
Japanese.
Where: This feature is available in all enhanced Messaging channels. View required editions. Setup for AI Agents is available on the
desktop site.

Note: Enhanced language support for Agentforce Service Agent is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms
at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and the Non-GA Credit Consumption,
Non-GA Gen AI, and the Non-GA Open AI LLM Provider terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is
at the Customer's sole discretion.
When: This change is available starting in January 2025.
How: In Agent Builder, on the Language Settings tab, specify a default language and select additional languages.
These language and locale codes are available.
• English (en_US, en_GB, en_AU)
• French (fr_FR, fr_CA)
• German (de_DE)
• Italian (it_IT)
• Japanese (ja_JA)
• Portuguese (pt_PT, pt_BR)
• Spanish (es_ES, es_MX)
Some LLMs generate responses that are close variants but not exact matches for the requested locale.

618
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Agentforce for Service Cloud

Agentforce Service Planner

Meet the latest addition to the AI agents for Service family: Agentforce Service Planner. As an assistive agent in the Case record page, it
helps your service reps resolve cases faster with real-time case summaries and step-by-step resolution guidance grounded in your Case
data. Check out the latest features and improvements here.

IN THIS SECTION:
Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click of a Button (Generally Available)
Agentforce Service Planner reduces the need for service reps to spend time digging through your company's policies and standards,
case history, or Knowledge Articles to determine how to resolve a case. As an AI assistant in the form of an Lightning web component
in the Case record page, Service Planner uses generative AI to summarize a case and create a list of suggested steps for case resolution.
Because Service Planner is grounded in your Case data and Agentforce topics, actions, and instructions, the suggested steps are
trusted and tailored to your company’s specific policies and standards.

Get Case Resolution Assistance at the Click of a Button (Generally Available)

Agentforce Service Planner reduces the need for service reps to spend time digging through your company's policies and standards,
case history, or Knowledge Articles to determine how to resolve a case. As an AI assistant in the form of an Lightning web component
in the Case record page, Service Planner uses generative AI to summarize a case and create a list of suggested steps for case resolution.
Because Service Planner is grounded in your Case data and Agentforce topics, actions, and instructions, the suggested steps are trusted
and tailored to your company’s specific policies and standards.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Edition with Service Cloud and with Einstein
for Service and Einstein 1 editions.
Who: To use this feature, you must have the Service Planner User permission set.
Why: Service Planner simplifies your service reps case handling workflow, helps them resolve cases faster, and boosts their productivity
by:
1. Automatically summarizing the case and providing general case resolution steps when the case record page is opened. The
summarization features provide clear case context to your serice reps without requiring them to read through the case feed.
2. Giving service reps suggested steps to resolve the case when they click Draft Plan. Agents start solving cases faster so they don’t
spend time digging through your company's policies and standards, case history, or Knowledge articles.

619
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein for Service

How: Go to the Service Planner Setup page and use the guided setup to complete general platform configurations, add the Service
Planner component to the Case record page, and create your Service Planner Agent. Then, build topics, actions, and instructions that
are based on your company’s service policies and practices.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Accelerate Case Resolution with Agentforce Service Planner

Einstein for Service

Supercharge your AI offerings with Einstein. Use Conversation Mining on Voice channels, customize the Einstein Service Replies for Email
prompt template in Prompt Builder, get Work Summaries for Case (beta), and get AI features in more languages.

IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Conversation Mining
Transform conversation data into service insights with Einstein Conversation Mining.
Einstein Reply Recommendations
Use the Service Replies for Email prompt template in Prompt Builder.
Einstein Work Summaries
Enjoy additional supported languages and rich content in Conversation Catch-Up, and, get Work Summaries for Case (beta).

Einstein Conversation Mining

Transform conversation data into service insights with Einstein Conversation Mining.

620
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein for Service

IN THIS SECTION:
Gain Insights from Customer Conversations in More Languages
Einstein Conversation Mining now supports French, German, Italian, and Spanish for all channels. Previously, Einstein Conversation
Mining supported English only.
Mine Insights from Voice Conversations
Create conversation mining reports with our newly supported channel, Voice. Identify frequent cases and inquiries, and pinpoint
areas suitable for automation to streamline future cases.

Gain Insights from Customer Conversations in More Languages

Einstein Conversation Mining now supports French, German, Italian, and Spanish for all channels. Previously, Einstein Conversation
Mining supported English only.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Go to Einstein Conversation Mining in Setup. When you create a report, select a channel, define a date range, and select the
language that you want to use for your report.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Guidelines and Limits for Einstein Conversation Mining (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Mine Insights from Voice Conversations

Create conversation mining reports with our newly supported channel, Voice. Identify frequent cases and inquiries, and pinpoint areas
suitable for automation to streamline future cases.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Go to Einstein Conversation Mining in Setup. When you create a report, select Enhanced Conversations for the channel. Then,
select from the list of contact center channel types.

621
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein for Service

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Build an Einstein Conversation Mining Report (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Einstein Reply Recommendations

Use the Service Replies for Email prompt template in Prompt Builder.

IN THIS SECTION:
Customize Service Replies for Email in Prompt Builder
Customize support emails with the Einstein Service Replies for Email prompt template in Prompt Builder. Make your emails informative
and case-specific when you ground on relevant knowledge articles and case details. With the Get Grounding Data for Service Replies
for Email action, your responses pull from the most relevant articles.

Customize Service Replies for Email in Prompt Builder

Customize support emails with the Einstein Service Replies for Email prompt template in Prompt Builder. Make your emails informative
and case-specific when you ground on relevant knowledge articles and case details. With the Get Grounding Data for Service Replies
for Email action, your responses pull from the most relevant articles.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited and Enterprise editions with the Einstein for Service add-on.
To purchase the Einstein for Service add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
When: This feature is available January 6, 2025.

622
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein for Service

How: In Prompt Builder, personalize the default Einstein Service Replies for Email prompt template, or create your own by selecting
Save As from the default template.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Service Replies for Email and Prompt Builder

Einstein Work Summaries

Enjoy additional supported languages and rich content in Conversation Catch-Up, and, get Work Summaries for Case (beta).

IN THIS SECTION:
Enjoy Rich Text and Additional Supported Languages in Conversation Catch-Up
Conversation Catch-Up now supports Dutch, Mexican Spanish, Portuguese, Portuguese Brazilian, and Swedish. Previously, only
French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish were supported. In Messaging for In-App and Web and Enhanced Messaging Channels,
Conversation Catch-Up now includes rich content messages. Summaries can include choices and choiceResponse messages.
Previously, only static content messages were included.
Get a Quick Overview of a Case and Ongoing Developments with Case Summaries (Beta)
Quickly catch-up on cases with AI-generated case summaries. Using Einstein Case Summaries, agents can see the case progression
including conversations, updates, and escalations—all from the Case Feed or Case Comments.

Enjoy Rich Text and Additional Supported Languages in Conversation Catch-Up

Conversation Catch-Up now supports Dutch, Mexican Spanish, Portuguese, Portuguese Brazilian, and Swedish. Previously, only French,
German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish were supported. In Messaging for In-App and Web and Enhanced Messaging Channels, Conversation
Catch-Up now includes rich content messages. Summaries can include choices and choiceResponse messages. Previously, only static
content messages were included.
Where: These feature updates are available to Enhanced Messaging Channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions
for Messaging. The new supported languages are available in Enhanced Voice Channels. View required editions for Voice.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Show Agents and Supervisors Midconversation Summaries

Get a Quick Overview of a Case and Ongoing Developments with Case Summaries (Beta)
Quickly catch-up on cases with AI-generated case summaries. Using Einstein Case Summaries, agents can see the case progression
including conversations, updates, and escalations—all from the Case Feed or Case Comments.
Where: Einstein Case Summaries is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Service
add-on or Einstein 1 edition.
When: This change is available starting January 2025.
How: To get started with Case Summaries, set up Service AI Grounding with Cases. Next, select a destination for summaries on the case
page.

623
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Einstein for Service

When you select Case Comments, agents can draft summaries from the Case Comment tab in the Feed. When you select Case Feed,
agents can draft summaries from the Post tab in the Feed.
To use Case Summaries, select Draft a Case Summary with Einstein.

624
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Employee Service

Einstein drafts the case summary, which agents can review, edit, and save.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Generative AI

Employee Service
Explore the Alumni Portal for alumni services and networking. Employee Hub is now Employee Portal, and HR Service Workspace is
renamed as HR Service Console. Manage employee life events with Employee Enablement Program. Manage Workday data in Salesforce
by using the new MuleSoft integration apps.

IN THIS SECTION:
Simplify Information Access, Service Requests, and Networking with Alumni Portal
Your alumni can use Alumni Portal to read knowledge articles for solutions to common problems, quickly navigate to important
and frequently used resources and pages, submit service requests through Service Catalog, and network with other alumni. For
further support, alumni can create cases or contact human resource (HR) personnel through the email, voice, and messaging channels.
Alumni can also manage their own profile information. You can customize the Alumni Portal template based on the organization's
needs.
Experience Improved Clarity with the Renamed Employee Hub and HR Service Workspace Features
Employee Portal is the new name for Employee Hub, and HR Service Console is the new name for the HR Service Workspace feature.
This change doesn't alter the functionality of the features, but the new names align better with the purpose of the features.

625
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Employee Service

Equip Service Representatives with Historical Context by Rapidly Deploying a Preconfigured Timeline
Include a preconfigured Timeline component on the Employees page in Employee Portal, allowing quicker implementation. With
Timeline, service representatives can provide personalized service to employees by viewing events in a chronological order and
gaining better insights.
Efficiently Create Employee Records by Using CSV File Import
You now have another option to create employee records in Employee Service. With the advanced CSV data import feature, import
employee data as a CSV file to the Employee2 and Person Account objects.
Showcase Actions and Simplify Navigation with Navigation Tiles
Give your users a visually engaging navigation experience in Employee Portal and Alumni Portal by configuring the Navigation Tiles
component. The component presents the actions available to the users.
Ascertain that Important Information Reaches Employees with CMS Collection
Improve employee engagement by highlighting important content through the CMS Collection carousel component. The space-saving
component maximizes the use of the Employee Portal and Alumni Portal’s banner area by cycling through multiple collection items.
Your employees can click an item to learn more about it.
Streamline Employee Life Events with Employee Enablement Program
Provide a structured, personalized, and compelling enablement experience to your employees throughout their tenure with your
company. Your enablement admins can create programs for employee life events, such as onboarding and promotion. Employees
can complete their assigned or self-enrolled enablement programs in Employee Portal.
Conveniently Comment on Cases By Using the Case Management Bot
Your employees and alumni can now view case comments and add new comments through the Case Management bot, without
navigating to a case in Employee Portal or Alumni Portal.
Improve Accountability with Enhanced Approval Capabilities
The Work Guide component is now in the Approvals tab of the case details page for a better user experience. Your managers and
employees can track the status of the approval requests on the Trace Approvals tab. Your employees can now also recall a request
in Employee Portal if the request is no longer needed or requires modification. Together, these enhancements improve accountability
by improving efficiency, flexibility, and transparency.
Improve Employee Service by Managing Feedback with Feedback Management
Configure Feedback Management to automatically send a survey to employees when their case reaches the Closed status. The
survey responses help your service representatives gain actionable insights to improve the employee service experience.
Manage Workday Employee Data by Using Prebuilt MuleSoft Integrations
Seamlessly import the locations, associated companies, and manager details of employees from Workday to Salesforce by enabling
the Workday Org, Location & Manager Sync integration app. Effortlessly sync the status of employees in Salesforce based on their
Workday status by using the Workday Employee Offboarding integration app.
Changed Object in Employee Service
Use the changed object for creating employee enablement programs.

Simplify Information Access, Service Requests, and Networking with Alumni Portal
Your alumni can use Alumni Portal to read knowledge articles for solutions to common problems, quickly navigate to important and
frequently used resources and pages, submit service requests through Service Catalog, and network with other alumni. For further
support, alumni can create cases or contact human resource (HR) personnel through the email, voice, and messaging channels. Alumni
can also manage their own profile information. You can customize the Alumni Portal template based on the organization's needs.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Alumni Portal Community User permission set license.

626
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Employee Service

Experience Improved Clarity with the Renamed Employee Hub and HR Service
Workspace Features
Employee Portal is the new name for Employee Hub, and HR Service Console is the new name for the HR Service Workspace feature.
This change doesn't alter the functionality of the features, but the new names align better with the purpose of the features.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Experience Cloud in the Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Service Cloud Employee Hub Community User Add-On license, Employee Hub Community
User permission set license, Service Cloud Employee Hub HR Service Workspace Add-On license, and HR Service Workspace HR service
personnel permission set license.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Self-Service with Employee Portal (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Employee Support with HR Service Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Equip Service Representatives with Historical Context by Rapidly Deploying a

Preconfigured Timeline
Include a preconfigured Timeline component on the Employees page in Employee Portal, allowing quicker implementation. With
Timeline, service representatives can provide personalized service to employees by viewing events in a chronological order and gaining
better insights.
Where:This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Service Cloud Employee Hub HR Service Workspace Add-On license and the HR Service Workspace
HR service personnel permission set license.
How: Log in to HR Service Console. Navigate to the Employees page from the navigation menu. Edit an employee record page to add
the Timeline component.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Events Using Timeline in Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Person Account Page (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Efficiently Create Employee Records by Using CSV File Import

You now have another option to create employee records in Employee Service. With the advanced CSV data import feature, import
employee data as a CSV file to the Employee2 and Person Account objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Service Cloud Employee Hub HR Service Workspace Add-On license and these permission set
licenses: HR Service Workspace HR service personnel, Basic CSV Data Import, and Advanced CSV Data Import.
How: From App Launcher, find and select CSV File Import. Click Import using Data Processing Engine (DPE), and follow the
instructions to import employee data.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Import CSV Data into a Single Salesforce Object (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

627
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Employee Service

Showcase Actions and Simplify Navigation with Navigation Tiles

Give your users a visually engaging navigation experience in Employee Portal and Alumni Portal by configuring the Navigation Tiles
component. The component presents the actions available to the users.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, employees need the Service Cloud Employee Hub Community User Add-On license and the Employee Hub
Community User permission set license. Alumni need the Alumni Portal Community User permission set license.
How: Log in to Employee Portal or Alumni Portal to use the Navigation Tiles component on the home page. To access an action, click
the corresponding tile in the component.

Ascertain that Important Information Reaches Employees with CMS Collection

Improve employee engagement by highlighting important content through the CMS Collection carousel component. The space-saving
component maximizes the use of the Employee Portal and Alumni Portal’s banner area by cycling through multiple collection items.
Your employees can click an item to learn more about it.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, employees need the Service Cloud Employee Hub Community User Add-On license and the Employee Hub
Community User permission set license. Alumni need the Alumni Portal Community User permission set license.
How: Log in to Employee Portal or Alumni Portal to see the CMS Collection carousel component on the home page. To access a page,
click the corresponding item on the carousel.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: CMS Collection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline Employee Life Events with Employee Enablement Program

Provide a structured, personalized, and compelling enablement experience to your employees throughout their tenure with your
company. Your enablement admins can create programs for employee life events, such as onboarding and promotion. Employees can
complete their assigned or self-enrolled enablement programs in Employee Portal.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Service Cloud Employee Hub Community User Add-On license and the Employee Hub Community
User permission set license.
How: In Employee Portal, click the Enablement Programs tab.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sales Programs and Partner Tracks with Enablement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Conveniently Comment on Cases By Using the Case Management Bot

Your employees and alumni can now view case comments and add new comments through the Case Management bot, without
navigating to a case in Employee Portal or Alumni Portal.
Where:This change applies to Experience Cloud in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, employees need the Service Cloud Employee Hub Community User Add-On license and the Employee Hub
Community User permission set license. Alumni need the Alumni Portal Community User permission set license.

628
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Employee Service

How: To comment on a case by using the Case Management bot, employees or alumni must log in to Employee Portal or Alumni Portal
and use the Case Management bot.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Employee Hub Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve Accountability with Enhanced Approval Capabilities

The Work Guide component is now in the Approvals tab of the case details page for a better user experience. Your managers and
employees can track the status of the approval requests on the Trace Approvals tab. Your employees can now also recall a request in
Employee Portal if the request is no longer needed or requires modification. Together, these enhancements improve accountability by
improving efficiency, flexibility, and transparency.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Service Cloud Employee Hub Community User Add-On license and the Employee Hub Community
User permission set license.
How: To perform an approval action, log in to Employee Portal as a manager. Open the required case details page, and click the Approvals
tab.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Approvals (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve Employee Service by Managing Feedback with Feedback Management

Configure Feedback Management to automatically send a survey to employees when their case reaches the Closed status. The survey
responses help your service representatives gain actionable insights to improve the employee service experience.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition with Service Cloud.
Who: To participate in the survey, employees need the Service Cloud Employee Hub Community User Add-On license and the Employee
Hub Community User permission set license. Alumni need the Alumni Portal Community User permission set license.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Cases (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Feedback Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Manage Workday Employee Data by Using Prebuilt MuleSoft Integrations

Seamlessly import the locations, associated companies, and manager details of employees from Workday to Salesforce by enabling the
Workday Org, Location & Manager Sync integration app. Effortlessly sync the status of employees in Salesforce based on their Workday
status by using the Workday Employee Offboarding integration app.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience where MuleSoft Direct is enabled.
Who: To enable the MuleSoft integration apps, users must have the Salesforce Administrator or MuleSoft Administrator user permission.

629
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Service Data Kit

How: In Setup, find and select MuleSoft Direct. Enable the MuleSoft integration apps.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce-Workday Integration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Changed Object in Employee Service

Use the changed object for creating employee enablement programs.
Specify the type of the enablement program
Use the new enum value, Employee Service Enablement Program, in the Type field on the EnablementProgram
object.

SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: EnablementProgram (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Service Data Kit

Add more of your service data to Service Cloud and Data Cloud.

IN THIS SECTION:
Add More Service Data to Data Cloud for Greater Insights
Bring more of your service data into Service Cloud with Service Data Kit version 6.0. This update adds enhancements to the Digital
Engagement and Field Service data bundles, and a new Service Plan data bundle with calculated insights. These improvements
support Service Intelligence, Field Service Intellignece, and Service Insights, which offer key contact center metrics. You can also use
the kit to import service data into Data Cloud and build custom applications.

Add More Service Data to Data Cloud for Greater Insights

Bring more of your service data into Service Cloud with Service Data Kit version 6.0. This update adds enhancements to the Digital
Engagement and Field Service data bundles, and a new Service Plan data bundle with calculated insights. These improvements support
Service Intelligence, Field Service Intellignece, and Service Insights, which offer key contact center metrics. You can also use the kit to
import service data into Data Cloud and build custom applications.
Where: This change applies to Service Cloud in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost.
When: Service Data Kit version 6.0 will be available sometime in February 2025.
How: If you have the Service data kit installed, upgrade or reinstall it to ensure that it’s up to date. You can retrieve data assets for digital
engagement, field service, service insights, and service intelligence only when those features are turned on. Upgrading the data kit is
necessary to access the latest enhancements to Service data model objects (DMOs).

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Install Standard Data Bundles Powered by Data Kits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Install the Service Data Kit for Service Intelligence (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

630
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Service Insights

Service Insights
Explore your service performance with Service Insights.

IN THIS SECTION:
Reduce Costs and Improve Operations with Service Insights
Make better service decisions with insights from your service trends, agent behaviors, and customer satisfaction scores across your
service channels. Get a comprehensive view of your service team’s caseload in the Case dashboards. Perform a deep dive into your
customer satisfaction with CSAT dashboards. Quickly understand how Agentforce Service Agents help customers using the Agentforce
dashboards.

Reduce Costs and Improve Operations with Service Insights

Make better service decisions with insights from your service trends, agent behaviors, and customer satisfaction scores across your service
channels. Get a comprehensive view of your service team’s caseload in the Case dashboards. Perform a deep dive into your customer
satisfaction with CSAT dashboards. Quickly understand how Agentforce Service Agents help customers using the Agentforce dashboards.
Where: This change applies to Service Cloud in Lightning Experience and Einstein 1 Service.
Who: To use the Service Insights dashboards, you need the Tableau Einstein Included App Business User permission set. To manage the
Service Insights dashboards, you need the Tableau Included App Manager permission set.
How: To enable Service Insights, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Service Insights, and then select Service Insights Setup.
Complete the required setup steps and enable Tableau Einstein. Assign the Service Insights permission sets to the users who you want
to access Service Insights.

Channels
Enjoy improved flexibility when refining automated emails. Customize your Messaging for Web text message bubbles with custom
lightning web components (LWC). Route work items through a single system with Unified Routing for voice.

IN THIS SECTION:
Email
Customize and refine automated emails, and check out improved Omni-Channel routing.
Messaging
Customize your Messaging for Web text message bubbles with custom lightning web components (LWC). Build trust with typing
indicators for messaging end users and read and delivery receipts for inbound messages in Bring Your Own Channel and Bring Your
Own Channel for CCaaS. Streamline User Interactions with Auto-Populated Language Data in Apple Messages for Business and
Messaging for In-App and Web.
Voice
Route Work Items Through a Single System with Unified Routing for Voice. Maintain a consistent contact center experience during
outages with Omni-Channel routing. Manage call actions from your headset. Empower agents to resolve customer issues faster with
Einstein Article Recommendations for Voice.

Email
Customize and refine automated emails, and check out improved Omni-Channel routing.

631
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

IN THIS SECTION:
Enjoy Improved Flexibility When Refining Automated Emails
Service reps using Draft with Einstein can now elevate their emails by writing their own free-form instructions to draft an email,
modifying generated emails for length and tone, and inserting generated content into email templates.
Omni-Channel Flow for Email-to-Case Is Now Invoked Synchronously
Previously, the Omni-Channel flow began asynchronously. Now the flow is invoked right after Email-to-Case records (Case,
EmailMessage, Task, and ContentDocument) are committed, so the process is more precise and accurate.
Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior (Release Update)
This update turns off Ref ID threading and transitions to Lightning threading in Email-to-Case. With the new Email-to-Case threading
behavior, incoming emails aren’t matched using Ref IDs. Instead, they’re matched using a secure token in the email subject or body.
If no match is found, Email-to-Case checks metadata from the email headers. This update was first available in Winter ‘21 and has
no scheduled enforcement date.
Transition to the Lightning Editor for Email Composers in Email-to-Case (Generally Available) (Release Update)
When enabled, this release update replaces the email editor in the docked and case feed email composers. This update was generally
available in Lightning Experience in Spring ‘24 and has no scheduled enforcement date.

Enjoy Improved Flexibility When Refining Automated Emails

Service reps using Draft with Einstein can now elevate their emails by writing their own free-form instructions to draft an email, modifying
generated emails for length and tone, and inserting generated content into email templates.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In the Lightning Experience case email composer, click Draft with Einstein. Use the provided space to write instructions for the
email in your own words, or search for premade instructions. After a draft is generated, click the pencil icon to revise the length or tone
of the email. You can also revise emails that you write manually.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Draft Personalized Emails with Service Email Assistant (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Omni-Channel Flow for Email-to-Case Is Now Invoked Synchronously

Previously, the Omni-Channel flow began asynchronously. Now the flow is invoked right after Email-to-Case records (Case, EmailMessage,
Task, and ContentDocument) are committed, so the process is more precise and accurate.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Assign an Omni-Channel Flow to Route Cases from Email-to-Case

Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior (Release Update)
This update turns off Ref ID threading and transitions to Lightning threading in Email-to-Case. With the new Email-to-Case threading
behavior, incoming emails aren’t matched using Ref IDs. Instead, they’re matched using a secure token in the email subject or body. If
no match is found, Email-to-Case checks metadata from the email headers. This update was first available in Winter ‘21 and has no
scheduled enforcement date.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

632
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Why: Ref ID is currently in maintenance mode. New features and bug fixes will be added only to the new Lightning threading. To ensure
the best experience for your customers, we recommend enabling this release update, after testing it in your sandbox.
Similar to Ref ID threading, token-based threading inserts a formatted string into the email body or subject, but this string is now created
in a way that meets Salesforce security standards. When Lightning threading is enabled, new outbound emails don’t include a Ref ID.
How: To review this update, go to the Release Updates page in Setup. Follow the testing and activation steps for Disable Ref ID and
Transition to New Email Threading Behavior.
Learn more about the best practices for enabling this release update.

SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Knowledge Article:Disable Ref ID and Switch to Lightning Threading

Transition to the Lightning Editor for Email Composers in Email-to-Case (Generally Available) (Release
Update)
When enabled, this release update replaces the email editor in the docked and case feed email composers. This update was generally
available in Lightning Experience in Spring ‘24 and has no scheduled enforcement date.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
Why: Salesforce is replacing the email editor in the docked and case feed email composers and switching to a modern editor based in
HTML 5. The legacy Email-to-Case composer is currently in maintenance mode, and new features and bug fixes will be added only to
the new Lightning editor. To ensure the best experience for your customers, test this update in your sandbox before you enable it.
The new editor provides similar functionality in Lightning Experience. New features include:
• Full-screen mode
• Printing
• Undo and Redo buttons
• Format painting
• Emoji picker
• Resizability
• A more responsive toolbar
You asked for a cleaner visual experience, and we listened. We removed the automatically displayed table controls, word and character
counts, and the window about formatting pasted text.
How: This update is available to Salesforce orgs with Email-to-Case enabled. If your org was created in Winter ‘24 or later, you see the
new editor by default. If your org was created before Winter ‘24, enable it on the Release Updates page in Setup after testing it in your
sandbox. After the release update is enabled, users see similar functionality when they compose and edit emails.

SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

633
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Messaging
Customize your Messaging for Web text message bubbles with custom lightning web components (LWC). Build trust with typing
indicators for messaging end users and read and delivery receipts for inbound messages in Bring Your Own Channel and Bring Your
Own Channel for CCaaS. Streamline User Interactions with Auto-Populated Language Data in Apple Messages for Business and Messaging
for In-App and Web.

IN THIS SECTION:
Customize the Style of Text Message Bubbles in Messaging for In-App and Web
Match your brand’s unique look in the style of your text message bubbles by using custom Lightning web components (LWC). This
customization applies only to the message bubble. It won’t help you customize the avatar or any items around the bubble, such as
read/delivery receipts, timestamps, or the resend function.
Warn End Users Before Automatically Inactivating Their Messaging Session
While automatic inactivation helps service reps maintain their SLAs, such as time to resolution, when an end user has gone silent, it
can come as a surprise to the end user. Build trust with end users who’ve gone silent by warning them that the conversation is
automatically inactivated if they don’t respond within a specified time.
Messaging on the Mobile App to Include Attachments
To achieve parity with the desktop experience, the actions toolbar in the enhanced conversation component for the mobile app
now lets service reps send attachments. Previously, reps messaging from the Salesforce mobile app could only send messages;
transfer messages to other reps, bots, or queues; send messaging components; and send voice notes.
Blur Potentially Harmful Content Sent to Service Reps in Attachments
Protect your support team from seeing harmful content in all file preview thumbnails for files sent by an end user. Select the Blur
File Preview checkbox when customizing the Enhanced Conversation Component.
Help Customers Contact You During a Service Downtime in Messaging for In-App and Web
Customize a fallback customer support experience in the event of a messaging service downtime. Create a fallback message that
appears in the chat window, so you can encourage customers to reach out via your other support channels. Promote positive CSAT
and NPS scores by helping your customers even when messaging may be down.
More Customers Can End a Messaging Session in Messaging for In-App and Web
In Messaging for In-App and Web, verified customers can now click End Chat to end a messaging session. Unverified customers in
Messaging for In-App can also do this for the first time. This change achieves parity between the verified and unverified end user
experiences in Messaging for Web. This change introduces the End Chat experience to end users in Messaging for In-App.
Notify End Users When a Salesforce Org Migration Happens in Messaging for In-App and Web
Customize the error message for an org migration. During a migration, Messaging for In-App and Web doesn’t work, and a generic
error message is shown to the end user. You can now customize your org migration error message to include backup support
channels, such as phone or email.
Expand the Scope of Messaging for In-App and Web Engagement with Supported File Types
Service reps and end users in Messaging for In-App and Web can now send .xml, .xls, .xlsx, .csv, .docx, .doc, and .txt files. Previously,
reps and end users could send only .pdf, .png, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .tiff, and .gif files.
Start a Messaging Session from a Contact, Account, or Lead Record
Service reps can initiate outbound messaging sessions from a contact, account, or lead record page. These options are available in
the Salesforce mobile app and the desktop site. Expanding the location of the business-initiated outbound messaging action to
more record pages and to both messaging experiences gives service reps more flexibility in customer outreach. Previously, reps
could initiate outbound messaging sessions only on the desktop site from the Global Actions icon or from the Send Message button
on a Messaging User record page.

634
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Conversation Catch-up for Messaging to Include Rich Text and Additional Supported Languages
Conversation Catch-Up in Enhanced Messaging and Messaging for In-App and Web now includes rich content messages in its
summaries. Rich content includes choices and choiceResponse messages. Previously only static content messages were included.
Conversation Catch-Up in Enhanced Messaging and Messaging for In-App and Web now supports Dutch, Mexican Spanish, Portuguese,
Portuguese Brazilian, and Swedish. Previously, only French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish were supported.
Collect Date Information from End Users in Secure Forms
Secure forms now support both Date and DateTime fields. Previously, secure forms offered both field types as options, but the results
would display as a DateTime field. This change only applies to new Date and DateTime fields. Any pre-existing Date and DateTime
fields on secure forms aren't automatically updated.
The Enhanced Messaging Component Gets a Style Update
To align with Salesforce UI design standards, the enhanced messaging component has a few style changes. Agent actions like the
End Chat, agent tools, and Send Message actions all have a circular design. Previously, they were in square or rectangular boxes.
Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with Einstein Article Recommendations for Messaging (Pilot)
Reduce handle time and improve customer satisfaction by providing service representatives with relevant articles in real time during
calls.
Customize the Size of Your Customer-Facing Chat Window
Customize the size of your customer-facing chat window so it fits perfectly on your webpage. The default width is 320 pixels and
the default height is 498 pixels.
Use a Custom Font on Your Messaging Window
You can use your own custom font on your messaging deployments to match the look and feel of your brand.
Insert Messaging Components in Service Rep Text Boxes and Send Messages on Their Behalf Using Lightning Console Methods
Add a messaging component or text to your service rep’s text box by using the new Set Messaging Component Lightning Console
method. Send a new message with a specified messaging component on behalf of the service rep by using the new Send Messaging
Component method.
Improvements to Existing Lightning Console APIs
You can now import Lightning console API methods, which allow your background and non-rendered custom components to use
the APIs.
Remove All Messaging Components from a Web Page by Using an API
Use the Remove All Components API method to remove all Messaging for Web components from a page on your website. Call the
Clear Session API first to completely clean up both authenticated and unauthenticated conversations.
Ingest Third-Party Bot Conversation History into the Service Console by Using an API
The Conversation History API is useful when you have third-party bots helping customers with their queries before escalating the
conversation to a service rep. For sessions that get escalated, service reps can see the conversation history and resolve queries faster.
For sessions that are resolved by the bot and aren’t escalated, this information can be used for data collection and usage metrics
purposes. You can use the same API to ingest attachment history by uploading the attachment to Salesforce Files and generating
a shareable link.
Mass Delete User Information to Comply with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) Guidelines by Using an API
Use the Conversation Service API to delete user information which includes Messaging End User, Messaging Session, Conversation,
Conversation Entry, Conversation Participant, Participant Device, Intelligence Signals, Intelligence Signal Targets, Related Records,
Participant, Context Param Maps, and VoiceCall.
Optimize Business Processes Based on the Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time Messages (Pilot)
Trigger background processes or recommend the Next Best Action more accurately and intelligently by using generative AI to classify
the sentiment and intent of conversations.

635
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Get Added Support for Reply Messages in LINE

Immediate replies to end users now count as reply messages rather than push messages. If a representative or AI agent replies to a
message or action from an end user in under a minute, the message is free and doesn’t count toward the push message quota.
Auto-replies, interactions between end users and AI agents, and other brief conversations are typically free or close to it.
Save Time with Automated Outbound Messages for LINE
Now agents don’t need to send notification messaging components manually when using LINE. With automated outbound messaging,
it’s easy to keep users updated with messages triggered by flows.
Streamline User Interactions with Auto-Populated Language Data
To ensure that users receive messages in their own language, let Salesforce auto-populate a new Language field on all Messaging
User records associated with a channel. Salesforce stores the end user’s language to use in a variety of interactions and automations,
and you can reference it in your own custom automation. The availability and source of the locale data varies by channel. For example,
Apple provides this information each time an end user sends a message.
Use Rich Link Format in Enhanced LINE Links
Let service reps send links with custom images and text in LINE channels. LINE channels now support the Rich Link format for
enhanced link messaging components. Previously, LINE only supported the default plain text format for enhanced links.
Bring Your Own Channel
Improve messaging experiences with new features in Bring Your Own Channel for Messaging and Bring Your Own Channel for
CCaaS. You can now enable typing indicators and read and delivery receipts for end users. CCaaS providers can dynamically enable
or disable call transfers via API. Link previews provide quick context for shared URLs.

Customize the Style of Text Message Bubbles in Messaging for In-App and Web
Match your brand’s unique look in the style of your text message bubbles by using custom Lightning web components (LWC). This
customization applies only to the message bubble. It won’t help you customize the avatar or any items around the bubble, such as
read/delivery receipts, timestamps, or the resend function.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

SEE ALSO:
Messaging for Web Developer Guide: Customize Text Message Bubbles (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Warn End Users Before Automatically Inactivating Their Messaging Session

While automatic inactivation helps service reps maintain their SLAs, such as time to resolution, when an end user has gone silent, it can
come as a surprise to the end user. Build trust with end users who’ve gone silent by warning them that the conversation is automatically
inactivated if they don’t respond within a specified time.
Where: This change is available in Messaging for In-App and Web, Bring Your Own Channel, and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS.
View required editions.
How: Create an auto-response component with an inactivation timeout warning message. In the Messaging Settings page for your
Messaging Channel, add it to the Warning Message field, and set a time between warning and inactivation.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Send Auto-Response Components in Messaging Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

636
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Messaging on the Mobile App to Include Attachments

To achieve parity with the desktop experience, the actions toolbar in the enhanced conversation component for the mobile app now
lets service reps send attachments. Previously, reps messaging from the Salesforce mobile app could only send messages; transfer
messages to other reps, bots, or queues; send messaging components; and send voice notes.
Where: This feature applies to Enhanced messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Send Attachments in Messaging on the Salesforce Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Blur Potentially Harmful Content Sent to Service Reps in Attachments

Protect your support team from seeing harmful content in all file preview thumbnails for files sent by an end user. Select the Blur File
Preview checkbox when customizing the Enhanced Conversation Component.
Where: This feature applies to Enhanced messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
Who: To edit the service console in the Lightning App Builder, a user needs the Customize Application and View Setup and Configuration
permissions.
How: In the Lightning App Builder, open the Messaging Session page layout and click the Enhanced Conversation component. Select
Blue File Preview in the Properties pane.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Messaging to the Service Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Help Customers Contact You During a Service Downtime in Messaging for In-App and Web
Customize a fallback customer support experience in the event of a messaging service downtime. Create a fallback message that appears
in the chat window, so you can encourage customers to reach out via your other support channels. Promote positive CSAT and NPS
scores by helping your customers even when messaging may be down.
Where: This feature applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: Select Turn on Fallback Message in the Edit page for your messaging channel. Then create a custom fallback message in the
Custom Labels editor for your embedded service deployment.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use a Fallback Message to Help Customers During a Messaging for In-App and Web Downtime (can be outdated or
unavailable during release preview)

More Customers Can End a Messaging Session in Messaging for In-App and Web
In Messaging for In-App and Web, verified customers can now click End Chat to end a messaging session. Unverified customers in
Messaging for In-App can also do this for the first time. This change achieves parity between the verified and unverified end user
experiences in Messaging for Web. This change introduces the End Chat experience to end users in Messaging for In-App.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

637
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Why: To complete this change, the End Conversation button’s default text changed to “End Chat,” and the “You ended the conversation
at” default text changed to “You ended the chat at”. If you customized the old version of these texts with custom labels, rewrite and
republish your custom text.
How: A verified customer clicks the three-dot menu icon and then selects End Chat. “You ended the conversation at” appears in the
messaging conversation window, followed by a time stamp.
You customize the new labels in the Set Custom Labels area of the embedded service deployment settings page.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations and Limitations for Messaging for In-App and Web (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Notify End Users When a Salesforce Org Migration Happens in Messaging for In-App and Web
Customize the error message for an org migration. During a migration, Messaging for In-App and Web doesn’t work, and a generic error
message is shown to the end user. You can now customize your org migration error message to include backup support channels, such
as phone or email.
Where: This feature applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: Go to the Set Custom Labels editor on the Embedded Service Deployment Settings page. Edit your error message under the
General Chat Group, the new Error Label Group, and the Standard Label Type.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Custom Labels for Messaging for In-App and Web (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Expand the Scope of Messaging for In-App and Web Engagement with Supported File Types
Service reps and end users in Messaging for In-App and Web can now send .xml, .xls, .xlsx, .csv, .docx, .doc, and .txt files. Previously, reps
and end users could send only .pdf, .png, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .tiff, and .gif files.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Send Images and Files in Messaging Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Start a Messaging Session from a Contact, Account, or Lead Record

Service reps can initiate outbound messaging sessions from a contact, account, or lead record page. These options are available in the
Salesforce mobile app and the desktop site. Expanding the location of the business-initiated outbound messaging action to more record
pages and to both messaging experiences gives service reps more flexibility in customer outreach. Previously, reps could initiate outbound
messaging sessions only on the desktop site from the Global Actions icon or from the Send Message button on a Messaging User record
page.
Where: This applies to all messaging types except Messaging for Web. View required editions.
How: Make sure that the contact, account, or lead record that you want to initiate a messaging session from has an associated Messaging
User record. Click the downward arrow in the upper right of a contact, account, or lead record page, and select Send Message. Select

638
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

the Channel that you’d like to send your message from. Write your message in the conversation composer that appears, and send your
message.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Start a Messaging Session with a Customer

Conversation Catch-up for Messaging to Include Rich Text and Additional Supported Languages
Conversation Catch-Up in Enhanced Messaging and Messaging for In-App and Web now includes rich content messages in its summaries.
Rich content includes choices and choiceResponse messages. Previously only static content messages were included. Conversation
Catch-Up in Enhanced Messaging and Messaging for In-App and Web now supports Dutch, Mexican Spanish, Portuguese, Portuguese
Brazilian, and Swedish. Previously, only French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish were supported.
Where: This feature is available to Enhanced Messaging Channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions for
Messaging.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Enjoy Rich Text and Additional Supported Languages in Conversation Catch-Up

Collect Date Information from End Users in Secure Forms

Secure forms now support both Date and DateTime fields. Previously, secure forms offered both field types as options, but the results
would display as a DateTime field. This change only applies to new Date and DateTime fields. Any pre-existing Date and DateTime fields
on secure forms aren't automatically updated.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Send Secure Forms in Messaging Sessions

The Enhanced Messaging Component Gets a Style Update

To align with Salesforce UI design standards, the enhanced messaging component has a few style changes. Agent actions like the End
Chat, agent tools, and Send Message actions all have a circular design. Previously, they were in square or rectangular boxes.
Where: This feature is available to Enhanced Messaging Channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

639
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with Einstein Article Recommendations for Messaging (Pilot)
Reduce handle time and improve customer satisfaction by providing service representatives with relevant articles in real time during
calls.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web, enhanced Facebook Messenger, and enhanced WhatsApp channels.

Note: Einstein Article Recommendations is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

SEE ALSO:
Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with Einstein Article Recommendations (Pilot)

Customize the Size of Your Customer-Facing Chat Window

Customize the size of your customer-facing chat window so it fits perfectly on your webpage. The default width is 320 pixels and the
default height is 498 pixels.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: Go to the Branding section of the Embedded Service Deployment Settings page, open your deployment and click Branding.
Enter a width and height in pixels for your messaging window.

Use a Custom Font on Your Messaging Window

You can use your own custom font on your messaging deployments to match the look and feel of your brand.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: Create a static resource by uploading a .ttf, .otf, or .woff2 font file, give it a unique name, and set the cache control to public.
Go to the Branding section of the Embedded Service Deployment Settings page, select your service deployment, and click on Branding.
Select the custom font option and specify the name of the font file that you uploaded as a static resource.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure a Messaging for Web Deployment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Define Static Resources (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Insert Messaging Components in Service Rep Text Boxes and Send Messages on Their Behalf Using
Lightning Console Methods
Add a messaging component or text to your service rep’s text box by using the new Set Messaging Component Lightning Console
method. Send a new message with a specified messaging component on behalf of the service rep by using the new Send Messaging
Component method.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Guide: LWC Methods for Enhanced Messaging in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

640
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Improvements to Existing Lightning Console APIs

You can now import Lightning console API methods, which allow your background and non-rendered custom components to use the
APIs.
The messaging window now shows typing indicators when you use the setAgentInput method. The
conversationAgentSend event now supports choice messages, which is a messaging component that displays different choices
for the messaging end user to select. The endUserNewMessage method supports end user’s response to the choice message
component added to the conversationAgentSend method.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Guide: LWC Methods for Enhanced Messaging in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Developer Guide: Aura Methods for Enhanced Messaging in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Remove All Messaging Components from a Web Page by Using an API

Use the Remove All Components API method to remove all Messaging for Web components from a page on your website. Call the Clear
Session API first to completely clean up both authenticated and unauthenticated conversations.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.

SEE ALSO:
Messaging for Web Developer Guide: Utilities API (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Ingest Third-Party Bot Conversation History into the Service Console by Using an API
The Conversation History API is useful when you have third-party bots helping customers with their queries before escalating the
conversation to a service rep. For sessions that get escalated, service reps can see the conversation history and resolve queries faster.
For sessions that are resolved by the bot and aren’t escalated, this information can be used for data collection and usage metrics purposes.
You can use the same API to ingest attachment history by uploading the attachment to Salesforce Files and generating a shareable link.
Where: This feature applies to Messaging for In-App and Web and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS. View required editions.
When: This feature is not part of the initial Spring ’25 release and may be included at a later date.

Mass Delete User Information to Comply with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) Guidelines
by Using an API
Use the Conversation Service API to delete user information which includes Messaging End User, Messaging Session, Conversation,
Conversation Entry, Conversation Participant, Participant Device, Intelligence Signals, Intelligence Signal Targets, Related Records,
Participant, Context Param Maps, and VoiceCall.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
When: This feature is not part of the initial Spring ’25 release and may be included at a later date.
How: See the Get Started with Conversation Service APIs page to configure your Salesforce org and use the API.

641
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Optimize Business Processes Based on the Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time Messages (Pilot)
Trigger background processes or recommend the Next Best Action more accurately and intelligently by using generative AI to classify
the sentiment and intent of conversations.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web, enhanced Facebook Messenger, and enhanced WhatsApp channels.

Note: Conversation Intelligence Service is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

SEE ALSO:
Optimize Business Processes Based on the Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time Conversations (Pilot)

Get Added Support for Reply Messages in LINE

Immediate replies to end users now count as reply messages rather than push messages. If a representative or AI agent replies to a
message or action from an end user in under a minute, the message is free and doesn’t count toward the push message quota. Auto-replies,
interactions between end users and AI agents, and other brief conversations are typically free or close to it.
Where: This change applies to enhanced LINE channels. View required editions.

Save Time with Automated Outbound Messages for LINE

Now agents don’t need to send notification messaging components manually when using LINE. With automated outbound messaging,
it’s easy to keep users updated with messages triggered by flows.
Where: This change applies to enhanced LINE channels. View required editions.
How: To auto-send outbound messages, create a notification messaging component in Setup. Add and configure the Rich Link format
to include a link in your message, or just configure the default text format. Then use Flow Builder to create a flow that sends your new
component under the conditions you specify.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Send Automated Messages in Enhanced Messaging Channels

Streamline User Interactions with Auto-Populated Language Data

To ensure that users receive messages in their own language, let Salesforce auto-populate a new Language field on all Messaging User
records associated with a channel. Salesforce stores the end user’s language to use in a variety of interactions and automations, and you
can reference it in your own custom automation. The availability and source of the locale data varies by channel. For example, Apple
provides this information each time an end user sends a message.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web and enhanced Apple Messages for Business channels. View required
editions.
Why: The language associated with each end user is used to automatically populate the Language field of any new Messaging Sessions
created for that user. Salesforce also uses the Language field to select the appropriate language for translated messaging components.
As a result, messaging components are always sent out in the end user’s language when a translation is available.
How: On the Messaging Settings page in Setup, click a channel name and select Identify preferred language of messaging users.
When you select this option, the Language field for this channel's messaging users is auto-populated if their locale is known.

642
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Use Rich Link Format in Enhanced LINE Links

Let service reps send links with custom images and text in LINE channels. LINE channels now support the Rich Link format for enhanced
link messaging components. Previously, LINE only supported the default plain text format for enhanced links.
Where: This change applies to enhanced LINE channels. View required editions.
How: On the Messaging Components page in Setup, create an enhanced link messaging component. Then, add the Rich Link format
and configure its properties. Service reps can select and send the component during a LINE messaging session.

Bring Your Own Channel

Improve messaging experiences with new features in Bring Your Own Channel for Messaging and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS.
You can now enable typing indicators and read and delivery receipts for end users. CCaaS providers can dynamically enable or disable
call transfers via API. Link previews provide quick context for shared URLs.

IN THIS SECTION:
Build Trust with Messaging Typing Indicators and Read and Delivery Receipts
Reassure Messaging end users that reps are actively engaged in resolving their problems. Enable event-driven settings so customers
see whether reps are typing or have received and read their inbound messages. Previously, typing indicators for reps and outbound
message acknowledgements were supported and enabled by default. Beginning in Spring ’25, typing indicators for messaging end
users and inbound message acknowledgments are available with admin opt-in.
Customize the Messaging Experience Dynamically
Contact Center as a Service (CCaaS) provider partners can now extend or modify messaging functionality programmatically to
customize the Messaging experience for service reps based on business requirements. Beginning in Spring ’25, you can disable or
enable transferring calls by using Interaction Service API. This change gives partners more control over capabilities per Messaging
session.
Get Context Faster with Link Previews in Inbound and Outbound Messages
Give customers and reps information about URLs shared in Messaging sessions with no setup required. After link previews are enabled
by a Messaging or Contact Center as a Service (CCaaS) partner, reps can send and receive them without using messaging components.
Just send a URL in a Messaging session, and a link preview shows a thumbnail image, title, and URL.
Stay Updated on Bring Your Own Channel Terminology
Clarify your understanding of the Bring Your Own Channel ecosystem with updated terminology. As of Spring ’25, Bring Your Own
Channel for Messaging refers to Messaging channels that connect an external Messaging provider to Salesforce. This channel type
was previously known as Bring Your Own Channel or Partner Messaging. Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS still refers to Messaging
channels that connect an external contact center as a service (CCaaS) provider to Salesforce in a contact center. The Bring Your Own
Channel category includes both Bring Your Own Channel for Messaging and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS.

Build Trust with Messaging Typing Indicators and Read and Delivery Receipts
Reassure Messaging end users that reps are actively engaged in resolving their problems. Enable event-driven settings so customers
see whether reps are typing or have received and read their inbound messages. Previously, typing indicators for reps and outbound
message acknowledgements were supported and enabled by default. Beginning in Spring ’25, typing indicators for messaging end
users and inbound message acknowledgments are available with admin opt-in.
Where: This change applies to Bring Your Own Channel for Messaging and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS. View required editions.
How: Visit the channel’s Messaging Settings page in Setup to select Show agent typing indicator and Show messaging users read
and delivered receipts in Event-Driven Settings. These options are available if your Messaging or CCaaS provider supports them in the
Messaging channel’s Conversation Channel Definition.

643
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Customize the Messaging Experience Dynamically

Contact Center as a Service (CCaaS) provider partners can now extend or modify messaging functionality programmatically to customize
the Messaging experience for service reps based on business requirements. Beginning in Spring ’25, you can disable or enable transferring
calls by using Interaction Service API. This change gives partners more control over capabilities per Messaging session.
Where: This change applies to Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS. View required editions.
How: Pass action enabled or disabled information in the payload for the /agentWork endpoint in Interaction Service API.

SEE ALSO:
Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS Developer Guide: Dynamically Control Messaging Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Get Context Faster with Link Previews in Inbound and Outbound Messages
Give customers and reps information about URLs shared in Messaging sessions with no setup required. After link previews are enabled
by a Messaging or Contact Center as a Service (CCaaS) partner, reps can send and receive them without using messaging components.
Just send a URL in a Messaging session, and a link preview shows a thumbnail image, title, and URL.
Where: This change applies to Bring Your Own Channel for Messaging and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS. View required editions.
How: Paste a URL into the messaging field in a Conversation component, and the messaging end user receives a rich link. Receive URLs
sent by Messaging end users as rich links too. Partners must enable this feature.

644
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Stay Updated on Bring Your Own Channel Terminology

Clarify your understanding of the Bring Your Own Channel ecosystem with updated terminology. As of Spring ’25, Bring Your Own
Channel for Messaging refers to Messaging channels that connect an external Messaging provider to Salesforce. This channel type was
previously known as Bring Your Own Channel or Partner Messaging. Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS still refers to Messaging channels
that connect an external contact center as a service (CCaaS) provider to Salesforce in a contact center. The Bring Your Own Channel
category includes both Bring Your Own Channel for Messaging and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS.
Where: This change applies to Bring Your Own Channel for Messaging and Bring Your Own Channel for CCaaS. View required editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Bring Your Own Channel to Salesforce

Voice
Route Work Items Through a Single System with Unified Routing for Voice. Maintain a consistent contact center experience during
outages with Omni-Channel routing. Manage call actions from your headset. Empower agents to resolve customer issues faster with
Einstein Article Recommendations for Voice.

645
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

IN THIS SECTION:
Route Work Items Through a Single System with Unified Routing for Voice (Pilot)
Route voice calls alongside other channel types in Salesforce by using Omni-Channel Unified Routing. Unified Routing allows
Salesforce to serve as the single system for routing voice calls. Routing takes place in Salesforce instead of in the telephony system.
Previously, Omni-Channel provided end-to-end routing support to other channel types only. Turn on Unified Routing to support
skill-based routing and direct-to-rep routing for voice calls in an Amazon Connect contact center. Additionally, reps now have more
than 20 seconds to accept a call.
Use Omni-Channel Routing with Automatic Queue and User Sync During Disaster Recovery
During disaster recovery, queue and agent capacity resources sync automatically to support Omni-Channel routing in the secondary
contact center instance. Omni-Channel routing makes sure that the calls are routed to the same agent or team respecting agent
capacity, even if you switch between primary and secondary contact center instances due to an outage. This change ensures business
continuity and resiliency of contact center operations in case of an outage in the AWS regions.
Manage Call Actions from Your Headset
Control call actions such as accept, mute, hold, and unmute from your headset to manage calls without interrupting your workflow
or navigating away from important information in the browser tab. This change enhances rep efficiency, reduces distractions, and
ensures smooth interactions with the customer. This feature results in faster response times and improved multitasking abilities for
the rep which increases rep productivity.
Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with Einstein Article Recommendations (Pilot)
Reduce handle time and improve customer satisfaction by providing service representatives with relevant articles in real time during
conversations. During real-time conversations, Einstein recommends relevant articles directly to service representatives in the Voice
Call or Messaging Session record page. By default, recommendations are given whenever relevant throughout each conversation.
To provide article recommendations only when service representatives are ready to leverage them, go to the Einstein Article
Recommendations setup page and select the option to provide article recommendations only on-demand.
Customize Softphone Options to Support Call Handling Compliance
To support compliance with internal policies and industry regulations such as the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (TCPA), you
can now disable options such as end call, phone book, and dial pad in the softphone to control the call handling actions of the reps.
This change mitigates the risks associated with non compliance and promotes a customer-focused approach to call handling.
Use Desk Phones Without Another Audio Device
Reps in contact center orgs with strict security and compliance requirements can seamlessly use desk phones for voice calls, even
when browser audio devices are restricted. There’s no need to enable browser audio or to plug an audio device into your computer.
This change ensures a secure and compliant contact center operation and provides reps with the flexibility and familiarity of using
the desk phones. If you were previously using a deskphone, you must select your phone type again because this update resets the
phone type selection to default softphone option.
Delete Salesforce Provisioned AWS Resources Automatically When You Delete a Contact Center
To save costs and reduce manual effort, deleting a contact center now deletes the associated AWS resources and Amazon Connect
instance provisioned by Service Cloud Voice.
Leverage Customized Usernames for Contact Centers
Service Cloud Voice now supports customized username formats for your Amazon Connect usernames. This change reduces the
time to onboard your agents in Amazon Connect to Voice and enables you to maintain username formats used with your pre-existing
identity provider for authenticating to Amazon Connect from Voice.
Use External ID for Provisioning Role for Additional Security
For an additional layer of security for provisioning roles, generate a unique external ID for the IAM provisioning role in the Service
Cloud Voice setup. When external ID is enabled, Service Cloud Voice assumes a provisioning role and performs contact center admin
actions in your AWS account only after external ID validation. External ID validation is applicable for all the provisioning roles.

646
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Get the Latest Enhancements for Your Amazon Connect Contact Center
Take advantage of the Service Cloud Voice enhancements and bug fixes for your Amazon Connect contact center. Spring ’25 includes
Contact Center version 17.0. To test the updates before they go live in production, deploy them to your sandbox.
Optimize Business Processes Based on the Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time Conversations (Pilot)
Trigger background processes or recommend the Next Best Action more accurately and intelligently by using generative AI to classify
the sentiment and intent of conversations.
Updated Format of Usage Details Field in Amazon Connect Usage and Amazon Lex Reports
To maintain unique identifiers in the usage report for the different AWS accounts within a Salesforce org, the Usage Details field in
the Amazon Connect Usage report and Amazon Lex report now uses the AWSRegionName_AWSAccountId format. Previously, this
field used the AWSRegionName_SalesforceOrgId format.
Conversation Catch-Up Offers Additional Supported Languages
Get supervisor and agent summaries in additional supported languages, including Dutch, Mexican Spanish, Portuguese, Portuguese
Brazilian, and Swedish. Previously, only French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish were supported.
Manage Capacity via Status-Based Capacity for Voice (Beta)
Measure rep capacity based on the status of a rep’s accepted work. Status-based capacity was previously available for other service
channels, but it’s now available for Voice. Thanks to status-based capacity, voice calls are available on lightning apps with standard
navigation.
Display Voice Call Audio Statistics in Real Time Using the Service Cloud Voice Toolkit API
Actively monitor the WebRTC audio stats of voice calls in real time by leveraging new events in the Service Cloud Voice Toolkit API.
Display the data, including packets transmitted and roundtrip times, in your own dashboards with updates published every 30
seconds
Dissociate Voice Call Recordings from Voice Calls
Keep your Voice Call record pages tidy by disconnecting voice call recordings you no longer need from their associated voice calls.
After it's disconnected, the voice call recording along with the Call Recording Player no longer appear in the Voice Call record page.
Focus on Primary Tasks by Using Voice in an App with Standard Navigation (Beta)
Get more flexibility in Service Cloud Voice for app type and capacity model. Help service reps stay focused on their primary tasks by
using Service Cloud Voice in apps with standard navigation. Previously, Service Cloud Voice relied on tab-based capacity and was
available only in console apps. With standard app support for Voice, status-based capacity is now available in all service channel
types, including voice calls.
Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All Intelligence Signal Types (Release Update)
This release update adds a new intelligenceSignals flow input parameter that contains detected conversation intelligence signals.
Use this Apex-defined input parameter for your Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched flows linked to a Conversation
Intelligence rule. This update first made available in Summer ’24.

Route Work Items Through a Single System with Unified Routing for Voice (Pilot)
Route voice calls alongside other channel types in Salesforce by using Omni-Channel Unified Routing. Unified Routing allows Salesforce
to serve as the single system for routing voice calls. Routing takes place in Salesforce instead of in the telephony system. Previously,
Omni-Channel provided end-to-end routing support to other channel types only. Turn on Unified Routing to support skill-based routing
and direct-to-rep routing for voice calls in an Amazon Connect contact center. Additionally, reps now have more than 20 seconds to
accept a call.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

647
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service, Sales, and Government Clouds.

Note: Unified Routing is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

SEE ALSO:
Route Voice Calls with Other Channels by Using Omni-Channel (Pilot)

Use Omni-Channel Routing with Automatic Queue and User Sync During Disaster Recovery
During disaster recovery, queue and agent capacity resources sync automatically to support Omni-Channel routing in the secondary
contact center instance. Omni-Channel routing makes sure that the calls are routed to the same agent or team respecting agent capacity,
even if you switch between primary and secondary contact center instances due to an outage. This change ensures business continuity
and resiliency of contact center operations in case of an outage in the AWS regions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

Manage Call Actions from Your Headset

Control call actions such as accept, mute, hold, and unmute from your headset to manage calls without interrupting your workflow or
navigating away from important information in the browser tab. This change enhances rep efficiency, reduces distractions, and ensures
smooth interactions with the customer. This feature results in faster response times and improved multitasking abilities for the rep which
increases rep productivity.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with this telephony
model.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

648
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with Einstein Article Recommendations (Pilot)
Reduce handle time and improve customer satisfaction by providing service representatives with relevant articles in real time during
conversations. During real-time conversations, Einstein recommends relevant articles directly to service representatives in the Voice Call
or Messaging Session record page. By default, recommendations are given whenever relevant throughout each conversation. To provide
article recommendations only when service representatives are ready to leverage them, go to the Einstein Article Recommendations
setup page and select the option to provide article recommendations only on-demand.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.
This features is also available in Messaging for in-App and Web, enhanced Facebook Messenger, and enhanced WhatsApp channels.

Note: Einstein Einstein Article Recommendations is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements
- Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

SEE ALSO:
Empower Reps to Resolve Cases Faster with Einstein Article Recommendations for Messaging (Pilot)

Customize Softphone Options to Support Call Handling Compliance

To support compliance with internal policies and industry regulations such as the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (TCPA), you can
now disable options such as end call, phone book, and dial pad in the softphone to control the call handling actions of the reps. This
change mitigates the risks associated with non compliance and promotes a customer-focused approach to call handling.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with this telephony
model.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

SEE ALSO:
Service Cloud Voice for Partner Telephony Developer Guide: Disable Call Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

649
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Use Desk Phones Without Another Audio Device

Reps in contact center orgs with strict security and compliance requirements can seamlessly use desk phones for voice calls, even when
browser audio devices are restricted. There’s no need to enable browser audio or to plug an audio device into your computer. This
change ensures a secure and compliant contact center operation and provides reps with the flexibility and familiarity of using the desk
phones. If you were previously using a deskphone, you must select your phone type again because this update resets the phone type
selection to default softphone option.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

Delete Salesforce Provisioned AWS Resources Automatically When You Delete a Contact Center
To save costs and reduce manual effort, deleting a contact center now deletes the associated AWS resources and Amazon Connect
instance provisioned by Service Cloud Voice.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Considerations before deleting Salesforce-Provisioned AWS Resources for Service Cloud Voice (with Amazon
Connect) Contact Centers

Leverage Customized Usernames for Contact Centers

Service Cloud Voice now supports customized username formats for your Amazon Connect usernames. This change reduces the time
to onboard your agents in Amazon Connect to Voice and enables you to maintain username formats used with your pre-existing identity
provider for authenticating to Amazon Connect from Voice.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

650
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

Use External ID for Provisioning Role for Additional Security

For an additional layer of security for provisioning roles, generate a unique external ID for the IAM provisioning role in the Service Cloud
Voice setup. When external ID is enabled, Service Cloud Voice assumes a provisioning role and performs contact center admin actions
in your AWS account only after external ID validation. External ID validation is applicable for all the provisioning roles.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with this telephony
model.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Amazon Connect IAM Roles and Provisioning Policies for Service Cloud Voice (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Get the Latest Enhancements for Your Amazon Connect Contact Center
Take advantage of the Service Cloud Voice enhancements and bug fixes for your Amazon Connect contact center. Spring ’25 includes
Contact Center version 17.0. To test the updates before they go live in production, deploy them to your sandbox.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Service Cloud Voice Contact Center Updates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Optimize Business Processes Based on the Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time Conversations (Pilot)
Trigger background processes or recommend the Next Best Action more accurately and intelligently by using generative AI to classify
the sentiment and intent of conversations.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

651
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

Note: Conversation Intelligence Service is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: From the Conversation Intelligence Rules setup page, create a rule, and then set Einstein Conversation Intelligence Service as a
Signal Source. Use “Intent,” “Customer Sentiment,” or “Agent Sentiment” as the Signal Type that defines when to take conditional actions.

SEE ALSO:
Optimize Business Processes Based on the Sentiment and Intent of Real-Time Messages (Pilot)

Updated Format of Usage Details Field in Amazon Connect Usage and Amazon Lex Reports
To maintain unique identifiers in the usage report for the different AWS accounts within a Salesforce org, the Usage Details field in the
Amazon Connect Usage report and Amazon Lex report now uses the AWSRegionName_AWSAccountId format. Previously, this field
used the AWSRegionName_SalesforceOrgId format.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with this telephony
model.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.

Conversation Catch-Up Offers Additional Supported Languages

Get supervisor and agent summaries in additional supported languages, including Dutch, Mexican Spanish, Portuguese, Portuguese
Brazilian, and Swedish. Previously, only French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish were supported.
Where: This feature is available to Enhanced Messaging Channels, Messaging for In-App and Web, and Enhanced Voice Channels. View
required editions for Messaging. View required editions for Voice.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Enjoy Rich Text and Additional Supported Languages in Conversation Catch-Up (can be outdated or
unavailable during release preview)

652
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Manage Capacity via Status-Based Capacity for Voice (Beta)

Measure rep capacity based on the status of a rep’s accepted work. Status-based capacity was previously available for other service
channels, but it’s now available for Voice. Thanks to status-based capacity, voice calls are available on lightning apps with standard
navigation.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service, Sales, and Government Clouds.

Note: Status-based capacity for Voice is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
Who: Using status-based capacity instead of tab-based capacity changes the rep experience for voice calls. In standard (not console)
apps, reps have more freedom to simultaneously view multiple voice call records without session ownership being affected.
How: On the Omni-Channel Settings page in Setup, make sure that enhanced Omni-Channel routing is enabled and then select Enable
Status-Based Capacity Model. Then, on the Service Channels page in Setup, create a Service Channel for the Voice Call object and
select Status-Based as the Capacity Model.

653
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Display Voice Call Audio Statistics in Real Time Using the Service Cloud Voice Toolkit API
Actively monitor the WebRTC audio stats of voice calls in real time by leveraging new events in the Service Cloud Voice Toolkit API.
Display the data, including packets transmitted and roundtrip times, in your own dashboards with updates published every 30 seconds
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service, Sales, and Government Clouds.

654
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

How: Subscribe to the new Service Cloud Voice Toolkit API AUDIO_STATS event for Aura components or audiostats event for
Lightning web components.

SEE ALSO:
Service Cloud Voice for Partner Telephony Developer Guide: Service Cloud Voice Aura Toolkit API Telephony Events (can be outdated
or unavailable during release preview)
Service Cloud Voice for Partner Telephony Developer Guide: Service Cloud Voice Lightning Web Component (LWC) Toolkit API (can be
outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Dissociate Voice Call Recordings from Voice Calls

Keep your Voice Call record pages tidy by disconnecting voice call recordings you no longer need from their associated voice calls. After
it's disconnected, the voice call recording along with the Call Recording Player no longer appear in the Voice Call record page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service, Sales, and Government Clouds.
How: Use your preferred method, such as the Developer Console, to delete the Salesforce VoiceCallRecording record that links the voice
call recording to the voice call.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Dissociate Voice Call Recordings from Voice Call Records (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Focus on Primary Tasks by Using Voice in an App with Standard Navigation (Beta)
Get more flexibility in Service Cloud Voice for app type and capacity model. Help service reps stay focused on their primary tasks by using
Service Cloud Voice in apps with standard navigation. Previously, Service Cloud Voice relied on tab-based capacity and was available
only in console apps. With standard app support for Voice, status-based capacity is now available in all service channel types, including
voice calls.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service, Sales, and Government Clouds.

655
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Channels

Note: Service Cloud Voice in lightning apps with standard navigation is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services
Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the
Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

SEE ALSO:
Manage Capacity via Status-Based Capacity for Voice (Beta)

Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All Intelligence Signal Types (Release Update)
This release update adds a new intelligenceSignals flow input parameter that contains detected conversation intelligence signals. Use
this Apex-defined input parameter for your Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched flows linked to a Conversation Intelligence
rule. This update first made available in Summer ’24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.

Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony

All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. Follow
the testing and activation steps for Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All Intelligence Signal Types.
Create an intelligenceSignals input variable in Flow Builder, and add the input variable to an autolaunched flow or Recommendation
Strategy flow for next best action.

656
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up an Autolaunched Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create the Recommendation Strategy Flow for Next Best Action (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Release Updates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Knowledge
Integrate knowledge articles into Data Cloud to improve AI outcomes. Open links from articles ingested from third-party sources directly
within Salesforce to avoid context-switching. Add and manage more complex, multi-stage approval processes to your knowledge base.
Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool to access Classic Knowledge.

IN THIS SECTION:
Create Advanced Approval Processes for Knowledge Articles
Add and manage more complex, multi-stage approval processes to your knowledge base. Ensure that content created with generative
AI is accurate and reviewed by multiple stakeholders, such as senior editors, product experts, or legal teams. Use a Flow Orchestration
for easier customization, integration, error handling, and scalability of article approvals.
Revise Knowledge Articles for Grammar and Readability with Einstein Knowledge Edits (Generally Available)
Revise fields on your Knowledge articles by using Einstein generative AI with predefined edit prompts. Predefined edit prompts can
improve the grammar, conciseness, and readability of your knowledge articles. This feature, now generally available, includes some
changes since the pilot release.
Leverage Data Cloud Connectors to Ingest Knowledge Articles
Use Data Cloud connectors to bring knowledge articles from third-party sources into Data Cloud. Consolidate your knowledge articles
into a single, comprehensive knowledge base to improve AI accuracy, so service reps can resolve customer cases faster and deliver
more personalized customer experiences.

657
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

Sync Knowledge with Data Cloud

Bring all your knowledge from the Einstein 1 Platform to Data Cloud to form a comprehensive, integrated knowledge base. This
integration improves AI outcomes, enhances data management, and ensures better visibility across generative AI, the Service Console,
and Self-Service experiences for increased efficiency.
Unify Knowledge with MindTouch Connector
Enhance your Unified Knowledge integration with MindTouch connector. This integration unifies your company’s knowledge across
all service rep and customer search experiences and improves generative AI features for Einstein for Service.
Get More Done in the Lightning Article Editor
The improved Lightning Article Editor helps you write knowledge articles more efficiently and take advantage of streamlined features
to create great content.
Open Ingested Article Links from Third-Party Sources in Salesforce
You can now open links from articles ingested from third-party sources directly within Salesforce to avoid switching to another
application. This feature is available for articles ingested through these connectors in Unified Knowledge: Salesforce Knowledge
Article, Zendesk, Confluence Cloud Knowledge Article, Confluence Server Knowledge Article, ServiceNow Knowledge, Sitemap, Guru,
Atlassian Jira Cloud, Atlassian Jira Server, and Helpjuice.
Sync Options Enhanced for Your Knowledge Base
You asked, and we listened. With Force Sync in Unified Knowledge, you can now synchronize all your knowledge articles from the
source system, even if they haven’t changed since the last sync. Force sync ensures your knowledge base is up to date. If you want
to sync only the latest changes, use Incremental Sync. It’s scheduled to run periodically, but you can manually trigger it within that
interval for faster updates.
Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool (Release Update)
To access Classic Knowledge, run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool. To prepare for the retirement of the Classic Knowledge
data model, upgrade to Lightning Knowledge. The upgrade offers enhanced article editing, improved search, and AI-driven features
like Einstein Article Recommendations, Einstein Search for Knowledge, and Agentforce Service Agents. After you migrate, you can
still use Classic Knowledge with the limitations described below. Orgs created after Spring ’25 have no access to Classic Knowledge.
Alert Agents to Knowledge Articles with Einstein Knowledge Creation Async Notification
Agents can now respond to other cases while they wait for their knowledge article to be generated, which increases agent productivity.
Previously, agents were unable to act for up to 3 minutes while Einstein generated a knowledge article for their case.

Create Advanced Approval Processes for Knowledge Articles

Add and manage more complex, multi-stage approval processes to your knowledge base. Ensure that content created with generative
AI is accurate and reviewed by multiple stakeholders, such as senior editors, product experts, or legal teams. Use a Flow Orchestration
for easier customization, integration, error handling, and scalability of article approvals.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Use the Flow Builder and orchestrations to design approval processes tailored to your business needs. In the orchestration, include
decision elements to manage the flow based on specific outcomes. Define requirements for each stage and step, ensuring they're
triggered by relevant record changes. Assign interactive steps to appropriate users, groups, or queues. Activate the orchestration and
select it in Knowledge Settings under Approval Settings to ensure it integrates with your Knowledge articles.

658
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

Approvers can complete or track steps using the Work Guide and Approval Trace components on Knowledge page layouts. They can
also use the Approvals app, available on the App Picker, to review their work items or history. Additionally, approvers can create and run
Lightning reports to see similar information.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Approvals for Lightning Knowledge (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Automate Complex Processes with Orchestrations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Revise Knowledge Articles for Grammar and Readability with Einstein Knowledge
Edits (Generally Available)
Revise fields on your Knowledge articles by using Einstein generative AI with predefined edit prompts. Predefined edit prompts can
improve the grammar, conciseness, and readability of your knowledge articles. This feature, now generally available, includes some
changes since the pilot release.
Where: This change applies to Unlimited and Enterprise editions with the Einstein for Service add-on. Einstein for Service is available in
Lightning Experience.
Who: To use Knowledge Edits, agents must have the Prompt Template User and the Einstein Knowledge Creation permission sets.
Why: Create customized edit prompts through Prompt Builder by editing or creating a prompt with the Knowledge Field Update type.
Specify what information Einstein includes, how Einstein formats article information, or adjust the voice and tone of the output to fit
your business needs.
How: For the Knowledge article that you want to revise, from the quick action menu select Edit. From the toolbar, click Revise with
Einstein. Revise specific parts of the text by highlighting it and clicking Revise with Einstein.

Leverage Data Cloud Connectors to Ingest Knowledge Articles

Use Data Cloud connectors to bring knowledge articles from third-party sources into Data Cloud. Consolidate your knowledge articles
into a single, comprehensive knowledge base to improve AI accuracy, so service reps can resolve customer cases faster and deliver more
personalized customer experiences.

659
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition and all other editions with the Knowledge add-on license.
Why: With the Knowledge Article DMO, you can access your knowledge base on Data Cloud. The Data Cloud infrastructure supports
the large-scale integration of transactional knowledge, such as Slack posts and chat transcripts, alongside curated articles, to meet the
needs of enterprise customers.
How: In Setup, go to the Unified Knowledge page. Click Add a Source. On the Add a Source page, go to the Data Cloud tab. Then
configure a connector, create a data stream, and set up the search index.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Third-Party Connectors with Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Data Cloud: Connectors and Integrations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Search Index Configuration with Easy Setup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sync Knowledge with Data Cloud

Bring all your knowledge from the Einstein 1 Platform to Data Cloud to form a comprehensive, integrated knowledge base. This integration
improves AI outcomes, enhances data management, and ensures better visibility across generative AI, the Service Console, and Self-Service
experiences for increased efficiency.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition and all other editions with the Knowledge add-on license.
How: In Setup, on the Enhanced Knowledge Settings page, click Sync With Data Cloud.

660
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sync Knowledge with Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Unify Knowledge with MindTouch Connector

Enhance your Unified Knowledge integration with MindTouch connector. This integration unifies your company’s knowledge across all
service rep and customer search experiences and improves generative AI features for Einstein for Service.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition and other editions with the Knowledge add-on license. Zoomin
from Salesforce offers you Unified Knowledge and is available as a free trial for 90 days, including three connector instances to third-party
knowledge sources. After the trial, you can extend your free trial through your Salesforce account executive.
How: Before adding a connector, review any connector requirements in the Zoomin documentation. Then in Setup, go to the Unified
Knowledge page, click Add a Source, and then select MindTouch in the Zoomin tab.

661
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Unify Knowledge form Various Sources (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Zoomin Connector Preparation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Unified Knowledge Considerations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Unified Knowledge for Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get More Done in the Lightning Article Editor

The improved Lightning Article Editor helps you write knowledge articles more efficiently and take advantage of streamlined features
to create great content.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Spring '25, improvements to Lightning Article Editor include:
• Replacing placeholder text with field labels in the Find... and Replace with... fields, to enhance accessibility and user experience.
• Improving image resizing. You can now manually enter the dimensions.
• Enhancing image insertion by fixing the error message when you’re entering alt text and addressed intermittent freezing during
copying and pasting.
• Adjusting button sizes in the source code editor for better usability.
• Changing the dark mode button color to match the dark mode theme, which improves the overall user experience.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Unify Knowledge form Various Sources (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

662
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

Open Ingested Article Links from Third-Party Sources in Salesforce

You can now open links from articles ingested from third-party sources directly within Salesforce to avoid switching to another application.
This feature is available for articles ingested through these connectors in Unified Knowledge: Salesforce Knowledge Article, Zendesk,
Confluence Cloud Knowledge Article, Confluence Server Knowledge Article, ServiceNow Knowledge, Sitemap, Guru, Atlassian Jira Cloud,
Atlassian Jira Server, and Helpjuice.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition and all other editions with the Knowledge add-on license.
How: In Setup, go to the Unified Knowledge page, click Add a Source, choose a connector that matches your knowledge source, and
then click Next. On the Add a Source page, turn on Open imported inter-article links in Salesforce.

Note: If you change the name of your knowledge base, the links in the ingested articles break. To fix this, sync your knowledge
base name. Go to the Unified Knowledge page in Setup and click Sync KB Name.

Sync Options Enhanced for Your Knowledge Base

You asked, and we listened. With Force Sync in Unified Knowledge, you can now synchronize all your knowledge articles from the source
system, even if they haven’t changed since the last sync. Force sync ensures your knowledge base is up to date. If you want to sync only
the latest changes, use Incremental Sync. It’s scheduled to run periodically, but you can manually trigger it within that interval for faster
updates.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition and all other editions with the Knowledge add-on license.
How: To sync all knowledge articles from the source system, go to the Unified Knowledge page in Setup, find the connector that you
want to force sync. Next, click the Options icon, and select Force Full Resync. To sync only the latest changes, select Incremental Sync.

Note: With incremental sync, new articles or updates to existing content sync to your knowledge base. But changes to the
metadata of your articles might not always sync during incremental sync.

663
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Knowledge

Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool (Release Update)

To access Classic Knowledge, run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool. To prepare for the retirement of the Classic Knowledge data
model, upgrade to Lightning Knowledge. The upgrade offers enhanced article editing, improved search, and AI-driven features like
Einstein Article Recommendations, Einstein Search for Knowledge, and Agentforce Service Agents. After you migrate, you can still use
Classic Knowledge with the limitations described below. Orgs created after Spring ’25 have no access to Classic Knowledge.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, Essentials, and Professional editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’25.
Who: This change applies to all Salesforce customers using Classic Knowledge.
Why: The Classic Knowledge data model is no longer available starting with Summer ’25. Recent updates and features replace and
improve the Classic data model. After you run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool, you can take advantage of these Knowledge
improvements. You can still use Lightning Knowledge in Salesforce Classic, even after the update.
How: Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool before the deadline to migrate to the Lightning Knowledge data model. Learn How
to Migrate in Help.
After the migration tool is run, Lightning Knowledge works in these ways in Salesforce Classic.
• Because Lightning Knowledge uses record types instead of article types, you can no longer filter by article type.
• You can’t set a default record type in Salesforce Classic.
• Some actions, such as Change Record Type, aren’t available from the knowledge article record page in Salesforce Classic.
• Picklist values assigned to one record type in Knowledge aren’t visible on records in Salesforce Classic.
• If you have custom solutions for your Classic Knowledge implementation, such as Visualforce components or pages, refactoring
them to work with the Lightning Knowledge data model is sometimes required. Especially if your custom solution relies on article
types, refactor it to work with record types. Use a sandbox to test your custom solutions before running the migration tool in
production.

SEE ALSO:
Trailhead: Lightning Knowledge Migration
Salesforce Help: Custom Lightning Page Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

664
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Entitlements and Milestones

Alert Agents to Knowledge Articles with Einstein Knowledge Creation Async Notification
Agents can now respond to other cases while they wait for their knowledge article to be generated, which increases agent productivity.
Previously, agents were unable to act for up to 3 minutes while Einstein generated a knowledge article for their case.
Where: This change applies to Unlimited and Enterprise editions with the Einstein for Service add-on. Einstein for Service is available in
Lightning Experience.
Who: To use Einstein Knowledge Creation Async Notification, agents must have the Einstein Knowledge Creation permission sets, the
Knowledge User permission, the Manage Articles permission, and the Publish Articles permission.
How:When drafting a knowledge article, agents see an in-app notification on completion of the request. Additionally, agents receive
an email when your knowledge article has been drafted. Salesforce admins can disable desktop notifications in Setup under Notification
Delivery Settings. You can’t disable email notifications.

Entitlements and Milestones

Empower your service agents excel in their roles and optimize overall service operations. By automating closure of milestones through
flows and using custom Case Milestone report type, your agents can work more efficiently and effectively.

IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Rep Productivity and Reporting Accuracy by Automating Milestone Completion with Flows
Configure flows to set milestone completion criteria based on case status or other relevant fields. This makes sure that milestones
are auto-completed when the criteria is met, without any manual intervention.
Optimize Data Analysis, Reporting, and Decision Making with the Case Milestones Report Type
Create custom reports for cases with or without milestones with the Case Milestones report type. With the Case Milestones report
type, you can generate reports related to case milestone fields, which helps you track and analyze SLA violations and entitlements
efficiently. This report type also helps you analyze how an SLA has performed in the past, so you can make decisions more easily.

Boost Rep Productivity and Reporting Accuracy by Automating Milestone Completion

with Flows
Configure flows to set milestone completion criteria based on case status or other relevant fields. This makes sure that milestones are
auto-completed when the criteria is met, without any manual intervention.
Where: This change applies to Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Service Cloud.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Entitlement Process, and then select Entitlement Process. Create or open a
milestone from an entitlement process. Under Completion Criteria, create and save the flow. Go to Flow Builder to define completion
criteria and activate this action.

Optimize Data Analysis, Reporting, and Decision Making with the Case Milestones
Report Type
Create custom reports for cases with or without milestones with the Case Milestones report type. With the Case Milestones report type,
you can generate reports related to case milestone fields, which helps you track and analyze SLA violations and entitlements efficiently.
This report type also helps you analyze how an SLA has performed in the past, so you can make decisions more easily.
Where: This change applies to Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Service Cloud.

665
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Self Service

How: From the Report Types page, click a new custom report type by selecting Case Milestones as the primary object. Click Edit Layout
to edit its properties. To generate custom reports with this report type, select the report type you created with the Case Milestones
object and save.

Self Service
Help your customers help themselves. Check out new features that enable your customers to find what they are looking for faster.

IN THIS SECTION:
Resolve User Search Queries Faster by Using Context-Driven Conversations with Agentforce Service Agent
Empower your users who are in mission-critical situations with faster resolution to their search queries by passing site visitor’s search
context to Agentforce Service Agent in real time. Agentforce Service Agent automatically suggests answers to users’ search queries
by searching the knowledge base.

Resolve User Search Queries Faster by Using Context-Driven Conversations with

Agentforce Service Agent
Empower your users who are in mission-critical situations with faster resolution to their search queries by passing site visitor’s search
context to Agentforce Service Agent in real time. Agentforce Service Agent automatically suggests answers to users’ search queries by
searching the knowledge base.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web and all sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic
in Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the Einstein for Service, Einstein Platform, or Agentforce Service Agent add-on.
Why: Passing search context in real time enables Agentforce Service Agent to automatically suggest answers to user’s search queries,
providing a faster resolution and overall better support experience.
How: In the Experience Workspaces, go to the AI Experiences tile and turn on the Share search queries with Agentforce Service
Agent option. When enabled, users’ search context is passed to Agentforce Service Agent in real time. It then starts suggesting answers
to search queries.

Routing
Redirect more types of work with work reassignment. Route voice calls using Omni-Channel Unified Routing. Allocate rep capacity for
voice calls based on work status with status-based capacity.

IN THIS SECTION:
Reassign Work Items from Service Channels
Reps can already transfer Voice calls and Messaging sessions using Omni-Channel. To transfer other types of work with Omni-Channel,
instead of changing the Owner field of the work record, reps can now reassign the work to different queues, service reps, AI agents,
skills, and Omni-Channel flows. After the work is reassigned, Omni-Channel routes the work to the new destination. To improve
resolution time and improve SLA attainment, Omni-Channel places the reassigned work item higher in the queue, as if it had originally
started there. This feature is available in Enhanced Omni-Channel only.

666
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Routing

Manage Your Workforce More Efficiently with Agentforce

Supervisors can now chat with Agentforce (Default) on a desktop or the Salesforce mobile app to efficiently manage queues and
skills assigned to Omni-Channel users. Using the Update Omni-Channel User Configuration agent action, they can add or remove
queue assignments, add or remove skill assignments, and change skill levels for users. For example, to decrease wait time, increase
customer satisfaction, and increase operational efficiency, the supervisor can temporarily assign idle agents to the busiest queues.
Using the conversational interface, they explicitly identify skill levels by number and agents, skills, and queues by name. A supervisor
can modify only the Omni-Channel users, queues, and skills that are visible based on their supervisor configuration.
Perform Actions from More Flow Types
The Check Availability for Routing and Add Screen Pop flow actions are now available in all Salesforce flow types. Previously, they
were limited to Omni-Channel flows.
Increase Rep Productivity with Omni-Channel Sidebar
To view and quickly change their statuses, reps can now use the collapsed Omni-Channel sidebar. To notify reps about work that’s
been auto-accepted or resumed after being paused, these updated work items now appear in the Omni-Channel sidebar.
Other Enhancements for Routing Work to Agentforce Service Agents
The Route Work action now has a simplified process for routing work to Service agents using an Omni-Channel flow. To troubleshoot
why an Omni-Channel flow fails to route work to a destination, review the new, detailed error messages.
Eligible Salesforce Orgs Automatically Upgraded to Enhanced Omni-Channel
To take advantage of the latest work-routing features, some Salesforce orgs are automatically upgraded from Standard to Enhanced
Omni-Channel. To be eligible, your org must run on Hyperforce and can’t have Service Cloud Voice enabled. Because Enhanced
Omni-Channel doesn’t support standard messaging channels, your org can’t have any LiveChatTranscript records created 90 days
before the upgrade or any active Standard Messaging channels.
Route Voice Calls with Other Channels by Using Omni-Channel (Pilot)
Route voice calls alongside other Salesforce channel work items by using Omni-Channel Unified Routing. Turning on Unified Routing
enables skill-based routing and direct-to-rep routing for voice calls in an Amazon Connect contact center. Improve your contact
center to better handle use cases where reps work on different types of work items. Additionally, reps now have more than 20
seconds to accept a call.
Use Status-Based Capacity with Voice (Beta)
Allocate rep capacity based on the status of a rep’s accepted work. Status-based capacity was previously available for other service
channels, but it’s now available for Voice. Thanks to status-based capacity, voice calls are available on lightning apps with standard
navigation.

Reassign Work Items from Service Channels

Reps can already transfer Voice calls and Messaging sessions using Omni-Channel. To transfer other types of work with Omni-Channel,
instead of changing the Owner field of the work record, reps can now reassign the work to different queues, service reps, AI agents, skills,
and Omni-Channel flows. After the work is reassigned, Omni-Channel routes the work to the new destination. To improve resolution
time and improve SLA attainment, Omni-Channel places the reassigned work item higher in the queue, as if it had originally started
there. This feature is available in Enhanced Omni-Channel only.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Add the Reassign button to the record page. To reassign a work item, on the record page, a rep can click Reassign and select the
new routing destination.

667
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Routing

Tip: To reassign work items without a routing configuration to a skill or specific rep, you can now define a default routing
configuration for the service channel. For example, work that wasn’t originally routed by Omni-Channel doesn’t have a routing
configuration.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Reassign Work Manually (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Manage Your Workforce More Efficiently with Agentforce

Supervisors can now chat with Agentforce (Default) on a desktop or the Salesforce mobile app to efficiently manage queues and skills
assigned to Omni-Channel users. Using the Update Omni-Channel User Configuration agent action, they can add or remove queue
assignments, add or remove skill assignments, and change skill levels for users. For example, to decrease wait time, increase customer
satisfaction, and increase operational efficiency, the supervisor can temporarily assign idle agents to the busiest queues. Using the
conversational interface, they explicitly identify skill levels by number and agents, skills, and queues by name. A supervisor can modify
only the Omni-Channel users, queues, and skills that are visible based on their supervisor configuration.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Einstein for
Sales, Einstein for Service, or Agentforce Platform add-on. Setup for Agentforce (Default) is available on the desktop site.
To purchase the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Agentforce Platform add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Who: Agentforce (Default) is available to users with the Use Agentforce Default Agent user permission.
How: To enable supervisors to use Agentforce to change queue and skill assignments of Omni-Channel users, verify that skills-based
routing and Enhanced Omni-Channel is enabled, and then set up Agentforce (Default).
To change an assignment using Agentforce (Default), click , and then enter your request. For example, enter Remove Anelly
Jackson from the Phone and Chat queues.

668
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Routing

SEE ALSO:
New and Changed Standard Agent Topics and Actions
Einstein Features
Salesforce Help: Agent Action: Update Omni-Channel User Configuration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Perform Actions from More Flow Types

The Check Availability for Routing and Add Screen Pop flow actions are now available in all Salesforce flow types. Previously, they were
limited to Omni-Channel flows.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To add an action, drag the action from the Action menu to the flow, and then connect it.

669
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Routing

Increase Rep Productivity with Omni-Channel Sidebar

To view and quickly change their statuses, reps can now use the collapsed Omni-Channel sidebar. To notify reps about work that’s been
auto-accepted or resumed after being paused, these updated work items now appear in the Omni-Channel sidebar.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To view the updated work items, hover over the Case icon in the Omni-Channel sidebar. The inbox shows assigned work first,
then opened work, and finally paused work. Within each of those groups, the inbox organizes work items from most recently updated
to least, with the most recent ones appearing higher in the list.

To view and change their status, a rep can hover over the Status icon while the sidebar is collapsed.

670
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Routing

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use the Omni-Channel Component to Work with Customers (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Other Enhancements for Routing Work to Agentforce Service Agents

The Route Work action now has a simplified process for routing work to Service agents using an Omni-Channel flow. To troubleshoot
why an Omni-Channel flow fails to route work to a destination, review the new, detailed error messages.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To route work to an Agentforce Service Agent, modify the Omni-Channel flow. In the Route Work action, select Agentforce
Service Agent in the Route To field and the name of the AI agent in the Agentforce Service Agent field.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Route Work to an Agentforce Service Agent (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

671
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Routing

Eligible Salesforce Orgs Automatically Upgraded to Enhanced Omni-Channel

To take advantage of the latest work-routing features, some Salesforce orgs are automatically upgraded from Standard to Enhanced
Omni-Channel. To be eligible, your org must run on Hyperforce and can’t have Service Cloud Voice enabled. Because Enhanced
Omni-Channel doesn’t support standard messaging channels, your org can’t have any LiveChatTranscript records created 90 days before
the upgrade or any active Standard Messaging channels.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Understand Capacity Models (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Route Voice Calls with Other Channels by Using Omni-Channel (Pilot)

Route voice calls alongside other Salesforce channel work items by using Omni-Channel Unified Routing. Turning on Unified Routing
enables skill-based routing and direct-to-rep routing for voice calls in an Amazon Connect contact center. Improve your contact center
to better handle use cases where reps work on different types of work items. Additionally, reps now have more than 20 seconds to accept
a call.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Note: Unified Routing is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements - Salesforce.com or a
written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory. Use of this pilot
or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.
How: Contact your Salesforce account executive to request access to the pilot. In Salesforce, associate all Salesforce queues with one
contact center group, and then associate the contact center group with a Voice channel in an Amazon contact center. In Amazon
Connect, update your Amazon flows for inbound, outbound, and transfer scenarios. Then enable Unified Routing in the Contact Center
details in Salesforce.

SEE ALSO:
Route Work Items Through a Single System with Unified Routing for Voice (Pilot)
Salesforce Help: Comparison of Standard and Enhanced Omni-Channel (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Status-Based Capacity with Voice (Beta)

Allocate rep capacity based on the status of a rep’s accepted work. Status-based capacity was previously available for other service
channels, but it’s now available for Voice. Thanks to status-based capacity, voice calls are available on lightning apps with standard
navigation.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Note: Status-based capacity for Voice is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at Agreements -
Salesforce.com or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the Product Terms Directory.
Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion.

SEE ALSO:
Manage Capacity via Status-Based Capacity for Voice (Beta)

672
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Feedback Management

Feedback Management
Capture more data by saving responses from partially completed surveys. Enhance Net Promoter Score questions with customizable
labels for more meaningful feedback. Access survey data directly within messaging sessions and create tailored reports for deeper
insights.

IN THIS SECTION:
Improve Data Gathering with Partial Survey Responses
Capture responses from partially completed surveys. Participants can resume the survey from where they left off even if they don't
manually pause the survey when they abandon it.
Customize NPS Question Labels for Better Relevance
Tailor your Net Promoter Score (NPS) questions to better resonate with participants by customizing the labels for the lowest and
highest scores. Edit and translate the labels to more accurately describe the scores and enhance their relevance for survey respondents.
Access Customer Feedback Directly from the Messaging Sessions Page
Enhance service quality with access to survey invitations and responses within the messaging sessions page. Get a complete overview
of all responses in a customizable messaging sessions report.

Improve Data Gathering with Partial Survey Responses

Capture responses from partially completed surveys. Participants can resume the survey from where they left off even if they don't
manually pause the survey when they abandon it.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where
Feedback Management - Growth is enabled.
Who: To use partial surveys, users need the Salesforce Surveys Advanced Features permission.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Surveys. On the Surveys list view, click New. In the New survey window, select Save
partially completed survey. Click Continue to create the survey and share it with your participants.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Capture Responses from Partially Completed Surveys (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Customize NPS Question Labels for Better Relevance

Tailor your Net Promoter Score (NPS) questions to better resonate with participants by customizing the labels for the lowest and highest
scores. Edit and translate the labels to more accurately describe the scores and enhance their relevance for survey respondents.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

673
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Feedback Management

Access Customer Feedback Directly from the Messaging Sessions Page

Enhance service quality with access to survey invitations and responses within the messaging sessions page. Get a complete overview
of all responses in a customizable messaging sessions report.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Feedback Management -
Starter or Feedback Management - Growth is enabled.
Who: To access survey invitations and responses on the messaging sessions page, users need the Salesforce Advanced Features Starter
permission or the Salesforce Surveys Advanced Features permission.
How: From Object Manager, go to Messaging Session and select Page Layouts. Within the Messaging Session Layout, add Survey
Invitations and Responses to the Related Lists, and then save your work.
To create a report type to view survey responses, use Messaging Sessions as the primary object and relate it to Survey Subjects, Survey
Responses, and Survey Question Responses. Use this custom report type to create a report that shows survey responses.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Post-Chat Surveys for Messaging for In-App and Web (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

674
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Customer Experience Intelligence

Customer Experience Intelligence

Unify customer data, extract product insights, and improve data quality for personalized customer experiences. Gain insights into customer
engagement, identify top products, and refine product descriptions with the Customer Experience Intelligence agent topic.

IN THIS SECTION:
Unify Customer Data for a Holistic Profile
Create a single, coherent view for each customer by collating data from multiple sources. Use this comprehensive view to better
understand customer needs and deliver more personalized experiences.
Extract Product Insights from Customer Interactions
Identify product mentions and associated sentiments from customer interactions. Use the Product Insights Extraction AI service to
extract meaningful insights about your customers' feedback, pain points, and product issues.
Enhance Data Quality by Restricting the Length of Key Phrases
Extract the most relevant key phrases from customer conversations in Customer Experience Intelligence by setting a minimum key
phrase length, ranging from 2 to 5.
Improve Customer Experience with Email Insights
Capture detailed customer feedback via email, and derive actionable insights from email data. Use the data to improve service rep
interactions and empower decisions.
Optimize Engagement Efficiency by Analyzing Interactions Across Products
Analyze customer engagement across channels, focusing on interactions related to specific products, sentiment, key influencing
factors, contact reasons, and location. Use the new analytics dashboard to monitor trends in Net Promoter Score (NPS), Customer
Satisfaction Score (CSAT), and sentiment over time. Gain insights into the sentiment of interactions for specific products, identify
patterns in customer satisfaction, and refine your support strategy.
Boost Productivity by Creating Multiple Cases Simultaneously
Save time and effort by creating multiple cases directly from the Customer Intelligence Experience analytics dashboard. Act swiftly
on customer sentiments without going to the case creation page. Know the status of your case creation requests with instant
notifications.
Get a Comprehensive Summary of Customer Engagement, Experience, and Data
Gain a complete understanding of customer engagement across all channels with the Customer Experience Intelligence agent topic.
Use the Find Similar Interactions action to search interaction records by related terms or channels, including case, chat, email, surveys,
and voice, to generate summaries of key issues or reasons for contact. The Summarize Product Reviews action identifies top products
from a specified list based on customer feedback. The Enhance Product Description action compares customer reviews from various
channels with the product description to identify gaps and suggest more accurate and impactful descriptions.

Unify Customer Data for a Holistic Profile

Create a single, coherent view for each customer by collating data from multiple sources. Use this comprehensive view to better
understand customer needs and deliver more personalized experiences.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Data Cloud enabled and the
Customer Exprc Intel add-on.
Who: To unify profiles on the Customer Experience Intelligence setup page, users need the Scoring Framework Admin and Data Cloud
Admin user permission sets.

675
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Customer Experience Intelligence

How: From Setup, find and select Customer Experience Intelligence. Turn on Customer Experience Intelligence and start the
setup process. On the Channels page, turn on Unified Profiles.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Select Channels to Get Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Extract Product Insights from Customer Interactions

Identify product mentions and associated sentiments from customer interactions. Use the Product Insights Extraction AI service to extract
meaningful insights about your customers' feedback, pain points, and product issues.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Data Cloud enabled and the
Customer Exprc Intel add-on.
Who: To activate Product Insights Extraction on the Customer Experience Intelligence setup page, users need the Scoring Framework
Admin and Data Cloud Admin user permission sets.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Customer Experience Intelligence, and then select Customer Experience
Intelligence. Turn on Customer Experience Intelligence and start the setup process. On the AI Services page, turn on Product
Insights Extraction.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Select AI Services (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance Data Quality by Restricting the Length of Key Phrases

Extract the most relevant key phrases from customer conversations in Customer Experience Intelligence by setting a minimum key
phrase length, ranging from 2 to 5.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Data Cloud enabled and the
Customer Exprc Intel add-on.
Who: To set the minimum length of key phrases on the Customer Experience Intelligence setup page, users need the Scoring Framework
Admin and Data Cloud Admin user permission sets.
How: From Setup, find and select Customer Experience Intelligence. Turn on Customer Experience Intelligence and start the
setup process. On the AI Services page, select Configure Additional Settings to set the minimum key phrase length.

Improve Customer Experience with Email Insights

Capture detailed customer feedback via email, and derive actionable insights from email data. Use the data to improve service rep
interactions and empower decisions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Data Cloud enabled and the
Customer Exprc Intel add-on.
Who: To use email as a channel on the Customer Experience Intelligence setup page, users need the Scoring Framework Admin and
Data Cloud Admin user permission sets.

676
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Customer Experience Intelligence

How: From Setup, find and select Customer Experience Intelligence. Turn on Customer Experience Intelligence and start the
setup process. On the Channels page, turn on Email.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Select Channels to Get Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Optimize Engagement Efficiency by Analyzing Interactions Across Products

Analyze customer engagement across channels, focusing on interactions related to specific products, sentiment, key influencing factors,
contact reasons, and location. Use the new analytics dashboard to monitor trends in Net Promoter Score (NPS), Customer Satisfaction
Score (CSAT), and sentiment over time. Gain insights into the sentiment of interactions for specific products, identify patterns in customer
satisfaction, and refine your support strategy.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Customer Experience
Intelligence is enabled.
Who: The dashboard is part of the Customer Experience Intelligence Analytics app. To create the app, you need the CRM Analytics Plus
Admin and Customer Experience Intelligence Analytics admin permission sets. To use the app dashboards, you need the CRM Analytics
User and Customer Experience Intelligence Analytics User permission sets.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Customer Experience Intelligence, and then select Customer Experience
Intelligence. Go to the Customer Experience Intelligence Analytics section, and follow the instructions in the setup flow.

Boost Productivity by Creating Multiple Cases Simultaneously

Save time and effort by creating multiple cases directly from the Customer Intelligence Experience analytics dashboard. Act swiftly on
customer sentiments without going to the case creation page. Know the status of your case creation requests with instant notifications.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Customer Experience
Intelligence.
Who: To create the Customer Experience Intelligence Analytics app, users need the CRM Analytics Plus Admin and Customer Experience
Intelligence Analytics Admin permission sets. To use the app dashboards, Customer Experience Intelligence users need the CRM Analytics
Users and Customer Experience Intelligence Analytics User permission sets.
How: On the Customer Experience Intelligence Analytics dashboard, click Create Records. Add the context about the case records. To
assign the records, select a user segment or up to 20 users, or both.

Get a Comprehensive Summary of Customer Engagement, Experience, and Data

Gain a complete understanding of customer engagement across all channels with the Customer Experience Intelligence agent topic.
Use the Find Similar Interactions action to search interaction records by related terms or channels, including case, chat, email, surveys,
and voice, to generate summaries of key issues or reasons for contact. The Summarize Product Reviews action identifies top products
from a specified list based on customer feedback. The Enhance Product Description action compares customer reviews from various
channels with the product description to identify gaps and suggest more accurate and impactful descriptions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Data Cloud enabled, and
the Customer Exprc Intel and Einstein GPT Copilot add-ons. Setup for Agentforce is available on the desktop site.

677
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Service Adoption

Who: Agentforce is available to users with the Use Agentforce Default Agent user permission. To access the Customer Experience
Intelligence setup page, users need the Scoring Framework Admin and Data Cloud Admin user permission sets.

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Agent Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Service Adoption
Explore different service areas available to you based on business goals and more.

IN THIS SECTION:
Discover More Service Capabilities with My Service Journey (Generally Available)
Quickly see how to take your Service Cloud implementation from good to great. Explore different Service areas, like the Help Site or
Agent Console, and filter capabilities based on your business goals, edition, what’s new, whether it’s an Agentforce feature, and
more.

Discover More Service Capabilities with My Service Journey (Generally Available)

Quickly see how to take your Service Cloud implementation from good to great. Explore different Service areas, like the Help Site or
Agent Console, and filter capabilities based on your business goals, edition, what’s new, whether it’s an Agentforce feature, and more.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: Learn more about the service features available to you. With My Service Journey generally available:
• Explore a journey map of prescriptive service capabilities across foundation, optimize, and elevate phases. Capabilities are organized
into progressing initiatives to increase productivity and self-service, and completing them updates their status on the map.
• Click Contact Us to reach out to Salesforce with any questions about capabilities.
• View My Service Journey in 16 fully supported languages.
• Access My Service Journey in Developer edition.
Who: Available to all Service Cloud users.
How: Launch My Service Journey from the App Launcher. For enhanced exploration of Service Cloud capabilities, add My Service Journey
to your console app’s navigation menu. This pins capabilities as tabs for quicker access.

To explore the Journey Map, click Journey Map on the tab.

678
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Work.com

SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Service Cloud Functionality with My Service Journey (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Supported Languages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Work.com
Prepare your business, employees, and facilities. Respond to major events, such as the current COVID-19 crisis, with the apps and services
in Work.com.
See the Work.com release notes for the latest updates: Work.com Release Notes

Other Salesforce Products and Services

Get the latest information on these new features.

Customer Success Group

Salesforce Success Plans provide access to innovative tools, guidance, and support at every step of your journey. From building expertise
and driving product adoption, to troubleshooting and maintaining technical health, we help you fast-track your success. With each
release, we introduce new and better ways to help you see results from all your Salesforce products. Highlights for Spring ’25 include:
• Signature
– Customer Success Score enhancements
• Signature customers will now experience enhanced Product Adoption Score insights with richer data into license and feature
usage.
– Added License Usage Signals for:
• Communications Cloud
• Net Zero Cloud
• Media Cloud
• Education Cloud

679
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Other Salesforce Products and Services

– Added Feature Usage Signals for:

• Financial Services Cloud
• Health Cloud

• Technical Health Score has been expanded for additional products::

– Tableau
– Service Cloud Voice

– Proactive Monitoring Enhancements

• Signature customers can now access Proactive Monitoring on Help for Marketing Cloud Account Engagement.
• Signature customers have access to 4 new alerts for the Salesforce Platform.
– Service Cloud Omni Channel (2 alerts)
– Order Management System (OMS) (2 alerts)

• Premier:
– DORA Support
• Premier & Signature customers can now get help and mitigate risks with DORA incident assistance. Customers can contact
Salesforce Technical Support for DORA-related incidents and get the answers they need to stay compliant. They will experience
frequent updates from support, recaps of incident findings, and possible mitigation recommendations to help lower recurrence
risks so they have the information needed to report to regulators.

– New Virtual Interactive Workshops

• Customers can now learn directly from Salesforce experts in 90-minute workshops with demos, interactive guidance, and
step-by-step exercises in their practice environment.

– Enhanced Individual Expert Coaching Sessions

• Individual Expert Coaching Sessions have been streamlined so customers can simply reach out and connect with an expert.
Speak one-to-one with a Salesforce expert on any topic or product. Customers get personalized guidance and best practices
specific to their business use cases, challenges, and objectives.

– Success Reviews
• Premier customers can now request an ongoing review of their Success Path with insights to track their performance against
goals that were set during Onboarding. This review also includes an examination of actions taken based on recommendations.
During the review, customers have the opportunity to revise any goals or Success KPIs that have been established in the
Success Path. Premier customers can sign up for Success Reviews twice per year per contract per product.

Get to know Success Plans by visiting our overview page or taking the Salesforce Success Plans Trailhead module. Or visit the Salesforce
Help Portal for more resources. To learn more about how to maximize your Salesforce success, check out our Salesforce Customer
Success overview page.

Heroku
Heroku is a cloud-based application platform for building and deploying web apps.
For information on new features, go to the Heroku Changelog.

680
Salesforce Spring ’25 Release Notes Legal Documentation

IdeaExchange
Share ideas with the Trailblazer community and Salesforce product managers with the IdeaExchange. It features a search experience
that aids discoverability, more informative idea records, and search-as-you-type dupe detection to help avoid posting the same idea
twice. For more information, visit the IdeaExchange.

Legal Documentation
We made seasonal updates to Salesforce Legal Documents.

Trust & Compliance

For a complete list of changes to the Trust & Compliance documents related to this release, see the Salesforce Trust & Compliance
Documentation Change Log.

Business Associate Addendum Restrictions

For a complete list of changes to the Business Associate Addendum Restriction documents, see the Business Associate Addendum
Restrictions Change Log.

Acceptable Use Policy

For a complete list of changes to the Acceptable Use Policy documents, see the Acceptable Use Policy Change Log.

681